Eg6-200

FunctionCodeApplicationManuaf

-- ,
-

Process Control and

Automation Solutions
from Efsag Bailey Group
-wAnNlNGnoticesas usedin thisfrihhuatapplyto hazards 'Lsutt
or unsat6*p?ffiffi'touio in

e
personal
injuryor death.
cAUTloN noticesapply to hazardsor unsafepracticeswhich could resultin propertydamage.
NOTES highlightproceduresand contairiinfcirmationwhich assist the operator in understandingthe
informationcontainedin this manual.

INSTRUCTION
MANUALS
DONOTINSTALLMAINTAIN
OROPERATE THISEQUIPMENT WITHOUTREADING, UNDERSTANDING
AND FOLLOWING
TfE P_IOPER
BaileyControlsINSTRUCTIONS AND lrrtRtrtURt'S,
OfHeRWtSetru-
JURYOR DAMAGEMAYRESULT.
' j',
RADfoFREeuENcyTNTERFERENcE
Mosr ELEcrRoNlc
EQUIPMENT
ls rr,rily_eryg_ep
gy 5loto FREeuENcy
tNTERFERENoE
(RFt).
CAUTIONSHOULDBE EXERCISED WITH.REGARD ro rF|e UsE oF PoRTABLEcoMMuNlcarioruS
EQUIPMENTIN THEAREAAROUNDSUCFIEQU1PMENT. PRUDENTPRACTICC OrcTETCS THATSIGNS
sHouLD BE PosrED lN THE vtcrNrry oF THE EeulpMENT cAUTtoNrruoAeltrusr rHE usE oF
PORTABLECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT. T'
P O S S I B L EP R O C E S SU P S E T S
MAINTENANCE MUSTBE PERFORMED ONLYBY QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL
AND ONLYAFTERSECUR-
ING EQUIPMENTcoNTRoLLED By rHrS pRooucr.'nbJuslNc oR REMovtNG THts pRoDUcr
WHILE IT IS IN THE SYSTEMMAY UPSETTHE PROCESSBEINGCONTROLLED. SOME PROCESS
U P S E T SM A Y C A U S EI N J U R Y O RD A M A G E . .
,
AvERTtssEmehir
M A N U E L SD ' O P E R A T I O N
NE PAS METTREEN PLACE REPAREROU FAIREFONCTIONNER CE MATERIELSANS AVOIRLU,
COMPRISET SUIVILES INSTRUCTIONS REGLEMENTAIRES
DE BaileyControGfOUTE NEGLTGENSE
A CET EGARDPOURRAITETREUNEcAUSE D'AccIDENToU DE oeFnlIIRI'IoE DU MATERIEL.

PERTURBATIONS DE LA FREQUENCERADIOPHONIQUE
LA PLUPARTDES EQUIPEMENTS ELECTRONIQUES
SONTSENSIBLES AUX PERTURBATIONS DE LA
FREQUENOERADlo. DES pREoAUTToNSDEVRoNT ernE pnlsEs LoRS DE L,ulLlsATtoN DE
MATERIELDE COMMUNICATION LA PRUDENceexlae QUE LES pnFcnurloNs A PREN.
PORTATIF.
DRE DANSCE CAS SOIENTSIGNALEESAUX ENDRoITsvoul-us DANSvolneuslrue.
PERTESROCEDERENVERSEMENTS
L'ENTRETIEN
D O I T E T R E A S S U R EP A R U N P E R S O N N EQ U A L I F I EE T E N C O N S I D E R A T I OD
NE
UASPECTSECURITAIREDES EQUIPMENTSCONTROIESpnn cE pRoDUtT. L'ADJusrrvrerrrferloU
UEXTRATIONDE CE PRODUITLORSQU'ILEST INSEREA UN SYSTEMEACTIFPEUTOCCASIONNER
DEsA'couPsAUPRocEDE
coNTRoLE. pnoceoEs,cEs n-coupspEUVENT
suR cenrnirrrs
EGALEMENT
OCCASIONNER
DES DOMMAGES
OU AIESSUNCS.

NOTICE
The information
contained
in thisdocument
is subjectto changewithoutnotice.
BaileyControlsCompany,its affiliates, employees, and agents,and the authorsof and contributors to
thispublication specificallydisclaim
alltiabilities
andwarra-nties, expressandimplied(including warran-
ties of merchantabilityand fitnessfor a particularqurpose),for the accuracy,currency,completeness,
and./orreliability
of the informationcontainednereinino/o/for the fitness6i particutar useano/oi
for.the performance of.any materialand/ore_quipment "iy riitn tfr" userofloi in
selectedin wholi or p"ri
relianceuponintormation containedherein.Sbtection of materials is at the solerisk
of the userof this publication. "nO/or"qiipr"nt
This documentcontainsproprietary information of BaileyControlsCompany,ElsagBailey,Inc.and is
issuedin strictconfidence.
lts use,or reproductionfor use,for the reverse development
or
manufacture of hardwareor softwaredescribedhereinis prohibited. ",riin"ering,
No part"ot tnis Iocumenimay be
photocopied or reproduced withoutthe priorwrittenconsentof BaileyCohtrolsCompuny.
 Preface

Functlon codes are the base of controlftrg the INFI 9Oo sys-
tem. Functlon codes €rre control algorfthms that reslde tn
actlve modules. Advanced PID loops, batch control, math
functlons, and more are all posstble wtth functlon codes. In
addition to control schem€s, functlon codes deflne control
elements such as M/A stattons and devlce drlvers ln consoles
and stand-alone controllers.

The system engineer deslgns the module conftguratlon using

software sueh as computer alded destgn (CAD) or C utilities
program (CUP). The conflguration ls then downloaded by
using a eonflguratlon devlce such as an englneerlng work sta-
tion or operator interface stattoll.

Thls instmctlon ltsts all the avatlable functlon codes and

explalns the speclfications and outputs of each code. To use
thJs lnstnrctlon, the system englneer or techntclan needs to
have a knowledge of how to conflgure INFI 90 dlstrtbuted con-
trol systems.

Thts document replaces I-E96-2OOAI .

@ INFI 90 ls a reglstered trademark of Elsag Batley Process Automaflon.

l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995
List of EffectivePages

Total number of pages ln thts tnstmctlon ls 995. conststlng of the follourlng:

Pa,ge No. Change Date Page No. Change Date

Preface 15 FebruarJrf995 53-f through 53-6 15 Febnrar5rf995
Ltst of Effectlve Pages 15 FebruarJrf995 54-L througfr 54-3 l5 February f995
v through :oc 15 February 1995 55-1 througfr 55-12 15 February 1995
I through I 15 February 1995 56-f througfir 56-2 15 Febnrary f995
l-I through f-6 15 February 1995 57-L Resenred 15 February 1995
2-I through 2-2 t5 February 1995 58-f througfr 58-5 l5 Februty 1995
3- I through 3-5 15 Febnrary f995 59-f through 59-2 15 Febmary 1995
4-L through 4-4 15 FebruarJr1995 60-1 through 60-3 15 February 1995
5- I through 5-4 l5 FebruarJr1995 61-1 througfr 6L-2 15 February 1995
6- I through 6-2 15 FebruarJr1995 62-l througfl 62-7 15 February 1995
7-L through 7-3 15 February 1995 63-1 through 63-2 l5 Februuy 1995
8- I through 8-2 15 FebmarJrf995 eFl througfir M-z l5 Februaey f995
9- I through 9-3 15 Febnrary 1995 65-l througih 65-3 15 Febrt-ary 1995
f O- f through LO-z 15 FebruarJrf995 66-1 througfir 66-3 15 February f995
1 1- I through Ll-2 15 FebruarJr1995 67-L Resenred 15 February 1995
Lz-L through L2-2 15 February f995 68'1 througfir 68-3 l5 February f995
f 3- I through l3-2 15 February 1995 69-f through 69-2 15 Febnrary 1995
14-r 15 February 1995 7O-L through 7O-3 15 February 1995
15- 1 through L5-2 15 February 1995 7L-L through 7I-4 15 FebruarJrf995
1 6 -I 15 FebruarJr1995 72-L througfr 72-3 15 February 1995
L7-L 15 February f995 73-L through 73-2 15 Febnrary 1995
18- I 'througfr
through I8-3 15 February 1995 74-L through 74-3 15 February 1995
19-1 f9-5 15 February 1995 75-I through 75-3 l5 February f995
2O-I through 2O-2 15 February 1995 76-I through 76-2 15 February 1995
zl-l through 2l-7 15 Febmary f995 77-L through 77-2 15 February f995
22-I through 22-7 15 February 1995 78-L through 78-g 15 February f995
23-L through 23-7 15 Febnrary 1995 79-l through 79-3 15 Februa{r f 995
24-L through 24-3 15 February 1995 80-1 through 80- 15 15 Febmary f 995
25-L through 25-2 15 Febnrary 1995 81-f through 81-3 15 February 1995
26-L through 26-2 15 Febnrary 1995 82-L through 82-B 15 February 1995
27-L through 27-2 15 February 1995 83-f through 83-3 15 February f995
28-L through 28-z 15 Febmary 1995 84-f through 84-z t5 Febnrary 1995
29-L through 29-2 15 February 1995 85-1 through 85-4 15 FebnrarJr1995
30- f throug;h 30-4 15 February f995 86-f through 86-4 15 FebruarJr1995
3 1- t through 3 1-2 15 FebrLrary1995 87-t 15 Febnranl 1995
32-l through 32-2 15 February f995 88-1 through 88-4 15 FebruarJr1995
33-r 15 February f995 89-1 15 FebmarJr1995
34-l through 34-3 15 February f995 90-1 through 9O-5 15 February f995
35- I through 35-2 15 February 1995 9l-1 through 9l-3 15 February 1995
36- t through 36-2 15 FebruarJrf995 92-l through 92-2 15 February 1995
3 7- L 15 February 1995 93-1 through 93-z 15 FebruarJr1995
38- t through 38-2 15 February f995 94- I 15 February 1995
39- r 15 February 1995 95-1 through 95-4 15 FebruarJr1995
40- I through 4O-2 15 February 1995 96-f througfr 96-3 15 February f995
4I- I through 4L-2 15 February 1995 97-1 through 97-z 15 February 1995
42-L through 42-2 15 February f995 98-1 through 98-5 15 February f995
43- I through 43-2 15 February 1995 99-1 through 99-4 15 February 1995
44-L through 44-2 t5 February f995 fOO-l through fOO-2 15 February 1995
45-I through 45-3 15 Februarlr 1995 rol-r 15 Febnrary 1995
46-l through 46-3 15 February 1995 LO2-l through lO2-4 15 February f995
47-l through 47-4 15 Febnrary 1995 103- t through 103-4 15 February 1995
48- I Reserved 15 Febmary 1995 104-f through LO4-4 15 February 1995
49-l through 49-2 15 February 1995 105-l through 105-3 15 February 1995
50-I 15 Febnrary 1995 r06-f through fO6-4 15 February f995
5I-I 15 February f995 tO7- I througfi 107-5 15 February 1995
52-I through 52-2 15 February f995 f 08- 1 througlr LO8-2 15 February f995

15 FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 List of Effective Pages (continued

Page No. Cbaagle Date Cbange Date

109-1 through rO9-3 15 FebruTy f995 166-1 166-4 15 February 1995
l tO-I through 110-5 15 February f995 167- I 167-2 15 February f995
111-1 through t 11-4 15 February f995 168-1 r68-6 15 February 1995
112-l through lL2-4 15 February f995 169- 1 169-2 15 February 1995
I l3- I through f l3-3 15 February f995 170- 1 r70-3 15 February 1995
114-1 through 114-3 15 February 1995 L7L-L T7L-2 15 February 1995
115-1 through f f5-5 15 Febnrary f995 L72-L 15 February 1995
I 16- I through r 16-3 15 February f 995 L73-T 15 February 1995
I 1.7-I through I 17-3 15 February f995 L74-l 15 February 1995
I 18- I through I 18-3 15 February f 995 L75-L throug[ 175-9 15 February 1995
119-1 through 1f9-3 15 February 1995 176- I through 176-8 15 February 1995
L?O-L throug[ 120-3 15 Febmary f995 I77-l through 177-17 15 Febrtrary 1995
121-1 through l2L-2 15 February f995 178- t through f78-5 15 February 1995
L22-L through L22-2 15 February 1995 L79.L through f79-8 15 Febmary f995
f23-f throug[r 123-23 15 February 1995 180- I through f8O'4 15 February f995
L24-L through L24-6 15 February f 995 r 8 r - 1 through 181-l f 15 February 1995
L25-I through 125-3 15 February 1995 r82-I throug;h L82-7 L5 February 1995
f26-1 through 126-4 15 February f995 183- l through f83-5 15 February 1995
L27-L through 127-2 15 February f995 r84- I through f84-6 15 Febnrary f995
L28-L through 128-2 15 February f995 185- I through f85-4 15 February 1995
129-I through 129-14 15 February f 995 186- I througfir 186-4 15 February f995
130-1 through 130-6 15 February f995 L87.L through 187-5 15 February 1995
13t-1 through fgf-4 15 February 1995 r88-r through f88-5 15 February 1995
132-1 through 132-4 15 February 1995 r89-r Resenred 15 February 1995
133-1 through 133-6 15 February f995 190-1through f90-2 15 February 1995
134-1 through f34-9 15 Febnrary f995 1 9 1 - l through 191-2 15 February 1995
135-1 through f 35-r I 15 February f995 L92-L through 192-2 f 5 February f995
136-1 througb 136-8 15 Febnrary 1995 193- l through 193-3 15 February f995
t37-t 15 February 1995 194- I through 194-15 15 February 1995
138- r 15 February f995 r95-r Resenred 15 February f995
139- I through 139-4 15 February 1995 196-1 Reserved 15 Febnrary 1995
140-1 through 140-5 15 February f995 L97.L Reserrred 15 February f995
141-1 through f41-5 15 February 1995 198-1 15 February 1995
L42-L through 142-2 15 February f995 199-I 15 Febmary f995
143- 1 through L43-4 15 February 1995 200- I through 2OO-4 15 February 1995
t44-L 15 February 1995 zOL-T through 2OI-3 15 February 1995
145- 1 through L45-2 15 February f 995 202-L through 2A2-8 15 February 1995
146- I through 146-4 15 February 1995 203- 1 througfr 203- f I 15 February 1995
L47-L through L47-4 15 February 1995 204-l Resenred 15 February 1995
148- 1 through L48-7 15 February f995 205- r Reserved 15 February 1995
r49- 1 through L49-4 15 February 1995 206- I Resenred L5 February 1995
150- I through 150-4 15 February 1995 207-l Resenred 15 February 1995
15 1- 1 through 15 l -2 15 February f995 208- 1 Reserved 15 Febmary 1995
L52-L through 152-3 l5 February 1995 209-r Reserved 15 February 1995
153- l through 153-6 15 February f995 2ro-r througfr 210-6 15 February 1995
f 54- f through f 54-5 15 February f 995 2Lt-l through 2Ll-24 t5 Febmary 1995
155- I through 155- l3 15 Febnrary f 995 2L2-L through 2L2-4 15 Febnrary 1995
156- I through 156- f z 15 Febnrary f 995 2L3.L Reserved 15 February 1995
L57-L through 157-7 15 February f995 2L4-L Reserved 15 February 1995
r58-I through f58-4 15 February 1995 2 1 5 -r through 215-6 15 February 1995
159- I through 159-2 15 February f 995 2 1 6 -r through 216-6 15 February 1995
160-I through f6O-7 15 February f 995 2r7-l through 2L7-7 15 February f995
16l-1 through f61-8 15 February 1995 2 r 8 - 1 Reserved 15 February 1995
162-1 through L62-2 15 February 1995 2 1 9 - 1 through 2L9-7 t5 February 1995
163-1 through 163-2 15 February 1995 220-r through 220-4 15 February f995
164-I through L64-4 15 February 1995 2 2 L . L Resenred 15 Febmary 1995
165- I through 165-3 15 February 1995 222-L Resenred 15 February f995

l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995
List of Effective Pages (continued) o
PaSe No. Change Date PaSeNo. Changc Date
223-I Reserved 15 FebruarJrf995 239-f Reserved 15 February f995
224-L Reserved l5 February 1995 2&-L Resenred 15 Februar5rf995
225-L Reserved 15 Febnrary f995 241-l through 24L-2 15 February 1995
226-l Reserved 15 February 1995 242-L througlh 242-9 15 February f995
227-L Reserved 15 February 1995 243-L through '!2,43-2 15 FebruarJr 1995
228-L Reserved 15 February f995 244-L through 24'4-2 15 February 1995
229-L Reserved 15 February f995 245-L througfr 245-3 l5 February f995
230- f through 230-4 15 February f995 246-L througtr 246-2 15 FebruarJr 1995
23I- I through 23L-7 15 Febmary f995 A-1 through A-14 15 February 1995
232-L Reserved l5 February 1995 B-l through B-12 15 February 1995
233- I Reserved 15 February f995 C-l througfir C-lf 15 February f995
234-L Reserved 15 February 1995 D-l through D-2 15 February f995
235- I Reserved 15 February f995 E-l through E-9 15 FebruarJrf995
236- t Reserved tS February 1995 F-r 15 February 1995
237-L Reserved 15 February 1995 G-f through G-24 15 February f995
238- 1 Reserved 15 February 1995

When an update ls recelved, tnsert the latest changed pages and dlspose ofthe superseded pages.

NOTE:On an updaiepage,the changedtext or tableis indicatedby a verticatbar in the outer marginof the
pageadjacentto the changedarea.A changedfigureis indicatedby a verticalbar in the outer marginnextto
the figurecaption.The datethe updatewas preparedwill appearbesidethe pagenumber.

15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Tableof Gontents
Page

FUNCT'ONCODES
F\rncttonCodeI - F\rnctlonGenerator ...................1-l
F\rnctlon Code 2 - Manual Set Constant (Slgnal Generator). ......2'l
F\rnctlon Code3 -Leadllag. ................3-l
Ftrnctlon Code4 - Rrlse Posltloner............ .............4-l
Ftrnctlon Code5 - PulseRate.......... .....5-f
Functlon Code6 -H|4|4/I.onILlmlter....... ................6-f
Functton Code7- SquareRoot........... ....................7-I
F\rnctlon Code8 - Ratellmlter....... ......8-l
Functlon Code9 - AnalogTlansfer........... ..............9-1
Function Code l0 - High Select ..........10-l
Functlon Code lt - Low Select ...........l1-I
F\rnctlon Code 12 - Htgh/Iaw Compare.... ............12-l
F\rnction Code 13 - IntegerTtansfer ...13-I
Function Code 14 - Summer (4-bnput) ..................I4-l
Functlon Code 15 - Summer (2-Input) ..................15-f
FunctlonCode16 - MulUply.. .............16-1
F'unctionCode17 - Dlvlde..... .............17-I
FunctlonCodel8 - PID Error Input......... .............18-l
Functlon Code 19 - PID (t\t and SP) ...19-l
Functlon Code20 - Indlcator Staflon...... ..............20-f
FunctionCode2l -MllStatlon (Basrc)........ ........21-l
F\rnctlon Code22-M/AStatlon (Cascade) ...........22-l
F\rnctlon Code23 -M/AStailon (RaUo) ................23-f
Functlon Code24-Adapt ..................24-l
Functton Code25 -Andog Input (SamePCUNode).. ...............25-f
F\rnction Code26 -Analog Input/Ioop .................26-l
Fnnction Code27-Analog Input......... .................27'l
tr\rnctlon Code 28 -Analog Output (SamePCU Node) ..............28-1
F\rnctlonCode29 -Analog Output...... .................29-f
Ftrnctlon Code3O-Andog D<ceptlonReport....... ...................30-f
Functlon Code3l -Test 9uality...... ...31-l
F\rnctlon Code 32 -Tllp ...32-l
FuncttonCode33 - Not.......... ............33-f
FunctlonCode34-Memory.. .............34-I
FunctionCode35 -Tlmer...... .............35-l
Functlon Code36 - OuallfledOR (8-Input) ............36-f
F'uncttonCode37 -AM (2-Input) ......37-1
Functon Code38 -AM (4-Input) ......38-l
Functlon Code39 - OR (2-Input) ........39-f
F\rnction Code40 - OR (4-Input) ........40-t
F\rnction Code41 - Dtgttal Input/Controlvray/ModuleBus ........... ............41-l
Function Code42 - Digital Input/loop ..,..............42'l

l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995

Table Of ContentS (continued)

Page
FU NCTION CODES (mntinued)
F\rnctlon Code43 -TCS Dlgttal Input......... ......... 43-f
Functlon Code44 - TCS Dtgtal Output....... .........4-l
Functlon Code45 - Dtgttal E:rcepflonReport....... ...................45-f
Functlon Code46 - Dlgttd Input Ltst.. .................46-l
Functlon Code47 - Andog Input kcepflon Report INAIVIMOI).. ................47-L
Functlon Code48 - ResenredFor Future Use........... ..............48-f
Function Code49 - Digttal Output Buffer........ .....49-f
F\rncuon Code5O- Manual Set Switch ................5O-l
FunctionCode5l - Manual Set Constant................ ...............sl-f
Function Code52 - Manual Set Integer. ...............52-f
Functlon Code 53 - Executlve Block (COM .......... 53-f
Function Code54 - ExecuttveBlock (NLMMOI)......... .............54-t
FunctionCode55 - HydraulicServo......... ............55-l
Functlon Code56 - ExecutlveBlock INAIVIMOf)......... .............56-l
F\rnctlon Code57 - ReservedFor F\rture Use ........... ..............5Z-I
Function Code58 -TIme Delay (Analog..... ..........S8-l
Functlon Code59 - DigitalTransfer............. ........ sg-f
FunctlonCode60 - Group I/O Deftnttlon............. .................. 60-f
FunctionCode61 - 811nk....... ............6l-f
FuncUonCode62 - RemoteControl Memory ........62-I
Function Code63 -Analog Input List (SamePCU)......... ......... 63-l
Functlon Code64 - Digital Input Ltst (SamePCU)......... ......... 64-f
Functlon Code65 - Dtgttal Sumwlth Ga1n.......... ...................65-f
F\rnctlon Code 66 - Analog TFend ....... 66-f
Function Code67 - ReservedFor F\rture Use ........... ..............6Z-f
Function Code68 - RemoteManual Set Constant ...................68-l
Functlon Code69 -TestAlarm ..........69-1
Function Code7O-Andog Polnt Defln1tton............. ...............ZO-l
Function Code7l - ExecutlveBlock NAI\,IMO2IIMAMM03................ .........7t-l
FunctionCode72-Andog SlaveDeffnit1on............ ................22-l
F\rnction Code 73 - Calibration .......... Zg-l
F'unctionCode74 - Callbraflon Command ...........24-l
Function Code75 - Analog Calibration Status....... .................Zb-l
Function Code76-ThermocoupleTemperahrre ...26-I-
Function Code77 -AndogPolntServlceStatus ...22-l
FunctionCode78 -Tfend Deflnition.. .................. Z8-I
FunctionCode79 - ControlInterfaceSlave......... ................... Zg-f
FunctionCode80 - ControlStation....... ...............go-f
Functlon Code8I - Executlve ............8f -l
Function Code82 - SegmentControl ...................82-l
FuncUonCode83 - Digttal Output Group ............8g-f
Function Code84 - Digital Input Group ...............B4-l
Functlon Code85 - UplDown Counter..... ............85-f
FunctlonCode86 - ElapsedTlmer........ ...............86-f
Functlon Code87 - DIS Interface ......82-L
Function Code88 - Dtgttal Logic Station ..............88-f
Function Code89 - Iast 81ock......... .. 8g-f
Ftrnctlon Code9O- ExtendedExecutlve... ............gO-f
FunctlonCode9l - BASICConffgurationIMFC/MFP)............. ..................91-t
Functlon Code 92 - Invoke BASIC ...... g2-t
F\rnction Code93 - BASICReal Output ................g3-f
Functlon Code94 - BASICBooleanOutput...... .... glFf
Function Code95 - Module Status Monttor..... ..... gb-l

VI 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B

 Table of Contents (conrinue
Page
FUNCTION CODES (antinued)
F\rncttonCode96 - RedundantAnalogInput......... .................96-f
Funcflon Code97 - RedundantDtgltal Input ........ ..................97-r
Functlon Code98 - SlaveSelect .........98-I
Function Code99 - Sequenceof EVentstog............ ................99-f
I\rnctlon Code IOO- Dlgltd Output Readback Check........ .... l00-l
FunctlonCodelol - DccluslveOR............ .........1O1-l
F\rnction Code lO2 - Rrlse Input/Per1od................ ...............102'l
Functton Code IOB- Rrlse Input/Flequency.......... ..............103-1
Functlon Code lO4 - hrlse Input/Totallzaflon ....104-I
Ftrncflon Code lO5 - DcecutlveBlock (IMIMMO2) .................105-f
FtrncttonCode lO6 - SegmentControl81ock......... ................106-l
Ftrnctlon Code lO7 - Group I/O Defrnlflon (IMLMM02)............... .............107-1
Functon Code lO8 - ElrtendedBecuttve [IMLMMO2). ...........1O8-l
Functlon Code 109 - Rrlse Input/Duradon .........109-l
F\rnctlon Code 110 - Rung (5-Input) .lf0-1
F\rnctionCodeI Il - Rung (IO-Input) .................111'1
Functlon Code 112 - Rung (20-Input) .................112-1
F\rnction Code I l3 - ASCII Strtng Descriptor. .....113-1
FunctionCode114 - BCD Input......... ................11&l
Functton Code ll5 - BCD Output ....115-I
F\rnction Code I 16 - Jump/Master Control Re1ay......... ........116-I
FuncUonCodel17 - BooleanRectpeTable...............i........... ..................117-1
Function Code I f8 - Real RectpeTab1e......... ...... 118-l
Function Code ll9 - Boolean Stgnal Multlplecer .119-l
F\rnctlon Code I2O - Real SlgnalMultipleKer.......... ....'..........120-1
F\rnctlon Code 121 - Analog Input/INFI-NET........... .............121-t
Functlon CodeI22 - Dlgltal Input/INFI-NET.......... ..............122'l
Function Code 123 - DevtceDrlver ... 123-f
Ftrnction CodeL24 - SequenceMonltor..... .........124'l
F\rncttonCode 125 - DeviceMonltor...... .............125-I
Functlon Code 126 - Real Slgnal Demultlplexer ..126-l
Functlon Code 127 - Plant loop Gateway Node Map.. ......--...-127'l
Functlon Code 128 - Slave Ddault Deftnltton... ...128-f
Functton Code 129 - Mulfl-State DerrlceDrlver ... 129-t
Function Code 130 - Plant toop GateurayExecuflve... ...........130-1
F\rnctlon Code 131 - Plant loop GatemrayPolnt Deffnlflon .....131'1
Functlon Code 132 - Analog InPut/Slave ............ 132-f
Functlon Code 133 - Smart Tfansmltter Deffnltton ............... I33- 1
Functlon Code 134 - Multt-sequence Monltor... ..134-l
-
Ftrnctlon Code 135 Sequence Manager.... ......... f35-f
Function Code 136'Remote Motor Control ........136-f
Functlon Code I37 - C and BASIC Program Real OutputWlth Quallty .....137-1
F\rnctlon Code 138 - C or BASICProgramBooleanOutputWltJl gudtty...................' 138-1
Functlon Code 139 - PasslveStatlon Interface ....139-1
Functlon Code l4O - Restore ............140-1
FuncUonCode 141 - SequenceMaster....... .........141-1
Function Code L42 - SequenceS1ave......... ...-.-...L42-l
-
FunctionCode143 InvokeC............... .............143-t
Functlon Code 144 - C A11ocat1on............... .......:L44-l
Funcflon Code 145 - Flequency Counter/Slave ...145-l
F\rnc8onCode146- RemoteI/O Interface................ ............146-l
Functlon Code 147 - RemoteI/O Def1n1flon............... ..--....-.-I47-l
Functlon Code 148 - Batch Sequence .................148-l

l-Eg6-2008 15FEB1995 vii

Table of Contents (continued)

Page
FU NCTION CODES @ontinued)
Function Code 149 -Andog Output/Slave 149- I
Function Code l5O - Hydraulic Senro Slave 150- I
Function Code 151 -Text Selector 1 5 1 -I
Function Code 152 - Model Parameter Esttmator 152-L
F\rnctlon Code 153 - ISC Parameter Converter 153- 1
Functlon Code 154 -Adaptlve Paraneter Scheduler 154- I
Ftrnctlon Code 155 - Regresslon 155-1
FuncUonCode 156 -Advanced PID Controller.............. 156- I
Function Code 157 - General Dtgltal Controller.. L57-L
Functlon Code 158 - Enhanced Analog PolretDelinltlon........... 158- I
Functton Code 159 - PolynomlalAdJustment 159- 1
F\rncUon Code 16O- Inferential Smittr Controller.. 160- I
FuncUon Code 161 - SequenceGenerator 161-r
Function Code 162 - Dtgttal SegmentBuffer........ 162-1
Funcflon Code 163 -Andog SegmentBuffer 163- I
Function Code 1&l - SegmentControl UMCOMO4) l&[- I
Functlon Code 165 - MovingAverage........... 165- I
Functlon Code 166 - Integrator 166- I
Functlon Code 167 - Polynomlal L67-L
Function Code 168 - Interpolator 168- I
Function Code 169 - Matrir(AddlUon 169- I
Function Code I 7O- MatrircMulttpltcatlon ............... L7O.L
'
Functton Code l7I -Tr€onometric...... L7T-L
F\rnction Code 172 - E:qponent1a1............... 172-L
F\rnction Code 173 - Power...... L73-L
Function Code 174 - togarithm L74-L
Function Code I75 - SequenceExecutive... L75-L
Function Code 176 - SequenceStation (CSC)......... T76.L
Function Code 177 - DataAcquisltionAnalog ............. 177-L
Function Code 178 - Data Acqulsttton Analog Input/loop 178-1
Functlon Code 179 - EnhancedTtend........ L79-L
Functlon Code 180 - Bateh Input/Output.............. 180-r
Func$on Code 181 - Batch Station (CBC)........ l8I-1
F\rnction Code I82 - Analog Input Defintflon .......... 182-L
FuncUonCode I83 - Batch Executlve(CBC)......... 183- I
FunctionCodel84-FactoryInstrumentationProtocolHarrdler..... 184- I
Function Code 185 - Digital Input Subscrtber.......... 185- I
Function Code 186 -Andog Input Subscriber.......... 186- r
Function Code 187 -Analog Output Subscriber 187- I
FuncUon Code 188 - Digftal Output Subscriber. 188- I
Functlon Code 189 - ReservedFor Future Use ........... 189- I
Function Code l9O - User Deflned Functton Declaration 190- I
F\rnction Code 191 - User Deflned FtrnctlonOne........... 191-1
Functlon Code I92 - User Deflned FunctionTWo T92-L
Functlon Code 193 - User Deflned p2fs lmport 193- I
Functton Code 194 - User Deflned Data Export 194- I
FuncUonCode 195 - ResenredFor Futtrre Use ........... 195- I
Functlon Code 196 - ReservedFor Future Use ........... 196- I
Function Code 197 - ReservedFor Future Use ........... L97-L
Functlon Code 198 -Auxiliary Real User Deffned Funcflon.... 198- I
Functlon Code I99 -Au:dliary Dtgital User Deffned F\rncflon 199- I
F\rnction Code 2OO- INFI-NET to Plant Loop local Tfansfer Module Executlve

vill 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008

 Table of Contents (continued

Page
FUNCflON CODES (antinued)
F\rnctton Code 2Ot - Data Polnt Deflnttton ..........201-l
Functton Code 2O2 - INFI-NET to INF'I'NET Remote Tlansfer Module Elrecutlve
Block (INIITO2) ...............2O2'l
Func0on Code 2OB- INFI-NET to Plant Ioop Remote Tlansfer Module Executtve
Block (INIPTI021.............. 2O3'L
Functlon Code2oz1- ResernedFor F\rture Use........... ...........2O4'L
Functlon Code205 - ResenredFor Future Use........... ...........205-l
I\rnctton Code2O6- ReservedFor Ftrhrre Use........... ...........206-1
FtrrrcttonCode2O7- ResenredFor Ftrture Use........... ...........2O7-L
F\rnctlonCode2OB- RcsenredFor l\rhrre Use........... ...........208-l
F\rnctlon Code209 - Reserrred For F\rhrreUse........... ...........209-f
F\rnctlon Code210 - Sequenceof Events Slave......... ............210-1
Funcuon Code211 - DataAcquisltton Dtgttal .....211-l
Ftrnctlon Code2l2 - DataAcqulsltton Dlgltal Input/Ioop .....212'L
Function Code2I3 - ReservedFor F\rtr.rreUse........... ...........213-l
F\rnction Code214 - ResenredFor Futr.rreUse........... ...........214'L
Function Code215 - EnhancedAndog SlaveDeflnltlon ............... ...........215-l
Functlon Code 216 - Enhanced Analog Input Dellnltton ........2f6-f
F\rnction Code2LZ - Enhanced Calibraton Comrnand.. ........2I7'L
F\rncttonCode218 - ReservedFor F\rture Use........... ...........2I8-l
F\rnctionCode219 - CommonSequence ............219-l
Function Code220 - Batch Histortan .................22O-L
FuncUonCode22l - ResenredFor Future Use........... ...........221'I
Function Code222 - ReservedFor Ftrture Use........... ...........222-L
F\rnction Code223- ResenredFor F\rture Use........... ...........223'L
Functlon Code224 - ResenredFor Ftrture Use........... ...........224'L
F\rnctlon Code225 - ReservedFor l\rture Use........... ........,..225'L
F\rnction Code226- ResewedFor F\rture Use........... ...........226-L
Function C&e 227 - ReservedFor F\rture Use........... ...........227'L
Function Code228- ReservedFor Future Use........... ...........228-L
Fnnctlon Ccdie229- ReservedFor Ftrture Use........... ...........229-l
Function Code23O- StrateglcIoop ControllerUO ...............230-l
Fnnction Code 231 - Strategic Ioop Controller Statlon. ....-...-231-L
F\rnctlon Code232 - ReservedFor F\rhrre Use........... ........,..232'L
F\rncttonCode233 - ResenredFor Ftrture Use........... ...........233-1
Ftrnctlon Code234 - ReservedFor F\rture Use........... ...........23+l
Function Code235 - ResenredFor F\rture Use........... ...........235-l
F\rnction Code236 - Reserrred For Ftrture Use........... ...........236-l
Functlon Code237 - ResenredFor F\rture Use ........... ...........237'L
F\rnctionCode238 - ReservedFor F\rture Use........... ...........238-f
Funetlon Code239 - ReservedFor Ftrture Use........... ...........239-f
Ftrnctlon Code24O- ReservedFor F\rture Use........... ...........24O-L
Functlon Code 24I - DSOE Data Interface SEM to MF? ........241'L
Functlon Code242- DSOEDlgtal Event Interface.... ............242'L
Function Code243 - ExecuttveBlock (INSEMOf) ..................243'l
I\rnction Code244 -Addresstng Interface Deflnltton... .......,.-24'L
Funetlon Code245 - Input Channel Interface .....245'l
F\rnctionCode246 -THgger Deffnitlon.. .............246'L

AppENDtXA- LISTOF FUNCTIANCODES.. ................4-1

rNTRODUCTION............. ...A-l
CROSS REFERENCE - NUMERICAL........... ...........A.1

l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995

Table of ContentS (continued) I
Page
APPENDIX A - LIST OF FUNCTION CODES (continued)
CROSSREFERENCE-AI,PHABETICAL...... ............A.4
CROSSREFERENCE- CATEGORIZAIION... ...........A-6

APPENDIXB - MODULEMEMORYUTILIZATION ........B-I

rNTRODUCTION............ ....8-1

C - FUNCT|ION
APPENDTX CODEEXECUTIONT'MEg....... ............C-|
FUNCTIONCODEDGCUTIONTIMESIN MICROSECONDS .....C-I

APPENDIXD - POINTQUAL'TY DEFIN'T'ON......... ...... D-|

GENERAL DESCRIPTrON............. ........D-t
INDTVIDUALAIVALOG INPUTS .............D.1
GROUPAITALOG rNpUTS...... ...............D-1
GROUpArfArSc OUTPUTS .................D-l
DTGTTALt/O............ ..........D-t
MODULEBUS r/O.... .........D-l

APPENDIXE - MODULE FUNCTIONBLOCKS ..............E.1

GENERALDESCRIPTION............. ........E.I
AI{AIOG IVIASTERMODULES ..............8-z
CoNTROLLERMODULES ....................8-2
LOGICN4A,STERMODULES .................E-4
MULTI-FUNCTION PROCESSORS AriD CONTROLLERS............. .................E-6
coMr\4ANDCONTROLLERS............. ....8-7
STRATEGTC LOOPCONTROLLERS............. ...........E-8

APPENDIXF - CONSOLEENG'/NEERruG
UNITDESCR/PNONS ................,....F.1
ENGINEERING UNIT DESCRIPTIONS TABLES ............... .......... F.I

APPENDIXG - MODULE STATUS ...............G-|

GENERALDESC2PTrON............. ........c-t
AI\ALOGI\4ASTERMODULES ..............G-3
PI"ANTBUSI,OOPMODULES ..............G-4
INFI-NET NETWORKPROCESSINGAI{DSUPERIOOPBUS MODULES. ......G-5
Pi.ANTI-OOPTO PI"AI{TLOOPCOMMUNICATIONS .......... ........G.6
PIANT I.OOPTO COMPUTERCOMMTJMCATIONS - COMPUTERIN]|EREACECOMI\4AIVD . G-7
INFI-NET TO COMPUTERCOMMUMCATTONSAI{D SEgUENCE OF EVENTSMOMT'OR.. c-8
CoNTROLLERMODULES............... .....c_9
I.OGICIIL\STERMODULES ...............G-1O
MULTI.FUNCTION, MULTI.PROCESSOR.STRATEGICIOOP AI{D COMI\4AND
CoNTROLLERS............. ..c-t2
MULTr-FUNCTION PROCESSOR MODULES............... ............c-r4
I'CALTRANSFERMODULES ...........G-17
REMOTETRAIVSFER MODULES ........G.r8
PROCESSINTERFACEMODULE .......G.rg
CoMMUNICATIONPROCFSSOR MODULES........... ................c-20
CONFIGURATIONAI{D TUMNG, AIVDAT{AI,OGOUTPTJT. .......G.27

15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 List of Figures
No. Tltle Page

l. INFI 90 SystemArchttecture......... ...................3

2. FuncttonCode7, SquareRoot.......... ...............5
3. F\rncttonCode80, Statlon...... .......5
4. FtrncUonCode7 wlth a BlockAddress of 1OO.... ........'........6
5. Functlon Code8Owlth a BloclcAddressof 1O5.... ...............6
6. Unking FtrnetlonBlocksTogether ....................8
l-1. Graph of InputVersus Output ....L'2
L-2. SecflonedInput'Output Graph .....................1-2
r-3. Functlon Generator Used for Programmlng Set Polnt or Btas .............1-4
L-4. Funcflon GeneratorUsed as a NotseF11ter......... ..............1-4
l-5. F\rnctton Generator Used to Obtatn an Adaptlve Galrr for a Nonltnear kocess......l-5
l-6. Tlvo Functton GeneratorsUsed to ActrlerreGreater Cunre Reso1ut1on....................1-5
r-7. Four F\rnction GeneratorsUsed to ActrleveGreater Cunre Rasoluton ..................1-6
2-L. F\rnctlon Code2 Used as a Scaler..... ............2-2
2-2. Functlon Code2 Used for a Set Polnt. ...........2-2
3 -1 . Functlon Code 3 Used as a Lag Ftlter ............3-4
3-2. FunctlonCode3 Usedas a LeadFllter......... ...................3-4
3-3. Function Code 3 Used as Lag to De}ay Decreasestn Alr F'low on lpad Decrease.....3-4
3-4. FuncUon Code 3 Used as al*ad,/Lagto Compensate for Drum Level
Shrlnk a:rd Swell Due to Changestn SteamF1ow.......... ....................-3-5
4-L. PULPOSControllinga Rrlse ValvePosltloner........... ........4-4
5 -1 . FtrncUonCode5 Used to CountTotal Pounds of Flow...... ..................5-4
6 -1 . Functlon Code6 Used to Llmtt a Btas Range ..................-6-2
6-2. FuncUonCode6 Llmiflng Input to a Dlvlder.... ................6-2
7-L. Converttrrg a Pressure Stgnal to a Flow Rate Ustng F\rnctlon Code 7 ........-..--.......7-2
7-2. Converting a Nonltnear Pressure Input to a Llnear Flow Output -........7-3
8- r. Fnnctton Code 8 Used to Ltmtt the Rate of Change of the Set Polnt ....8-2
9 -l . Uslng tlle AnalogTlansfer Functlon as a Memory F\rnctton ...............9-3
9-2. Uslng Functlon Code 9 for a Manual to Auto Transfer Sudtch ............9-3
lo- 1. Uslng F'uncflon Code l0 to Memorlzea Hlgh Vdue Over a Perlod of T1me...........f 0-2
1r-1. Using Function Code 11 to Memorlzea lowValue Over a Pertod of Tlme ............11'2
L2-1. Fnnctton Code 12 Used as a StgnalMonttor .................-12'2
L2-2. Functlon Code 12 Used to Monltor the Rel,aflonshtpBetweenTwo Stgnds ....-....-12'2
l3-1. Fnnctlon Code 13 Used ln a Dynanfc Adaptlve Control Strateg1...................-.--.L3-2
1 5 -1 . UsrngFtrnctlon Code 15 as a Scder. ...........L5'2
18-1. Scalingthe Output Uslng S5.............. .........f 8-2
L8-2. F\rnctlon Code 18 Appllcation ... f 8-3
l9-1. PID (PVand SP)...... .................. r9-4
L9-2. PID Controlwlth Deviation............... ..........I9-5
20-L. Tlpical Indlcator Statlon Conflguratron............... ...,.....-2O'2
zL-L. Baslc Statlon wlttr OutputTracldng ...........-21-7
22-L. Simple CascadeStatlon ...........-22-7
23-L. Ratio Station with OutputTracklng .......,...-23-7
24-r. Creatlon of a Sltding Ltmiter or Indexwlth Function Code24..... .-..--24'2
24-2. Funcgon Code24 Used toAchieve Varlable Controller Proportlonal Constant.....24-3
24-3. Uslng Functlon Code24 to SelectOne of TWoInputValues..................--............24'3
25-L. Ustng Functton Code 25 to Acqulre an Andog Slgnal from Another Module.. ...,..25'2
26-L. Using F\rnctton Code 26 to Acqutre anAndogVdue fromAnother Node ...........-26'2
27-L. Conflguratton Requlred to Test Polnt Qualtty .-.-....-..--..-.27'2
28-L. ConllgurationRequtredto Test Polnt Quality ....-.-...,.....-28'2
29-L. Conflguratlon Requlred to Test a Polnt gudlty...... ......-.29'2
30-1. SampleAnalog E*ceptlon Report Input wlth Alarm and Exceptlon Reports.........3O-4
3r-1. Uslng Fturctlon Code 3l Block to Test guallty of Analog and Dlgltal Inputs.........31-2

I-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 xi
List of Figures (conrinued)

No. Tltle Page

34- 1. Using F\rnctton Code 34 for Regplatory Control ............ 3+3

35-l. Output Shapes Obtafned ln the Three Tlming Modes ....35-2
36-r. Function Code 36 Used for Signd Regulatlon Based on the Number of
PumpsOperattonal ..................36-2
4l-1. ConffguraUonRequiredto Test Potnt Qualfty ................41-2
42-L. ConffguraUonRequtred to Test Point Qua11ty.............. .. 42-2
43-L. ConffguraUonRequiredtoTest Polnt Qualty ................43-z
44-L. Conflguratton Required toTest guality...... . M-2
45-L. ExampleDtgtal ExcepttonReport Confl9uraflon.............. ...............45-3
46- l. ConffgurationRequiredtoTest Polnt Qualfty ................46-3
47-L. Sample Analog E:rception Report with Alarm and Excepflon Reports .................47-4
49- l. Use of Digltal Output Buffers to Create Hardware-F\rncflon Block Interf,aces.....49-2
52-L. Functlon Code 52 Used to Dynadcaly Modlff an Integer Parameter.................52-2
58- 1. Flr<edTIme Delay E:<anple ....... 58-3
58-2. Ftrncflon Code58 Used forVarlableTlme De1ay......... ...58-4
58-3. First Order Slmulated Responseto Tlrplcal Tlme De1ay......... ........... 58-5
58-4. ResponseSimulatlon Conffguratlon ............58-5
59- 1. Digltal Tlansfer Functlon Block Usedin a SafetyConllguratton.........................59-2
6l-I. Blink Functton Block Used forAlarm Indlcaflon ............... ..............6f-2
62-L. ConsoleRemote Control Memory Element ..62-9
62-2. Internal Inglc of RCMB1ock......... ..............62-6
62-3. logtc and Ctrcuttry of RCM Block Used for Motor Control...... ..........62-z
65-1. Example of Function Code 65 Used to Deterrrlne Flow Rates From a Dtgltaf
Indicatlonof Pump Status........ ..................65-3
66-1. Configurationfor Tlendlng an Analog Potnt......... ......... 66-3
66-2. ConffguraUonfor Ttending a Digftat Po1nt.......... ...........66-3
68-r. Function Code68 Conflguredfor OperatorInterventlon ..................68-2
68-2. RMSCElement ...... O8-g
72-L. Daisy ChainArrangement of Termination Unlts.... ........72-g
76-r. Termination Unlt Connectlonsto Analog Master Modules ...............76-2
77-L. Point ServtceStatus ConffguraUon............. ..................77-2
80- r. Flow Dlagram of SAC Statlon Operatlon from Power Up to Normal Operatlon... 8O-I t
80-2. Control Statlon Element..... .... 8O-f2
80-3. Single Input, Stngle Output Control Loop wlthAuto BSpass 8O-f s
85-1. UplDown Counter MaintenanceRequlrementAlert......... ...............85-4
86-1. ElapsedTtmer DetermtntngAverage PoqrerConsumpton OverTIme ...........:..... 86-4
88- l. Tlpical Dlgitat Logic Station Conflguratlon............... .... 88-4
90- 1. ConflguraUonRequtredfor PC VlewTtme Synchront2aflon................................ 9O-5
91-1. Tlpical BA,SICConftguratlon............. .........9f-3
92-L. TJrpicalBASICConflguratton............... .......92-2
93-1. T5pical BASICConflguratton............... .......93-2
95-l. Equivalent Circult for Functlon Code95..... ..................g5-4
96-l. REDAI Block to ChoostngBetween RedundantAnalog Inputs. ......... 96-3
97-L. Function Code 97 Used to Choose BetnreenRedundant Dlgltal Slgnds
Basedon Module Oualig .........97-2
98-I. ConfiguraUon Used to Monitor Redundant IMDSMOSModules Conflgured
for 16 Outputs..... ..98-3
98-2. Conffguration Used to Ttansfer Control When Andog Inputs Go Bad................. 98-4
98-3. Slave Select Block Controlltng anAnalog Output .......... g8-5
I 00-l. Internal Iog[c of a Digital Output ReadbackCheck F\rncflon Code..................lO0-2
110-1. Four Input loglc Rung f lO-4
I 10-2. AND-ORlogicRepresentatonofLadderRungtnF)gurellO-1............,........... llO-4

xtl 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008

 List Of Figures (continued

Page

I 14-1. Binary Codtngof Inputs.... ......114'2

I 1 5 -l . Real to BCD ConverstonFormat....... .........115-2
LL5-2. E:rarnpleof Binary Converslon ..................ll5-3
116-1. Jump/MCR Block Used ln tadder Program.... .............I f 6-3
123-1. DerrlceDrlver Element ............123-4
L23-2. SarnpleBatctrApplicaflon........ I23-1O
123-3. Partlttonlng of Sample Control S5rstem .... 123-1f
123-4. Control DevlcesAssoctated wlth Drample Batch Reactor 123'12
L23-5. Lnglc Diagram for Example Batch Reactor...... 123'14
123-6. ArudXaryIngtc for Step f h Bcanple. ..... f 23-16
123-7. Au:oltaryIogtc for Steps 2 and 3......... .... 123-18
123-8. eu:cliary loglc for Steps4 and 5......... .... 123-19
L23-9. Au:dllary toglc for Steps 6 and 7......... ....L23'2O
123-lO. Aurdliary Ingtc for Step 8........ L23'2O
1 2 3 - 11 . RectpeTables for Example Process...... .-..L23'21
L23-L2. Module Configuration togtc for Fflxed-SequenceBatch Control E:rample
with On-llne Ednrng 123'23
124-L. Iogc Dfagran Showtng Sequence Monltor Block Used tn a Batdr Operatlon ....L%L'3
125-L. DevtceMonltor Blockused to Control Mulflple Field Dev1ces............................125-3
126-1. Representatton of OutputValues from a Reaf $gnd Demuldplener Block
tn the BCD Mode. .L26-3
L26-2. Real Slgnal Demulflplarer BloclcUsed for ReclpeSelectlon .....-......L264
129-1. Relaflonshtp BetweenFeedbackbrputs and FeedbackMasks........ .129-3
129-2. Four-Digtt FeedbackMask......... ....--..,.--..-L29'4
129-3. Auto/Manual Status Monltored wtth TestAlarm Bloclc........ ........-.129'4
129-4. MSDD Element..... f29-10
129-5. Sample Faceplate 129-13
129-6. MSDD Block ControlliragaVartable SpeedMotor........ 129-L4
130-1. Plant Loop to Plant lnop GatevrayArchltecture ...........130-3
132-L. Llnklngturalog Input/Slave Blocks and Optlonal SmartTlansmltters..............132-4
133-1. SmartTransmttter Deffnltlon Exarrple ......133-6
134-1. loglc Diagram Showlng Mulflple Sequence and Audllary loglc Connections ....L34.4
135-1. SampleConflguratlonUslngSequenceManager81ock......... ..........135-3
L35-2. Appllcatton Requlrtng ParallelAddiflon through Common Headers .................. f 35-6
135-3. Maln Sequenceloglc for ParallelAddltlon of A and 8............... .--..,L35'7
135-4. Matn SequenceInglc for Slmultaneous Addttlon of A and B........ ... 135-8
135-5. SequenceManager logtc Used to Control Common HeaderA... ......135-9
135-6. SubsequenceLogic to Add A to KI through Common Header ......... f 35-9
L35-7. AppltcaEon Requirlng Request Prlodttdng. 135-10
r35-8. Loglc Used to Implement RequestPriorlty....... 135-f I
136-1. Baslc Lglc of RemoteMotor Control 81ock......... .........136-2
136-2. DevlceDriver Element """""" 136-4
139-1. PasslveStatton Interface E)<ample..... ...-....139-4
140-1. Ustilg the RestoreB1ock......... .140-5
1 4l - 1 . ParallelSequenceMaster to Slave .............141-4
L4L-2. Irgtc Diagram of Ustng SequenceMaster Bloch tn Batch ...............141-5
143-1. WatchdogTlmerConffguratfon................ ..143'2
143-2. Entry tn C Uflllty Program ...... f43-3
146-1. FlemoteI/O InterfaceExample.... ..............146-3
146-2. RemoteI/O InterfaceConffguraUon............. ...............146'4
147-L. RemoteI/O Deftnnion Example ................147'4
148-1. Batch SequenceExample..... .-.L48'7

I-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 xilr

 LiSt Of FigUreS (continued)

No. TITIE Page

1 4 9 -l . LinldngAnalog Output/Slave Blocks. .......149-4

I 53- 1. Bastc Self-Tlrning Conffguradon f5g-6
1 5 4 -l . Advanced Self-Tuning ConflguraUon wlth Deaddrne Schedultng and
Adaptlve Gain/t4g Schedultng t54-s
I 55- 1. Contours of Equal m Plotted ln ttre p - q Plane. .........f85-lf
L55-2. Effect of Data StorageTechnlque. ............fSS-12
1 5 6 -l . Adrranced PID OutputE:rample IS&z
156-2. ReverseMode Classlcal Controller ...........f 56-10
156-3. ReverseMode ClasstcalController - Detall.... .............f56-10
156-4. ReverseMode Nonlnteracflng Controller.. f56-lg
156-5. ReverseMode Nontnteracting Controller - Detatl ...... ..156-19
156-6. ReverseMode Manual ResetPID Controller.............. .fS6-fE
156-7. ReverseMode Manual Reset PID Controller - Detall ...156-16
156-9. Single Input/Single Output Control Lop UshgAPID .............. ....156-IZ
157-L. Internal Iogtc Representation for the General Dlgltal Controller 81oc1c.............15Z-6
I 60-l. ISC Controller Process Model Parameters . 160-9
L60-2. Uslng External Reference ln Cascade Control f 60-4
160-3. ISC Structure.............. t6O-6
160-4. Ustrg the ISC wlth the M/A Statlon f60-z
1 6 1 -I . SequenceMonltor Block Used to Control a Batch kocess 16l-9
161-2. sequence Generator Blocks Ganged ln serles and tn parallel to provlde
24 Stepsfor 16 Outputs..... .... I6f-4
I 6 1-3. sequence Generator Blocks Ganged ln Series and ln parallel to provtde
Automatic Timed Stepping.... . f 6f -E
I 68-l. Five-By-Five Array Used by Interpolation Block L6g-z
168-2. Approdmation of Cunre Using Interpolator 16g-6
168-3. Approdmation of Cunre Using F\rnction Generator ..... f6g-6
I 69-l. MatrlxAddition.............. ........f69-2
L70-1. Internal Operation of Matrix Multipllcaflon Block ....... IZO-B
I 76-1. SequenceStatton Block Dcample.... f Z6-9
177-I. Irrrel Detectlon Alarms...... ....LZZ-]-L
L77-2. Module Accessto Stahrs .......1T2-L4
L77-3. Normal, Variable and DevlatlonAlarms ,..LZZ-L6
L77-4. Data Acqulsltion Analog Example.... ........122-Lz
r78-L. Module Accessto Status ........ l7g-4
L79-r. Sampleand AverageAnalogTtend with Reset......... .... t7g-g
L79-2. Sampling and Average and Sum DigitalTrend ]-7g-g
179-3. sampling Minlmum and MaximumTlend of control staflonwtth Reset r7g-g
180-1. Batch I/O Examp1e............... . l8O-4
181-1. Batch StatlonBlock Examp1e............... .... lgf-7
L82-r. Analog Input Definition wtth PolynomtalAdJustment .. lg2-6
182-2. Andog Input Deflnttions wlth RemoteCold Juncflon Inputs... ....... lg2-z
I 84- 1. FIP Input/Output Subscrtber Vartable Tlpes. f g4-s
L84-2. Llnking FIP Functton Codes ... fg4-6
I 94- 1. Application Program Control Example ...... 194-6
194-2. Application Program Control wtth ConsoleAccess..... .. 194-6
194-3. Application Program Control wtth ConsoleAccessand Echo... ....... lg4-z
L94-4. Block Control Example 194-g
194-5. Block Control with ConsoleAccess f g4-g
194-6. Text String Element ..............f94-IO
202-1. Timing Diagram of Enable Stg;nalsin Half Duplex Mode......... .......202-4
202-2. Redundant IINIFO2 with Control of External Equlpment tn Half Duplex

xiv 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B

 List of Figures (continued

No. Page

Operailon.. ...........202'5
202-3. INITO2 Module Dual Channel fn FUll Duploc Operatlon ................202'6
203-L. Thrng Dtagram of Enable Sl€nals ln Half DuplercMode......... ........203-8
203-2. Redundant IMPTO2 Modules wtt} Control of Brternd Equlpment ln Half
Duplex Operatron.. .................203-9
203-3. IMPTr02Module Dual Channel ln Full Duplex OperaEon .............203-10
?TL-L. Fnncttons Drecuted wlthtn the DADIG 81ock......... ......2LL'4
2rt-2. Input Selecflontogtc......... .....2LL'4
2LL-3. Input Condltionlng Inglc ........2f f -8
2rl-4. hrlse Mode Input and Output...... .............211-9
2LL-5. Tlmed Out Mode,Input PulseGreaterthan ReferenceMatctrTIme.................211-lO
2rl-6. fimed Out Mode. Input Rrlse Less than ReferenceMatchTlme ...211-10
2Ll-7. InputhrlsekssthanMa:dmumRrlseWtdth ............2l1-ll
2Ll-8. Input Rrlse Greater than Ma:clmumPulse Wtdth .......2f f -I l
2LL-9. Digttal Ftlter Mode Input and Output ......2L1'L2
211-10. Alarm Processlng In9c.......... .................21f -I4
zlr- I 1. Digltal StateAlarmModeInputandAlarm. ...............2fI-f6
2LL-T2. DeadbandlnrgAlarmModelnputandAlarm.. .............21l'f6
zLL-13. Timed Out Alarm Mode Input and Alarm (SlO less than td...... ....2L1'17
2Ll-L4. Match TIme Greaterthan ConditlonTtme (SfO gleater than td......................21L-LT
zLr- 15. Alarm FtlterModeInput and A1arm........... ................21l-I8
zLL-16. Return Alarm and De-Alarml.ogic......... .211-tg
2LT-L7. Alarm SuppresslonLog1c......... 211-19
2L5-L. Incal ColdJunctlon Compensaton ........-..215-3
215-2. RemoteCold Junctton Compensatlon ........215-5
2 1 9 -1 . Example ProductlonTtaln ......219'5
2L9-2. Tlptcal Batch SequenceControl...... .-..-.-..-2L9-7
220-L. Example of BHIST F\rnctton Block Conffguratlon ....-...-220'4
230-1. Strateglc Ioop Comrnand I/O Block Conflguradon ......230'4
23L-L. SLC Statlon Conflguratron............... .........231-5
E- I. NLMMOI Normd and Inferred Output Conflgr:ratton ...... F-5

l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB199s )ff

 ffi
List of Tables
No. nile Page

1. BlockAddresses tr a Multl-Ftrncflon ProcessorModule...... .................. 6

2L-1. Staflon Output Descrlptlon ......21-4
23-1. Staton Output Descrlptlon ...... 2g-5
24-L. ConverslonsPerformedby tlre Adapt B1oc1c......... ..........24-2
34- 1. Power Up or Module ResetTluth Table .......3t1-2
34-2. Normal OperatlonTluth Table..... ..........,....9+2
37-1. 2-Input AIrIDTFrth Table........ ................... g7-l
38-l. 4-Input AIIIDTFuthThble........ ................... g8-l
39-l. 2-Input ORTruthTable ........ ...99-l
40- l. 4-Input ORTruthTable ........ ...40-f
5 3 -1 . Swltch A,ssignmentson Controller Module PCB A.ssembltes............ . Eg-s
5 5 -l . Module Status Btt Map ............ES-s
55-2. LlDTStatus....... ... 55-6
55-3. Position FeedbackOptlons..... .. SE-8
6l- 1. Truth Tbble for OutputValues ............. ...... 6l-l
62-1. RCM Input to Output Relattonshlp .............62-f
69-l. Outputs fromTestAlarm B1ock......... .........69-2
74-L. Conflguraflonand Thnlng Module ResponseTab1e......... .................24-g
74-2. Operator InterfaceStaton ResponseTable ........ ...........74-g
76-L. CorrespondenceBetweenRTD Palrs and Block Numbers............ ....76-2
80-l. Tlack Behaviorof tJleStation Block...... ...... 8O-E
g:z-t. Example of Total SegmentCheclcpolntUttltzatton ......... 82-s
90-l. AvatlablePCVlewTag Narnes....... ..............gO-s
101-1. ExcluslveORTtuth Tab1e......... ................l0l-l
I 07- 1. I/O Capabllitles of IMLMMO2Modules ...... tOT-2
I 1 3 -1 . ASCII ConverslonChart ......... lfg-g
I 1 4 -1 . BCD to RealConverslonFormat. ..............ll4-2
115-1. Module Output Capacity.... .... tf5-2
1 2 3 -1 . Effect of DerrlceDrlver Overrlde Permisslve/State Spec1flcaflons......................I2g-2
L23-2. RecipeContents.... ................129-22
1 2 6 -1 . Integer ModeInput to Output Relattonshtp .................L26-2
L26-2. Each Group of Outputs RepresentsTWoReal Di$ts........ .............. 126-9
126-3. Sample Outputs of a Real Slgnd Demultiplacer B1ock......... 126-4
I 29-1. Truth Table for Selecflon of Output Masks tn Auto Mode......... ...... 129-9
1 3 0 -l . Port One and PortTtvo CommunlcationCharactedsilcs ................fgO-6
131-1. Block Numbers and Addressesfor ExcepUonReports to Consolesand
InterfaceUnits......... .............. fgl-f
1 3I - 2 . Memory Usagefor Points Receivedand PotrntsSent........... ............ fgf -g
1 3 3 -l . Speciflcation53 EngineertngUnits. .......... fgg-g
1 4 0 -1 . SaveAction ..,....... l4O-2
L40-2. Functlon Code l4O Addittonal I{\RAI\{ and Checkpotnt Utlllzatton B5rteSl"€.... l4O-4
140-3. Functlon Code l4OAdditional I{VRAI\{ and Cheekpotnt Uflltzation
for Enhanced Tlend Functlon Code 179 ... t4O-s
141-1. Output Descdptions............... l4l-4
L47-r. Functlon Blocks Supported by RemoteI/O Deflnt0on B1ock......... . 147-s
1 5 1 -1 . Console Color Codes l5l-2
r 6 1 -1 . Deffnltion of Step Inputs for SequenceGenerator Bloekc....... ........ 16f-6
I 64- l. Permitted Input and output Funcflon Blocks wtthln the Ftrst segment.... ....... lil-2
I 68- 1. Interpolator Block Determines Steam koperttes ......... 168-4
L 7 7- L . 9ualiW State OverrldeBit Map........... ...... tZT-s
L77-2. 16 Bit Map........... |ZT-A
L77-3. 16 Bit Binary Number..... .......127-5

XVI 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008

 List of Tables (continued

Page

177-4. Btt Map..... ...........177'8

L77-5. AlarmThresholds 177-lO
L77-6. Output N Blt Map.. 177-Lg
177-7. OutputN+l BltMap 177-Ls
I 78- 1. Status Btts at Curent BlockAddress................ .,........17&2
178-2. ExtendedStatus Btt Map..... ...178-3
L78-3. Dcample DAAINGSettlngs .......L78'5
1 8l - 1 . Batch Staflon ID Numbers ......181'9
l8l-2. ASCII Step Name Descrlptton ..181-9
181-3. SpeclflcatlonEngineertngUnlt Descrlptton.............. .. f 8f-IO
l8l-4. RecipeName and Number Descrlption .... l8I-11
1 8 5 -1 . Input Group Identtffcatlon ......185-3
186-1. Input Group ldenttllcaflon ...... f 86-3
L87-L. Output Group Identlffcadon .-.187'3
1 8 8 -1 . Output Group IdentlflcaUon ...188-3
1 9 4 -r . Input Control Spectflcatlon<S2> -..-.-..-...-.194-2
194-2. Input Status Spectflcatlon<S3>....... .........194-3
194-3. Block Status Output N+1........... 194'4
L94-4. TEICTSTR Element OperatlngCondlflons. ..................f94-13
2 0 1 -1 . Block Numbers for INF'I-NET ...2OL'2
202-L. Speclflcatton Setdngs for INFI-NET to INFI-NETTlansfer Module Exectrtve
Block ln Ftgure202-2 Conffguraflon............. ...---........202'5
2A2-2. Spectffcation Settlngs for INFI-NET to INFI-NETTlansfer Module ErccutFe
Blockln ngure 2O2-gConffguratton ...--...-2M-7
203- 1. Speciflcatton Settlngs for INFI-NET to Plant Ioop Tlansfer Module ExecuWe
Block tn Flgure 203-2 ConffguraUon............. ..............203-8
203-2. Spectflcatlon Settf:rgs for INFI-NEI to Plant Ioop TtsansferModule Executlve
Block in Flgure 2Og-g Conffguratlon .......209-fO
zLl-L. Sl Status Blt Map 21f-5
2Ll-2. Valid Combinatons for Sl ......2f 1-5
2l 1-3. PermitInput Blt MaP........... ...21I-6
2Ll-4. SelectedInput Btt MaP.......... .2Ll'7
2LL-5. Bits O and l Valid Combtnationsfor 56...... .................2f1-8
2rL-6. Mode Ttme Parameters """"'2LL-L2
2Ll-7. Alarm ModeControlBit Map.... ...............2fl-fg
2Lr-8. Time ParametersforAlarrn Modes........ ...2If-18
21 l-9. Sl4 Bit Map........... ..............21r'2O
zLL- 10. Valtd Comblnationfor S14...... ................211-20
zLT- 1 I. ExtendedStatus Bit Map..... ,2lL-23
2L2-L. DecodedE)rtendedStatus Blt Map .--.....-..-212-3
215-r. Local Cold Junctlon Reference,I\rnctton Code 215 at BlockAddress IOO.,......215-4
2L5-2. Function Code 216 at BlockAddress lIO ..215'4
215-3. Ftrnctton Code 216 at Block Address 125 -.215'4
2L5-4. F\rnctton Code216 at Block Address 90.... 215-5
215-5. FlemoteCold Junctton Reference,F\rncflon Code 215 at BloelcAddress 25O.....215-6
215-6. Functlon Code216 at BlockAddress 175... .................2f5-6
215-7. Function Code216 at BloclcAddress 202 ..215-0
2 1 6 -1 . Functton Code216 Resolutlonand ScanTlme .............216-5
219-L. Fnnctlon Code219 Speclffcation Setflngs for Figure 2L9'2 ............219-6
231-1. Block lO2OContalnsloop One Data.......... .................231-6
23L-2. Block lO21 Contatnstnop TWoData.......... .................231-6
231-3. Block lO22 Contatns Au:dliary S'cdtcttLabels....... ..,,..23L'7

l-Eg6-2008 15FEB1995 xvtl

LiSt Of TableS (continued) o
No.

Informatton Format for SpeclffcattonsS3 througfr Sf 8........... .......246-2

Numerical Ltsting ....A-1
Alphabettcall,lsUng ...................A-4
Adapt ....A-6
AdvancedFunctions ..................A-6
ASCIr......... ..............A-7
BASICIanguage.. ....A-7
Batch Command (CBCOI Controller) ............A-7
Batch Fr.rncttons ......A-7
Batch I^anguage... ....A-7
C Language .............A-7
Communications Hlghway ..........A-8
Computing ..............A-8
Control Ftrnction Blocks ............A-8
Controlway/ModuleBus I/O..... ...................A-8
Exception Report .....A-9
Executive... ..............A-9
Factory Instrumentation Protocol .................A-9
FieldI/O ...............A-lO
IMAMMOSAndog Master Module ...............A-lO
IMCOMO3ControllerModule...... ................A-fO
IMCOMO4ControllerModule...... ................A-fO
IMLMMO2loglc MasterModule.... ..............A-ll
IMMFCOS/O4IO5Mulil-F\rnctlon ControllerModule .....A-11
IMMFPOI/O2IOB Multi-Functton ProcessorModule ......A-11
INIITO2INFI-NETto INFI-NETTlansferModule....... ......A-tt
l,adderLogic......... ................... A-l I
Logic......... ............A-lI
NAI{MOI Analog Master Module...... ...........A-12
NAI\{MO2Andog Master Module...... ...........A-12
NCOMOr /O2 Controller Module and CLCOI / 02 | OgI 04 l.oop Command
Controller.. ............A-12
A-31. NLMMOI Logtc Master Module .A-tz
A-32. NMFCOI/02 Mult-ftrnctlon ControllerModule ............A-12
A-33. Plantloop l/O............ .............A-12
A-34. Restore...... ............A-fg
A-35. SequenceCommand ................A-13
A-36. Sequenceof Events... ...............A-13
A-37. Signd Select........ ..A-fg
A-38. SignalStatus....... ..A-13
A-39. Station ..................A-fg
A-40. SrcOl StrategicIoop Controller............. ....A-I4
A-41. Text Se1ector................ ............A-I4
N42. Ttend ..A-14
A-43. Trip........... ............A-14
A-44. User DefinedF\rnction .............A-I4
B-l. Available Module ConfiguraUonMemory.. .....8-l
B-2. Module Memory Utilizatlon for F\rnction Codes........ .......8-2
c -1 . Function Code Execution Tlmes (ln Fsecs) ....C-2
E-1. NAI\4MO2 and IIVIAMMOS Andog Master Module...... ........8-2
E-2. NCOMO2,IMCOMOS/O4Controller Modules, IMORCOf Quick Response
Controller Module and CLCOI/O2/O3/O4Ioop Command Controller Modules..... E-2

XVIII 15 FEB 1995 l-E96'2008

 List of Tables (continued

No. Page

E-3. NLMMOI LoglcMaster Module...... ..........-....E-4

E.4. NLMMOl togtc Master Module Blocks L28 - 255 Groups of Elght........................ E-4
E-5. IMLMMO2loglc Master Module ...................E-5
E-6. IMMFPOI/O2/O3 Mulfl-F\rnctlon Processors. NMFCOI lO2 and
IMMFCOS/O4IO5 Mulfl-F\rnctton Controllers, and IMMPCOI PC 90
ProcessorModule .... E-6
E-7. CBCOf Batch Comnand Controllerand CSCOI Sequence Command Controller.. E-7
E-8. SIfOI StratcglcIoop Controller............ ...... E-8
F-1. Operator birterface Staflon (OIS) Console .......F-1
F-2. Management Comrnand System MCS) Console ...............F-1
F-3, Operator Interface Unlt (Oru) Console ...........F-l
G-1. IIVIAMMO3 and I{AMMO2|O2.AAnaTogMaster Modules.... ..................G-3
G-2. INBIMO2 and NBMOI Bus Interface Modules Module Bus), and INBf,MOI
Bus Ttansfer Module Module Bus) .......... .... G-4
G-3. INIiIPMOI Network Processlng Module (Controluray) and NSBMOI Superloop
Bus ModuleModule Bus).......... .................. G-5
G-4. INPPTOI Ttransfer Module. NGCMOf/02 Plant Inop to Plant loop Ttansfer
Module, and NPPGOf Phnt loop to Plant loop Gatenray..... .........-.... G-7
G-5. CICOI Computer tnterface Command, INPCIOf/02 Plant loop to Computer
Interliace, INPCTOI Plant Inop to ComputerTlansfer Module'
INPTMOI PolrtTable Module, and NISMOI toop StorageModule ..... G-8
G-6. INICIOI INFI-NET to Computer Interface. INICTO]/Q3 INFI-NETto Computer
Ttansfer Module pocal), and INSEMOISequenceof Events Monttor.................... G-9
G-7. | / 02 / Og/ 04 loop Command Controller Module, IMCOMOS/O4
CI,/C;O
and NCOMO2/O2A|O3A/O4AController Module, IMORCOI 9dck Response
Controller Module, and NLCMOI/OLIOS large Controller Module ... G-l1
G-8. NIJ\4MOIIngtc Master Module . G-12
G-9. IMLMMO2or NLMMOIAloglc Master Module...... ......-..G-fg
G- lo. CBCOf Batch Command Controller. CSCO1Sequence Command Controller,
IMMFC0S/04/05 and NMFCOI/O2 Multl'Functton Controller Module'
IMMPCO1 Multl-Processlng Controller Module, and SIfOI/2I Strateglc
Loop Controller ..... G-14
G-l1. IMMFFOl/O2lOSlOgBMultl-F\rnctlonProcessorModules ..............G-fo
G- 12. IMITOI /Og INFI-NET to INFI-NETTlansfer Module (Iocal) and INIPTOI
INFI-NET to Plant Ioop TbansferModule (Ircal)........ .... G-19
G- 13. INITO2 INFI-NET to INFI-NETTlansfer Module fRemote) and IMPTO2
INFI-NET to Plant Inop Tlansfer Module (Remote) ........ G-20
G- 14. NPIMOI ProcessInterfaceModule ......-...---.C-22
G-15. IMCPMO2/O3CommuntcatlonPortModules................ . G-23
G-16. CTTOI/02 Conflguratton and T[nfngTermlnal, IMAOMOI Analog Output
Module,andNCTMOI ConffgurattonandTunlngModule...... ......--..G-24

t-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 xrx

SafetySummary

SPECIFIC The control system must be carefully evaluated to establish

WARNINGS defaultvalues that will preventpersonalinjury and/or property
damagein the caseof modulefailure.(p. 79-1,83-1)

Sommairede S6curit6

AVERTISSEMENTS ll faut siogneusement 6valuer le systdmede commandeafin

D'ORDRE d'6tablir des valeurs par d6faut qui permettrontd'6viter des
SPECIFIQUE blessureset des dommagesmat6rielsen cas de d6faillancedes
modules. (p. 79-1, 83-1)

15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008

 INTRODUCTION

PURPOSE

Udfke appllcatlon dependent systems that force the employ-

ment of speciflc control steps, INFI 90 systems offer a large
llbrary of over 2OOversatlle functlon codes resldent tn actlve
modules. Ttrese po\rerful algorttJrms may be used ln
sequences or nested wlthln on-board functton blocks (addres-
sable memory locatlons) to dellver wldely varled control strat-
egles wtthout spectal programmfiilg knowledge. Customtzed
functlon codes rnay be created wlth specld user definable
function code software.

INFI 90 system function codes are compatlble wtth a variety of

other conflguratJon techntques. Funetlon codes edst for
BASIC, Batch gOrM,L,adder and C Language executlon.

,,VSTBUCTION
CONTENT

The function code application manual provides descriptions of

each function code. To use thts lnstnrctJon and functlon codes,
a knowledge of INFI 9O conftguration techniques ls required.

Introduction The lntroductlon provldes an overvlew of functlon code usage.

FunctlonCodes Each functlon code has its own sectlon. For example, find
function code l on pages 1-1 through 1-IO, functlon code 2
on pages 2- 1 and 2-2, etc. Functlon code sectlons use the fol-
lowlng format:

GEMRALDESCRIPTIOff- contalns a brief descrJptlon of the

operattons of the function code.

IITrt TZATION lists the modules. The shaded blocks show

that the function code ts not appllcable to that module.

OIJ I?IUHS provtdes a brief comprehensive descrtption of the

block output. The table shours the bloek number (Blk), tite data
t5pe fllpe), and a description of the block output (Description).

SPI9CIEICATIOIYS - provides a brief, comprehensive descrip-

tion of the specifications ln the function code.

. Spec lists the specification number. For exzlmple, specifi-

cation one is S 1, speclllcation two is 52, etc.

o Tune shows tf the speclflcatlon ls tunable [Y for yes and N

for no). TUnable mea,ns tlrat the value of ttre specification
can be changed wtth the module tn execute mode.
ruBatch 9O ts a trademark of Elsag Balley Process AutomaUon.

PURPOSE
l-Eg6-200B rs FEBr99s 1
INTRODUCTION

Default ls the orlgIral value of the spectflcatlon before

custom conflguratlon.

TgPe shows tf the speclflcatlon ls a boolean (B), tnteger (I)

or real (R) vahle.

Boolean (B) data ls elther a log[c O or loglc l.

Integer (I) data ls a whole number.

Reo,l (R) data is a floatfng polnt declmal number whlch may be

a whole number or a declmal fractlon.

o Range lists the allowable span of specificatton values.

o Descriptionprovides a brief orplanation of the speciffcatlon.

E,rcLANATION (specigfieations and Outputs, - the more

complicated function codes requlre greater explanation than
the general descriptlon, output table, and speciflcatlon table
provide. The uplanation sectlon provides a thorough descrtp-
tion of the function code operatlon.

APPLIC.AJTIONS- to aid in understandfng the functlon code,

the applications sectlon provtdes useful examples.

Appendices Appendices A through G provtde addittonal tnformatlon:

A throughG
. Appendix A ltsts the functton codes tn three ways: numer-
ically, alphabeticdly, and by category.

. Appendix B lists the module memory uttltzatlon for each

function code in each module, and the amount of memory
available in each module.

Appendix C lists the time required for tJle functlon codes

to execute within each module.

Appendix D defines point quality.

AppendiK E lists the module funcflon blocks.

Appendix F lists the available engineering units.

Appendix G lists the module status.

SYSTEMOVERVIEW

An INFI 90 system c€rn be as small as a single process control

unit (PCU) or as complex as a system such as the one shown
in Figure 1. Function codes reside ln the active modules (e.9.,
multi-functlon processors). Configurlng function codes in a
module is like programming a computer. The function codes
are added, deleted, modified and tuned ln the module by
using a configuration devlce.

SYSTEMOVERVIEW
15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 INTRODUCTION

TEDUNDANTI
)MMUNICATIOI iM
10 Mbaud,250i ,J

J' - lnl

I TU 7 I
TUs

t t t - l l
p
EERAIOR
INTERFACE
sfAT|oil
-t
itEtwoRl
IIERFACE
uorHJtl
l{gl N'GK
ilTE RFACE
hIT

m
sERtESa0
COUPUTER

PROCESSOR
MOOUI.E

ll oPEMroR ll
ll D IT ER F Ic E ll
ll sf,^nor ll
lr l - l
sEREs2o ll
-
OfiER
o-t o: :FI o: FEi PROCESSCO}{TROL
-
r-l<
lllllllll trEl UMTS

coN

I rhd. 16RroDROPS
R$Zrl€
RS.a85
<+
RET/K,IE REMOIE
NIERFACE
lro
TO
FOREIG]I
o€\/EES

r r ' \
/ r
. lrO MOO( l,E Bt S (5d,ld{4 6a LOCATlr0 MOOIX.ES) .r LOCATlr(t MOOu.EEt S
r u - r \ f f i t

a l

collrRcn Al{ FIELDBT'8

uo t oottE uol/roDrfl.E
f/|d

AT{ALOG TU Tu TU n TU ru TU TU TU
@TITROL
srAnoN

T
OGITAI PROCESS
PROCESSUO S|G|{ALS LOGIC
srAT|oil t osrcr{Als

: FIE|D EUS (9600 8ALD. t5 OEI/ICES)

SilART SilART
TRAil$,UTTER TMNST,f,TTER

TP22083C

Ftgure 7. INRI 9O SgstemArchitecture

@ INFI-NET ls a regtstered trademark of Elsag Batley Process Automatlon.

SYSTEMOVERVIEW
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 3
INTRODUCTION

Configuration Devices

INFI 90 offers a broad range of conliguration lnterface

devlces. Configuring functlon blocks ls strafghtforrnrard by
using a butlding block approach. Some of the varlous tools
used to add, delete, modt$/, or monitor functlon blocks are:

. Conflguratlon and tuntng termlnal.

. Operator console.

. INFI 90 englneertng work statlon.

. Software:

- Computer Atded Deslgn (CAD;.

- C Utilities Program [CUP).
- L,adderLagic (LAD).
- ConsoleUtllltles Database.
- Batch Language.
- Expert System Language.
- Relattonal Databaste.

FUNCTION CODE THEORY

- I"At{-90 ProcessControl Vtew (PCV).
I
Modules may be configured to perform algortthms or dlsplay
values by arranglng a group of functlons ln a certaln order.
These functions are implemented fn a module by assigntng a
funetion code to a functlon block through an tnterface devlce
such as an engineering work statlon (EWS) or operator lnter-
face station (OIS). Each function has a unique functlon code
number. Appendix A lists the avatlable function codes.

Each active module has a memory for storing the configura-

tion information entered ln the form of function blocks. This
memory is nonvolaUle random access memory (N\IRAIvI). The
information stored in the NVRAIVI ls retalned lf power to the
module is internrpted. In addition to t{\mAIVI in a module,
there is random access memory (RAIVI)which is a scro;tch
pad for module calculatton. The functlon blocks stored in the
I\MRAI\4 work similarly to an application program on a com-
puter.

Each function entered requires spaee tn NNIRAI\{ and RAIvI tn

the module. The amount of space used by the function code
depends upon which function code ls used and tts appltca-
tion. ApPendix B lists the avatlable bytes of memory tn each

FUNCTION
CODETHEORY
15 FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 INTRODUCTION

module and llsts the memory usage for each functlon code ln
each module.

NOTE: Take care to assure that the memory requiredby all

plannedmodulefunctionsdoes not exceedthe availableNVRAM
and RAMmemoryof the modules.

Block Addresses

Funetlon codes are referenced by block addresses (l$. Some

functlons have only one block address (1.e., functlon code 7,
the square root) whtle other functlon codes requlre several
consecutlve block numbers (1.e., funetion code 80, the sta-
tion). Flgure 2 shows the square root function code, and Flg-
ure 2 shows the statton functlon code.

Figure 2. F}unctfon Code 7,

fiunre Root

TS
lfl
N(
c/R
tx
cx
ltA
I-AA
HOA
I.DA
AO

Figure 3. FVnction Code 80,

Staf&cn

The N represents the block address. The address can be any

vdid eonfigurable block address ln the module. For example,
when using an IMMFPOS Multt-Functlon Processor Module,
the avallable conflgurable block addresses (N) are 30 through
9,998 [blocks zero through 29 and block 9999 contain fixed
blocks). Each block address must be a unlque number withJn
a module. Figure 4 shows function code 7, the square root
wlth a block address of lOO. Flgure 5 shows the function code
80, a station wlth a block address of 105.

CODETHEORY
FUNCTION
t-E96-2008 rs FEB1e9s 5
INTRODUCTION

Figwe 4. FLncfionCode 7
usith a BIrck Address oJ 1OO

MFC/P
A O
TR
T S A
MI
A)( C'R
C'R
s2 t x c
cx
s24
HAA C-F
l A
s2e HDA
s27 LDA
s28 AO
TRS2 zr
rnnvQ

Ftgure 5. Fttttction Me 80
u;tth a Blnk Address oJ 1O5

The block address number is also refered to as the block out-

put. The block output value is dependent upon the speclflca-
tlon inputs and settlngs.

Modules contain some fixed blocks. For o<ample, the ffxed

blocks in an MFP module are executlve blocks, segment con-
trol blocks and a last block. Table I shows the avatlable block
numbers for a multl-function processor module.

Tabte 1. Blrlck Addresses in a Multi-F-vnctionProcessor Module

Function Function Gode Block
Block Description
Code Description Address
81 Executive block 0 Logic0
Selects the output mode of the light 1 Logic1
emitting diodes (LED) on the front 2 0 or 0.0
panel of the master module. The
LEDs can display the status of the 3 -100.0
master module or an intemal 4 -1.0
memory location.
5 0.0
6 1.0
7 100.0
I -9.2E18
9 9.2E18

FUNCTION
CODETHEORY
6 1sFEB1e9s l-E96-2008
 INTRODUCTION

Table 1. Block Addresses irx a Mulfr-F\$1ct&cn Processor Modtie (wtfiurcdl

Functlon FunctlonCode Block
Block Descrlptlon
Code Ilescrlptlon Address
81 Exeeutlveblock (cont.) 10 Start-upin progressflag:0 = ro, | = les
(cont.) 11 Memorydisplayvalue
12 Systemfree time in percent
13 Revisionlevel
14 Reserved
82 Segmentcontrol block 15 Elapsedtime of previouscyclein unitsset by 51
Groupssubsequent blocksintoa 16 Elapsedtime currentcyclein unitsset by 51
scancycleexecutedat a specified 17 Processorutilizationin percent
rateand priority.
18 Checkpointoverruncountnumber(numberof cycles
overthat specifiedin 54)
19 Cycletime overrunin unitsset by S1
90 Extended executive block 20 Hours,timeof day
Defines variables that atfect the 21 Minutes,tirneof day
modules operation. Sets system 22 Seconds,time of day
operation characteristics for the
module. 23 Time/date/synch ronizationflag:
0 = time/dateinvalid
1 = time/datevalid
24 Year(0 to 99)
25 Month(1 to 12)
26 Day(1 to 31)
27 Dayof week(1 to 7, Sunda!= 1)
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
-
30 9998 Userconfigurableblocks
89 Last block 9999 Lastblockin the rnodule

Specifications

The S represents the specificaflon number. There are two

t5ryes of specifications. One t5pe of specificaflon is a block
address input to the function block. The second t1rye of speci-
fication affects the internal operafion of the function block. In
Figure 4, specification one (St) ls the block address of the
input. Th,e square root also has 52. Specificatton 52 ls the
gain value ln englneertng untts. In a square root function
code, 52 can be set to arry real number.

Angle brackets around a block address lnput speciflcaflon

reference the block lreput value to the functton block, not the
block number. For example, Flgur€ 6, block 1O5 (the station)
has an Sl input of block 80 (the square root). Specificatlon Sl
ls actually set to 80 fblock 8O). The value out of block 8O lnto
Sf of block 1O5 ls zero to lOO percent. This ls identified by
angle brackets around Sl.

Block 1O5, 51 is set to block address 80 to provide an input

signal of <S1> equals zero to lOO Percent.

CODETHEORY
FUNCTION
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 7
INTRODUCTION

Linfing Function Blocks Together

Ftgure 6 shovrs functlon blocks Unked together to eomplete a

stmple loop. In this exanple, ttle lnput ls from a flonr trans-
mltter that provides a nonllnear flow signal wlttr a range of
z,ero to IOO percent. The square root wlth a galn (S2) of ten
provides tJre staUon prooess vartable (PV) input wlth a ltnear
flow signal. The control output of the statton could be used to
control a valve or otJrer device.

@NTROL
OUTPUT

Figwe 6. Ltt.I 'ing Fbtction Bloclcs Tqgether

There are an infbelte number of configuraflon posstbllltles.

Function code blocks may be grouped together In a conflgura-
tion for customized control. After completing the destred con-
figuration, either download the configuradon to the module
(e.9., when using computer aided deslgn (CAD)) or put the
module into execute mode (e.g., when using the conflgurailon
and tuning terminal CTT). After the desired configuraflon has
been entered into the module (either by downloadlng with
CAD or direct entry with a CTT), the module may be placed ln
an on-line mode (execute) to control tlre process. For more
information on configuring modules refer to the approprtate
configurailon device instmcilon.

FUNCTION
CODETHEORY
I 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode1 - FunctionGenerator

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thls functlon appro:dmates a nonllnear output to lnput rela-

tlonshlp. The tnput range ls dlvlded lnto flve sections and a
llnear input to output relatlonshtp ls set up for each of the
ftve sectlorts. Thts functlon then computes a,n output that ts
related to the lnput accordlng to the flve llnear relatlonshlps.

UTILIZATION

NMFCO1

IMMFPO1

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Ilescrlptlon

N R Outputvalueof function

SPECIFICATIO,AIS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input
S2 Y 4.0 E06 R Full Inputcoordinate
S3 Y 0.000 R Full Outputcoordinatefor 52
S4 Y 4.0 E06 R Full Inputcoordinate
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Outputcoordinatefor S4
S6 Y 4.0 E06 R Full Inputcoordinate
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Outputcoordinatefor S6
S8 Y 4.0 E06 R Full Inputcoordinate
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Outputcoordinatefor SB
sl0 Y 4.0 E06 R Full Input coordinate
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Outputcoordinatefor S10
sl2 Y 4.0 E06 R Full Inputcoordinate
sl3 Y 0.000 R Full Outputcoordinatefor S12
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254tor COMmodulesand GLCOU0A08IU
1023lor SLC01/21
2046lorNMFC01/02,|MMFCOSandCBCO1
9998for IMMFCOUO4and lMMFP0l/0203

FunctionGenerator
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 1-1
FunctionCode 1

EXPLANATION

To set up thJs functlofi, flrst determlne what the output

should be for a given range of treput and draw a graph to show
this relationshtp. Divlde the gfaphed relatlonshtp lnto flve
sectJons, preferably lnto sectlons where stratght ltnes can
closely apprordmate the graph as shown tn Ftgure l-1.

sr3(rG) ls

sfl (r5) 13

F
se (Y4) e
i
t-
D
o
s7 (r3)

ss (E)
s3(Yr)
2 6 1 0 7 2 1 8
(x1) (rq 0€) fi4) 0€)
s2 s4 s6 s8 sro
ITfUT

Ftgwe 1- 1. Grayth oJ Inprrt Versu,s Outpttt

The coordinates of the end polnts of the sectlons are used as

entries for 52 through S13. The even-numbered speciflca-
tions urre the X-axis coordlnates and the odd-numbered are
the Y-axis coordinates. Consequently, when the X-a:ds input
value is at 52, the output will be the value of Sg as shown ln
the graph. This divides the graph lnto five ltnear (straight-
line) sections, with each seetion having its o\iln parttcular
slope as shown in Figure L-2.

Y N(IS
sr3 (Y6) 1 5

slr (Y5)

! ss ryoy 9
o-
F
f
o
s7 (Y3) 5

ss (Y2) 2
s3 (Yl) 1

o 2 6 1 0 1 2 t8 30
x N(|s
(xt) (re, (x3) (x4) 0(5) (x6)
52 s4 s6 s8 sl0 sl2
IN PU T TP45l02A

Figwe 7-2. Secfio ned Input-Ou@fi Graph

FunctionGenerator
1-2 ls FEBlees l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 1

If the input value ls between two X-a:ds points, the output will
be determined by the equatlon:

= (Yr-r)*
Btrckoutput (x- xn-t)
ffix
where:

x = Present tnput vahle.

x, = X-a:ds speclficatlon potnt Just to the rtght

of the present lnput vahle.
Xnt = X-ard,s speclflcatlon polnt Just to the left of
the present tnput vahte.
Yn = Y-a:ds coordtnate that corresponds to )L.

Y*t = Y-a:ds coordlnate that corresponds to )f,-1.

(Yr- Yr- ) = Slope of the partlcular graph segment
(Xr- Xn-) between (>t,YJ and ()L-r,Y,,-t). This is the
untt output change per unlt lnput change.
X-X*t = Amount that the tnput ls above the next
lower speclllcation point.

For example, suppose the graph shown ln Ftgure l-1 is a

graph of deslred output values for lnput values. These values
may represent any englneerin$ units.

First, the graph ls divlded lnto flve sectlons as shown tn

Figure L-2. The coordlnates of the end polnts of these seg-
ments are then entered tnto the module.

Suppose the lnput <S1> to the functton block represented by

Ftgure l-2 ls slx untts. ThLs eorresponds to polnrt S4. There-
fore, the output wtll be two untts (S5). If the lnput ls ten units
(whtch coresponds to SO), the output wtll be flve unlts and so
orr,. If the lnput ts between slx untts and ten unlts, for exam-
ple seven units, the output ls determined according to the
functlon equatlon. The values for the equatlon become:

Xinwt = 7

X, =56= 10
Xn =54=$
Yn =S7=$

Y*t =S5=2

FunctionGenerator
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 1-3
FunctionGode1

The equation becomes:

s5+Sffi xQ-s4)
output=
= 2t r+) . E5 -62 x (7-6)
= 2.75

High and Low Limits

If the input <Sl> goes hfgher than the Sf 2 value, the output
will remain at the S13 value for the high limlt. If the tnput
goes below the 52 vahl€, the input wtll remaln at the Sg value
for the low limit.

APPLICATIOruS

Five possible applications of functlon generators are tllustrated

in Figures 1-3, l-4, 1-5, f -6 and L-7. Figures f -6 and I-7 illus-
trate the use of multiple function generators to achleve good
resolution when representing a complelc functton.

I
TRANSMITTER

Figure 7-3. Function Generalor Used

Jor Programm@ Set Pointor Bias

F
o.
F
D
o

Figure 7-4. Funetion Generator Used a.s aNoise Filter

FunctionGenerator
1-4 ts FEBless l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 1

SETPOINT

Figure 7-5. htnction Generator Used to Obto;in

an Adnptiue Gainfor aNonhnear Process

100
\..
s
\ F00 1 F00e
80
\ Sr - BL@K St ' *OCl(
71'
/ li.lPUT lI\FUT
@ 32 -O 32 . tio
gg rtOO S.3'O
so /
./ \ S4 rto 9f .6O
40 55 .30
s
/ S5'OO
36 .2O SE .tO

n
\. I 37 .70
SE .3O
37 r5O
S8 -8O
10
\ 59 .3O 39 .5O

0
\ / StO - 4O
Sll - 20
S10 r 90
51 r4O
St2 - SO g12 rtOo
f 0 z p - - o 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 0 0 r @
st3. o stg- D
F(x) 1 F(x) 2

Flgure 7-6. Tllo F.tnctipn Generators Used

to Achieue Greater Cunse Resoltttion

FunctionGenerator
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 1-5
Function Code 1

100
00
-r S PECI FICATIONSETTINGS
80
-, F(X) I F(x) 2 F(X) 3 F(x) 4
-J
70 SlT BLOCK SI. BLOCK 81. BLOCK
60 -- INPUT INPUT |lfuT
50
.10
-/
S 2 r Q
5 3 r Q
5 4 r $
83:?;
54 r30
I S 5 r J SS r20
30 SO rl0 S6 r tli
5 7 t 7 S7 t25
20 r4O
-J
F
SE r15 58
t0 Sg rl0 Sg r40
-C r 45
0 S10 r 20 S10
S11 r 15 Sll r 42
0 10 20 30 .0 50 60 70 !0 eo ro0
# : ?8
813 Sl2
Sl3
r $Q
r {g
S12 r 75
S13.80

F(x)1 F(X)2 F(x)3 F(x)4

B L O C KI N P U T F(x) 1 N

(1)
F(x)2 N

(1)
F(x)3

F(x)4

Flgtre 7'7. Fotlu. Fltrction Gerteralors tJsed to Achleue Greater Cune Resolu.tion

FunctionGenerator
1-6 15FEB1995 t-E96-2008
 FunctionCode2 - ManualSetConstant(SignalGenerator)

GENERALDESCR/,Pr'ON

The output of the manual set constant ts an analog stgnd

developed wtthin the functlon that ts equal to <Sl>. ThJs func-
tlon provldes a tunable output value ln eng[eeerlng unlts.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Userselectedconstant

SPECtFtCAT'OnfS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 Y 0.000 R Full Outputvaluein engineering
units

APPLICATIOA'S

Scaler Figure 2-l tllustrates how to use the murnual set constant as a
scaler. In the example, the transmitter has a range of 200 to
7OO pounds per square lnch. The range ls scaled up 2OO
pounds per square lnch by settfng the manual set constant to
2OO. The summer adds <S1> and <S2> to provide an output
r€rnge of 4OO to 900 pounds per square lnch.

Set Point Figure 2-2 tllustrates how to use tJre manual set constant for
a set point conflguratlon. The transmltter range ls ten to 20
inches of water. The deslred set point (output of the summer
block) is 15 inches of water. By setttng the manual set con-
stant to 15, the summer subtracts <S2> from <Sl>. Tttus,
when <S1> equals 15 inches of water, output N of the summer
block equals zero inehes of water whlch shows the level has
reached set polnt.

ManualSet Constant(SignalGenerator)
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEB199s 2' 1
FunctionCode 2

OUTPUT=SI +S2
OR
40G9OO psi

$3 = 1 (GAIN OF S1)
${ = 1 (GAIN OF SA)
TP4{t107C

Figwe 2-1. Flrtctlrin hde 2 Used as a ScaIer

OUTPUT=51-52
OR
OWHEN SET PONT
IS REACHED
S3 = 1 (cAlN OF 51)
${ = -1 (GAN OF g)
TP451oBC

Ftgwe 2-2. F\nctioncde 2 usedfor a set Point

ManualSet Constant(SignalGenerator)
2-2 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode3 - Lead/Lag

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Theoutputofalead/|agfunctioncodeegudstheproductof
ttre tlme functlon and the tnput value. Speclficatlons SB and
S4provtdelead(S3)orlag(S4)functlons.Ftrnctloncode3
also seryes as a lead /lag fllter.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Outputvaluewith lead/lagfunctionapplied

SPECIFICATIO.'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of input
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof trackswitchsignal:
0 = track
1 = reloase
S3 Y 0.000 R Full Time constant T1 (lead) sec
S4 Y 0.000 R Full TimeconstantT2 (lag)sec
NOTE:
l. Maxirnum values are: 254tor COM modules and CLCOUOAO3I0p-
1023 for SLC01/21
2046 for NMFCOIIO?,IMMFC0Sand CBC01
9998 lor |MMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

Lead/Lag
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 3-1
 FunctionCode3

EXPLANAT'ON

Function code 3 causes tJre output of the functlon block to

lead or lag changes in the tnput slgnal <Sl>. The follourtng
equation descrlbes the operatton:

s3((sr) - ( srr)) dt((sr)- Y)

Y=Yt+ +-
S4+dt S4+dt

where:

<st> Present lnput vahle.

<S1.> Value of the lnput on the previous cycle.
s3 Value of time constant Tl (lead) in seconds.
s4 Value of time constant tZ (lag) in seconds.
Y Present output value.
YL Value of the output on tl:e previous cycle.
dt Module cycle time (seconds).

The 52 term enables or disables tlrjs functiolf,. If <S2> ls a

logic O, then the output equals the tnput <Sl>. If <SZ> ls a
logic l, the lead or lag function is implemented.

Lag Function

To select the lag function, leave 53 at its infflal value (O) and
enter a number for 54. The equation then becomes:

df(( sr) - Y)
Y=Yt+
54+ dt

54 is tJle time constant terrn. This is the tlme requlred for the
output of this function to reach 63.2 percent of the lnput
value. The output will not reach approximately 99 percent of
the input value until the end of Iive time constants. In this
application, it will be five times 54 before the output reaches
the input value. To calculate the 54 term needed for the out-
put to equal the input in a certatn number of seeonds (t), use
the following equation:

t
S 4 = -5

where:

S4 = Time constant term for function code 3.

Lead/Lag
3-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode3

= Number of seconds for the output to reach about

99 percent of the tnput value.
5 = Number of tlme constants requtred for tJre output
to reach about 99 percent of the lnput value.

For example, for tJre output to reach the tnput level in 30 sec-
onds, tlle 54 term needed would be:

s4=?9=6
5

Lead Function

To select only a lead functtorl, leave S4 at lts hftial value of

zero and enter a number for 53. The equatlon then becomes:

st) - vr)l
tss ((s 1>- ( str))I + tdt11
Y=Yt+
dt

where:

<s1> Present input vahte.

<S1.> Value of the lnput on the prevlous cycle.
s3 Tlme constant Tl (tead) in seconds.
s4 Time constantTz [ag) ln seconds.
Y Present output value.
YL Vdue of the output on the prevlous cycle.
dt Module cycle time (seconds).

The output is set to the value that the input will be in (Sg)
seconds if lt continues to change at the same rate as it did
during the last cycle. The lead functlon ls essentlally equal to
the derivatlve functlon except that the block output eventu-
ally equals the input if the input remalns constant long
enough. The output of a derivative functlon is zero when the
input is not changing.

APPLICATIO'VS

Figures 3- I and 3-2 tllustrate some general tnput and output

signal shapes for a functlon code 3 used as a lag fllter and as
a lead filter respecttvely. The tnput stgnals shown ln
Figures 3- I and 3-2 are tdeal waveforms for electronlc cir-
cults. Actual outputs and lnputs vary because INF'I 90 fune-
tion codes are preprogrzrmmed algorlthms.

Lead/Lag
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 3-3
FunctionCode 3

INPUT
slGl.tALS

BL@KADDRESS
OF
TRACKSWITCH
SIGT{AL

FIgure 3-1. Fbncf,wnCode 3 Usedas aW F.fter

INPUT
SIGNALS

BLOCKADDRESS
OF
TRACKSWITCH
SIG}.IAL

Figure 3-2. FVrtcfl,wnCode 3 Used as a Lead, Filter

Figures 3-3 and 3-4 are simpltfled examples of ustng functton

code 3 in boiler appllcatlons. Flgure 3-3 shows functlon code 3
used as a lag to delay decreases ln atr flour for a load decrease.
Figure 3-4 shows funetlon code 3 used as a lead/lag to com-
pensate for drum level shrlnk and swell due to changes tn
steam flow.

BOILER
DEMAhD

AtR FLOW S2
CoNTROL'-- - - -
IN AUTO

Figwe 3-3. Function Code 3 Used as aLq to Delag

Decre66es tn Air Flout on a Load Decrease

Lead/Lag
3-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode3

DRUM LWEL
SET PONNT
DRtffT.EVEL

6$ FEEII /ATER
- FLOW
r70 bff'ponEr

STEAIU FLO/I'
FEEDWATER FLOI'I'
CONTROL IN AUTO

Flgwe 3-4. FlurtcttonCodc 3 Usedas aLead/Lag to

Compensate -for DnfirL Leuet Shrtnk arld, Sroell
Due to Changes In SfeamFlortt

15 FEB 1995
l-E96-2008
 ffi
t

I
 FunctionCode4- PulsePositioner

L DESCR/,Pr'ON

The pulse posttloner (PULPOS) functton code compares two

analog lnput slgnals and produces output pulses that are
proportional tn tlme duration to the difference between these
two analog slgnds. Both tnputs are elpressed as a percentage
of the total range or spurn of the process parameter. Any dlffer-
ence ls converted to a ttmed forward or reverse boolean out- ,
put. The time duratlon of the boolean signal is proporttonal to i
the percent error and the specified stroke tlme. There are pro-
vislons for speclfflng the error deadband and the cycle tlme.

The PULPOS function code uses two consecutlve block ,

addresses. For correct operatlon, block addresses N and N+l
should be sent dlrecfly to two dtgltal output blocks tn the
same I/O module. Thls ls accomplished by uslng functlon
code 44 for a controller module, or any digital output (such as
funetlon code 79, 83, etc.) for the multi-functlon controller,
multt-processlng controller, and multl-functlon proeessor
modules.

NOTE:OutputsN and N+l of functioncode4 mustbe in the same

l/O groupof functioncode83 (digitaloutputgroup).

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N B Outputvalueof timedraise(forwardpulse)
N+1 B Outputvalueof timedlower(reversepulse)

PulsePositioner
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 4-1
FunctionGode4

SPECIFICATIO,A'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of set point signal
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of feedback signal
S3 Y 0.000 R Fu Fonruardstroke rate (%/second)
S4 Y 0.000 R FU Reverse stroke rate (o/o/second)
S5 Y 0.000 R Fu Deadband (%) - absolute deadband
S6 Y 0.000 R Fu Cycletime(secs)
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254 tor COMmodulesandCLCOUIA}SIO4
1023for SLC01/21
2046for NMFC01/02,|MMFC0SandCBC01
9998for |MMFCOS/O4and|MMFP01|0U03

EXPLANATION

The output of tJre pulse position function is a series of pulses

having pulse durations proportional to the difference between
the desired set point value input signal <Sl> and the actual
value feedback signal <S2>. These two signals are e4pressed
in percent of total r€rnge or spurn of the proeess parameter.
<Sl> and <S2> are t5ryically scaled to the same englneerlng
unit to obtain proper operation.

Thts function block produces two outputs. Output N gener-

ates a signal when the measured process value is less than
the desired output. Output N+ I generates a signal when the
measured process value ls greater than the desired value. Ttre
assigned block number (N) references the first output which
is a forward or increase output. The next consecutive block
number (N+ l) references the second output which is a reverse
or decrease output. If this block drives a digital I/O module,
both outputs must be directed to the same group on the I/O
module and must use consecutive l/O module outputs. The
outputs must go to digital output blocks 23 I, 232, 233 or 234
in a controller module using function code 44.

The difference between the desired value signal <Sl> and the
actual value (feedback) signal <S2> is called the error signal.
Specification 55 is the deadband, i.e., the amount of en'or
that is allowed before a correction is necess€rry. If <S2> is less
than <S1> by an amount greater than the deadband, there
will be a forward output. To determine the forward output
pulse widths use the calculation:

Forward outputputseduration= seconds

ry

,f (s1>-(s2) > s5
ForwardoutputpulseOFFtime= (SO)- (forwardoutput pulseduration)

PulsePositioner
4-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode4

(s2)-(sr)
Reverseoutputpulse duration=
s4

tf(s2>-(st)> s5
Reverseoutput putseOFF time= (56) - (reverseoutputpulseduration)

where:

(sr) Value of set potnt slgnal

(s2) Vdue of feedback signal
s3 Value of forward stroke rate (percent per second)
s4 Value of reverse stroke rate (percent per second)
s5 Value of deadband (percent)
s6 Cycle time (seconds)

NOTES:
1. Fonrardand reverseoutputpulsedurationsare computedto
the nearestten milliseconds minimumdura-
with a S0-millisecond
tionfor controllermodulesanda ten-millisecondminimumduration
for all othermodules.

Z. lf outputblocksN and N+1are not directlyconnectedto a dig-

ital output,the forwardand reverceoutputpulsedurationsare set
to modulesegrnenttime.

Cycle Time

Cycle time (SO) sets the time between calculations, or how

often this function is calculated. It delays the processln$ of
the block.

Stroke Rate

The stroke rates (S3 and 54) urre entered ln untts of percent Per
one second. The stroke rate sets the length of ttme that tJ1efor-
ward or reverse signal remalns hrgh for each percent of eror
(when error is greater than deadband). If 53 is set to ten percent
per second and the deadband is set to two percent, then the for-
unra output will be held higb one second for every ten percent
error, or until the next cycle, whichever comes first. If there ls
90 percent error above the deadband when S3 ls ten percent per
second, then the folward output remains hi$b for rrine seconds
or until the cycle ends. The mrrdmum pulse dnr:atton ls 50 mil[-
seconds (ten milliseconds for IMMFC03, IMMFCO4, IMMFCO5,
IMMFpol, IMMFP0? and IMMFPOS modules) and the smallest
incremental pulse length possible ls ten milliseconds.

pulse
output
Forward =
duration 9 sec
ffi
lf90%>2

PulsePositioner
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 4-3
FunctionGode4

APPLICATIO^'S

Figure 4-L shows how the pulse position function code c€rn
control a pulse t5rpe valve posittoner. The PULPOS function
block is internally automatic, but ttrere are no provlslons for
operator intervention. Uslng the PID (functton code 19) and
the M/A (function code 80) control loop allows selecting a
deslred set poinrt for operatlon ln the auto mode. TIte control
loop then regulates the set point signal to the PULPOS func-
tion block to maintain a constant valve position based on the
valve position feedback.

In manual mode, the PULPOS function block set point is

directly selected via manipulation of the control output vahte.
In either manual or auto mode, the PULPOS function block
controls the field device based on the specification settings
and the relationship extribited between <Sl> and <S2>. The
PULPOS function block pulses a ralse or lower output signal
to adJust for errors.

NOTES:
1. The outputsof the PULPOSmustgo to the sameoutputdefi-
nitionfunctioncodewhenusedin MFCor MFPmodules.

2. The controlstationsshouldbe configuredto displaythe posi-

tionfeedbackon the outputbargraph.

DESIREDVALVE
POSITION

FEEDBACK
REFERENCE

VALVE PULSE POSITION SIGNAL

TP220398

Figwe 4-1. PULPOS Controlting a Rrlse Vatue Posifbner

PulsePositioner
4 -4 ls FEBt99s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode5 - PulseRate

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Thls functlon accepts an andog tnput ln engtneertng untts/

ttme and produces a pulsed output slgnal where the pulse
rate ls proporttond to the analog lnput.

NOTE:The ouput of this functionblockmustbe directlyconnected

to a digitalouput (block231,292,23-3or 2 ) for the IMCOM0S/04
or CLC03/04modules,usingfunctioncode44 for the IMCOM0S/O4
modules.Usefunctioncode79 or 83 for the NMFCO1 |OZ'|MMFCOS/
04/05,IMMFP0/'i0A03, CBC01,CSC01and IMMPCOlmodules.

UTILIZATION

IMMFCO4
IMMFCOS
IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Ilescrlptlon

N B pulse
Repetitive outputhavinga durationproportionalto the
analoginput

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputsignal
S2 Y 0.000 R Full Scalingparameter(unitVpulse)
S3 Y 0.000 R Full Lowcutoff(no outputbelowvalue)
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM rnodulesand CLGOIIOUOS|O4
1023 for SLC01/21
2046 for NMFC01/02, IMMFCOS,CBC01 and IMMPCOl
9998 for |MMFC0S/O4and IMMFPOUOAO3

PulseRate
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 5-1
FunctionCode5

EXPLANAT'ON

The <Sl> lnput ls €rnanalog stgnal representlng rate ln terms

of engineering untts per untt of tlme. The S2 term sets the
number of lnput englneertng untts that produce a 50 mtl[sec-
ond output pulse. The number of output pulses ls accordlng
to the equation:

Numberof output pulsesper second= L

s2
where:

x = Ma:dmum value of lnput slgnal <S1>.

s2 = Value of scaltng parameter (unfts per pulse).

Suppose the input signal represents zero to f OO gallons per

second. It is necessary to obtatn one output pulse for every
f OOgallons. To accomplish this, set 52 to IOO.OO.If the tnput
signal is lOO gallons per second, the output is one pulse per
IOO gallons or one pulse per second. If the input stgnal
decreases to 50 gallons per second, the output would be one
pulse every two seconds, and so on. [f the lnput flow rate ts ln
units per minute or unlts per hout then 52 must be sealed
accordingly. The application sectlon gives the procedure for
determining 52.

The output pulses are always 50 mtlltseconds tn durattorr,

and the minimum time between pulses ls 50 mfilfseconds so
tJrere is a limit of ten pulses per second.

APPLICATIO^'S

The output of this functton may be used to drive a counter vla

a digital output. To tmplernent thts functlon to drlve a
counter, follow these steps:

1. Determine the ma:dmum flow rate for the tnput. Although

this function always cdculates tJle number of output pulses
by units per second, flows in untts per hour and units per
minute may be used in the equatlon given lrr Step 5 because a
factor can be inserted to adjust the scaling.

2. Determine the maximum input value to the pulse rate

function at maximum flow.

3. Determine the counter capacity as follows:

lon
Maximumcountsper hour =
minimumresettimein hours

Pulse Rate
5-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 5

where:

n = Number of dlglts of the counter.

Dtvtde the results of thls equatlon by 60 to obtaln counts per

mlnute or by 3600 to obtaln counts per second.

The mlntmum reset ttme should generally be more than 24

hours.

4. Determlne the deslred output tn terms of counts (or

pulses) per hour (assumIilg the flow rate remalns at maxi-
mum). Choose the destred counts per ttme to be less thart
what was deterrnlned tn Step 3. It ls generally best to make
the output dlffer from tJre lnput by a factor of some power of
ten (1O, lOO, 1OO0etc.).

5. Calculate the 52 scaling factor uslng the follourtng equa-

tlon:

( St) matcimum flow

32=
desird outputcountsper hour at ma)( flow

where:

<St> = Value of input signal (units per second).

Thls equatlon ls to be used when the flow rate ls untts per

hour. When tJee flow rate ls ln terms of unlts per mlnute, use
60 seconds per mlnute ln place of the 3600 seconds per hour
and substltute the unlts of mlnutes for untts of hours ln the
equation. If the tnput flow rate ts h seconds, omtt the conver-
sion factor entlrely and use unlts of seconds for the terms.

Figure 5- f shours one example of functlon code 5 used to

obtain a count of total pounds of flow. In thts example, the
r€rnge of ttre flow is zero to 5OO,O0Opounds per hour:

l. pounds per hour.

The ma:dmum flow rate ts SOO,OOO

2. The tnput range ls zero to 5OO, so the ma:dmum input is

500.

PulseRate
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 5-3
FunctionCode5

3. The counter to be used has slx digits and the counter

should not reset in less than 24 hours. So the ma:dmurn
count per hour allowable ls:

1f
Ma)( aunts per hour =
min. resettimein hours
106
= -
24
1,000,0@
= 41,667nuntsperhour
t=

4. The desired counts for ma:dmum flow is 5OO. Thls means

each count will represent 1,000 pounds. Thls ls conslderably
less than the counter capaclty for 24 hours determtned ln
Step 3.

5. The scaling factor is:

value of <S 1> at ma)( tlow

S2=
desiredoutputnuntilhr at ma)( flow
500 360osec
= X-
5N aunts/hr hour
= 3600

FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION

coDE 27 CODE 7 CODE 5 GODE 44
51=0 51 =2Ol S1 = 2O2
52= 5OO,0O0 52 = 7O7.1O7 S2 = 3600 51 = 203
53=O
TP45118

Figure 5-1. Ftlnction Code 5 Used to

Count Total Pourtds of Ftotts

PulseRate
5-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 6 - High/LowLimiter

L DESCRIPTION

Thts block tlmtts the output stgnd to a range that lles

between a spectfied hfgh and low Umlt. The output equals tJre
tnput <S1> when the tnput ts between the ltmlts. Output N
equals the hfgh Umlt when the lnput ts hfgher than the htgh
llmlt and equals the low Umtt when the lnput ls lourer than
the low limlt.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N R Ouput valueegualsinputvalueunlessthe inputreachesthe low
or highlimit.Then,the outputvalueassumesthe valueof the lirnit.

SPECIFICATIO.fVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof input
S2 Y 4.0 E06 R Full Value of high limit
S3 Y -4.0E06 R Full
Value of low limit
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254tor COMmodulesandCLG0llOUOglo4.
1023for SLG01/21
andCBC01
2o4i6for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFC0S
9998for |MMFCOUO4 and IMMFPOUOAa3

APPL'CATIOruS

Figure 6-1 shows a limlter used to limft the bias range. The
flow transmitter input range ls zero to 3OO gallons per mlnute.
The btas value for thls example is +2O gallons per mlnute but
the high limit should not exceed 32O gallons Per minute. By
using the configuration shown, ttre 20 gallons per mlnute bias
is achieved without e:rceedtng the ma;dmum llmlt.

High/LowLimiter
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 6-1
FunctionCode 6

51 =!Q

340
300 /
280
260

E c-/
CL

ffi
CD
\t
F
=
G
t-
:) -t
o tv-

FUNCNON C@E 2

0 n 80 100 120 140 160 180 m 20 240 200 280 3(x)

INPUT
TP45t148

Figwe 6-1. Flrnction Code 6 Used to Limit a Bias Range

Figure 6-2 shows function code 6 used to ltmit the tnput to a

divider functiolf.. This is necessary in many appllcatlons to
prevent unprocessable quotients (1.e., divtde by zerol, espe-
cially when <S2> is very small.

52=1
S3 = 0.001
TP?2rOl2A

Fi,gure 6-2. Flrncfion Cde 6

Limtting Input ta a Diuider

High/LowLimiter
6-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 7 r Square Root

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thls functton computes ttre square root of the lnput stgnal tn

englneerlng unlts. The output equals a fiactor (k) tlmes the
square root of the tnput. Ttle equatlon that rePresents t'ttls
functlon ls:

y = sz.[qgl,)

where:

<St> Input value.

S2 Gafn value (k) tn englneertn$ unlts.
Y Output value [Y = Q tf <Sl> < O).

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Tlpe Ilescrlptlon

N R Outputvalueequalssquarerootof inputvaluemultipliedby the
gainvalue(k)

SPECIFICATIO.IVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 6 I Note 1 Block address of input
S2 Y 1.000 R Full units(EU)
Gainvalue(k) in engineering
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules and CLC0'|'/0AO3I04
1023 for SLC01I21 and lMLtvlMOz
2046 for NMFCOIII?, IMMFCOS,CBCO1and |MMPCOI
9998 for !MMFCOS/04and IMMFPOUOAO3

SquareRoot
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 7- 1
FunctionCode 7

APPLICATIO,AIS

Speclflcatlon 52 ts the galn (k) app[ed to the value ^@ and

can be any real number. It ls used to scale an lnput slgnal to a
meanlngful or easy to work wlth output stgnal. Flgure 7-l
shours an example of hour functton code 7 can be used. In the
example, a flour rate of zero to 5O,OOOpounds per hour ts
belng measured by a dtfferenttal pressure transducer whose
output range ls zero to 2OOteches of water. The flow ls a func-
tlon of the square root of the dtfferenttal pressure multlplled
by some constant (k). The equatlon for tlrls example ls:

Flow=r@

If lt ls lorourn that the flow ls 5O,O0O pounds per hour at a

transmltter output Xrdfcating 2OO lnches of water dtfferenttal
pressure, the required constant (k) can be calculated as follourc:

poundsper hour = XJ nO
50,OOO

50,000poundsper hour= k (14.142)

50,0N =
k
14,142

k = 3,535.5A

0 TO 50,000bllrr

50,@o

45.00
/ /
r
40,0@ -/ /
r
35.m0
,/
) /
30,000
,l
a
25.000
t
/
20.000
/
15,000

l0,m
/

5,0m
I
0
0 20 N 60 80 100 1n l/|0 160 180 200
in. [o

Flgwe 7-1. Conuerttq aPressure SUnaI

to a FIow Rate Usirtg Fl.tncfion Code 7

SquareRoot
7- 2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 7

Many nonllnear lnputs need to be converted to llnear outputs.

Ftgure 7-2 tllustrates converflng a nonllnear pressure st$nat
to a llnear flow stgnd uslng funetlon code 7.

100 100

90 90 /

80 80
/
70 70 /

60 60 /
oh 50
/
%50

4
/
40

30 30 /

20 n /

10
/
10

0
/
10 20 30 & 50 60 7A E0 90 100 0 t0 n 30 40 50 e0 70 80 90100
% % TP22oroB

FIgure 7-2. Converttq aNonlinear Pressure hprtttp al;heat Flout Oufud

SquareRoot
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 7- 3
ffi
o

t
 FunctionCode8 - RateLimiter

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The output of thts block equals the lnput untll the tnput rate
of change exceeds the Umlt value (Sg and S4). When the rate
of change of the tnput ls greater than the Umlt, the output
I
changes at the rate establtshed by the ltmtt untll the output
equals the tnput. .

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Outputrateequalsinputrateuntilthe inputrateexceedsthe rate
limit.Then,the outputrateequalsthe limit.

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof trackswitchsignal:
0 = track
| = r@lease
S3 Y 0.000 R Full Increase rate limit (l/sec)
S4 Y 0.000 R Full Decreaseratelimit(1/sec)
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254lor COM modules and CLCOI|OUOUOA
1023 for SLC01/21
2046 for NMFG01|02,|MMFC05 and CBCO1
9998 for |MMFGOS/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

RateLimiter
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 8-1
FunctionCode I

EXPLANATION

Functlon code 8 llmtts the rate of change of the output

according to preset ltmlts. To actlvate tlrls functlon set <S2>
to a logic l. With <S2> set to a loglc O, the output ls the s€rme
as the lnput.

Specification S3 ls the rate Umft of an lncreaslng tnput stgnal

in engtreeertng unlts per second. As long as ttre tnput rate of
lncrease ls less than 53, the output equals the lnput. When
the rate at whlch tJre tnput lncreases exceeds the settlng of
53, the output changes at the rate set by S3 as long as the
lnput rate of increase remalns greater. Spectflcatlon 54 Umfts
the output rate of decrease when the treput rate of decrease ls
greater than 54.

APPLICATIO'VS

Figure 8- I illustrates how to use the rate llmlter for bumpless

trarrsfer. In the exarnple, the M/Astatlon sends an automatlc
(loglc 1) or manual (loglc O) slgnal to <S2> of the rate llmlter.
When ln automatlc, functton code 8 llmtts the rate of change
to the set point. For example, placlng the statlon ln automatlc
may cause a drastic change tn set polnt demand. The rate
llmiter slows the increase or decrease set polnt demand to the
station providing a bumpless transfer from manual to auto-
matic.

PROCESS
VARIABLE

S3o 1
9lr1

56-5
S7 - 9.2E+18
S8 r -9.2E+18
59 - 9.2E+18
SlO- r0O.00O
Sl 1'O .m
S12- Q
S13= -e0@
S14- O.qm
S15- O
516* 55
S17- O
SASI=O
S31* S.mO

Figtre 8-1. F'UnctionCde 8 Usedto Limit

the Rate oJ Chartge oJ the Set Point

Rate Limiter
8-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode 9 r Analog Transfer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts funetlon selects one of two lreputs dependtng on boolean

lnput <S3>. The output of functlon code 9 equals the lnput
determtned by the state of tnput <S3>. There are two ttme
constanrts to provlde smooth transfer ln both dlrectlons.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

BIK TyPe Ilescrlptlon

N R Outputequalsone of two possible inputs

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof transfersignal:
0 = outPutequals<S1>
1 = outputequals<S2>
S4 Y 0.000 R Full Transferto input 1 time constianUsec
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Transferto input2 time constanUsec
NOTES:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254 tor COMmodulesand CLC03I/04
1023lorSLC01/21
2046for NMFCO14O?,IMMFCO5,CBC01,lMMPC0landCSCO1
9998for |MMFC03/04and lMMFPOllOUOg

EXPLANATION

Specification Sg is the block address of the transfer stgnal

that selects whlch input (<Sl> or <S2>l transfers to the out-
put. If <S3> ls a logic 0, then <S1> wtll be transferred to the
output. If <S3> ls a logic 1, <S2> will be transferred to the
output.

AnalogTransfer
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 9-1
FunctionGode9

When the transfer block changes the lnput selected, the out-
put level changes to the ne\il lreput level exponenttally over a
pertod of flve tlme constants when the transfer tlme constarrt
(S+ and 55) is set to a value other than zero. After five ttme
constants, the output tracks the selected lnput.

Spectflcatlons 54 and 55 are tlme constant terms. They spec-

iS/ the time requaed for the prevlous output value to reach
63.2 percent of the present tnput value. Ttte output wtll
essentially match tlle new lnput value after flve ttme con-
stants have passed. To calculate 54 or S5 so that the output
equals the input in a certaln number of seconds (t), use the
follouring equation:

34or55= !
5

where:

S 4 o rs5 = Time constant term for function code g.

t = Transfer tlme. The number of seconds for the
output to match the input value. A common
transfer tlme ls ten seconds.
5 The number of time constants requtred for
the output to mateh the input value.

For example, if the required output must match the <S1>

level 30 seconds after a transfer, and match the <S2> level tn
15 seconds after a transfer:

t 3 0
S4= = 6.0
5 5

t
55= = 15 = 3.0
5 5

APPLICATIO'VS

Figure 9- l shows how function code 9 can be used as an ana-

log memory. In this exarnple the output tracks <S1> when the
<S3> digitat lnput is a logic O. The output value holds at tts
last level when the <S3> input ls a logic l.

Figure 9-2 shows how function code 9 can be used as a man-

ual to automatic transfer switch. When <S3> of functlon
code 9 equals O, the auto signal for the M/Ablock equals the
analog lnput (<S1>) of function code 9. When <S3> of function
code 9 equals 1, the auto input signal tracks the output of the
M/A station.

AnalogTransfer
9-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 9

AT{ALOGINPUT

DGTTAL
TMNSFER
slGNAt

F-tgure9-1. Ustrtg the AnaIry TvansJer

F\nctlon as aMemory FvrrcfJ,wn

ANALOG INPUT

DIGITAL
TRANSFER
SIGNAL
g.tt= 100
gg = 1OO

S7 = 1(X).0O
58 - 0.000
S9 = 9999
SlO - lfl).O
S11 = O.(X)O
S12 = 0.(XD
S13 =O
S14 -O
S15 =O
516 =O

Figure 9-2. Usirtg F}uncfirrn Code I for

a Manual tp Ar;;to Transfer Suitctt

l-Eg6-2008
ffi
o

I
 Function Gode 10 r High Select

L DESCRIPTION

Thts functlon selects and outputs ttre lnput urlth the htghest
algebralc value.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Outputequalsthe highestof the four inputs

SPECIFICATIOA'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N I I Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N I I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N I I Note 1 Blockaddressof third input
S4 N 8 I Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthinput
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:.254lor COMmodulesandCLCOllOUOglo4
1023for SLC01|21and|MLMMO2
2046for NMFC01rc?,|MMFCO5, CBCO1and lMMPC0l
9998for |MMFG03/04 and IMMFPOIIOUO3

APPLICATIOA'S

The most common use of functlon code 10 ls to seleet the

hfghest vdlte. Functlon code lO can also be used to memorize
the hfghest value over a pertod of tlme.

To memofize the hfghest value over a pertod of tlme (tfme is

set wtth Sg of functlon code 9), use functlon code 10 wtth
function code 9 as shown in Ftgure lO-1. Create a loop with
the output of function code fO as an lnput for function

HighSelect
l-E96-2008 rs FEB199s 10 - 1
FunctionCode 10

code 9, and the output of functlon code 9 Ers one tnrput to

function code 10. Function code 9 tracks the output of frlnc-
tlon code 10. The output of functlon code I feeds back to
functlon code lO, thus, memorlzlng the value of the firput
wlth the htghest algebralc value. Thls contlnues untll Sg of
functlon code 9 switches tJre tnput slgnal from <S2> to <S1>.

Ot,TPUT
({4)

94=1O
gg=10

TP/l5fl88

Figure 7O-7. Usirg F\rrlction Cod.e 10 to Memorize

a HUh Value Ouer a Pedod oJ Time

High Select
10-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode11- Low Select:

L DESCRIPTION

Thts functlon selects and outputs the lnput wtth the lowest
algebralc value.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe Descrlptlon

N R Outputequalsthe lowestof the four inputs

SPECIFICAT'O'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 9 I Note1 Blockaddressof first input
s2 N I I Note1 Blockaddressof secondinput
s3 N 9 I Note 1 Blockaddressof third input
S4 N I I Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthinput
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules and CLCOUOAO$IO4-
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMM02
2046 for NMFCO1IO?,|MMFCO5,CBCO1and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFC03/04 and !MMFPO1|0UOS

APPLICATIOAIS

As well as selecting the lowest lnput value (common applica-

tion), functlon code 11 c€rn be used to memorfze tJre lowest
value over a period of tlme.

To memofize the lowest value over a pertod of ttme (set wfth

Sg of functlon code 9), use functlon code 11 wtth functlon
code 9 as shown tn Ftgure I l-1. Create a loop wlth the output
of function code 11 as an lnput to a functlon code 9 block and

Low Select
l-E96-2008 lsFEBregs 11 -1
FunctionCode 11

the output of function code 9 as an lnput to the functlon code

I I block. By selecting the output of the block executtng func-
tion code 1l as the value that functlon code 9 tracks, the out-
put of function code l1 feeds back lnto functlon code 11. As a
result, thls ytelds the same value as the output of functlon
code 11 for tJ:e period of tlme that tt ls the lnput wtth the
smallest algebraic value.

INPUT
$GT{AL

OUTPUT
(+2)

${-lO
gg-1O

Ftgure 77-7. Using F\ncfion Codc 77 to Memofize

alous Vahrc Ouer aPeriodoJTime

Low Select
1 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode12 - High/LowCompare

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functlon has tnro outputs. When the lnput ls equal to or

xceeds the hlgh llmlt, output N equals loglc l. When the
tnput ls equal to or less than the low llmlt, output N+l equds
loglc 1. If the vdue of the lnput ls between the asslgned llm-
Its, both outputs are a loglc O.

fortheoutputs.
addresses
NOTE:Thisblockusestwoconsecutive

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Highalarmouput:
0 - highfimitnot reached
1 = highlimitreached
N+1 B Low alarmouput:
0 = low limit not reached
1 = low limitreached

SPECIF/lCAT'ONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input
S2 Y 0.000 R Full Value of alarm poinUhigh limit
S3 Y 0.000 R Full Value of alann poinUlow limit
NOTE:
1. Maximurnvalues are: 254tor COM modules and CLCOUOAO3Io4
1023 for SLC01l2l and |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCO11D?,IMMFCO5, CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for IMMFGOUo4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

High/LowCompare
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 12-1
FunctionGode12

APPL'CATIO,IVS

Figure Lz-L shows functton code 12 used as a stgnal monltor.

In thls example the stgnal shows tank level and functlon
code 12 activates high (eight feet) and low (two feet) level
alarms.

52=8
S3=2

Figure 72-7. F.tnction Cde 72

Used a.s a Signal Monitor

Function code L2 may also be used to indicate when the dtf-

ference between two related stgnals is more or less than
desired as shown in Figure L2-2. In thls example alr flow ts
subtracted from fuel flow by using functlon code 15, and
functlon code L2 monltors the dtfferenee. If the dtfference
exceeds a preset value, tt wtll cause the approprlate alarm to
be activated.

NOTE:It is not necessaryfor the highalarmvaluein functioncode

12 (S2)to be greaterthanthe lowalarmvalue(S3).In the example
illustratedin Figure 12-2, if S2 of functioncode 12 = -1, and
53 = +1, the high and low outputswill both be logic 1 when fuel
and air flowsare within*1 of eachother.

FUEL FLOW

AIR FLow
Tp4srzlB

Figure 72-2. Fl.mction Code 12 Used to Monitor

tlae Relationshrp Betut een TVsoSrglnats

High/LowCompare
12 - 2 1sFEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode13 - lntegerTransfer

L DESCRIPTION

Thts functlon provldes a means for swttchtng lnteger values.

When <S3> equals zero, the output equals <S1>. When <S3>
equals one, the output equals <S2>.

NOTE:This is ditferentfrom the analogtransfer(functioncode 9),

whichhas an optionaltransfertime feature.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N I Outputequalsone of two possibleinputs

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof transfersignal:
0=51
1=32
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254lor COMmodulesandCLCOllOUOglo4
1023for SLC01/21
andCBC01
2046for NMFC01I02,IMMFC05
and lMMFPOllOzlOg
9998for IMMFCOS/O4

APPLICATIOAIS

A common use for functlon code 13 ts to dynamfca[y modiff

lnteger parameters. Figure 13- I lllustrates uslng functlon
code f g fith functlon codes 52 and 24 to change the set polnt
tracking optlon ln a manual/auto statlon. An output from a
remote control memory RCM) block (functlon code 62) to

lntegerTransfer
l-Eg6-2008 rsFEBrggs 13 - 1
FunctionCode 13

<S3> of functlon code f g determtnes whlch tnput (zero for

<Sl> or one for <S2>) ts sent to the adapt block. Fllnctlon
code 24 adapts <S14> of the baslc manuaUauto statlon to the
value recelved from the functton code l3 block.

For example, when the output of ttre RCM equals ?rlro, tlre
output of function code 13 equals <S1> (one) causlng <Sl4>
of the basic manual/auto statton to be adapted to set polnt
track option one (track the process variable).

57 r 100.OO0
g! r 145 S8. O.Ofl)
gg-14 59 r 4.0E+06
SlO- IOO.OOO
S11- O.q)O
S12= O.Qq)
S13r O
sl& O
S15r O
516- O

TP45t58D

Figure 73-7. htrtction Code 13 Used in a

Dgnamb Adaptiue Control StrategA

IntegerTransfer
13 - 2 ls FEB19es l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode 14 r Summer (4-lnput)

L DESCRIPTION

Thts functton computes the algebralc sum of up to four tnputs

wlth unlty galn.

The output equatlon ls:

Output(EU)- <St> + <52> + <S3>+ <94>

UTILIZATION

IMMFPO1

OUTPUTS

BIK Type I),escrlptlon

N R Outputvalueis the algebraicsum of the four inputsignals

SPECIFICATIO^'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof thirdinput
S4 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthinput
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are:254 for COM modules and CLCOIi0UA3IO4
1023 for SLC01|21 aN |MLMMO2
2C/l6for NMFCO1IO?,IMMFCO5,CBC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOUOAO3

Summer(4-lnput)
r-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 4- 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode15 - Summer(z-lnput)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functlon performs a wetghted sum of two tnputs. By

chooslng the proper galns and lnputs t}ts block can perform
proportlond, blas or dlfference functlons. It also can be used
as a scaler for notr-zero based slgnals by referenctng the sec-
ond tnput to a constant block.

The follonrlng equatlon descrtbes the operatton of thts functlon:

Output=(<Sl> x Sg)+ (<52>x g)

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Wpe Ilescrlptlon

N R Outputvalueis the weightedalgebraicsumof the 2 inputsignals

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinPut
S3 Y 1.000 R Full Gainparameterof first inPut
S4 Y 1.000 R Full Gainparameterof secondinPut
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:254lor COMmodulesand CLCOI|OUOUO4
1023lor SLC01|21and1MLMM02
CBC01,CSC01and|MMPCOI
20rc lor NMFCOI4O?,|MMFCO5,
9998for |MMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

(z-lnput)
Summer
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 15 - 1
FunctionCode15

APPLICATIOruS

Besides performlng proportlonal, blas or dtfference functlons,

thts code also can be used for scallng. By referenctng tl:e sec-
ond tnput to a constant block or to a rnanual set constant
block (function code 21, a no:n-zero based stgnal can be
scaled.

The example in Figure 15-1 shows how to scale an lnput wtth

a range of 200 to 5OO englneertng untts to give an output of
ten to 110 engineering unlts. Th,e Sg constant ts calculated
using the equation:

OutputSpan
$ =
<St> Span
110-10
s00- 200
= 0.333

Fixed block four connects to 52 to gtve lt a constanrt value of -

1.0. Speciflcation 52 eould be set to any flxed value by using
function code 2, but thls approach requlres more memory
than using a fixed block. Since <S2> and 54 are both con-
stants in thts example, they can be constdered as a unlt. The
following equation determtnes the value for the product of
<S2> and 54:

<52> xS4 - Outputmin. - (<St> min.x 53 min.)

In this example then:

<52>x S4 = 10 - [(200)(0.333)]
= -56.667

<S2> and 54 could then be set to arry allowable value that will
give the product of -56 .667. In our example, <S2> ls set to
- I.OOOso 54 is set to 56.667.

INPUT
200-so0 EU

Figure 75-7. Using Fvnction

Code 75 as a Scaler

Summer(z-lnput)
15-2 15 FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode16 - Multiply

GENERALDESCN/tr,NON

Thls functlon perforrns a multlpltcatton of two tnput slgnals

(<S1> by <S2>) wlth the result multlplled by a constant galn
parameter (Sg).

OutPut(EU)= 53 x (<S1>x <52>)

UTILIZAT'ON

IMMPCO1

OUTPUTS

Bfk rVpe Descrlptlon

N R Outputvalue is the weightedproductof the two inpq $g!q!g

SPECtFtCATIOwS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 6 Note1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 6 Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 Y 1.000 R Full Gainparameter
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: Zil tor COMmodulesandCLCO1IOUOS|o4
1023for SLC01|21and|MLI'IMO2
2W for NMFC01102,|MMFC05, CBC01,CSC01andIMMPCOl
9998for IMMFC0UO4 and IMMFPAUAU0S

Multiply
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 16 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode 17 - Divide

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functlon causes one tnput <S1> to be dtvtded by a sec-

ond lnput <S2> and thelr quotlent to be rnultlplted by a colt-
stant (Sg).

= Ssxg
output(EU)
<sz)
UTIL'ZATION

NMFCOl

OUTPUTS

Blk TyPE Descrlptlon

N R Outputvalueis the weightedquotientof the two inputsignals

SPECIFICATIOTVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 6 I Note1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 6 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
Note2
S3 Y 1.000 R Full Ouput gainparameter
NOTES:
1. Maximum values are: 254 for COM modules and CLCOI|OUOS|O4
1023 lor SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCO1|O?,!MMFCO5, CBC01, CSCO1and |MMPCOI
9998 for lMMFC03f04 and lMMFPOll0UOg
2. tf SA is set to 0, the output (N) is the largest value possible within thE rnodule (e.9., 4.0 E 06).

Divide
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 7- 1
ffi

o
 FunctionGode18- PIDErrorlnput :

L DESCRIPT'ON

Thls functlon provtdes proportlond, lntegral and derivative

actlons on €rn erTor slgnal developed from the process varlable
(PV) and set point (SP) lnputs. Th,e block has three lnputs and
one output. Besldes the error lnput, there a,re track reference
and track swltch lnput slgnals. If the track swltch <S4> ls a
zero, the output follows the track reference slgnal <S3>. Thls
provtdes for smootlr control transfers from manual to auto-
matlc mode. Ttte parameters for t}ts functlon block lnclude
€ur overall galn constant (S5), a proporttonal constant (SG), arl
lntegral constant (S7) and a derlvatlve galn constant (SB).

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R units(EU)
Outputis PIDsignalin engineering

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof errorsignal
S2 N 1 I 0or1 Reserved
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of track reference signal
S4 N 1 Note 1 Blockaddressof trackswitchsignal:
0 = track
1 = rolease
S5 Y 1.000 R Full (K) gainmultiplier
S6 Y 1.000 R Full (Kp) proportional constant
S7 Y 0.000 R 0 - 9.2E18 (K1)integralconstant(l/min)
s8 Y 0.000 R Full (G) derivativeconstant(min)

PIDErrorInput
l-E96-200B 15FEB1995 1 8- 1
FunctionCode 18

S PE CI FI CATIONS ftontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S9 Y 105.000 R Full Highouput limit
sl0 Y -5.000 R Full Lowoutputlimit
NOTE:
1. Ma:<imumvalues are: 254lor COM modules and CLC0IIOUOV0A
2046 for NMFCOI|O?and |MMFCOS
9998 for !MMFCOS/04and lMMFPOlloUOg

EXPLANATION

This function operates on the trirput error slgnd accordlng to

the equafion:

Output(%)= S5x f<S1>x (SO+ S7l + SgD)I

where:

I =dt

D = -d
dt

The purpose of ttre gatn multlplter (S5) ls to convert or scale

the output. Tjplcally lt ls used to convert the output to percent
for input to a station or output to a field devtce. Flgure l8-l
shows an example.

$3..1
9{.+1

sr8
3r9
cao
slt
sat
s24
gl5
828

Figure 78-7. Scaling tte Output UsrrrglS5

To calculate 55 in engineering units, use the equatton:

DESIRED
span
55=
CURRENTspan

PIDErrorInput
18-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 18

To calculate 55 ln percent, use the equatlon:

DESIREDma)(- DESIREDmin.
55=
Sl max.- St min.
or

55=
tw-o
Sl max.- St min.

If the slgnal range ls zero to f OOpereent, the posslble range of

the error stgnal ts -1OO to +1OO percent. Use the follourtng
equatton to determlne the gatn multtplter S5:

|u)
-Q5=
( s,qean)

For example, lf the range of an error slgnal ls zero to 5O cublc

feet per second, then determlne SS as follows:

s 5 =# = 2
NOTE:Whena negativeoutputis anticipated,the low outputlimit
(S10)mustbe adjustedin a negativedirectionto encompassthe
limitsof the outputsignalrange.

APPLICATIO,A'S

Figure L8-2 tllustrates a PID error input block used to cali-

brate a demand vdue with an error vahle. By ustng functlon
code 18 versus functton code 19, tlle error tnput to SI can be
reported to a console.

ERROR TO DISflTY
OIHER LOGIC, ETC.

s4
s5
sr8
sr9
52 .O g.
- -- IESIEEPSEAIL
ss
ct RRE[.|TSPAI.| sal
56.0.75 s22
57 r Q.6
S8 '0.0 El
ge r 105.0 s25
Sl0]5.0 srE
Sll.9
Sl2r 0 EI
q28,
sae

Ftgure 78-2. F\ncfion Code 18 Application

PIDErrorlnput
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 8- 3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode19 - PID(PVand SP)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functton provtdes proportlonal, lntegral and derlvatlve

actlon on an error stgnal developed from the process varlable
(PV) and set polnt (Se1 inputs. Ttre block has four tnputs and
one output. Besldes ttre PV and the SP inputs, there are track
reference and track swltch irnput signals. If the track snrttch
<S4> is a zero, the output will follow the track reference stgnal
<S3>. This provtdes smooth control transfers from manual to
automatlc mode. Ttle parameters for the function block tnclude
an overall gatn multtplier (S5), a proportional constant (SO), arr
lntegral constarrt (SZ) and a dertvative gafn constant (SB).

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N R units(EU)
Outputis PIDsignalin engineering

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof processvariableinput
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof set point
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof trackreferencesignal
S4 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof trackswitchsignal:
0 = track
1 = release
S5 Y 1.000 R Full (K)gainmultiplier
S6 Y 1.000 R Full (Kp)proportionalconstant
S7 Y 0.000 R -
0 9.2E18 (Ks)integralconstant(l/min)
S8 Y 0.000 R Full (Ko)derivativeconstant(min)
S9 Y 105.000 R Full Highoutputlimit
s10 Y -5.000 R Full Lowoutputlirnit

PID(PVand SP)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 19 - 1
FunctionGode19

SP ECIFl CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl1 Y 0 B 0or1 Set pointchange:
0 = hOIfIl?l
1 = integralonly(Kj* 0)
sl2 Y 0 B 0or1 Controlleractionon error:
0 = rgverseactingon error
1 = directactingon error
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are:254 for COM modules and CLCOUOAOSIW
2046 for NMFCOI|OZand |MMFC05
9998 lor lMMFCmf04 and lMMFPOrlOUog

EXPLANATION

Thts function supports two modes: dtrect and reverse. The

function is ln the direct mode when Sf 2 ls a logic I and ln the
reverse rnode when S12 is a logic 0.

Direct Mode In the direct mode the set point <S2> subtracts from the pro-
( S 4 = 1 a n d S 1 2 = 1 ) cess variable input <S I >.

ReverseMode In the reverse mode the process variable lnput <S1> is sub-
(S4= 1 and S12= 0) tracted from the set point <S2>.

Refer to Figure fg-I for a,n illustration of the PID algortthm

for function code 19.

ss The purpose of the gain multiplier (S5) is to convert or scale

the output. Typically it is used to convert the output to percent
for lnput to a staUon or output to a field device. Figure L9-2
shows an example.

To calculate 55 in engineering units, lrse the equation:

S5=

To calculate S5 in percent, use the equation:

DESIRED
max.- DESIREDmin.
55=
Sl matt.- St min.
or
100-0
55=
Sl max.- Sl min.

For example, with the function in the direct mode, the range of
the process variable signal is zero to 2OOcublc feet per second

PID (PV and SP)

19-2 ls FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 19

and the maximum control output is lOO percent. The galn

multiplier (S5) is determined as follows:

100
55=

S5=

55=

ModuleStart-Up PlDsuput = <S3>

(Block 10 - start-up
in progress= 1)

ManualMode PlDsuleut = <S3>

(S4 = 0)

High and Low Specificafions Sg and SlO set the Umits of the output block
Output Limits value (N). The default values of 59 and SlO provlde an output
(S9and S10) range of -5.OOOto +1O5.OOO.When a negatlve output ls arttlcl-
pated, the low output limit (StO) must be adJusted ln a negatlve
direction to encompass the lirnits of tl:e output slgnal ra,nge.

Set Point Change Specification Sl t is the set point modifier. This speclflcatlon
(sl1) defines the action taken on a set point change. A normal set-
ting results in a jump in the control output due to the propor-
tional contribution created by a set point change. When set to
integral only on set point change, the proportional and derlva-
tive contributions of the error are not applied with set potnt
changes. This action eliminates the jump in the control output
and results in an integral only action on a change in set polnt.

O - normal
I = integral only on set point change

EXAMPLES

Figure f 9- I illustrates tlle PID algorithm for function code 19.

Figure L9-2 shows how the PID btock is tSryically used wlth a
station in a control loop.

I\lotes for Figure 19-I

Note 1 - Bias The bias term is either equal to the value of the cornbined pro-
portional plus integral term calculated when K was last set to
I value greater than zero (normal reset), or it is equal to the
value of the traek reference (external reset or trackin$.

Note2 - Normal When K is less than zero (proportional plus lntegral), the
Reset,Auto Select internal value of the integral term is determined based on the
Resetand External PID reset mode specified in 55 of function code 82.
Reset

PID(PVandSP
15 FEB1995 -3
l-Eg6-2008
FunctionCode19

sPl
nguenseo

PV onEcr
---€
-r" RE\/ERSE
(gEErp!E3)
TRACK
REFERENCE

K r s0 (sEElorEo (WHEJ[S,>o] (sEFlQ[E 3) TRACK

INTEGRAL
ONLYON ,\_ggt3gr
SET POINT RET.EASE
CI-I.ANGE
AffERl.IAt RESET
(sEErrcrTE2l
OR
NORMAL TR^CK IS
ERROR
CALCUI.ATION

NORMAT
G€Er€re2)

(SEENOTEs)
fl)'K'K1'Ke DERIVATIVE
60'K'KD + K1'At

b-lgwe 19-1. PID (PV and, SP)

When 55 equals zero (normal reset), the PID calculates the

value of the internal integral by summing the proporttonal
term with the previous vdue of the internal lntegral.

When S5 equals two (external reset), the PID sets the value of
the internal integral to the value of the curent track reference.

When S5 equals one (auto selected external reset), the PID

sets the value of the internal integral to the value of the cur-
rent track reference only if the value of the PID output from
the previous executlon perlod does not match the current
track reference value. Otherwise, the PID calculates the ilrter-
nal integral value as if it were set for normal reset. The auto
select external reset mode only applies when K is less than
zero. When K is greater than zero (proportlonal ody), the
auto selection is disabled.

Note3 - Range The track reference, the proportlonal plus lntegral term, and
Limlting the output are all range llmlted based on the hlgh and low
limtts spectfled tn 59 and SlO respectlvely. The hfgh and lour
range limlts for the derivatlve term €rre:

Derivativehigh limit - outputhigh limit - outputlow limit

Derivativelow limit = outputlow limit - outputhigh limit

PID (PV and SP)

19 - 4 1sFEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode19

56 =5
57 = 90.0
gt = 10.0
39 = 5.0
S10 = [email protected]
Sll = 0.0
S12=0
S13 = €.0
S14 s 0.0
S15 or0
516 = 255
S17e0
S23=0
S31 = 59.9

Figure 79-2. PID Controt utith Deuistion

PID (PV and SP)

l-E96-2008 19 - 5
ffi
o

o
 Function Code 20 r lndicator Station

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functlon transmlts up to three real values to the NDISOI

Dtgltal Indlcator Statlon. The lnput to thts functlon block
must come from an analog eKceptlon report (functlon code 30)
or a dtgttal exceptlon report (functlon code 45) block.

NOTE:A blockaddressmustbe specifiedfor all threeinputsor the

digitalindicatorstationwill not cycle throughthe channetsusing
the VARbutton.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N I No usableoutput

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof thirdinput
S4 N 0 I 8-11 Indicatorstationaddress
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254lor COM modules and CLCOUOAOAo4-
1023for SLC01/21
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,IMMFCOS and CBCO1
9998 tor IMMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOUOAO3

lndicatorStation
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 20-1
FunctionCode 20

INDICATOR
STATION
VALUE 1

INDICATOR OT,TPUTGOESTO
srATlotl tNDtcATOR SrATtOtl
VALUE2 v|A STANDARD
STATIOT{CABLES

INDICATOR
srATtotl
VALUE3

Figure 20- 7. TApicaIIndicator Staflon hnfigwallon

IndicatorStation
20-2 15FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode 21 - M/A Station (Basic)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The M/A statlon (baslc) ls one of three statlon functions

(baslc, cascade, and ratlo) that provtdes €rn lnterfaee between
a controller module and the dtgltal control statton (DCS), alta-
log control statlon (SAC), operator lnterface statlon (OIS) and
management cornmand system (MCS).

The bastc statlon generates a set polnt and provldes manual/

automatlc transfers, control output adJushnent ln the man-
ual mode, and set potnt adJustment llr t]re automatlc mode. If
set polmt tracking is selected, SI4 ldentlfles the trrput that the
set point will track (<Sl> or <S2>).

Other options tnclude a control output track input <S5> and

a manual interlock input <56>.

When tJ:e control output track switch <S5> equals one, the
control output tracks the value of the control output track
stgnal <S4>.

The manu,al interlock <56> may be used to hold the statlon in

manual mode.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Description

N R Controloutput(CO)in percent(0%to 100%)
N+1 R Set point in engineeringunits
N+2 B Mode:
0 = manual
1 = automatic
N+3 B Level:
0 = local
1 = computer

M/A Station(Basic)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 2 1- 1
FunctionCode21

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N+4 B Always0 for basicstation
N+5 B Computerbackupindicatescomputertime-out:
0=hO
1 =loS

SPECIFtCATtOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deserlptlon

S1 N 5 I 0-255 Blockaddressof processvariable
S2 N 5 I 0-255 Blockaddressof set pointtrackvalue
S3 N 5 I 0-255 Blockaddressof autosignalor input
S4 N 5 I 0-255 Blockaddressof controloutputtracksignal
S5 N 0 I 0-255 Blockaddressof controloutputtrackswitch:
0 = DOnn?l
1 = track
S6 N 0 l 0-255 Blockaddressof manualinterlock:
1 = ln?nuallock
Q= rglgase
S7 yt 100.000 R Fulf Processvariablehighalarmpointin engineering units
S8 yt 0.000 R Full Processvariablelow alarmpointin engineeringunits
se yt 4.0 E06 R Full Processvariableset pointdeviationalarmpointin
engineering
units
s10 N 100.000 R Full Signal span of set point and process variable
s11 N 0.000 R Full Zero value of process variable
s12 N 0.000 R Full Zera value of set point
s13 N 0 0-255 unitidentifier(Note:for consoleuse only)
Engineering
s14 Y 0 0-2s5 Set point track option:
Q=OO
| = process variable <S1>
2 - <S2>/manual only
3 = <S2>/manual and auto
s15 N 0 0-255 Computertime-outoption:
0 = coffiputerauto/manual
modeunchanged
1 = coffiputermanual
2 = coffiputerauto
3 = Golnputercascade/ratio
4 = localauto/manual modeunchanged
5 = localmanual
6 = localauto
7 = localcascade/ratio
sl6 N 0 l 0-255 Controlstationaddress:
>15= ro station
NOTE:
1. S7,58 andS9 aretunablebut notadaptable.

M/AStation(Basic)
2 1- 2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Function Gode21

EXPLANATION

Specifications

51 IPV Btock number whose output ts the process varlable. Thts

lnput drlves the dfgltal statlon process varlable lndlcator (ln
engtneerlng unlts).

52 - SPT Block number whose output the set pofirt tracks, dependlng
on S14 (track set polnt).

s3 - coAuTo Block number whose output vdue ls the control output when
the station ls ln auto mode (usually the output of a PID bloek).

s4 - coTRcK Block number whose output ts the eontrol output when tl.e
station ls trackfng (control output overrlde mode) and ls the
iniflal value for the control output on start-up.

55 - COFLG Block number whose output value determlnes whether the

control output ls to be tracked. If the output of the block is:

Q = no trackrng (normal)
t = track <S4>

S6 - REMLOCK Block number whose output value determines whether the

statlon locks ln manual mode.

O=rlo
I =}/€S

NOTE:Specifications57, 58 and 59 are tunablebut not adaptable

(functioncode 241.

S7 I PVH Engtneerlng untt value of process varlable at whtch a htgh

alarm wil be generated and dtsplayed.

s8 - PVL Engineertng untt value of process variable at whlch a low

alarm will be generated and dlsplayed.

59 - PVDEV Engineering unlt value of allowed devlatlon between process

variable and set polnt. A hlgh devlatlon alarm occurs when
the process variable ls greater than ttre set point and the
value of the difference between the two ls greater than or
equal to thts specificatlorl. A low devlatton alarm occurs when
the process variable ls less than the set potnt and the value of
the difference between the two ts greater than or equal to tltis
specification. These two alarm condttJons only report vla €rn
exception report (not reported to a DCS or SAC statlon).

SlO - EUSPAN Value corresponding to engineering unit span for process

variable and set point.

S11 - EUPVZ Value correspondtng to eqglneertng untt ?rlro for pnocess rrarlable.

M/A Station(Basic)
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 2 1- 3
FunctionCode 21

S12 - EUSPZ

s13 - EUID
Value correspondleg to englneerlng untt zero for set polnt.

Engitreertng units t54le.

I
S14 - TRCKSP Value that determines whlch tnput the set polnt wttl track tn
manual mode. Selecilng three causes set potnt tractdng tn
both ma.nual and auto modes.

Q= no tracking
I = track PV <S1> (manual mode)
t, = track SP <S2> (manual mode)
$= track <S2> always (auto and manual)

S15 - COMPDEF Value that determines the system default mode lf the com-
puter tlmes out while the loop ls under computer control.

Q = computer auto/manual mode unchanged

I = cofilputer manual
) = computer auto
$ = computer cascade/ratio (unused in functlon code ?Ll
Q = local auto/rnanual mode unchanged
$ = local manual
$ = local auto
7 = local cascade/ratio (unused Ir functlon code 2I)

S16 - DIGSTAAD Value of the hardware digftal station address that tJle statton
functlon bloek ls representtng. A number greater than 15
lndicates no hardware statlon. When uslng a loop command
module, address f5 frdleates a second dtsplayed statlon.
When using a DCS or SAC statlon, valtd addresses are zero
through seven.

STATIONOUTPUTEXAMPLE

A basic standard station is assigned to block number 30. The

system then assigns the next five block numbers as listed in
Table zL-L. If there is a need to asstgn more block numbers
after the station block, six must be added to the statlons
block number to obtain the next available block number.

In this manner, each output of a statton block has a unlque

reference number.

Table 2 I - 7. Staf&cn Outpr:f Description

Block Number Station Output
30 CO (ControlOutput)
31 SP (SetPoint)
32 A (Mode)
33 C (Level)
34 B (Station Mode)
35 CF (ComputerBackup)

M/AStation(Basic)
21 - 4 1sFEBlees l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode21

Station Operating Stafes

The statlon functlon block lnterfaces the controller module to

the dtgltal control statlon (DCS), analog control statton (SAC),
management command system (MCS), operator lnterface sta-
tlon (OIS) or a computer through a network lnterface untt
(NIU). Ttre opemtlng state of the statlon block conslsts of lts
level (local /computer), mode (manual/auto) and the statlon
mode fbasle / eascade/ratlo). Thts operattng state determlnes
whlch outputs may be a{fusted from the operator lnterface
devlces. The modlflcatlon of the operattng state and block
output is determined by the block tnputs, messages recelved
over the module bus and messages received from the DCS or
SAC station.

Control Output Tracking

When the control output track state <S5> equals one, the out-
put of the block overrides the current value of <S4>. The
actud operating level and mode Erre saved, artd will be
restored when the track flag lnput goes to zero.

In the local mErnual state, the control output is adJusted from

the interface device unless a connected control station indi-
cates that the analog output for control is blpassed. In this
case, the control signal comes from tJre eontrol station b)?€tss
clrcuitry and the statton will track the control statlon control
output signal.

The output of the statton ls a percentage from zero to f O0 Per-

cent. If the input to the station ls a cdculation function, the
input value must be scaled to percent, and the output of the
station scaled to the requlred value, external to the statlon.

Manual lnterlock

When the manual interlock state <56> equds one, the statlon
is forced to the manual mode. When the interlock is released,
the station remains ln the m€utual mode.

Set Point Tracking

The set point may be adjusted ln the marrual mode from the
control station or tnterface device only lf set point tracking is
not selected (zero for Sf4). If one of the trackfng optlons is
selected, the set point wiU be determined by the option chosen.

ilrl/AStation(Basic)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 2 1- 5
FunctionCode 21

EXAMPLES

s2 Number of tl:e block output the set potnt tracks as deter-

mined by the set point track optlon (S14).

sl4 Set point track option:

Q = no tracking

I = track PV <S1> when statlon ls tr manual

2 = track <S2> ln manual mode only

$ = track <S2> always (auto and manual) - no dlrect con-

trol of set point from statton

lfSl4=0 The set point can be varied using local or cornputer manual
control.

l f S l4 = 1 The set point tracks <S1> when the statlon ls ln manual. Thts
provides bumpless transfer when the statlon returns to auto-
matic mode if the statlon and PID are correctly conflgured. In
this mode the set point cannot be varled manually.

lf 52 = Blk no. and The set point tracks <S2> when t}e statlon ls ln manual. The
5 1 4= 2 set point may be changed when the statlon returns to auto-
matic. A bump in the set point value is posslble when the sta-
tion is switched to automatic mode.

lf 52 = Blk lto. and The set point tracks <S2> when the statton ls tn either auto-
S 1 4= 3 matic or m€uf,ual mode. No direct set poiret adJustments can
be made from the statlon.

Deviation Alarms

A hlgh deviation alarrn occurs when the process vartable ls

greater than the set point, and the absolute value of the dlf-
ferenee between the two is greater than or equal to 59. A low
deviation alarm occurs when the process varlable ls less than
the set point, and the absolute value of tl:e dlfference between
the two is greater than or equal to 59. These two alarm condi-
tions only report via an exception report (not reported to a
DCS or SAC station).

Figure 2t- I illustrates a manual/auto statlon used tn a single

input/single output configuration. The PID block (functlon
code 19) provides proportional, lntegral, and derlvatlve con-
trol based on the process varlable <Sl> and set polnt <S2>
inputs. The signal developed by the PID block is a corrected

M/A Station (Basic)

21 - 6 ls FEBt99s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 21

process varlable value, used as the auto slgnal <S3> by the

baslc statlon block.

NOTES:
1. A stationoutputis zeroto 100 percent.Therefore,if the input
to the stationis a calculationfunction,the value must be scaledto
percentand the outputof the stationscaledto the requiredvalue
extemalto the station.The control ouput scale on hardwaresta-
tions can be drivenby the strationoutputor by a feedbacksignal.
This appliesto two strationsconnectedto a giventerminationunit.
Interconnected stationsdo not havethis option.

2. The station can only be transferredto computeroperation

when a networkinterfaceunit and computerare involvedin the
transaction.Pressingthe computerpushbuttonon the stationwill
not providea usableouput.

I v
S5r 1.000
56 r 1.000 S7 = 100.000
57: O000 SE = 0.000
S8 = O000 SOr 4.0E*OO
S0 r 1(F.0@ S10lr l00.0dl
S10- €.00 Sfi= 0.m0
S11r 0 $2= 0.000
S12=0 S13r 0
S14! 0
S15=0
S10EtE

Ftgure 27-7. Basic Stnfion with OutpfiTraclcirtg

M/A Station(Basic)
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 2 1- 7
ffi

o
 FunctionCode22 - M/A Station(Gascade)

GENENALDESCRIPTION

Cascade ts one of three statlon functlons that provldes EIn

lnterface between the controller module and oper:ator lnter-
face untts, lncludlng tl:e andog and df$tal control statlons
and the operator lnterface statlon.

The cascade statlon provtdes all ttre baslc functtons plus an

addlttonal mode that dlows the set polnt to be controlled by
another functlon block. When tJre statlon ls ln cascade mode,
the value found tn the block speclffed by <S2> url[ be the set
potnt. In ttre bastc (non-cascade) mode, ttre set potnt slgnal ls
equal to the value set by the operator.

Other optlons lnclude a control output overrlde lnput <S5>

and a manual lnterlock lnput <56>.

The control output overrlde forces the control output value to

track <S4> (e.9., when immedlate actlon ls requlred to main-
taln process safety).

The manual lnterlock may be used to hold the statlon ln man-

ual mode, whlch allows condltlonal logtc to be used to prevent
automatlc operatlons.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Controloutput(CO)in percent(%)
N+1 R units(EU)
Set pointin engineering
N+2 B Mode:
0 = m?OU8l
1 = automatic
N+3 B Level:
0 = local
1 = coffiputer

M/A Station(Cascade)
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 22-1
Function Code22

OUTPUTS @ontinuad)

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N+4 B Stationmode:
0 = basic
1 = c"Sc8dg
N+5 B Computerbackupindicatescomputertime-out:
0=DO
| =lgS

SPECIFICAT'O'VS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 0-255 Blockaddressof processvariable
S2 N 5 0-255 Block address of set point track value
S3 N 5 0-255 Blockaddressof autosignalinput
S4 N 5 0-255 Blockaddressof controloutputtracksignal
S5 N 0 0-255 Blockaddressof trackswitch:
0 = DOIIIIdI
1 = track
S6 N 0 0-255 Blockaddressof manualinterlock:
1 = ffidDU8l

S7 yt 100.000 R Full Processvariablehighalarmpoint

S8 yt 0.000 R Full Process variable low alarm point
S9 yt 4.0 E06 R Full Process variable set point deviation alarm point
sl0 N 100.000 R Full Signalspanof set pointand processvariable
s11 N 0.000 R Full Zerovalueof processvariable
sl2 N 0.000 R Full Zero value of set point
sl3 N 0 I 0-255 unitidentifierfor consoleuse
Engineering
s14 Y 0 0-255 Setpointtrackoption:
0=OO
1 = processvariable
2 = S2lmanualonly
$ = SZmanualandauto
sl5 N 0 0-255 Computer time-out option:
0 = Gotnputerauto/manual mode unchanged
1 = coffiputer manual
2 = GOtTlputer auto
3 = coffiputer cascade/ratio
4 = local auto/manual mode unchanged
5 = local manual
6 = local auto
7 = local cascade/ratio
sl6 N 0 I 0-255 Control station address (>15 indicates no station)
NOTE:
1. Specifications 57, SB and 59 are tunable but not adaptable.

M/A Station (Cascade)

22-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code22

EXPLANATION

Specifications

sl -Pv Speclflcatlon Sl ls the block number whose output ls the pro-

cess variabte (tn engineertng untts). Thls input drlves the con-
trol station process vartable tndlcator.

S2 - CASCADE Spectflcatlon 52 ls the block address of the cascade input.

The output of t}ts block ls the set polnt when the statton is tn
cascade mode or set polnt track is enabled (see Sl4).

s3 - coAuro Speclflcatlon Sg ts the block number whose output value ls

the control output when the statlon ls ln auto mode (usually
the output of a PID block).

s4 - corRcK Specification 54 is the btock number whose output is the con-

trol output when the statlon ls tracking (control output over-
rlde mode), and ls the tntfial value for the control output on
start-up.

s5 - coFLG Specification 55 is the block number whose output value

determines if the control output ts ln the track mode-

O=no
I =f€S

56 - REMLOCK Specificatlon SO ls the block number whose output value

determines if tlle station locks ire m€urual mode.

O=D,o
1 =}reS

NOTE:Specifications 57, S8, and 59 are tunablebut not adapt-

able (refer
to functioncode 24).

s7 - PvH Specification 57 is the engtneering unlt (EU) value of process

variable that a high alarm witl be generated.

58 - PVL Specification S8 ts the engineering untt value of process vari-

able that a low alarm will be generated.

sg - PVDEV Speclfication 59 ls the engtneertng untt value of allowed devi-

a6on between process vartable and set potnt. A hrgh devlation
alarm occurs when the process variable is greater than the
set point and the value of the dlfference between the two ls
greater than or equal to this specification. A low deviation
alarm occurs when the process varlable ls less than the set
point and the value of the dlfference between the two ls
greater than or equal to this specificatlon.

S1O- EUSPAN Speciflcation SfO is the vdue correspondlng to engineering

untt span for process varlable and set point.

M/A Station(Cascade)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 22-3
Function Code22

sll - EUPVZ Speclficatlon Sf I ls the value correspondlng

unit zero percent for process varlable.
to englneering
t
S12 I EUSPZ Specificatlon S12 ls the value correspondtng to englneertng
unit zero percent for set polnt.

S13 - EUIDENT Specification Sf g is the engineertng untts t54re.ThJs identlfles

the engireeering units to be assoclated to the value when tt ls
dlsplayed on a console.

S14 - TRCKSP Specificatlon S14 is the value that determines whJch tnput
the set point will track ln manual mode. Selectlng tlrree
causes set point tracktng tr botl: manual and auto modes.

Q= no tracking
I = track PV <Sl>
2= track cascade <S2>
$= track <S2> always (auto and manual)

s 1 5 - COMPDEF Specification S15 is the value that determlnes the system

default mode if the computer tlmes out while the loop ls
under computer control.

Q= computer (auto/manual mode unchanged)

1= cortputer manual
2 = computer auto
$ = computer cascade/ratio
4 = local (auto/manual mode unchanged)
$= local manual
$ = local auto
7= local cascade/ratto

S16 - DIGSTAAD Value of the hardware control statton address that the statlon
function block is representing. A number greater than f5
indicates no hardware station. Valid addresses for the hard-
ware stations are zero through seven.

STATIONOUTPUTEXAMPLE

Block number 3O is assigned to a standard station. Ttre sys-

tem then assigns the next five block numbers to the block. If
more block numbers are needed after the statton block, you
must first add six to the station's block number in order to
obtain the next available block number. In this manner, each
output of a station block has a unique number.

Station Operating States

This station function block acts as an tnterface between a con-

troller module and its assoctated control statlon, operator
lnterface station, management command systern, or a com-
puter through a network interface unlt. The operattng state of
the station block is its level (local/computer), mode (manual/

M/A Station(Cascade)
22-4 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code22

auto) and the statlon mode (baslc/e.ascade /ratJo). Thls oper:at-

lng state determtnes whtch outputs may be adJusted from the
operator tnterface devlces. The modlflcatlon of the operatlng
state and the block output ls determlned by the block lnput
and messages recelved from assoclated tnterface devlces.

Control Output Tracking

When the control output track state <S5> equals one, lt does
not affect tJle flag output of the block, but wtll overrlde t}re
current control output wtttr the value Ir the block speclfled by
<g>. The actud operating state ls saved, and will be restored
when the track flag lnput goes to zero.

ln the local manual and computer manual stat€s, the control

output ts adJusted from the lnterface devtce unless a con-
nected control statlon lndlcates that the analog output for the
control ts blpassed. In thts case, the control signal comes
from the control station bypass and the station tracks the
control station control output slgnal.

Whlle the statton ls under local manud control, the output ls

zero to f OOpercent. If ttre lnput to the statton ls a calculation
functtorl, tlee lnput value must be scded to percent, and the
output of the statton scaled to the requtred vahte, external to
tJre statlon.

When tlle manual lnterlock state <S6> equals one, the station
trlps to the manual mode.

Sef Point Tracking

The set point may be adJusted from the operator lnterface

devlce only if set polnt tracking is not selected (zero for S14).
If one of the tracking opttons ls selected, set point control witl
be determlned by the optlon chosen.

EXAMPLES

S2 The number of the block contalnlng the output that the set
point tracks ln manual mode.

s14 Set polnt track option:

O = rro tracktng. Set point ca,n be varled using local man-

ual control.

I = track PV <St> when station ls tn martual. Provides

bumpless transfer when the statlon returns to auto-
matlc mode; set potret c€urnot be varled manually.

2 = track value ln block selected ln <S2> ln manual mode

only. Set point may be changed when the station

M/A Station(Cascade)
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 22 - 5
Function Code22

returns to automatlc mode. A bump ls posslble when

transfer occurs.

$ = track value in block selected ln <S2> always (auto and

manual); no direct control of set potnt from statlon

Deviation Alarms

A high deviation alarm occurs when the process vartable ls

greater than the set point, and the absolute value of the dlf-
ference between tJle two ts greater than or equal to 59. A low
devlation alarm occurs when the process varlable ls less than
the set point, and the absolute value of the dlfference between
the two ls greater than or equal to S9. These two alarm condl-
tions report to the control station or tJre loop for dlsplay on a
console.

Figure 22-L tllustrates cascade control of an lnput uslng the

control output of a baslc manud/auto statlon as the cascade
input <S2> to a cascade manual/auto statton.

NOTES:
1. Whilea DCSor SAC station(in cascadeoperation)is under
localmanualcontrol,the outputis zeroto 100percent.Therefore,
if the processvariableinputto the stationis a calculation
function,
the value rnustbe scaledto percentand the outputof the station
scaledto the requiredvalue,extemalto the station.The control
outputbar graphon a DCS or SAC stationcan be drivenby the
stationoutputor by a feedbacksignal.This appliesto the first two
stationsconnectedto a giventerminationunit.Stationsconnected
by daisychaindo not havethisoption.

2. The station can only be transferredto computeroperation

when there is a computeravailablethrougha networkinterface
unit. Depressingthe computerpushbuttonon the stationwill not
providea usableoutput.

3. Whena stationtag numberis referenced in a trendblockin an

operatorconsole,the processvariableinput is trended,not the
outputof the stationblockN. Whenthe stationis in cascademode,
the set pointsignalis equalto the cascadesignal.In the automatic
mode,the set pointsignalis equalto the set pointoutputsignal
(N+1).

M/AStation(Cascade)
22-6 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode22

or00 %

Slr0
S2.1S Sli r lO00
56 r lS0 S7r 100.000
S7r0O00 S8 r 0.0O
S8r0J00 SOrf.OE+G
SOr 16.ffi srot 100.000
stol-t.00 Sllr0O00
Sllr0 S12r0.000
Sl2!0 St3r0
Sltt'0
Sl5r0
SlE 0

5 1. 0
S2 r 100 55 r 1.00
SBr t.(XlO 57 r 10O00
S7 10.000 S8-0.0il)
S8 s0.000 SOr4.0E+06
S9r 105.000 S10E 100.000
sro-€.000 Sllr0.0fi)
S11=0 Sl2-0.000
Sl2e0 Sl3F0
Sta'0
SlsF0
S18s0

Flgure 22-7. Slmplc Cascade Statfon

M/A Station (Cascade)

l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 2 2- 7
ffi
o

o
 FunctionCode23 - M/AStation(Ratio)

GENERATDESCRIPTIOA'

Ratlo ls one of three statton functlons that provldes an lnter-

face between a controller module and the followtng interface
units: the digital control statton (DCS), operator tnterface sta-
tion (OIS), management command system (MCS), analog con-
trol statlon (SAC), and process control untt (PCU).

A ratto statlon provldes the same functlons as a baslc station

tn normal mode, but dtffers from tJre cascade statlon ln its
method of set potnt generatton whlle ln the ratlo mode. TIle
wtld vartable <S2> multlplled by a ratlo adJustment factor
(ratto lndex) determlnes the set potnt output whtle ln ratio
mode. The tnlflal ratto lndex vdue ls calculated by the statlon
to malntain the current set polnt output value when the sta-
tion is placed lnto the ratlo mode. Whlle ln the ratio mode, the
ratio index value is displayed as follows.

For hard stations (i.e., IISACO1 and NDCSO3), the ratio index
is displayed on the alphanumeric display. Actual set point is
displayed on the set point bar graph.

For consoles, the ratio lndex is displayed in the control

prompt/fietd and tdentlfled wtth the label TRG? RAT on the
control prompt when the user requests to change lt. The actual
set point (as calculated by mulflptyfng the ratlo lndex by the
wild variable) ls dlsplayed on the set poimt value/indtcator.

Refer to functlon code 80, Figure 8O-2, control station element.

The ratlo index value can be a{Justed (ramped up or down) by

the operator to obtabr the destred set polnt output. Spectlica-
tions 52 and S14 select ttre tnput value that the set point
tracks in tlle m€rnual baslc mode. In the baslc (non-ratio) mode,
the set point signal is equal to the value set by the operator.

NOTE:The maximumratioindexis ten andthe minimumpractical

ratioindexis 0.05.

Other options include a control output override <S5> and a

manual interlock <56>.

The control output override forces the control output value to

a particular state (e.9., when the maintenance of process
safety requlres lmmediate action).

The manual interlock may be used to hold the station in marl-

ual mode. This allows eondittonal logic to be used for prevent-
ing automatic operattolls.

M/A Station(Ratio)
t-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 23-1
FunctionCode 23

UTILIZATION
o

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N R Control output (CO) in o/o
N+1 R Set point in engineeringunits
N+2 B Mode:
0 = rDdnudl
1 = automatic
N+3 B Level:
0 = local
1 = cotnputer
N+4 B Stationmode:
0 = basic
1 = ratio
N+5 B Computerbackupindicatescomputertime-out:
0=DO
1 =!9S

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 0-255 Blockaddressof process
variable
S2 N 5 0-255 Block address of wild variable
S3 N 5 0-255 Blockaddressof autosignalor input
S4 N 5 l 0-255 Blockaddressof controloutputtracksignal(TR)
S5 N 0 0-255 Block address of track switch (TS):
0 = Do (normal)
| = !€s (track)
S6 N 0 I 0-255 Block address of manual interlock:
0=DO
1 - yes (rnanual)
S7 yt 100.000 R Full Process variable high alarm point
S8 yt 0.000 R Full Processvariablelowalarmpoint
S9 yt 4.0 E 06 R Full Process variable set point deviation alarm point
s10 N 100.000 R Full Signal span of set point and process variable
sl1 N 0.000 R Full Zero value of process variable
sl2 N 0.000 R Full Zero value of set point
s13 N 0 I Full Engineeringunit identifierfor console use

M/A Station (Ratio)

23-2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 23

SP ECI FI CATIONS pontinued)

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon

s14 Y 0 I Full Set pointtrack option:
Q=DO
| = proCessvariabfe
2 = <S2>/manual only
3 = <S2>/manual and auto
sl5 N 0 I Full Computertime-outoption:
0 = coffiputerauto/manualrnodeunchanged
1 = colTtputermanual
2 = corftputerauto
3 = coffiputercascade/ratio
4 = localauto/manual modeunchanged
5 = localmanual
6 = loc"l auto
7 = localcascade/ratio
sl6 N 0 I 0-255 Controlstationaddress(>15indicatesno station)
NOTE:
1. Specifications S7, SB and 59 are tunable but not adapliable.

EXPLANATION

Specifications

sl -PV Block number whose output ls the process varlable (ln engt-
need,ng untts). Thts lnput drtves tlle control statlon process
varlable lndicator.

s 2 - WILD Block address of external reference input. A multtple of the

output of thls block is the set point signal when the statlon ls
in ratio mode.

S3 - COAUTO Block number whose output value is the control output when
the station ts ln auto mode (usually the output of a PID
block).

s 4 r COTRCK Block number whose output is the control output when the
station is tracklng (control output override mode) and ls the
initial value for the control output on start-up.

s 5 - COFLG Block number whose output value determines whether the

control output is to be tracked.

Q = no (normal)
I = ]r€s (track)

s6 - MlLocK Block number whose output value determlnes whether the

statlon locks ln manual mode.

O=IIo
] = yes (manual)

S7, SBand39 are tunablebut not adaptable.

NOTE:Specifications

M/A Station(Ratio)
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEBrges 23 - 3
FunctionCode23

S7 I PVH Engineering unit (EU) value of process variable that a high

alarm is generated.

s 8 - PVL Engineering unit value of process vartable tl:at a low darm is

generated.

59 I PVDEV Engineering unit value of allowed devtation between process

variable and set point. A high deviatlon alarm generates when
the process variable is greater than tJ:e set point and the
value of the difference between the two is greater than or
equal to this specification. A low deviation alarm ls generated
when the process variable is less than ttre set point and the
value of the difference between the two is greater than or
equal to this speeification,.

SlO - EUSPAN Value corresponding to engineering unit span for process

variable and set point.

sll - EUPVZ Value corresponding to engineering unit zero pereent for pro-
cess variable.

s12 - EUSPZ Value corresponding to engineering unit zero percent for set
point.

S13 - EUIDENT Engineering units t54te.

S14 - TRCKSP Value that determines which input the set point tracks in
manual mode. Seleeting three causes set point tracking in
both manual and auto modes.

Q = no tracking
I = track PV <S 1>
2 = track wild <S2> (manual only)
3 - track <S2> always (auto and manual)

S15 - COMPDEF Value that determines the system default mode if the com-
puter times out while the loop is under computer control.

Q= computer (auto/manual mode unchanged)

I = cofilputer manual
2= computer auto
$= computer cascade/ratio
4= local (auto/manual mode unchanged)
$= local manual
$= local auto
/ = local cascade/ratio

516 - DIGSTAAD Value of the hardware eontrol station address that the station
function block is representing. A number greater than f5
indicates no hardware station.

The ratio station function code can control a control station in

both basic and ratio modes. When a ratio station ls in the
basic mode, it funcUons like a baslc station (functton code 21).

M/A Station(Ratio)
23 - 4 ls FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Gode23

The set point of a control station in ratio mode is the product of

the multiplication of the ratio index by the wild varlable <S2>.

When a control statlon in ratlo mode ls displayed on a SAC/

DCS hard station, the value shown ln the alphanumerlc dls-
play is the ratio irldex, not the set potnt. The bar graph dls-
play on the hard statlon dlsplays the set polnt. The SEf W
arrd SET DOWN pushbuttons on the hard statton can be used
to ramp the ratio index value up or down.

When a control station is displayed on a console, lt ls dls-

played using tJ:e standard control station element as shown
in Figure 8O-2 in function code 80. For control statlons ln
ratio mode, tJre value shown on the control/promPt fleld ls
the ratio index and is identified by the label TRGT Rlt?, The
moving set point value/indicator field displays the calculated
set point value. The ratio index value may be changed vla the
console by first depressing the SET key and then either rarnP-
ing the ratio index up or down uslng the ramP keys or dtrectly
setting the ratio index by entering a numeric value tn
response to the TRCI RA? control/prompt field.

STATIONOUTPUTEXAMPLE

A standard station is assigned to block number 30. The sys-

tem then assigns the rr-€xt five block numbers as llsted ln
Table zg-L. If there ts a need to asstgn more block numbers
after tlle station block, six must be added to the statlon block
number to obtain the next available block number.

Tahle 23-7. Stafion Output Descripdon

Block Number StationOutput
30 CO (controloutput)
31 SP (setpoint)
32 A (mode)
33 C (level)
34 R/B(stationmode)
35 CF (computerbackuP)
36 Next available block

In this manner, each output of a station block has a unlque

reference number.

Station Operating States

The station function block acts as an interface from a corl-

troller module to the digital control station (DCS), artalog con-
trot station (SAC), operator lnterface statlon (OIS), or a
computer through a network interface unit (NIU). The operat-
ing state of the station block is its level (local / computer),
mode (manual/auto) and the station mode (basic/cascade/

M/A Station(Ratio)
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB199s 23-5
FunctionCode 23

ratio). The operating mode determlnes whlch outputs may be

adjusted from the operator interface devices. The modifica-
tion of the operating state and tlle block output is determlned
by the block input and messages received from operator
interface stations.

Control Output Tracking

When the control output track state <S5> equals one, lt does
not affect the flag output of the bloek but wfll overrlde tJre
current control output with the value ire the block specifled by
<S4>. The actual opera0ng state is saved, and ls restored
when the track flag input goes to zero.

In tJ,e local manual and computer manual states, the control

output is adjusted from the interface device unless a con-
nected DCS or SAC indicates that the analog output for the
control is b1ryassed. In this case, the control signal comes
from the DCS or SAC blpass and the station will track the
DCS or SAC control output signal.

While the station is under local m€u3,ualcontrol, the output is

a percentage from zero to tOO percent. If the input to the sta-
tion is a calculation function, the input value must be scaled
to percent, and the output of the station scaled to the required
units, external to the station.

When the m€urual interlock state <56> equals one, the station
trips to the manual mode.

Set Point Tracking

The set point may be adjusted from the operator interface

device only if set point tracking is not selected (Sf+ equals
zero). If one of the tracking options is selected, the set point
will be determined by the optlon chosen.

EXAMPLES

s2 Number of block containing output the set point is to track in

m€u'l,ualmode.

sl4 Set point track option:

O = ro tracking. Set point can be varied using local man-

ual control.

I = track PV <S I > when station is in martual. Provides

bumpless transfer when the station returns to auto-
matic mode; set point cannot be varied manually.

2 = track value in block selected in <S2> in m€ur.ual mode

only. Set point may be changed when the station

M/A Station (Ratio)

23-6 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode23

returns to automatlc mode. A bump ls posslble when

transfelred.

g = track vdue tn block selected tn <S2> always (auto and

manud) no dlrect control of set polnt from statlon.

Deviatlon Alarms

A hfgh devtatton darm ls generated when the process varlable

ls greater than the set potnt, artd the absolute value of the dlf:
ference between the two ls greater than or equal to 59. A lour
devlatlon darm generates when the process varlable ls less
than the set polnt, alrd the absolute value of the dtfferenee
between the two ls greater than or equal to 59. These two
alarm condtttons report to the loop.

Flgure 23-I- lllustrates a manuaUauto ratlo statlon wlth out-

put traektng. fiie wlld varlable <S2> ls a Process lnput.

NOTES:
1. \Mrilethe stationis underlocalmanualcontrol,the outputis zero
to 100 percent.Therefore,if the inputto the stiationis a calculation
function,the inputvalue rnustbe scaledto percentand the outputof
the stationscaledto the requiredunitrs,extemalto the stration.The
contnoloutputscalecan be drtvenby the stationouput or a feedback
signal.Thisappliesto the firsttwo stations@nnestedto a giventermi-
nationunit Stations@nnectedby daisychaindo not havethisoption.

2. The station can only be transfened to computer operation

when a networkinterfaceunit and computerare involvedin the
transaction.Depressingthe computerpushbuttonon the stration
will not providea usableoutput.

3. Whenthe stationis in ratiornode,the set pointsignalis equalto

the wildvariable<S2>multipliedby the ratioset poinl In automatic
mode,the set pointsignalis equalto the set pointoutput(N+1).

F-Igure 23-7. Ratlo Stafion usith Ou@rtttTraclcittg

M/A Station(Ratio)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 2 3- 7
W
I

I
 FunctionGode24 - Adapt

L DESCRIPTION

Thls functlon allows the adaptatton of a tturable parameter ln

the system (most tunable parameters may be modtfled durlng
executton). It permtts conflguratlon of dynarnlc versus statlc
loop galns tn control sctremes. All galns and tlme constants are
hrnable parameters. Therefore, uslng thts funcflon, you can set
gatns and tlme constarrts to fft curent process operaflng states.

NOTE:Tunablealarm specificationsin exceptionreport function

blocksare not adaptable(e.9.,functioncode30, S5 and SO).

The adapt functlon block output value has no slgntflcance.

The adapted spectflcatlon ls modlfled only durtng executlon,
and the orlgtnal parameter that ls stored Ir nonvolattle ran-
dom access memory (N\IRAI\{) ts not modlfled, Thus, the
revised specification ls not accesslble vta any of the operator
interface devlces unless the adapt lnput ls read. Adapted
block lnputs are read by reading the output of the block pre-
ceding the bloek of interest.

UTILIZATION

IMMPCOl

OUTPUTS

BII( Type Descrlptlon

N lvA No significance

SPECIFICATIO.'VS

Spec Tune Default TyPe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of input
S2 N 0 Note 1 Address of block containing specification to be adapted
S3 N 0 0-64 Specificationnumberof specificationto be adapted
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: Zil tor COM modules and CLGOI|OUOUO4
1023 for SLC01|21 and IMLMMO2
2046for NMFCOIIO2,|MMFC0S, CBC01,CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for IMMFCOS/O4 and IMMFPOIIOUO3

Adapt
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 24-1
Function Code24

The adapt functlon code has been enhanced to support cross

tSpe convenslons for modules. The block tnternally converts the
input value to the tSpe of rralue requtred by the adapted blodc
t
spectficatton t1rye. Table 24-1 shourc the t1rye of convenslons per-
formed. If tlle input tlpe matches the ou@ut tSr1le,rlo converslon
is performed. The specificatlon value ts changed to matctr the
input value exactly when no tlpe converslon ls perforzred.

Tabte 24-7. Conuersions PerJormedbg the AdaptBlrck

Input Type AdaptedSpeclflcatlonType

of 51 Boolean Real lnteger (0 to 255) Integer (-32768to +32767)
Boolean Direct 0 + 0.0, 0-+0,0-+0,
conversion 1+ 1.0 1-+1 1 + 1
Real < 1.0 -+ 0, Direct conversion s 0.0 -+ 0, s-32768.0-+ -327ffi,
> 1 . 0+ 1 0.0 to 255.0-+ 0 to 255 -32768.0to +32767.0-)
-32768to +32767,
> 255.0+ 255 2 +32767.0-> +32767
Integer Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Directconversion

APPLICATIO'VS

Figures 24- l, 24-2 and 24-3 illustrate some uses of the adapt
function code.

Figures 24-L and 24-2 show the input to an adapt block as

the result of a function defined by functlon code 1. If the func-
tion varies with time, the adapted parameter also varies with
I
time. The same is trre for functions of pressure, temperature,
tank level, etc. This arrangement malces variable control of
tunable parameters possible, allowing compensafion for gains
inherent in a process.

In Figure 24-L, the high output nmft 59 of a functlon code f g

block varies as a function of x as defined in a function code 1
block.

S2=O S2=2fl)
S3=O S3=9 S5=1.0m
54=10 $=l.m
$$=10 S7=Om
$=20 58=Om
S7=20 S9=16.m
S8=30 $G€.M
59=S S11=0
SlG40 sl&o
S11=49
sl&50
S13=50

Figure 24-7. Creation of a Sl';d,;iurg

Lirriter
or Indu withFUrrcfron Cd,e 24

Adapt
24-2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 24

In Figure 24-2, an adapt block adapts wtth Proportlonal 9on-

stanf 56 of a funcuon code 19 block to the value recelved from
a funcuon code 1 block, allowlng the modtficatlon of the pro-
portlonal constant wtth changes ltr a sPeclfied parameter, X.

52 =O $Q = 23O
S3-0 5[l=6 SS= 1.000
$4 = lOO 56 = 1.000
gg = l(X) SZ=0.000
58 = 0.000
59 = 105.00
slG-5.0@
S11=0
S12=O
TP4s133C

Figure 24-2. Flurlction Me 24 Used to Achieue

Vafinhle Crinfroller Propofior'r.l @nstnnt

Figure Z4-3 shows the use of an adapt block tn conJuncilon

with a funcuon code 9 block to set a value to one of two con-
stalts, dependlng on Ern externd condltton. Ttle input to the
adapt block can be a llnear slgnal or a selected frxed signal.

TOOTHERAhIALOG
PR@ESSING BLOCI(S

${=10
gg=10

$Q=22O
33= 1
TP45134D

Figure 24-3. Usirg FlrtnctwnCode 24 to *lect

One of Ttao lrWfiVafues

Adapt
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 24-3
ffi

o
 FunctionCode25 - AnalogInput(SamePCUNode)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The andog tnput functlon code acqulres an analog lnPut stg-

nal from another module ln the same PCU node vla the Con-
trolway/module bus. Thls slgnal may be updated at varlous
lrrtervals dependlng on the module bus update tl,me. The
update ttme ls speclfled tn the executlve block or tJre segment
control block located Iil the module contalnlng funetlon
eode 25.

To lnsure that the slgnd ls successfully acqulred from the

module bus, ttre andog slgnal generates a polnt qualtty flag.
To test the quallty of the stgnal, lnclude a functlon code 3 f
(test quality) block in the configuration. Ttle quality of tlle
point cannot be used as an tnput to any other tlpe of block.
However, the output of tl:e test quality block can be used as an
input to other dlgital processlng blocks. Refer to Appendix D
for a defrnition of point quality.

NOTE:A block definedas an analoginput readsa valuefor any

existinganalog output from a function block configuredin the
sourcemodute.No additionalconfigurationin the sourcemoduleis
required.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Output value and qualitY.QualitY:
Q = good
1 =bad

lnput(SamePCUNode)
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 25-1
FunctionCode 25

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-31 Requestedmoduleaddress
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Requestedblockaddress
NOTE:
1. Ma:<imumvalues are: 254 tor COM modules and CLGOITAOS40d-
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
zo4;Ofor NMFCO1|O?,!MMFCO5, CBC01, CSCO1and |MMPCOI
9998 for IMMFCOS/O4and |MMFPOI|OU}3

APPLICATIOAIS

Figure 25-L shows how to use functlon code 25 to transport

an analog value from one module to another module vla ttre
Controlway or module bus. The functton code 31 (test qualtty)
block optionally monitors point quality.

CONTROLWAYADDRESS 6

-Ar/B
TO OTHER
r - t , (4 sil:. n l(1e) A}.IALOG
PROCESS
BLOCI(S

55 = 1.0O0
SO = l.O(X)
57 - O.OOO
58 = O.OOO
59 = |O5.OOO
SlO =.5.000
= S 1 1= O
o
tr
S 1= 4 S12=O
TO DIGITAL
g,t = 21 OUTPUT OR
l-
z PROCESSING
o BL@K
(,

:2o7( 41'
Sl =5
52=21
TO OTHER
AIVALCG
PROCESS
BLOCKS
-208(41)
Sl =7
52 = 210

TEST OI.|AUTY
(FUNCTTON@DE 31)
OUTPUT TRUTH TAELE
s1 52 s3 S4 OUT
o o 0 o o
o 0 0 1 1
o 0 I o 1
0 o 1 1 1
o 1 o o 1
o 1 o 1 1
0 1 1 0 1
o I I 1 1
1 o o 0 1
1 o o I 1
1 0 1 o 1
1 o I 1 1
I I I 1 I

FIgure 25- 1. Usittg Ftltction Me 25 to Ae4uire an Andog Signrrl jfrom Anoths Mdule

Analog Input (Same PCU Node)

25-2 15 FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode26 - AnaloglnpuULoop

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The analog input /loop function code acqulres analog signals

via the communlcatlon htghway in the same loop. The lnput
points are located tn other process eontrol units (PCUs) and
must have €rn exception report deflned (e.9., artalog exception
report, function code 30). Updates €rre on an exception report
basis. Exception report intervals are specified in the executive
block or the segment control block. IJse function code LzL
(anatog input/INFI-NET) for communicatlon to other loops.

To lnsure that ttre signal is successfully acquired from the

plarrt loop/module bus, the analog stgnal generates a point
quality flag. To test the quality of the stgnal, lnclude a func-
tion code 31 (test quality) block in the configuration. The
quality of the point cEurnot be used as an input to any other
tlpe of block. However, the output of the test quallty block,
representing the quality, can be used as an input to other
analog processlng blocks. Refer to Appendix D for a definition
of point quality.

Use function code 69 to test the alarm associated with the

analog input/loop function bloek.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Analogoutputvalue
NOTES:
1.Function code 26 must be placed in a block numbered lower than 1024 in Plant Loop systems.
|NF|-NETloops allow higher block numbers.
2.Function code 26 cannot connect to a function code 30 in a different |NFI-NET loop. Use func'
tion code 121 to connect with another loop.
3.lf a module utilizes an imported analog value from the loop in several instances, the function
blocks that utilize this analog value must be connected to one analog inpuUloop function block
that handles the importation O fris point. lt is not possible to import exception reports from a paq
ticular addressto more than one destination analog inpuUloopfunction block within a single mod'
ule configuration.

AnalogInpuULoop
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 26-1
Function Code 26

SPECtFICATiO^tS
t
Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon
S1 N 0 I 0-31 Requestedmoduleaddress
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Requestedblockaddress
S3 N 0 I Note2 Requestednodeaddress
NOTES:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules and CLCOI|0UOS|O4.
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
204;6for NMFCO1|0?,|MMFCOS, CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for IMMFCOUO4and IMMFPOIIOUO3
2. Valid node addresses are:
0 through 249 for |NF!-NET
0 through 63 for Plant Loop

APPLICATIO'VS

Figure 26-L illustrates uslng functlon code 26 to acqulre an

analog value from another node. The INF'I-NET connects the
analog output signal ln node one to the analog hput ln node
two.

NODE 1 NODE 2

MODULEADDRESS5 MODULEADDRESS2

I
610 PRocEssrNGBLocK

-
eooizdl PROGESSING
BLocKS

ANALOG VALUE
GENERATEDIN
NODE 1

TP451368

Ftgure 26-1. UsingFtrnction Cd.e 26 to Acqrire anAnolqValueJromAnotherNde

AnalogInpuVLoop
26-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 27 - Analog lnPut

L DESCRIPTION

The andog fnput functlon code acqulres analog tnputs from

terminatlon untts for controller modules. This function acts
only on controller module flxed inputs. Analog tnPut one will
always be found ln block 2Ol, analog input two ln bloek 2O2,
etc. To modtry thts functlorr, spectff a flxed analo$ input block
number (2OI-2O41. The spectflcations deflne the zero and
span values, expressed in engineering units. If a span is
O.OOO,the input ls unused.

To insure that the signal is successfully acquired, tlle analog

signat generates a point quality flag. To test the quality of tJ:e
signal, include a function code 3f (test quality) bloek in the
configuratlon. The quality of the point cannot be used as an
input to arry other t5rye of block. The analog output value can
be used as an lnput to arry analog processing block. Refer to
Appendix D for a definttlon of point qualtty.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

201 R Controllerfixed analog input 1 and quality
202 R Controllerfixed analog input 2 and quality
203 R Controllerfixedanaloginput3 and quality
204 R Controller fixed analog input 4 and quality

SPECIFICATIOA'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0.000 R Full Signal zero in engineeringunits
S2 N 0.000 R Full qlts
Signalspanin engineering

AnalogInput
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 2 7- 1
Function Code27

APPLICATIOruS

Figure 27-L shows the use of a functlon code 31 block to test

the quatity of the output frorn the functton code 27 block.

TOOTHER
AtIALOG
PROCESS
BLOCKS

55 = l.(X)O
56 = l.fi)O
57 = O.OO0
S8 = O.OOO
TO DIGITAL
OUTPUT OR
PROCESSING
BLOCK
TP451508

Figure 27-1. Corgftguration Required to Test Point SuaIW

AnalogInput
27 - 2 ts FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode28 - AnalogOutput(SamePCUNode)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The analog output functlon code transfers stgnals to an

IIVIAOMOI Andog Output Module. The source module must
be located tn the same PCU node as the analog output mod-
ule. The module transmfts the speclfled analog stgnal at the
Controlwaylmodule bus update rate that ls speclfied ln the
executlve block or ln the segment control block of the source
module.

To lnsure that the slgnal ts successfully acqutred from the

module bus, the analog slgnal generates a polnt qualtty flag.
To test the quality of the signal, tnclude a functlon code 3 f
(test quality) block in the configuration. Ttle qudity of the sig-
nal cannot be determined by any other type of block. How-
ever, the output of the test quality block can be used as €ur
input to other digital processing blocks to provtde signal qual-
ity information. Refer to Appendix D for a deflnitton of point
guality.

The input value becomes a percentage uslng the following

equation:

o u t p u t= t o o ' ( s 3 ) - s 4
s5

UT'LIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Value to be transmitted over the module bus with quality

AnalogOutput SamePCUNode)
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 28-1
FunctionCode 28

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-31 Destinationmoduleaddress
s2 N 0 I 1-8 Destinationblockaddressor channslnumber
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input
S4 N 0.000 R Full fnputzeroin engineeringunits
s5 N 100.000 R Full Inputspanin engineeringunits
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254 tor COMmodulesand CLCOI|OUOUC/.
1023for SLC01/21
zo4;Ofor NMFGOI|O?,|MMFCO5,
CBC01andCSCO|
9998for lMMFC03f04and lMMFP0l/0203

EXPLANATION

Figure 28- I illustrates the use of a function code 31 block to

test point quality.

TO ANALG
OUTPUT MODULE
ADDRESS15
(SAMEPCU),
BLOCK2 OR
C}IANNEL2

TO DIGITALOUTPUTOR
PROCESSINGBLOCKS

TP45r51C

Figwe 28- 1. &4ligurallon Required

toTestPointgur.lfu

AnalogOutput(SamePCUNode)
28-2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode29 - AnalogOutput

L DESCRIPTION

The analog output functlon code sends values from controller

modules flxed output blocks to termlnatlon unlts. Ttle input
to the block, rlsudly from a station, must be scded zero to
lOO percent for the block to functlon properly over the entlre
span of the leput slginal.

There are only two possible outputs. The flrst will always be
the output of the first flxed analog output block, zIL The sec-
ond wilt be the output of flxed analog output bloek 212.

To insure that ttre signal is successfully transferred to the

field, the analog stgnal generates a potret quallty flag. To test
the quality of the signal, include a function code 3l (test
quatity) block in the configuratlon. The quality of the signal
c€uu1ot be used as an input to arry other tSpe of block. How-
ever, tJ:e output of the test quallty block can be used as €ul
lnput to other dfgital processlng blocks to provide signal
quality information. Refer to Appendix D for a definition of
point quality.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

211 R Valueof analogoutput1
212 R Value of analog output 2

AnalogOutput
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 29-1
FunctionCode 29

SPECIFICATIO,'VS

Use S2 (statton block address) only wlth dtgttal control sta-

tlons that have the autornatlc blpass optlon enabled. When
52 ls conflgured and the andog output feedback value to the
statlon changes to bad qualtty, functlon code 29 forces the
station to b1ryass mode.

Spec Tune Default Wpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 211 0-255 Blockaddressof lnput
S2 N 0 I 0-255 Blockaddressof strationblockassociatedwith output

EXPLANATION

Figure 29-l illustrates the conflguratlon requtred to test the

quality of an analog output.

TO
TERMINATION
UNIT

TO DIGITAL
OUTPUTOR
PROCESSING
BLOCIG
TP45r52B

Figure 29- 1. Corgftglut':atfonRequired

to Test aPoint SwIW

AnalogOutput
29-2 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode30- AnalogExceptionReport

L DESCMPTION

The analog exceptlon report functlon code allows an analog

value to be sent on the communtcatton htghway tf the value
changes outslde a conflgured deadband. Thts functlon also
generates an alarm tf tl:e hlgh or low ltmtt values €rre reached.
The analog exceptlon report ts transmttted after a tlme limit
that ts conffgured tn the modules executlve or segment con-
trol block.

Thts functlon does not perfonn any converslon of lts lnput.

Speclflcatlons 53 and 34 (zero and span of tnput) are used
lnternally, and sfnfflcant change (SZ) ls used to report to
other proeess control unlts (PCUs) or operator lnterface
devlces. Speciflcatlon 52 (englreerlng untts) is used for
reportlng to these hlgher level devices.

To iresure that the signal is suecessfully transfemed, the €rna-

tog signal generates a point qualfty flag. To test the quality of
the signal, include a function code 31 (test quality) block in
the configuration. The quality of the potret cannot be used as
an input to arry other tlpe of block. The analog output value
czrn be used as an input to any analog processlng block. Refer
to Appendix D for a definttion of potnt qudlty.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N R Analogoutputvalueand qualitY
NOTE:plantLoopsonlyaltowanalogexceptionreponbbclcsnumbered0 through10?3because
of the messagepadcefzingmethodof inlonnafrontransfer.|NF|-NETloopsallow hlgherblock
numbers.

AnalogExceptionRepg{
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 30-1
FunctionCode 30

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof input
S2 N 0 0-255 Engineering
unitidentifier
S3 N 0.000 R Full Zero of <S1> in engineeringunits
S4 N 100.000 R Full Span of <S1> in engineeringunits
S5 Y2 100.000 R Full High alarm point limit value
S6 Y2 0.000 R Full Lowalarmpointlimitvalue
s7 N 1.000 R Full Significant change (o/"of span)
NOTES:
1. Maximumrraluesa.e: 254 for @M modulesand CLC0U0€i0,S|04
1023tor SLC01f21and lMLMMg2
z(XOtor NMFC01/O2, IMMF@S,CB@l, CSCO1and |MMPCOI
9998tor lMMFCogo4and lMMFP0l/02y03
2. All alarmtimitsare tinable, but not adaptable.Funclioncocb24 cannotbe usedb adaptlhe naluesof abm Imlta

EXPLANATION

Exception Reporfs

An exception report is returned to the bus tnterface module or

network processing module following a report poll message if
a report enable message has been recelved for the block num-
ber. This requires that an analog input block (function code
26 or L2l) be configured in some other PCU, or as a potnt
from a nehvork interface unlt, or as atagdeflrred ln a console,
referencing the output of the analog exception report block.

An exception report will occur when:

L tr2 t^u

where:

t, Time since last report.

t^u Mardmum report time for t}lts point as spectfied by
the executive block or the segment control bloek.

or

2. l(st>-(st,)l>W andt,2t^i,

where:

<s1> Current value of input.

<S/r> Last reported value of input.
s4 Span of input in engineering unlts.

AnalogExceptionReport
30-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 30

s7 sfnrflcant change tn percent.

t, TIme slnce last report.
t^n Mlntmum report tlme for thts block as sPecifled
by the executlve or segment control block.

Alarm Reports

An alarm report ls returned to tlre bus tnterface or network

processtng module followlng a rePort poll message tf:

l. A report enable message has been recelved for the bloek

number.

o;nd

2. The low or high alarm set polnt ls exceeded.

An alarm report occurs when:

7. <St> > 55, and currenf sfafus * high alarm.

2. <St> < 56, and currenf sfafus * low alarm.

g. (56+ DB) S <S1>< (55 - DB), and current status* normal.

where:

<s1> Curent value of lnput.

s5 Value of htgh alarm limlt.
s6 Vdue of low alarm Umlt.
DB AlarmdeadbandxS4
100
s4 Span of input in engineerin$ units.

Alarm deadband is defined in the executive block for COM

modules, and in the segment control block for MFC, MPC,
MFP and IMLMMO2 modules. The executive or segment con-
trol block defines the alarm deadband for all hrgh /low alarm
reports on the module specifled. Alarm deadbands Prevent an
excessive number of alarm reports when values €rre hoverlng
around the alarm llmlt.

4. Time limit ffJ generates €rn exception report after a time

interval conflgured ln the executive or segment control block.

A sample tnput, wittr alarm and exceptlon reports identified,

is plotted tn Figure 3O- 1.

AnalogExceptionReport
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 30-3
Function Code 30

HIGHALARMLIMIT(S5)= 90
LOWALARMLIMIT(SO)= 10
ALNTM DEADBAND= 2.5 olo
SfGNIFICANTCHANGE(S7) = 5 olo
Y = OUTPUTOF FUNCTIONCODEBLOCK30

DEADBAhD= ZSoA

70 SIGNIFICANT
CFIANGE> 5%
1 6 0
I
t
I
I
50
Y
40

30

2A

10

0
TIME .-->
(], Y GOESINTOHIGHALARMSTATEAND AN AIARM REPORTIS GENERATED.

TU Y GOESINTONORMALSTATEAND AN ALARMREPORTIS GENERATED.

y EXcEEDS
srcNrFfcANT ANDAN EXcEproN REpoRTrs cENERATED.
cHANGE
@
@ Y GOES INTOLOW ALARMSTATEAND AN ALARMREPoRT IS GENERATED.
y GoEs rNToNoRMALsrATEANDANAIARMREpoRTrs GENERATED.
@
TP451378

Flgure 3O-7. Sampb Annlry bcceptionReportlrWfi

with Almrn ard. ErceptionRepofts

AnalogExceptionReport
30-4 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionGode31 - TestQuality

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Ttre test qualty functlon code checks the potnt quallty of up

to four lnputs. [t ls a four lnput logtcal OR functlon that sets
the output to a logtc O lf all tested potnts are good, and to a
logic I if one or more tested tnputs are bad.

Analog and dtgltal I/O, Controlway, Plant [.oop, and INFI-NET

inputs can be tested for qualtty. gualtty ls not propagated
through module functlon blocks. All tnternal poIrts will have
good quality.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N B Pointquality:
0 = all inputsgood
1 = ?t least1 inputbad

SPECIFICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deecription

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 0 Note 1 Block address of second input
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of third input
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of fourth input
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules. CLCOUOAO3Io4and NLMMO1
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
zO/li for NMFCO1IO2,IMMFCOS,CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFC03/04 and IMMFPOVOAO3

Test Quality
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 3 1- 1
FunctionCode 31

APPLICATIO,IVS

The example shown in Ftgure 31-1 shows four analog poIrts

transferred from Controlway addresses three, four, five and
seven into Controlway address slx. The test quality block
checks the point quality of all four analog potrts. If one or
more of the points are bad qualtty, the output of the test qual-
ity block (block 22O) ls a logtc 1. When all potrnts are good, the
output ls a logic O.

CONTROLWAYADDRESS 6

-elra
TO OTHER
r - t , AiIALOG
PROCESS
BLOC|(S
-lrs
52=10
55 = 1.(PO
56 = 1.Ooo
57 = O.Oq,
S8 = O.OOO
S9 = 1O5.OOO
SlO = -s.q)O
S11=O
= S12=O
o TO DIGITAL
tr, (31) q,TPUT OR
F
z PROCESSING
o BLOCK
C)

l2o7(41)

51=$
52=!1
TO OTHER
ANALOG
PROCESS
BL@KS
I 208 (41)

51 =7
52 = 210

TEST OUALITY
(FUNCTTONCODE 31)
OUTPUT TRUTH TABLE
s1 s2 s3 s4 OUT
o o o o o
o o o 1 1
0 o 1 o 1
0 o 1 1 1
0 1 o o 1
0 1 o 1 1
o 1 1 o 1
o 1 1 1 1
1 o o o 1
1 o o 1 1
1 o 1 0 1
1 o 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1

Figure 37-7. Using a Function Cde 31 BIrck to ?est

the SwIW of Analog andDigitallnprfis

TestQuality
31 - 2 ls FEBtses l-E96-2008
 Function Gode 32 r Trip

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The trip functton code dlsables a module by tnternally forclng

it lnto ttre error mode when the input is a logic l. When the
module goes to error mode, the mactrlne fault tlmer tlmes out,
stopplng all communlcatlon wtth the module. All outputs go
to thetr default value when the tlmer tlmes out. Analog values
go to zero percent, fOO Percent, or hold, dependlng on the
output's hardware configuration. All logtc outputs for control-
ler modules, multl-functlon controllers (MFC) and multi-func-
tion processors (MFP) go to logic O. t ogtc outputs in the logic
master modules go to hardware conflgured loglc states, or
hold. INFI 90 slaves have software configured logic states
(function code 128).

When function code 32 trips the module, reset the module by

pressing the reset pushbutton on the front of the module.
After the module is reset, lt wltl be tn error mode. Atl IMCTNI
Configuration ErndTuning Termtnal or console will dtsplay the
number of the block that tripped the module, dlowing the
control strategr to be checked to determtne the reason for the
trip. To place the module in execute mode after an error, place
it in configure mode and then in execute mode.

NOTE:The causeof the trip mustbe correctedor the rnodulewill

not remainin executemode.

UTILIZATION

IMLMMO2
IMMFCO3
IMMFCO4
IMMFCOs
IMMFPO1

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Modulestatus:
0 = DOlTnalOperation
1 = ffioduledisabled

Trip
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 32-1
FunctionCode 32

SPECIFICATIO'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254tor COM modules, CLC01/0U03|04 and NLMMO1
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
20E;6for NMFCOI|O?,|MMFC05,CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for IMMFC03/04 and |MMFPOI|OUO3

Trip
32-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode33 - Not

GENERALDESCRIPTION

F\rnctlon code 33 perfonns a loglcal negatton of the lnput (1.e.

the output ls the opposlte of the lmput).

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Wheninputequals1, outputequals0
Wheninputequals0, outputequals1

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof input
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules, CLC0l/0203i/04 and NLMMO1
1023 for SLC01421and |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCO1I1?,|MMFC05,CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFCOUO4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

Not
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 33-1
W
o

o
 FunctionGode34 - Memory

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Thts functlon memorizes lts prevtous output when botlt lnputs

are loglc O. Spectflcatlon Sl ts the set (S) lnput, and 52 ls the
reset (R) tnput. When both tnputs have the value logtc l, the
output assumes the overrlde state speclfled Fy 54. Speclflca-
tion S3 ls the fdflal state fl4g. The vdue specfted Xil,<S3> will
be the output after pourer up or a module reset.

Table 34-I shows ttrat ttre hfflal state depends solely on the
value of <S3>. Ttre values of <S1>, <S2> and 54 have no effect
on inifial output.

Table 34-2 shows the output for all ottter lnput combinatlolts.

UTILIZATION

IMMPCOl

IMMFCO4

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Relerto Tables34-1and U-2

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof set input
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof resetinput
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof initialstate
S4 N 0 B 0or1 Overridevalue:
0 = tgS9t
1 =Set
NOTE:
1. Maxirnum values are: 254tor COM modules, CLC01/0AO3|U and NLMMO1
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMM02
2046 for NMFC01|02,|MMFCOS,CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for !MMFCOS/04and lMMFPOllOUOg

Memory
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 34-1
FunctionCode 34

Tahle 34-7. Pouter Up or Mdule Reset TTttthTahle

lnputs Overrlde lnltlal Output
<sl> <s2> s4 <s3> N
0 0 x 0 0

Table 34-2. Normnl Operallon Tluth Table

lnputs Overrlde lnltlal Output
<sl> <s2> 9t <s3> N
0 0 x x No changefrom
previousoutput
1 0 x x 1
0 1 X x 0
1 1 0 x 0
1 1 1 x 1

APPL'CAT'OA'S

The memory function code creates deadbands and retains

slgnals.

For example, Figure 34- f shows how to control a fan in the

following manner:

1. When air ternperature reaches 21"C, the fan wil autornat-

ically turn or1.

2. When air temperature goes below lsoc, the fan wilt auto-
matlcally shut off.

3. The fan will turn on when tt recelves a loglc I stgnal, artd

it will turn off when it receives a logic O signal.

4. Use a function code 12 (high/low compare) block to acti-

vate the <Sl> (S) input when the atr temperature reaches or
exceeds 2loc. Use the s€rmefunction code 12 block to actlvate
the <S2> (R) input when air temperature is 15oC or lower. Fig-
ure 34-L illustrates this conflguration.

If T >zloC, <Sl)=1, <S2>=0, output=l, fart turns olt.

If T is between l5o and zl"C (15"C

<S2>=O, output=Do change from previous output (1), fan
remains on.

If T < l5oC, <S1>=0, <S2>=1, output=O, fan shuts off.

Memory
34-2 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 34

(12) (34)
s1
H S 225
{ 220
wlL s2 R
t-
L
n1 sg
S2 = 21"C I
s3 = 15"C
33
54=O
TP45r38B

Flgure 34-I. Uslrg Fvnctlon&de 34

JorRegulatory @nfrot

Memory
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 34-3
ffi
t

I
 Function Code 35 r Timer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The tlmer functlon code perforrns tfmfirg, pulsed Uming, or

tlmed out delay functlons. The tlmtng mode ls speclfled by 52
and the duratton of time delay ls speclfled by S3. Flgure 35-1
shows output shapes for each mode of operatloll.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Logicstatedefinedfor pulse,timingellimed out delayfunctions

SPECIFICATIO^fS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input
S2 N 0 o-2 Q= pulseouput
1 = timedout
2 = timing
00X= oolrrsl
10X= timeduringstartuPPeriod
NOTE:The 10sdigitis not usedand mustbe set to 0
S3 Y 0.000 R Full Timedelayin seconds
NOTE:
and NLMMO1
1. Maximumvalues are: 254tor COM modules,CLCO1/OAO3|o4-
1023 for SLC01I21 and IMLMMO2
2CHr6forNMFCOI1O?,|MMFCO5, CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFCOS/04and IMMFPOIIOUO3

Timer
15 FEB1995 35-1
l-Eg6-2008
FunctionCode35

EXPLANATIO'V

PulseOutputMode In the pulse output mode, the output becomes loglc I when-
o
ever the tnput becomes loglc l. If the tnput returns to loglc 0
before the tlme delay (Sg) ends, the output wfU remaln loglc I
for the entlre treterval. If the lnput remains a loglc I after the
tlme delay explres, the output wlll return to a loglc O at the
end of the ttme delay, and remaln a loglc O untll there ts
another O to I transltlon of the lnput. Desplte how long the
lnput value remalns tn the loglc I state, ttre output remalns
ln the loglc I state for the duratton of the tlme delay speclfled
ln 53. The charactertstlc of the pulse output mode ls often
called one shot.

Timed Out Mode In the timed out mode, the lnput must remaln logtc 1 for
longer than the time delay before the output wfil track lt. The
output will remain logic O if the lnput pulse duratlon ts
shorter than the time delay, and will become logle I only lf the
input remains loglc I for a period of ttme exceedtrg the tlme
delay. It will then track the lnput.

Timing Mode In the timlng rnode, the output tracks the input for the length
of the time delay, but transitions to logic O at the end of the
time delay, desplte the tnput value. The output becomes a
logtc I whenever the lnput becomes a logtc l. If the lnput
returns to logic O before tJre speclfled tlme delay ends, tJren
the output dso returns to logic O. If the lnput remalns a
logic I after the specified time delay, the output wtll return to
I
logic O at the end of the tlme delay.

52=0 52=1 52=2

PULSEO|TTPUT(P) T|MEDOUT CrO) TlMrNcF)

CASE 1: EIAPSED Tli'lE < 53

INPUT

OUTPUT

CASE 2: ELAPSEDTIME> S3

INPUT

OUTPUT

TP45139A

Figwe 35-1. Otrtpuf Stqpes Obtnirued

intheTtveeTUwW Mod.es

Timer
35-2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode36 - QualifiedOR (8-lnput)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The qualtfled OR functlon code monltons the status of up to

elght dlstal lnputs and produces an output slgnal based
upon condltlons set by S9 and SlO. The output ls a logic I or
O and ts based upon the number of lnputs belng less than,
equal to, or greater than the number speclffed ln S9 and the
condltlon set by S10.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPO1

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe Descrlptlon

N B Outputequals:
Logic0 when:
No.of logic1 inputs< Sg
Logic1 when:
S10= 1 andno. of logic 1 inputs= S9
or
S10=O andno.of logic1 inputs> S9

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first inPut
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of second inPut
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of third inPut
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of fourth inPut
S5 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of fifth inPut
S6 N 0 I Note 1 Btockaddressof sixth inPut
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof seventhinPut
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof eighthinPut

QualifiedOR (8-lnput)
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 36-1
FunctionCode 36

SP ECIFI CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S9 N 0 I 0-8 Numberof inputsthatmustequallogic1
sl0 N 0 B 0or1 Selectinputs:
Q= oo. of logic1 inputs> Sg
1 = Do.of logic1 inputs= 59
NOTE:
1, Maximum values are: 254 tor COM npdules, CLCO1/OUO3|o4.
and NLMMO1
1023 for SLC01l2l and |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,IMMFCO5,CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

APPLICATIOruS

This function can monitor a group of devices to determlne if a

certain number of the devices are operational at any gtven
tlme. Figure 36- I illustrates the use of functlon code 36 to
monitor the number of pumps mnning and limit demand
when less than two are operational. The output of the quali-
fied OR block seryes as a transfer signal for an analog trans-
fer block. If less than two pumps are runnlng, the output of
the analog transfer block will be the constant identtfied lrrr the
manual set constant block, and if two or more pumps €rre
mnning, the output equals the input from the process.

54 = O.OOO
55 = O.OOO

PUMPSTATUS
59 =2
S 1 O= 0
TP45r40B

Figure 36-7. F.nction Code 36 UsedJor SignalRegulation

Based on fhe Number of P.tmps Operationnl

QualifiedOR (8-lnput)
36-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode37 - AND(z-lnput)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The 2-lnput AM functlon code' perfonns the loglcal Af{D

functiorr.. Ttre output ls logtc I when botll leputs €rre logic l.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Referto truthtableClable37-1)

Table 37-7. 2-IrputAArD TtuthTable

Inputs Output
s1 s2 N
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 1 Note 1 Blockaddressof first inPut
s5 N 1 Note 1 Block address of second inPut
NOTE:
and NLMMO1
1. Ma:<imumvalues are: 254 tor COM modules, CLCO1/OAO3|G4-
1023 for SLC01|21 and IMLMMO2
2}46tor NMFCOIIO2,IMMFCOS,CBC01, CSC01 and IMMPCOl
9998 for !MMFC0S/O4and lMMFP0l/0203

AND (z-lnput)
15 FEB 1995 37-1
l-E96-2008
ffi
o

o
 Function Code 38 r AND (4'lnput)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The 4-lnput AM functlon code performs the logtcal AI{D

functton. The output ls logtc I when all the lrrputs are logtc 1.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptfon

N B (Table
Referto truthtrable 38-1)

Table 38-7. 4-InpfiAAID ThrthTahle

Inputs Output
<sl> <s2> <s3> <s4> N
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0
0 1 I 1 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1

AND (4-lnput)
15 FEB 1995 38-1
l-E96-2008
FunctionCode38

SPECIFICATIO'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 1 Note1 Blockaddressof firstinput
S2 N 1 Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 1 Note1 Blockaddressof thirdinput
S4 N 1 Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthinput
NOTE:
1. Marcimum
valuesare: 254tor COMmodules,CLCO1/OUO3|04and NLMMOl
1023for SLC01|21and|MLMMO2
for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS,
z0d;O CBC01,CSC01and|MMPCOI
9998for |MMFC03/04and IMMFPOIIOUO1

AND(4-lnput)
38-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode39 - OR (z-lnput)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The 2-lnput OR functlon code performs the loglcd OR func-

tton. The output ls loglc f tf elther or both of the fii'rputs (<S1>
and <S2>) zrre loglc l. The output ts loglc O when both lnputs
are logic 0.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Referto truthtable(Table39-1)

Tahle 39-1. 2-Inprrt OR Ttnth Table

lnputs Output
<sl> <s2> N
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of first inPut
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinPut
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254tor COM modules, CLCOI/OUOUU and NLMMO1
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
for NMFCOI1O?,|MMFCO5,
?:CH;O CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for fMMFCOS/04and IMMFPOI|OUO3

OR (2-lnput)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 39-1
ffi

I
 Function Gode 40 r OR (4-lnput)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The 4-tnput OR functton code ls used to perform the loglcal OR

functlorr. The output ls logtc I when one or more lnputs equal
loglc 1. When no tnputs equal logtc l, the output ts logle O.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descriptlon

N B Referto truthtable(Table40-1)

Table 4O-7. 'Inptrt OR Truth,Tahle

Inputs Output
<sl> <s2> <s3> <s4> N
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1
1 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1

OR (4-lnput)
l-E96-200B 15 FEB199s 40-1
FunctionCode40

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Defautt Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of first input
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof thirdinput
S4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof foufthinput
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:254for COMmodulesandCLCO1|0U03|O4
1023for SLC01/21
2046for NMFC01|O?,|MMFCOS,CSC01andCBCO1
9998tor |MMFCOS/04
and |MMFPOI|OU}S

OR (4-lnput)
40-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode41 - DigitallnpuUGontrolway/Module
Bus

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DYB The digltal imput/Controluray/module bus functlon code

acqulres dlgttat slgnds vla the Controlway/module bus from
U I N ( 4 (41)
aN other master modules. The lnput polnts must be ln the same
:
process control untt (PCU) node.

The slgnal ls updated at varlous trtervals depending on the ,

Controlway/module bus update time that ls specifled in the ;
executive block for COM modules or tn tJ:e segment control ;
block for MFC, MPC and IMLMMO2 modules.

To insure that the signals successfully transfer across the ,

Controlway/module bus, the rligital slgnal generates a polnt
quality flag. To test the quality of the slgnal, lnclude a func-
tion code 31 (test quality) bloek tn the configuratlon. The
quality of the signal cannot be determlned by any other t5pe
of block. The output of the test quallty block can be used as
an input to other dlgttal processleg blocks to provide stgnal
quality informatlon. Refer to Appendix D for a definition of
point quality.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk TyPe Descrlptlon

N B Valueof the functionblockoutPut

DigitalInpuUCo
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 4 1- 1
FunctionCode 41

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
s2 N 0 I Note 1 Sourceblockaddress
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 for COM modules , CLCOUOAOUO/-and NLMMO1
1023 tor SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
2o4;6for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS, CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFC03/04 and |MMFP01I0Z03

EXAMPLES

Flgure 4I-L lllustrates the conflguratlon requlred to test the

potrrt quanry from a df$tal lreput/Controluray/module bus
function code.

MODULEADDRESS 5 MODULEADDRESS7

TO DIGITALOUTPUT
OR
PROCESSINGBLOCK

TO OTHER DIGITAL
PROCESSING BLOCKS

Figure 4 1- 1. Cogfigurallon Required b Test Point SuaW

Bus
DigitalInpuUOontrolway/Module
4 1- 2 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode42- DigitalInpuuLoop

GENERALDESCRIPT,ON

The dlgltal lreput/loop functlon code acqulres dlgltat slgnals

vla the corrmuntcatlon htghway ln the same loop. The lnput
points are located ln other process control unlts (PCUs) and
must have an exceptlon report deflned (e.8., dlgttal output/
loop, functlon code 45). Updates are on an exception report
basls. Exceptton report tntervals are speclfled ln the executlve
block or the segment control block. LJse functlon code L22
(dtgttat tnput/INFI-NECI for communlcatlon to other loops.

To lnsure tllat the module successfully aequlres a stgnal from

another node, the digital slgnal generates a polret qualtty flag.
To test the quality of tJre signd, include a function code 31
(test quality) block ln the conflguratlon. The quallty of the
polnt cannot be determtned by arey other $rye of block. The
output of tlle test quality block can be used as an input to
other digital processtng blocks to provide signal quality infor-
mation. Refer to Appendlx D for a deflnitlon of point quality'

Use function code 69 to test the alarm associated with the

analog input/loop functlon block.

UTILIATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Value of the function block output and quality
NOTES:
1. plant Loops only atlow exception report blocks numbered 0 through 1023. !NF|'NET loops al'
low higher block numbers.
Z. Functioncode 42 cannot connect to a function code 45 in a ditferent INFI-NET loop. Use func'
tion code 122 to connect with another loop.
g. lf a module utilizes an impoded digital value from the loop in several instances, the function
blocks that utilize this digitralialue must be connected to one digital inpuUloop lunction block that
nanOtes the importationit this poinL lt is not possible to import exception reports from a partic'
ular address tomore than one destination digital inpuUloopfunction block within a single module
configuration.

DigitalInpuULoop
l-E96-200B ls FEB1995 42-1
FunctionCode42

SPECIFICATIO,^'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-31 Requested
moduleaddress
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Requested block address
S3 N 0 I Note 2 Requestednodeaddress
NOTES:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules, CLC01/0A031O4and NLMMOl
1023 for SLC01421and |MLMMO2
zWO for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS, CBC01, CSC01 and IMMPCOl
9998 for |MMFC0S/04and lMMFP0llOUOg
2. Valid loop addresses are: 1 through 250 for |NFI-NET
1 through 63 for Plant Loop

EXAMPLES

Figure 42-I illustrates the configurailon requtred to test point

quality. Input to a function code 42 block must come from a
function code 45 block.

LOOPADDRESS10 LOOPADDRESS 15
MODULE ADDRESS 5 MODULEADDRESS7

1 --- TO OTHER DIGITAL

ffi; PRocEsstNGBL@KS

51=5
32 -tflg
5g=10

Figwe 42-7. Configwation Required to Test Point SwIttA

DigitallnpuULoop
42-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 43 rr TCS Digital lnput

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The TCS dtgital input functlon code lnputs a dlgltal variable

to a controller module or qulck response controller from lts
termlnatlon devtce. Thls functlon acts only on fixed lnputs
wtthln the controller module. Df$tal tnput one $4U always be
found in bloek221, digital tnput two ln block222, and dlgttal
tnput three in block223. To use this functton, speciff a fixed
dlgital lnput block number (22L-223). If Sl of functlon eode
43 equds two, tl,e lnput ls unused.

To insure that the module successfu$ acqulres a signal from

its termination device, the digital signal generates a point
quality flag. To test the qudlty of the signal, lnclude a func-
tion code 31 (test quality) block in the conflguration. The
quality of the point cannot be determtned by arry other t1rye of
block. The output of the test quality block can be used as an
input to other digital processing blocks to provlde signal qud-
ity information. Refer to Appendix D for a defrnition of point
quality. TIle point qudity of function code 43 may be passed
to the loop to provide signal quality information to other
nodes via a digital exception report (function code 45).

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

221 B Digitalinput1
222 B Digitalinput2
223 B Digitalinput3

l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995
FunctionGode43

SPECIFICATIO,fVS

Spec Tune Defauft TVpe Range Deecrlptlon

S1 N 2 I 0 , 1o r 2 Input definition:
0 = logic 0 is normally closed
1 = logic 1 is normally closed
2 = UoUsed

EXAMPLES

Figure 43- f iilustrates the conflguratlon requtred to test the

polnt quallty from a TCS dfgtal lnput functlon code.

FROM
TERMINATION
DB/ICE

TO DIGITALOUTPUT
...> OR PROCESSING
BLOCI(S

TP451558

Figwe 43-1. Conf,rgwallon Required to Test Potnt SnrrIW

TCSDigitalInput
43-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode44 - TCS DigitalOutput

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The TCS dtgttat output functlon code sends a dtgltal stgnal

from a controller module flxed output block to a controller
module termtnation devlce. The block number referenced
must be a dlgltal output block (231-2341.

To insure that the stgnd successfully transfers, tJ:e df$tal

slgnal generates a polnt quattty flag. To test the quality of the
slgnal, lnclude a functlon code 31 (test quallty) block lre the
conftguratton. The qualtty of the potnt cannot be used as an
tnput to arry other gpe of block. The dlgltal output value can
be used as an input to any dlgital processing block. Refer to
Appendix D for a deflnttion of polnt quallty.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

231 B Digitaloutput1
232 B Digitaloutput2
233 B Digitaloutput3
234 B Digitaloutput4

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N Note 1 I 0-254 Block address of input
NOTE:
1. Defaultvalueis the digitaloutputblocknumber.

TCS DigitalOutput
I-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 44-1
FunctionCode44

EXAMPLES

Ftgure 44-L illustrates the conflguratlon requlred to test the

point quality from a TCS dlgital output functlon code.

TO
TERMIhI.ATION
DE\'ICE

TO DIGITAL
OUTPUTOR
PROCESSING
BLOCI(s
TP45r58B

Flgwe 44- 7. Coffiwallon Reqttred to Test gtrs@

TCS DigitalOutput
44 - 2 rs FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode45- DigitalExceptionReport

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The dlgltal exceptlon report functlon code exeeptlon reports

<S1>. Spectflcatlon 52 deflnes the alarm state.

Exceptlon reports are actlvated by a report enable slgnal from

ttre module bus. The ma:dmum number of enceptlon reports
allowed depends on the module's configuraflon. For example, !
tlre NLMMOf module has L28 reports conflgured lnternally ;
ttrat do not reqtrire the dtgltat exceptlon report block. Excep- i
tlon report blocks must be conffgured lf more than 128
reports are requlred. The number of lnternal exeeptlon .
reports in the IMLMMO2 module must be conflgured in the ,
segment control block (functlon code f OO). If the number of
exceptlon reports requlred exceeds the number speclfled by
the segment control block, then tlee reports must be deflned
with exceptlon reportlng functlon codes such zrs functlon
codes 45 arrd 62.

The number of exceptlon reports ls deftned ln the executive

block or segment control block of the module.

Use functlon code 69 to test the alarm assoclated wtth the

analog input/loop function block.

UTILIZATION

NMFCOl

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe Descrlptlon

N B Valueof exceptionrePort
NOTE: Plant Loops only atlow exception report blocks numbered 0 through 1023. |NF!'NET
loops allow higher block numbers.

DigitalExceptionRePort
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 45-1
FunctionCode45

SPECIFICATIO.NS

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof input
S2 N 2 I 0 , 1o r 2 Alarmstate:
0 = logic0 alarmstate
1 = logic1 alarmstate
2 = Doalarmstate defined
NOTE:
1. Ma:cimumvalues are:Zil for COM modutes,CLCOI/OUOUO4and NLMMO1
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMM02
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,IMMFCOS, CBC01, CSC01 and IMMPCOl
9998 for |MMFCOUO4and IMMFPOUOAO3

EXPLANATION

Exception Reports

An exception report returns to the module bus follonrtng a

report poll message tf a report enable message has been
received for the block number. To lmport thts data to another
PCU, this requires programmfng a dfftat input/loop block
(function code 42) or dtgttal lnput/INFI-NET (functlon code
L22) in another node referenclng the output of the functlon
code 45 block. To import this data to a console the point must
be added to the tag list.

An exception report occurs when:

I. <St> t <S1>Land t,) t^n

where:

<st> Current value of input.

<S1>. Last reported value of input.
t, = Tirne sinee last report.

tnin = Minimum report time for the block as specified

by the executive block or the segment control
block.

or

2. tr) t^o

where:

t , = Time since last report.

]
.max Maximum report time for the block as specified by
the executive block or the segment control block.

DigitalExceptionReport
45-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 45

An alarm report returns to the bus lnterface module followtng

a report poll message tf a report enable message has been
recelved for the block number.

An alarm report occurs when:

1. <St> = 52, currenf sfafus = nonnal, and S2 * 2

where:

<st> - Cur:rent value of lnput.

s2 Alarm state:
Q = alarm when <S1; = Q
I = alarm when <Sl) = 1
t, = no alarm

EXAMPLES

Figure 45- I lllustrates an example conflguratlon for a digital

exceptlon report functlon code.

TO OPERATOR
CONSOLE

55 = O.0oo
56 = 1OO.O0O
57 = -9.2E+18

Figure 45-1. Examytb Dgitnl Elcceptton Report hnfiguralion

DigitalExceptionReport
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 45-3
ffi

o
 FunctionCode46 - DigitalInputList

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The dlstal lnput lfst funcflon code allourc a logtc master module
to accept up to etght lrrputs from a dtfferent loglc master mod-
ule located tn the same pKrcess control untt [PCU). It provldes
the correspondfng outputs for use wtthfn that logic master
module. ThLs block uses etglrt consecuflve addresses. Ftrnctlon
r code 46 blocks are orcepflon neports. Mulfl-furrctlon controllers
Ul N+2
arrd multl-furrctton processons use functlon code M.

To lnsure that the slgnals successfully transfer across the

module bus, the dlgltal slgnd generates a polnt qualtty flag.
To test tl:e quality of ttre slgnal, lnclude a functlon code 31
(test quatlty) block fir the conflguratlon. Tb,e quality of the slg-
nal cannot be determlned by any other tSpe of block. The out-
put of the test quality block can be used as an input to other
digltat processlreg blocks to provtde slgnal quallty lnforrna-
tion. Refer to Appendix D for a deflnitlon of point quality.
I
,-
\ -/l N+7 Use function code 69 to test the alarm associated wtth the
andog input/loop functlon block.

NOTE:This functioncan only be used for data transferbetween

similarmodules.An NLMMOlmodulecannotreguestdatafroman
|MLMMO2 moduleor viceversa.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B <s2>
N+1 B <s3>
N+2 B <s4>
N+3 B <s5>
N+4 B <s6>
N+5 B <s7>

DigitalInputList
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 46-1
FunctionCode 46

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Btk Type Deecrlptlon

N+6 B <s8>
N+7 B <sg>

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof first inputN
S3 N 0 Note1 Blockaddressof secondinputN+l
S4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof third inputN+2
s5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthinputN+3
S6 N 0 Note 1 Block address of fifth input N+4
S7 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof sixthinputN+5
S8 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof seventhinputN+6
S9 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof eighthinputN+7
NOTE:
1. Maxirnum values are: 254 for NLMMOl modules
1023 for |MLMM02 modules

EXAMPLES

Figure 46- 1 lllustrates the conflgurailon requlred to test the

point quality from a digttal input llst functlon code.

DigitalInputList
46-2 15 FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode46

o
v
o
o
J
co
o
z

Figwe 46- 7 . Con$guration Required b Test Point SwIW

DigitalInputList
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 46-3
ffi
t

I
 FunctionGode47- AnalogInputExceptionReport(NAMM0l)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Use the NA}IMOI andog fnput exceptton report functton code

to conflgure exceptlon and alarm reports for the NAI\{MOI
Analog Master Module. Refer to functlon code 70 for NAIVIMO2
exceptlon report conftguratlon. Refer to functlon code 158 for
IIVIAMMOSenhanced analog potnt deflnlttoll.

The NAIvIMOI Analog Master Module has 72 blocks. Each

block perforurs three functlons: analog lnput, er(ception
reporttng, and darm reportlng. The number of blocks config-
ured depends upon the number of ll0 modules connected to
the control rnodule. The NAIVIMOI has elght tnternal lnputs
arrd 64 addttlonal tnputs through analogl/O modules. Each
arralog l/O module has 16 lleputs and the NAIVIMOI accom-
modates four UO modules.

The outputs secUon illustrates the fixed block assignments

used for NAIvIMOf inputs. The tnput value to function code 47
ls sent on the cornmuntcatlon htghway tf the ma:dmurn report
tlme or slgntflcant change ls exceeded.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Block Numbers Input Group Address

From To (8 polnts per group)
1 8 NAMMOl intemal points
I 16 Group0 of first l/O module
17 24 Group1 of firct UOmodule
25 32 Group2 of secondUOmodule
33 40 Group3 of secondUOmodule
41 48 Group4 of third UOmodule
49 56 Group5 of third UOmodule
57 64 Group6 ol fourthUOmodule
65 72 Group7 of fourthUOmodule

AnalogInputExceptionReport(NAMMOI)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 47-1
FunctionCode 47

SPECIFtCATtOwS

A code set in SI identifies the t5pe of andog input. For a one

to IIve volt or four to 20 milliamp llnear slgnal, Sl equals zero,
and for a one to five volt or four to 20 mllllamp square root
extracted signal, S I eguals one.

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N 0 l 0or1 Typeof signal:
0 = 1-5 VDCor 4-20mA (linear)
1 = 1-5 VDCor 4-2OmA(squarerootextractedsignal)
S2 N 0 I 0-255 Engineering unitidentifier
S3 N 0.000 R Full Zeroof 51 inputin engineering
units
s4 N 100.000 R Full Spanof 51 inputin engineering
units
S5 Y 100.000 R Full High alarm point limit value
s6 Y 0.000 R Full Lowafarmpointlimitvalue
S7 N 2.000 R Full Significantchange (/o of span)

EXPLANATION

ExceptionReports

An exception report witl occur when:

1, tr= t^u

where:

Tkne since last report.

Maximum report time for tl,is potnt as spectfied ln
t}re NAIVIMOI executive block (functton code 56).

Y Curent value of the input.

YL L,ast reported vahle.
t, Time since last report.
t^n Minimum report time for this point as specified in
ttre NANIMOI executlve block (function code 56).
Span of the S 1 input in engineering units.
significant change ln percent.

AnalogInputException Report(NAMMO1)
47 - 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 47

Alarm Reports

An alarm report generates when the high (S5) or low (SO)llmlt

is reached. The potnt stays tn alarm conditlon untll the input
is below (htgh) or above [ow) the alarm limlt and deadband
(set with 52 of functlon code 56). For exarnple:

The lnput ls zero to lOO percent (S2, Sg and S4). TIte htgh
alarm (S5) ls set to 85 percent and the low alarm limit ls set to
ten percent. The alarm deadband (functlon code 52 and 56) fs
set to 0.5 percent provtdfng a deadband of O.5 percent.

When the feput equds ten percent, there is a low alarm. The
point stays ln alarm untll ttre input ls greater ttran 10.5 per-
cent (low alarm plus deadband). When the tnput equals 85
percefit, there is a hlgh alarrn. The potnt stays tn alarm until
tlre tnput is less than 84.5 percent.

ALARM REPORTEQUATIONS

1. Y> (55) and currentstatus* highalarm(entertnghigh alarrn).

or

2. Y > [(SO)+ DBJ,and currenf sfafus = low alarm (e:dting low

alarm).

or

3. Y < KSS)- DBJ,and current status= high alarm (e:dting high

alarm).

or

4. Y S (SO)and currenfsfafus* low alarm (enterlng low alarm).

where:

Y Cument vdue of the lnput.

(s5) High alarm point limit value.
(s6) Low alarm potnt hmft vdue.
DB Alarm DBx (S4)
100
Alarm DB = Alarm deadband, defined by 52 of the executlve
block, ls a buffer zotre between the nonnal and
alarm states. It prevents excessive alarm reports
when a poiret value is hovering at an alarm limit.
Figure 47-I shows tlle use of alarm deadbaltds.
(s4) = Span of Sl in engineering unlts.

AnaloglnputExceptionRePo@
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 4 7- 3
FunctionCode47

EXAMPLES

Flgure 47-L shows a sample tmput, wlth alarm and exceptlon

reports tdenttfled.

HIGHALARMLIMIT(S5) = 90
LOW ALARMLIMIT(S6) = 10
ALARM DEADBAND= 2.5 o/o
SIGNIFICANTCHANGE(S7) = 5 o/o
Y = OUTPUTOF FUNCTIONCODEBLOCK47
100
I H|GHLrMrT-r DEADBAhD= ?-5o/o
e 0l - I----

70

t 6 0
I
Y50
40

30

n
10

0
nME --+

o Y GOESINTOHIGHALARMSTATEAND AN ALARMREPORTIS GENERATED.

@ Y GOESINTONORMALSTATEAND AN ALARMREPORTIS GENERATED.

o Y EXCEEDSSIGNIFICANT
CHANGEAND AN EXCEPTIONREPORTIS GENERATED.

@ Y GOES INTOLOW A1ARMSTATEAND AN ALARMREPORTIS GENERATED.

o Y GOES INTO NORMALSTATEAND AN AIARM REPORTIS GENERATED.

TP22016A

Figure 47 -1, funple Analq Exceptton Report utth Alnnn and.E:cceptlonRepofts

AnalogInputExceptionReport(NAMMO1)
4 7- 4 15FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode48 - ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 48-1
ffi

o
 Function Gode49 - Digital Output Buffer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Logic master modules use the digttal output buffer functlon

code to connect dtgttal lnputs and loglcal conflguratlons to
tJle termtnation device. Only output stgnals should connect to
digital output buffers. There ls no loglcal function performed.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N B Value of <S1>

SPECIFICATIO.A'S

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Description

S1 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input
NOTES:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254tor NLMMO1modules
1023for |MLMM02modules

EXAMPLES

Figure 49- I illustrates the use of functlon code 49 blocks to

carry both input stgnals and signals from logical functions to
termination connectlons. loglc functtons occupying blocks
not deflned as group UO outputs and all dlgital inputs
require digital output buffer blocks. Logic functions cannot
occupy blocks defined for inputs. Function code 49 is used in
combtnation with group I/O outputs. For more lnformation in
group I/O defintttorr, reference function codes 60 (NLMMOf)
arrd LO7 (IMLMMO2).

DigitalOutputBuffer
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 49-1
Function Code 49

a) NORMALOUTPUT

REI-AY

RELAY

b) TNFERRED
OUTPUT

Figure 49-7. UseoJDgital Outpfi Bqffers to

Create H ar dutare-F'lrrctlon Blrck Irtterfaces

DigitalOutputBuffer
49-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode50 - ManualSet Switch

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functlon provtdes EIn adJustable boolezrn output, elther

logic I or logic O. This functlon enables the englneer or tech-
nictan to turn devtces ON or OIIF tJrrough an operator inter-
face devlce (e.8., MCS or OIS console). Speclllcatlon Sf ls a
tunable parameter tl:at can be changed whlle the module is
executlng.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Outputvalueequals51

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 B 0or1 Desiredoutputvalue

ManualSet Switch
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 50-1
ffi

t
 FunctionGode51 - ManualSet Constant

GENENALDESCRIPTION

The manual set constant functton code provldes an adjust-

able real value that is not tunable. It perfonns the s€tme func-
tion as functlon code 2, except that functlon code 5f ls not
tunable.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Ilescrlptlon

N R OutputvalueequalsSl

SPEC//FICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Default TyPe Range Descrlption

S1 N 0.000 R Full Desiredoutputvalue

ManualSet Constant
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 5 1- 1
ffi

I
 Function Gode52 r ManualSet lnteger

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The manual set tnteger functlon code provtdes a tunable lnte-

ger constartt.

UTILIZATION

IMMFCOS

IMMFCOs
IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N I Outputvalueequals51

SPECIFICATIO.'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 Y 0 I Full IntegerconstantsPecified

EXAMPLES

Functlon code 52 ls commonly used wlth functJon codes 13

and 24 to dynamtcally modtff integer parameters. Figure 52-L
is an example of how to use tJre manual set integer to change
the set point tracking option ln a statlon. The value in the
remote control memory block (function code 62) determlnes
which ireput the functton eode fg block reads (<S3> equals
zero for <St> and <S3> equals one for <S2>). Ttle adapt block
(function code 24) adapts Sf 4 of ttre station (function
code 2L) to the value received from the integer transfer block
(function code 13). When the 53 lnput (output from t,l.e
remote control memory) equals zero, the output of the lnteger
transfer block equals lts Sl lnput (one), Thus, Sl4 of the sta-
uon adapts to set polnt track option one (track the Process
variable).

ManualSet Integer
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 52-1
FunctionGode52

S7 r 100.00
S0 rO.ffi
Se r 4.0E+6
slol 100.00
Sllr O.ffi
SlAr 0,000
813r O
S14r O
S15.0
sl6|0

Figure 52-7. FVnctionCode 52 Usedtn

Dynamica@ ModW an Integer Parameter

ManualSet Integer
52-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode53 - ExecutiveBlock (COM)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The executlve block for controller modules deflnes several

vartables that affect module operatlorls. The eKecutive block
for controller modules has f5 outputs (blocks 24O ttrrough
2541.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

240 B Start-upin progress:logic1 for first 15 secondsof module
executemode;then logic0
241 B Nonvolatilerandomaoessmemoryin initializemode:logic1
whensnritctris closedl
242 B Strateof generalpurposeswitchl
243 R Lastcontrolcycletime in seconds
2U B Validtime receivedfrom bus modulez
245 R Hours(0 to 23)
26 R Minutes(0 to 59)
247 R Seconds(0 to 59)
248 R Calendaryear (0 to 99)
249 R Calendarmonth(1 to 12)
250 R Calendarday (1 to 31)
251 R Calendarday of the week Sunday= 1, Monday= 2, etc.
252 R Revision lsvel3
253 R Nonvolatile random aoess memory utilization (%)
zil R Randomacessmemoryutilizationf/o)
NOTES:
1. Referto appropriatecontrollerinstruction.
2. Th€timereceivedfromthe busnroduleirrcrEments [email protected] the BIMdoesnot sendthe
timeto thecontroller,the blockouputs reflectthetimerelativeto the controllerreset.Midnight(or
modulereset)equals:hoursequalszero,minutesequalszero,and secondsequalszero.
3. Referto the Personal Computer Soltware Computer-Al&d DnwlngtText (CAD|TXT)In'
struction.

ExecutiveBlock(COM)
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 53-1
FunctionCode 53

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 B 0or1 Exceptionreportingtime units:
0 = SgConds
1 = minutes
S2 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime (250msecincrements)
S3 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime (incrementsdependent
upon51)
S4 N 2.000 R Full Significantchangeparameterloop reports(% span)
S5 N 1.000 R Full Alarmdeadbandhlghand low reports(% span)
S6 N 1.000 R Full Alarmdeadbanddeviationreports(% span)
s7 N 25 I 0-255 Cornputerwatchdogtime-outinterval(2.56sec increments)
S8 N 4 I 1-255 Modulebus updatetime (samePCU250 msecincrements)
S9 Y 25 I 0-255 Minimumcycletimealgorithms(10msecincrements)
sl0 N 0 I 0-255 Blockaddressof configuration
lck:
0 = unlock
1 = lock
sl1 Y 10.000 R Full Definesmaximumderivativegainfor PID
sl2 N 0 I 0or1 Extemalresetfor PIDfunctionblock:
0 = DOrtTlSl
1 = extemal reset

EXPLANATION

Specifications

51 - TUNIT (Time unitsl Specification S f defrnes the ttme unlts for the
mafrmum exceptlon report ttme (Sg). When Sf equals zero,
the units are displayed in milliseconds. When Sl equals one,
the units are displayed in minutes.

52 - MIN (Minimum ereeption report time) Specificaflon 52 deflnes

the minimum interval between updates of information sent on
the INFI-NET from executive report blocks. Exception reports
are not sent on the loop at each minimum exception report
interval unless a value has changed more than €rn operator
defined significant amount (S4) since the last exceptlon
report. Exception report time c€rn be set in 25O mtlltsecond
increments with the default set to one report per second.

S3 - MAX (Mox;imum exception report time) This specification defines

the maximum interval between updates of tnformation sent
on the loop. If the value of a polnt does not exceed the sfnffl-
cant change (S+1 over this (Sg) period of time, a report of its
curTent value is sent on the INFI-NET after this time perlod.
Exception report time can be set in 25O millisecond incre-
ments when Sf equals one, or one mlnute when Sf equals
zero. The default value is one report per minute.

ExecutiveBlock(COM)
53-2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 53

s4 - stGcHG (signiftcant chiange) Speclflcatlon 54 deflnes the percent of

span a polnt vdue must change to cause an exceptlon report
to generate.

S5 I ALRMDB (Alerm deadbattd hligtn and. lout retnrtsl Specfficatlon 55

deflnes the alarm deadband ln percent of span for all the high
and low alarm reports on the module speclfled. Alarm dead-
bands prevent excesslve darm reports when values are hov-
ertng around the darm Umlt.

s 6 - DEVDB (Alorm deadband for deoiation refrcfts) This specification

defines the alarm deadband ln percent of span for all devia-
tion alarms. Devlatlon darms apply to control statton blocks
only (functton codes 2L,22 and 23).

s7 - coMPwD (@mputer anatchdog timeout intento;lt The comPuter

watchdog tlme-out interval ls an interval used to time conl-
puter communlcatlons when a statlon (1.e., control looP) ts
under computer control. Timing starts with a computer OK
message and statton varlable settings. For examPle, when the
station switches from manual to computer control, the mes-
sage goes to the computer whtch generates €rn OK message
and Ieitlates tlming. If the elapsed ttme between OK messages
exceeds the value of 57, the timer times out. The value of S15
(computer watchdog time-out option) determines the eontrol
mode of the station. If the computer replies to a module mes-
sage before the interval ts over, the timer resets itself and
begins timtng with the next communicatiorl. The interval ls in
2.56 seeond increments wtth a default value of 64 secon s.

S8 - MBUPD (Module bns updete time) Specificatlon 58 defines the exe-

cutlon rate for all module bus inputs in the same PCU. Mod-
ule bus update ttme ls selected ln 250 mtlllsecond lncrements
with a default value of one update per second. Inputs and
outputs to the field synchronlze with tl'e module executlon
rate. Each time a module updat€s, it recelves a new tnput and
tralsmits a new output to the field. Bus and loop traffic are
asJrnchronous with the module execution rate. Values from
the bus and loop €rre stored in buffer blocks (e.g., digital input
over the loop function code 42).

s9 - cYcTlM (hlinimum cgcle time for eontrol algorithmsl Specification

59 deftnes the mlnlmum cycle tlme for control algorithm exe-
cution. Mlnlmum cycle tlme ts selected tn ten mtllisecond
increments with a default value of four exeeution cycles per
second. Minimum cycle ttme in controller modules ls nor-
mally set at a ma:dmum of four cycles per second because of
the high noise rejection of the input filters in ttre analog input
circuitry. An IMQRCOI Ouick Response Controller is avall-
able for faster response. Quick response controllers can exe-
cute control algorithms at a rate of ten cycles per second.

ExecutiveBlock(COM)
ls FEB1995 53-3
l-E96-2008
FunctionCode53

SlO - CBFLOK (Cortftguro;tiotr lock) Thts spectftcatlon can lock the conflgu-
ration of the module. Once a conflguratlon ts locked lt eannot
be unlocked. To change a locked conflguratlon, the module
must be initialized and reconfigured. A block address of zero
is unlocked and a block address of one ls locked. Any block
whose output is boolean may be used.

sl1 - Kd (Maximum derivqtive gain) Speciflcation Sl f ts the mard-

mum derivative unlt step response for all PID funcflon blocks
in a module. The default value ls 1O.OO0.

S12 - XRES (PID externel res,et option) This speclflcatlon affects all
functlon code 18 (PID error lnput) and 19 (PID - PV and SP)
blocks in the module or tn a segment of an IMCOMO4 module.
When tl,e external reset actlvates, ft€ module does two tnter-
nal checks. It lirst checks to see whether control ls propor-
tional and integral or only proportional. It then checks the
external reset option.

For proportional only control:

If S L2 = 0, the internal memory will not track.

If Sf 2 * O, ttre internal mernory tracks tJ:e trnput to the

block.

For proportional and integral control:

If S L2 = O, the internal rnemory does not track.

If S12 = I and track input = current output, internd

memory does not track.

If S12 = I and track input * current output, the internal

memory tracks the track input desplte the status of the
track and release flag.

This function prevents reset windup of a controller. Reset

windup can occur in any system. The most common occur-
rence of reset windup is in batch control systems where con-
trollers may be monitoring control variables but not
performing any control action during the current step. The
controller receives the signal, takes corrective action but sees
no result, so it tries to correct the error again. Since the con-
troller receives no results from its control action, it continues
to try to correct the error. When the controller does go to
another step of the process, it winds up beyond the value of
the controlled variable and loses control. The external reset
option enables the controller to be reset (zeroed) while it is not
being used for control functlons.

ExecutiveBlock(COM)
53-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 53

Outputs

240 (stcrrt-up in progre,ss signat, When start-up ls tn progress,

output blockz4D ls a loglc I for the ffrst 15 seconds the mod-
ule ls ln execute mode. When start-up ts successful, output
btock 24O ls a loglc O and remalns logic O whlle the module is
ln execute mode.

241 NVneU modc indieetorl Output blockz4l ls a logic I when

the nonvolattle random access memory (NN/RAI\{) hardware
switch is closed. To lnitlall-e IrI\ZRAIVI, ttte hardware surltch on
ttre module must be set to the open posltiorl, then returned to
the closed posttion after tnltia[zafloll.

There are two controller boards curTently ln use. Tlte I\ilRAIVI

switch ls tn a different posltlon on each board. Table 53-l
shows the board numbers and the I{\IRAI\{ inttialization
switch numbers. Check the part number on your board to
determine which board you have. Refer to the appropriate
instmction manual for swltch locations on that board.

Table 53-7. SulfchAssignments on

Contoller Mdtile PCB Assemblfes
Board Numbr NVRAM Swltch GeneralPurposeSwitch
D6634882 SW3-1 sw3-2
D6635405 sw4-2 sw4-3

242 (Sta;te of general purpose sruitcld Output block 242 is a

togic slgnal that reflects the state of a generd purpose hard-
ware switch on the module. A zero equals closed and a one
equals open.

243 (IAst control cgcle time; in seeondsl Output block 243 dis-
plays the length of the last completed control cycle. Control
cycle time consists of:

ND conversionof all inputs(-3 milliseconds)

+
executiontime of algorithm
+
D/A conversionof all output(-3 milliseconds)

waitfi; ffany)

244 (Valid timeflag) Output blockz44ls a flag (zero or one). This

output represents which mode of time is displayed by output
blocks 245 through 251.

O = BeginntEg of time. When output bloek 244 equals

zero, the time blocks 245 through 251 represent the

ExecutiveBlock(COM)
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 53-5
FunctionCode53

module nrntlme from the last reset, starting at

hours, minutes, and seconds equal zero.

1 = System tlme. When output block 244 equals one, the

time blocks 245 through 25L represent the system
tlme.

24s (nourc) %ro to 23.

246 (Minuts)kro to 59.

247 (Seconds, Zero to 59.

NOTE: FirmwarerevisionsbeforeJuly 1986 do not supportout-

puts 248through252.

248 (Crrlendor gear) Zero to 99.

249 (Ca;lendor month) One to L2.

250 (Calendor dofl One to 31.

251 (Dag of th'e ureek) One to seven.

Sund?Y = I
MondaY =2
T\resdaY = 3
Wednesday = 4
Thursday = $
FridaY = $
Saturday = /

252 (Ilardwore reui,siort level)

ExecutiveBlock(COM)
53-6 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode54 - ExecutiveBlock (NLMMOI)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Executlve block functlon codes deflne several varlables that

affect module operatlon. Ftrnctton code 54 pertalns only to
the NLMMOI loglc Master Module. Functlon code 54 resldes
tn flxed block two and produces no usable outputs.

The IMLMMO2 module uses functlon codes 105 (executlve

block), 106 (segfnent control block) and f 08 (extended execu- ,
tive), lnstead of functlon code 54. '

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe Descrlptlon

2 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFICATIO,'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlonl

S1 N 0 I 0-255 lock:
Blockaddressof configuration
0 = unlock
1 = lock
S2 N 10 I 10 - 255 Modulebus updatetime(10 msecincrements)
S3 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks4-127
S4 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks4'127
S5 N 4 I 0-255 Minimum exception report time, blocks 128'135
S6 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks128'135
S7 N 4 I 0-255 Minirnumexceptionreporttime,blocks136'143
S8 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks136-143
S9 N 4 I 0-255 Minimum exception report time, blocks 144'151
s10 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionrepoiltime,blocks144'151
s11 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks152-159
sl2 N 240 1 0-255 Maximum exception report time, blocks 152-159

ExecutiveBlock(NLMM01
)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 54-1
FunctionCode54

nued)
SPECIFI CATIOruS@onti

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlonl

s13 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks160-167
s14 N 240 0-255 Ma:<imum
exceptionreporttime,bloc-ks160-167
s15 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks168-175
s16 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks168-175
s17 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionrepofttime,blocks176-183
s18 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks176-183
s19 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks184-191
s20 N 240 0-255 Ma:<imum
exceptionreporttime,blocks184-191
s21 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks192-199
s22 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks192-199
s23 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks2OO-207
s24 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks2AO-207
s25 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks208€15
s26 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks208-215
s27 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks216-?23
s28 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks216-223
s29 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks224-231
s30 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks224-231
s31 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks232-239
s32 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks232-239
s33 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionrepofttime,blocks240-247
s34 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks240-247
s35 N 4 0-255 Minimum exception repoil time, blocks 248-255
s36 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks248-255
NOTE:
1. Minimum and maximum report times (S3 through 36) are in 250-msec increments.

EXPLANATION

The NLMM0I Logic Master Module mantpulates varlous logtc

functions and I/O operations. Conflgure blocks four tlrrough
L27 for logic functions and blocks I28 through 255 for loglc
or I/O functions in groups of etght. Speclflcattons Sg through
536 define the mtnlmum and ma:dmum exceptlon reporttng
times for each group of blocks.

Specifications

S1 - CNFLOK (@nfiguratiott loek) Speciflcation Sl ls the block address of

the configuration lock. The default value of Sl ts block
address zero, which is unlocked configuration. A loglc I locks
the configuration. Once locked, a configurafion cannot be
unlocked. To change a locked configuratiorl, the module must
be initialized and reconflgured.

Block(NLMM01
Executive )
54-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode54

S2 I MBUPD (Module bus ugf,o;te time) Speclftcatlon 52 defines the

update rate for all module bus ilnputs to NLMMOI modules in
a slngle PCU. Thls vdue ls selected ln ten mllltsecond lncre-
ments. Ttle default vdue ls ten updates per second. I/O to the
fleld synchronlzes wtth the module executlon. Each tlme a
module updates, lt recelves a ne\il tnput and transmlts a new
output to tlle fleld.

S3 through 336 (Minimum ond, martnum exceptlon regnrting times .for

bloclcs four tlvough. 255)

MIN - Minimum bcceptton Reprt Tirne

Mtnlmum exceptlon report tlme deflnes the mlnlmum lnterval
between updates of lnformatlon sent on the communlcatlon
hfghway. Thls adJusts stgnal Umtng and affects the loadtng of
ttre communlcation htghway. Exceptlon reports are not sent
on the communicatlon highway at each minlmum exceptlon
report interval unless the value has changed slnce the last
exception report. Exceptlon report tlme ls selected in 250 mil-
lisecond increments with the default value set to one report
per second.

II/AX - MolcirruIrl Exceptton Report Time

Ma:dmum exceptlon report tlme deflnes the ma:dmum lnter-
val between updates of lnformatlon sent on the communlca-
uon highway. If a value of a polnt has not changed over thts
ume pertod, a report of its current value ls automatically sent
on the communlcation htghway after this tlme. Select excep-
tion report time tn 25O mlllisecond lncrements. The default
value is one report per mlnute. The ma,nual set integer func-
tion code provides a tunable integer constant.

ExecutiveBlock(NLMMOI
)
15 FEB199s 54-3
l-E96-200B
ffi

I
 FunctionGode55 - HydraulicServo

GENEBAL DESCRIPTION

The hydraullc seryo functton code defines start-uP, run tlme,

callbratiorr, mode select, and fatlure mode speciflcatlons for the
IMHSSOS Hydraullc Servo Module. Thls functlon code ls used
sl0
as an tnterface to the MFP module. Indtvidual block addresses
sl1 €rre spectfied by thts functlon code to provlde posltlon demand,
s12 cdibration functlon and mode select parameters.
s13
sl4
The function block has ten outputs. The outputs dtsplay valve
position, module status, process control status, as well as
status of componentr5r withln the turblne control loop such as
senro coil status and linear vartable dtfferential transformer
(LVDT) status.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlption

N R Percentor voltsactuatorpositionwith quality
N+1 R |MHSS03D/Aconvefteroutputwith quality(expressedas % of
span)
N+2 R Servo1 coil 1 outputcurrentn o/oor volts, with quality
N+3 R Servo1 coil2 outputcunent n "/" or volts, with quality
N+4 R Seruo2 coil 1 outputcurrent n o/oor volts, with quality
N+5 R Servo 2 coil 2 output current in o/oor volts, with quality
N+6 R Modulestatus
N+7 R LVDT StAtUS
N+8 B Module hardware status:
Q = good
1=bad
N+9 B and watchdogtimerstatus:
Modulecommunication
Q= good
1=bad

HydraulicServo
r-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 55-1
FunctionCode55

SPECIFICATIO,IVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Modulebus addressof module
S2 N 0 0-5 Outputdeviceselect:
0 = oUtput1 activeservooutput,output2 unused
1 = output1 unused,output2 activeservooutput
2 = oUtput1 activeservo,output2 redundant
servooutput
3 = output1 activesetvo,output2 redundant
servoat 20o/ostandby
4 = oUtput1 active4-2OmA l/H converterouput
5 = output1 active20-160rnAUHconverteroutput
S3 N 0 I 0-4 LVDTselect:
0 = input1 LVDT,input2 unused
1 = input1 unused,input2 LVDT
2 = input1 primaryLVDT,input2 backupLVDT
3 = input1 backupLVDT,input2 primaryLVDT
4 = input1 LVDTyH displayonly,input2 4-20mA
contingencyerrormonitor
S4 N 0 I 0-3 Output action on LVDT error:
0 = valve closes to 0oloposition:
0 V in servo mode
4 mA in 4-2OmA mode
20 mA in 20-160 mA mode
1 = valve opens to 100% position:
ma( V in servo rnode
20 mA in 4-20 mA mode
160 mA in 20-160 mA mode
2 = valve remains at cunent position (l/H mode only)
3 = valve moves to null position (l/H mode only)
S5 N 1.0 R 0.0or LVDT frequency select in KHz:
0.4-15.0 0.0 = DC LVDT mode
s6 N 5 I 0 - 9998 Block address of the percent positiondemand
S7 N 5 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof LVDTnullcheckmodeselect:
0 = do not stopcalibrationat nullpoint
1 = stopat nullfor primaryLVDT
2 = stop at nullfor secondaryLVDT
S8 N 6 0 - 9998 Bloc* address of calibrationstroke time select (in secs)
S9 N 6 I 0 - 9998 Block address of calibrationcycles count (1.0 to 8.0)
s10 N 5 0 - 9998 Block address of calibration type select:
0 = full calibration.Record both 07o 1@o/o
calibrationvalues "nd
1 = 0o/ocalibration.Record only 0% LVDT value
2 = 100o/ocalibration.Record only 100% LVDT
value
s11 N 0 0 - 9998 Block address of calibrate mode enable:
0 to 1 transition= calibrate
sl2 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Block address of calibrate GO/HOLD select:
0 = hold
1=go
sl3 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof hardmanualmodeselect:
0 = outomode
1 = hardmanualmode
sl4 N 0 0 - 9998 Sparebooleanblockaddressparameter

HydraulicServo
55-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode55

SP ECIFI CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl5 Y 0 I 0-3 Blockoutputdisplayunits:
O= outputN in o/o,outputsN+2to N+5in olo
1 = outPutN in volts,outputsN+2to N+5in o/o
2 = outPutN ino/o,outputsN+2to N+5in volts
3 = outputN in volts,outputsN+2to N+5in volts
s16 Y 1 I 0-31 Demodulator gainconstant:
0 = outo-tuningenabled
1 = 2.0 12 = 36.3 23 = 87.7
2 = 4.0 13 = 40.0 24 = 93.6
3 = 5.9 14 = 44.0 25 = 100.9
4 = 7.8 15 = 48.8 26 = 108.0
$ = 10.0 16= 52,0 27 = 118.0
6 = 11.8 17 = 54.9 28 = 126.2
7 = 16.0 18= 61.5 29 = 132,0
8 = 21.1 19= 64.2 30 = 141.3
9 = 24.7 20 = 69.8 31 = 152.0
10 = 28.3 21 = 72.0
11= 32.0 22 = 78.6
s17 Y 1 0-31 Control gain proportional constant:
0 or 1 = 1.0 12= 18.1 23 = 43.8
2 = 2.0 13 = 20.0 24 = 43.8
3 = 2.9 14 = 22.0 25 = 50.4
4 = 3.9 15 = 24.4 26 = 54.0
5 = 5.0 16 = 26.0 27 = 59.4
6 = 5.9 17 = 27.4 28 = 63.1
7 = 9.0 1g = g0.Z 29 = 66.0
$ = 10.5 19 = 32.1 30 = 70.6
9 = 12.3 20 = 34.9 31 = 76.0
10 = 14.1 21 = 36.0
11 = 16.0 22 = 39.3
s18 Y -10.0 R Full LVDT 1 ditferential voltage 0o/oactuator position
"t
sl9 Y +10.0 R Full LVDT1 ditferentialvoltageat 100%actuatorposition
s20 Y -10.0 R Full LVDT2 ditferentialvoltageat 0% actuatorposition
s21 Y +10.0 R Full LVDT 2 ditterentialvoltage at 100% actuator position
s22 Y 5.0 R 0 - 100 Contingency deadband in o/o
s23 Y 0.0 R Full Sparerealparameter

EXPLANATION

Outputs

N Percent actuator posiHon with quality. This output dtsplays

actuator posiHon read from the L\IDT or position feedbaek
device. Ouality will be displayed as bad in the event of an
A/D erTor, a bus transmission error, or an L\IDT error (1.e.,a
primary or seeondary error if using one L\IDT, or error on
both L\IDTs when operating with redundant L\IDTs). Other-
wise, the quality will indicate good,.

N+1 IMHSS0S D/A converter output. Thts output dtsplays the

D/A converter output value as a percent of span. Thls ls the
posiuon demand signal feedback to generate an error slgnal.

HydraulicServo
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 55-3
FunctionCode 55

A hardware controller manipulates tlle error signal to pro-

duce the control output signal. This output value c€rn be used
as a guide to match to the MFP position demand and brtng
the IMHSSOS module out of hard manual mode. Qualtty urltl
be displayed as bo;d in the event of a D/A, A/D or bus trans-
mission error. Otherwis€, the quality will indicate good..

N+2 Servo 1, coil I control output. ThJs output dlsplays the

IMHSSO3 analog control output signal to servo valve 1, coll 1,
expressed as a percent of span. Ouality will be displayed as
ba'd in the event of an A/D error, bus transmission error,
shorted output, or opened output. The output ls good quality
otherwise.

NOTE:This outputblockwill displaya value of zero with good

qualitywhendefinedas unusedby 52.

N+3 Servo 1, coil 2 control output. This output displays the

IMHSSOS analog control output signal to servo valve l, coll 2,
expressed as a percent of span. Ouallty wfll be dtsplayed as
brrd in the event of an A/D error, bus transmission error,
shorted output, or opened output. The output is good quahty
otherwise.

NOTE:This outputblockwill displaya value of zero with good

qualitywhendefinedas unusedby S2.

N+4 Servo 2, coil t control output. This output displays the

IMHSSO3 analog control output signal to seryo valve 2, coil l,
expressed as a percent of span. Ouality will be displayed as
ba;d in the event of an A/D error, bus transmisslon effor,
shorted output, or opened output. The output is good quality
otherwise.

NOTE:This outputblockwill displaya value of zero with good

qualitywhendefinedas unusedby S2.

N+5 Servo 2, coil 2 control output. This output displays the

IMHSSO3 analog control output signal to servo valve 2, cotl 2,
expressed as a percent of span. Quality will be displayed as
bo;d in the event of an A/D eror, bus transmission enor,
shorted output, or opened output. The output is good quality
otherwise.

NOTE:This outputblockwill displaya value of zero with good

qualitywhendefinedas unusedby 32.

N+6 Module status is converted into a real output as an integer

with the bit map shown in Table 55- 1.

Bits O-7
Status of calibration or automatic tuning command.

Q = A calibration or automatic tuning is in proeess.

HydraulicServo
55 - 4 ts FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 Function Gode55

Tabte 55-7. Mdule Status BitMaP

Bir Blnary Welght Descriptlon

0-1 1 tuningcommandstatus:
CalibratiorVautomatic
0 = CAUATOPcommandin progress
1 = CAUATOPcommandcomplete.
No commandissued
2 = Calibration
failure
3 = Demodulator gainauto-tunefailure
2 4 Servooutputsin bypassrnode
3 I Modulemode:
0 = auto
1 = hardmanual
4 16 positioningerror:
Contingency/actuator
0 = IIO efrOf
1 = €ffOI

5 32 ND erron
0 = IlOerror
1 = effOI

6 il DIAerror:
0 = hOerrOr
1 = gtfOt

7 128 DPRAMerror:
0 = hOerrOr
1 = €IIOf

8-23 Reserved

1 = The command has been correctly completed or the

command has never been issued.

! =An error has occurred during a calibrailon operafloll.

It indlcates one of three causes. The lOO percent volt-
age value was less than the zero percent volta$e value
for the L\ZDTs. An LVDT failure occuffed durtng call-
bration. Refer to S!7, Sf 8, Sl9 and S2O for addttional
information on calibration failures.

g = A demodulator gain auto-tune failure. If usin$ redun-

dant L\IDTs, the L\IDTs do not match and cannot be
configured for redundant operation. The auto-tuntng
procedure has picked the best values for the primary
L\IDT as selected in 53. The backup L\IDT ls consld-
ered failed. Redundant LVDT operailon ls only avall-
able if the backup LVDT ls replaced and the auto-tune
procedure is performed again.

Fiit 2
The seryo outputs are bypassed (grounded) due to an l/O
error that interferes wfth positioning. Tttese errors include
opened and shorted L\IDTs and DA elTors.

Bit 3
Module mode. This output indicates the mode of the
IMHSSOS module. A value of zero at this bit indicates auto-
matlc mode; a one value indicates hard m€urual mode.

HydraulicServo
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 55-5
FunctionCode 55

Bit 4
Contingency actuator positioning error. This bit ls one tf the
measured actuator position deviates beyond an established
deadband from the posltion set point established in the
IMHSSOS module. Otherwise, this blt value ls zero.

Bit 5
A/D error. This bit value is one if the error is assoclated with
the A/D converter on the IMHSSOS module. Otherwls€, thts
bit value is zero.

Bit 6
D/A error. This bit value is one if the error ls associated with
the D/A converter on the IMHSSO3 module. Otherwis€, this
bit value is zero.

Bit 7
DPRAIVI error. This bit value is one if a DPRAIVI error is
detected on the IMHSSO3 module. Otherwts€, thls btt value ls
zero.

N+7 LVDT status. The LVDT status is converted into a real output
as an integer with the bit map shown in Table 55-2.

Tabl.e 55-2. LI4DT Stafi.rs

Bir Binary Weight Description
0 1 ActiveLVDTor positionfeedbackdevice:
0=LVDT1
1=LVDT2
1 2 LVDT1 primary:
Q= good
1=bad
2 4 LVDT1 secondary1
0 - good
1=bad
3 I LVDT1 secondary2:
Q= good
1=bad
4 16 LVDT2 primary:
Q= good
1=bad
5 32 LVDT2 secondary1
0 - good
1=bad
6 64 LVDT2 secondary2:
0 - good
1=bad
7 128 LVDTat nullpoint:
0 = Dotat null
1 = at null
8-23 Reserved

HydraulicServo
55 - 6 ls FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code55

Bit o
Active LVDT or posltton feedback device. Thls bit [irdlcates
which LrVDT ts betng used to determtne the Percent actuator
posltton. A zero btt value lndtcates that tnput one ls curenily
selected; a btt value of one lredlcates that tnput two ls cllr-
rently selected. In the event of an error to both LTVDTSln a
redundant LVDT sltuatiofr, thts output wtll dtsplay t}re most
recently functlonleg L\IDT.

8lit 7
L\IDT I primary I status. This blt value wtll be one ln the
event of a prtmary failure of LTDT f (1.e., Ito stgnal present on
either of the Lrr/DT I secondary outputs). Othemrtse, thts bft
value will be zero.

Bit 2
L\/DT I secondary I status. Th,ts blt vdue wtll be one ln the
event of an Lrt/DT I secondary I f,ailure. Otherwis€, thts btt
value will be zero.

Bit 3
L\IDT I seconda4r 2 status. This bit value will be one ln the
event of an LVDT I secondary 2 failure. Otherwis€, thls blt
value will be zero.

F,it 4
L\/DT 2 primuy status. Thls bit value will be one in the event
of a primary failure of LVDT 2 (1.e.,r1o signal present on elther
of the LrrlDT 2 secondary outputs). Otherwise, tjrJs bft value
will be zero.

Bit 5
L\/DT 2 secondary I status. Thts bit value will be one ln the
event of an LTUDT2 secondary I failure. Otherwis€, thls btt
value will be zero.

Bit 6
LVDT 2 secondaryr2 status. This bit value will be one in the
event of an L\IDT 2 secondary 2 failure. Otherwlse, thls blt
value will be zero.

Bit 7
L\IDT at null point. During calibration, tl.is bit value ls one
when the 50 percent (null) valve position is reached for the
selected LVDT or posltion feedback device. Ottrenvtse, thls blt
value is zero. This bit is always a zero value during both tur-
bine control and hard manual modes of operatlon.

N+8 Module hardware status. This output will display a one tf the
module has encountered a fatal error and stopped operatlon.
Otherwis€, a value of zero is dlsplayed.

N+9 Module communication and watchdog tlmer status. Tttls out-

put wtll dlsplay a one lf the communlcatlons between the

HydraulicServo
l-E96-2008 15FEB199s 55-7
FunctionCode 55

module and the MFP module are lost. Otherwis€, a value of

zero is displayed.

Specification Sl is the module bus address of the IMHSSOS

Hydraulic Servo Module.

This specification defines the t5pe and configuration of tur-

bine control valve which will be driven by the IMHSSO3 rnod-
ule. There are six available options:

Q = One hydraulic servo valve connected to output l. Servo 2

output cuments (N+4 and N+5) witl display a value of zero
with good quality.

I = One hydraulic servo valve connected to output 2. Servo I

output curents (N+2 and N+3) wilt display a value of zero
with good quality.

2 = Redundant hydraulic servo valves used, both with active

control signals.

$ = Redundant hydraulic seryo valves used, output I as pri-

mary and output 2 as secondary PO percent standby sig-
nal).

Q =l/H converter mode (four to 20 milliamps) connected to

output 1. Servo 2 output currents (N+4 and N+5) and
servo t coil 2 output curent (N+3) will display a value of
zero with good quality.

$ = I/H converter mode (2O to 160 milliamps) connected to

output I. Servo 2 output currents (N+4 and N+5) and
servo I coil 2 output current (N+3) will display a value of
zero with good quality.

s3 Selects the position feedback input configuration to be used.

Table 55-3 describes the available options.

Table 55-3. Posrfion Feedback Options

Spec
Input1 Input2
Value
0 LVDT No connection
1 No connection LVDT
2 PrimaryLVDT BackupLVDT
3 BackupLVDT PrimaryLVDT
4 LVDT (displayonly in l/ 4-20mAtransmitter(contingency
erroronlyin
H mode) l/H mode)

HydraulicServo
55-8 15 FEB 1995 t-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode55

s4 Thls speclficatlon deflnes the action to be taken tn the event

of total LVDT fallure. Total LrtDT fatlure ls deflned as a fallure
of one L\DT ln a stngle LVDT conflguration or both LtfDTs ln
a redundant LVDT configuratlon.

If operating in the seryo valve mode, this speciflcatlon can be

set to ground (outputs disabled) or output the maxlmum slg-
nal (1OOpercent) to the outputs tn the event of a total LT/DT
failure.

NOTE:Controlof the valvepositionis impossiblewithoutposition

feedbackinformation.

The outputs are either grounded or drlven to f 0O Percent to

avold large swtngs in the valve posltton due to control loss.
The adJustment of the seryo valve spool determlnes tJ:e speed
in which the servo vdve closes or opens. If fOO pereent ls
selected, tJle outputs disabled light does not llluminate ln the
event of an error.

If a total failure of the LrVDT occurs, the output ls drlven

based upon selectlon made in thJs speciflcatlon. The opttons
are as follows:

Q = Valve closes to a zero percent posltion. Grounded outputs

in tlle servo valve mode are four milliamps in the four to
20 mitliamp mode, or 20 milliamps in the 20 to f6O mll[-
amp mode.

I = Valve opens to lOO percent position. Outputs to manimum

in the servo valve mode €rre 20 millia:rrps in the four to 2O
mitliamp mode, or f 60 milliamps itl the 20 to 160 mllll-
amp mode.

) =Valve remains at its curent positiorl. Control maintalned.

I/H mode only.

$ = Valve moves to a null position. I/H mode only.

In either mode, if the LVDT erTor is a failure of one secondary,

the module can be calibrated to return to norrnal operatlon.

S5 L\ZDT frequency selected (in kiloher%') from O.4 kilohettz to

l5.O kilohertz. If a DC LVDT ls used, a value of zeto must be
entered for thts speclficatlon.

S6 Block address of the percent position demand reguested.

Quality of the position demand block is i$nored.

S7 Block address of the L\IDT null mode selected. When thts

specification ls set to one or two and calibration is enabl€d,

HydraulicServo
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 55-9
FunctionCode55

the valve ramps to and holds at the Lrr,DT null point for the
primary or backup LTVDT,respectively.

Q = Do not stop calibration at LT{DT null polnt.

I - Stop calibration operation at the null poiret of the pri-

rnary L\IDT.

t, = Stop calibratlon operation at the null polnt of the

backup L\IDT.

In servo valve mode, the LVDT null point ts defined to be the

valve position where the LVDT secondaries have equal volt-
age, usually close to a 50 pereent valve position. In the I/H
converter mode, the LrDT null point is the 50 percent output
value (i.e., L2 milliamps for the four to 2O milliamp mode and
9O milliarnps for the 20 to 160 milliamp mode).

s8 Block address of the calibration stroke tlme. This speciflca-

tion indicates the time in seeonds for the valve to be driven
from a zero percent actuator position to a lOO percent actua-
tor positiolr. Stroke times normally used for calibration are 3O
seconds, 60 seconds, 35 minutes (2, lOO seconds) and 70
minutes (4,2OOseconds). Mildmum stroke time is 30 seconds.

S9 Block address of the calibration cycles count. Tllis specifica-

tion determines the number of calibration cycles to be per-
formed during the cdibration operation. The calibratlon
operation can perform from one to eight cycles (1.O to 8.O).

sl0 Block address of the calibration tSpe seleet. Thts speclflcatlon

selects whether a full calibration wilt be performed or only the
f 0O percent L\IDT voltage or zero percent L\IDT voltage will be
recorded.

Q = Full calibration. Record both zeto percent and IO0

percent vahJes.

I = Zero percent calibratiorf.. Record only tl:e zero percent

LVDTvalue.

2 = f OO percent calibration. Record only the lOO percent

LVDTvalue.

s11 Block address of the calibrate mode enable. A transition of

this input block value from a zero to a one begins the calibra-
tion process.

Q = Do not calibrate or terminate calibration.

1 - Begin calibration (when tuned from a zero to a one).

HydraulicServo
55 - 10 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code 55

sl2 Block address of tl:e calibrate GO /HOLD select.

Q = Hold. Pause callbration execution.

I = Go. Execute calibration procedure.

sl3 Block address of the hard manual mode select. Hard manual
mode can be foreed by setttng this specificatlon to a one.
When this specificatlon ls reset to a zero, the module wtll
return to automatlc operation if the MFP positton demand
(SO)equals IMHSSO3 DlLoutput value (N+1).

sl4 Spare boolean block address Parameter.

sl5 Selects whether the LVDT feedback (output block NI) ls dls-
played as a voltage or a Percenta$e.

Q= Output N ire percent, outputs N+2 to N+5 ln percent

1= Output N in volts, outputs N+2 to N+5 in percent
!, = Output N ln percent, outputs N+2 to N+5 in volts
$= Output N in volts, outputs N+2 to N+5 in volts

sl6 This specification defines the demodulator gain constant used

by the IMHSSO3 module. This value can be zero or an lnteger
value from one to 31.

lf zero is selected, the IMHSSO3 module automatically selects

the optimal demodulator gain value based on the htghest
non-saturated demodulator gain value measured on the
IMHSSQS module. If this option is selected, the opttmal
demodulator gain value is automatically written lnto 516.

A non -zero number in tl:is spectficatlon dtrects the IMHSSOS

module to use the corTesponding table value as the demodu-
lator gain constamt and the automatic tuning oPeration ls not
perfoimed. Refer to the specilications table for the llst of
available gain constant values.

NOTE:lf a changeis madeto the demodulator gainvalue,the pro'

portionalgain vatuesmust be adiusted (i.e., the user-selectable
propoilionalgainvalues).Afterwards,an LVDTcalibrationmustbe
pedormed.

sl7 This speciflcation defines the proportional gain constant used

by the IMHSSO3 module. The value shown in the spectflcs-
tions table is used as the proportional gain eonstant.

sl8 L\IDT differential voltage at zero percent actuator position for

L\rDT l. This value is set by the operator or ca,n be ovenrrlt-
ten for both LVDTs automatically by performing a calibratlon
operatiolt.

HydraulicServo
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 55- 11
FunctionCode55

sl9 LVDT differential voltage at lOO percent actuator posltton for

LVDT l. This value is set by the operator or can be ovenrrit-
ten for both LVDTs automatically by performing a caltbratlon
t
operation.

s20 L\IDT differential voltage at zero percent actuator position for

L\ZDT 2. This value is set by the operator or can be ovenrrit-
ten for both LVDTs automatically by performing a calibratlon
operation.

s21 L\IDT differenttal voltage at lOO percent actuator positton for

L\/DT 2. This value ls set by the operator or can be over$rrlt-
ten for both LVDTs automatlcally by performlng a calibration
operation.

s22 Contingency deadband in percent. The contingency error bit

indicates an error when tl:e vdve cannot be driven to the
position demand plus or minus this contingency deadband.

s23 Spare real parameter.

HydraulicServo
55- 12 15 FEB199s l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode56 - ExecutiveBlock (NAMMOI)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Executlve block functlon codes deflne several vartables that

affect module operatton. Functlon code 56 pertalns only to
the NAI\4M01 Analog Master Module. Function code 56
resldes ln ftxed block 75 and produces no usable outputs.

NAIvIMO2modules use functton code 71, not functlon code 56.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

75 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlonl

S1 N 0 B 0or1 lock:
Configuration
0 = unlock
1 = lock
S2 N 0 I Full Alarm deadband (% of span)
S3 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks1-8
S4 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks1'8
S5 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumsxceptionreporttime,blocks9'16
S6 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttims, blocks9-16
S7 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks17-24
S8 N 240 l 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks17'24
S9 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks25-32
sl0 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks25'32
sl1 N 4 I 0-255 Minimurnexceptionreporttime,blocks33'40
sl2 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks33'40
sl3 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks41-48
sl4 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks41-48

ExecutiveBlock(NAMMOI
)
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 56-1
Function Code 56

SP ECIFl CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptfonl

s15 N 4 I 0-255 MinimumexcepUon reporttime,blocks49-56
sl6 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks49-56
sl7 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptlonreporttime,blocks57-il
sl8 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks57-il
sl9 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks65-72
s20 N 240 l 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks65-72
NOTE:
1. Minimumandmaximumreporttimes(S3through20)are in 250-msecincrements.

EXPLANATION

NAIVIMOI Analog Master Modules have up to 72 htgh level ana-

log inputs. They have eight inputs on board with the capacfty
to handle 64 others through analog slave modules. Exceptlon
reporting times are speclfied for each group of etght lnputs.

Specifications

51 - CNFLOK (Configuratiott lock) Speclficatlon Sf ls the conflguratlon

lock. A one locks the configuratlon. The default value of block
address zero provtdes unlocked conflguratlon. Once locked, a
conflguratlon cannot be unlocked. To change a locked conflg-
uratlon, the module must be lnltlaltzed and reconflgured.

52 - ALRMDB (Alarm deadhsnd) Speclficatlon 52 deflnes the darm dead-

band in percent of span for all hlgh and low alarm reports in
the specified module. Alarm deadbands prevent excesslve
alarm reports when values hover a,round the alarm ltmlt.

53 throughS36 (Minimum o;nd maximum exception reporting times for

bloclcs one through- 72)

MIN - Minimurrl Exception Report Time

Minimum exception report tlme deflnes the mintmum interval
between updates of information sent on the communlcation
highway. Exception reports are not sent on the loop at each
minimum exception report lnterval unless tJre value has
changed a significant amount slnce the last exception report.
Exception report time is selected in 25O mtllisecond incre-
ments with the default value set to one report per second.

ItM)( - Maximurrl Exception Report Time

Maximum exception report tlme deflnes the ma:dmum lnter-
val between updates of lnformatlon sent on the communica-
tion highway. If a value of a point has not changed by a
significant amount over thts tlme pertod, a report of lts ctrr-
rent value is automatlcally sent on the loop. Select exceptlon
report time in 250 millisecond lncrements. The default value
is one report per minute.

ExecutiveBlock (NAMMO1
)
56-2 15 FEB1995 f-E96-200B
 FunctionCode57- ReseruedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-200B 57-1
ffi

o
 FunctionGode58 - TimeDelay(Analog)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The time delay functlon code provtdes a pure delay on an ana-

log slgnal. It c€rn be used to create flxed or varlable tlme
delays, or model systems tlrat represent dynamic time delays.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Description

N R Timedelayedfunctionof inPut

SPECIFICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Delault Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input(X)
S2 N 6 I Note 1 Block address of rate input (R, in units/second)
S3 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof trackswitchsignal:
0 = track
1 = r€lease
S4 N 0.000 R Full Length of queue (L, in units)
S5 N 1 I 0-255 Numberof intervals(N)
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules and CLCOUOAOU04
1023 for SLC01/21
zC/;Ofor NMFC}I|O?,|MMFCOSand CBCO1
9998 lor |MMFCOS/04and IMMFPOIIOUO3

EXPLANATION

Specifications

sl - <x> Specificatton S I is the block address of the lnput.

s2 - <R> Specification 52 is the block address of rate input in units per

second.

Time Delay(Analog)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 58-1
FunctionCode 58

s3 - <T> Speclficatlon SS ts the block address of track surltch slgnal.

Q = track input
I = rel€ase

When <S3> = O, tt tntflall-es all n elements of the memory to

the lnput value:

Then Mt = M2 = ...Mo = <S1>, ald elapsed tlme SlrCe the

last sample = 0.

There ls no ttme delay.

If <S3) = 1, then:

s4
- =
TimeDelav
(sz)

TimeDelay
TimelnterualFl) =
s5

ElapsedTime= ET + t

where:

ET Time sinee last sample ln seconds

t Time since last algorithm execution in seconds
Tl Internal input sample time in seconds
Mi Memory locations where tnput values are stored
during the time delay

If ET 2 TI:

Mr = M, * 1, fOr i = O to n

M. = output value, and Mr = <S1>

Elapsed time = ET - TI

5 4 - L (Lelngth. of queue) Specification 54 is the lengtlr of the queue

in unlts. The queue is the number of units over which the
time delay is effective.

s5 -N fjltumfur of intentals) Specification 55 is the number of

times, from one to 19O, that the lnput is to be sampled. Deter-
mine N by dividing the time delay (TD) by the deslred sarn-
pling frequency.

TimeDelay(Analog)
58-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode58

APPLICATIOruS

Fixed Time Delay

For a fixed time delay, the rate input, <S2>, is constant. The
time delay between output and input varles only with 54. It is
directly proportional to 54. For example, simulate the time
delay for flow through a pipe. Assume a required time delay of
two minutes with input sampling desired every flve seconds.
Select the default value of 1.0 (found in fixed block six) for
<S2> since rate is constant for ftxed delays.

<S2> = Rate in units per seconfl = 1.O

54 = Length of the queue in units

55 = Number of intervals

Time Delay = 2 mtnutes = I2O seconds

TD = LzO seconds

s4
TD=
(s4

L2O = v1.0
54 = I2O units = Iength of queue

For input sampling every five seconds:

TD
N-
5 sec
120 sec
=
5 sec
= 24 interuals

Figure 58- I ls an tllustration of ttrts ex€rmple.

T/N}| F
INPUT OUTPUT

o 1 2 3 N
+u# TP451764

Figure 58-7. F'bcedThne DeIaA Ernmple

Time Delay(Analog)
l-E96-200B ls FEB1995 58-3
Function Code 58

Variable Time Delay

Varlable time delays may be dynamtcally adJusted by chang-

ing the value of <S2>. fJstng a functlon code 9 block, as lllus-
trated in Figure 58-2, the two fixed lnput rates c€rn be
switched. In the fixed time delay ex€rmple, when <S2> equals
l.O, the time delay, S4/<S2> equals I2A seconds. By chang-
ing <S2> to 2.O, the tlme delay becomes 60 seconds, and the
timlng interval, TD/N equals 2.5 seconds. Changtng the rate
input <S2> while holding all other parameters constant
changes the timing interval. Faster rates produce more fre-
quent input sampling, and slower rates produce less frequent
input sampling for the same number of lntervals.

LOGIC SIGNAL
CONTROLLING
TRACK SWITCH
TP45159A

Figure 58-2. F'tJnction Cd,e 58 Used

-for Vafinble TUne DelaV

System Modeling

The analog Ume delay block may be used to model a physical

system that represents a dynamic time delay. For example, €rn
oil pipeline may have a measurement device at a different
location than the indicator/controller. With tllts function code,
a measurement can be taken. This function code delays send-
ing the value to the controller until the element of oil reaches
tlre controller. Specification 4 may be specified in feet, <S2> in
feet per second, and N to establish the needed resolution.

If 54 = lOO feet o;nd <S2> varies from ten feet per second to
20 feet per second, then TD witl varJr between ten seconds and
five seconds.

If sampling is required every O.5 seconds to achieve the

needed resolution, then:

longesttime delaY
N=
0.5 sec
= 10 sec
0.5 sec
= 20 interuals

Time Delay (Analog)

58-4 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode58

The longest tlme delay can present a worst case scenario. No

matter what the time delay, the input wilt be sampled 20
tlmes over that perlod to firsure adequate resolutlon. For the
shortest ttme delay, the sampltng lntenrals wtll be:

5 sec =
o.zs sennd
20 interuals

ln most cas€s, tle delay ln a proeess conststs of more than a

pure tlme delay (deadttme). There ls usually an addittonal
time lag that may be a first, second, or higher order lag. In
general, the process responds to a second order lag response.
This can be slmulated accurately by ustng a time delay and a
first order lag. If necessarJr, another frrst order lag function
block can be added. Ftgure 58-3 shows a graPhlc representa-
tion of a functlon and a slmulated response. Figure 58-4 illus-
trates the configuration required to slmulate the resPonse
shown in Figure 58-3.

F-
=
G
F
f
o

, FIRST ORDER
- stMUlirED RESP'NSE

Figure 58-3. Ftrst Order SimtlntedRespot?se

to TUpicalTtme Delag

Figure 58-4. Response Sirntdntion Coffirtallon

Time Delay(Analog)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 58-5
ffi

o
 FunctionCode59 - DigitalTransfer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functlon code selects one of two dlgttal lnputs, depend-

trg on a transfer swttch stgnd. The state of the transfer
surttch <S3> ls determlned xternally, elther by automatic
control or by an operator.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N B Valueof selectedinput

SPECIF'CATIO,|VS

Spec Tune Default TyPe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinPut
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof track switchsignal:
0 = <S1>
1 = <S2>
NOTE:
and NLMMOl
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules, CLC01/OUO34O4
1023 for SLC01|21 and IMLMMO2
2m6lor NMFCOI1O?,!MMFC05, CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 lor |MMFCO$O4and IMMFPOUOA0S

APPLICATIOA'S

Function code 59 can control equipment based on the status

of other equlpment or dtgltal lnputs. Ftgure 59-1 illustrates a
safety feature.

DigitalTransfer
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 59-1
FunctionCode 59

INPUTS FROM
4 PRIMARY
PUMPS

59 =3
SlO=1
TP4tit6tB

Figwe 59 - 1. Wital TlansJu Fl.tncfion Blrck

Used in a fifetg Corlfigwation

The controlled reserve pump must activate lf less than three

of four primary pumps €rre functioning. The function code 59
block controls the status of the resenre pump.

<SI) = I (on), and <S2> = Q (ofq

The transfer switch is the output of a qualtfled OR block. If

less than three pumps a,re operattng, ttren the output of the
qualified OR block will be at zero. That output is the <S3>
input to the digital transfer block. A zero input for <S3>
causes <Sl> to be the output from the block. When <S1>
equals one (on), the pump activates. When three or more of
the pumps are operational, the pump will be turned off.

DigitalTransfer
59-2 ls FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode60 - Groupll0 Definition

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The group I/O definitlon function code defines the loeal l/O
for an NLMMOf hgic Master Module. Thts function code per-
tains only to NLMMOf modul€s, and resides in frxed block
three in the NLMMOI module. Up to 16 gfoups of eight points
may be addressed per NLMMOI module through digltal UO
modules. Points can be asslgned from block numbers 128 to
255 for a total of 128 posslble UO per module. Each group of
eight points may be assigned as inputs, outputs, logic statlon
ireputs or outputs, or may remaln unassigned. LJnasslgned
points can be used for logic functions.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N B 0 = oPencircuit
1 = closedcircuit

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 0-147 Blocks128- 135(group0)
S2 N 0 0-147 Blocks 136 - 143 (grouP1)
S3 N 0 0-147 Blocks 144 - 151 (group 2)
S4 N 0 0-147 Blocks 152 - 159 (grouP3)
S5 N 0 o-147 Blocks 160 - 167 (grouP4)
S6 N 0 0-147 Blocks168- 175(group5)
S7 N 0 o-147 Bfocks 176 - 183 (group 6)
S8 N 0 0-147 Bfocks 184 - 191 (group 7)
S9 N 0 0-147 Blocks192- 199(group8)
sl0 N 0 0-147 Blocks200 - 207 (group9)
s11 N 0 o-147 Blocks208- 215(group10)
sl2 N 0 o-147 Blocks216 - 223(grouP11)

Groupl/O Definition
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 60-1
FunctionCode 60

Spec Tune
nued)
SPEClFICAfrOruS@onti

Default Type Range Descrfptlon

o
sl3 N 0 o-147 -
Bfocks224 231(group12)
sl4 N 0 o-147 Blocks232- 239 (group13)
sl5 N 0 0-147 Blocks240- 247(group14)
sl6 N 0 I 0-147 Bfocks28 - 255 (group15)

EXPLANATION

NDSMOS and IMDSMOS Dtgltat UO Slave Modules provldel/O

to the NLMMOI module. The NDSMO3 module san handle two
groups of eight tnputs, and the IMDSMOS module ean handle
two groups of elght lnputs or outputs. The IMDSMOS module
also interfaces digital logic stations to the logic master mod-
ule. One IMDSMOS module can interface up to eight digital
logic stations. Note that although the digital I/O module can
lnterface up to eight stations, l/O from five fully loaded dtgltal
logic stations would fiU the NLMMOI module almost to capac-
ity, leaving only one group free (24I/O polnts per statlon).

The f O groups of I/O points use addresses zero to 15. For

input and output groups, the group number and the address
selected by dipswitches on the digital I/O module must match
for each group. A digital I/O module interfaclrg to digltal loglc
stations must use group address 14 or 15. These group
addresses may not be used by any other I/O module. To spec-
iff group tlpes, nse the following equatiolt.
<Si> = NXX
Ut-
Tensand ones digits
)O( = Upe of pointsin group
00 = unusedgroup
01 = processinputs
02 = processoutputs
1Y = digitallogicstationinputs(tenmsecspulse)
2Y = digitallogicstationgroupA outputs
3Y = digitallogicstationgroupB outputs
4Y = digitallogicstationinputs(sustained)
Hundredsdigit
N = trip option selector
0 = trip logicmastermoduleon l/O modulefailure
1 = disabletrip

where:

Y = Address of the digital logic station (zero to seven).

The range of block numbers in the unttsed group c€rn be

used for logic functions.

No logic functions may be assigned to the block numbers tn

the process inputs range. The bloek numbers referenced wlil
be digital inputs from the field.

GroupI/O Definition
60-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 60

Arry output or loglc functlon may be asstgned to block num-

bers tn the 1rnocesrs outltuts range. If a block ls €rn output
conflgured to perform a loglc functlon, tJren the output of that
block wfil drlve the hardware as tf lt were €rn output.

In digitql logie stction input (gtulsr,), Y specifies the

address of the logic statton as set by dlpsurltches on the sta-
uon. Presslng ttre loglc statton pushbutton generates a sin$le
pulse slgnal wlth a duratlon of ten mtlllseconds. One pulse
generates each tlme the pushbutton ls released and
depressed.

In digital logic station output gnlup A, Y specifies the

address of the logic statlon as set by dfpswitches on the sta-
uon. Any loglc or output functlon may be asslgned to blocks
in thls range. If a block deflned as an output perforrns a logic
functiorl, then the output of that block drives the hardware as
if it were an output.

In digital logic station outltut group B, Y specifles the

address of the logtc station as set by dipswitches on the sta-
tion. Any logic or output function may be assigned to blocks
in this range. If a block defined as an output perfonns a logic
function, tJren the output of that block drtves the hardware as
if it were an output.

In digitat logic station input (sustained), Y specifies the

address of the logic station as set by dipswitehes on the sta-
tion. Fressing the logic station pushbutton generates a sus-
tained stgnal. Whrlle the pushbutton remalns depressed, the
signal remains sustained.

NOTES:
that do not use
1. The addressesare availableto configurations
digitall/O modules.

Z. When any specification(S1 through516) is configuredto

accessa digitallogicstation(tensdigit equalsone, two, three or
four),then S15 and S16 can only be configuredas a digitallogic
stationl/O group.

Outputs

Define block numbers usin$ the following equation:

btocknumber= 127+ (groupnumberx 8+ pointnumberin group(1-9))

To read the output of a block, determlne the block number

using the equatlon shown above, then monltor that block
from tJ:e operator tnterface devlce. Ttle output of the block
has meaning only if the point assigned to the block ls defured.
The output of ttre block will be a boolean signal rePresentlng
the output value of the point assi$ned to it.

Groupl/O Definition
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 60-3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode 61 r Blink

L DESCRIPTION

The bltnk functlon code generates a pulsattng output slgnal.

When <S1> and <S2> are logtc 1, the output toggles between
logic 1 and loglc O. The duratlon of elther the logtc O or logic I
state ls dependent on the cycle tlme of the block. Ttre dura-
tion of elther loglc state ls lirnited to be no less than O.2 sec-
onds. Output N equals <S1> untll <S1> and <S2> equal one,
then output N b[nks. Refer to Table 6l-1 for all possible out-
put values.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descriptlon

N B Refer to Table 61-1

SPECtFtCATIO|VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
NOTE:
valuesare: 254lorNLMMO1
1. Maximum
1023for SLC01|21urd lMLtt/|MO2
2046for NMFCO[|O?,|MMFCO5, CBC01,CSC01and|MMPCOI
9998for |MMFCOS/04and IMMFPOIIOUO9

Tabte 6 7- 7. Thrth TableJor Output Vafu,es

Inputs
Output N
s1 s2
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 Blink

BIink
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 6 1- 1
FunctionCode 61

APPLICAT'OAIS

Figure 61-1 shows how to use functlon code 61 for alarm

indicatiorf,. The source recelves the alarm slgnal and sends
the signal to a blink block and a tlmer block. T?re tlmer block
outputs a boolean signal. In thts example, the tlmer ls the
timed out optlon. If the length of the lnput pulse ls greater
than or equal to the Umxrg lnterval (Sg of functlon code 35), a
logic I will be output for the length of the pulse once tt has
exceeded the timing lnterval. If the length of the pulse ls
shorter than the Umlng lnterval, a loglc O wlll be the output.
The output of the timer block ls the <Sl> tnput for a memory
block. An external alarm acknourledgement signal ls the <S2>
input to the memory block. The acknowledge stgnal ls loglc O
if the alarm has not been aeknowledged and logtc 1 tf lt has.

If the point is in alann, a loglc I slgnal will be sent to both ttre

blink and timer blocks. The duration of the logic I sfgnal ls
longer than the tlming interval, so the output of the tlmer block
is a logic l. If the alarm has not been acknowledged, ttren the
52 input to the memory block urill be a logic O. When <S1>
equals logic I and <S2> equals logic O, the output of the mem-
ory block is a logic 1. Thus, both inputs to the blink block are
logic I and the output will toggle between logic I and logic O.

Once the alarm is acknowledged, the output of the memory

block goes to logic O, causing the output of the blink block to
track the <Sl> input. When the point comes out of alarm,
both inputs to the blink block will be logic O, and tlle output
will be logic O.

The OR (function code 39) forces the bltnk aetlon to remain

active and in alarm until tl'e alarm is acknowledged whether
or not the alarm signal is still present. If the signal is still in
alarm when aeknowledged, the value rernains alarmed but
the blinking action stops.

ALARMSIGNAL
1 = AI-ARM

I
I

(ryti
r65

52=1
53 = 9.259

ACKNOWLEDGE SlGNAti
1 = ACKNOWLEDGE

Figure 6 7- 7. Blink Fltr.ctwn Block Used Jor Alou'm Indicatun

Blink
6 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode62- RemoteControlMemory

GENENALDESCHPTION

The remote control memory (RCM) functlon code ts a set/

reset fllp-flop memory accesstble by a eonsole, control statlon,
Batch 9O or computer vta a network tnterface unlt (NIU).

NOTE: Plant Loops only allow analog exception report blocks

nurnberedzerothrough1023becauseof the rnessagepacketizing
methodof informationtransfer.|NF|-NETloops allow higherblock
nurnbers.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

The output ls determlned from the tnputs S, R and P as

shown in Table 62-I and Figure 62-2.

Table 62- 7. RCM Inptrt b Ottfrrtt Relationshtp

s R P Output N
0 0 x Last
1 0 1 1
0 1 x 0
1 1 1 Ovenide <S4>
NOTE:
S = Local set <S1>, or remote set (console or network interface unit)
R = Local reset <S3>, or remote reset (console or network interface unit)
P = Set permissive <S2>
X = Either logic 0 or logic 1 (does not care)

SPEC//FICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof localset signal
S2 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof set permissivesignal
Q= ro permissive
| = p€lTnissive
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of local reset signal

RemoteControlMemory
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 62-1
FunctionCode62

SPECIFl CATIO,|VS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof overridesignal:
0 = rosot ovenide
1 = sat ovenide
S5 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof initializesignal:
0 = IBSgt
1 =SOt

S6 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof feedbacksignal

S7 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof alarmsignal
S8 N 0 I 0-255 Typeparameter
NOTE:
and NLMMOl
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules, CLCOI/OAOUO4-
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,|MMFCO5,CBC01, CSCO1and IMMPCOl
9998 for |MMFC0S/O4and lMMFP0llOU}3

EXPLANATIOAIS

Specifications

S1 - SET Specification S I ls the block address of the local set lnput.

52 - PERM Specification 52 is the block address of the set permissive

input. Specification <S2> must equal logic I for tJ:e remote
control memory block to act on any set, local or remote lnput.

S3 I RES Specificaflon S3 is the block address of local reset lnput.

s4 - ovR Speeification 54 is the block address of overrlde treput. [f

<Sl>, <S2> and <S3> equal logtc l, the output tracks <S4>.

s5 - lNlT Specification 55 is the block address of tlle input referenced

upon power up or resetting of the module.

If <S5) = O, N = Q
If <S5) = l, [rf = I

S6 -FB Specilicafion SG is the block address of the feedback signal. [t

is affected by the output of the RCM block and transmits a
status signal to the console or network interface unit. It can
be feedback from an lnternal or external logic lnput.

S7 - ALRM Specification S7 is the block address of the alarm input. This

transmits a status signal to the console or network lnterface
unit. Iogic I is an alarm state.

RemoteControlMemory
62-2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Function Code 62

s8 - wPE Speclflcatlon SB ls the smrltch t5rye parameter. Wlth SG and

57, tt deflnes the configur:atlon of pushbutton dtsplays shown
on dlsplay screerls.

O= output lndlcator tr r
I = rto lndlcator
2= output and feedback lndlcators rrn < t-l -1
3= feedback tndlcator only -J <

ConsoleRCM Element

The RCM element represents a remote control memory func-

tlon block ln a PCU module control scherne. Thts functlon
block provtdes a set/reset fllp-flop memory to control a pro-
cess devtce. An RCM W ls requlred to monltor and control
the output of tlrts functton block.

NOTE: RCM blockswork like memoryblocks (functioncode 34)

unlessthe operatorinitiatesan action.

Figure 62-L detatls tl:e tnformatlon presented in a remote

control memory element. The RCM block exceptlon reports the
current output state, feedback state, perrnlsslve state, over-
ride status, and alarm status and quality Presented at the
RCM element. Attributes that relate to an RCM tag and can be
incorporated into any graphlc or custom f,aceplate include:

One State Shows the logic state descrtptor related to a one state (logic
Descriptor one) output of an RCM functlon block. Thls descrtptor ts the
ONE state descrlptor set ln the tag database for thls tag.

Zero State Shows the logic state descriptor related to a zero state (logic
Descriptor zero) output of an RCM function block. This descriptor is the
reRO state descriptor set in tl:e tag database for this tag.

TAG i.lAt\,lE TAG DESCRIPTOR

TAG
PERMISSIVE
INDICATOR
SP

ZERO STATE FEEDBACK

INDICATOR
OVERRIDE
INDICATOR
A*1 \TNNGET:

ALARM CURRENTOUTPUT
STATUS/QUALIw/GROUP INDICATOR FIELD
TP?|mng

Figure 62-7. Console Remote ConfrotMemory Element

RemoteControlMemo
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 62-3
FunctionCode 62

CurrentOutput
Indlcator
Identifies the currently requested logtc state to be output by
the RCM block. When next to the one state descriptor, the
requested output ls a loglc 1. The requested output ls a
I
logic O when it ls next to the zero state descrlptor.

Perrnissivelndicator Shows the value reported for the permtsslve tnput to the func-
tion block <S2>. The block must be ln a perrnisslve status to
allow the operator (or control loglc) to change the RCM to a
one or set state. An SP ldenttfles the RCM as set to permls-
sive. An NP indicates non-permlsslve, not allouring a change
to a one state output.

Feedback lndicator Provides a feedback iredtcatlon to verlff the actual device state
change and cunent state. The arrow poslttons at elther the
one or zero state when the eonsole recelves a reported feed-
back indicatiorr..

OverrideIndicator Indicates an override conditlon. An overrlde occurs when the

RCM ls permissive and there is a confltct between the set and
reset inputs to the function block. The output tracks an alter-
nate input <S4> if the set <S1> and reset <S3> signals are
both logic I simultaneously.

ConsoleRCM Control

Remote control memory control allows changing RCM func-

tion block outputs. The remote control memory block pro-
vides a set and reset signal to a process device. The RCM
function block acts on one of two lnputs to develop lts output.
o
The block accepts both a eontrol scheme drlven tnput and an
input from the console, or an lnput from a Batch 90 program.

The type of input differentiates the two inputs. The control

scheme can initiate either a pulsed or sustalned command to
the block where the console can only input a pulsed com-
mand. A sustained input, which remains at a set logic state,
overrides any pulsed input. A pulsed input is a one cycle tran-
sition used to trigger a state change. In elther case, the block
maintains its current output even if the input is removed. The
output remains at either a set or reset state until another
command is received to change the output state.

A pulsed set command from the console causes the block to

output a logic l, and a pulsed reset command causes a loglc O
output. This oecurs as long as the control logic ls not provid-
ing a sustained input to the block. A change to the one or set
state can only occur when the RCM function block is set to
permissive.

To perform RCM control, Iirst enable tJ:e RCM element for

control. Either enter its faceplate selector through the key-
board or use €rn optional method of selectiorr.. A ?IRGE'1I: con-
trol prompt appears when the element is first selected.

RemoteControlMemory
62-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code62

The RCM czrn only be changed through keyboard actlons tf

OVRand NP do not appear at t}re dtsplay. TIle SP must be dts-
played to change the RCM to the set state. Press the following
keys to change the state:

changes the RCM to a one state output.

B

changes the RCM to a zero state output.

@

The TARGET:fleld changes to the tar$et state after Presstng

etther key. As soon as ttre change ls made, ttre dtsplay begins
to update. The current output and feedbaek indicators move
either up or down to reflect the entered change.

Control Station Control

Ttre operator can inltlate two t51pesof pushbutton commands

from a control statlon: pulsc cammolnd,s and snstcrined
commo,inds. The commands are either pul,* set and pulse
reset, or sustcrin set and snstcin reset The t5rye of com-
malds selected depends on the configuration of ttre control
station.

There €ge two tlpes of inputs to the block: logic set/reset

inputs and the operator initiated remote set/reset inputs
from the console. Commands from a control statlon are logic
commands because they enter the RCM block from other
blocks in the module. Commands from a console €rre not logic
commalds because they enter the RCM block directly from
the console. Iogic inputs from control stations or confi$ura-
tion override operator tntttated inputs frorn a eonsole. The
module acts on the remote (from operator interface station,
etc.) and logic (<S1>, <S3>) commands as shown by the
equivalent circuit in Figure 62-2, and outputs the proper
value. logic corlmands dways override remote commartds,
and sustain comrnands override pulse commartds.

PulseSet The pulse set command causes tJre internal set signal to go to
logic I for one cycle, provided there ls no contradictory logic
or sustain command lssued.

PulseReset The pulse reset command causes the internd reset signal to
go to logic I for one cycle, provided there is no contradictory
logic or sustain command issued.

Sustain Set The sustain set signal causes the internal set si$nal to go to
logic I and remairr there as long as the sustain set is in effect
or until a contradictory logic command is issued.

Sustain Reset The sustain reset signal causes the internal reset signal to go
to logic I and remaln there as long as the sustain reset is in
effect or until a contradictory logic command ls lssued.

RemoteControlMemory
l-Eg6-200B ls FEB1995 62-5
FunctionCode 62

PERMSSIVE

LOGIC SET

OVERRIDE

turtnLtzE (ssl _ q,rTPUT O.l irDDU-E I hITIALIZATIOI{

FEEDBACK (S6)
_
TOTXSPT-AYOT.Ic[U
At RM(S7'I _

Figure 62-2. Internnl Lqic oJ RCM Blrck

Red Tag Red tag commands flag controls that are under malntenance.
A red tag, remove red tag, or get red tag status czrn be
requested. All red tag commands have a 16 blt non-zero key
as an identifier. The module malntalns up to ttrree keys for
every pushbutton block, allourtng the establlshment of up to
three red tags. The red tag functlons act only as labels, and
do not lnterfere with module operatlons. The red tag functlon
does not provide posltive lock-out of equtpment operatton.
The red tag function only tnhfblts control at the console when
it inhibits operator commands.

APPLICATIO'VS

Figure 62-3 lllustrates the module logtc and clrcults requtred

to control a motor wtth a functlon code 62 block. When a start
signal is received (etther loglc or remote), the clrcult ts com-
pleted, energizing the motor start relay and closing the nor-
mally open seal switch. When the start stgnal returns to logtc
O after one cycle, the closed switch completes the circuit
keeping the motor turned on until a stop signal breahs the
circuit.

RemoteControlMemory
62 - 6 rs FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code62

Flgwe 62-3. Lqic and Ctrcufu of RCM Blrck Usdfor Motor @nM

RemoteControlMemory
15 FEB199s 6 2- 7
l-E96-2008
ffi

I
 FunctionCode63 - Analoglnput List (SamePCU)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The analog lnput llst (same PCU) function code aequlres the
data values of eight analog polnts ln a stngle Controlutay/
module bus message. The source module and destinatlon
module must be located tn the same process eontrol unit.

Input data conslsts of analog stgnds and quallttes. Data

transfer between the source module and desttnation module
is via the Controlway/module bus. The address and block
number of the source module and the update time are config-
urable parameters.

Output data consists of real numbers corresponding to the

analog data recelved, and point quaHty lndtcators. To insure
that the signal is successfully transfered, the analog signal
generates a point quality flag. To test the quality of the signal,
include a function code 31 (test quality) block tn the configu-
ration. The quaUty of the polnt cannot be used as €rn input to
any other tlpe of block. The analog output value can be used
as an lnput to arry analog processlng block. Refer to Appendix
D for a definltion of point quality.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R <s3>
N+1 R <s4>
N+2 R <s5>
N+3 R <s6>
N+4 R <s7>
N+5 R <sg>
N+6 R <sg>
N+7 R <s10>

Ana lnputList (SamePCU)

l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 63-1
FunctionGode63

SPECflFICAT'ONS

Spec Tune Ilefault TVpe Range Descrlptlon

t
S1 N Note 1 Note 1 Full bus updateperiod
Controlway/module
S2 N 0 I 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
s3 N 9999 I Note 2 Sourceblockaddress(N)
S4 N 9999 I Note 2 Source block address (N+1)
S5 N 9999 I Note2 Sourceblockaddress(N+2)
S6 N 9999 I Note 2 Source block address (N+3)
S7 N 9999 I Note 2 Sourceblockaddress(N+4)
S8 N 9999 I Note2 Sourceblockaddress(N+5)
S9 N 9999 I Note2 Sourceblockaddress(N+6)
sl0 N 9999 I Note2 Sourceblockaddress(N+7)
NOTES:
1. COMand CLC datratyp€ is integerwi[| a detaultnalue ot 4 (0 to 255 range).MFC.CBC, CSCand MFP data type is r€al with a
d€faultvaluoot 1.0.
2. Maximumvaluosare: 254 for COM modulesand CLCOUOAo8Io/
1023tor SLC01,21
2046lor NMFCOIIOZ. IMMFCOS. CBC0|,CSCOiand IMMPCOl
9998for IMMFC0S/04and lMMFP0l/0203

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 - MBUPD (@nfiplutaglmodule bus updste period) Defines the update

rate for the Controlway/module bus tnputs. Controlway/mod-
ule bus update period is specified in 25O millisecond incre-
ments in the COM modules and in seconds tn MFC and MPC
modules. SpeclflcaUon Sl ts tunable tn MFC and MPC mod-
ules and not tunable ln COM modules. The system allours tun-
tng the value shown for tJre Controlway/module bus update
period, however, the original update period will be retained. To
change it the module must be placed in configure mode.

s 2 - SMAD (Source mdule address) Specification S2 is the address of

the module in the same PCU containing tJ:e eight values
desired. The address of ttre source module must be between
zero and 31 inclusive.

S3 Specifieation 53 is the block address for output block N.

S4 Specification 54 is the block address for output block N+1.

ss Specification S5 is the block address for output block N+2.

S6 Specification 56 is the block address for output block N+3.

S7 Specification 57 is the block address for output block N+4.

s8 Specification S8 is the block address for output block N+5.

s9 Speciftcation 59 is the block address for output block N+6.

s l0 Specilication S10 is the block address for output block N+7.

AnalogInputList(SamePCU)
63-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode64 - DigitalInput List (SamePCU)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The dlgltal lnput ltst (same PCU) functlon code acqulres data
describlng elght dlgltal polnts ln a slngle message. The source
module and desttnatlon module must be located fn the s€rme
process control unlt.

Input data conslsts of dlgltal slgnals and qualltles. Data trarlsfer

between the source and destlnatlon module ls vla the Control-
way/modute bus. The address and block nturrber of the source
Wl N+3 module, and ttre update tlme are co@ Parameters.

,-
N+a
Output data consists of boolean numbers corresponding to
I
the digltal data received and irrput polnt quallty lndicators. To
(- lnsure that the slgnal ls successfully transferred, the dlgltal
I N+5 signal generates a point quality flag. To test the quality of the
signal, lnclude a functlon code 3 f (test qualtty) block ln t}te
configuration. The quality of ttre poiret cannot be used as an
ireput to arry other tSpe of block. The dl$ftat output value can
be used as an input to any digital processtng block. Refer to
Appendix D for a definition of point quality.

UTILIZATION

IMMFCOs
IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Ilescrlptlon

N B <s3>
N+1 B <s4>
N+2 B <s5>
N+3 B <s6>
N+4 B <s7>
N+5 B <sg>
N+6 B <sg>
N+7 B <sl0>

DigitalInputList (SamePCU)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 64-1
FunctionCode 64

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Ilefault TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N Note1 Note1 Full bus updateperiod
Controlway/module
S2 N 0 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
S3 N 9999 Note 2 Sourceblockaddress(N)
S4 N 9999 Note2 Sourceblockaddress(N+1)
ss N 9999 Note2 Sourceblockaddress(N+2)
s6 N 9999 Note 2 Sourceblockaddress(N+3)
S7 N 9999 Note 2 Sourceblockaddress(N+4)
S8 N 9999 Note2 Sourceblockaddress(N+5)
S9 N 9999 Note 2 Sourceblockaddress(N+6)
sl0 N 9999 Note 2 Source block address (N+7)
NOTES:
1. COM and CLC data type is int€gerwith a defaultvalue ot 4 (0 to 255 range).MFC,CBC, CSC atd MFP data type b rca! with a
defaultvalu€of 1.0.
2. Maximumrrafuesare: 254 for COM modulesand CLCOlMzngl04
1023for SLC01I21
2(XOtor NMFC01/02, !MMFCo5,CBC01and CSCo1
9998lor IMMFCm/oltand IMMFP01OZo3

EXPLANATION

Specifications

51 - MBUPD (Conttplutaglmodule bus update period) Speciflcaflon Sl

defines the update rate for the Controlway/module bus
inputs. Controlway/module bus update period ls specified ln,
25O millisecond increments in COM modules and in seconds
in MFP, MFC and MPC modules. Specificafion SI ts tunable in
the MFP, MFC and MPC modules, but not tunable in the COM
modules. The system allows tuning of the value shown for the
Controlway/module bus update period, however, the original
Controlway/module bus update period will be retained. To
change tt the module must be placed ln corrflgure mode.

s 2 - SMAD (fuurce module address) Speclflcatton 52 ls the address of

module in the same PCU containing efght values deslred. The
address of the source module must be between zero and 31.

s3 Specification S3 is the block address for output block N.

S4 Specification 54 is the block address for output block N+I.

ss Specification S5 is the block address for output block N+2.

S6 Specification 56 is the block address for output block N+3.

s7 Specification 57 is the block address for output block N+4.

s8 Specification S8 is the block address for output block N+5.

S9 Specification 59 is the block address for output block N+6.

sl0 Specification S10 is the block address for output block N+7.

DigitalInputList(SamePCU)
64-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode65 - DigitalSum With Gain

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts functlon code computes a wetghted sum of four boolean

tnputs ustreg the follonrtng equatlon:

Output= S5<Sl> + 56<S2>+ S7<S3>+ S8<S4>

It can be used to tnttlate a control actlon based on the number

of boolean lnputs that have a status of logtc 1. These tnputs
could represent ttre status of pumps, valves, motors, etc.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOz

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R S5<S1> + S6<Sb + S7<S3> + S8<S4>

SPECIFICATIO,[VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of <S1>
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof <S2>
S3 N 0 Note 1 Block address of <S3>
S4 N 0 I Note1 Block address of <S4>
S5 Y 1.000 R Full Gain parameter for <S1>
S6 Y 1.000 R Full Gain parameter for <S2>
S7 Y 1.000 R Full Gain parameter for <S3>
S8 Y 1.000 R Full Gain parameter lor <S4>
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor COM modules and CLCO1|OU0S|04-
1023 for SLG01I21 and IMLMMO2
2046 tor NMFCOIIO?,|MMFC05,CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFC0S/04and IMMFPOUOAO3

DioitalSumWithGain
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 65-1
FunctionCode65

APPLICATIOAIS

Ftgure 65-1 shows how to use functlon code 65 to determlne

I
flow rates from a dlgltal lndlcatlon of pump status. In the
example, each operatlng pump provldes a constant flow rate
of 20 gallons per mlnute. An operatlng pump provldes an out-
put of logic l. Spectflcations <Sl> through <S4> provtde the
pump status inputs whlle S5 through S8 are pump flow rates.
When pumps one, three and four are operatlng, the output
equatlon ls:

Output = 55 <St> + 56 <52> + 57 <S3>+ SB <S4>

_ 20 sat (1) . 20 gat (0) . 20 gat (1) . 20 gat (1)

T -
m,n mrn
a

mtn

Function code 65 can also be used for btnary to real conver-

sion. Binary to real conversion changes dtgital signals to ana-
log stgnals [1.e., counters). Speciflcatlons <Sl> through <S4>
provide the binary tnputs. Speclficatlons 55 through 58
weigfrt the ilrputs to achleve the destred real output. For
example:

<Sl> and <S4> = logic I

<S2> and <S3> = loElic 0

S5 = l.O

S O= 2 . O

SZ = 4.O

58 = 8.0

Output = 55 <St> + 56 <52> + S7 <S3>+ S8 <S4>

= 1.0(1)+ 2.0(0)+ 4.0(0)+ 8.0(1)

= 9.0

DigitalSumWithGain
65-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code65

TO OTHER
AT{AIOG
PROCESSING
rioDuLEs

55=20
56=20
57-19
S8=20

(- \'
I rss

,-\-
Ulrso

Figure 65-1. Etam4tle of Ftrrctionffie 65 UsedtoDete:rmine

Flous Rafes Ftom a D'tgitnl Indicafion of Pttrrrp Stafis

DioitalSumWithGain
l-E96-2008
ffi

I
 Function Gode 66 r Analog Trend

L DESCN/PTION

The analog trend functlon code ls part of the INF'I 90 dlstrtb-

uted trendlng package. It performs hfilal data compresslon
for ttre operator lnterface statlon (OIS) and open access sys-
tems at the module level. The trend function also works with
the operator lnterface unit (OIU) and the management com-
mand system (MCS).

Trend data can be gathered in two ways, normal or fast,

dependfng on the deslred resolution. Speclllcatton S3 selects
the trend resolutlon. Normal trending mode gathers trend
data every 6O seconds. Fast trending ls every 15 seconds.

Spectflcatlon 52 selects the trend mode. Over the collectlon

period each value collected ts the sample, mean, mltdmllm,
maximum or sum of the tnput value <S1>.

Output data conslsts of the last value saved.

UTILIZATION

IMQRCO1

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlption

N R Last valuesaved

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

s1 N 0 I Note1 Block address of analog inPut
s2 N 1 0 , 1 , 2 , 3 o r 4Trend mode:
0 = S"mPle
1 = ffi€?fl
2 = mioimum
$ = ffi?)(imum
4 = SUlIl

AnalogTrend
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 66-1
FunctionCode 66

SPECIFICATI O,^tS@onti
nued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 0 I 0or1 Trend resolution2:
0 = DOfin?l
1 = fast
NOTES:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254for COMmodulesard CLC01/02/03/(X
1023lor SLC01/21
2046for NMFC01/q2, |MMFCo5andCBC01
9998for |MMFCo3/O4 and lMMFP0l/0203
2. Fast tr€ndingrequlresa higher amountot moduleutilizationthan nomal trending.Specitlcat|onSg cannotb€ changeddudngthe
on-linecontigurationmods.

EXPLANAT'OruS

Specifications

S1 - BLKADR Specification SI is the block address of the analog firput to be

trended.

S2 (Trend mde) Specification 52 sets the trend mode during

the collection period (Sg). Each value collected ls the sample,
mean, minimum, maximum, oF sum for the point.

O - sample; current point saved every 15 or 60 seconds

I = rt€€trr; arithmetic mean value of all points over tl:e

trending interval

2 = minimum; minimum point value over trending interval

$ = maximum; maximum point value over trending interval

4 = sum; sum of all values collected over trending intervd

s3 (Trend resolution) Specification 53 sets the trend lnterval.

Q = normal; every 60 seconds

I = fast; every 15 seconds

NOTE:Fasttrendingrequiresa higheramountof moduleutiliza-

tionthannormaltrending.

APPLICATIO'VS

To trend values, configure both an analog exception report

and a trend block for each point trended. Figure 66- I shows a
sample analog trending configuration. Figure 66-2 shows a
sample digital trending configuration. The block outputs go to
the communication highway and have assigned tag names in
the operator interface station. Both outputs must be config-
ured for each point for display pu{poses.

Analog Trend
66-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 66

To create a trend database and a tag database, refer to the

MCS, OIS or OIU configuratlon lnstmctlon. These lnstruc-
tions have sectlons tttled Trends and Torg Database that wtll
provide the necessary instmctlons to create the trend and tag
databases.

os* ?10 tt|AlrE

@MMtf{|CANON
HIGH}IIAYTO
@t{Sd-E AtlD
OTHER I,IODES

Figrre 66- 7. Co4figurationJor

Tfend@ anAnalog Potnt

(06} otSTAG t.teME coMrn lwLno}{

Htcl'fw YTo
mNsoLE AifD
OfiER TPOES

F'igwe 66-2. Configurationfor Trend@ a Digital Point

AnalogTrend
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 66-3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode67- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 67-1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode68 - RemoteManualSet Constant

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The remote manual set constant (RMSC) function code allows

the value of a constant to be entered to the control scheme vla
a console (1.e.,operator lnterface statton) or other devlce such
as the plant computer vla a network tnterface unlt.

When ttre functton block recelves thts commartd, an exceptlon

report ls generated to notlff the operator or computer that the
value has changed. An exceptlon report is also sent on the
loop at the ma:dmum exeeptlon report tlme; or f tn the track
mode, the value of 56 exceeds the stgntflcant change parame-
ter of the segment or module, whlchever applles.

High and low llmlts may be set to gUard agalnst unreasonable

values. Speclftcatlons 52 and Sg select the htgh and low Um-
Its and also set the span for sfnfffcant change. Speclflcatlon
S4 speclfles an output value or ttre value the output wtll be
when lt returns to normal mode from the track mode. Ttle S4
value ls updated vta a console and ls output from the block
after a mode change to execute or a reset of the module.

Specifications <S5> and <56> are the block addresses of the

track switch and track reference values. Ttle RMSC block can
be forced to output tJre value from <56> when the track
switch <S5> goes to one. An exception report is generated
each time the track switch actlvates or deactlvates.

UTILIZATION

INPPTO1
INSEMOl
IMMPCOl

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N R Last value entered for 54 when <S5> = 0, or value of <S6> when
<S5> = 1
NOTE:Functioncode68 mustbe placedin a blocknumberedlowerthan 1024in PlantLoop
systemsbecauseof the messagepacketizingmethodof inlormationtransfer.

RemoteManualSet Constant
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 68-1
 FunctionCode68

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

o
S1 N 0 I Full Engineering
unitidentifier
S2 N 100.000 R Full High limit
S3 N 0.000 R Full Low limit
S4 N 0.000 R Full powerup of
Initialoutputvalueafteraddition,modification,
block
S5 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of track switch:
0 = oOlmal
1 = track
S6 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of track value
NOTE:
1. Maximumvalues are: 254lor COM modules and CLC0140U03|O4
1023 for SLC01|21 and |MLMMO2
2A46for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS, CBC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFCOS/O4 and |MMFP01|0U03

EXPLANATION

Figure 68- t shows €u:rexample of a configurafion to enable

operator intervention in case of temperature transmitter fail-
ure. The test quality block (function code 3l) outputs a zero
as long as the transmitter input is good. The NOT block (func-
tion code 33) inverts tllis to a one and the REMSET output
tracks the transmitter until the transmitter fails. At that tlme,
the REMSET is released to tJle operator.

PROCESS
TEMPERATURE

Ftgure 68-7. F';urtctionCode 68 Coffiwed

Jor Operator Interuention

Remote Manual Sef Constant Element

The RMSC element represents a remote manual set constarrt

function block in a PCU module control scheme. This func-
tion block inserts a constant value used ln the process control
scheme. An RMSC tag is required to both monitor and change
the constant value provided by the block from the console.

Figiure 68-2 details the information presented tn an RMSC

element. The RMSC block exception reports the current set
value, high and low limit, tracking, and alarm status and
quality presented at the RMSC element. Attributes that relate

RemoteManualSet Constant
68 - 2 1sFEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode68

TAGDESCRIPTOR

.4DEGC
TRACKING
INDICATOR

ALARM CONTROL
STATUS/QUALITY'GROUP PRS,IPUFIELD

F-Igwe 68-2. RMSC Elcment

to an RMSC tag and can be incorporated into any graphlc or

custom faceplate lnclude:

CurrentValue The current value reported by the RMSC block. This value can
be changed through keyboard actlons.

EngineeringUnlt Indicates the unit of measurement associated with the con-

Descrlptor(EUD) stant value. The RMSC functton block reports an engtneerln$
unlt descriptor index number that the console cross refer-
ences agatnst tts llst of engineerlng unit descriptors.

High and Low Limits Identiff the ma;drnum and mIdmum acceptable values. The
operator can input only values that fall withlil tltis maximum
ana mlrimum range. An attempt to enter a value outside these
limits causes tJre console to prompt with an error message.

TrackingIndicator Appears when an RMSC block is set to tracking mode. TIte

control loglc can force the block to track an alternate process
varlable. A T displays to identiff traektng mode. The value
cannot be changed when the block is tracktn$.

RemoteManualSet Constant
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 68-3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode69 - TestA|arm

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The test alarrn functlon code tests the alarm status of a desig-
nated tnput slgnal. It can test tJre alarm state on any block
output that has a deflned qua[ty or alarm, lncludftrg exeep-
tlon reports, station blocks, and devlce drlvers.

There are two separate boole€rn outputs. Table 69-f shows

the dtfferent output descrtptions for the t5ryes of blocks moni-
tored. Note tl:at for control stattons, 52 selects the tlpe of
alarm monitored (absolute or deviatlon). Alarm status is zero
equals no alarm, one equals alarm.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOS
IMMPCO1

IMMFCOs
IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Ilescrlptlon

N B High alarm indicaton
Q = DOalarm
1 = alarm
N+1 B Lowalarmindicator:
0 = oo alarm
1 = alarm

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N 0 Note 1 Block number to be tested for alarms
s2 N 0 0 , 1o r 2 Alarmconditiontestedfor:
0 = absolutealarms
1 = deviationalarms(stationsonly)
2 = devicedrivers
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254tor COM modules and CLCOUOAOUO4
1023 for SLC01421and |MLMMO2
2046lor NMFCOIIO?,|MMFC05,CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 lor |MMFCOS/04and IMMFPOIIOUO3

TestAlarm
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 69-1
FunctionCode 69

Tahlc 69 -1. Ontptrts-from Test Alnrrn Blrck

Outputs
Input TVpe
N N+l
Boolean Alarm 0
Real High alarm Low alarm
FC 80 High alarm Low alarm
(type selected with 52) (typeselectedwith 32)
FC 123, 129 Alarm Mode:
0 = rnBnUSl
1 = auto/remote

TestAlarm
69-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96,2008
 FunctionCode70 - AnalogPoint Definitioh

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The anatog potnt deflnttlon function code defures blocks ln

the NAI\{MO2 and IIVIAMMO3 Analog Master Modules to per-
form analog lnput, exceptlon reporttng, artd alarm functlons.
:
This functton cbde ls exclusively for blocks one through 64 of
the NAIVIMO2 and IIvIAMMO3 Analog Master Modules. This
function requlres no memory. !

NOTE:Functioncode 70 is convertedto functioncode 158when ,

to an |MAMMOS
downloading module.Referto functioncode 158
whenusingan |MAMMOS module.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Valueof measuredpointin engineering
units

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-255 lnputtype:
0 = blockundefined
1=StYPeTC
2=RtypeTC
3=EtypeTC
4=JtYPeTC
5=KtypeTC
6=TtypeTC
7 = Chinesetype E TC
8 = Chinesetype S TC
9 = unimplernentedTC types
10 = U.S.laboratorystandard100O Pt RTD
(atpha= 0.00393)
11= U.S.industrystandard100O Pt RTD
(alpha= 0.00391)
12 = Europeanstandard100O Pt RTD(alpha= 0.00385)
13 = 120O chemicallypure,Ni RTD(alpha= 0.006f?)

AnalogPointDefinition
r-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 70-1
FunctionCode70

SPECI F,CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N I 0-255 Inputtype:
(conQ 14 = SAMAStandard,10 O Cu RTD(alpha= 0.00392)
15 = Chinese53 O Cu RTD(alpha= Q.QQdpg)
16 - 19 = unimplemented RTDtypes
2O= highlevel(1 to 5 V)
21-29= unin,'tplemented
high-leveltypes
30 = -20 to +80 mV
31 = (+1to +5 V) mV input
32 = (+4 to +20 mA) mV input
33-39= unimplemented mV types
40-255= oot allocated
S2 N 0 I 0-255 Engineering unittype:
0=oC
1=oF
2 = EU conveftiion (high level and mV only)
3 = seuarerootafter EU conversion(highleveland
mV only)
4 = sgUarerootbeforeEU conversion(highleveland
mV only)
S3 N 0 0-25s Engineeringunitidentifier
S4 N 0.000 R Full Zero
S5 N 0.000 R Full Span
S6 N 1.000 R Full Significantchange in o/oof span
S7 Y 0.000 R Full High alarm value
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Low alarm value
S9 N 0.000 R Full Lead wire resistance in ohms (not relevant for high levels)

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 - INPUT
TYPE Specification S 1 is the input t54re. This is a code that identt-
fies the tSpe of input or sensor used for the point. There are
four general tlpes of inputs: thermocouple, RTD, millivolt,
and high level. The codes listed in the speclficafion table iden-
ti$/ speclflc tlfpes of these lnputs.

52 - EUTYPE Specification 52 is the engineering unit t54te. This ls a code

identiflnng which form the output will take.

Q = degrees Celsius

I - degrees Fahrenheit

2 = engineering units conversion (high level and milltvolt

onM

$ = square root after engineering unit conversion (higtr

level and millivolt only)

Q = square root before engineering unit conversion (high

level and millivolt only)

Analog Point Definition

70-2 1s FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code70

s3 EUIDENT Speciflcatlon S3 is tlle engtneerin$ untt ldentlfler.

s4 EUZERO Speclflcation 54 ts the englneering unlt's zero Percent vahte.

s5 EUSPAN Specificatlon 55 ls tl:e engineertng unlt's span value (zero to

100 percent).

s6 - stGcHNG% Speclficatton SO ts the percent of span a polnt value must

change by to cause the generatlon of an exception report.

s7 HIGH LIMIT Speciflcation S7 sets the value of hlgh alarm ltmlt.

S8 LOW LIMIT Specification S8 sets the value of low alarm limit.

s9 LEADWIRE Specification 59 is the leadrrrire reslstance ln ohms, Per leg for

two wire RTDs, and total for thermocouples (not relevant for
high level inputs).

AnalogPointDefinition
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 70-3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode71 - ExecutiveBlock NAMMOZIMAMM03

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Executlve btock functlon codes deflne several varlables that

affect module oper:atlon. Fbnctlon code 71, wtth functlon code
72, pertalns ooty to the NAI\{MO2 and IMAMMO3 Analog Mas-
ter Modules. Functlon code 7I resldes ln flxed block 75 and
produces no usable outputs.

NAI\{MOI modules use functlon code 56, not functlon code 7L.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

75 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFICATIO,'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlonl

S1 N 0 I 000 - 112 Configurationlock:
)O(0= unlock
)O(1= lock
fr2 = corfigurationswitchselectable

IMAMMO3 terminationdevicecountrycode:
XOX= UnitedStatestenninationdevice
NTAl0203/04/05
NIAIO2/OSI0/.
XlX = ltaliantermination
unit:
NTU-7A4/20mA
NTU-7A4/50mA
NTUfBO RTDbridge
NTU-7BlRTDbridge
NTU-7B2RTDbridge
Redundancy (|MAMMO3 moduleonlY):
O)fi = ro redundantmodule
lXX = reduodantmodule
S2 N 0.000 R Full Alarm deadband (o/oof sPan)

ExecutiveBlockNAMMOU\MAMMO3
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 7 1- l
FunctionCode71

SPECIFI CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlonl

S3 N 0.000 R Fulf Cablelengthin feetfromAMMto terminationdevice
s41 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks1-8
s51 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionrepofttime,blocks1-8
s61 N 4 I 0-255 MinimumexceptionreporttimE,blocks9-16
s71 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks9-16
sgl N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks17-24
sgl N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks17-24
s101 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks25-32
sl11 N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks25-32
sl21 N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks33-40
sl 31 N 240 l 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks33-40
s14 N 4 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,blocks4148
s151 N 240 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,blocks41-48
s161 N 4 0-255 Minimum exception report time, blocks 49-56
s17l N 240 I 0-255 Maximumexceptionreporttime,btocks49-56
sl gl N 4 I 0-255 Minimumexceptionreporttime,bfocks57-il
s191 N 240 0-255 Maximumexoeptionreporttime,blocks57-64
NOTE:
1. Minimumandmaximumreporttimes(S4through19)are in 250-msecincrenrents.

EXPLANATION

NAIVIMO2 and II\{AMMO3 Analog Master Modules have up to

64 analog inputs through l/O modules. Inputs are deftned fn
groups of eight as high level, milllvolt or thermocouple, or
RTD. Function code 71 specifies certaln operaflng parameters
and exception reporttng ttmes for each group of etght lnputs.

Specifications

S1 - CNFLOK (Configuratiott lock) Specifleation Sf ls the conllguratlon

lock option. A one locks the configuratlon. The default value
of zero provides unlocked configuratlon. The lock tahes effect
onee the module is placed ln the execute mode. Once locked,
a configuration c€rnnot be unlocked. To change a locked con-
figuration, the module must be infilalized and reconflgured.

A setting of two causes the state of the hardware conflgura-

tion switch to determlne tf conflgurafion ls locked or
unlocked. Thts way the configuratlon cErn be locked and
unlocked without iniflallzaflon by changlng the posltton of the
hardware switch. The NAI\{MO2 conllguratlon lock swttch ls
pole two of switch one on the expander board. The II\{AMMO3
configuration lock switch combtnatlon ls pole three of swltch
two. A closed swlteh (zero) provldes unlocked conflguratlon
and an open switch (one) locks the configuratlon.

Executive
BlockNAMMO2/|MAMM03
71 - 2 1 s F E B1 9 9 5 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode71

The hundreds dlglt of Sf ts the redundancy flag for the

IIvIAMMO3 module. Redundant IIVIAMMOSmodules must have
Sl set to DO( for proper operatlolt. II\4AMMO3 modules not
used ln a redundant conllguratlon must have Sl set to O)O(
for proper operatlon.
x x x
I
t- Ones dlglt - conflguratlon lock
0 = unlock
1 = lock
2 = oorfigurationswitchselectable

Tens dlglt - termlnatlon devlce country code

0 = UnitedStatesstandardterminationdevice
NTAI02/0yO4lO5
NIAIOZOU0/-
1 = ltalianterminationunit
NTU-7A4120 mA
NTU-7A4/50mA
NTU-780RTDbridge
NTU-781RTDbridge
NTU-782RTDbridge

Hundredsdlglt - redundancy(lMAMlt03moduleonly)
Q= no redundancy(backupnot expected)
1 = r€dundancy(backupexPected)

s 2 - ALRMDB (Alsrm deoldhond) Specification 52 defines the alarm dead-

band tre percent of span for all hfgh and low alarm reports ln
tlee speclfled module. Alarm deadbands prevent excesslve
alarm reports when values hover around the alarm limlt.

53 - LCABLE (Cable length) Specificatlon Sg ts the cable length ln feet

from the analog master module to the termlnation devlce.
This is used as a correcflon factor for coldJunction comPen-
sation.

54 through S19 (bcception reporting time) Specificatlons S4 through Sl9

set the rnlnlmum and ma:dmum exception reporttn$ times for
blocks one through 64. Exceptlon reporttng Umes are deflned
for each group of eight inPuts.

MIN - Mirtirrurrn Etrception Report Time

Minimum exception report time defines the minimum intervd
between updates of information sent on the communication
highway. Ttris adjusts the slgnal tlming and affects eommuni-
cation highway operation. Exception reports €rre not sent on
the communication highway at each mlnimum exceptlon
report lnterval unless the value has changed more than tJre
amount consldered significartt, set in function code 70 for
each polnt since the last exception report. Exception report
time is selected in 25O mllllsecond lncrements with the
default value set to one report per second.

ExecutiveBlockNAMM0ZIMAMMOS
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 7 1- 3
FunctionCode71

(IuIA){ - Maximtrrrl Exceptlon ReportTime)

Maximum exception report time defines the ma:d,mum inter-
val between updates of informatlon sent on tJre communlca-
tion highway. If a value of a potnt has not ehanged
significantly over this ttme pertod, a report of lts current value
is automatically sent on the courmunlcatlon htghway. Select
exception report time tn 25O mtlltsecond lncrements. Ttre
default value ls one report per mlnute.

ExecutiveBlock NAMMOAIMAMMOS
7 1- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode72 - AnalogSlaveDefinition'

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The analog slave deflnttton functlon code wlth functlon code

7L deflnes varlables that affect the operatlon of the NAI\{MO2
and IIvIAMMOS Analog Master Modules. Thts functlon code
:
deflnes the l/O module t1rye and I/O module terrntnatlons for
each of the elght lnput groups to tl:e NAIVIMO2/II\{AMMOS
Analog Master Module. F\rnctton code 72 resldes tn flxed
block 76. Thls functton code produces no usable outputs. ;

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Ilescrlptlon

76 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 l/O moduletype,blocks1-8,l/O module0; l/O moduletypes
allowed:
0 = Uodefined
1 = themocouple/mV
2=RTD
3 = highlevel
S2 N 0 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 UOmoduletype,blocks9-16,UOmodule1; l/O module
typesallowed:
0 = uodefined
1 = thermocouple/mV
2=RTD
g = highlevel
S3 N 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 UOrnoduletype,blocks17-24,UOmodule2; l/O module
typesallowed:
0 = undefined
1 = thermocouple/mV
2=RTD
3 = highlevel

AnalogSlaveDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 72-1
FunctionCode72

SPE CIFI CATIO,fVS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 f/O moduletype,blocks25-32,1/Omodule3; l/O module
typesallowed:
0 = undefined
1 = thermocouple/mV
2=RTD
3 = highlevel
S5 N I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 l/O moduletype,blocks33-40,l/O module4; UOmodule
typesallowed:
0 = uodefined
1 = thermocouple/mV
2=RTD
3 = highlevel
S6 N 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 l/O rnoduletype,blocks4148, UOmodule5; UOmodule
typesallowed:
0 = undefined
1 = thermocouple/mV
2=RTD
3 = highlevel
S7 N 0 l 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 l/O moduletype,blocks49-56,l/O module6; UOmodule
typesallowed:
0 = undefined
1 = thermocouple/mV
2=RTD
3 = highlevel
S8 N 0 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 l/O moduletype,blocks57-64,l/0 module7; UOmodule
typesallowed:
0 = uodefined
1 = thermocouple/mV
2=RTD
g = highlevel
S9 N 9 0 - 2 5 5 TC l/O moduleaddrEss,positioo0, TU/RTDpairA
sl0 N I 0-255 TC l/O moduleaddress,positiotr1, TU/RTDpairA
sl1 N 9 0-255 TC l/O moduleaddress,positiofr2,TU/RTDpairB
sl2 N 9 0-255 TC l/O moduleaddress,positioo3, TU/RTDpair B
sl3 N I 0-255 TC l/O moduleaddress,position4, TU/RTDpairC
sl4 N 9 0-255 TC l/O moduleaddress,positior5, TU/RTDpairC
sls N I 0-255 TC l/O moduleaddress,position6, TU/RTDpairD
sl6 N I 0-255 TC l/O moduleaddress,positiotrT,TU/RTDpair D

EXPLANATION

The NAIVIMO2/II\{AMMO3 Analog Master Module processes

inputs from eight I/O modules through terminatlon devices.
The eight UO modules have addresses from zero to seven wtttr
hardware switches on the modules. Each UO module carries
a group of eight inputs. The termlnatlon devices connect to
the analog master module in a daisy chatn €urangement as
shown in Figure 72-1. Standard terminatlon device A terml-
nates I/ O modules zero and one; standard termination device
B terminates l/O modules two and three, etc.

Analog Slave Definition

72-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode72

In order for the analog master module to read Inputs accu-

rately, I/O rnodule tlpe and termlnatlon devlce connectlons
must be speelfled. Speclffcattons Sl tfrrough 58 ldentlff the
t5pe of I/O module handllng each group of tnputs, wtth I/O
module address zero provtdlng lrputs to blocks one through
elght, IIO module address one supplytng blocks nine through
16, etc. Speclftcatlons 59 through 516 deflne the address of I/
O rnodule eonnectlons to termlnatlon unlts, wlth 59 tdenti$ring
the I/O module at poslttott zero on tlle termtnaHon unit daisy
chatn, SIO ldentlfylng the llO module at posltlon one, etc.
Speclftcatlons 59 through 516 can be spectfled for all three
tlpes of UO modules, but they are mandatory for ttrermocou-
ple I/O modules. They tdenttfy the locaflon of the thermocou-
ple termtnaHon unlts so that cold-Junctlon compensation can
be made for tJrermocouple [rputs. Htgh level, mllltvolt, and
RTD lnputs requtre no temperature eolrectlon.

Thermocouples lndlcate temperature througfr a voltage devel-

oped across a disslmtlar metal Junctlolt. The voltage then goes
to an I/O module through a terrnlnaHon device. Thermocouple
nrires connected to a terminatlon devlce create another dissim-
ilar metal junction that produces an additlonal voltage rePre-
senting the ambient temperature at the termination device.
That voltage subtracts from the thermocouple voltage provid-
Xig a false value to the andog master module for the thermo-
couple temperature. Therrnocouple termliratlon devlces have
RTDs to measure the temperature of the Junctton at the termi-
nation device. Ttrose temperature values go to the analog mas-
ter module with tlle thermocouple voltage, to corect the
temperature. The NAI\IMO2III\4AMMO3 internally converts the
ambient temperature to a voltage sfgnal and adds it to the ther-
mocouple voltage to provlde the eorrect value. Each standard
thermocoupte termlreatlon devlce acconrmodates two UO mod-
ules and has two RTDs for temperature compensatlon.

r/o il/rcDULE
POSITION O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TP45:!254

Figwe 72- 7. DaisU Chrl;TLArrangefferlt oJ Terrnttstion Units

Analog Slave Definition

l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 72-3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode73 -'|Calibration

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The callbratton functlon block contatns the offset and gatn

error correctlon factors determlned durfng I/O module or
polnt callbratlon. Frrnctton code 74 Perfonns the I/O module
caltbrattol. Flxed nurrbers equal to the lnput block (one
tlrrough 64) number plus fOO (blocks 1O1 tfrrough 164) refer-
ence the callbratlon data functton block. Tlte output ls the
raw value of ttre lnput ln mllllvolts, corrected for use by the
NAI\IMOL| IIvIAMMO3 Analog Master Module.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Rawvalueof the inputin mV corected for use by the NAMMOU
IMAMMO3

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N -0.500 R Full Offseteror correctionfactor
S2 Y -0.500 R Full Gainerrorfactor

EXPLANATION

The calibration block can provide a test of the point or I/O

module operatlon.

l. Monttor the block lnput of the UO module (one to 64 +

10O). ThIs value ts the raw mtlllvolt output.

Z. Record the offset error correction (Sl) and gain error (S2)
factor of the same block ln SteP 1.

Calibration
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 73-1
FunctionCode73

3. Calculate tJ:e temperature as follows:

(raw - offset)x gain = corcectedmillivolts

where:

raw = Value of tnput block number (one through 64)

plus 10O (101 through f64)
offset = Offset error correction factor (value of Sf)
gain = Gain error factor (value of 52)

NOTE: An increasein otfset decreasesthe temperatureand a

decreasein offsetincreasesthe temperature.

Calibration
73-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode74 - CalibrationGommand

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The operator initiat€s, guides and termtnates a callbration

sequence wlth the cdibratlon comrnand functlon code. Func-
uon code 74 restdes tn flxed block 80 and produces no usable
outputs. Enter callbratlon cornmands by tunfng thls block.

Refer to the NAMMOZ Anelog Master Module Cqlibrstion

Guide Hoduct ltstruction Sup1rlenent for calibratlon
tnformatlon.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

80 R No usableoutput

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 0-255 CommandcalibrationoPeration
S2 Y 0 I 0-255 Numberof pointto be calibrated(1 ' 64)

EXPLANATION

Calibratlon must be performed when:

1. Initially instaltIilg the control and l/O modules.

2. Replacing the control module.

3. Changing or replacing an I/O module.

4. Changing an l/O module address (changing the numbers

of the blocks referring to it).

Command
Calibration
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 74-1
FunctionCode74

5. The calibration EEROM ts tnlilallzed.

6. Making a change to the leadnrire reslstance parameter

(S9, function code 70).

7. Changing the cable length between the I/O modules and

termlnatlon units (S3, functton code 71).

Calibratlon can be performed by uslng lmternd references

generated by the analog master module or externally by zero
and full scale calibrations explicltly and ln that order. Speclfl-
cation S I selects the calibratlon t54le.

Specifications

51 I COMMAND Speciflcatlon Sl is the code that spectfles a callbrate opem.-

tion on tJre NAIVIMO2and IIVIAMMO3 modules.

I = Disable point. A point must be disabled before any cal-

ibration c€rn begin. ThIs wtll prevent caltbratton
related data from being tnterpreted as process data by
the rest of the system. [,Jse disable point when cali-
brating with a precision source or reslstance at the
terminal block.

2 = Disable I/O module. Use the disable I/O module com-

mand when callbratlng wtth the specld calibratlon
soekets on the terminatlon units.

NOTE:Thepointor l/O modulemustbe disabledbeforecalibrating

(Steps3 through9).

3 - Perform cornplete thermocouple I/O module calibra-

tion automatically using internal references.

4 = Perform thermocouple UO module external zero-miln-

volt calibration.

$ = Perform therrnocouplel/O module external 8o-millivolt

(for NAIVIMO2 module) or loo-milltvolt (for IIvIAMMO3
module) catibration.

$ = Perform thermocouple polnt external zero-millivolt

calibration.

7 = Perform thermocouple point external 8o-millivolt (for

NAVIMO2 module) or loO-millivolt (for IMAMMO3 mod-
ule) calibration.

$ = Perform RTD point external IOO-ohm calibratlon.

$ = Perforrn RTD point external 4oo-ohm calibratiorl.

Calibration
Command
74-2 ls FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code74

lO = Enable potnt. A potnt must be enabled before normal

tnput processtng can occur. Thts actlon terminates
the callbratton sequence for a polnt.

11 = Enable I/O module. An I/O module must be enabled

before normd lnput processtng can occur. This
actlon termlnates the callbratton sequence. The I/O
module enable ts dloured even tf the polnts were dis-
abled tndivtdudlY.

L2 = Escape. Use tl:e escape contmand to reset calibra-

tlon loglc ln the mfddle of a sequence (1.e., after tak-
fng a zero-volt or lOO-ohm measurement).

52 - POINT Speciflcatlon 52 is the number of tlle point on the I/O module

to be callbrated.

1 < point no. S 64

APPLICATION

Monitodng the output provtdes different resPonses depending

on the lnterface devlce. Table 74-I gives the possible
responses from the configuratlon and tunlng module assum-
ing enior free operation. Table 74-2 gives the possible
responses from the operator interface statton or other higher
level deviees assuming error free operatiolr,. The failure of any
parttcular cornmand must be followed uP by a read. of the cal-
ibration status block (block 81, functlon code 75) to deter-
mine the cause.

Tahte 74-7. hnfigwatwn and,nn@ MdlieRespot?se Table

Responselndex Meanlng
0 Abnormalconditiondetected(checkcalibrationstatus,block81)
1 Gooddisplayedwithin1 sec
2 Gooddisplayedwithin30 secs
3 Gooddisplayedwithin60 secs
c114 Errorencountered

Table 74-2. Operator lrterface Stof,wn Response Tahle

Responselnder Meaning
0 (error) Abnormal condition was detected during calibration (refer to
calibration status block).
1 (good) Calibrationcomrnandblockrewrittenon OIS consolescreen
withcommandfield(S1)unchanged fromoperatorsupplied
value.
2 (waiting) Modulebusymessageswrittenon OIS consolescreen.
Operatorshoulddisplaythe calibrationcommandblockat
30-secinteruals.

CalibrationComrnand
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 74-3
ffi

o
 FunctionGode75 - AnalogGalibrationStatus

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The analog callbratton status functlon code deflnes the block

in tJle NAI\{MO2 or IMAMMOS Analog Master Module contain-
Iilg the status of the most recent caltbratlon command. To
determtne tJle status of the callbratlon commartd, the oPera-
tor reads the speclflcatlons. Speclflcatlons can be read but
not modlfled. Thts functton has no useful outputs.

Ftrncuon code 75 restdes tn flxed block 81 and produces no

usable outputs.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

81 R No usableoutput

SPECIFICATIO,fVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Full Commandstatus
S2 N 0 I Full Statusof point1 on l/O module
S3 N 0 I Full Statusof point2 on l/O module
S4 N 0 I Full Statusof point3 on l/O module
S5 N 0 I Full Statusof point4 on UOmodule
S6 N 0 I Full Statusof point5 on UOmodule
S7 N 0 I Full Statusof point6 on UOmodule
S8 N 0 I Full Statusof point7 on l/O module
S9 N 0 I Full Statusof pointI on l/O module

AnalogCalibrationStatus
t-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 75-1
Function Code75

EXPLANATION

The number of speclfications avallable from ttre most recent

cdibration command referenced depends on whether lt was
anI/O module or a point.

When the most recent caltbratlon was performed on an UO

module, all nlne speclflcatlons have meantngful values. The
eight points listed are all from tJre same I/O module.

S1 OPSTAT Command status.

s2 POINTl Status of point I on ttrel/O module.

s3 POINT2 Status of point 2 on the UO module.

S4 POINT3 Status of point 3 on the l/O module.

s5 POINT4 Status of point 4 on the I/O module.

S6 POINTs Status of point 5 on the l/O module.

s7 POINT6 Status of point 6 on the UO module.

S8 POINTT Status of point 7 on the l/O module.

S9 POINTS Status of point 8 on the I/ O module.

When the most recent calibratlon uras performed on a polnt,

the first two specifications have meaningful values. The rest
of the specifications do not have mearring.

sl - OPSTAT Command status.

s 2 - POINTn Status of last point calibrated.

Specification information is presented in tJre format:

OPSTAT . EA SL CI CS
Onesdiglt
CommandSequenceFlag
0 - No sequenceerror.
1 - Commandout of sequence.
PossibleErrors
a. Fullscalecalibrationcommandenteredbefore
zeroscalecalibrationperformed.
b. Commandotherthanescapeor validfull scale
calibrationenteredaftet zeroscaleoperation
performed.
Tens digit
Command Consistency Flag
0 - Command consistentwith configuration.
1 - Command inconsistentwith configuration.
Possible Errors
a. Specified l/O module not configured.
b. Actual I/O module type does not match l/O
module type

Analog CalibrationStatus
75-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code75

OPSTAT. EA SL cl CS

previouspage

Hundredsdlglt
I/O ModuleFailure
0 - l/O modulerespondingnormally.
1 - l/O moduleconfiguredbut not responding.

Thousandsdlglt
EEROMError
0 - No EEROMerror.
1 - EEROMerror.

POINTn - PL

Onesdlglt
PolntStatus(X)
0 - Commandperformedwithouterror.
1 - Pointnot configured.
2 - Pointnot disabled.
3 - Calculatedgain or offsetover rangeerror.
4 - EEROMerror.
5 - Operationnot performed.

Tensdlglt

Thousandsand hundredsdlglt
PointNumber(XX)
Numberof the pointto whichthe statusapplies
( 1s P O l N T n s 6 4 ) .

and tuningmodulesuppressesleading
NOTE:The configuration
zeroson its display.

AnalogCalibrationStatus
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 75-3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode76 - ThermocoupleTemperature

GENERATDESCRIPTIOA'

The thermocouple temperature functlon code provldes ther-

mocouple temperatures at the termtnatlon device to the
NAIVIMO2 and IIvIAMMO3 Analog Master Modules. Use this
function code only for monltodng, tt has no spectflcatlons. All
temperatures €rre degrees Celslus.

Besldes termtnatton devlce thennocouple temperatures, func- ,

:
tlon code 76 also malces avallable the system trend tlme and
module revlslon levels tn blocks 94 through 97. Blocks 90
tlrrou gh 97 can only be accessed vta a read. point or rea.d.block
message on the rnodule bus (monltor on the conflguratlon ,
and tuntng module).

Functlon code 76 resldes ln ftxed blocks 9O through 97.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

BIK TyPe Descrlptlon

90 R RTDpairA thermocoupleTU tempera'ture
91 R TU temperatgre
RTDpair B thermocouple
92 R RTDpair TU tempeqlgre
G thermocouple
93 R RTDpairD thermocoupleTU temperature
94 R Systemtrendtime,hours
95 R Systemtrendtime,minutes
96 R Systemtrendtime,seconds
97 R Modulerevisionlevel

EXPLANATIO'V

The termlnatlon devlce measures the thermoeouple tempera-

tures to insure accurate reportlng of fleld thermoeouple tem-
peratures. Since the connectlon to the termlnation device

Temperature
Thermocouple
l-E96-2008 15FEB199s 76-1
FunctionCode 76

creates a Junctlon of dlsslmllar metals, an addttlonal voltage

is created and subtracted from the one produced by the ttler-
mocouple, leadtng to a false value for the thermocouple tem-
perature. The NAIVIMO2/IIVIAMMO3 talces the termtnatlon
device thermocouple temperature provtded by thts functlon
code, converts tt to a voltage slgnal lnterndly, and adds lt to
the iniflal voltage slgnal to correct the vdue before lt ls con-
verted to a temperature for output from the module.

The analog master module accepts lnputs from elglrt I/O mod-
ules through terminatlon devlces. Each termlnatlon devlce can
aecommodate two UO modules. The UO module tnputs feed
into an RTD pafr tl:at measures the arrblent temperature of
the air surrounding the termtnatlon devlce. Ttle use of RTD
pairs are for temperahrre conectlon of thennocouple lnputs.
Termlnatton devices €rre usually datsy chatned together as
shown Xe Figure 76-1, wlth RTD pafrs named accordtng to ter-
mination device position on the datsy chatn. Table 76-l shows
the correspondence between RTD pairs and block numbers.

TERMII.IATION TERM|hrATlOhl TERMIiIATION TERMIhIATION

I/O I'ODULE
POSITION: O 7
TH?2rOT4A

Figure 76- 7. Termtulion UnX hnnecflons

to Arulog Ma,ster MdilIes

TabLe 76- 7. Corespond.errce Betuseen

^RfD Parrs and. Blrck NwTlbers
Block Number RTDPalr
90 A
91 B
92 c
93 D

Thermocouple
Temperature
76-2 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode77- AnalogPointSeruiceStatus

GENERAL DESCBIPTION

NAIvIMO2 and IIvIAMMO3 Andog Master Modules have up to

64 lnputs. Each of these lnputs have a servlce status that
tdenttfles the polnt as in seruice or otrt oJ seruice. The analog
point servlce status block czrn save and restore the service
status of individual potnts. It saves a polnt's servlce status on
floppy dlsk at an operator lnterface statlon. Each speclfica-
tion reflects the servlce status of a potnt on thellO module as
shown in the specificatlons table. lngtc O equals point ln ser-
vlce, loglc 1 equals potnt not ln servtce.

Function code 77 resides in fixed block 89 in the analog mas-

ter module and provides no useful outputs.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

89 R No usableoutput

SPECIF'CATTOwS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-255 l/O module0, pointservicestatus
S2 N 0 0-255 l/O module1, pointservicestatus
S3 N 0 0-255 UOmodule2, pointservicestatus
S4 N 0 0-255 UOmodule3, pointservicestatus
S5 N 0 0-255 UOmodule4, pointservicestatus
S6 N 0 0-255 l/O module5, pointservicestatus
S7 N 0 0-255 UOmodule6, pointservicestatus
S8 N 0 0-255 l/O module7, pointservicestatus

AnalogPointServiceStatus
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 77-1
Function Code77

EXPLANATION

The servlce status of eaeh polnt ts bltmapped lnto the servlce

status of the correspondlng ll0 module. Each speclffcatlon ln
the block ts the declmal representatlon of an elg;ht-blt map.
The map format ls such that the most sfnfflcant blt (MSB)
eorresponds to potnt number seven on the l/O module, and
the least sfgnffIcant blt (LSB) corresponds to polnt number
zero on the I/O module. Flgure 77-l lllustrates thls conflgu-
ratlon.

NOTE:The displaydependson the last calibration(singlepointor

wholel/O module).

MSB LSB
X X X X X X X X
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X = O MEANS POINT lN SERVICE
X = 1 MEANS POINT OUT OF SERVICE
THANaOA

Figure 77 - 1. Poirtt &ruice

Stafirs Conf,tgwalion

Analog Point ServiceStatus

7 7- 2 15FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode 78 - Trend Definition

GENERAT DESCRIPTIO'V

The trend deftnttlon functlon code deflnes tl:e tlpe of trend

destred for each of the 64 lnputs to an NAIVIMOZor IIvIAMMO3
Analog Master Module. Ttre trend deflnttlon block stores thls
tnformatlon ln flxed block 77. Functlon code 78 provtdes no
useful outputs.

Each trend deflnttlon has a two dtglt tnput. The flrst dfgtt
(tens) deflnes trend resolutlon. The second dtglt (ones) defines
the trendlng mode.

TWo resolution cholces are avallable, normal trending and

fast trending. Normal trendtng saves 30 data values at one
minute intenrals. Fast trendfng saves those 30 values plus
I2O values saved at lS-second lnterwals. Thts provldes 30
minutes of one-minute samples or 30 mlrutes of lS-second
samples.

NOTE:Fast trendingrequiresa higheramountof moduleutiliza-

tionthannormaltrending.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descriptlon

77 R No usableoutput

SPECIFICAT'ONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 99 I 0-99 Trend definition, block 1
S2 N 99 I 0-99 Trenddefinition,block2
S3 N 99 I 0-99 Trenddefinition,block3
S4 N 99 0-99 Trenddefinition,block4

TrendDefinition
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 78-1
FunctionCode 78

SPECIFI CAT, OwS @ontinued)

Spec Tune I),efault Type Range Descrlptlon

S5 N 99 0-99 Trenddefinition,block5
S6 N 99 I 0-99 Trenddefinition,block6
s7 N 99 0-99 Trenddefinition,block7
S8 N 99 I 0-99 Trenddefinition,block8
S9 N 99 0-99 Trenddefinition,block9
s10 N 99 I 0-99 Trend definition,block 10
a o t o o
a

O o a o a o

o o a a a a

s64 N 99 I 0-99 Trenddefinition,block64

EXPLANATION

Specifications

Each trend defrnition has a two digit input. The flrst dlglt
(tens) defines trend resolution. Ttre second digft (ones) deflnes
the trending rnode. The Xrftial vdue of 99 for the specifleatlon
indicates that trending ls not defrned for the assoclated block.

NOTE:The consoletrendingpackageROM must be installedfor

this functionto be operational.In order for the NAMMO2and
IMAMM03modulesto trendproperly,the BIM modulemusthavea
revisionlevel> D.

Ones digit
Mode:
X0 = sample
Xl = mean
X2 = rninirnum
X3 = maximum
X4 = sum

Tens dlgit
Resolution:
0X = normal trending
1X = fast trending

Normal trending saves 30 data values at one mlnute lnter-

vals. All tJ:e points in ttre module can be conflgured for nor-
mal trending.

Ilast trending saves 30 vdues at one minute intervals plus

LzO values at I5-second intervals. Due to t]:e addlttonal
memory uillization, only selected polnts can be conflgured for
fast trending.

TrendDefinition
78-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode78

In tlre sample trending mode, tJre current polnt value wlll be

saved every 15 or 60 seconds, dependlng on trend resolutlon.

In tlre meanr trending mode, the vdue saved wtlt be the mean
value of dl values over the trendlng tntenral.

In the minimum ttending mode, the value saved ls the mlnl-

murn value of the polnt over the trendtng lntenral.

In the maximum trending mode, the value saved is the m€u(-

imum value of the polnt over tJre trendlng lntervd.

In the sum trending mode, the value saved ls the summation

of all values collected over the trending interval.

NOTE:The defaultvalueof 99 definestrendingfor a specificpoint

as unused.

TrendDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 78-3
ffi

I
 FunctionGode79 - Control lnterfaceSlave

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Use the control tnterface slave functlon code to lnterface a

multt-functlon controller or multl-functlon processor to a
control I/O module. Control l/O modules have four analog
lnputs, two analog outputs, three dtgltal feputs, altd four dlg-
Ital outputs. Thls functlon code deflnes the characterlstlcs of
tlrat llO module and honr the system responds to an I/O
module fathrre.

UTILIAT'ON

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Analoginput1
N+1 R Analoginput2
N+2 R Analoginput3
N+3 R Analoginput4
N+4 R Analog output 1 feedback
N+5 R Analog output 2 feedback
N+6 B Digitalinput1
N+7 B Digitalinput2
N+8 B Digitalinput3
N+9 B t/O modulestatusflag:0 = 9@d, 1 = bad

The control system must be carefully evaluatedto establish

WARNING default vatues that will prevent personal injury and/or prop-
erty damagein the case of module failure-
ll faut siogneusement6valuer le systeme de commandealin
d'6tabtir des valeurs par d6faut qui permettront d'6viter des
AVERTISSEMENT blessures et des dommagesmat6riels en cas de ddfaillance
des modules.

ControlInterfaceSlave
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 79-1
FunctionCode79

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range I)rescrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 ControlinterfaceUOmoduleaddress
S2 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput1 zeroin engineeringunits
S3 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput1 spanin engineeringunits
S4 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput2 zeroin engineeringunits
S5 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput2 spanin engineeringunits
S6 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput3 zeroin engineering units
S7 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput3 spanin engineeringunits
S8 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput4 zeroin engineeringunits
S9 N 0.000 R Full Analoginput4 spanin engineeringunits
sl0 N 2 I 0 - 2046 Blockaddressof analogoutput1
s11 N 2 I 0 - 2046 Blockaddressof analogoutput2
sl2 N 2 I 0orl Digital input I logic sense
sl3 N 2 I 0or1 Digitalinput 2 logic sense
sl4 N 2 0or1 Digitalinput3 logicsense
sl5 N 2 I 0 - 2046 Block address of digital output 1
s16 N 2 I 0 - 2046 Blockaddressof digitaloutput2
sl7 N 2 I 0 - 2046 Blockaddressof digitaloutput3
sl8 N 2 0 - 2046 Blockaddressof digitaloutput4
sl9 N 0 0or1 Failure action (lack of l/O module response or bad analog
input referencevoltage):
XXO = trip module
)fil = Continueto oPerate
l/O module status flag (bad status indication):
0X)( = Set l/O module status flag output N+9 to bad
when the CIS module fails or is in error mode.
l)fi = Set l/O module status flag output N+9 to bad
when the l/O module fails or there is a bad
quality on one of the module's l/O points.

EXPLANATION

Outputs

This block provides analog and digital I/O on the s€une board.
The final output is an l/O rnodule status flag, whtch shows
the status of the controll/O module.

Q = good
1=bad

Analog output feedbacks (N+4 and N+5) provtde feedback to

M/A stations (functton code 8O) that have hardware statlons
with bypass capabilities. This feedback signal provides a,n
alignment reference for the software logic, before establishing
control of the process when exiting from blpass or configure
mode (bumpless transfer).

NOTE:lf S19 equalszero,and if thereis a bad or unwiredinput,

thenthe controlmoduleis tripped.

Control lntedace Slave

79-2 15 FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctlonCode 79

Specifications

sl - loslv (@ntrol IIO module qddre,ss) Spectflcatlon Sl ls the UO

module address set by the address dtpswttch on the UO mod-
ule. Avatlable addresses are zeto through 63.

52 to 39 (AEn antd AISPr, Spectflcatlons S2 through Sg set the zero

and span values for four analog lnputs. If an analog value
goes below the zeto value or exceeds the span by more thart
five percent, lt urill produce a bad quanty output. A specified
span other than zero (default) for an unused analog tnput
produces a bad quality slgnal for that input.

s 1 0- A o 1 Specification S10 is the block address of lnput for analog out-

put or1e.

sll - AO2 Specillcation Sl I ls the block address of tnput for analog out-
put two.

S12to 514 - Dln Speclfications Sl2 to S14 set the loglc sense for three digital
inputs. Digital inputs can be deflned for direct or reverse act-
trrg logic operattolts. These €rre deflned as follows:

Q = reverse acttn$ (logfc Q = closed, logic I = oPen)

I = dlrect actin$ (loglc O = open, loglc I = closed)
t, = unused tnput

515 to 518 - DOn Specificatlons S15 to Sf8 are the block addresses of the
inputs for the four dlgltal outputs.

S19 - FAIL The value of ttrfs speclflcaflon deflnes the module response tn
case of controll/O module faihrre. [.ack of I/O module response
or a bad analog input reference volt4ge will cause a transfer to
error mode.

Specification S19 also determimes which failure conditions

cause the l/O module status flag output N+9 to go to logic I
(bad).
x x x
Onesdlgit - fallure actlon
0 = triPcontrolrnodule
1 = cootinueoperation
Tens digit - teseryedfor future use
Hundredsdlglt - UOmodulestatus flag
0 = selectsthe UOmodulestatusflag outputN+9to equallogic1
(badquality)whenthe UOmoduleis failedor in errormode.
1 = selectsthe l/O modulestatusflag outputN+9to equallogic1
(badquality)whenthe controlUOmoduleis in errormode
or a definedl/O point(Al,AO, Dl or DO)is badquality.

ControlInterfaceSlave
t-E96-2008 15FEB199s 79-3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode80 - ControlStation

GENERALDESCRIPTION

'v [/VA There are three tlpes of stattons, each controllable through a
3P sP dtgttal (NDCSO3) or a.nalog (IISACOI) control statton and/or a
MFC/P console such as the operator interface statlon (OIS). The tlpes
A O
TR lnclude bastc, cascade and ratlo statlolls.
T S A
MI
A)( C/B A basic statlon generates a set polnt (Se1 and provldes man-
c/R ual/automatlc transfers, control output adJustments ln man-
t x c
cx ual control mode, and set polet adJustments ltr automatlc
llAA C.-F control mode.
t.A
HDA
TDA A cascode statlon provldes the same functlons as a baslc sta-
AO
TRS2 4
tlon plus an addlttonal mode that allows the set potnt to be
**(P controlled by external lnput sl$nal <S2>.

A ratio statton provldes the same functlons as a baslc sta-

tlon, but differs from the cascade station ln lts method of set
point generatlon while tn the ratlo mode. The wlld varlable
<S2> multiplied by a ratio adjustment factor (ratio tndex)
determines the set poiret output while ln ratio mode" The Id,-
Ual ratlo index value ls calculated by the statlon to malntatn
the current set polnt output value when the statlon ls placed
tnto the ratlo mode. Whlle in the ratlo mode, the ratlo lndex
value ls displayed ln place of the set poht value and can be
adJusted (ramped up or down) by the operator to obtaln the
desired set point output.

Station control allows changing the rnode, set poilrt, ratlo

index and control output of a control station by manlpulattn$
a control statton element.

The control output (CO) value durtng start-uP ls conflgurable.

If S16 deftnes a DCS statlon (516 equals zero through seven)
or SAC statton (516 equals zero through 63), then the control
output durtng start-up tracks the dtsplayed control output on
the DCS statlon or SAC statlon. If a communlcatlon fallure
erdsts for the statlon (or 516 equals 2551, then the control
output tracks tlre CO track stgnal <S4> during start-llp.

NOTE: Valid station addressesare zero through 63 and 100

through163for MFPmodulesat 40 kilobaud.

ControlStation
I-E96-2008 15 FEB199s g0-1
FunctionCode 80

The associated analog output (AO) <S28> generates auto-

blpass when the AO has bad quality and communlcates thls
state to the control treterface module analog output.

NOTES:
1. PlantLoopsonlyallowthe controlstationfunctionto be placed
in blocks numberedzero through1023. |NF|-NETloops allow
higherblocknumbers.

2. The rnaximumratio for the wild variableis ten when usinga

DCSstation,and 100whenusinga SACstiation and the minimum
practicalratiois 0.05.

3. The communication baudrateis set by the one hundredsdigit

53 of the extendedexecutiveblock(functioncode90, block20) for
MFPmodules.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N R Controloutput(0T"to 100%)
N+1 R Set point
N+2 B Automatic mode flag:
0 = ffi?llU8l
1 = automatic
N+3 B Level flag:
0 = local
1 = colTrputer
N+4 B Cascade/ratio mode flag:
0 = basic
1 = cdscade/ratio
N+5 B Computerstatusflag:
0 = coffiputerOK
1 = Golllputer
failed

SPECtFtCATtOtVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range D,escrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of input to be displayed on the PV scale of a
station (can be used for SP track S30)
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of SP track signal (S29 SP track switch)

ControlStation
80-2 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode80

SPECI F, CAfTOwS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof autosignal
S4 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof controloutputtracksignalCfR)
S5 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof controloutputtrack switch(TS):
0 = oo track
1 = track
S6 N 5 I 1 , 2 13 , 5 , lnitialmodeof stationafterstart-up:
6,7or8 1 = ooffiputer,manual
2 = GOlTtpUter,
auto
3 = cotTtputer,
cascade/ratio
5 = local,manual
6 = locol,auto
7 = local,qascade/ratio
$ = proviousmode
S7 v 9.2 E 18 R Full PV highalarmpointin engineering units
S8 v -9.2 E 18 R Full PV low alarmpointin engineeringunits
S9 yz 9.2 E 18 R Full PV-SP deviation alarm point in engineering units
NOTE: For console only
sl0 N 100.000 R Full Signalspanof PV in engineeringunits
sl1 N 0.000 R Full Zerovalueof PV in engineeringunits
sl2 N 0 I Full PV engineeringunitsidentifier
NOTE:Forconsoleonly
sl3 N -5.000 R Full Signalspanof SP in engineeringunits
sl4 N 0.000 R Full Zerovalueof SP in engineeringunits
sls N 0 I Full unitsidentifier(forOISconsoleonly)
SP engineering
sl6 N 255 I Full Controlstationaddress:
2il = psSSivestation
255 = ro station
sl7 N 0 o- 7 Modeof systemdefaultit the computerfailswhilethe loopis
undercomputercontrol:
0 = cotTtputer(auto/manualmodeunchanged)
1 = cotnputer,manual
2 = cofilputer,auto
3 = coffiputer,cascade/ratio
4 = local(auto/manual modeunchanged)
5 = local,manual
6 = local,auto
7 = local,cascade/ratio
sl8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof the transferto manualsignal:
0 = oo transfer
1 = transferto manualand hold
sl9 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof the transferto autosignal:
Q= oo transfer
1 = transferto autoand hold
s20 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof the transferto cascade/ratiosignal:
0 = no transfer
1 = transferto cascade/ratioand hold
s21 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof the transferto localsignal:
Q= oo transfer
1 = transferto localand hold
s22 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof the transferto computersignal:
0 = Dotransfer
1 = transferto computerand hold

ControlStation
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 80-3
FunctionCode 80

SPE CIFI CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range D'escrlptlon

s23 N 0 I 0-4 Stationtype:
0 = basicwithset point
1 = basicwithoutset point
2 = basicwithbias
3 = ratio
4 = C?Scade
s24 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of external high absolute alarm flag:
0 = ho alarm
1 = high absolute alarm
s25 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof extemallow absolutealarmflag:
0 = flo alarm
1 = low absolutealarm
s26 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of external high deviation alarm flag
0 = Do alarm
1 = high deviationalarm
s27 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of external low deviation alarm flag:
0 = DOalarm
1 = low deviation alarm
s28 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of analog output associated with this station
s29 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of switch to have SP track <S2>:
0 = oo track
1 = track <S2>
s30 N 0 Note 1 Block address of switch to have SP track <S1> (PV):
0 = ho track
1 = track <S1>
s31 N 60.000 R Full Computer watchdog time period in seconds
NOTES:
1. Maximumvalues are: 1023 for SLC01/21
2046 for NMFCO1|0?,|MMFCOS and CBC01
9998 for |MMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3
2. Specification is tunable, but not adaptable.

EXPLANATION

Outputs

N Output N is the control output expressed in percent. The sta-

tion mode and the control output auto <S3> input determlne
the control output"

N+1 Output N+ I is tJ:e set point expressed in engineering unlts.

The input to <S2> and the station mode determine the set
point output.

N+2 Output N+2 is the mode indicator.

Q = manual
I = sutomafic

ControlStation
80-4 1s FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode 80

N+3 Output N+3 ls the level lndlcator.

Q = local
I = corlputer

N+4 Output N+4 ls the statlon mode lndlcator.

Q = baslc
1 = c?.scade/ratlo

N+5 Output N+5 ts the comPuter status flag.

Q = computer OK
I = cortputer fatled, statlon mode dependent on S17

Specifications

s1 -PV Specification S I is tJ:e block address of t}re input to be dls-

played on the PV scale of a statlon (can be used for SP track
S3O). This input drlves the control statlon proeess varlable
indicator (tn engineerlng unlts).

S2 - SPT Speclficatlon 52 is the set point track stgnal. For stattons tr

basic mode, 52 ls an external set polmt track stgnal. For sta-
tions in the cascade mode, <S2> ls the cascade lnput. For sta-
ttons in ratlo mode, <S2> ts the uncontrolled or wild varlable.
Table 80- I shows the track behavior of the station block.

NOTE:For stationsin ratiomode,the wild variablemustbe limited

to positivenumbersand the set point range must be a positive
number.Lowlimitson eithersignalmustnot be lessthan zero.

Table 8O-7. Track Betntsior of ttte Stafion Block

Station Mode Manual Auto Cascade Ratlo

Basic A A
Cascade A A B
Ratio A A c
NOTE:
A = When the station tracks and what it tracks depends on <S29> and <S30>. Specification S29
indicates when <S2> should be tracked, and <S3O>indicateswhen <S1> should be tracked. lf
both indicate tracking, <S29> takes precedence.
B = Specification 52 is tracked uncorditionally and the station displays <S2>.
C = Specification 52 muttiplied by the ratlo index (displayed in digital set point display), is tracked
unconditionally and the pioOuA bf <Sb and the ratio index displays on the station bar graph.

53 - CO AUTO Specification Sg is tl:e block number whose output value ls

ttre control output when the statlon is in automatlc mode
(usually the output of a PID block).

54 - CO TRACK Specification 54 ls the block number whose output is the coll-

trol output when the statlon ts tracklng (<S5> equals one).
Specification 54 also provtdes a reference for the station con-
trol output when the module completes its start-up mode, lf
a.n active hard statlon is not present.

ControlStation
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 80-5
FunctionCode80

s5 - co swlTcH Specification 55 is the block nurnber whose output value

determines whether the control output is to track <S4>.

Q = no tracking
I = track

NOTE:Boththe MANand AUTOlightson the digitalcontrolstation

(NDCSO1) lightwhenthe moduleis in the controloutputoverride
mode(tracking). Forthe NDCSO3 station,just the tracklightis dis-
played.The manuaUauto statusflag does not changewhen in
overridestate. The actual operatingstate is saved and will be
restoredwhenthe trackflag goesto zero(normal).This noteis not
to the analogcontrolstation(llSAC0l).
applicable

s 6 - SMODE Specification SO is the iniilal mode of the station after start-

up. For the configurable start-up period after power up/
reset/switch to execute rnode, the station wtU be in local
manual mode. After the start-up period expires, the mode is
as indicated by SG unless overridden by <S18> to <S22>.
Specifications <S18> through <S22> change the station mode
and control level through logic. Any of these speclflcations
override 56. When adding a statlon block with SO set to prevl-
ous mode (eight), the actual mode will be local manual until
modified by the operator or logic. When selecting computer or
local cascade ratio, cascade or ratio control will be imple-
mented depending on S23 (station t1rye).

I = cortputer manual
2 = computer auto
$ = computer cascade/ratio
$ = local manual
$ = local auto
7 = local cascade/ratio
8 - previous mode

s 7 - PVH Specification 57 sets the engineering units value of the pro-

cess variable that a high alarm generates and displays on the
control station or OIS console.

58 - PVL Specification 58 sets the engineering units value of the pro-

cess variable that a low alarm generates and displays on ttre
control station or OIS console.

39 - PVDEV Specification Sg is the englneering unlts value of allowed

deviation between the process varlable and set point. A hJgh
deviation alarm generates when the process variable ls
greater than the set point and the value of the difference
between the two is greater than or equal to 59. A low devla-
tion alarm generates when the process variable is less than
the set point and the value of the difference between the two
is greater than or equal to 59. These alarm conditions report
to the console.

ControlStation
80-6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 80

S1O - PVSPAN Speclfication SIO sets the stgnal span of process varlable ln
engineering units.

sll - PVZERO Specificatlon Sl f is the zero value of process varlable ln engl-

neerin$ units.

s12 - PVEU Spectficatlon Sfz ls the process variable engineerin$ unlts

tdentifler, used by the OIS console.

S13 - SPSPAN Spectflcatlon S13 sets the slgnal span of set point in englneer-
ing untts. When left at def,ault, set polnt spurn equals sPan
defined by SlO. The default setting for Sfg is -5.OOO. It
should be noted that OIS consoles will display the PV span
(StO) for the set point span (Sf g). The MFC and MFP modules
use the PVSPAI{ (SlO) and PVEU (StZ) for both the Process
variable and set polnt as long as ttre set point span ls set to
the default vdue.

NOTE:Someoperatorinterfaceunits(OlU)and DCSstationswill
not functioncorectly usingthe -5.000defaultvalue. lf a problem
exists,set513 andS14thesameas S10andS11.

s14 - SPZERO Specification S14 is the zero value of set point in engineerlng
units.

S15 - SPEU Specification S15 is the set point engineering units identifler,
used by the OIS console.

516 - DCSADR Set 516 to the control station address (254 equds passlve
station and 255 equds no statlon). Valid station addresses
are zero through seven and 100 through IO7 for DCS sta-
tions, and zero through 63 and lOO through 163 for SAC sta-
6ons. Addresses lOO through f63 represent actual statlon
addresses of zero to 63 with chzrnges to reports generated. If
selecting addresses lOO through 163, the MFC or MFP mod-
ule will not report the status of the control station in tJre mod-
ule status or module problem reports. In atl other respects,
station operation remains unchanged. Thts specificatlon
must be set to 254 when a passive station interface (function
code 139) Sl points to thls function code.

NOTE: Valid station addressesare zero through 63 and 100

through163for MFPmodulesat 40 kilobaud.

S17 - CFAIL Specification S17 defines the mode the station will default to
in the event of a computer failure while it is under comPuter
control. When selecting computer or local cascade/ratio, the
station assumes cascade or ratio control depending on S23.

Q = computer manual/auto mode unchanged

I = corlputer manual
) = computer auto
$ = comPuter cascade/ratio
{ = local manual/auto mode unchanged

ControlStation
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 80-7
FunctionCode 80

$ = local manual
$ = local auto
7 = local cascade/ratio

S18 through S22 Specificatlons Sf8 through Sl22 are block addresses that
change the station mode and control level through logic. If
more than one (<Sl8> through <S.22>) are set, <Sl8> takes
precedence over <S19>, whlch takes precedence over <S2O>,
etc. If the statton ls ln manual mode, <S2O> places the statlon
in automatic and cascade/ratio mode simultaneously. When
both <S21> and <S22> are set, <S2l> overrides <S22>.

NOTE:Whenoneor moreinputsto <S18>through<S22>egualone,

the stationdisplaysthe interlockstate.The stiationis lockedin a par-
ticularmode.The outputcannotbe changedby the operatorunless
S18equalsone.Inputs<S18>through<S22>are typicallydrivenby
fault logicthat placesthe controlloop in a knownconditionwhen a
failureis detected.Removingan interlockstate leavesthe cunent
modeunchanged, butallowstheoprator to changethe mode.

S18 I MANXFR Specification Sl8 is the block address of the transfer to man-
ual signal.

Q = no transfer
I = transfer to manual

s1g - AuroxFR Specification Sl9 is the block address of the transfer to auto
signal.

Q = no transfer
I = transfer to auto

S2O - CSRXFR Specification S2O is the block address of the transfer to c€rs-
eade/ratio signal. This specilication transfers to cascade or
ratio control depending on the tlpe of station selected with S23.

Q = no trartsfer
1 = transfer to cascade/ratio

s21 - LOCLXFR Specilication 52 I is the block address of the transfer to local

signal.

Q = no transfer
I = transfer to local

s'22 - CMPXFR Specification 522 is the block address of the transfer to com-
puter signal.

Q = no transfer
I = transfer to computer

s23 - STNWP Specification S23 provides a cholce between several station

tlpes for nonnal operation. The definition of <S2> depends on
S23. The value of S23 also determines whether cascade or

ControlStation
80-8 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode80

ratlo control is adopted when 56, S17 and <S2O> are set to
caseade/ratio (refer to 56). This speciflcatton wlll not be fully
operational until ttre OIS console station display strategles
€rre modified. Until that time, only zero, three and four are
valld t5pe speclflcations.

Q = baslc wlth set potnt

I = baslc wlthout set potnt (presently not lmplemented)
) = baslc wlth btas (presently not lmplemented)
$ = ratlo
{ = cascade

S24 through S27 Spectficatlons S24 through S27 al:e block addresses that Pro-
vide a mechanism for external absolute and deviation alarm-
ing. Specificatlons S24 and S25 can be used for end of travel
atarms. Speclficatlons S;24through S27 are loglcal ORed wtth
their respective internal alarms, defined by SZ through 59, to
determtne the darm states presented to the operator.

S24 - EHALRM Specificatlon S24 sets the external htgh absolute alarm flag.

Q = no alarm
I = high absolute alarm

S25 - ELALRM Specification S25 sets the external low absolute alarm flag.

Q = no alarm
I = low absolute alarm

S26 - EHDALRM Speclficauon 526 sets the external high deviation alarm flag.

Q = no alarm
I = high deviation alarm

S27 - ELDALRM Specification 527 sets the external low deviation alarm flag.

Q = no alarm
I = low deviation alarm

S28 - AOBLK Specification S28 is the analog output block number assocl-
ated with the station. Use thls specifleatlon for proPer oPera-
tion of bypass logic. When S28 equals zero, it is not used. Any
setting other than zero must be a block number of the control
interface module (CIS) function code 79.

NOTE:Onlythe physicalAO from functioncode 79 is referenced

to checkthe qualityof the AO for auto bypasswhenthe qualityis
bad.When usingfunctioncode 79, S28 shouldreferenceoutput
blockN+4or N+5,notoutPutblockN.

Specification S28 provides a way to automatically monitor the

CIS module output channel. Should the CIS module detect a
fault on the current output, the station transfers to manual.

ControlStation
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 80-9
FunctionCode 80

If using a control statlon, selecttng auto-blpass on the statlon

causes tt to revert to blpass when tJre output faults.

NOTE:The OIS consoledoes not indicatethat the stationis in

bypassor lockedin manual(asit doesif S18equalsone).

s29 - SPTRCK Specification S29 is the block address of the analog output
set point track signal. Thls deterrnines the track behavior of
the set point in conJunctlon with <S3O>. Speciflcatlon S29
indicates when <S2> should be tracked, and <S3O> lndtcates
when <S1> should be tracked. If both lndlcate tracklng,
<S29> overrides <S3O>. If tlJs speclficatlon equals one, lt wfU
cause the set point to track <S2> whether the statlon ls ltl
manual or automatic mode. Thls speclflcatlon ls not appllca-
ble when the station is in cascade mode because the cascade
input uses none of the lnternal statlon loglc for control.

Q = no track
I = track <S2>

S3O - PVTRCK Specification S30 is the block address of the process varlable
track signal. It determlnes the track behavior of the set potnt
in conjunction with <S29>. Speciflcation <S29> lndlcates
<S2> should be tracked, and <S3O> indicates <Sl> should be
tracked. If both indicate tracking, <S29> overldes <S3O>.
When <S3O> equals one, it causes the set polnt to track <Sl>
whether the station is in automatic or manual mode. This
specilication is not applieable when the station is in cascade
mode because ttre cascade input uses none of the internal
station logic for set point control.

Q = no track
I = track <Sl>

s31 - CMPWDG The cornputer watchdog time-out lnterval times computer

communications when a station is under computer control.
Timing starts when a computer OK message goes from the
network interface to the module, sfnfffing that the computer
reeeived all inforrnation transmitted from the module. The
timer is reset by each subsequent OK message from the net-
work interface and station variable settings.

For exarnple, if ttre station is switched from manual to com-

puter control, a message will be sent to the network interface,
which will generate an OK message and initiate timing. If the
elapsed time between OK messages exceeds the value of S31,
the tirner tirnes out. The control mode is then determtned by
the value of S17 (computer watchdog tlme-out option) in the
station. If the computer replies to a module message before
the time interval is over, the timer resets itself and begins tim-
ing again with the next communlcation. The lnterval ls
selected in seconds, with a default value of 6O seconds. An
interval value of 0.O disables the computer watchdog time-out
feature.

ControlStation
80 - 10 ls FEB19es l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode80

STATION OPERATION

There are three tlpes of stattons, each controllable through a

dtgttal or analog control statlon or a console such as the oper-
ator lnterface statlon (OIS). Ttte tSpes tnclude baslc, cascade
and ratlo stattons. PlgUre 8O-1 ls a flow dlagram of statlon
operatlon from pourer up to normal operatlon.

M/A SW=M

MAN PB OR <518>=1

COMMUNICATION MrASW=A
A}.IDAUTO BYPASS GOOD@MM.
M/ASW=M E}.|ABLED DO=COFROMCIS
CIS STATUSG@O

LEGEND:
AUTO = AUTOMATIC
BYP = BYPASSOPERATION NOTES:
CASC = CASCADE 1. <Sl8> THROUGH<S22>REFERTO SPECIFICATIONS
CIS = CONTROLUOMODULE S18 THROUGHS22 OF FUNCTIONCODE 80.
CMPTR= COMPUTER
COMM= COMMUNICATION z.IF MORETHAN ONE OF <S1F THROUGH<S2} IS SET,
lNlT = INITIALIZATION <Sl8> TAI(ESPRECEDENCEOVER <S19>
M/A SW = MANUALOVERRIDESWITCH WHICH TMES PRECEDENCEOVER <S2O>.
MAN = MANUAL
MANOVR= MAiIUAL OVERRIDE 3. fF <S21>Al.fD <S22>ARE SET,<S2l> OVERRIDES<522>-
NORM= NORMAL
PB = PUSHBUTTON 4. <Sl8> THROUG" O',' TA}(EPRECEDENCEOVER STATION
PREVIOUSMODE= STATIONMODE lN EFFECT PUSHBUTTONSBUT DO NOT PREVENTCHAT.IGES CAUSEDBY
BEFOREA LOSSOF COMMUNICATION BAD STATIONCOMMUNICATIONS,BAD CIS STATUSOR ]"UA
SAO = STAND-ALONECOMMUNICATION SWITCHCHANGES.
TP220868

Ftgure 8O-7. Flout Diogran oJ SAC Stafion OperallonJrom PouserUp to Nornnl Operallon

ControlStation
l-E96-2008 15FEB1ee5 80 - 1 1
FunctionCode 80

STATIONELEMENT ATTRIBUTES

The statton control element dlsplayed on the OIS console pre-

sents a detalled on-llne dlsplay of a strgle process loop. A sta-
tion tag ls requtred to acqulre current process values from the
manual/auto statton block ln a PCU module conflguratlon,
and to dlrect control. Flgure 8O-2 detalls the tnformatlon pre-
sented ln a standard control statlon element.

FACEPLATE
SELECTOR

REO TAG
DESCRIPTOR STATION T.
ENGINEERINGUNIT
DESCRIPTOR
PROCESS VARIABLE R 11o. SCALE LIMIT
AT.IDSET Po|NT SCALE
100. HI@I ALARM LIMIT

SETPOINT

ALARM TICKS

PR@ESS VARIABLE LO/T' AI..ARM LIMIT

DYT{AMIC BAR
PROCESS 10.o0 SCALE LIMIT
VARIABLE
OT'TPUT
| | | r | | tl"/; SCALE
@NTROLOI'TPUT S|rATION MODE
DYNAMIC BAR

CONTROL
OUTPUT
AI,ARM STATUS
QUALIw/GRqJP
GTMODE:@
TRACKING PRO[,|PVF|EtD
o
Figure 8 0 -2. Controt Station Elemertt

The operating state of the block ts deflned as tts level (local/

computer), mode (manual/auto) and statlon mode (bastc/
cascade/raUo). The operatlng state determtnes whlch values
can be adjusted from the OIS console. The statlon operating
mode can be changed through the OIS console.

The station function block exceptlon reports the dynamic val-

ues, modes, and alarm status and qualtty that dlsplay at a
station element. Attributes that relate to a statlon tag and can
be lncorporated tnto any graphlc or custom faceplate lnclude:

Process uariable (PV, aalue - displays tlle current process

variable value input to a statton functlon block. Tlte process
variable is t5rpically from an analog lnput. The analog lnput ls
from a measuring device such as temperature, pressure, flow
rate or tank level transmitter.

ControlStation
8 0- 1 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 80

W dgnamic bar - tndtcates the process variable as an

expandlng or contracting dynamlc bar. The bar exPands vertl-
cally from the baseline mark on tJre scale as the process varl-
able lncreases lrr value, and contracts back to t]re basellne
mark as the variable decreases.

Set point (SP, aqlue - a dynamic morrlng value accompanted

by a dynamic pointer. The disptayed value and the posltton of
the pointer on the scde correspond to the current set polnt or
bias being exception reported by a station function block.
Thls value can be changed through keyboard actlons whlle ln
automatlc or manual mode unless set polnt tracktng ls ln
effect.

The set potnt value t5ryically fndicates the desired steady state
of the controlled process. The control strategr of a tlpical
control loop causes the control output to increase or decrease
when the process variable does not match the deslred set
point.

nr crnd SP scale - a static display element for reference.

Engineering unit descrtptor (EIID) - indicates the untt of

measurement associated with the process variable and set
point. Ttle station function block reports an EUD tndex num-
ber that the OIS console then cross references against tts ltst
of EUDs. Station elements indicating the process variable and
set point values are referenced to this unit of measurement.

@ntrol output (CO) aalue - displays the current control out-

put value (in percent of output) being output from a statlon
function block. The control output can be changed through
keyboard actlons when the station is in manual mode.

The control output value tSrpically drlves €rn analog output

control signal to a process control device such as a valve or a
heater control element.

CO dgncmic boir - tndicates tJre control output as an e:rqpartd-

ing or contracting dynamic bar. The bar expands horizontally
from the baseline mark on the scale as the control output
increases tn percentage, and shrinks back to the baseline
mark as the control output decreases.

CO scale - a static display element for refererlce.

HigFn ornd lout scale timits - define the maximum and miltl-
mum value assoclated wtth the baseline and top llree of the
static scale respectively. Depending on ttre configuratlon of
the station element, the limits can reflect either the process
variable or set point zero and span configured ln the statlon
function bloek.

ControlStation
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 80 - 13
FunctionCode 80

High o;nd lout alarm limits identiff the maximum and

minimum alarm level thresholds. These values are set in the
station function block conflguratlon. If the process varlable
reaches or passes either the high or low alarm limlt, the sta-
tion is in an alarm condttion. The OIS console monitors these
limits to trigger alarm indications at the OIS console.

Alarm ticks provide a scale reference to easlly determlne

when the process variable dynamtc bar passes Ernalarm Umit.
These tick rnarks correspond to the high and low alarm ltmit
values.

NOTES:
1. A stationelementmay not havea separatestationmodeand
trackingindicatorfield.Dependingon the escapecommandsused
duringthe configuration of the faceplate,the elementmay display
boththe trackingand modeindicatorsin the stationmodefield.

2. Stationlevel - indicatesthe currentstationlevel.The station

levelidentifiesthe devicedirectingthe loopcontrol.lt can operate
at eitherPCUlevel(local)or computerlevelcontrol.

3. Trackingindicator- indicatesthe type trackingimplemented by

the stationfunctionblockin the modulecontrolscheme.A station
blockcan employeithercontroloutputor set pointtracking.When-
ever a referencesignalto track goes up or down,the stationset
pointor controloutputvaluefollowsit. Also,thisfieldidentifiesa set
conditionfor the manualmodeinterlockin the stationfunctionblock.

APPLICATIOruS

Figure 8O-3 illustrates a single input, single output control

loop run by a control station tre basic mode. This configlrra-
tion uses a PID block for error correctlon. The process vari-
able and the control output interface with the field devices
through a control interface module block. If station parame-
ters such as process variable, set point, artd control output
€rreto be trended, an AO /Lblock ls not necessary because the
current values €rre obtained from the station exception report.
The exception reports €rre on th,e loop without an AO/L block.
Only a trend block (function code 66 or 179) is necessarJr.

ControlStation
80 - 14 1s FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 Function Code 80

ctsyo

w
s2 s"lwA

s3 MFC/P A o
TR
T S A
l-AG DOEStlOT CAUSESSTATIOT.ITO
WORKlF f.lOT @TOCIS FEEDtsACT( lri|
TURIIEDOf.l. (Sa8)Oll lvlODtLE AX Cn
DEFAULTISZEFO. GC)|T.IGTO D(ECIJTE.
OTHERYT/ISE OI'TPUT c/R
WOI'LD@TOZErc l x c
IF ITWASASOFTOS
cc(
lf A CrF
I.AA
FNA
LDA
AO
s29 l__ | r
TRSE
g-l---, .^.
;
rRP\t1r\l
(P

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - J
sl6

sl7
(66) TOols
OBOTHER
cohrsolE

TP45175D

Ftgwe 8O-3. StWIe lrrpnt Stgle. AtQuf @nfr.ot Loop utllh Attto Bgpass

ControlStation
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 8 0- 1 5
ffi
I

I
 FunctionGode81 - Executive

GENERAT DESCRIPTION

The executlve functlon code resldes tn flxed block zero of a

control module. It selects the output mode of the light emit-
ttng dlodes (LED) on the front panel of the control module.
The LEDs dlsplay the status of the control module or €rn [nter-
nal memory locatton. The executlve functlon code has 15 out-
put blocks numbered zero ttrrough 14. Flxed blocks zero
through nlne €rre ff:ced values.

UTILIUT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descriptlon

0 B Logic 0
1 B Logic 1
2 B 0 or 0.000
3 R -100.000
4 R -1.000
5 R 0.000
6 R 1.000
7 R 100.000
I R -9.2E18
9 R 9.2El8
10 B Start-upin progressflag:
0=no
| =leS
11 R Memorydisplayvalue
12 R System free time in percent
13 R Revision level
14 R Reserved

Executive
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 8 1- 1
FunctionCode81

SPECIFICATIONS

Spee Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 I 0or1 FrontplateLEDdisplaymode:
0 = DottTlal(i.e.,modulestatus)
1 = displaymemory(for diagnosticpurposesonly)
S2 Y 0 I 0-255 Mernorydisplayaddress(mostsignificantbyteof address)
S3 Y 0 0-255 Mernorydisplayaddress(middlebyte of address)
S4 Y 0 0-255 Memorydisplayaddress(leastsignificantbyteof address)

EXPLANATION

The module status LEDs dtsplay varlous patterns that

describe the CPU operatlng condltlon, provlde addltlonal
memory operating information, and provide additional oper-
ating information on the entlre module. The module's product
insbrrction manual provides a full descriptton of dtagnostlc
codes.

OUTPUTS

Output blocks zero through nine are various system con-

stants and are described tre the output table. Output blocks
ten through 13 provtde module stahrs lnformatlon.

10 (9rtc;rt-up in progress/Iag)The output of this block ts logic I

for the start-up period spectfled by 54 of functlon code 90
when the module is in execute mode. When start-up ls suc-
cessful, this signal reverts to logic O, and remalns at logic O as
long as the module is in execute mode.

O=rlo
t =f€S

11 (blemory displo;g aslue) The output of thls block ts elther the

memory address selected with 52 through 54 or the current
module statlls, depending on whtch option was selected urttlr
sl.

12 (systemfree time in percentt The output of thls block is the

percentage of free time left in the control module.

Free time = 1 - total module utilization

Executive
g 1- 2 15 FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Gode81

13 Eeuision leuep The output of tlrts block ls a four digit num-

ber identifftng the module nomenclature, hardware revislon
level, and flrmware revlslon level as lllustrated below.
xxx)(
Flrmwarerevlslon level. X X = nth revlslon released
(e.9.,)(X = D-0).

Hardwarerevlslon level.X 3 0, lr2, etc.

Modulenomenclature:
1 = SLC01,|MMFPOI, lMMFC0lor lMMPC0l
2 = |MMFP02, IMMFC0Z or |MMPC02
3 = |MMFPOS or IMMFCOS
4 = |MMFCO4
5 = |MMFC0S

14 Resenred for future llse.

Executive
ls FEB1995 g 1- 3
l-E96-2008
ffi
o

I
 FunctionCode82 r SegmentControl

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The segment control functlon code groups subsequent blocks

into a sc€rn cycle executed at a spectfled rate and prlorlty.
Each module can support up to elght segment control blocks.
Each segment control block provtdes flve outputs. Block
address 15 contalns one permanently conflgured segment
control block. The other seven are conflgurable.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N R Elapsedtimeof previouscyclein unitsset by S1
N+1 R Elapsedtimeof currentryde in unitsset by S1
N+2 R Processorutilization(%)
N+3 R Checkpointoverruncountnumber(numberof cyclesoverthat
are specifiedin 34)
N+4 R Cycletimeoverrunin unitsset bYSl

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 1 I 0 1 ,0 2 ,1 1 , Segmentattributes;tuneand moditylock(1X,2X and 3X
12,21,22, can be unlockedwith switchcombinations via specialopera'
31 or 32 tions)
Tune:
0X = tuneand modifyallowed
lX = tuningnot allowed
2X = moditylock
3X = tuneand moditylock
Targetperlod tlme unlts:
Xl = seconds
)(2 = minutes
S2 Y 0.250 R Full Targetperiod(secondsor minutesas specifiedby Q])
S3 N 0 I 0-255 Segmentpriority(0 = lowest)

SegmentControl
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 82-1
Function Code82

SPECIF, CATIO,|VS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range I),escrlptlon

S4 N 1 o - 32,767 Checkpointperiod(numberof cyclesper checkpoint)
S5 N 0 0or1 PIDresetmode:
0 = hOrffi?l
1 = external
S6 N 10.000 R Full PIDmaximumderivative gain
S7 N 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2E18 Minimumreporttimefor all exceptionreportsin thisseg-
rnent(in seconds)
S8 N 60.000 R 0.0- 9.2E18 Maximurnreporttimefor all exceptionreportsin this seg-
rnent(in seconds)
S9 N 2.000 R 0 . 0 - 9 . 2 E l 8 Significantchange parameterfor all loop (i.e., station)
exception reports in this segment (in percent of span)
sl0 N 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2El8 Alarmdeadbandfor all highand low alarmreportsin this
segment(in percentof span)
sl1 N 1.000 R -
0.0 9.2E18 Alarm deadband for all deviation alarm reports in this seg-
rnent (in percent of span)
s12 N 0.000 R Full Reserved
s13 N 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2E18 Controlway/module bus l/O periodfor this segment(in sec-
onds).This is a multipleof the extendedexecutiveblock
(functioncode90,block20, S2)
s14 Y 9.2 E18 R 0.0- 9.2El8 Segment cycle time alarm limit (in seconds)
sl5 N 0 I 0or1 Autosequencing:
0=otf
1=OD

EXPLANATION

The segment control block divides tJ:e set of function blocks

configured in a module into subsets (segments), arld specifles
the operating parameters for each segment individually. A seg-
ment starts with the block number of a segment control block
and ends at the next higher numbered segment control block
or last block. For example, if there is a segment control block
conligured in block IOOO, the block numbers would be divided
into two segments. The first segment would contain blocks 15
ttrrough 999, and the second segment would contain blocks
f OOOthrough the last configurable block. F'ixed block 15 con-
tains one permanently configured segment control block,
which also occupies blocks 16, L7, 18 and 19. Blocks 15
through 19 cannot be used for any other purpose nor ean they
be deleted. Up to seven additional segment control blocks can
be placed at any configurable block number location greater
than 30.

NOTE:ForTypeSLCcontrollers, onlyonefunctioncode82 can be

configured.That blockis fixedat blocknumber15. ForTypeCBC
controllers,onlytwo of functioncode182can be configured.

SegmentControl
82 - 2 rs FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 82

Specifications

S1 I TUNIT (segment sttributes) Deflnes the tuntng and modtffcatlon

optlon and executlon cycle tlme units for the segment. If the
tens dfgit ts a zero, then alt tunable parameters lrr the seg-
ment may be tuned or modlfled.

NOTE:Whenmultiplesegmentsare used,leaveenoughfreetime
to runall of the segments.

Onesdlglt
Xl = sEconds
)(2 = rninutes

Tensdlglt
0X = tuningallowed
lX = tuningnot allowed
2X = modifiedlock
3X = tuneand moditYlock

If the tens digit is a one, change ls not permitted to tunable

parameters tn the segment. This software lock insures that
tunable parameters in a crttical segment c€urnot be changed
while tJ:e module ts on-llne to the process.

NOTE:The lock option does not atfect adaptablefunctions.Out'

sidesegmentsadaptinto segmentsthat are locked.

If the tens digit ls a two, modificatlon of tlre block numbers

witlrin this segment is prohiblted. Thts includes the additlon
of new functionality. Ttrnlng can be performed while tn tlts
state. To access logie in this segment, tt ls necessary to inltlal-
ize the IV\mAI\d or perform the segment lock special operatlon.

If the tens drgit ls a three, tuning and modification to logic ln

this segment are prohiblted, To gain access to logic ln thts
segment, it ls necessary to Xrlilalir;e I{VRAIVI or perform the
segment lock speclal oPeratlolr.

The ume untts parameter deflnes the measurement of tlme

units of the segment executlon cycle. Specificatlon 52 deflnes
the desired length of the execution cycle.

52 - CYCTIM Sets the target segment execution cycle in time units selected
with the ones diglt of Sl. In each segment, blocks execute ln a
predefined order, selected wlth S15. A cycle consists of one
execution of the blocks plus any tdle time (cycle time remaln-
tng after the cycle has been executed). Cycle time is the length
of time from the start of one cycle to the start of the next cycle.

SegmentControl
15 FEB 1995 g2-3
l-E96-2008
FunctionCode 82

S3 - SPRI (segment prioritg)Assigns execution priorities to up to eight

active segments. An active segment ts one that ls ready to run
or is running. If two or more segments are active, the proces-
sor will raln the highest priority segment. Segment priorttles
should be selected from zero to seven wlth zero belng the low-
est prtortty segment.

s 4 - CHKPER The checkpoint function appltes to redundant module config-

urations. Checkpotnttng refers to the mechanlsm whteh
keeps the backup module state current wlth that of the pli-
mary module. Checkpointing ts the actlon of trettially eopying
the conliguration (once at start-up) and after that all signifi-
cant dynamlc data (block outputs, paftfal results of chatned
cdculations, integration counts, ete.) to the backup module
as a block of data. This is essential for the bumpless talceover
by the backup should the primary module fall.

The smooth transfer from primary to baclmp control is the

result of the execution rate (tlme) of the segment, the frequency
of the checkpointing operation, and the process dynamlcs. The
actual failover frorn the primary to the baclnrp occurs in ten
milliseconds or less. The checkpointing operation governs the
offset or data age between the primary and backup module.
The frequency of checkpoint ts a rnultiple of tlle segment exe-
cution time. The default setting for 54 is one. This specilies a
checkpoint operation each segment cycle (25O milliseconds).
With 54 set to four, the checkpoint operation occurs every
fourth segment eycle (one second).

I"arge configurations have the potenilal of the backup belng

m€rny cycles behind the primary when the transfer time
exceeds the segment execution rate. Thts ls especlally tnre
when using multiple segments.

To compute the time required to checkpolnt the dynamlc data

of a given segment in an MFC module, dtvide the surn of the
individual function blocks checkpoint utilization by I,8O0
(MFC modules) ,22,000 (IMMFPOI and IMMFPO? modules) or
l,O00,0OO (IMMFPO3 modules) bytes per second. The result-
ant time ls the minimum checkpoint time (in seconds). Thls
time must be divided by the selected executlon rate of the seg-
ment rounded upward to the nearest whole number and con-
figured as the checkpoint period (S4).

NOTE:Referto functioncode 140for checkpointutilizationinfor-

mation.

For example, suppose a given configuratlon contains the

function blocks shown in Table 82- 1.

SegmentControl
82-4 1sFEBr99s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 82

Table 82-7. ExamgtleoJTotnI

&g ment Checlqoint Utilization
Functlon Checkpolnt Total
Quantlty Utlllzatlon
Code Utlllzatfon
82 1 36 36
90 1 52 52
19 10 22 220
80 10 68 680
9 10 14 140
79 5 60 300
3il 10 2 20
37 20 2 40
39 20 2 40
30 10 14 140
Total Uflllzatlon = 1,008

With a segment cycle tlme of O.25 second, calculate the

checkpolnt period (S+):

totalutilization
f =
(bytesper sec)

t = 0.93sec (timefor one set of data)

o:2!== g-71
peiod =
checkpoint
0.25

roundup to nextinteger
54=4

NOTES:
1. Someactivitiescan resultin backuplink traffic.ln this case,
use 1600bytesper secondratherthan 1800bytesper second.

2. Programssuchas C Languageor BASICmustbe accounted

for whencalculatingS4.

S5 - XRES (PID reset mode: O = nrormo;l, 1 = ext€rnep Affects all func-

uon code 18 and f9 blocks tn the segment. When 55 equals
one, the internal memory of functlon code 18 and 19 blocks ln
the segment follow the tr:ack lnput, despite the status of tlre
track/release flag. A change ln input ls modilied by propor-
tlonal and derlvatlve actlon, artd added to the track stgnal. Thls
combined slgnal ls tl:e output. This prevents reset rvlndup,
whtctr may occur tn batch systems where controllers may be
monitoring control varlables but not performing any control
actlon durtng tlre current step. In other words, the output of
the PID block ls not used ln the curTent process step. The con-
troller recelves the signal, talces action to colrect the error, sees
no result, and takes action to correct the error again. As long
as the controller receives no results from its control action, tt
continues to try to correct the erTor. When the controller goes
into serwice on some other step of the process, it winds up so
far beyond the value of the controlled variable that it eannot

SegmentControl
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 g2-5
FunctionCode 82

control lt. The external reset option allows controller alignrnent

while it ts not being used for control functJons.

56 - PID GAIN (HL maximum deriaatiae go;in) Llmtts the derlvatlve galn
value llr all PID blocks ln the segment.

57 - MINXTM Defines the rnintmurn report ttme for all exceptton reports ln
the segment. Mlnimum exceptlon reportlng ttme prevents
loading on tlre communication hlghway. Exceptlon reports
witl not be sent on the communlcation highway at each mtnl-
mum exception report interval unless a value has changed by
more than the operator defined stgniflcant change (S9) slnce
the last exception report. The default value ls one second.

s g - MAXXTM Defines the ma:d,mum interval between updates of tnforrna-

tion sent on the cornmunlcation highway. If the value of a
point has not exceeded the signlficant change (S9) over tllis
time perlod, a report of tts value will automatlcally be sent on
the communicatlon highway. The default value ls 6O seconds.

s 9 - SIGCHG Significant change parameter for all communication highway

exception reports in thls segment except those wtth tJreir owrr
significant change parameters (i.e. function code 30),
expressed as percent of span. It deflnes the percent of span a
point value must change to cause an exceptlon report to be
generated.

SlO - HLALMDB Alarm deadband for all high/low alarm reports tn this seg-
ment, expressed as percent of span. Alarm deadbands pre-
vent excessive alarm reports when values a,re hovering
around the alarm llmit.

S11 - DVALMDB Alarm deadband for all deviation alarm reports in this seg-
ment expressed as a percent of span. Alarm deadbands pre-
vent excessive alarm reports when values are hovering
around the alarm limit. Deviation alarm deadbands are for
stations only, since only stations have deviation alarms.

sl2 Reserved.

s13 - MBUS (Controlutag IlO period for this segment: *pressed in

seconds, A multiple of the base Controlway/module bus llO
period, which the extended executive function code 90 (SZ)
defines. This specification deflnes the rate at which this seg-
ment performs module bus communications.

S14 - CYCALM Segment cycle time alarm limit, qqpressed in seconds. If seg-
ment cycle time exceeds tllis number, block N+4 will output
the cycle time overrun in units set by S1.

S15 - SEQUEN (Auto sequencing sigmak O = oIf, I = on) If this spectflca-

tion equals one, the module finds and saves the most logical
execuUon order of the function blocks and wilt execute them
in that order, despite block numbers. Auto sequencing helps

SegmentControl
82-6 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode82

prevent loopbacks. loopbacks occur when a block requlres

the output of a htgher numbered block to complete lts execll-
tion. The segment must then go through two or more execu-
tion cycles before the output of the flrst block ls correct. If the
auto sequenclng functlon ls off (zerol, blocks are executed ln
ascending numertcal order.

Outputs

N Elapsed ttme of the prevlous executlon cycle ln SI unlts. The

elapsed tlme lncludes any segment tdle tlme. If the tlme
req-ulred to execute the blocks wlthln the segment ls less thart
the requested cycle tlme, tlle remalnder ls ldle tlme spent
waitfng before starting the next cycle. Any ldle time ls avall-
able for lower prlortty segments. Thls output verifles tlrat the
cycle time speeilled bY 52 is met.

N+1 Elapsed time of the current execution cycle in Sl units. Ttrls

elapsed time does not tnclude any segment idle tlme. It ls a
measure of the actual mntime of the blocks withill the seg-
ment, plus the block nrntime of all higher priority segments.
Thts output verifies ttrat the segment ls runnin$. A contlnual
upward ramp indicates that the segment is not rrrrnln$. Thls
occurs when hfgher priority segments consume all the Proc€s-
sor 6me, or when a bastc program ls watting for oper:ator lnput'
in an inflnite loop, or aborted because of some error condltlotl.

N+2 processor uglization in percent. This output represents the

proportional amount of total module utilization time (l0O per-
cent - system free tlme at block Lzl that is used by this seg-
ment. This amount of time should be less than 1O0 percent by
a nominal percentage (i.e., ten to 15 Percent) dependent on
the configuratlon.

N+3 Checkpoint overTun count number. The number of cycles exe-

cuted over that are speclfied by 54. Thls output verifies that
the checkpoint period is met. A contlnual upward ramP lndl-
cates that the segment ts never getting the link for dynamtc
data transfer. A cyclic ramp tredicates that dynamic data
transfer is occurring, but not at the requested rate. Depend-
ing on the overTun, this may be an acceptable situatioll. If not,
then the checkpoint period of the segment or the next hlghest
priority segment must be increased until no overTun occurs.

N+4 Cycle time overrun in units specified by Sl. If eycle tlme

exceeds that set by S L4, the overrun will be output from thls
block. Thls output enables the program logic to tahe speclfle
action based on a given cycle tlme alarm limit being exceeded.

TWo items must be considered when eonfigudng multiPle seg-

ments. First, each segment should run wlthtn the requested
cycle time. Second, lnsure that the dynamic data of each
slgment is sent to the backup module within the requested

SegmentControl
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 8 2- 7
FunctionGode82

checkpoint period. Achlevtng thts generally lnvolves flne tuntng

the segment, because the cycle time and checlcpotnt period of
each segment are affected by all segments above it ln prlortty.

To determtne lf a segment ls runntng wlthln lts requested cycle

time, observe outputs N and N+1. If output N+l ls contlnually
ramptng up, ttren the segment ls not runntng. Thls occurs
when higher priority segments consume all the processor tlme,
or when a C or basic program ls ln an tnfinite loop, waltfng for
operator input, or aborted because of some erTor condtUon, If
output N is greater than the requested cycle ttme set by 52
(when more than one segment e:dsts), the segment ls consrrm-
ing more processor time than the requested period. In thls
case, cycle time must be tncreased unttl the segment output N
is equal to the time it really tahes to execute the segment.

To determine lf a segment checkpoint period ls occurring

within the requested tlme period, observe output N+3. If N+3
is continually rarnping up, then the cheekpointing (refer to
54) of dynamic data is not occurring. This happens when
higher priority segments demand all the link tlme, or if the
segment is not mrrning. If N+3 has a cyclic ramp, tlren the
dynamic data is being sent to the backup module, but not at
the requested rate. Depending on tJre amount of overrurr, thls
may be an acceptable situation. If it is not acceptable, then
the checkpoint period of this or the next highest priorfry seg-
ment must be lncreased until no overrun occrlrs.

ORDEROF EXECUTION

1. In block number order, sequence all source blocks (i.e.,

input modules and constants).

2. In block number order, sequence any block with all tnput

blocks already sequenced.

3. Go to Step 2 unUl no block can be sequenced. If unse-

quenced blocks still exist, then:

a. Put lowest unsequenced block number in list.

b. Get unsequenced input block number.

c. If input is not in the list, then put it in the list and go

to Step b; otherwise, force this block to be sequenced (loop
found), clear the list, and go to Step 2.

NOTES:
1. lf a functioncodehas multipleblockoutputs,thenthe configured
baseblocknumberis the oneusedin the listfor sequencing.

2. When a function block is sequenced,all its outputs are

sequenced.

SegmentControl
82-8 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode83 - DigitalOutputGroup

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Thts block urrltes a group of etght outputs to an IMDSMOS,

IMDSOOI, IMDSOO2, IMDSOO3 or IMDSOO4 Dlgltal Slave
Module. The CSCOI controller uses t}ts block to lnterface
wfth the I/O output board.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

BII( Type Ilescrlptlon

N B Statusof ouput grouP:
g = good
1 = bad (yO modulefailedto respond)

SPECIF'CATIO^'S

The control system must be carefully evaluated to establish

WARNING default values that will prcvent personal injury and/or prop-
erty damage In the case of module failure.
ll faut soigneusement Evaluer le systlme de commande afin
d'6tablir des valeurs par d6faut qui permettront d'6viter des
AVERTISSEMENT blessures et des dommages mat6riels en cas de d6faillance
des modules.

Spec Tune Default Type Range DescrlpUon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus UOmoduleaddressof digttalU9 m94le
S2 N 0 I 0 - 120 l/O moduledefinition= hold+ type+ group
Hold (defaultsset with functioncode128for
fMDSOOUOAOVO4. Defaultsset withhardware
switchesfor |MDSMOS):
OX)(= go to defaultvalueson lossof controlmodule
l)fi = holdUOmoduleouput on lossof control
module(notapplicable for |MDSMOS)

DigitalOutputGroup
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 83-1
FunctionCode 83

SPECIFI CATIOruSpontinued)

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range D'escrlptlon

N 0 0 - 120 l/O module definition = hold + type + group (cont)
Type:
00X = |MDSMOS
xlx - lMDsoo4
X20 = lMDSOOllOUOg
CSCO1group settlngs:
)fiO=outputs0-7
X)(1=outPUts8-15
S3 N 0 I 0orl Actionon UOmodulefailure:
0 = trip mntrol module
1 = Gootinueto operate
S4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof valuefor firct output
S5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof vafuefor secondoutput
S6 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof valuefor thirdoutput
S7 N 0 Note 1 Block address of value for fourth output
s8 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof valuefor fifth ouput
S9 N 0 Note1 Blockaddressof valuefor sixthoutput
sl0 N 0 Note1 Blockaddressof valuefor seventhoutput
sl1 N 0 Note1 Blockaddressof valuefor eighthoutput

1. Maximum values are: 1023 for |MLMM02

2046 for NMFC0[|O?,IMMFCOS,lMMPC0l, CBC01 and CSCO1
9998 lor |MMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOU0A03

EXPLANATION

Specifications

51 - SLVADR Specification Sl is ttre expander bus l/O module address of the

CSCOI l/O output board or of ttre clistal I/O module (r.eroto
63).

S2 . SLVDEF UO module deflnition = hold + t1rye+ group

xxx
t- ones digit
Group= Defineswhichgroupof outputfromthe l/O moduleis being
handledby thisblock.IMDSOC1rcA03 modulescan onlyhavea
groupvalueof zerobecausetheyhaveonlyone groupof outputs.
IMDSM0S and|MDSOO4 modulescan accommodate 16 outputs.
XXO= outputszeroto seven
XXl = outputseightto 15
Tensdigit
Type= Typeof UOmodule
00X= |MDSMOS
XlX = IMDSOO4
X20= lMDSO0l/02/03
Hundredsdigit
Hold = Definesactiontakenby blockon lossof controlmodule.
Defaultssetwithfunctioncode 128for |MDSOOI rcAOgO4modules.
Defaultssetwithhardwareswitchesfor |MDSMOS modules.
OXX= Go to defaultvalueson lossof controlmodule
1XX= Holdl/O moduleoutputson lossof controlmodule

DigitalOutputGroup
83-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 83

NOTES:
1. The hundredsdigit must be the same for both outputgroups
on an |MDSO04module.

2. SpecificationS2 is set to zero or one only when using a

CSCO1controller.

s 3 - TRIP Spectflcatlon Sg deflnes the actlon of the control module ln

the event of an I/O module fathrre.

Q = trtp eontrol module

t = contJnue operation

s4 D sll Spectllcatlons 54 througb Sl f are the block addresses of t}te

values of the elght l/O module outputs. Spectftcatlon 54 is
the block address of the value for tlle first output, S5 is the
block address of the value for tl:e second output, etc.

DigitalOutputGroup
l-Eg6-200B 1s FEB1995 83-3
ffi

o
 FunctionCode84 - DigitalInputGroup

GENERALDESCRIPT,ON

The dtgttal lreput group functlon code reads a group of etght

lnputs from an IMDSIO? or IMDSMOS Dlgltal Slave Module.
The CSC01 controller uses thts functlon code to lnterface
wlth the l/O lnput board.

To lnsure that the slgnals successfully transfer across the Con-

trolway/module bus, the slgnd generates a polnt qualfty flag.
To test the quallty of the slgnd, Irclude a function code 31
(test qualtty) bloclc tn the conflguratJon. The quallty of the slg-
nal cannot be determlned by any other t5pe of block. However,
the output of the test quality block can be used as an input to
other digital proeesslng blocks to provtde slgnal quality infor-
mation. Refer to Appendlx D for a definttlon of point quality.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Output1 with qualitY
N+1 B Output2 with qualitY
N+2 B Output3 withqualitY
N+3 B Output4 with qualitY
N+4 B Output5 with qualitY
N+5 B Output6 with quality
N+6 B Output7 with qualitY
N+7 B Output 8 with qualitY

DigitalInputGroup
l-E96-200B ls FEB1995 84-1
FunctionCode 84

sPECtFtCArrOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

s1 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus UOmoduleaddress
S2 N 0 I 0or1 Inputgroup:
0 = inputs1 - 8, groupA
1 = inputs9 - 16,groupB
S3 N 0 I 0or1 Actionon l/O modulefailure:
0 = trip controlmodule
1 = cortinueto operate

EXPLANATION

Specifications

51 - SLVADR SpeciflcaHon Sf is the expander bus l/O module address of

the CSCO1 UO input board, or the IMDSIOZ or IMDSMOSI/O
module associated wlth thls bloek (zero through 63).

s2 - GROUP Specification 52 is the input group. Digltal I/O modules can

handle two groups of eight inputs. Input group is tdentified by
the following:

Q = inputs I through 8
I = inputs 9 through 16

s 3 - TRIP Specification 53 defines the action of the control module in

the event of l/O rnodule failure.

Q = trip control module

I = cootinue operation

DigitalInputGroup
84-2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode85 - Up/DownCounter

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The up/down counter functlon code ls a dlgltat counter wtttt

separate tnputs for lncrementing and decrementing the
counter. The count updates on a logic O to logtc I (positive)
transition on elther input.

External loglc can be used to hold or reset the count. The

counter can be set to an tntilal value upon start-up or follow-
ing reset.

Thts functton has high and low alarm features. Each drives a
separate output when the input exceeds the alarm value.

UTILIZATION

IMQRCOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Contentsof counter
N+1 B Highalarmstatus:
0 = oo alann
1 = counthas reachedhighlimit
N+2 B Lowalarmstatus:
0 = Ilo alarm
1 = counthas reachedlow limit

SPECIF'CAT'O.A'S

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of up trigger
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof downtrigger
S3 N 0 l Note 1 Btockaddressof resetflag:
0 = tUll
1 = I9S€t

S4 N 1 Note 1 Block address of hold flag:

e = hold
1 = rel€ase

Up/DownCounter
l-Eg6-200B ls FEB1995 85-1
FunctionCode 85

SP ECIFICATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon

S5 Y 0.000 R Full Valueof counton reset
S6 Y 9.2 E18 R Full High alarn value
S7 Y - 9 . 2E 1 8 R FullLow alarm value
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254 tor COMmodulesand CLCOUOA0SIo4-
1023for SLC0ll21 and|MLMMO2
2046for NMFCO1|O?,!MMFCO5, CBC01,CSC01andlMMPC0l
9998for |MMFC0S/04 and IMMFPOUOAO3

EXPLANATION

The eontents of the counter output N is dependent on the

reset input, hold input, and the up and down trlggers. The
reset input overrides all other inputs, Three $pes of opera-
tions are possible: normal, reset and alarm.

Specitications

51 - UPTRIG Specification S I is the block address of up trigfgier. A zero to

one transition of <S1> increments the counter by one.

s 2 - DNTRIG Specification 52 is the block address of down trigger. A zero to

one transition of <S2> decrements the counter by one.

s 3 - RESET Specification S3 is the block address of reset input.

Q= nn
I = f€S€t

s 4 - HOLD Specification 54 is the block address of the hold input.

Q = hold
I = release

When <S4> equals zero, the counter remains fixed at the cllr-
'When
rent value despite <SI> and <S2>. <S4> equals one, the
counter releases to respond to <Sl> or <S2>.

s 5 - COUNT Specification 55 is the value of count on reset. When <S3>

equals one, the count goes to the number specifled by S5.

s 6 - HIALRM Specification SO is the high alarm value. If the value of N

equals or exceeds 56, output N+ I equals one, srgniffing a
high alarm state.

s 7 - LOALRM Specification SZ is the low alarm value. If the value of N

equals or falls below 57, output N+2 equals one, signiffing a
low alarrn state.

Up/DownCounter
85-2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode85

If <S3) = 1, then Y = 55, desplte <S1>, <S2> and <S4>

If <Sg) = O, then Y ts dependent on <S1>, <S2> and <S4>

where:

<S3> = Value of reset lnputi O = rull, I = r€s€t.

55 = Value of count on reset.
Y = Current value of count.

NORMAL

If prevtous <Sl2 = O and current <S1> = 1, then

f = prevlous Y+l

If previous <Sl) = culTent <Sl>, then f = prevlous Y

If previous <S2> = Q and current <S/7 = 1, then

Y=prevlousY- 1

If previous <S2> = culT€nt <S2>, then f = prevlous Y

If <S4> = O, then f = previous Y, despite <S1> and <S2>.

where:

<Sl) = Value of up lnput.

<S2> = Value of down lnput.
<S4> = Value of hold lnput O = hold, 1 = release.
Y = Cur:rent value of count.

ALARM

If Y > 56, then

N+l =l
else N+l = O

IfY<57,then

N+2=1
else N+2 = O

where:

Y = Current value of count.

N+l - High alarm indlcator:

Q = normal
I = htgh darm

Up/DownCounter
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 85-3
FunctionCode 85

N+2 = Low alarm indicator:

Q = normal
I = low alarm
I
APPLICATIONS

Up/Aown counters count events and enable alarms or trlgger

events when alarm values are reached.

Figure 85- I shows an example of ttre counter used to alert ttre

operator of servlce requlrements. The motor must be removed
from service and rebutlt after performlng fOO starts. Thls
configuratlon lncrements the counter each tlme tJre motor
starts. Ttle hlgh alarm llmlt ls f OO (starts). When N equals the
hlgh alarm llmlt (SG), output N+l equals one. Output N+l
goes to a dlgital output over the loop functton block caustng
an exception report to be sent to the communlcation hlghway.
This triggers a service required dlsplay on the console.

MOTOR
START
TO OPERATOR
CONSOLE

55 = 0.OOO
56 = 100.000
S7 = -9.2E+18
TP.15l698

Figure 85-7. Up/Oown Counter Maintenarrce Requirement Aleft

Up/DownCounter
85-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode86 - ElapsedTimer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The elapsed ttmer functlon code measures elapsed tlme. Thls

ls espectdly useful for batch control appltcatlons, artd may be
used for matrrtenance purposes such as operattng tlme mea-
surements. Tlme unfts are conflgurable to seconds, mlnutes,
hours or days wlth S3. The tlmer perfonns elther up or down
Umlng functlons, and can be held to a partlcular value or
reset to a speclfled lnlflal value by external loglc.

UTILIZATION

NMFCOl

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Currentvalueof timer(alwayspositive)
N+1 B Timealarmindicator:
0 = alarmtimenot reached
1 = alarmtime reached

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 1 I Note 1 Block address of reset flag:
0=ilO
1 = r€Set
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of hold flag:
0 = hold
| = rglease
S3 N 0 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Unitrsof time:
0 = S€Conds
| = minutes
2 = hours
3 = days
S4 Y 0.000 R 0.0- 9.2El8 Valueof timealarm
S5 Y 0.000 R 0.0- 9.2E18 Valueof timeron reset

ElapsedTimer
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 86-1
FunctionCode 86

SPECI FICATI ONS @ontinued)

I
Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon
s6 N 0 I 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 , Up/downindicator:
100or 101 )fiO = up
)(Xl = down
Tune/adaptresettimen
O)fi = rss€ttimerupontune or adaptoperation
1)fi = do not resettimer upontune or adaptoperation
NOTE: Tensdigitis not importrant
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:254for COMmodulesandCLCOITUA9|0E-
1023for SLC01/21
|MMFC0S,
20.46for NMFC01/02, |MMPCOI,
CBC01andCSC01
and lMMFPOll0UOg
9998for |MMFC0S/O4

EXPLANATION

The elapsed timer function code provides a tlmer wtth up and

down timing functions, automatic reset and hold functlons
based on external logic functions, and alarm lndlcation if the
count reaches a preset alarm value. Ttle reset functlon over-
rldes all other lnputs.

Specifications

51 - RESET Specification Sl is the block address of the reset input. When

<Sl> equals one, the timer resets to the value specified by S5.

Q=run
I = r€s€t

52 - HOLD Specification 52 is the block address of the hold ileput. When

<S2> equals zero, output N remains at the current value,
despite the value of t]:e up/down fiirdtcator (SG).

Q = hold
I = release

s 3 - TIME Specification 53 sets the units of time.

Q= seconds
I = minutes
2= hours
g= days

s 4 - TALRM Specification 54 is the value of the time alarm. If this value is

reached, output N+ I equds orr.e. Specification 53 sets the
time alarm time units.

s 5 - TIMRES Specification 55 sets the value of the timer on a reset. If <S1>

goes to one, the tlmer goes to the vdue selected wlth 55. This
value is in the units of tirne selected with 53.

ElapsedTimer
86-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 86

56 - IND Spectflcatlon SG ls the up/dou/n lndlcator. The ones dl$ft of

thls speclflcatlon deflnes ttre dtrectton of Umtng. The hun-
dreds dlgit resets the timer on a tune or adapt operattoll.
x x x
II
Ones dlglt - tlmlng dlrectlon
0=Up
1 = down

Tens dlglt - not used

Hundredsdlglt - trBS€t
tlmer
0 = resettime on tuneor adapt
I = DoreSet

Outputs

N Output N is the current value of the tlmer. The timer output is

based on €rn internal ten millisecond resolution timer. How-
ever, the actual output updates once every segment cycle.
Output N is calculated in reset or normal operatloll.

Rese;t:
If <Sf ; = 1, then N = 55 despite <S2>

where:

frf = Curent value of timer.

Normal Operotiont
Hold count:
If <S1> = 0 and <S2> = O, then [r[ = previous N

Increase count:
If <S1> = 0, (S2> = 1, and SG = )O(0, then
\f = previous N + elapsed time since last run

Decrease count:
If <SI> = O, <S2> = I, and 56 = )O(1, then
N = previous N - elapsed time slnce last run

TunelAdapt:
If SO = 0)O( and 55 is tuned, tlten
It[ = 55, regardless of <S2>

If 56 = DO( and S5 is tuned, then

fr[ = previous N + elapsed ttme since last run

where:

fr[ = Curent value of timer.

or
fr| = 55 when <S!1 = l.

ElapsedTimer
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 g6-3
FunctionCode 86

N+1 Output N+l is the darm lndlcator. ThIs output lndlcates

when the tlmer value reaches or exceeds the alarm value
speclfled in 54.

Alqrm
If SG = )O(O and Y > 54, then N+l = I

If SO = )O(O and Y < S4, then N+l = Q

If SO = )O(1, and Y < 54, then N+l = I

If SO = )O(1, artd Y > 54, then N+l = O

where:

Y = Current value of tlrter.

APPLICATIOruS

Figure 86- I shows €rn example of the elapsed timer betng

used to calculate the average power consumption over a
demand period of f 5 minutes. The elapsed tJmer counts up
from zero minutes to 15 minutes, and resets ltself to zero
mtrutes when the timer reaches 15. Electrtclty use ls [rte-
grated and divided by elapsed ttme to determine average
power consumptlon per untt of tlme.

I 93 = I (minutcst
I i
, S4r15 |
r S5=0 I
I s6=o i
l--- ---r

Figure 86-7. ElapsedTtmer Determin@ Auerage

Power Cons umption Ouer TIme

ElapsedTimer
86-4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode87 - DLSlnterface

L DESCRIPTION

The digital logic station (DLS) frterface functlon code speclfies

the IMDSMOS Dtgltat Slave Module as an [i'rterface device
between the digital logic statton and a module. Each IMDSMOS
module can lnterface with up to etght dlgltal loglc statlolts.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descriptlon

N B l/O module status flag:
Q = good
1 = bad (l/O module failed to respond)

SPECIF'CATIOfVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-63 Expanderbus l/O moduleaddressof |MDSMOS

DLS lnterface
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB 1995 87-1
ffi

t
 FunctionGode88 - DigitalLogic Station

L DESCRIPTION

The dlgltal loglc statlon (DLS) functlon code conflgures a dfgl-

tal loglc statlon for use wlttr a module. Each DLS statlon pro-
vtdes one group of elght lnputs and two gfoups of elght
outputs to a module.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Valueof pushbutton1: 0 = oPoll, 1 = closed
N+1 B Valueof pushbutton2: 0 = oF€Il, 1 = closed
N+2 B Valueof pushbutton3: 0 = opeo, 1 = closed
N+3 B Valueof pushbutton4: 0 = oP€h, 1 = closed
N+4 B Valueof pushbutton5: 0 = oP€r, 1 = closed
N+5 B Valueof pushbutton6: 1 = closed
0 = oPBo,
N+6 B Valueof pushbutton7: 1 = closed
0 = oP€h,
N+7 B Valueof pushbutton1: 0 oP€r, 1 = closed
=
N+8 B Value of pushbutton 2: 0 = oPell, 1 = closed
NOTE: The pushbutton outputs are pulsed or maintained depending on the digital logic station
address specmeOwith S1. An address of 0 to 7 provides a pulsed output. An address of 100 lo
107 provides a maintained output.

SPECIFICATIO'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 107 Logicstationaddress:
0_T=pUlSO
100- 1OT= maintained
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of logic strationinterface
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddress,output0, grouPA
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddress,output1, groupA
S5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,output2, groupA
S6 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddress,output3, groupA

DigitalLogicStation
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 88-1
FunctionCode 88

SPECIFI CATIO,wS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s7 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,ouput 4, groupA
S8 N 0 Note1 Blockaddress,ouput 5, groupA
S9 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,output6, groupA
sl0 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,output7, groupA
s11 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,ouput 0, groupB
sl2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,ouput 1, groupB
sl3 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,output2, groupB
sl4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,output3, groupB
sls N 0 Note1 Blockaddress,ouput 4, groupB
sl6 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,ouput 5, groupB
s17 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,ouput 6, groupB
sl8 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddress,ouput 7, groupB
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare: 1023for |MLMMO2
2046for NMFC01|02,!MMFC05and|MMPCOI
9998for IMMFCOS/O4
and IMMFPclioAO3

EXPLANATION

The internal togic of the digital logic station provides elther a

one cycle pulse or a maintained input (as long as the push-
button is depressed) for all eight pushbuttons. Specificafion
Sf selects the input tlpe for the entlre group.

Each pushbutton has two LEDs associated with it, but inde-
pendent from it. Thus, tlle combination can be used for either
related events or independently.

If parallel control is desired from a console, the dtgltat logtc

station can be configured in combination witJ: a remote con-
trol memory (function code 621 or device driver (functlon code
123) block. Control is gained from the station or the console.

Specifications

S1 - LSADR Specification Sl is the digttal logic statlon address. Each DI,S

station has an address which ls set with a three posltion
dipswitch on the station. Valid hardware addresses are zero
through seven. With this specificatlon, speciry the address as
zero to seven or lOO to lO7, depending on the t5pe of push-
button outputs desired.

If the station is addressed from zero to seven (trre address),

the pushbutton outputs are a pulse outpu,t. When a pushbut-
ton is pressed, the associated output goes to a one for one
cycle, then returns to zero.

DigitalLogic Station
88-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 88

If the station is addressed from lOO to LOT (tnre address plus

lOO), the pushbutton outputs are malntatned. When a push-
button is pressed, the assoclated output goes to a logtc I and
remalns there unttl the pushbutton ls released.

s2 - LSI Speciflcatlon 52 ls the block address of loglc statlon lnterface.

This spectflcatlon ldenttfles the functlon code 87 block pro-
vtdlng the lnterface between the dt$ftal logtc station and its
IMDSMOS module.

S3 to S18 - Speclfications S3 through Sl8 are the block addresses of the

A0 to 87 output values for output groups A and B. Ttrese values are
displayed on tfre LEDs on the front plate of the dlgital logic
statton. A loglc O output turns the LED off, and a loglc I out-
put ltghts the LED.

Outputs
N through N+7 Outputs N through N+7 €rre the values of pushbutton lnputs
one through etght.

Q = open
I = closed

N+8 Output N+8 is the digital logic station status flag.

Q = good
I =bad

APPL'CATIONS

Figure 88- I shows a t5rylcd conflguratlon of functton eode 88

used tn conJunctlon wttll functlon codes 87 artd 35.

Digital Logic Station

l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 88-3
FunctionCode 88

TI'ODCNLGIT

32rO,SllrO.O

52rO.S3 rO.O

PAFAq,'TL MTROT/L

PAFAMTRR.|TI

OPEN@TilAl\D

S2-O. $trO.0

TOOn€RLG|C

Flgure 88- 1. 1lpical DgiIol Lqic Station @4figtrafion

Digital Logic Station

88-4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 89 r Last Block

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The last block functlon code marks the end of the functlon
block conflguratton space. Ttre last block functlon code is a
ftxed block located ln the htghest avallable block number of
the module. Ttre last block carlnot be deleted. Addltlonal last
blocks c:urnot be added to the conflguratlon.

In IMI 90 systems, the last block functlon code has one

output. The output tndlcates the module network t54le. In
Network 9Oo systems, the output ts reserved for future use.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BII( TVPE Deserlptlon

Note 1 R Networktype:
0.0 = PlantLoop
1.0 = lNFl-NET/Superloop
3.0 = lNFl-NET/Supedoop
withtime-stamping
NOTE:
1. Blocknurnbersare: 1023lor SLC01/21
|MMPCOI,CBC01and CSCO1
for NMFC01(O?,|MMFCO5,
20/17
9998for IMMFCOUO4and lMMFP0l/0203

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Bange Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I -32,768 - Reseruedinteger
32,767

@ Nenvork 9O ls a reglstered trademark of Elsag Balley koccss Automa0on.

LastBlock
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 89-1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode90 - ExtendedExecutive

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The extended executlve block function code deflnes varlables

that affect module operatlons. Functlon code 90 sets system
operatlon characterlstlcs for modules. Use functlon code 90
wlth functlon codes 81 (executtve) and 82 (segment control) to
deftne module operatlons. F\rnctlon code 90 resldes ln flxed
block 20 and occuples ten functlon blocks (2O through 29).

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

20 R Timeof day,hours
21 R Timeof day,minutes
22 R Timeof day,seconds
23 B flag:
Time/date/synchronization
0 = time/dateinvalid
1 = time/datevalid
24 R Calendar,year (0 - 99)
25 R Cafendar,rnonth(1 - 12)
26 R Calendar,day (1 - 31)
27 R Cafendar,day of week (1 - 7, Sunday = 1)
28 R Reserved
29 R Reserved

SPECtFICATIO|VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof configuremodelockoutflag:
0 = coofiguremodeallowed
1 = configuremodelockedout
S2 N 0.250 R 0 - 9.2E18 Basemodulebus l/O periodfor module(in seconds)

ExtendedExecutive
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 90-1
FunctionCode 90

SP ECIFl CATI ONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 yz 0 I 000- 111 Redundancy configuration flag and DCS/SAC interface link:
)fiO = no redundancy
XXl = redUodancy
XOX = module goes to enor mode on l/O module trip
XlX = ffiodule halts on UO module trip
0)(X = 5 kbaud DCS/SAC link
lX)( = 40 kbaud SAC link
O)Ofi = RS€32 mode3
1)0fi = RS485 rnode3
S4 Y 15.000 R 0 - 9.2E18 Modulestiart-uptime (in seconds)
S5 N 0.250 R 0 - 9.2E18 Logicstationpoll rate (in seconds)
S6 N 0 0or1 SOEmonitortimesynchronization flag:
0 = inhibitsyncof SOE monitorto timeof day
1 = syncof SOEmonitorto time of day
NOTES:
1. Maximumvaluesano:1023for SLC0lr2l
204,6tor NMF@lO4 |MMFCOS, |MMPCOI, CB@l ard CSCOI
9998for IMMFCO3O4 and 1MMFP01/f2O3
2. TheDCSand SAClinkcommunication ralewi[ mt ctrangeas a resultot a tuneuntiltho MFPmodulels restaded(1.e.,hardwarercee!
tailo\rer,modochangeor on-lhe configuralion).
3. Appliesontyto lMMFPoln2ng revisionF.0fifi|ware or lator.

EXPLANATION

Specitications

sl - LOCK Specifieation S I is the block address of configure mode lock-

out flag.

Q = conligure mode allowed

I = conligurailon locked

The default value of SI is block address zero, whtch provldes

unlocked configuration. A logtc I locks the conflguratlon.
Unless S I is a block address of a tunable block, once locked,
a configuration cannot be unlocked. To change a locked con-
figuration, the module must be lniflallzed and reconflgured.

NOTE:An engineering Iockactionmay be implemented by usinga

tunableblockas the inputto 51. This way the configuration
may be
unlockedby authorizedpersonsthroughtuningthe appropriate blmk.

S2 - IOTIME Speeification 52 is the base module bus I/O pertod ln seconds.

This specilication defines the rate at which the module executes
the module bus task. Specificatlon Sfg h ttre segment control
block (function code 82) specifies the I/O period for each seg-
ment. If 52 equals two seeonds, and S13 (for a particular seg-
ment) equals four seconds, the l/O for that segment is read
every four seconds. SpecificaEon Sfg for each segment eontrol
block should be a multiple of 52, because 52 defines tl:e fastest
module bus update time. For example, if 52 equals two and S13
equals 0.5, module bus l/O will only be read every two seconds.

ExtendedExecutive
90-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 90

53 - BACKUP Specification Sg provides a redundant module conftguratlon

flag, sets the module mode on an I/O module trlp, and sets
the DCS lnterface llnk data rate.
x xx x
Redundancyconflguratlonflag
XXO= r1oredundantmodule
)fil = ffioduleis part of redundantarangement

Modulemode on UOmoduletrlP
XOX= effor modeon l/O moduletrip
XlX = halt moduleon llO moduletrip

DCSInterfacellnk
O)fi = 5 kbaudDCS/SAClink
lXX = 40 kbaudSAClink (|MMFP01/0AB')

Serlal port mode

0)OO(= RS-232mode
1)Ofi = RS-485rnode

NOTE: Neitherthe DCS communicationrate nor the serial port

modewill changeas a resultof a tune untilthe MFP moduleis
restarted(i.€., hardwarereset, failover,mode changeor on-line
configuration).

S4 - START Speciflcation 54 is the module start-up tlme in seconds. Upon

start-up of the module, fixed block ten in the module has an
output of logic I for the length of time specified here. Thls
shows that the start-up has been initiated and is Proceedln$
correctly.

55 - LPOLL Speciflcation 55 deflnes the rate (ln seconds) at whlch loglc

stattons €rre polled for lnformatlon.

S6 - SYNC Specification 56 sets the sequence of events monltor tlme

synch r onlzatlon lndlcato r.

Q = hhibit synchronDation of sequence of events monltor

to time of day

I = sJfnchronize sequence of events monitor to time of day

If 56 equals one, then the module tlme output ln bloeks 20,

2L arrd 22 equals the system time sent to the module from the
network processlng module or bus interface rnodule.

If SO equals zero, the tlme shown in blocks 20, 2I and 22 ls

relative to the time the device was powered uP, wtth power uP
time being OO:OO:OO.

ExtendedExecutive
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 90-3
FunctionCode 90

Outputs

20 Output block 20 displays the hour of the tlme of day.

I
21 Output 2I displays t}e minutes of the time of day.

22 Output 22 displays ttre seconds of the time of day.

23 Output 23 displays the tlme and date s5rnchronlzatlon flag.

The synchronlzatlon flag shows lf the module ls ttme s5mchro-
ntzed \rith the INFI 90 or Network 90 system. The module
receives system time from tJre network processing module or
bus interface module on start-llp. Output 23 is a logic O until
the module recelves the cturent tlme.

Q = time/date invalid
1 = time/ date valid

24 Output 24 displays the calendar year (zero to 99).

25 Output 25 displays the calendar month (one to l2).

26 Output 26 displays ttre calendar day [one to 31).

27 Output 27 displays the day of the week:

I = Sunday
2 = Monday
$ = T\.resday
4 = Wednesday
g = Thursday
g = Friday
7 = Saturday

28 and 29 Outputs 28 and 29 are reseryed.

EXAMPLE

Function Block Configuration Requiredfor Time Synchronizatian

To collect continuous data correctly im a batch configuration,

all elements of the system (Batch Historian, PC View, operator
interface statiofi, rnulti-function processor and IMI-NET) must
share a system-wide time system. Ttre control system must
have a time master, such as an IIOIS20 or IIOIS4O console, to
generate a system-wide time base. The PC Vtew synchronlzes
with the control system through str tags conflgured wfthh the
multi-function processor. Those six tags (within the module)
are analog exception report function block (function code 30)
outputs from Eutextended executlve block that are also deflned
within the PC View tag data base. Figure 9O-1 shows an exarn-
ple of the function block conflguration requtred for tlme syn-
chroniz.atton. Ttle tag names are shown ln Table 9O-1.

ExtendedExecutive
90-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Function Gode90

H HOURS(o - 23)
EXEXEC
MFC/P M

s
(0 - 59)
MTNUTES
w

i/P

sEcoNDS(0 - 59) THE S|x AO/I. BLOCKS

D TO THE LEFTGENERATE
SX E)(CEPTIONREPORTS
DW THATCONNECTTO THE
PCV DATABASE.THE PCV
N/A
WILLUSETHESETAGSTO
TIME€YNCH WITH THE
N'A
YEAR (0 - 99) MODULE.

MONTH (1 - 12)

DAY(1 - 31)

Flgwe 90- 1. Corlfigurofion Require-dJorft Vtew TIne Sgtrclwoniz-altort

Table 9O-1. Auailnble PcVteutTag Names

Tag Name Description
NgOHOUR Cunentsystemhours(outPut20)
NgOMIN Cunentsystemminutes(outPut21)
N90SEC Cunentsystemseconds(output22)
N9OYR Cunentsystemyear (outPut24)
N90MN Cunentsystemmonth(outPut25)
N90DAY Cunentsystemday (outPut26)
NOTE:Onlyone module,in any Processontrol uniton the communi-
tags
cationhighway,needsto be configuredwith time synchronization
br Batch Historian. The address of the function blocks and their fil€oo-
ing must matdt the conect tag name.

ExtendedExecutive
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 90-5
ffi

I
 FunctionGode91 - BASICGonfiguration(MFC/MFP)

GENERAT DESCRIPTIO'V

The BASIC conflgUratlon functlon code deflnes the amount of

MIRAIvI and RAIVImemory allocated to the BASIC program. It
also deflnes BASIC operatlng modes. Thls functlon code pro-
vides one output that the BASIC program sets using the
BOIJT command. Ttre MFC BASIC Programmtng Language
Reference manual provtdes complete tnstmctlons for pro-
grammfng the module wltlr BASIC. Only one BASIC configu-
ratlon functlon block can be conflgured per module.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Description

N R The BOUTcommandin the BASICprogramsetsoutputN

SPECtFtCAnOwS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 1 0or1 Actionon BASICenor:
0 = trip module
1 = writeeror datato terminaland suspendBASIC
S2 N 1 I 0orl Load/runflag:
0 = auto start-upon restart
1 = manualstart-upon restart
S3 N 1 I Note 1 BASIC string space allocation in 1-kbyte increments (NVRAM)
S4 N 1 I Note2 BASIC datraspaoe allocation in l-kbyte increments (RAM)
s5 N 1 I Note 1 BASICprogramspaoeallocationin l-kbyte increments(NVRAM)
NOTES:
valuesare:53 + 55 s 19for NMFCO2
1. Maximum
53 + SSs 63 for |MMFC03
53 + S5 s 61 for |MMFPOI
53 + 55 s 63 for IMMFPOAO3
valuesare:53 + 54 + 55 577 for NMFCO?
2. Maximum
S3 + S4 + SS< 324 tor |MMFCO3
53 + 54 + 55 s 154for lMMFP0l
53 + 54 + SSs 334for |MMFPO2
53 + 54 + 55 s 1530for |MMFPO3

(MFC/MFP)
BASICConfiguration
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 91 - 1
FunctionCode 91

EXPLANATION

Specifications

51 I ERROR Spectflcatlon Sl sets the actlon taken on a BASIC error.

Q = trlp module
I = wrlte error to data termlnal and suspend BASIC

The error writes to the prtnter or dlsplay screen deslgnated ln

the BASIC program as the data termtnal, and ttre BASIC pro-
gram stops.

s 2 - LRFLAG Specificatlon 52 is the load/rr-n flag. It deflnes the actlon to be

taken by the BA.SIC tnterpreter when an lnvoke BA.SIC func-
tlon block ls executed. lf zero, then the BASIC program con-
tained in EEROM automattcally loads into RAI\{ and executes.
If one, then the BASIC interpreter prompts for further actlon.

Q = auto start-up of the lnvoke BASIC block

I = rns,rrual start-up at the lnvoke BA,SIC block

s 3 - STRSPC Specification Sg is the BASIC string space allocatton deflned

in one kilobyte increments. BASIC string space is allocated in
RAIVI memory. Estirnate the amount of required strtng space
from the program's declarattons seetlon.

54 I DATSPC Speclflcatlon 54 sets the BASIC data space allocatton defined

in one kilobyte increments. Data conslsts of independent
variables and constants. BASIC data space ls dlocated ln
RAI\{ memory. Estimate the amount of requtred data space
from the program's declaratlons sectlon.

s 5 - PGMSPC Specification 55 sets the BASIC program space allocatlon

defined in one kilobyte increments. The program conslsts of a
group of functions that perform specified actions and return
values depending on the value of one or more lndependent
variables. BASIC progra,m spaee ts allocated ln both I{\/RAI\4
and RAIVImemory. The €rmount of BASIC program space ts the
BASIC program file size.

Outputs

N Output N can be €Lny value from the BASIC program. Ttle

BASIC program specifies output N using the BOTJTcommand.

APPLICATION

Figure 91-f shows a sample setup of a BASIC program fn a

module.

BASICConfiguration
(MFC/MFP)
91 - 2 1sFEBt99s l-E96-2008
 Function Code 91

B|[email protected]

po)
AUB
AUL 540
DI/B 541
DI/L
AT.IALOG a
DIGITALLOGIC 3f3

iTilLLISECONDCLOCK

Flgure 9 7' 7. TUpicaI BASIC Crinftgluratton

Step 1 Place function code 9f (configure BASIC) in block 30. Place-

ment of ttris function code is user selected.

SI=l
Write any errors to the data termlnal and suspend BASIC.

SZ = I
BASIC lnterpreter prompts for actlon before nrrrnln$ the pro-
gram. BASIC provldes a ready reply wtren addressed by a
dumb termtnal or persond computer. Spectflcatlon 52 equals
one while it is befng programmed. After programming is com-
plete, change 52 to zero. When 52 equals zero, the program
runs automatically on module Pourer up.

S3 = I = lk of strrng sPace allotted.

54 = $ = 5k of data space dlotted.
55 = lO = lok of program space allotted.

Step 2 Place function code 92 (tnvoke BA,SIC) h block 5OO. Place-

ment of thls function code is user selected.

SI=7
This block invokes BASIC when executed. Control returns to
tl:e next numbered block when BASIC e:dts.

Step 3 Place the module in execute mode. The ready reply shovrs on
the display. Enter the BASIC statements. Remember to save
the BASIC program before changing 52 in block 3O to zero.

(MFC/MFP)
BASICConfiguration
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEBr99s 91 - 3
ffi

I
 Function Code 92- Invoke BASIC

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The trrvoke BASIC functlon code causes tl'e module BASIC

lnterpreter to execute. If automatlc load/run has been
selected ln the conftgure BA,SIC functlon block, the lnterpreter
runs the program. Otherurlse tt prompts for further actlon.
Thts block must be tn tlre same segment as the conflgure
BASIC block. A functlon block segment can contaln multiple
trrvoke BASIC blocks, each of whjch wlll lnttlate executton of
the BASIC progrzrm. Thls functlon code provldes one output
that ls selected ln the BA.SIC program wfth the BOLJT eom-
mand. Figure 92-l shows a sample BASIC conflguratlon. Ref-
erence the MFC BA,SIC Programming Language Reference
manual for lnstmctlons on Programmlng wlth BA.SIC.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R The BOUTcommandin the BASICprogramsetsouput N

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0.000 R Full Initiatesexecutionof the BASICprogramby providinga
valuefor SYSVAR

EXPLANATION

This block tnittates executlon of tlle BA"SIC program by

assigning a value to the module's BASIC variable SYSVAR.
SYSVAR ls then elther €rn lnput to the BASIC program ttself or
selects the entry polnt of a BASIC program as shown by
examples one and two. Ftgure 92-L shows a t1ryicd rnodule
BASIC configuratlon.

lnvokeBASIC
l-E96-2008 rs FEB199s 92 - 1
FunctionCode 92

BLOC|(S50r-2046

AIlB
AI/L
DI/B
DI/L
ANALOG LOG
DIGITAL LOGIC

MILUSECONDCLOCK

Flgure 92- 7. lApicaIBASIC Configuration

Example 1

When SYSVAR is an input:

Assume SI equds 2 and the flrst function containing

SYSVT\R is:

lOO.t=SYSVAR* 10,

the program begins executing at line f O0 and A equals 20.

If there are more than one lrrvoke BASIC blocks conflgured,

the value of Sl can remain the same or be dtfferent ln each
oll,e.

For example, if the second invoke BASIC btock has Sl equals

three, then A equals 30 for that particular lteration of the pro-
gram, etc.

Example 2

SYSVAR selects the entry point of a BASIC program:

10 ON SYSVAR GOTO 1O0...

Every time the program recelves a value for SYSVAR, it goes to

line lOO and begins execution. When using SYSVAR in this
manner (as a trigger), its value is unimportant.

InvokeBASIC
92-2 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode93 - BASICRealOutput

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The BASIC real output functlon code provtdes a means of

transdttfng real data values from the BASIC, Batch 90 and
C ["anguage programs to other funcflon blocks. Ttrere are no
speclflcatlons for t}ts block. The BOUT courmand tn the pro-
gram deflnes the four outputs. Ftgure 93-f shows a sample
BASIC conflguratlon. Refer to the .ilnO BA,SIC Hogramming
Langaorge Reference Mo;nuo;l for lnstnrctlons on program-
mingwith BASIC.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BII( Type Descrlptlon

N R ProgramcommandBOUTsetsthe ouput value
N+1 R
N+2 R
N+3 R

SPEC/,FICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 Full Not used

BASICRealOutput
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 93-1
FunctionCode93

APPLICATION

Syntax:

BOUT<blocknumber>,<value>BOUT40, 4.75

where:

<block number> = Vand hteger block number conflg-

ured tn the target module.
<value> = Arlthmetlc expresslon stored as the
block output.

BLoc|(S 31-499

AIlB
AI/L
DI/B
DI/L
ANALOG
DIGITAL LOGIC

MILLISECOND CL@K

Figure 93-7. TUpicaI BASIC Configurafton

BASICRealOutput
93-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode94 - BASICBooleanOutput

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The BASIC booleern output (BASBO) functlon code provldes a

means of transmftflng boolean data values from BASIC,
Batch 90, or C Language to other functlon blocks. There are
no spectftcatlons for thls block. TIte BOUT command in the
program deflnes the four outputs. For lnstmctlons on pro-
grammtng the modules, refer to:

o MFC BA"SIC Programmlng LangUage Reference Manual

. Batch 90 Programrntng Language Reference Manual
o C Language Implementatlon Guide

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe Descrlptlon

N B ProgramcornmandBOUTsetsthe outputvalue
N+1 B
N+2 B
N+3 B

SPECIFICATIO'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range I),escrlptlon

S1 N 0 Full Not used

BASICBooleanOutput
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 94-1
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode95 - ModuleStatusMonitor

L DESCRIPTION

Thls functton code monltors the status of a deslgnated mod-

ule. A module eltJrer monltors the status of ltself or another
module ln the sarne PCU. Functlon code 95 monltors selected
blts from one of the five or 16 module status b5rtes. Spectflca-
tlon S3 ldentlfies the status byte, and 55 through S12 ldentlff
the btts to be monltored. Module mode ean be monltored by
selecting 54 equals one. If the communication status of the
target module ts good, lt sets the output quality to good, and
outputs a logtcal ORed value. Th,e values of the selected btts
in the status byte determlne the togical ORed output. If the
communication status of the target module is bad, lt sets the
output qualtty to bad and the output value ls a logtc 1. Thls
block generates a tlpe three (module bus I/O) problem report
when a communlcatlon fatlure exists.

UTILIZATION

IMMPCOl

IMMFCOS
IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descriptlon

N B Selected quality and value:
Q = good
1 =bad

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0.000 R 0.0- 9.2El8 Modulebus updatetime in seconds
S2 N 0 I 0-31 Targetmoduleaddress
S3 Y 0 I 0-4or Modulestatusbyte number(referto AppendixG and note
0- 15 followingSg explanation)
S4 Y 0 I 0or1 Off-linedetectionor/otf flag:
0-no
1 =leS

ModuleStatusMonitor
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 95-1
Function Code 95

SPECIFl CATION S Gontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S5 Y 0 I 0or1 Bit 0 of selectedmonitoredbyte:
0=DO
| =loS
S6 Y 0 I 0or1 Bit 1 of selectedmonitoredbyte:
0=Do
1 =!€S
S7 Y 0 0or1 Bit 2 of selectedmonitoredbyte:
0=oO
| =!€S
S8 Y 0 0or1 Bit 3 of selected monitored byte:
0=DO
1 =leS
S9 Y 0 I 0or1 Bit 4 of selected monitored byte:
0=OO
| =fOS
s10 Y 0 I 0or1 Bit 5 of selected monitored byte:
0=Do
| =!€S
s11 Y 0 0or1 Bit 6 of selectedmonitoredbyte:
0=DO
| =lOS
s12 Y 0 0or1 Bit 7 of selected monitored byte:
0=DO
1 =!9S

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 - MBRD Specification S 1 is the Controlway/module bus read time tn

seconds. This defines the frequency of reading the module
status byte. The system allows tuning of the value shown for
the update period. However, the original Controlway/module
bus update period will be retained. To change the update
period, the module rnust be plaeed in configure mode.

52 - MADR Specification 52 is the address of the target module.

53 - SBYTE SpectflcaEon 53 is the module status byte number. Thts

defines urhich of the five or 16 module status bytes (numbered
from zero to four or zera to t5) will be monltored.

NOTE:The correctvalue for 53 can be obtainedby subtracting

onefromthe bytenumbersfoundin AppendixG.

Refer to Appendix G for more information on module status

b5rtes.

ModuleStatusMonitor
95-2 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode95

54 - OFFDET Spectflcatlon 54 tdentlfles lf module mode status ls part of the

tnformatlon monltored.

O=Ilo
I =}r€S

When 54 equals one, a slgnd ldenttSlng module mode ls part

of the tnput to the loglcd OR to produce the output. The sig-
nal ls a zero when ttre module ls tn execute mode, artd a one
when the module ls ln conflgUre or erTor mode.

55 through S12 Speclftcatlons S5 through S12 are the blt selectlon tnputs for
BITOto BITT the elght btts tn the module status monltored byte.

If: BITrr = O, the btt ls not monltored.

If: BITtr = 1, the bft ts monltored.

This functlon code logicdly AI{Ds S5 through S12 with the

eight bits of the module status byte. The values resulting from
that action are then logically ORed to produce the output
value. The equivalent circuit in Figure 95- I illustrates this
actlon.

If the btt values are:

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

B I T T6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AND
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
S12 S11S1O S9 S8 S7 56 S5

YIELDS
l l
\ \,/7
0 1 o 0 o o 0 1 X(MODEIFDESIGNATED)
TP?'o24A

then:

The above values €rre logically ORed, producing an output

of logic I slnce at least one of the lnputs equals logic l.

ModuleStatusMonitor
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB199s 95-3
FunctionCode95

OTJTPUTVALUE=
ooRl

Figwe 95-7, Equiaalcnt Ctrcuit

Jor Ftrncfion Code 95

ModuleStatusMonitor
95-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode96 - RedundantAnalogInput

L DESCRIPTION

The redundant analog lnput (REDAI) functlon code ls a trans-

fer between a pair of redtrndant analog slgnals. An external
loglc select lnput <S3> controls the transfer. The output value
ls equd to the lnput vdue selected urfth <S3>.

Functlon code 96 checks the dlfference between tlre two

lnputs and the rate of change of the seleeted frput. Output
qua[ty ts bad tf the qualtty of the selected tnput ls bad, lf the
rate of change exceeds the rate Umtt speclfled by 55, or tf the
dlfference between the two lnputs ls larger than 54. To test
the quallty of the slgnal, lnclude a functlon code 31 (test qual-
ity) btock in the configuration. The quality of the point cannot
be used as an lnput to any other tlpe of bloek. Hourever, the
output value c€rn be used as an tnput to other blocks. Refer to
Appendix D for a definition of potnt quality.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N R Output N = <S1> if <S3> = 0
Output N = <S2> if <S3> = 1

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 1 Block address of first input
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of second input
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of select input; 0 = <S1), 1 = <S2>
S4 Y 9.2 El8 R Full Deviationlimit (same units as <S1> and <Sb)

Analoglnput
Redundant
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB199s 96-1
Function Gode 96

SPECIFI CATTOwS@onti
nued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S5 Y 9.2 E18 R Full Ratelimit(sameunitsas <S1>and <S2>per seoond)
S6 Y 9 . 2E l g R Full Rateeror deadband(sameunitsas <S1>and <Sb)
NOTE:
1. Maximurn
valuesare:1023for SLC01/21
2046for NMFGOIIO?,IMMFCOS
andCBC01
9998lor |MMFC0S/O4
and IMMFP0{TAO3

EXPLANATION

Specifications

sl -xl Specification S I is the block address of first lnput.

s2 -x2 Specification 52 is the block address of second input.

s3 - SELCT Specification Sg is the block address of select input. The

value in this block determines which input (<S1> or <S2>) ls
the output.

Q = output <Sl>
I = output <S2>

s4 - DEV Specification 54 ls the maximum devlatlon permttted between

<S1> and <S2>. This applies when both <S1> and <S2> are
good quality.

S5 - RATE Specification S5 is the maximum allowable rate of change per

second for the seleeted input (same units as <Sl> and <S2>
per second). If the rate of change minus 56 exceeds 55, out-
put quality is bad.

S6 - DBAND Specification 56 defines the deadband for the rate llmit. When
the rate exceeds the rate limit plus 56, output qualtty ls bad.
The deadband prevents excessive bad quality readings when
the rate is hovering around the limit.

LOGICFLOW

If <S3> = Oi output value and quality = (Sl> with quality

If <S3) = l; output value and quality = <S2> urith quality

If <Sl> and <S2> quality = good, o;nd <Sl

outputquality= I (bad)

If rate of change of output > 55 + 56; output quality = I (bad)

RedundantAnalog Input
96-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode96

where:

<S1> = Value of flrst lnput.

<S2> = Value of second lnput.
<S3> = Value of select lnput.
O = (Sl>.
I = <S2>.
S4 = Devlatlon llmlt.
55 = Rate Umlt.
SO = Rate deadband.

APPLICATIOA'S

Functton code 96 relles on external logtc to select and output

one of two redundant analog lnputs. Ftgure 96-I shows the
configuratlon for the output of a slave select block (function
code 98) controlling the selectlon. When the actlve module tn
the slave select bloek changes from module one to module
two, the actlve input to the redundant analog lnput block
switches from the first input <Sl> to the second input <S2>.
Configuring the blocks so tlrat lnputs one and two are
received from modules one and two, respectively, lnsures that
if one module goes bad, the redundant analog input automat-
ically surttches to the good module.

REDUNDAT{T
AT{ALOGINPUTS

OT'TPUT
VALUE

TP451668

Figure 96-1. REDAI Blockto Cttoos@ Betuseen

RedundantAnnlry Inputs

Analoglnput
Redundant
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 96-3
ffi

t
 FunctionCode97 - RedundantDigitalInput

GENERALDESCRIPT'ON

The redundant dtgltal lnput functton code selects and trans-

fers a palr of redundarrt boolean slgnals. An externd logtc
select tnput <S3> controls the transfer. The output value ls
equal to the lnput vdue selected wtth <S3>.

Functlon code 97 monltors the actlon of the two lnputs <S1>

and <S2>. Output qualfty ts bad if tlre quallty of the selected
input is bad or if there ls a dtfference between the hvo inputs
when both have good quallty. To test the quallty of the slgnal,
include a functton code 31 (test quallty) block ln the conflgu-
ration. The quality of the point cannot be used as an input to
any other type of block. However, the output value can be
used as Ern trput to other blocks. Refer to APPendix D for a
deflnttion of potnt quallty.

UT'LIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Output N = <S1> if <S3> = 0
Output N = <S2> if <S3> = 1

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of first inPut
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinPut
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of select input; 0 = <S1>, 1 = <S2>
NOTE:
valuesare: 1023lor SLC01/21
1. Maximum
CBC01,CSCO1and|MMPCOI
20p;6forNMFCOI4O?,,|MMFC05,
9998lor |MMFCO3/MandlMMFP0l/0203

RedundantDigitalInPut
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 97-1
FunctionGode97

APPLICATIOruS

Function code 97 depends on externat loglc to select and otrt-

put one of two redundant boole€rn tnputs. The conflguratlon
shown in Figure 97-L lllustrates the output of a slave select
block controlfng the selectlon. If the actlve module tn the
slave select block changes from module one to module turo,
then the active input tn the functlon code 97 block surltches
from input one to tleput two. Conflgurtng the blocks so t]rat
inputs one and two correspond to modules one and two
insures that lf one module goes bad, the lnput from the other
module will automatleally be read.

REDUNDAT{T
DIGITALINPUTS

Figure 97-7. F\rtction Code 97 Used to Ctroose

Betuseen Redundant Digital Stgnals Based on
MduleAusW

Redundant
DigitalInput
97-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode98 - SlaveSelect

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The slave select furrcflon code monltors a patr of redundarrt l/O

module furrcflon blocks. Speclflcaflon 59 ls a toggle lnput that
swltches from one module to the other when both modules are
good.

The block has two outputs, select (N) and lnterlock (N+1). The
select output tdenttfles the active module, and the interlock
fedlcates when bottr modules are bad.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Moduleselected:
Q= module1
1 = ffiodule2
Initialvatueis zero.Valuechangesonly if the activemoduleis
bad andthe inactivemoduleis good,or if bothmodulesare
goodand the toggleinputmakesa 0 to 1 transition.
N+1 B lnterlock:
0 = ooo or both modules good
1 = both modules bad

SPECIFICAT'O'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof booleanstatusfor module1
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof booleanstatusfor module1
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of UO, boolean or real with quality, for module 1
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof UO,booleanor realwith quality,for module1
S5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof booleanstatusfor module2
S6 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof booleanstatusfor module2
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of l/O, boolean or real with quality, for module 2

SlaveSelect
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 98-1
FunctionCode 98

SPECI F,CATI O,^ISftontinued)

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof UO,booleanor realwith quality,for module2
S9 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof toggfeinput(if bothmodulesaro good,a 0 to
1 transitionon this inputchangesstateof the selectoutput)
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 2046for NMFGOIIO?,|MMFCOS,CB@l, CSC01and|MMPCOI
9998for |MMFC03/04and IMMFPOUOAO3

Specifications

S1 - STTSA1 Specificaflon Sl ls the block address of the booletrn status for

module one. Each module has a status assoelated wtth lt that
defines if the I/O carrted by the module ls valld. Functlon
codes 79 arrd 83 provide the module status outputs.

52 - STTSB1 Specification 52 is the block address of the boolean status for

module one. Ttrere are two status specifications for each mod-
ule because IMDSMO4 and IMDSMOS Digital Slave Modules
handle two groups of eight outputs. F\rnction code 83 provides
the status on groups of eight potnts only, so lf redundarrt dlgl-
tal slave modules are to be monltored, there must be a functton
code 83 block conffgured for each group of etght outputs. A
similar configuration e>dsts for IMDSIO?, IMDSMO4 and
IMDSMOS modules used for inputs. Figure 98-l shows how to
monitor redundant digital slave modules conflgured for 16 out-
puts. If either <Sl> or <S2> goes to one, control transfers to
module trvo.

s 3 - QIOAl Speciflcation 53 is the block address of the I/O qualfty for

module one. Specifications 53 and 54 define ttre blocks con-
tainlng the boolean or real UO for module one. If the qua[ty
of <S3> or <S4> goes bad, control wtll be transferred to mod-
ule two, providing it is good quatity. If both modules €rre bad
quality, the output is tJ:e value from module one, but output
N+ I equals logic I fboth modules are bad]. Flgure g8-2 shows
how to configure transfer control for bad analog inputs.

s 4 - oloBl Specification 54 is the block address of the I/O quality for

module one (same as S3).

s 5 - STTSA2 Specification S5 is the block address of tJle boolean status for

module two (refer to Sl description).

s 6 - STTSB2 Specificatlon SO ts the block address of the boolean status for

module two (refer to 52 description).

s 7 - QIOA2 Specificatton 57 is the block address of the quallty for module

two (refer to S3 description).

s g - QIO82 Speciflcation S8 is the block address of the quality for module

two (refer to 53 description).

SlaveSelect
98 - 2 ls FEBlees l-E96-2008
 Function Code 98

S9 - TOGGLE Speclflcatlon Sg ls the block address of tlre toggle lmput. If i

both modules are good, a logtc O to I trarlsitlon of <S9> trans-
fers control to the standby module.

STATUSOF STAruS OF
NDSlilOs I 58 NDSlilOs 1
GROTJP2 GRO{.IP1
(ourPUTs &15) (ourPUTs().7)

STATUS OF STATUSOF
NDSi/IOS 2 NDS[/b5 2
GROUP 1 GROUP2
(oUTPUTS O-7) (ot rPUTS &1s)

Figure 98- 1. Cor{iguration Used tp Monitor Redwdnrtt

IMDSMOSMdules @rfrgwedJor 76 Otrtptl'ts

APPLICATIOA'S

Figure 98-3 shows the conflguratlon of a slave select block

controtling the redundant analog input (function code 96)'
The analog input selected depends on the module selected in
the slave select. Thls conflguratlon also shows the lnterlock
(N+1) forcing the output value to a predetermined safe value
ln the event that both modules are bad.

SlaveSelect
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 98-3
Function Code 98

ctsr/o

crsr/o

Figure 98-2. ConfigwationUsed to TransJer Control

WhenAnnlog Inptfis CroBad.

Slave Select
98-4 ls FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode98

INPUT FROM MODULE 1

OUTPUT
VALUE

Figure g8-3. Slnue*lect Blrck &nf:oll@ QnAnnlry OuWfi

SlaveSelect
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 98-5
ffi

o
 FunctionGode99 - Sequenceof EventsLog

GENERAI DESCRIPTION

Thls block enables a module to communtcate with a sequen-

Ual events recorder (SER). The sequence of events (SOE) log
buffers event data recelved from the SER recorder for console
or computer access. Flve tlpes of SOE logs can be generated:
stand€rd, sunrmarJr, prefault, postfault and snapshot. Each
SOE log holds only one t5rye of report, and the report lncludes
data on all potrrts conflgured ln the SER recorder to be that
t54te. Each block ls tndependent and relles only on a common
sertal Unk to acqulre event data. The SOE tog functlon code
spectfles buffer slze and the age of the event data im the buffer.
Configure a single block for each log t54re, buffer slze and age.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

The sequence of events log sets local I/O module status to BAD
and generates a module problem report when the sequence of
events recorder globall/O status ls BAD (1.e.,lnput check fail-
ure). Output block N remalns good qualtty on t}fs f,ailure.

BIK Type Descrlption

N B Eventsloggedflag:
0=no
I =t€S

SPECIFICATTOTVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 0 I 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 o r4 Qualifier for sequence of events recorder data received
bufferstorage:
0 = standard
1 = summary
I = prafault
g = postfault
4 = snapshot

Sequenceof EventsLog
t-Eg6-2008 ls FEB199s 99-1
FunctionCode 99

SPE CIFI CATI ONS (continued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S2 N 256 I 0 - 3,500 Numberof eventsthatfit in buffen
buffersize= 9(52+1)
S3 N 360 I a - 32,767 Age of event data in seconds before discarded from buffer

EXPLANATION

Functlon code 99 provldes a conrmunlcatlon llnk between the

SER recorder and an lnterface devlce such as a console or
computer. Data cannot be sent dtrectly from the recorder to
interface devices. The lnterface must be conflgured to prfnt
the event data received from the module. See the operators
manual for the interface devtce to determtne how to eonfigrre
it to receive sequence of events data. Each sequence of events
log in the module has an associated sequence of events con-
figuration in the interface devtce. Ttre sequence of events log
is an exception report block wtth the s€une report tSpe and
size as a remote control memory (functlon code 621 exceptlon
report. The remote control memory conrmand from the inter-
face devtce requests a summary report.

NOTE:Dedicatethe moduleusedfor seguenceof eventsreporting

to SER functionsonly. lt cannot be configuredfor redundancy,
BASIC,C language,batchor userdefinedfunctions.

The SER recorder ls capable of handfng up to 5L2 UO polnts.

The SER recorder defines polrt report tSpes for atl polnts.
There are five report tlpes avatlable (standard, sunrmarJr, pre-
fault, postfault and snapshot).

Specifications

51 - LOGTYPE Specification Sf is the qualilier for SER recorder event data

buffer storage.

O- standard
I = SUfirmary
2= prefault
$= postfault
4 - snapshot

Stcndard
The standard t5pe reports any standard SER recorder polnt
change of state. Changes from norrnal to alarm or from alarm
to normal result in a time-tagged report generated for that
point. The results are stored in the module for the length of
time specified by 53.

Sequenceof EventsLog
99-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 99

Summo;ry
The summary report ls generated on a,n operator demand
from the lnterface devtce. ThIs ls a tlme-tagged report ltstfn$
all SER recorder polnts that are not normal (i.e., lnactive,
deleted from scan, or ln atarm). A remote control memory dts-
play tSpe should be conflgured ln the lnterface devtce to force
the output of thts functton code to a one to request ttrts sllm-
mary data collectlon.

Prefault
The prefault mode stores ttre potnts when they change state.
Up to l,0OO pre-deflned events and a specifled time wlndour
(up to 24 hours) Umlt the data stored. For example, thls
report c€rn be conflgured to ltst the last 5O events prlor to the
prefault trtgger, or all events occurrlng uP to ten mlnutes
before the prefault trlgger. Ttre trtgger ls a false to trre slgnal
resultlng from an event or a serles of events. When the trigger
occurs, all of the stored data reports, with the oldest stored
data reported flrst. The memory then begins savin$ new data.
The new data will not be reported unttl the trlgger outputs a
false to tnre signd agaln.

Postlault
The postfault mode reports potnts when they change state,
but onty after the postfault trilger turns true. These points
will be reported until the postfault trigger turns false, or the
operator cancels the postfault state.

Snapshot
Snapshot inputs are tlpically a group of related points. These
points, like Erny polnt ln the system, carl be tn the alarm, nor-
mal, deleted, or tnactlve state at any one tlme. When the
snapshot trigger turns trre, a report generates detailitrg the
status of the designated snapshot potmts ln numertcal point
order. Another report generates the next tlme the snaPshot
trlgger outputs a false to trre slgnal.

All points defined in the SER recorder as a certain tlpe will be

saved irr the buffer bof the sequenee of events tog deflned as
the same t54re. For ex€unple, if thts log ls a standard log (zero),
all points defined in the SER recorder as standard are sent to
ttris buffer.

s 2 - EVENTNO. Specificatton 52 is the number of events that fit in the buffer.

Each log has a separate buffer that holds a speciflc nurnber of
point values. The buffer ls in RAI\{ memory, and the buffer
swe determines RAI\{ memory uillization.

buffersize = 9(52 + 1)

53 - AGE Specificatton 53 ts the ma:dmum age ln seconds of the event

data in the buffer. After data has been in the buffer for this

Sequenceof EventsLog
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 99-3
Function Gode 99

length of time, it ls rernoved from the buffer. The buffer age ls

reset to zero every time an event for ttre spectfled log occurs.

A new and unique buffer age tlme ls attached to each event

saved in the buffer. Older events are therefore removed from
the buffer before newer events when thetr buffer age tlme
expires. Any data stored ln the buffer ls guaranteed to stay ln
the buffer for the conflgured age tlme.

Speclficatlons 52 and Sg are closely related to the lnterface

device configuration. These parameters control the €rmount of
data the interface devtce can recelve when a trtp occurs. Ttte
interface devlce must be conflgured to provlde a fast enough
data transfer rate to rernove the event data from the buffer
before 53 ls reached. Once S3 ls reached, the data ls erased.

Outputs

N Output N is the events logged flag.

O=r1o
I =f€S

Output N shows whether the buffer currently contalns data

received from the SER recorder. The output goes to one every
time information is fed to the block from the SER recorder,
and returns to zero when all the data has aged (S3) and is
erased.

If multiple or oscillating events occur, the new data ls saved ln

the buffer with a new age time (Sg). Then, the output rernalns
a one until all new data in the buffer ls aged. If new data con-
tinues to filter in at a period less than 53, the output never
goes to zero.

NOTE:A consolereportwill not printuntilthis outputgoesto zero.

Sequenceof Events Log

99 - 4 1sFEB199s l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode100- DigitalOutputReadbackGheck

GENERAT DESCRIPTION

sl This functton code checks the operatlon of a dfftal output

(100)
group. It compares the dlgltal output values wlttr those brpl-
cally read back vla a dlgltal tnput group.

UTIL'ATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlption

N B Stiatus:
0 = all digital outputs match digital inputs
1 = one or more digital outputs do not match digital

SPECIFICATIOIVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof DO value1
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blmk addressof Dl readbackvalue1
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof DO value2
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof Dl readbackvalue2
S5 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof DO value3
S6 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof Dl readbackvalue3
S7 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof DO value4
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof Dl readbackvalue4
S9 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof DO value5
s10 N 0 l Note 1 Block address of Dl readback value 5
s11 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of DO value 6
s12 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of Dl readback value 6
s13 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of DO value 7
s14 N 0 Note 1 Block address of Dl readback value 7
s15 N 0 Note 1 Block address of DO value 8
s16 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of Dl readback value I
NOTE:
CBC01,CSCO1and |MMPCOI
1. Maximumvaluesare: 2046for NMFC01I02,!MMFC05,
9998 for |MMFC03/04and lMMFP0l/0203

DigitalOutputReadbackCheck
l-E96-2008 15FEB1e9s 100 - 1
FunctionCode 100

EXPLANATION

Flgure foO-f illustrates the trternal loglc of funetlon code

1OO.Functton eode lOO perforrrrs lnternal excluslve OR func-
tlons on elght dtgttal output and dtgltal lnput palrs. Ttre
excluslve ORs requlre that both tnputs be the same for the
output to equal loglc O. If the lnputs to the excluslve OR are
not the same, the output equals loglc 1.

TP45172C

Figure 7OO-7. Internal Logic of a Digital Oufpft

Readback Check F]uncfion Cde

DigitalOutputReadbackCheck
100 - 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode101- ExclusiveOR

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The exclusive OR functlon code performs ttre logieal exclusive

OR funetton of two tnputs. Functlon code lOl gtves an output
of logic I when one of two tnputs equals loglc l, but not when
both equal logic I or logic O.

UTILIZATION

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Referto Table 101-1

Tahle 707-7. Exctusiue OR TrttthTable

<sl> <s2> Output N
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

SPECIFICATIO,fVS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first inPut
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of second inPut
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 for COM modules and CLCOUOAOVO/-
1023 for |MLMMO2and SLCO1|21
2m6for NMFCOil4O1,IMMFC0S, CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFC03/04 and IMMFPOI|OUOS

ExclusiveOR
15 FEB 1995 1 0 1- 1
l-E96-2008
ffi

o
 FunctionCode102- PulselnpuUPeriod

L DESCRIPTION

The pulse tnput /pertod functlon code tnterfaces a module to a

selected channel of an IMDSMO4 pulse lnput I/O module. Ttre
IMDSMO4 module condltions, converts and processes pulse
tnputs into analog stgnals. It has eight tnput channels whose
lnputs can be processed ln three modes: pertod, frequency or
totaltzatlon. Functlon code LOZ processes a stgnal ln the
pertod mode. Functlon codes log and 1O4 process slgnals ln
the frequency and totallzatlon modes, respecttvely. F'unctlon
code fog processes the duratlon of the tnput pulses. Each
lnput channel must have one and only one pulse trrput block
conflgured.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlption

N R Period (seconds)x gain
N+1 B Period high alarm:
0 = Do alarm
1 = high alarm
N+2 B Periodlowalarm:
Q= ho alarm
1 = low alarm
N+3 B status:
l/O modulecommunication
Q= good
1=bad

SPECIF'CATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus llO moduleaddressof |MDSM04
S2 N 1 I 1 , 2 , 3 ,4 , 5 , Selectedchannel
6 , 7 o r8

PulseInpuVPeriod
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 102-1
FunctionCode 102

SP EC/,FICATI ONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 0 B 0or1 Pulsetriggerlevel:
0 = lowto hightransitions
I = highto low transitions
S4 N 1 I 1, 2 , 3 ,4 ,5 Expectedperiodrange:
orO 1 = 0.1 msec- 6.553secs,t 0.1 msec
2 = 1.0msec- 65.53secs,t 1.0msec
3 = 10.0msecs- 655.3secs,t 10.0msecs
4 = 0.1 sec - 6.553ksecs,t 0.1 sec
5 = 1.0sec - 65.53ksecs,t 1.0sec
6 = 10.0secs-1 655.3ksecs,t 10.0secs
S5 Y 1.000 R Full Gain
S6 Y 9.2 Elg R Full High alarm value
S7 Y -9.2 E18 R Full Low alarm value
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

EXPLANATION

In the period mode, a counter measures tlee time between

input pulses. Specification 54 configures the expected pertod
range. There are slx ranges available with rzrnge one hardng
the highest resolution and range six havtng the lowest resolu-
tion. The pulse trigger transitlon can be eonfigured to respond
to either the rising or fallIrg portton of the slgnd with S3.
Specification 55 scales the determtned period. The deter-
mined period is tested against speclfied hfgh (SO) and low (S7)
alarm values.

Specifications

51 - SLVADR Specification Sl is the expander bus UO module address of

the IMDSMO4 module. Valid addresses are zero to 63.

S2 - CHNL Specification 52 identifies the input channel beimg monitored.

IMDSMO4 modules have eight input channels. Refer to the
IMDSMO4 Pulse Input Module product instruction to idenfiry
the channel associated with each input.

S3 - PTRIG Specification S3 defines the t5rye of signal transltion that trig-

gers the counter response.

Q = response on low to high transltions

I = response on high to low transitions

54 - RANGE Specification 54 defines the range within which the period of

the input pulse is expected to fall. There are six period
ranges. Resolution decreases from range one to six.

l = O.I millisecond to 6.553 seconds, t O.I millisecond

2 - l.O millisecond to 65.53 seconds, t l.O mtlltsecond
$ = 1O.Omilliseconds to 655.3 seconds, t lO.O mtlliseconds

PulseInpuUPeriod
102 - 2 ts FEBlees l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode 102

4 = 0. I second to 6.553 klloseconds, t O.I second

5 = l.O second to 65.53 klloseconds, * 1.0 second
$ = lO.O seconds to 655.3 kiloseconds, t 1O.Oseconds

NOTES:
1. lf the period of the input pulse becomes larger than the
expectedrange,outputN goes to zero. This can be used to indi-
catea loss of inputsignal.

2. If the input pulsebecornessmallerthan the expectedrange,

the output oscillatesbetween0.0 and the smallestmeasurable
periodfor the selectedrange.

s5 -K Speclflcation 55 deflnes the gain multipller. The gain multl-

plier is the value used to scale the output to a value that ts
meaningful to the system.

56 - HALRM Specification SO is the value of the output that causes the

high alarm output to go to one. Specificatlon SO is dependent
on the values chosen with S4 and 55.

Output= pedod(gain)

57 - LALRM Speclfication SZ ts the value of tJ:e output that causes the low
alarm output to go to one. Speclficatlon S7 ls dependent on
the values chosen with 54 and 55.

Output= period(gain)

s8 Reserved.

Outputs

N Output N is a real value representing the period (tn seconds)

times the gain.

NOTES:
1. lf the period of the input pulse becomeslarger than the
expectedrange,outputN goesto zero.This can be usedto indi'
catea lossof inputsignal.

2. lf the input pulsebecornessmallerthan the expectedrange,

the output oscillatesbetween0.0 and the smallestmeasurable
periodfor the selectedrange.

N+1 Output N+l is the high alarm indlcator.

Q = no alarm
I = high alarm

N+2 Output N+2 ls the low alarm lndicator.

Q = no alarm
1 = low alarm

PulseInpuUPeriod
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 102 - 3
FunctionCode 1Oz

N+3 Output N+3 ls the l/O module communlcatlon status.

Q = good
I =bad

UO modules €rrebad lf:

l. There ls an lllegal I/O module response.

2. There is no UO module response.

or

3. An input pulse has not been received.

PulseInpuUPeriod
102-4 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode103- PulselnpuUFrequency

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The pulse tnput/frequency functlon code interfaces a module

to a selected channel of an IMDSMO4 Pulse Input Module. TIte
IMDSMO4 module condltlons, converts and processes pulse
lnputs tnto analog stgnals. It has eight inputs tl:at can be pro-
cessed ln three modes: pertod, frequency and totallzatlon.
Functlon code l0g conflgures a signal to output a frequency
value. Functlon codes LOZ and 1O4 process slgnals ln the
pertod and totaltzatlon modes, respecttvely. Functlon code 1O9
speclfles the duratton of the tnput pulses. Each lnput channel
must have only one pulse tnput block conflgured.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlption

N R Frequenry(Hz)x gain(withquality)
N+1 B Frequenryhighalarm:
0 = ltOalarm
1 = highalarm
N+2 B Frequencylow alarm:
0 = Doalarm
1 = low alarm
N+3 B status:
UOmodulecommunication
Q= good
1 =bad

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus l/O moduleaddressof |MDSMO4
S2 N 1 I 1 , 2 , 3 ,4 , 5 , Selected channel
6 , 7 o r8

l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995

FunctionGode103

SPECI FI CATI ONS (continued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 0 B 0or1 Pulsetriggerlevel:
0 = low to hightransitions
1 = highto lowtransitions
S4 N 1 I 1 , 2 , 3 4, , 5 Expectedfrequencyrange:
or6 1 = 0.15mHz- 10 mHz,t 0.01mHz
2 = 1.5mHz- 1(X)mHz,t 0.1mHz
3=15mHz-1.0Hz,tlmHz
4 = 0.1 Hz - 6.55kHz,t 0.1 Hz
5 = 1.0Hz - 50 kHz,* 1.0Hz
6 = 10.0Hz- 50 kHz,t 10.0Hz
S5 Y 1.000 R Full Gain
S6 Y 9 . 2E 1 g R Full High alarm value
S7 Y -9.2Elg R Full Low alarm value
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

EXPLANATION

In the frequency mode, a counter records the number of tnput

pulses or cycles that occur per second. Ttre expected fre-
quency range is configurable wtth 54. There are slx frequency
ranges avallable with range one havlng the hlghest resolutlon
(t O.15 millihertzl but smallest span, compared to r€rnge six
with the lowest resolution (1O.O ll;ertzl but largest span. Ttre
pulse trigger transition can be configured to respond to either
the rislng or falling portion of the slgnal wtth 53. The deter-
mined frequency is scaled with 55 and tested against specl-
fied high and low alarm values speclfled by 56 and 57.

Specifications

S1 - SLVADR Specification Sl is the expander bus I/O module address of

the IMDSMO4 module. Valid addresses are zero through 63.

52 - CHNL Specification 52 identifies the input channel betng monltored.

IMDSMO4 modules have eight input channels. Refer to the
IMDSMO4 Pulse Input Module product instnretion to idenEry
the channel associated with each input.

53 - PTRIG Specification Sg delines the t5pe of signal transition that tdg-

gers the counter response.

Q = response on low to high transltlons

t = r€sponse on htgh to low transltlons

PulseInpuUFrequency
103 - 2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode103

54 - RANGE Spectficatlon 54 deflnes the range fithfn whtch the frequency

of the lnput pulses ls e:rpected to fall. Tttere are six frequency
ranges shown below. Resolutlon decreases from range one to
slx.

1 = Q.f 5 mfHhertzto 10 mtlthertz, t O.Ol mtlllhertz

!, = 1.5 mfllfhertz to f OOmtlllherlz, t O.I mlllthettz
$ = 15 mlllthertz to 1.0 tlrertz, t l.O ml[lhertz
4 = O.I hertz to 6.55 kllohertz, t O.I hrertz
$ = 1.0 hrer1cz to 5O klloherlz, t l.O hertz
$ = lO.O hertz to 50 ldlohertz, t l0.Ohertz

If the frequency goes above tJre erpected range (ranges one

through slx), the output stops wtth the last valid frequency
arrd the UO module communtcatlon status beeomes a logic 1.
Thts also occurs on ranges one, two and three tf the frequency
goes below the expected range.

55 -K Speciflcatlon 55 deftres the galn multtpller. Gafn seales the

output to a useful value.

56 - HALRM Specification SG ls the htgh alarm output (N+1 equals loglc l).
Specilicatton SO ls dependent on the values chosen with 54
and 55.

Output= frequency(gain)

S7 - LALRM Speclficatlon 57 ls the low alarm output (N+2 eguals logic l).
Speclflcatlon SZ ls dependent on the values chosen urith 54
and 55.

Output= frequency(gain)

s8 Reseryed.

Outputs

N Output N ls a real value representlng the frequency (in heftz)

times the galn.

N+1 Output N+l ls the hlgh alarm.

Q = no alarm
I = high alarrn

N+2 Output N+2 ts the low alarm.

Q = no alarm
I = low alarm

PulseInpuUFrequency
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 1 0 3- 3
FunctionCode103

N+3 Output N+3 is the I/O module communlcatlon status.

Q = good
1=bad

The l/O module is marked bad tf:

There is an illegal UO module response or no I/O module

resPollse.

No pulses have been received yet.

The frequency exceeds the expected range.

The frequency goes below the expected range for S4 equal

to one, two or three.

PulseInpuUFrequency
1 0 3- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode104- PulseInpuUTotalization

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The pulse tnput /totallz.atlon functton code lnterfaces a module

to a selected ctrannel of an IMDSMO4 pulse lnput slave mod-
ule. The IMDSMO4 module condlttons, converts and processes
pulse tnputs tnto analog slgnals. It has elght lnputs that ean be
processed tn three modes: perlod, frequency and totallzatlon.
Funetlon code 104 configrrres a slgnal to ou@ut a totallzed
value. Functlon codes lO2 and l0g process slgnals ln the
pertod and frequency modes, respecttvely. F\rncflon code l0g
speclfles the duratlon of ttre lnput pulses. Each lrrput channel
must have only one pulse tnput block corrflgured.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Currenttotalizedvaluex gain
N+1 B Totalizedvaluealarm:
Q= ltOalarm
1 = alarm
N+2 B l/O modulecommunication status:
g = good
1 =bad

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default TyPe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 module
Expanderbus UOmoduleaddressof |MDSMQ4
S2 N 1 I 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , Selected channel
6,7 or8
S3 N 0 B 0or1 Pulsetriggerlevel:
Q= low to hightransitions
1 = highto low transitions
S4 Y 0.000 R Full Starting value

PulseInpuUTotalization
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 104- 1
FunctionCode104

SPECIFI C AfrOrVS @onti

nued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S5 N 0 0or1 Totalizationdirection:
Q= positive
1 = Dogative
s6 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof resetflag:
0 = continuetotalization
1 = rosottotalization
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof holdflag:
0 = continuetotalization
1 = holdaccumulated total
S8 Y 0 B Full Automatic reset on alann lirnit flag:
0=off
1 = when alarm, reset to 54 + alarm ovemJn
s9 Y 1.000 R 0 - 9.2E18 Gain
s10 Y 9.2 E18 R Full Alarm limit
NOTE:
1. Ma:<imumvalues are: 1023 for SLC01I21
2046 for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS,CBC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFC0S/04and IMMFPOUOA0S

EXPLANATION

In the totalization mode, an internd counter records the

number of input pulses up to 1.9 x lore or unttl the counter
resets. The trigger transition level, totallr.ation directton, and
starting value are configurable. The reset input sets the total-
izer to the starting value. This is usefui for reset events based
on time, An automatic reset on alarm can be speelfled. Thls
allows for the totalizer to be set to the starttng value plus ttre
alarm overrun when €rn darm condltton occtlrs. Thts can be
used for reset events based on accumulated totals slnce the
count is not lost. A configurable alarm llmlt determtnes alarm
conditions. A hold input provtdes temporarJr stop totalDatton,
and a gain parameter provides a scaled output.

Specification Sl is the I/O module expander bus address of

the IMDSMO4 module. Valid addresses a.re zero through 63.

Specifica0on 52 identifies the input channel being monltored.

IMDSMO4 modules have elght lnput channels. Refer to the
IilIDS,MO4 Pttlse Input Slcue Mdule product lnstmctlon to
identiff the channel associated with each input.

53 - PTRIG Specification 53 defines the tlpe of signal transltlon that tr:fg-

gers the counter response.

Q = response on low to high transitions

I = resPonse on high to low transitlons

PulseInpuUTotalization
104-2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 104

S4 - STRT Speetftcatlon S4 ts the tlrftlal value of the count on start-up

and functton code reset. Speclflcatlon 54 plus the alarm over-
run is the value of the count after an alarm tf the alarm llmit
flag ts set to automatic reset.

s 5 - DIR Speciflcatlon 55 ts tJle dtrectlon of the count.

Q = positive
1 = negatlve

s 6 - RST Spectfication SG ts the block address of the reset flag.

'
Q = contlnue totallzatlon
I = r€s€t count to startlng vdue (S+1

s 7 - HOLD Speciftcatlon 57 ls the block address of the aceumulated total

hold flag. When a hold flag flogtc l) releases (logic O), the
counter resumes countlng without resettln$. '

Q = continue totalization (normal)

I = hold accumulated total

S8 - AUTO Speciflcation S8 ls the automatlc reset on alarm flag. Thts

value determlnes the counter actlon when ttre alarm ltmlt ts
reached. The cotrnter can etther contlnue counting beyond
the alarm limit, or reset the counter to 54 plus alarm over-
rull.

Q=off

I = res€t to 54 plus alarm ovelTun when alarm limlt is

exceeded

NOTE:AlarmovemJnis the currentcount resetto the difference

betweenthe counterand the alarm limit.This allowsthe blockto
correctlydetect the next alarm without losing track of the true
counts,

s9 - K Specification Sg defures tJre gafn multtpller. Gafn scales the

output to a useful value. A negatlve galn does not affect the
output.

SlO - ALRM Specification SIO ls the alarm Umlt. When the alarm limtt ls
reaehed, the N+l output becomes a loglc 1, slgnalhg the sys-
tem that the totalized value ls ln alarm.

Outputs

N Output N ts the curTent totallzed value times galn.

N+1 Output N+l ts the totalized value alarm indicator-

Q = no alarm
I = alarm

PulseInpuUTotalization
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 104- 3
FunctionCode 104 ffi
N+2 Output N+2 ts the I/O module communlcatlon stahrs.
g = good
I =bad

I/O modules are bad tf:

I. There is an illegal I/O module response.

2. Ttrere is no I/O module response.

3. There is an IMDSMO4 counter orrerflow (crount> 1.9 x lore).

ol

4. There ls a counter overflow.

NOTE:A counteroverflowindicatesthe counterinputis transition-

ing too fast for the configuredscan tate of the segmentrunningthe
lunctioncode. This is a false indicationof a bad UO moduleand
this indicationshouldbe consideredwhenconfiguringthis block

PulseInpuVTotalization
104-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode105- ExecutiveBlock (IMLMM02)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Executive block function codes deflne a number of varlables

that affect module operatlons. F\rnctlon codes 1O5 through
1O8 deflne varlous parameters affecttng IMLMMO2 logic Mas-
ter Module operatlons. Functton code IO5 resldes tn flxed
block one of the IMLMM;O? module. NLMMOI Logtc Master
Modules use functlon code 54, not codes 105 through 1O8.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk TyPe Descriptlon

0 B Logic 0
1 B Logic 1
2 R Reserved
3 R -100.0
4 R -1.0
5 R 0.0
6 R 1.0
7 R 100.0
I R Ma<imumnegative value'9.2E18
9 R Maximumpositivevalue9.2 E18
10 B Start-upcompleteflag:
Q=OO
| =|OS

11 Reserved
12 R System free time in Percent
13 R Revision level
14 Reserved

ExecutiveBlock(|MLMMO2)
15 FEB 1995 105- 1
l-E96-2008
FunctionGode105

SPECIFICAT'ONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof configurationlock:
0 = unlock
1 = lock
S2 N 128 I 0 - 1023 Maximumnumberof digitalexceptionreportsallowed.
Excludesblocksdelinedas exceptionreports(i.e.,RCM)
S3 N 25.000 R Full Timedelayfor localUOseMcing on start-up(secs)
S4 N 1023 I 0 - 1023 Maximumconfigurable blocknumber
S5 N 0 Full Reserued
S6 N 0 I Full Reserued

EXPLANATION

Function code f 05 outputs all IMLMMO2 module firced blocks

except those containing segment control lnformation for the
resident segment control block (15 through I7l, and those
containing RAI\{ utilization lnformatlon (18 and 19).

Specifications

51 - BLKADR Specification S I is tJ:e block address of configure rnode lock-

out flag.

Q = configure mode allowed

I = configuration locked

The default value of Sl is block address zero, which provides

unlocked configuration. A logic I locks the conffguratton. Once
locked, a configuration c€rnnot be unlocked. To change a locked
conftguration, the module must be fnffla[zed and reconflgured.

s 2 - XRPCNT Specification 52 is the digital /boolean exceptlon report count.

The digital/boolean exceptlon report count deflnes the number
of blocks in the rnodule that have exceptlon reports deflned
internally. This number of IMLMMO2 module outputs can be
accessed from tl,e communication highway without defrned
exception reports (i.e., digital exception report, remote control
memory). The internaily defined exception report outputs can
be accessed from a node in tJre system (i.e., console, module).

s 3 - START Specification 53 is the time delay for local I/O servlcing on

start-up in seconds. Speclflcatlon Sg deftnes the length of
time at start-up that I/O values are lnvalid. It enables the
system to start up and begin generating valid loglc lnforma-
tion before usingl/ O for control or other pu{poses.

s 4 - MAXBLK Specification 54 is the maximum conligurable block nurnber ln

the module. The maximum conflgurable block number ls 1,023.

ExecutiveBlock (|MLMMO2)
105 - 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 105

Speclftcatlon 54 can be used to restrlct the conflgurable block

range (1.e.,NLMMO f compattblllty).

S5 and 56 Reserved.

Outputs

0 Output block zero equals loglc O.

1 Output block one equals logfc 1.

2 Output block two is reselved.

3 Output block three equals - 1OO.O.

4 Output block four equals -1.0.

5 Output block five equals O.O.

6 Output block slx equals 1.O.

7 Output block seven equals IOO.O.

8 Output block eight shows the ma:dmum negatlve value.

9 Output block nine shows the ma;dmum positive value.

10 Output block ten shows the start-up complete fiag status.

0=no
I =f€S

This output shows that start-up is comPlete and I/O values

are valid. Spectfication 53 defines start-uP tlme.

11 Output block 11 is resenred.

12 The output of block L2 shows the percentage of free tlme left

to the module processor.

Free time = 100- totalmodule executiontime

13 Output fg ls the module revlslon level. The module revlsion

level is a four dlglt number tdentifflng tl:e module nomencla-
ture, hardware revision level, and flrmware revlslon level.
x x x x

14 Output 14 is reseryed.

ExecutiveBlock(IMLMMO2)
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 1 0 5- 3
ffi

I
 FunctionGode106- SegmentControlBlock

GENERALDESCR/,Pr'ON

The segment control functlon code groups subsequent blocks

lnto a scan cycle executed at a speclfled rate and prlorlty.
Each IMLMMO2 l,oglc Master Module supports up to elght
segment control blocks. IVlth elght segment control blocks,
the module conflguratlon ls ln elght Xldlvldual segments.
Each segment control block provldes three outputs. One seg-
ment control block restdes ln ftxed block 15, the other seven
Erreconflgurable.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R ElapsedtimEof previouscyclein seconds
N+1 R Elapsedtimeof currentcyclein seconds
N+2 R Percentprocessorutilizationusedby this segment

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-255 Segmentpriority(0 = lowest)
S2 N 0 0or1 Autosequencing:
Q=off
1=OO

S3 N 0.050 R Full Targetsegmentperiod(secs)

S4 Y 9.2El8 R 0.0 9.2El8 Segmentrycle time alarmlimit (sqqq)
-
S5 N 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2 El8 Minimumreporttime for all exceptionreportsin this seg-
ment(secs)
S6 N 60.000 R 0.0 9.2El8 Maximumreporttimefor all exceptionreportsin this seg-
-
ment(secs)
S7 N 1.000 R 0.0 9.2E18 Alarmdeadbandfor all highand low alarmreportsin this
-
segment(7oof sPan)
S8 N 1.000 R Full Modulebus l/O period(secs)

SegmentControlBlock
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 106 - 1
FunctionCode10b

SP ECIFI CATI OruS@ontin

ued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S9 N 0.000 R Full Spare
sl0 N 0 I Full Spare

EXPLANATION

The segment control block dfddes the set of functlon blocks

triTan IMLMMO2 logtc Master Module lnto subsets (segments),
and specifies the operatlng parameters for each segment lndl-
vldually. A segment starts wittr a segment control block and
ends at the next hfgher segment control block or last block.
For example, tf the eonflguratton has a seglrrent control block
ln block IOOO, the module has two segments of block nrrm-
bers. The frrst segment contalns blocks 15 through 999, and
the seeond segment contalns bloeks 10OO through IO23 (the
last configurable block). F)rced block 15 contatns one seglnent
control block, wlth outputs occupylng blocks 16 and 17.
Blocks f 5 through 17 cannot be uiia for any other purpose.
The other seven segrnent control blocks c€rn be placed tn arry
configurable block.

Specifications

sl - sPRl (*gment prioriU) Speciflcation Sl asstgns executlon priorl-

tles to up to eight active segments. An actlve segment ls one
that is ready to run or ls running. If two or more segments are
active, the processor runs the hfghest prtority segment. Seg-
ment priorities run from zero to 255 with zero betng the low-
est priorit5r.

When configuring rnultiple segments, make sure that each

segment runs withh the requested cycle tlme. To detennlne
whether a segment is mnning wtthtn the requested cycle
time, observe outputs N and N+1. If output N+l ls contlnually
ramping up, then the segment ls not runnlng. ThJs occuris
when higher priorlty segments consume all the proeessor
time. If output N is greater than the requested cycle tlme set
by S3, the segment is consumlng more processor time tharr
indirectly requested. When thls happerls, cycle tJme must be
increased until Sg is equal to the time lt really takes to elce-
cute the segment (includtng lower prtorfty segments).

s 2 - AUTOSEO (Auto sequeneing signa,l) Speclflcation 52 ls the auto

sequencing signal.

Q=off
l=oI1

If the auto sequencing function ls off (SZ equals zero), blocks

are executed in ascending numertcal order. If the auto

SegmentControlBlock
106 - 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code10b

sequenctng functton ls on (S2 equals one), tlte module creates

a memory map when tntttallzed. It flnds and saves the most
logtcal executlon order, and tlle functlon blocks tn that seg-
ment are executed ln that order, regardless of block numbers.
Auto sequenctng helps prevent loop backs. [.oop backs occur
when a block requlres the output of a hlgher numbered block
to complete tts executlon. Ttre segment must then go through
two or more executlon cycles before the output of the ftrst
block ls coreet. Loop backs c€rn slgnlflcantly lncrease appar-
ent module executlon tlme ln complex loops.

53 - CYCTIM (tolrget *gment execution cgele time ln *eondsl In each

segment, blocks are executed tn a predeflned order, selected
with 52. A cycle conststs of one executlon of the blocks plus
any idle tlme (cycle tJme rematntng after the cycle has been
exicuted). C5rcle ttme ls the length of ttme from the start of
one cycle to the start of the next cycle.

54 - CYCALM (segment cgele time ollarm limit) Spectflcatlon S4 ls the

segment cycle tlme alarm llmtt (tn seconds).

S5 - MINXTM (Minimum intentol fufiiteen updates) Spectficatlon S5 is the

minlmum interval between updates of lnformatlon sent on the
communicatlon hlghway. Exception reports urill not be sent
on the loop at each minimum exceptlon report lnterval unless
a value has changed slnce the last exceptlon report.

56 - MAUTM (tlaximum intentql betuteen updatcs) Speciflcatlon SO is

ttre ma:dmum interval between updates of tnformation sent
on t5e corrmunlcatlon htghway. If the value of a polnt has not
changed over tJrts tlme pertod, a report of tts value wtll auto-
mattcally be sent on the loop at the end of thts tlme perlod.

57 - ALMDB (Alorm deadband) Speclficatlon SZ ts the alarm deadband ln

percent of span for all hfgh and low alarm reports ln the mod-
ule. Alarm deadbands are buffer zottes that prevent excessive
alarm reports when a vdue ls hovering around the alarrt
llmlt.

58 I MBUS (Module brrs IIO period) Spectficatlon SB ts the module bus

l/O perlod for tllis segment, expressed ln seconds. This is the
interval between updates of module bus I/O. Thls should be a
multiple of the segment cycle tlme (S3).

59 and 510 Spare.

Outputs

N Output N ts the elapsed time of the previous cycle in seconds.

Elapsed time includes any segment tdle tlme. If the time
tequired to run the block ts less than the requested cycle
Ume, the remainder ts ldle tlme spent waltln$ before starttng
ttre next cycle. Any ldle tlme ls avatlable for lourer prfority

SegmentControlBlock
15 FEB 1995 106- 3
l-Eg6-200B
FunctionCode106

segments. Output N verifies that the actual cycle tlme eguals

the specified cycle time (S3). If the output ls greater than the
requested cycle time set by 53, the segment ls consumlng
more processor tlme than requested. If thls happens, Sg
must be increased untll N ls equal to the tlme lt talces to run
the segment.

The cycle time alarm ls also dlsplayed ln output N.

N+1 Output N+ I is the elapsed ttme of the current executlon cycle

in seconds. Elapsed tlme does not lnclude any segment ldle
time. It is a measure of the actual mntlme of the bloeks
within the segment, plus tJ:e block runtlme of all hlgher prlor-
ity segments that have intermpted it. Output N+l verlfles
that the segment is mnning. A continual upward ramp fndt-
cates that the segment ls not runntng or completlng. Thls
occurs when higher priority segments consume all the pro-
cessor time.

N+2 Output N+2 is the percentage of processor utlllzatJon used by

this segment. Processor utilizatton ls glven for the prevlous
cycle. Therefore, the percent given ls not relative to cycle tlme
but to execution time per cycle (actud time tt takes for the
processor to complete one full cycle).

SegmentControlBlock
1 0 6- 4 1s FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 1OT- GroupUODefinition(IMLMM02)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The group l/O deflnltlon functlon code deflnes the local IIO
for an IMLMMO2 loglc Master Module. Thls functlon code
pertalns only to IMLMMO2 loglc Master Modules. Up to 24
groups of etght llo polnts (total of L92 l/O pofnts) can be
addressed. Each group of potnts can be deflned as €rn lnput
group, an output gfoup, a loglc statlon trrput group, a loglc
statlon output group, or remaln unasslgned. [,Jnasslgned
potnts may be used for loglc functlolls.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B CompositEof UOmoduleand stationstatus:
Q= good
1 =bad
N + [groupno. x (8+S3)J
+ B Value of point in block
pointin group

SPECIFICATIO,,NS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus l/O moduleaddressfor the beginningof this
groupUOdefinitionblock
S2 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus UOmoduleaddressof the |MDSMOS usedfor
digitallogicstiationinterfacefor this groupyO definitionblock
S3 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Additionalblockcountincreasesthe numberof reserved
blocksin a group
S4 N 0 0 Reserved
S5 N 0 o-14r, Definitionof group0
S6 N 0 o-I4g, Definitionof grouP1
S7 N 0 o-l4/, Definitionof group2
S8 N 0 I 0-l4d, Definitionof grouP3

GroupI/O Definition(IMLM\4qA
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 0 7- 1
FunctionCode fi7

SPECI F ICATIOruS@ontinued)

Spee Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S9 N 0 o-l4l, Definitionof group4
sl0 N 0 0-144 Definitionof group5
s11 N 0 0-144 Definitionof group6
s12 N 0 0-14/, Definitionof group7
sl3 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group8
sl4 N 0 o-l4/} Definitionof group9
sl5 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group10
sl6 N 0 o-l4y', Definitionof group11
s17 N 0 o-14y', Definitionof group12
sl8 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group13
sl9 N 0 0-144 Definitionof group14
s20 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group 15
s21 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group 16
s22 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group17
s23 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group18
s24 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group19
s25 N 0 0-144 Definitionof group 20
s26 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group21
s27 N 0 0-144 Definitionof group22
s28 N 0 o-144 Definitionof group23

EXPLANATION

NDSMO3, IMDSMOS, NDSI0f and IMDSIO2 Dlgital Slave Mod-

ules provide field l/O to IMLMMO2 Ingtc Master Modules.
Table 107-I shows the l/O capabllltles.

Table 707-7. IlO Capabilfltes oJIMLMMO? Mod;tlJes

Module UO
IMDSMOS Twogroupsof 8 inputs.
IMDSMOs Twogroupsof 8 l/O points:16 inputsor 16ouputs, or 8 inputsand 8
outputs,or intedaceto up to 8 digitallogicstations.
NDSIOl Twogroupsof 8 inputs.
IMDSI02
IMDSOOl Onegroupof I outputs.
IMDSOO2
rMDSOos
IMDSOO4 Twogroupsof 8 outputs.

The 24 possible groups of IlO point spectflcations (S5 to S28)

are definable from zero to I I 1. Group slze ts conflgurable wfth
53, with the default group slze belrg eight potnts. When
group size is increased (to ten for example) only the flrst eight
blocks contain l/O points. fire remalning blocks in the group
(two in this example) €rre available for logtc functtolts.

GroupI/ODefinition(|MLMMO2)
1 0 7- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode107

Specifications

S1 - SLVADR Spectflcatlon Sf ls the e4pander bus UO module address for

tlre beginntng of thls group llo definltlon block (address of the
UO module contatrrlng the l/O for grouP reto).

52 I DLSADR Speeiflcatlon 52 ls the e{pander bus l/O module address of

the IMDSMOS module used €rs the dlgttal loglc statlon lnter-
face for thts group l/O deflnttlon block.

S3 - ADDBLK Speclflcatlon Sg ts the addltlonal block count. Ttte addttfonal

block count lncreases the number of blocks tn a grouP.

ADDBLK= Requiredgroup size- I

The deliault group slze ts etglrt block addresses (ADDBLK equals

znrol. To lncrease the group slre, to 1l block addresses per grouP,
ADDBLK equals three. Only the first elght blocks of a goup con-
talr I/O poirets, rro matter what the sfrn, of tlre group. All addi-
florral blocks can be used for logtc furrctions or left emPty.

Thls optlon lnsures that all outputs of a parttcular functlon

block are in the same group, maklng them easler to access. For
orample, funcflon code 161 (sequence generator) has 11 out-
puts, eigtrt of which are I/O values. All ttre outputs should be ln
a single group. The first etglrt outputs are values of UO polnts,
and the firnction block generates the three rematnln$ outputs.

S4 Resenred.

S5-S28 - GRPn Specifications 55 through S28 are ttre deflnlttons of the UO

tlpe associated urlth grouP n.

where:0SnS23

To speciff group t1pes, llse the equation:

<Si>=NXX
H- Typeof polnts ln group:
ViaUO modules
(x) = unusedgroup
01 = processinputs
o2 = processouFuts
Onbard |MLMMO?
03 = localprocessinputgrouP
(H = localprocessoutputgroup
Digitallogic station
0Y = addressof the digitallogicstation0 to 7
lY = inputs(10ms pulse)
2Y = ouputs groupA
3Y = outputsgroupB
4Y = inputs(sustained)
Trip optlon selector:
O= Trip logicmastermoduleon UOmodulefailure
1 = Disabletrip

Groupl/O Definition(lML[4ltlqa
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 107- 3
FunctionCode 1OT

The range of block numbers in the unu,*d. gllrup can be

used for logic functions.

No logic functions may be placed ln the blocks tn the pnooess

inputs r€rnge.The block referenced wtll contaln the nalue of a
dtgltal tnput from the fleld.

ny output or logic functlon may be asstgned to bloch numbers

ln tJ:e pnoc'ess outltutsrange. If a bloe* deflned as an output
performs a logic functlon, then the output of that block drlves
the hardurare as if it were an output.

Ttre loccrl pnoc'ess ittltut g7vrup ts deflned as the elght

onboard tnputs of the IMLMMO2 module. No loglc functtons
may be placed in the blocks ln this range. Ttre bloeh rder-
enced vrlll contain the value of a dtgttal tnput from ttre lleld.

Ttre loccl pnocess outltut gilvrup ls deffned as the elght

onboard outputs of tJ:e IMLMMO2. Arry output or logflc func-
tion may be asslgned to block numbers fn ftts range. If a
block dellned as an output performs a loglc functlon, then the
output of that block drives the hardware as tf lt were an out-
put.

ln digital logic sto;tion inyrut (pul.*), lY spectlies the

address of the logic staHon set by the dtpswitches on the sta-
tion (zero to seven). Presstng ttre logic station pushbutton
generates a pulse signal urith a duratlon of ten vnllllssgsnds.
Drgrtal logic stations provtde pulse or sustatned tnputs. Do
not ldentiff a group of pulse inputs as sustalned lnputs or
vice versa, or the input group will not functlon properly.

ln digital logic station output gnDup A" 2Y specifles tJre

address of the logic station as set by dtpsmrltcheson the sta-
tion. Any logic or output functton may be asstgned to blocks
in tlis range. If a block defined as an output performs a loglc
function, then the output of ttrat block drlves the hardware
like an output.

ln digital logic stction output gtoup B, 3Y specilles the

address of the logic statlon as set by dipsnrltches on ttre sta-
tion. Any logic or output functlon may be asslgned to blocks
in this range. If a block defined as an output performs a logic
function, then the output of that block drlves the hardvrare
like an output.

In digital logic sto;tion input (sustolined),4Y specifles the

address of the logic station as set by the dipswitches on the
station. A sustained signal will be generated for the related
block number when a log[c station pushbutton is pressed.
The signal is sustained as long as the pushbutton is
depressed. Digital logic stattons provide pulse or sustalned
inputs with the digital loglc statlon funcflon code. Do not
identlfy a group of pulse tnputs as sustalned Irputs or vlcc

Groupl/O Definition(lMLMMO2)
107-4 15 FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode107

versa. The lnput group wfil not functlon ProPerly. Only the
stauon hardware address (zero to seven) ls requlred to deflne
the lnput groups ln thts block.

Outputs

N Output N ls a composlte of UO module and statlon status.

Q = good
I =bad

All other btock numbers are deflned by the equatlon:

Btockfto.= N+[groupno. x (8+ S3)J+pointin group (1 to I + S3)

To read the output of a block, determlne the block number

ustng the equatlon shown above, then monltor that block
from t]:e operator [irterface devtce. The output of t]re block ls
an actual l/O module output polnt only tf the polnt asslgned
to the block ls defined as an output. The I/O module output
point will be a boolean slgnd representlng the output value of
the block assigned to lt.

Groupl/O Definition(lMLh/1M02)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 107- 5
ffi

I
 FunctionGode108- ExtendedExecutive(IMLMM02)

GENERATDESCRIPTIO'V

The executlve block functlon code deflnes the varlables that

affect module operatlons. Outputs 18 and 19 dtsplay memory
uttlization percentages for the IMLMMO2 Ingtc Master Mod-
ule. Functlon code f 08 ls used wlth functlon codes 105, 106
arrd lO7 to define module operatlons. Thls functJon code per-
talrrs only to IMLMMO? loglc Master Modules. It resldes in
flxed block 18 and occuples the next flve functlon blocks.
There Erre no speclflcatlons for thls functlon code. Function
code 1O8 outputs lnternal module lnformatloll.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Description

18 R NVRAMmemoryutilization(%)
19 R RAMmemoryutilization(%)
20 -23 Reserved

SPECIFICATIOIVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 0 I Full Reserved
S2 N 0 I Full Reserved
S3 N 0 Full Reserved
S4 N 0 Full Reserved
S5 N 0.000 R Full Reserved
S6 N 0.000 R Full Reserved

ExtendedExecutive(|MLMMO2)
l-Eg6-200B 15FEB1995 1 0 8- 1
FunctionCode108

EXPLANATION

Outputs

18 Output f8 displays the I{\IRAI\{ memory utlllzatlon. ThIs ls

the total percentage of III\ZRAIVImemory consumed by all con-
figured blocks in the IMLMM02 module.

19 Output 19 is the total percentage of RAIVImemory consumed

by all configured blocks in the IMLMMO? module.

20-23 Reserved.

ExtendedExecutive(|MLMMO2)
1 0 8- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode109- PulselnpuUDuration

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The pulse tnput/duratton functlon code tnterfaces a module

to a selected channel of an IMDSMO4 hrlse Input Slave Mod-
ule. F'trnctlon code log speclfles the duratlon of the lnput
pulses. The IMDSMO4 module condltlorls, converts and pro-
cesses pulse lnputs lnto andog slgnds. It has elght lnput
channels whose tnputs can be processed ln three modes
(perlod, frequency and totaltzatton). Functlon codes LOz, l0g
arrd LO4 process slgnals ln the pertod, frequency and totallr'a-
uon modes, respecttvely. Each lnput channel must have one
and only one pulse lnput bloek configured.

UT'LIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK TVpe Descrlptlon

N R Pulseduration (seconds)
x gain
N+1 B Pulsedurationhighalarm:
0 = Doalarm
1 = highalarm
N+2 B Pulsedurationlowalarm:
0 = oo alarm
1 = low alarm
N+3 B l/O modulecommunication status:
Q= good
1=bad

SPECIFICATIO^|S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus UOmoduleaddressof |MDSM04
S2 N 1 I 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 ,Selected channel
6 , 7 o r8
S3 N 0 B 0or1 Pulsetriggerlevel(startof durationmeasurements):
0 = low to hightransitions
1 = highto low transitions

PulseInpuVDuration
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 0 9- 1
FunctionCode 109

SPECIFI CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deserlptlon

S4 N 1 1, 2 , 3 ,4 , 5 Expectedpulsedurationrange:
or6 1 = 0.1 msecto 6.55secs
2 = 1.0 msecto 65.5secs
3 = 10.0msecsto 655.4secs
4 = 0.1 sec to 6,553.5secs
5 = 1.0sec to 65,535secs
6 = 10.0secsto 655,350secs
S5 Y 1.000 R Full Gain
S6 Y 9.2E+l8 R Full High alarm value
S7 Y -9.2E+l8 R Full Lowalarmvalue
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Reserued

EXPLANATION

The pulse input/duratlon function code speclfles an trpected

pulse duratiorr.. It outputs the duratlon (multfphed by a galn,
55) of the last pulse to occur during the eonflgured pulse
duration range 54. If no pulse occurs, the output remalns at
the last t:;ort-zero value. It provides alarms tf the pulse lnput
exceeds the selected hJgh and low limlts. The trtgger trartsl-
tion level (begite count on low-to-high or hfgh-to-low transl-
tion) and gain for the output can be selected.

Specifications

S1 - SLVADR Specification Sl is the expander bus UO module address of

IMDSMO4 module. Valid addresses are zero to 63.

52 - CHNL Specification 52 identifies the input channel belng monltored.

IMDSMO4 modules have eight input channels. Refer to the
IMDS,MO4 Digital lllodule product lnstmctlon to ldenflS the
channel associated with each lnput.

53 - PTRIG Specification 53 defines the tSpe of slgnal transltion that tflg-

gers the counter response.

O - response on low to hlgh transltlons

I = r€sponse on high to low transltlons

S4 - RANGE Specification 54 defines the expected rzrnge of tJre pulse dura-

tion. There are six ranges:

I = O.I millisecond to 6.55 seconds

2 = 1.0 millisecond to 65.5 seconds
$ = lO.O milliseconds to 655.4 seconds
4 = O.I second to 6,553.4 seconds
5 - 1.0 second to 65,535 seconds
6 - 10.O seconds to 655,350 seconds

PulseInpuUDuration
109 - 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 109

If the tnput pulse duratton ls greater than the expected nange,

output block N freezes wlth the last \raltd pulse duratlon and
tlre I/O module communlcatlon status ehanges to a one (bad).

5 5 I K Spectllcatlon 55 deflnes the gatn multlpller. The gatn multl-

pller ls the value that scales the output to a useful value for
control purposes.

56 - HALRM Spectflcatlon 56 ls the pulse duratlon hfgh alarm. When the

measured pulse duratlon exceeds thts value, output N+ 1
equals one.

s 7 - LALRM Speclflcatlon SZ ls the pulse duratton low alarm value. When

the measured pulse duratton ls less than thts value, output
N+2 equals one.

s8 Reserved.

Outputs

N Output N ts the pulse duratlon (seconds) tfmes the gain.

N+1 Output N+t ls the pulse duratton htgh alarm lndlcator.

Q = no alarm
I - pulse drrration has exceeded htgb alarm Umit set by 56

N+2 Output N+2 ls the pulse duratton low alarrn lndlcator.

Q = no alarm
f = pulse duratton ls shorter than low alanrr llmlt set by 57

N+3 Output N+3 is the UO module communlcatlon status.

Q = good
I =bad

UO module ls marked bad tf:

. There ls an lllegal I/O module response or no UO module

resPonse.

. No pulses have been received Yet.

. The pulse duratlon exceeds the expected range.

PulseInpuUDuration
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 109- 3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode110- Rung(s-lnPut)

GENERALDESCR/,Pr'ON

Ftrnctlon code f 10 lmplements a rung of a ladder loglc Pro-

gram (relay bpe). It accepts flve boolean lnput slgnals and
perforrns a fundamental operatlon on eaclr fieput tn seguen-
Ual order. Aft,er each lnput ls operntcd of,, the resulttng
value goes to the top of the stack. The output of the rung
block ls the value on the top of the stack unless Sl forces lt to
another vahle.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Ouput valuedeterminedby S1 and valueon top of stack
lf Sl = 0, output= valueon top of stack
lf S1 = 1, output= proviousvalueof output
lf 51 = 2, ouput = logic0
lf 51 = 3, output= logic1

SPECtFICATTO^'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Ouput descriPton
0 = DoffTl8l
1 = holdpreviousvalue
2 = lorce outputto logic0
3 = forceoutputto logic1
S2 Y 0 l o-242 Operationperformedon inPut1
S3 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon inPut2
S4 Y 0 0-242 Operationperformedon inPut3
S5 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon inPut4
S6 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon inPut5
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input1
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inPut2
S9 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input3

Rung(S-lnput)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 1 0- 1
FunctionCode110

SPECIFI CATIONS @ontin

ued)

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range I)'escrlptlon

s10 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input4
sl1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input5
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 1023 for |MLMM02 and SLC01|21
2046 for CBC01, CSC01, NMFCAIIO?,IMMFCOSand lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOUOAO3

EXPLANATION

ThIs block accepts flve boolean lnputs, performs a speclfled

fundamental operation on each tnput ln tunl, and provtdes
an output dependent on the results of the operatlons and the
output mode selected wlth 51.

The module takes a ladder progr€rm entered on an engtneer-

ing work station or another progfammtng terrntnd and trans-
lates it to a group of rung blocks lnterndly (refer to the
Persona,l @mputer Softutore La,ddrlr Pl,:ogra,mming prod-
uct instruction for operating lnstmctlons). Any changes made
to the ladder program after the converslon are easlly saved by
downloading thern to the module. Thls lnsures that all lnfor-
mation is in the proper format when it ls processed.

The function code the rlng ls translated to depends on the

number of inputs to the rung. Thts ls automatlcally deftned Xr
the IMMPCOI, NMFCOI, NMFCOZ, IMMFCOS and IMLMMO2
modules by the PC9O tadder programmer. Ftgures l lo-l and
I f O-2 illustrate how to use tJre rLrng functlon codes (1 lO, I I l,
f f 2) wtthout the PC90 ladder programmer.

AM, OR and PIJT operations are performed sequentially on

inputs one through five as specified urith 52 through 56. The
PLJT operation places the speclfied vdue on top of a stack of
values. Tlte result of tJre most eurrent operatlon always goes to
the top of the stack. The value resulting from operatlon one ls
placed on a stack that has an iniilal value of zero in the
IMLMMO2 module and one in the NMFCOI, NMFCO?,
IMMFCOS and IMMPCOI modules. Operation two is then per-
formed, and the resulting value becomes the value on top of
the stack, and so on through operation five. Once all opera-
tions have been performed, the module reads 51 to determlne
the output value. If lt is ?.eto, the value from the top of the
stack (the result of operation five) ts the output. Otherwlse, the
output is overridden and forced to zero or one or held from the
previous output. The value on the top of the stack reverts to
the inifial value at the begtnning of each module execution
c5rcle, so the frrst operation should always be a PUT to insure
that the operations are performed on the deslred values.

Rung(s-lnput)
1 1 0- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode110

Specifications

51 T OUT (Output deseriptor) Speclflcatton Sl defures the output:

Q = Normal output. The value of the output wtll be the

value on top of the stack when all operatlons on lnputs
are complete.

I = Hold prevlous output. The value of tJre output wtll be

the prevlous output vdue, regardless of the value on
top of the stack.

/ = Force output to loglc O. The vdue of the output wtll be

logte O regardless of the value on top of the stack.

g = Force output to loglc 1. The value of the output wlll be

logic I regardless of the value on top of the stack.

52toS6- These specificatlons identlff:

Fl to F5
l. The operatlon to be performed on the lnput.

2. The tnput value the operatlon ls performed oll.

3. The input overrlde.

Spectflcatlon lnformatlon for 52 through SG ts ln the format:

x x x
L Operatlon
)fiO = PUTvalue on top of stack
X)(l = ANDvaluewith value on top of stack
XXZ= OR valuewith value on top of stack

State of lnput Acted On

XOX= Usevaluefromstack(0 or 1)
XlX = Uselogicalstiateof input(0 or 1)
)eX = Use logicalstrateof invertedinput (0 or 1)
X3X= Performoperationwheninputmakesa 0 to 1 transition(1)
X4X= Performoperationwheninputmakesa 1 to 0 transition(0)

OverrldeIndlcator
0)(X= No inputoveride
l)fi = Forceinputto logic 1
zXX= Forceinputto logic0

57 to S11 - Spectficatlons 57 through S11 are the block addresses of

INl to INS lnputs one through five.

Outputs

N Output N ls dependent on vdue on top of the stack and the

value of S 1.

If Sl = O, outpuf = value on top of the stack.

l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995
FunctionCode 110

If SI = 1, output = previous vdue of output, regardless of

the value on top of the stack.

If Sf = 2, output = lo$c O, regardless of the vdue on top of

the stack.

If Sl = 3, output = logtc l, regardless of thevalue ontop of

the stack.

APPLICATIO.,fUS

Ftgures f lO-1 and llo-2 lllustrate the operatlons the ladder

programmer performs lnternally. Ia.dder loglc uses the loglc
states of various inputs to drive devlces. Flgure ll0-1 ls one
rung of a ladder program. Flgure LLO-? ls the AI$D/OR logtc
representing that rung. The spectflcatlons ltst shows the
lnformatlon entered by the operator tn order to lmplement
thls logle Ir a module when not uslng the ladder prog mmer.
The ladder programmer translates the ladder loglc created by
the operator direcfly into rung function blocks that curn be
downloaded to a module.

(1) (z) (4) (s)

-J H l- ourPur
I

(3)
TW25

Figure 77O-7. Four InputWic fuutg

TP45182C

Figure 110-2. AAID-ORl-qtc Representation

of Ladder Rurg unFigure 7IO-7

Rung(s-lnput)
110-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode110

Specifications

sl - 0 Output value on toP of stack.

s2 - 010 No inrput override, use loglcd state of trEput, PIJT value on top
of stack.

s3 - 011 No trirput overrlde, use loglcd state of fnput, AIID wlth value
on top of stack.

s4 ? o12 No lnput override, rlse loglcd state of tnput, OR wtth vdue on

top of stack.

s5 - 021 No lnput overrlde, use loglcal state of lnverted lnput, ANID

wtth value on top of stack.

s6 - 011 No llput override, use loglcal state of tnverted tnput, AIID

with value on top of stack.

s7 Block address of lnput one.

s8 Block address of tnPut two.

s9 Block address of lnput three.

sl 0 Block address of tnput four.

sl1 Bloek address of lnPut five.

The circuit is complete when tnput flve equals one and lnput
four equals zero, and elther lnputs one and two, or tnput
three is tnre (Ftg. I I O-21.

NOTE:The PC90ladderprogrammeris bestsuitedfor ladderpro-

grammingtype logic (refer to the PC90 Ladder Programmlng
Softwareinstruction).

Rung(S-lnput)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 1 0- 5
ffi
I

t
 FunctionCode111- Rung(1O-lnput)

GENERALDESCN/PNON

Ftrnctlon code 1l f lmplements a rung of a ladder loglc pro-

grarn (relay bpe). It accepts ten boolean lrrput slgnals and
perfonns a fundarnental operatlon on each tnput ln sequelt-
Ual order. After each lnput ls opera;tr;d of,, the resulting
vdue goes to the top of the stack. Ttte output of tlle rung
block ls the value on the top of the stack unless Sl forces lt to
anottrer vahle.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Ouput valuedeterminedby 51 andvalueon top of stack.
lf Sl = 0, output= valuoon top of stack
lf S1 = 1, output= previousvalueof output
If S1 = 2, ouput = logic0
lf 51 = 3, ouput = logic1

SPECIFICAT'OA'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Ouput descriptor:
0 = OOIrD?l
I = holdpreviousvalue
2 = force outputto logic 0
$ = forceoutputto logic I
S2 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon inPut1
S3 Y 0 l o-242 Operationperformedon inPut2
S4 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon inPut3
S5 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon inPut4
S6 Y 0 I 0-242 Operationperformedon inPut5
S7 Y 0 l 0-242 Operationperformedon input6
S8 Y 0 0-242 Operationperformedon inPut7
S9 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon inPut8

Rung(1O-lnput)
l-Eg6-200B ls FEB1995 1 1 1- 1
FunctionCode111

nued)
SPE CIFI CAT, O,wS@onti

Spec Tune Default Type Range I),escrlptlon

sl0 Y 0 I 0-242 Operationperformedon input9
sl1 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperfonnedon input10
s12 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input1
sl3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input2
sl4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input3
s15 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input4
sl6 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input5
sl7 N 0 Note1 Blockaddressof input6
sl8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input7
sl9 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputI
s20 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input9
s21 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input10
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare: 1023for |MLMM02andSLC01|21
2046for NMFC01|02,|MMFC05,CBC01andCSCO1andIMMPCOl
9998for |MMFCOS/O4and lMMFPDll0UOg

EXPLANATION

This block accepts ten boolean inputs, performs a spectfled

fundamental operation on each lnput Ir turn, and provldes
an output dependent on the results of the operafions and the
output mode selected with 51.

The module internally translates a ladder program entered on

an engineering work station or another pro$rammtn$ terml-
nal and translates it to a group of rung blocks (refer to the
Percon;o;l @mputer Softnore Ladder Progrtemmlng prod-
uct instnrction for operattng lnstmctlons). Arry changes made
to the ladder program after the converslon €rre easlly saved by
downloadlng ttrem to tJre module. Thls lnsures that all tnfor-
mation ls tn the proper format when lt ls processed.

The function code that tJ:e rlrng ls translated to depends on the

number of inputs to the rtrng. Thts ls automatlcally deflned tn
the module by the PC9O ladder programmer. Refer to functlon
code 110 for an exarnple of using the rung function codes (110,
I I 1, I 12) without ttre PC9O ladder programmer.

AI{D, OR and PLJT operations are performed sequentially on

inputs one through ten as specified with 52 through Sf f . TIr,e
PUT operation plaees the specifled value on top of a stack of
values. The result of the most cllrrent operatlon always goes
to the top of the stack. Ttre value resulttng from operatlon one
is placed on a stack \Mith €rn lniflal value of zero ln the
IMLMMO2 and one in the NMFCOI, NMFCO?, IMMFCOS and
IMMPCOI modules. Operatlon two ts then performed, and the
resulting value becomes the value on top of the stack, and so
on through operation ten.

Rung(10-lnput)
1 1 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode111

Once all operatlons have been performed, t}re module reads Sl

to determtne the outputvdue. If lt ls zero, the value from the top
of the stactr (the result of operatlon ten) ts the oudlut. Otherwise
tlre output ls overrldden and forced to rnto or one or held from
the prevlous output. The value on the top of tlre stack reverts to
the hfflal value at the beglnnfng of each module e:(ecuflon cycle,
so the flrst operaflon should always be a PIJT to tnsure that the
operations are performed on the destred values.

(OtLWut dsriptor) Speclflcatlon S1 defures the output:

Q = Normal output. The vdue of the output wtll be the

value on top of tl:e stack when all operatlons on tnputs
are complete.

I = Hold prevlous output. The value of the output will be

the prevlous output value, regardless of the value on
top of the stack.

2 = Force output to loglc O. The value of the output will be

loglc O regardless of the value on top of tl:e stack.

g = Force output to logic 1. The value of tj:e output will be

logic I regardless of ttre value on top of the stack.

52 to S11- These specificatlons ldentlff:

F1 to F10
l. The operation to be performed on the lnput.

2. The tnput value the operatlon ls performed on.

3. Ttre input overrlde.

Speclflcation lnformatlon for 52 through Sl f ts h the format:

x x x
l- operatlon
)(X0 = PUTvalueon top of stack
X)(l = ANDvaluewithvalueon top of stack
)Oe = OR valuewith valueon top of stack
State of Input Acted On
XOX= Usevaluefromstack(0 or 1)
XlX = Uselogicalstrateof input(0 or 1)
)eX = Uselogicalstateof invertedinput(0 or 1)
X3X= Performoperationwheninputmakesa 0 to 1 transition(1)
X4X = Performoperationwhen inputmakesa 1 to 0 transition(0)
OverrldeIndlcator
O)fi = No inputoverride
l)fi = Forceinputto logic1
2X)( = Forceinputto logic0

S12 to S21 - Spectficauons S12 through S21 are tJle block addresses of
lNl to lNl0 inputs one through ten.

Rung(10-lnpu|
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 1 1- 3
FunctionCode 111

Outputs

N Output N is dependent on value on top of the stack and tl:e

value of S1.

If Sl = O, outpuf = value on top of the stack.

If Sf = l, outpuf = prevtous value of output, regardless of the

value on top of the stack.

If S I = 2, output = logic O, regardless of the value on top of the

stack.

If S I = 3, output = loglc 1, regardless of the value on top of the

stack.

APPLICATIO'VS

Refer to the ex€unple ln function code 1lO.

Rung(10-lnput)
1 1 1- 4 ls FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode112- Rung(2O'lnput)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

F\rnctlon code ll2 tmplemerrts a rung of a ladder loglc Program

(relay type). It aocepts 20 boolean lnput slgnals and performs a
fundamental operaflon on each lnput ln sequentlal order. After
each lnput ls operated, otL the resulflng value goes to the top
of the stack. Ttte output of ttre rung blocls ls the value on the
top of the stadr unless Sl forces lt to another value.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Outputvaluedeterminedby 51 and valueon top of stack.
lf S1 = 0, output= valueon top of stack
lf 51 = 1, output= previousvalueof ouFut
ff S1 = 2, output= logic0
lf Sl = 3, ouFut = logic1

SPECIFICAT'ONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Outputdescriptor:
0 = Doffr|3l
1 = holdpreviousvalue
2 = torceoutputto logic0
3 = forceouput to logic1
S2 Y 0 o-242 Operationperformedon inPut1
S3 Y 0 o-242 Operationperformedon inPut2
S4 Y 0 o - 2 4 2 Operationperformedon inPut3
S5 Y 0 o-242 Operationperformedon inPut4
S6 Y 0 o-242 Operationperformedon inPut5
S7 Y 0 o - 2 4 2 Operationperformedon inPut6
S8 Y 0 o-242 Operationperformedon inPut7
S9 Y 0 o-242 Operationperformedon inPut8
sl0 Y 0 o-242 Operationperformedon inPut9

Rung(20-lnpu0
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 112-1
FunctionCode 112

SPECI Fl CATIO,ifS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s11 Y 0 I 0-242 Operationperformedon input10
sl2 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon input 11
sl3 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon input 12
sl4 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon input13
sls Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon Input14
sl6 Y 0 I o-242 Operationpedormedon input 15
sl7 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon input 16
sl8 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon input17
sl9 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon input18
s20 Y 0 I 0-242 Operationperformedon input19
s21 Y 0 I o-242 Operationperformedon input20
s22 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input1
s23 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input2
s24 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input3
s25 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof nput4
s26 N 0 Note 1 Block address of nput5
s27 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof nput6
s28 N 0 Note1 Block address of nput7
s29 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of input 8
s30 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of input 9
s31 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of input 10
s32 N 0 Note 1 Block address of input 11
s33 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of input 12
s34 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input13
s3s N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input14
s36 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input15
s37 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof input16
s38 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof input17
s39 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input18
s40 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of input 19
s41 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input20
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 1023 for IMLMMO2and SLC01/21
z04,OforNMFC01/02,|MMFC0S,CBC01, CSCO1and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFC0S/04and lMMFP0l/0203

EXPLANATION

This block accepts 20 boolean hputs, and perforrns a specl-

fied fundamental operafion on each lnput ln turn. The block
then provides an output dependent on the results of the oper-
ations and the output mode selected with Sl.

The module talces a ladder program entered on an englneertng

work station or another progfammtng termtnal and translates tt
to a group of rung blocks lnternally (refer to the Petsona.l (Crrm-
puter fuffut o;re Ladder Hograntming product lnstrucflon

Rung(2O-lnput)
112-2 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 112

for operatlng tnstnrcflons). Any charlges made to tlre ladder

program aft,er the converslon are eastly saved by dourntoading
them to the module. Thls lnsures that all tnformation ls irrr the
proper format when tt ts Processed.

The functlon code that the rung ls translated to depends on

the number of lrrputs to tJle rung. Thls ls automatlcally
deflned tn the module by the PC9O ladder progFarrmer. Ustng
the rung functlon codes (11O, 111, I I2l wlthout the PC90
ladder programmer ls tllustrated ln functlon code 110.

AM, OR and PUT operattons are performed seguenttally on

inputs one through 2O as speclfled wlth S2 through S2f . TIle
pIJT operation places the specified vdue on top of a stack of
values. Ttre result of tJre most curTent operatlon always goes
to the top of tJre stack. The vdue resultlng from operatlon one
ts placed on a stack wtth an ilrfflal value of zeto ln the
IMLMMO2 module and one tn the NMFCOI, NMFCO?,
IMMFCoS and IMMPCOI modules. Ttren, operatlon two is per-
formed, ald the resultlng value becomes ttre value on top of
the stack, and so on through operatlon 20. Once att opera-
tlons have been performed, ttre module reads Sl to determlne
the output value. If ft ts zero, the value from the top of the
stack (the result of operatlon 2Ol ts the output. Otlrerwtse tJle
output is overridden and forced to zero or one or held from
the prevlous output. The value on the top of the stack reverts
to t]re inftht value at the beglnnlrg of each module executlon
cycle, so the first operatton should always be a PUT to insure
that the operations are performed on the deslred values.

Specifications

sl - our (Output deseriptor) Speclficatlon Sl defines the output:

Q = Normal output. The value of tlle output will be the

value on top of the stack when all operatlons on inputs
are complete.

I = Hold previous output. The value of the output will be

the previous output value, regardless of the value on
top of the stack.

) =Force output to loglc O. The value of the output wtll be

logic O regardless of the value on top of the stack.

g = Force output to logtc 1. The value of the output will be

loglc 1 regardless of the value on top of the stack.

52 to S21- These speclficatlons identiff:

Fl to F2O
l. The operation to be performed on the input.

2. The tnput value the operatlon ls performed oI1.

Rung(2O-lnput)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 1 2- 3
FunctionCode 112

3. The lnput overrlde.

Specification information for 52 through S21 ls tn the format:

x x x
L operatlon
)fiO = PUTvalueon top of stack
XXl = ANDvaluewithvalueon top of stack
)Oe = OR valuewith valueon top of stack
State of Input Acted On
XOX= Usevaluefromstack(0 or 1)
XlX = Uselogicalstrateof input(0 or 1)
X2X = Use logicalstrateof invertedinput (0 or 1)
X3X= Performoperationwheninputmakesa 0 to 1 transition(1)
X4X = Performoperationwheninputmakesa 1 to 0 transition(0)
OverrideIndlcator
OXX= No inputoverride
1XX= Forceinputto logic1
zXX = Forceinputto logic0

S22to S41 - Specificafions 522 through S4f are the block addresses of
lN1to IN10 lnputs one throughz0.

Outputs

N Output N is dependent on value on top of tl:e stack and the

value of S 1.

If Sf = O, output = value on top of the stack.

If Sf = l, outpuf = previous value of output, regardless of the

value on top of the stack.

If Sf = 2, output = logic O, regardless of the value on top of the

stack.

If Sf = $, output = logic 1, regardless of the value on top of ttre

stack.

APPLICATIO'VS

Refer to the example in functlon code 1lO.

Rung(2O-lnput)
112-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode113- ASCIIStringDescriptor

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The ASCII strlng descrlptor (ASD) functlon code deflnes ASCII

characters and strlngs ln the CBCO1 Batch Command Con-
troller and the Tlpe Src01 Strateglc Loop Controller.

Refer to functton code f8f batch statton) for an example of

uslng the ASCII strtng descrlptor. The example tln functlon
code f8f shows ttre ASCII strtng descrtptor functlon code
definIrg step and reclpe names, loop tag n€rmes and englneer-
ing units for variables dlsplayed on the controller.

Refer to functlon code 23L (Src station) for an example of

using ttre ASCII string descrlptor tn the T51peSrc controller.
The example ln function code 23L shows the ASCil strlng
descrtptor function code deflning loop ta;g name/engltEeerlng
untts formats for block 1O2O(loop 1 data), 1021 (loop 2 datal
arrd LO22 (au:dltary swttch labels).

Each ASCII strlng descriptor c€rn support stx entrles. Addl-

ttonal ASCII strtng descriptor function codes can be ltnked
together by Sl to the block address of tlre next ASD block.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlption

N B Reserved

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 20461 Blockaddressof nextASCIIstringdescriptor
S2 N 0 I Full lD number
S3 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCIIcharactervalue

ASCIIStringDescriptor
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 1 3- 1
FunctionCode 113

SP ECIFl CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S4 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCII character value
S5 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCII character value
S6 Y 0 0 - 126 ASCIIcharactervalue
S7 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCIIcharactervalue
S8 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCII character vatue
S9 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCIIcharactervalue
s10 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCII character value
o o o o o o

a o o a a o

a o o o a o

s60 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCIIcharactervalue

s61 Y 0 0 - 126 ASCIIcharactervalue
s62 Y 0 I 0 - 126 ASCIIcharactervalue
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 2046for CBC01
1023for SLC01/21

Specifications

S1 Specification Sf [nks string descriptor blocks

ting Sl to zero indicates the end of the llnk.

S2 Specification 52 assigns a untque ID number

for tJee CBCO f controller. Specificatlon 52 for
controller ls unused.

Q = Character strlngs represent CBCOI controller step

names. Table 181-2 lists the ASD format.

I = Character strings represent CBCOI controller loop tag

names with engineering unlts. Table 18f-3 hsts the
ASD format.

t,= Character strings represent CBCO1 controller reclpe

nzrmes. Table 18f -4 lists the ASD format.

3 =Character strings represent SLCOI and Srczl con-

troller loop one tag names with engtneering units.
Table 23L-l lists the ASD format.

4 = Character strings represent SLCOf and SLC21 con-

troller loop two tag names with engineering units.
Table 23L-2 lists ttre ASD format.

$ = Character strings represent SrcOl and SLC21 ar:xil-

iary switch names. Table 231-3 lists the ASD format.

53 through S62 Specifications Sg through 562 define each character withtn

the string sets using the ASCII character set.

ASCIIStringDescriptor
113-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode113

CHART
ASCil CONVERS'O'V

Table 113-1. ASCII Conuersfon Chnrt

Declmal Declmal Declmal Decimal
Character Gharacter Character Gharacter
Value Value Value Value
32 (space) 56 I 80 P 104 h
33 I 57 9 81 o 105 I

34
( 58 82 R 106 i
35 # 59 83 s 107 k
36 $ 60 84 T 108 I

37 o/o
61 85 U 109 m
38 & 62 86 V 110 n
39 63 ? 87 w 111 o
40 ( 64 @ 88 X 112 p
41 ) 65 A 89 Y 113 q
42 t
66 B 90 z 114 r
43 + 67 c 91 t 115 s
44 68 D 92 \ 116 t
45 69 E 93 I 117 u
70 F 94 n 118 v
46
47 I 71 G 95 119 w
48 0 72 H 96 120 x
49 1 73 I 97 a 121 v
50 2 74 J 98 b 122 z
51 3 75 K 99 c 123 {
52 4 76 L 100 d 124 I
53 5 77 M 101 e 125 l
54 6 78 N 102 t 126 -
55 7 79 o 103 g
NOTE: The ASCUst.ing doscriptorcan use d€cimalvalueszero thrugh 31. Thsse ate ASCIIcharacteG.The CBOo1colt'
nonpdnting
troller interprets decimal zero as an ASCII spaoe character.

ASCIIStringDescriptor
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 113-3
ffi
I

I
 FunctionGode114r BCDInput

GENERALDESCRIPT'ON

The BCD tnputblock reads aboolean lnput from an NDSMO3,

IMDSMOS or IMDSIOI Dtgttal Slave Module ln a btnary coded
dectmal (BCD) format, and converts lt to a real output wtth
quallty.

UT'LIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Realvaluex gain

SPECtFICATTO^'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-63 Expanderbus l/O moduleaddressof digitall/O mgglgle
s2 N 1 I 1 , 2 , 3o r4 Zonecontraining onesdigitof output:
1 and 2 = zonesresidein groupB
3 and 4 = zoies residein grouPA
lnputnumberon l/O module:
1=1to4(B)
2=5to8(B)
3=1to4(A)
4=5to8(A)
S3 N 0 I 0or1 Moduleactionon UOmodulefailure:
0 = trip controlmodule
1 = cohtinueoperation
S4 N 1 I 1 , 2 , 3o r4 Numberof digitsin convertedvalue
S5 N 1.000 R Full Gainmultiplier

BCDlnput
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 1 4- 1
FunctionCode 114

EXPLANATION

Each I/O module provldes f G firputs dtvlded tnto two groups

of eight as lllustrated ln Table ll4-1. The two groups are
divtded into four zones, wlth each zotte contatnlng four
lnputs.

Tahle 114-1. BCD to Real&nuersfon Format

Descrlptlon Group A Group B
Position 8765 4321 8765 4 321
Inputs Zone4 Zone3 Zone2 Zone 1

lntemalBCD to Real@nversion
Position 1000s 1@s 10s 1s
Outputs X x x x

Figure 1 14- I shows the binary coding of the four lnputs in

each zone. The boolean values convert lnternally to BCD val-
Lres from zero to nine. A tnre lnput for any character tn a zonre
causes the lnteger number assoclated wlth that character to
be output. If the inputs of a zone are O I I l, the output ls
4+2+L=7. BCD values greater than nlne are lrrvaltd slnce each
zorte provides only one digtt of the output value.

t 8 4 2 1 |
lI x x x xII
=*=*

EXAMPLE:INPUT= O111
OUTPUT=
4+r#"J

Figwe 114-1. Bttary MW

oJ Inpr rts

Specification 52 selects the zonc that tJle ones dtgtt of the

BCD value urtll be read from. Thl,s €urangement enables a two
digit lnteger to convert to only one group of trnputs from any
given I/O module, freeing the other tnputs for other conflgu-
ration uses. Specification 54 sets ttre number of dffts the
integer internally generates. Speclfications 52 and 54 defrne
the size and location of the integer.

Specifications

S1 - SLVADR Speclfication Sf is the exp€rnder bus l/O module address of

the dlgital lnput l/O module module that carrles lrrputs to be
converted. Valid addresses are zero to 63.

BCDInput
114-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 114

s2 - zoNE Speclflcatlon 52 sets the ?ntre contalnlng the ones dtglt of the
output. httes three and four reslde tn group A, and zones one
and two reslde llr group B.

53 - TRIP Spectflcatlon Sg deflnes the actlon of the control module on

UO module fallure.

Q = trtp control module

I = coDtlnue operatlng

s 4 - DNUM Speclflcatlon 54 ls the nturrber of dtgtts ln converted value

(one to four).

5 5 I K Spectflcatlon SS ls the gatn multtpller. ThIs real value ls mul-

ttplted by the Ieteger number generated by the converslon to
provtde a real output used for control purposes.

Outputs

N Output N ls the bilrary coded declmal value tlmes galn, and

qudity.

EXAMPLE

If the tnputs to the BCD lnput functlon block are:

52 = l. Ones digit ls found ln zone 1.

54 = g. Output value ls three dlglts (zones L, 2 and 3).

S5 = 1.O.Gatn ls 2.0.

Then, the tnputs to the l/O module are:

Ilescrlptlon GroupA Group B

Position 1001 0011 1000 0101
(Zone4) (Zone3) (Zone2l (Zone1)
Inputs Zone4 Zone 3 Zone2 Zone 1

lntemalBCD to Real Conversion

Position 1000s 100s 10s 1s
Outputs 0 3 I 5

Integer value = 385

Output value = 385 x 2.O = 77O.O

NOTE: Even though some of the inputs in zone four are true
(logic1),the conversiondoesnot usethem(S2equalsone and34
equalsthree).

BCDInput
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 1 4- 3
ffi

I
 FunctionGode 115- BCD Output

GENERATDESCRIPTION

Thts block converts a real lrrput to boolea,n outputs by con-

vertlng the lnput to blreary coded declmd (BCD) format. The
tnput can be scaled wtth a gatn factor then tmncated to €rn
tnteger value before the BCD converslon occurs. Afler conver-
slon, the outputs wrtte to an IMDSMO5, IMDSOOI, IMDSO02,
IMDSOOS or IMDSOO4 Dtgltat Slave Module.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B l/O modulestiatus:
g = good
1 =bad

SPECIFICATTOwS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 0 0-63 Expanderbus l/O module address of l/O module receiving
outputs of function code 115
S2 N 0 0-124 l/O moduledefinition:hold + type + group
Hold:
0)(X= go to defaultvalueson lossof controlmodule
1XX= holdl/O moduleoutputson lossof controlmodule
TYPe:
XOX= |MDSM0Smodule
XIX = |MDSO04module
><?X= IMDSoo1lOU03module
Group:
)O(0= outputs0 to 7 (groupA)
)O(1= outputs8 to 15 (groupB)
S3 N 0 I 0orl Moduleactionon l/O modulefailure:
0 = triPcontrolmodule
1 = continueoperation
S4 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of real value to be converted to boolean digits

BCDOutput
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 115-1
FunctionGode115

SPE CIFI CATION S @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Tlpe Range Descrlptlon

S5 N 1.000 R Full Gainmultiplier
S6 N 2 I 2or4 Numberof BCDdigitsto process
NOTE:
1. Maximumvalues are: 1023 lor IMLMMO2
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,|MMFCO5,CBC01, CSCO1and |MMPCO|
9998 for |MMFC03/04 and IMMFPOJIOAO3

EXPLANATION

Thts block converts red values to boolean outputs that are

wrttten to the output groups of an IMDSMOS, IMDSOOI,
IMDSOOZ,, IMDSOOS or IMDSOO4 Dlgttal Slave Module tn
BCD format. TIte real lrrput ls multlplted by the galn factor
then truncated to an lnteger value up to 9999. Speclflcatlon
SO speeifies the slze of the lnteger value. Ttte value can be
deflned to have either two or four dfgfts. A two df$t hteger
translates to eight boolean outputs. A four dlgtt tnteger trans-
lates to 16 boolean outputs. Table f f 5-f shornrs module out-
put eapacity for alll/O modules used wtth thts functlon code.

Table 115-1. Modrie Outpfi Capacitg

Module Outputs
IMDSMOs Oneor two groupsof eight
IMDSOOl Onegroupof eight
IMDSOO2 One group of eight
IMDSOOS Onegroupof eight
IMDSOO4 Twogroupsof eight

Figure lf 5-1 shows how each BCD digit provldes four bool-
e€rn outputs for a maximum of 16 boolean outputs. If the out-
put goes to an IMDSOOI, IMDSOO? or IMDSOOSI/O module,
the BCD input can have a ma:dmum of two dlgtts because
those modules handle only eight boolean outputs.

IOOOs lOOs los ls

REALINPUT X X X X

I NTERNAL BINARY CONVERSION

BCDOUTPUT 8765 4321 8765 4321

GROUP A GROUP B
TP22026A

Ftgure 115-1. ReaI to BCD Conuersfon Format

BCDOutput
115-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode115

An lnternal bfreary converslon ls performed on each BCD

dlgtt, provtdlng a one output for each power of fivo repre-
sented tre the dtgtt, and a zero output for each pourer of two
not represented fn the dlglt. For example, lf the ones dtglt of
tJre lnput ts flve, the boolezrn output representtng tt ls OlOl,
slnce 5=O(8)+l(4)+0(21+1(l). Flgure LL5-2 lllustrates the
btnary brealcdowrr.

BCD INPUT= 5

BINARYDIGITS 8 421
BINARYOUTPUT O1O1
THEWIA

Flgure 115'2. EtcnmtrtleoJ

Btury Conuersfon

The output group that the ones and tens digits of the BCD
value outputs is selectable wtth S2. In IMDSOOI, IMDSOO?
and IMDSOOS modules, only ones and tens digtts are permit-
ted, and they are always output to group A. If four digits are
selected (IMDSMOS'and IMDSOO4 modules only), the hun-
dreds and thousands diglts wrtte to the group not selected
(S2; ones diglt, group deflnttion). Withln a group, the least
signlflcant dlglt occuples outputs four through one, and the
most slgntflcant dfglt occuples outputs elght through five.

Specifications

51 - SLVADR Speclflcatlon SI ls the expander bus l/O module address of

the IMDSMOS module that boolean outputs write to. Valld
addresses are zero to 63.

S2 - SLVDEF Speclflcatlon 52 ls the l/O module deflnttion.

x x
Group.Defineswhichgroupof l/O moduleoutputsthe onesand
tensdigitsof the convertedinputwill be writtento. The hundreds
and thousandsdigitswill be writtento the groupnot specified
here.lMDSO0llOUOg modulescan onlyhavea groupvalueof
zerobecausethey haveonlyone groupof outputs.
X)(0= Outputs0 to 7 (GroupA)
)fil = OutputsI to 15 (GroupB)
Type.Typeof l/O moduleoutputswriteto.
XOX= |MDSMOS
XlX = IMDSOO4
X2X= lMDSOOll0UOg
Hold. Definesthe outputon loss of controlmodule.
OXX= Go to defaultvalueson lossof controlmodule
l)fi = HoldUOmoduleoutputson lossof controlmodule

BCDOutput
l-Eg6-200B lsFEBless 115-g
FunctionCode 115

53 - TRIP Spectflcatton 53 deflnes actlon of control module on I/O mod-

ule fallure.

Q = trip control module

I = coDtfirue operatlon

s 4 - BCDINP Specificatlon 54 ls the block address of BCD value to be con-

verted to boolean outputs.

s5 -K Speeificatlon 55 ls the value of the gain multtpller used to

scale a real input before tmncatlon and converslon.

S6 - DNUM Specification 56 is the number of processed BCD dlglts. Thl,s

number must be set to two or four. Ttlree dfglt tnputs must be
specilied as four.

Output

N Output N is the status of the UO module.

Q = good
I =bad

EXAMPLE

To convert 1293.6 to boolean outputs, set the speclffcatlons

as sho\iln:

52 = 1, group B contalns ones and tens dtglts.

S5 = l.O, scaling value is l.O.

SO = 4, input wilt be four BCD dtgtts, therefore the output

is 16 boolean digits.

BCD input = f 293 (after scaling and tnrncatlon).

Description GroupA Group B

Position 8765 4321 8765 4321
Binaryvalue 8421 8421 8421 8421
Booleanoutput 0001 0010 1001 0011
BCDinput 1 2 9 3

BCDOutput
115-4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode115

To convert 457.2 to boolean outputs, set the speclffcatlons:

52 = 1, group B contatns ones and tens dlglts.

S5 = 1.0, scallng value ls 1.0.

SG = 4, lnputs are four BCD dlgtts, therefore the output ls

16 boolean dtglts. Although the trirput has only three dlg-
its, select four because SG must be etther a two or a four.

BCD tnput = O457 (after scaltng and tmncatlon).

DescrlpUon Group A Group B

Position 8765 4 92 1 8765 4321
Binaryvalue 8421 8421 8421 8421
Booleanouput 0000 0100 0 10 1 0 1 1 1
BCDinput 0 4 5 7

NOTE:Digitsfive througheightin groupA outputzerossincethe

inputis zero.

BCDOutput
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 1 5- 5
ffi

I
 FunctionCode116- Jump/MasterControlRelay

GENERALDESCRIPTION

TheJump/master control relay functlon code can be used as a

Jump or master control relay (MCR) functlon. Ftrnctlon code
116 transfers control past a serles of blocks. Botlt functions
transfer control from the Jump/MCR block to a destlnatton
block spectfled wtth 52. Blocks between the JumP/MCR block
and lts destlnatlon do not eKecute, but hold thelr prevlous val-
lres. The destlnatlon block number must be greater than the
block number of theJump/MCR block where ttre transfer orlg-
fnated. Thnsfer across segment boundartes ls not permttted.

Specificatlon 53 sets the block to elther JumP or MCR The

Jump functlon blpasses all blocks between the JumP/MCR
block and the destlnatlon block. Ttte MCR functton blryasses
atl blocks between the Jump/MCR block and the destination
block, and it de-energhes (zeros) the outputs of dl rr-n$ blocks
(i.e., fgnctlon codes I IO, 111 and LLz) wlth normal outputs
(Sf equals zero), tlrat lle between the Jump/MCR bloek and
the desttnauon btock. Rung blocks wlthout normal outputs
(Sl not equal to zero) hold thelr prevlous output values.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B <S1> = 0 = jump/lvlOR activated
<S1> = 1 = jurnp/lvlCRnot activated, all blocks executed

SPEC/,FICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof controlsignal:
Q= jump/MCRfunctionactivated
1 = [otr]lal control
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof destinationblockfor jump/frtrCR
command

asterControlRelaY
l-E96-2008 lsFEBlees 116'1
FunctionGode116

SPE CIFI CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon

I
S3 N 0 I 0or1 Functionselector:
g = iump
1=MCR
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 1023for lMLtrrMO2
2046for NMFCOUA?, MMFC0S,CBC01,CSC01and lMMPC0l
9998for |MMFCOSI/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 I TRIP Specilication Sl is the block address of the control lnput slg-

nal. This determines whether control ls normal or lf the
jump/MCR function is activated.

O -Jump/MCR functton acttvated - Sg selects the func-

tlon implemented (Jurnp or MCR)

I - jump/IvtCR not tmplemented

52 - DEST Specification 52 is the block address of destlnatlon block that

jump/MCR function extends to. Normal block executlon

53 - FUNC
resumes with the function ln thls block.
I
Specification 53 defines whJch functlon the Jump/MCR block
performs.

Q =jump blryasses all blocks between the Jump/MCR

block and the destinatlon block

t = MCR blpasses all blocks between the Jump/MCR

block and the desttnatlon block and de-energlzes the
outputs of rung blocks wlth normal outputs between
the jump/MCR block and destinatlon block

Outputs

N Output N displays <S1>.

Q = jump/MCR implemented
I = jump/NtCR not implemented, all blocks executed

APPLICATIOruS

Figure 116-1 shows the lmplementatlon of aJump/UCRbloek

lnto a ladder program. When the Jump/MCR block ls actl-
vated, all blocks between the Jump bloek and block 90O are
skfpped. The jump/MCR can also be used wtth functlon code
loglc.

Jump/Master
ControlRelay
116-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode1lb

BETWEEN
ALL OPERATIONS BLOCK
THEJUMP/MCR
ANDBLOCK9OOWILLBE SKIPPEDWHENTHE
JUMP/MCRIS IMPLEMENTED.

TP451834

Figwe 1 16- 1. Jumpt/ MCR BIrck Used tn Ladder Prqralrl

ControlRelay
Jump/Master
l-E96-2008 lsFEBlees 116-3
ffi

o
 FunctionGode117- BooleanRecipeTable

GENERATDESCRIPTION

The boolean reclpe table functlon code uses an externally

generated value to select a parameter value from a recipe
table. Blocks llnked together, each contalntng up to ten bool-
ean parameter values, make up the reclpe table.

The flrst block ln the llnk llst ls the group master. The master
aecepts the select lnput and ls able to se€rrch the other blocks
ln the ltnk ltst to flnd the selected parameter. The ten parame-
ters tn the master block are zero tlrrough nfne. The range of
pararneters assoctated wlth the next block tn the llnk llst ls
ten through 19, and so on. TIte reclpe value selected ls always
output from the master block. Ttre outputs of all other blocks
in t]:e series remairr unused.

This functlon code also lncludes an edtt functlon tllat allows

editJng of selected parameters.

The recipe table function codes (IL7, f 13) allow for recipe
handltng within the dlgttal control system, eliminating the
need for a centralhed computer to store batch recipes.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descriptlon

N B Parametervalue selected. lf the parameter number selected is
invalid, the value of the nearest valid parameter is the output.

SPECIFICATTOwS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter0
S2 Y 0 B 0orl Valueof parameter1

Boolean RecipeTable
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 1 7- 1
FunctionCode 117

SPECIFl CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter2
S4 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter3
S5 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof par:ameter
4
S6 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter5
s7 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter6
S8 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter7
S9 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter8
sl0 Y 0 B 0or1 Valueof parameter9
sl1 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof parameterselectinput
sl2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof next recipeblock(0 = no more recipe
blocks)
s13 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of edit signal:
0 = Domlal mode
1 = edit mode
sl4 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof edit parameterselector
s15 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof editvalue
NOTE:
1. Maximumvalues are: 1023 for |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCO1|0?,|MMFCO5,CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFC03/04 and lMMFP0llDUog

EXPLANATION

Specifications

sl -P0 Specification Sf is the value of parameter zero. tf the block

defined is not the rnaster block for a particular reclpe table,
then S I defines the value of parameter n+O where n equals the
posiilon of the block in the list of blocks making up the reclpe
table. For exzunple, if the block deflned ts the flrst block after
the master block, then S I defines value ten.

52 to S10- Specification S2 through Sf O are the values of parameters

Pl to P9 one through nine. If the block defrned ls not tlle master block
for a particular recipe table, then 52 to SIO dellne the value of
parameters rr+1to n+9where n equals the posiflon of the block
in the list of blocks makfng up the reclpe table. For example,
if the block defined is the third block after the master block,
then 52 defrnes value 3I.

sll - SEL Specification Sl l is t}re block address of externally generated

parameter selection signal. TIr,e number ln this block selects
the value frorn the recipe table that is output from the bool-
ean recipe table block. If the input to ttre pzrrameter seleetlon
block is a real number, it is rounded to the nearest integer
before being used for selection. If several blocks are llnked tn
series, the pararneter selectlon slgnal <Sl l> should be
defined only in ttre flrst block ln the serles, slnce the master

BooleanRecipeTable
1 1 7- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 117

block searches the other blocks ln the serles for the selected
parameter value.

S12 - NXT Specifieatlon S12 ts the block address of next reclpe block tn
group. A value of zero for thts speclflcatlon lndtcates that
there are no more reclPe blocks bir the grouP.

s13 - ESIG Speetflcatton S13 ls the block address of edtt stgnd. When
thts value ls a one, the block ls tn edlt mode. In edlt mode, the
value of tl:e parameter selected by S14 changes to the value
deftned ln S15. When the value ls a zero, the block operates ln
the nonnal operating mode.

S14 I EPAR Spectficagon Sf4 ls the block address of tJre block contatnln$
ttre number of the parameter tJlat changes when the block is
in edit mode.

s15 - EVAL Speclflcauon S15 ls the block address of the value that
replaces the current value of the parameter spectfled ln S14
when the block ts ln edlt mode.

Outputs

N Output N is the value of the parameter selected for output.

The value of the selected parameter ls always output from the

first (master) block ln a series of boolean reclpe table blocks.
The outputs of atl other blocks ln the serles are unused.

If the parameter selected ls lrrvaltd, the vdue of the valtd

parameter numerically closest to tt wlll be output. For exam-
pte: if there are 30 parzrmeters speclfted (one to 3O), artd
p"t* eter 47 is requested, the value of parameter 30 will be
6utput. Likeuris€, if parameter -3 is requested, the value of
parameter zero wiil be outPut.

APPLICATIOruS

Boolean reclpe tabte blocks can be used wtth real rectpe table
blocks to control batch processes. Real recipe tables can be
used to set lngredient quanttty, and boole€rn reclpe tables can
define the operattng states of the varlous devtces used ln the
process for each step. The batch processlng example found in
iunctton code I23 tllustrates the use of reclpe table blocks.

BooleanRecipeTable
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1S5 1 1 7- 3
ffi

I
 Function Code 118r Real RecipeTable

GENERATDESCRIPTION

The real reclpe table functlon code uses an externally gener-

ated value to select a parameter vdue from a reclpe table.
Blocks ltnked together, each contalntng up to ten real pararn-
eter values, make up the reclpe table.

The ftrst block tn the ltnk ltst ls the group master. Ttte master
accepts the select lnput and ts able to search the other blocks
ln tJle llnk ltst to flnd the selected parameter. The ten parame-
ters tn the master block are zero through ntre. The range of
parameters assoctated wtth the next block ln the llnk list is
ten through 19, and so on. The recipe value selected is always
output from the master block. The outputs of all other blocks
in the series remain unused.

Thts functlon code dso lncludes an edtt functlon that allows

edttlng of a selected parameter.

The reclpe table functton codes (IL7, I 18) allow for reclpe
handltng wtthh the dtgttal control systern. Thts elimlnates the
need for a centrdized computer to store batch reclpes.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N R Parametervalue selected. lf the parameter number selected is
invalid, the value of the nearest valid parameter is the output.

SPECIFICATIO'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 Y 0.000 R Full Valueof parameter0
S2 Y 0.000 R Full Valueof parameter1

Real RecipeTable
t-E96-200B 15FEB1995 1 1 8- 1
FunctionCode118

SPECIFI CATI ONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 Y 0.000 R Full Valueof parameter2
S4 Y 0.000 R Full Valueof parameter3
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Valueof parameter4
S6 Y 0.000 R Full Valueof parameter5
S7 Y 0.000 R Ful Value of parameter6
s8 Y 0.000 R Ful Value of parameter 7
S9 Y 0.000 R Ful Value of parameter I
sl0 Y 0.000 R Ful Valueof parameter9
s11 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof parameterselectinput
s12 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof nextrecipeblock(nextfunctioncode 118)
0 = ho morerecipeblocks
s13 N 0 Note 1 Block address of edit signal:
0 = Dorfllal mode
1 = edit mode
sl4 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof edit parameterselector
sl5 N 5 Note 1 Block address of edit value
NOTE:
1. Maximumvalues are: 1023 for |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS,CBC01,CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for |MMFC03/04and IMMFPOUOAOS

EXPLANATION

Specifications

sl -P0 Specification S f is ttre value of parameter zero. If the block

defined is not the master block for a particular rectpe table,
then S 1 defines the value of parameter n+O where n equals the
position of the block in the list of blocks making up the recipe
table. For ex€unple, if the block defined is the first block after
the rnaster block, then S I defines value ten.

52 to S10- Specifications 52 through SIO are the values of parameters

Pl to P9 one through nine. If the block defrned is not tJ:e master block
for a particular recipe table, then 52 to SlO deflne the value of
parameters n+l to n+9 where n equals the posltlon of the block
in the llst of blocks maklng up the reclpe table. For example,
if the block defined ts the thlrd bloek after the master block,
then 52 deflnes value 31.

S11 - SEL Specification Sl I is the block address of externally generated

parameter selection signal. The number in this block selects
the value from tJ:e recipe table that is output from the real
recipe table block. If the input to the parameter selection
block is a real nurnber, it is rounded to the nearest lnteger. If
several blocks are linked in serles, the pararneter selectlon
signal <Sl l> should be defined only ilr the frst block ln the
series, since the master block searches the other block tn the
series for the selected parameter value.

Real RecipeTable
1 1 8- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode118

s12 - NXT Speclflcatlon S12 ts the block address of next reclpe block ln
group. A value of zero for thls speelflcatlon lndtcates that
there are no more rectpe blocks ln the grouP.

s13 - ESIG Speclflcatlon Sf3 ls tJle block address of edtt stgnal. When
thts value ls a one, the block ls ln edlt mode. In edit mode, the
value of the parameter selected by Sf 4 changes to the value
deflned in S15. When the value ls a zero, the block operates in
the nonnal operattng mode.

S14 - EPAR Spectflcatlon S14 ls the block address of the block contalning
the number of the parameter ttrat changes when the block is
ln edlt mode.

s15 - EVAL Speclflcatlon S15 ls the block address of the value that
replaces the current vdue of the parameter speclfled fn SI4
when the block ls lre edlt mode.

Outputs

N Output N ls the value of the parameter selected for output.

The value of the selected parameter ls always output from the
flrst (master) block ln a serles of red reclpe table blocks. The
outputs of all other blocks tn the series are unused.

If the parameter selected ls lnvalld, the value of the valid

parameter numertcally closest to lt wttl be output. For exam-
ple: lf there are 30 parameters spectfted (one to 30), and
param eter 47 is requested, the value of pararneter 30 will be
output. Likewts€, lf parameter -3 ls requested, the value of
parameter zero will be output.

APPLICATIO'VS

Real recipe table blocks can be used to handle both fixed

batch sequences and vartable batch sequences. In a fixed
batch sequence, the order tn whtch the steps are executed
remalns fixed from reclpe to reclpe, but the €rmounts of ln$re-
dtents and the condltlons under whtch they are added may
vzuJr. In a vartable batch sequence, the order of steP executlon
changes from reclpe to recipe, as well as the amounts of ingre-
dients and tJre condltions ln whtch they are added. Refer to the
applications sectlon of the function code L23 description for
an example of a real reclpe table used ln a batch process.

RealRecipeTable
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 1 8- 3
ffi

t
 FunctionCode119- BooleanSignalMultiplexer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Ttre boolea,n slgnal multlplexer functlon code selects a bool-

ean slgnd from a group of lnputs, altd provldes tlrts slgnd as
the block output. Any number of boolean stgnal multlplexer
blocks can beJolred to multlplex arry number of stgnals. Each
block contalns ten boolean lnputs.

The fust block in ttre link list ls the group master. The master
accepts a select tnput and searches the ottrer blocks ln the
llnk list to flnd tl:e selected lnput. Ttre ten values ln the mas-
ter block are zero through nine. The range of Parameters
assoctated with the next block ln ttre ltnk llst ls ten through
19, and so on. If several blocks €rre tn serles, ttte output
always comes from the flrst block ln the serles. The outputs of
the rest of the blocks in the serles are unused.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Ilescrlptlon

N B Input value selected. lf the input number selected is invalid,the
vatue of the nearest valid parameter is the output.

SPECIFICATIO,fVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input0
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input1
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input2
S4 N 0 l Note 1 Blockaddressof input3
S5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof input4
S6 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof input5
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of input 6
S8 N 0 l Note 1 Blockaddressof input7

BooleanSignalMultiplexer
l-Eg6-2008 rsFEBtees 119-1
FunctionCode119

SPEC,FICATI O,^tS@onti
nued)

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S9 N 0 Note 1 Block address of input 8
sl0 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input9
sl1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputselectsignal
sl2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof nextblock(nextfunctioncode 119)
Q= no moremultplexerblocks
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 1023for |MLMM02
2046for NMFC01|02,!MMFC05,
CBC01,CSCO1and |MMPCOI
9998for |MMFCO9O4and IMMFPOIIOU}S

EXPLANATION

Specifications

sl - lNo Specification S f is the block address of lnput zero. If the

defleed input is not ln the master block for a partlcular lnput
group, then Sl is the block address of tnput n x 1Owhere n
equals the posltion of the block ln the llst of blocks makfng up
the link list. For exarnple, tf the deflned block ls the flrst block
after the master block, then Sl deflnes lrput ten.

Input zero is reserved for executed stop (E-STOP) ln batch

operations. The normal starting tnput ls tnput one whtch ls
<s2>.

52 to S10- Specifications 52 through SfO a,re the block addresses of

lNl to lNg inputs one through nlne. If the defined fnput ls not the mas-
ter block for a partlcular tnput group, then 52 to SlO deflne
the block addresses of tnputs nx 10+ l to nx 10+ gwhere n
equals the position of the block ln the llst of blocks maktng up
the tnput group. For example, tf the deflned lnput ls tn the
third block after the master block, then 52 ls the block
address of input 31.

S11 - SEL Specification S I I is the block address of the externally gener-

ated input selection signal. The number in tllts block selects
the input from tJ:e input group that is the block output. If the
input to this block is a real number, it is rounded to the near-
est integer. If more than one block is in series, the input selec-
tion signal is the master block only, since it searches all other
blocks in the series for the selected parameter.

S12 - NXT Specification S12 is the block address of next input block in
group. A value of zero for thls specification iredlcates that
there are no more input blocks tn the group.

BooleanSignalMultiplexer
119-2 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode119

Output

N Output N ts the selected tnput. Ttle selected lnput ls output

from the master block. When severd boolean stgnal multl-
plexer blocks are ln serles, the value selected for the output ls
the output from the master block. Ttle outputs of the rest of
the blocks ln the serles are unused.

If €rn lnvaltd value ls selected, tJre vdue of the parameter

numertcally closest to lt ts the output. For exarnple, if there
are 30 spectfted lnputs, artd input 47 ls requested, then the
value of rnput 3O wllt be output. Ltkeurtse, if the selected value
ls -3, ttre value of lrrput zero wlll be output.

APPLICATIO'VS

Batch control uses stgnal multlplexers to select one lnput

from a group, based on €rn externally generated stgnal. Refer
to the appltcatlons sectlon of functlon code 123 for €rn exam-
pte of a boolean stgnal multlplexer used ln a batch process.

BooleanSignalMultiPfexer
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 1 9- 3
ffi

I
 FunctionGode12O- RealSignalMultiplexer

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The real signal multtplexer functlon code selects a real signal

from a group of tnputs, and provtdes t}ls slgnal as the block
output. Any number of real stgnd multlplexer blocks can be
Jofned to multtplex any number of stgnals. Each block con-
talns ten real lnputs.

The ftrst block ln the Unk llst ts the group master. The master
accepts a select lnput and searches the other blocks tn the
llnk llst to llnd the selected lrrput. The ten values ln the mas-
ter bloek are zero through nlne. The range of pararneters
associated with ttre next block tn the link list is ten through
19, and so on. If several blocks are tn serles, the output
always comes from the first block ln the serles. The outputs of
the rest of the blocks in the series are unused.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Inputvalueselected.lf the inputnumberselectedis invalid,the
valueof the nearestvalid parameteris the output.

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 Note 1 Block address of nput0
S2 N 5 Note 1 Block address of nput1
S3 N 5 Note 1 Block address of nput2
S4 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof nput3
S5 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof nput4
S6 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof input5
S7 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input6
S8 N 5 I Note 1 Blmk addressof input7

RealSignalMultiplexer
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 120 - 1
FunctionCode 120

SPECI Fl CATI OruSpontinued)

Spec Tune I}efault Type Range Descrlptlon

S9 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputI
sl0 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof input9
sl1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputselectsignal
sl2 N 0 Note 1 Block address of next block (next function code 120)
0 = Do more multiplexer blocks
NOTE:
1. Ma:rimumvalues are: 1023 for |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,|MMFCO5,CBC01, CSC01 and lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFC0S/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 - lNo Specification S f is the block address of llrput zero. If the

defined input is not in the master block for a partlcular lnput
group, ttren Sl is the block address of lnput n x 10 where n
equals the position of tJre block tn the ltst of blocks maklng up
the link list. For example, if the defined block ls the flrst block
after the rnaster block, then S I deflnes tnput ten.

52 to S10- Specifications 52 through SfO are the block addresses of

lN1to lNg inputs one through nine. If the defrned input is not the mas-
ter block for a parLicular input group, then 52 to Sl0 deflne
the bloek addresses of inputs nx 10+ l to nx 10+ gwhere n
equals the position of tJeeblock ln the ltst of blocks maklng up
the input group. For example, if the defined input is in the
third block after the master block, then 52 is the block
address of input 31.

s 1 l - SEL Specification S11 is the block address of the externally gener-

ated input selection signal. Ttre number in thts block selects
the input from the input group that is the block output. If the
input to this block is a real number, it is rounded to the near-
est integer. If more than one block ls ln serles, the tnput selec-
tion signal is the rnaster block only, since it searches all other
blocks in the series for the selected parameter.

S12 - NXT Specification Sl2 is the block address of next tnput block in
group. A value of zero for thls speciflcatlon lndlcates that
there are no more input blocks in the group.

Output

N Output N is the selected input. The selected lnput ls output

from the master block. When several real signal multlplexer
blocks are in series, the value selected for the output ls the
output from the rnaster block. The outputs of the rest of the
blocks in the series are unused.

RealSignalMultiplexer
124 - 2 1sFEBtees l-E96-2008
 Function Code 120

If an Invalld value ls selected, the value of the parameter

numerically closest to tt ts the output. For example, if there
are 30 spectfled tnputs, artd lnput 47 ls requested, then tJle
value of input 3O wtll be output. Ltkeurtse, lf the selected value
ts -3, the value of tnput zero wtll be output.

RealSignalMultiplexer
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 120 - 3
ffi

I
 FunctionGode121- AnalogInpuUlNFl'NET

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The analog lnput/INFI-NET (AI/L) function code acqulres arr

analog tnput from another module tn a dtfferent node via
INFI-NE|[. The lnput must come from €rn analog excePtlon
report bloek (functlon code 30) if the source node is a process
control unlt, or from an analog report tndex lf the node ts a
network lnterface unlt. Updates are on an exceptlon report
basls. The executlve block for the controller module and the
segment control block for the IMMFCOS, IMMFCO4,
IMMFCO5, IMMPCOI, IMMFPOI, IMMFPO2 and IMMFPOS
modules speclff the exceptton report lntenrals.

To insure that the stgnal ls successfully acqutred from

INFI-NET, the analog stgnal generates a polnt qualfty flag. To
test the qualtty of the stgnal, lnclude a functlon code 31 (test
quality) block tn the conflguratlon. TIte qualtty of the polnt
cannot be used as an tnput to any other t5rye of block. How-
ever, the output of the test quallty block, representlng the
quality, can be used as an tnput to other processlng blocks.
Refer to Appendix D for a defirrition of potnt quality.

NOTE:lf a moduleutilizesan impoiledanalogvaluefromthe loop

the functionblocksthat uti-
in severalinstancesin its configuration,
lize that analogvalue must be connectedto only one Al/L block.
You cannotimportexceptionreportsfrom the same (loop,node,
moduleand block)addressto morethan one destination withina
singlemoduleconfiguration.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N R Analogoutputvalue,qualityand alarmstate

AnalogInpuVlNFl-NET
t-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 1 2 1- 1
FunctionCode 121

SPECIFICATIOAIS
I
Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon
S1 N 0 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
S2 N 0 0 - 9998 Source block address
S3 N 0 I 0-250 Sourcenodeaddress
S4 N 0 0-250 Sourceloop address
S5 N 0 Full Spare
S6 N 0.000 R Full Spare
S7 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Spare

Analog InpuUlNFI-NET
1 2 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 122- DigitallnpuUINFl-NET

L DESCRIPTION

The dlstal Irput/INFI-hIgf [D.l/Ll firnctlon code acqulres a dlg-

Ital lnput from another module ln a dlfferent node vla
IMI-NET. The lnput must come from a dtgltal exception report
block (functlon code a5) lf the source node ls a process control
unlt, or a dtgltal report lnde:c lf the node ls an lrterfiace unlt.
Updates are on an exceptlon report basls. Executlve bloeks are
used for the controller and NLMMOI modules. Segment control
blocks NMFC0l, NMFCO?, IMMFCOS, IMMFCO4, IMMFCOS,
IMMPCOI, IMMFPOI, IMMFPO2, IMMFPO3 and IMLMMO2
modules speetff exceptlon report lntervals.

To insure that the signal is successfully acqulred from the

INFI-NET, the digital signal generates a point quality flag. To
test the quality of the signal, include a function code 31 (test
quatity) block tn the configuratlon. The qualtty of the point
cannot be used as an lnput to any other tlpe of block. How-
ever, the output of the test quality block, representing the
quality, can be used as an lnput to other analog processing
blocks. Refer to Appendix D for a definltion of point quality.

NOTE:lf a moduleutilizesan importeddigitalvaluefromthe loop

the functionblocksthat uti-
in severalinstancesin its configuration,
lize that digitalvalue must be connectedto only one Dl/L block.
You cannot importexceptionreportsfrom the same (loop, node,
moduleand block)addressto morethan one destinationwithina
singlemoduleconfiguration.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descriptlon

N B Digital output value, quality and alarm state

DigitalInpuUlNFl-NET
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 122-1
FunctionCode 122

SPEC,FICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
S2 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Source block address
S3 N 0 I 0-250 Sourcenode address
S4 N 0 t 0-250 Sourceloop address
S5 N 0 I Full Spare
S6 N 0.000 R Full Spare
S7 N 0 0 - 9998 Spare

DigitalInpuUlNFl-NET
122-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 123r Device Driver

GENERALDESCHPNON

Ftrnctlon code L23 tnterfaces the control system to a fleld

devlce. It provtdes control and accepts feedback from lts
asslgned control devlce. It normdly recelves a control lnput
from the sequenctng logle and sets the control output equal to
the control tnput when the block ts tn auto. The control out-
put tJren goes to the assoclated devlce.

The devtce drlver also accepts up to two feedback lnputs from

the fleld that deffne the actual status of the devlce. Ttle colt-
trol output status represents the status of the devlce, deter-
mtned from tJre feedback tnputs as good, bad, or walting. A
waiting output ls generated when the feedback waiting time
has not elapsed after a state change. Ttle devlce driver gener-
ates urn exceptton report tndlcatJng output and alarm when:

o The device driver output changes.

or
o The devlce driver generates an alarm.
or
o The T-"* for *ceptlon reportln$ ls enceeded.

Devtce drlvers can be used ln batch and contlrruous conbrcl sys-

tems to control and observe a devlce. Arry boolean slgnal can
drlve a devlce drlver. It also can be operated from a eonsole, or
an ou@ut can be uncondltlonally set with irrterlock loglc.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Controloutput
N+1 R Controlouput status:
0.0= goOd
1.0= bad
Z.O= waiting

DeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 123 - 1
FunctionCode 123

SPEC'FICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof controlinput
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof feedbackinput 1
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof feedbackinput2
S4 Y 0 I 0 - 101 Controloutputstatusovenidesignal
S5 N 1 I Note1 Blockaddressof ouput ovenidepermissive
S6 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof ovenideoutput
S7 Y 0 I 0-11 Feedbackstatusmaskouput = 0
s8 Y 0 0-11 Feedbackstatusmaskouput = 1
s9 Y 0.000 R Full Feedbackwaitingtime (secs)
s10 N 0 I 0-255 Devicedriver displaytype
NOTE:
1. Maximumvalues are: 1023 for SLC01/21
20d,6for NMFCO1|O2,|MMFCO5,CBC01, CSC01 and |MMPCOI
9998 for !MMFC03/04 and IMMFPOUOAO3

EXPLANATION

The device driver, used with the other batch processlng

blocks, implements batch control. Normally, a sequence gen-
erator drives a device drlver block by setflng S I to the output
block address of the sequence generator block. Ttr.e devlce
driver may be controlled manually (from the console) or
unconditionally set. The states of the output overrlde and per-
missive speciflcations lndlcate whether manual control from
the console or rernote control ustng uncondttlonal loglc is per-
mitted. Table L23-1 tdentlfles tJre permltted control modes for
varlous states of the overrlde speetflcatlons 54 through 56.

Table 123 - 1. Efiect oJDeuice Driuer Ovenldc Permtssfise/ State Specfficatlons

Control Output Valueof Output
Permltted Control
Status Override Override Control Output Control Output Status
Mode
(s4) Permissive<S5>
ConsoleOverrlde Control (SO)= 0
XXO 0 Auto <sl> Normal
xx0 1 Auto <sl> Normal
Manual <console> Normal
)fi1 0 Auto <sl> Forcedgoodor waiting
XX1 1 Auto <sl> Forcedgoodor waiting
Manual <console> Forcedgoodor waiting
Remote Overrlde Control (SO) * 0
XXO 0 Auto <sl> Normal
XXO 1 Remote <s6> Normal
XX1 0 Auto <sl> Forced good or waiting
XX1 1 Remote <s6> Forcedgood or waiting

Device Driver
123-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 123

When the output of the block speclfled ln S5 ls one and SG ts

zero, manual overrtde from the console ls permltted. Speclfi-
catlon SO uncondlttonatly sets the output of tJle devlce drlver
when 56 ts conflgured to arry block address gfeater than zero.
The boolean output of the block referenced by 56 sets the out-
put of the devtce drlver. Thts feature precludes manual over-
rtde of the devtce from the operator console. When 55 equals
zero, only automatlc control ls perrnltted.

The control output status ts dependent on the feedback

lnputs, feedback wattJng tlme, and the feedback status
masks. Feedback status masks provide slgnals defining the
normal states of the feedback lnputs corTespondlng to the
control outputs of r.ero (SZ) and one (SB). If the values of the
feedback stgnals do not match those of the feedback status
masks for a gtven control output, an exeeptlon report gener-
ates and goes to ttre eonsole. The exceptlon report contalns
the value of the control output (zero or one) and an alarm
indlcator. When an operator command or loglc overrldes the
control output status, the control output status goes to zero.
This allows sequence logic to proceed nonndly. However,
alarms still generate, exceptton report, and dlsplay on the
console.

For example, when the devlce drlver controlllng an on/off

valve generates an alarm, the sequence monltor block exe-
cutes a fault step (e.9., shutdown). If the operator determines
that the valve ls worktng correctly, but the posltlon feedback
ls not correct for some reason, the fault stahrs c€rn be overrid-
den from the console by tuning the ones dlgft of 34 to a value
of one. Thls overrldes the control status output of the devlce
driver and tl:e sequence rnonitor block operates as if the
devtce is actlng correctly. The block address value specified
by SO determines whettrer control ls set unconditionatly or
whether the operator has control. An external alarm message
will sttll be transmltted to the console to tndlcate to the opera-
tor that tJ:e devlce ts malfunctlontng, but the sequence can be
restarted or used repeatedly. The console can be used to con-
flgure both dynamtc graphtc dtsplays and faceplate dlsplays
that allow access to all of the analog controllers, pushbutton
stations and devtee drlvers in the system.

Device Driver Element

The device driver element represents a devtce driver function

block in a process control unlt module control scheme. This
funetion block provtdes an ON/OFF slgnal to control a pro-
cess device. A device driver tag is requlred to both monitor
and change the output provlded by the block from the con-
sole. Figure 123-l details the informatlon presented in a
devlee drlver element.

DeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 123-3
Function Gode 123

TAGi|.AME TAGDESCRIPTOR
FACEPI.ATE
SELECTOR

REDTAG
DESCRIPTOR

ONESTATE
DESCRIPTOR FEEDEACK2
DESCRIPTOR
ZEROSTATE ZERO FEEDBACI(1
ZERO DESCRIPTOR
OVERRIDE
INDICATOR
A1 /TGT

OUTPUT
STATUS/OUALIVGROUP TNDICATOR

Figure 723-7. Deuice Driuer Element

The device drlver block exceptlon reports current output

state, two feedback states, overrlde status, feedback status,
mode, alarm status, and quattty presented at the devlee drlver
element. Attributes that relate to a devlce driver tag and can
be incorporated tnto any graphic or custom faceplate lnclude:

One state deeriptor shows the logic state deseriptor

related to a one state (logic 1) output of the device driver func-
tion block. This descrtptor ls the ONE state descrlptor set tre
the tag database for thls tag.

Zero state descriptor - shows the logtc state descrlptor

related to a zero state (loglc O) output of the devtce drlver
function block. This descriptor is the reRO state descrlptor
set in the tag database for thts tag.

Current output indicqtor ttre posltlon of thls lredtcator

identifies the currently requested logic state to be output by
the device drlver block. When next to tJle ONE state descrtp-
tor, the requested output ts currently a loglc 1. The output ts
a logic 0 when it is next to the reRO state descrlptor.

Feedbo;ek orte o;nd fiuo deseriptorc - dtsplay the logte state

descriptors related to the feedback stgpals trrput to the devlce
driver function block. Both feedback one and feedback two
fields can indicate either an ON (logic 1) or OFF [oSc 0) state.
The element displays the deseriptors conflgured as the feedback
one and feedback two reRO and ONE set In the tag database.

The feedback indications provide a verification of the actual

field device status. When a change is tnttiated, the descriptors
remain the sarne until the block tests the feedback inputs.
This does not occur until after a specified time elapses. The
device driver block also tests the feedback slgnals to deter-
mine if the control output status ls either good or bad.

Device Driver
123-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 123

Ouerride indieqtor - lndlcates an overrlde conditlon. Nor-

mally, the devtce drlver block determtnes the control output
status by compaflng tlle feedback stgnals to an e4pected con-
dltlon set ln lts conflgur:atlon. An OllRlndlcatton occurs when
the devtce drlver block ls set to overrlde lts reported control
output status. The overrlde forces the status to loglc O or good.

Mode indtcates the current operattng condtttolt. The block

operates ln elther m€rnual, automatle or remote control mode.

NOTE:A devicedriverblockmay be configuredto operatein auto-

rnaticmode only,automaticand manualmode,or automaticand
remotemode.Parametersset for the devicedriver functionblock
determinethe acceptableoperatingmodes.

Whlle tn auto mode, the control loglc sets the devlce driver
output state (the block only provldes an update to the dls-
play). Manual mode allows the operator to change the output
state tlrrough keyboard actlons. If the devtce drlver block is in
remote control mode, state changes cannot be initiated
tlrrough the console. The output of the block tracks the value
of another process control scheme functton block.

Informatlon goes from the devtce drlver to the console via

exception reports generated when the control output changes
state. Four states qdst for the devlce drlver:

OIf- device drlver ls off and no alarm has occurred.

Olf utith a;larm device driver ls off, but feedback does

not confirm.

o On- device driver is on and no alarm has occurred.

o On utith o,'lolr7n- device driver is or1, but feedback does

not conflrm.

The four device driver states can be used at ttre console for
dynamic graphJc dtsplay of the process. In a tSpical applica-
uon, a tag name (tagt1rye: DEVICE) ts assoctated $rith a
dynamic s5rmbol. The symbot has four dtfferent states, each
associated wfth one of ttre devtce drlver states. In the case of
€rn on /offvalve, a valve symbol for all four states ls dlsplayed,
but the color and bltnktng characterlstlc can be changed for
each symbol state to tndtcate the state of the valve.

Device Driver Control

Device driver control allows manually changing the device

drlver block output. Thls functton block ls usually part of a
process control untt module conflguratlon. Ttre devlce drlver
block provides an ON/OFF slgnal to a proeess devlce.

DeviceDriver
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 123 - 5
FunctionGode 123

The devlce drlver functlon block can develop lts outputs

based on control loglc or console lnput, or be uneondtttonally
set with interlock logic. Ttre functton block parameters deter-
t
mine which occurs. The operatlng modes also depend on thts
selectlon. The block can be set to allour automatlc mode only,
automatic and manud mode, or automatlc and remote mode.

To perform device driver control from the console, flrst enable

the devtce drlver element for control. Etther enter tts faceplate
selector through the keyboard or use an opttonal method of
selectiolt. A ?E? MODE: prompt appears when the element ls
frrst selected.

The device driver element cannot be controlled lf the element

displays REMOTE in the mode fleld. Manual eontrol may or
may not be allowed whlle the OVR lndtcator ls present. Thts
depends on the devlce driver block configuratlon.

To change the device driver control output, frrst press MAN/

AUTO to toggle the device drlver element to manual mode.
Once in manual mode, press the following keys to change the
output state:

E changes the device driver to a one state output.

6
fIlJ changes the device driver to a zero state output.

The TARGET: field changes to the target state after presslng

eittrer key. The display begins to update lmmediately. Ttte
current output indicator rnoves elther up or down to posltlon
itself next to the requested state. The feedback descriptors
update after receiving feedback stgnals from the process.

Specifications

sl -cl (Bloek o,ddres,s of control input) A sequence generator

block outputs up to eight boole€rn values for each step in a
process. This output ls cdled a mask. It represents the states
of eight devices for each step of the process. Each of those
eight values can be the control input for a dlfferent devtce
driver block. The values are output from ttre sequenee genera-
tor block in bloeks N through N+7. The devtce drtver block
accesses the values if S I is the block number of the sequence
generator output defined for control of tl:e assoctated devlce.

A block address of zero (default) for Sl conflgures the func-

tion code for batch language only.

s 2 - FEEDl (B,loek address of -feedhack input I) The feedback tnputs

are signals from the field that define the actual state of the
device. The values of the feedback lnputs are compared urith
feedback status masks to determine the control output sta-
tus. If the feedback inputs do not match the feedback status

DeviceDriver
123 - 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 123

masks for a glven control output, an alarm ls generated and

the control output status ls set to 1.O (bad).

S3 - FEED2 (Block oddress of feedbrck input 2)The feedback inputs

are slgnals from the field that deflne the actual state of the
devtce. The values of the feedback lnputs are comPared wtth
feedback status rnasks to determtne the control output sta-
tus. If the feedback tnputs do not match the feedback status
masks for a given control output, an d€rrm ls generated and
the control output status ls set to l.O [bad).

s4 - cosov (@ntrol oufttut stcrtus override) Refer to Table LZ3-I. When

the hundreds dfgtt equals one, the control output status ls
good as soon as the feedbacks match the approprtate feed-
back status mask.
x x x
Onesdlgit
0 = feedbackdeterminescontroloutputstiatus
1 = cootroloutput status ls 0.0 (good) or 2.0 (waltlng)

Hundredsdiglt
0 = DOlTllal
Operation
1 = early goodstiatusenable

NOTE:Earlyrecognitionof feedbackcancelsthe feedbackwaiting

time (S16) once feedbackconditionshave been rnet. This can
resultin bad statusand alarmpriorto feedbackwaitingtime time'
out.

S5 - OOPER (Block address of output ooertde Permissiue) When the

output overrlde permlsslve lnput value ls a logtc 1, the device
driver eontrol output can be controlled by a console (manud
mode) or by externd loglc (remote mode) referenced by 56.

When the output override perrnlssive tnrput ts a logic O, the

device driver control output is controlled by the control lnput
(automatlc mode) referenced by S1.

Refer to Tables L23-1 and 123-2 for more lnformatlon.

s6 - ovoLlr (Block address of ouerride input) Thts value determines

whether the override state selected ls manual or remote.

SO = O and <S5> = l, perrnltted control rnodes Erre auto

and martual.

56 * O and <S5> = 1, permitted control mode is remote'

57 - FDMSKO (y;eedhaek sta,tus mask outputfor control output of zero)

The value found in this block deflnes t]re norrnal state of the
feedback lnputs correspondlng to a control output of zero. If
control output is a zero and tlle feedback inputs to the device
driver do not agree wittr 57, an exceptton report wtth alarm is

DeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 2 3- 7
FunctionCode 123

generated. The ones dtgft ls feedback tnput one and the tens
dtglt ls feedback lnput ttvo.
x x

s g - FDMSKl (Feedbo;ck stcrtrrc mask outytut for control outgtut of lt

The value found in thls block deftnes the norrnal state of the
feedback inputs corresponding to a control output of one. If
control output is a one and tlle feedback lnputs to the devtce
driver do not agree wlth 58, an exception report wtth alarm ls
generated. The ones digit ls feedback lnput one and the tens
digft ts feedback lnput two.
x x

59 - FDWAIT (Feedho;ek utaiting time) This specilication defines the tlme

in seconds ttrat the devtce driver waits before comparing the
feedback inputs with the feedback status masks after a change
of state. For *ample, tf the devlce drlver controls a valve, feed-
back walttng tlme ls the vdve stroke tlme. Thts lnsures that
measurements taken when the devlce ls changlng posltlon or
starting up are not used for control or indlcatlon.

SlO . DISPLAY (Deuiee driuer displo;g tgpel The console provldes the capac-
ity to create dynamic graphtc and faceplate dlsplays. ThIs
specification defines ttre display tlpe used to represent thts
particular device. There is a special faceplate dlsplay created
especially for the device driver block called the device driver
mimic. Figure f23-f shows the devlce driver display. Refer to
the console instmction manual for a listtng of display t54res.

Di^splo;g tgpe

O = output and feedback indicators (Fig. lm-f)

Outputs

N (Control output) The control output drives the device associ-

ated with the device driver block. Ttre control output is nor-
mally the control (auto) input received from a sequence
generator block. Control outputs can be overridden by teputs
from the console (manual) or unconditionally set to a value
with interlock logic (remote). Specifications 54 through 56
define the override state, as shown tn Table 123-1.

DeviceDriver
123 - g 15 FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 123

N+1 (@nfipl outgtut stcrtus)Thts value ts output from the devlce

drtver to a devlee monltor block to lnform the control system
of the current state of the drlven devlce.

O.O= good
1.0 = bad
2.O = wslflng

A good output rneans that the feedback watttng tlme has

elapsed and the lnputs from the fteld agree wtth the feedback
status masks deflned ln S7 and 58 as the normd states for a
parttcular control output.

A bad output means that the feedback waltlng time has

elapsed and the tnputs from the fleld do not agfee with the
feedback status masks for a partlcular control output.

A waitfng output means that the feedback waltfng tlme has

not elapsed, and no comparlsons between inputs from the
field and feedback status masks has been made yet.

Control output status can be overrldden and forced good

when 54 equals )Q(1. If a devtee drlver mlmlc dlsplay ls con-
figured trr the console, lt lndlcates an overrlde state wtth OllR
ln the center of the bottom llne of the dlsplay.

APPLICATIO'VS

Device driver blocks can be used ln batch and contlnuous

processes to control a piece of equipment from the console or
to receive feedback on the state of the equipment. The follow-
irrg example shows a devlce drlver used tn a typtcal batch
apptication. The example illustrates how all the batch func-
tion bloeks interact ln a batch process. These blocks can also
be used for sequenttd control.

To be effectlve, a dlstrlbuted batch control system should be

partttloned for group control of lnterdependent unlt opera-
tlons. All interdependent untt operattons should be controlled
from a single module. Each independent unlt operatlon
should be located in a separate controller. This method maxi-
mizes system reliability and insures control system integrity.

Ftgure L23-2 shows a slmple process requlrtng batch control

capabilities. Reactants drawn from several storage tanks go
into two batch chemlcal reactors. After tlle batch reaction is
complete, the products transfer from the reaetors to an lnter-
mediate storage tank, process through a llquld/liqutd extrac-
tor, and then purlff fn a dlstlllatton column. Thls Process ls
characterTzed by several lnterconnected unlt operations, all of
which must functlon properly tn the proPer sequence for the

I process to operate.

DeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1S5 123 - 9
FunctionCode 123

Figure 123-2. Sampl.e Batch Apptication

Figure 123-3 shows t5pical partitioning of the example batch

control system. Separate eontrollers are provlded for each
reactor, for reactant distribution, for llquid/[quld q<tractlon,
and for distillatlon. \Vtth the partftlontng shown, lf the control
system for one of the batch reactors stops operatiott, the
other reactor operates and tJ:e rest of ttre process contlnues
to operate until immediate storage depletes, allowlng tlme for
the replacement of the malfuncttonlng component. If uslng a
single controller for the entire process, the process would
shut down abruptly, perhaps unsafely. It would stay shut
down until the malfunctlon could be diagnosed and corrected.

DeviceDriver
123- 10 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 123

OO}.ITrcIER @NTROUER2

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REASTOR1 I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

r -c- q- u B q r J : B E _ ----l

DtsTl.urtotl
@LUMT.I r - - o - -

Flgure 123-3. Partition@ of Sample Control System

Once the control system ls effecttvely partltfoned, each batch

operatlon can be deflned by ldentlfflng the devlces used, the
steps requlred for the batch sequence, the recipe parameters
used, and the emergency actlons required.

The basic approach to batch control ls to create sequence

control loglc that generates a untque output state pattern for
each step ln a sequence. ThIs loglc must automatically and
contlnuously verlff ttrat all of the devlees are operatlng as
directed. In thts way, ttre process divldes into a serles of easy

DeviceDriver
t-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 123- 11
Function Code 123

to constmct atr:dltary
sequence control loglc.
loglcs ltnked together through the
I
To develop batch control loglc:

1. The de\rices a.ss@lated wfth contnol of the batdr reactor must

be ldenfified. These devices tnclude analog measurement sen-
sors, modulating control valves, and dlscrete devlces suctr Ers
motors and on/off valves. Dlscrete devlce stahrs fdback, such
as motor starter holdfng contacts and valve Umft srnrltches,
should also be consldered. The analog and dtscrete derrtces asso-
ciated with the example batch reactor are shown ln Ffgure L23-4.

COMPONENTA

COMPONENTB

COLD WATER
RETURN
COMPONENTC

TP45187A

FIgure 123-4. Controt Deuices Associated u:ith Example Batch Reactor

2. A written description of the batch sequenciemust be pre-

pared. This description should divide the sequence into a series
of steps and fully descrlbe both the acdons taken durtng eadr
step and the feedback required before the sequence can pro-
ceed. Use the following steps for the orample batch sequenc€:

StepI Clean reactor. Open FV4, start Ml and Pl, and set TIC-2 set
point equal to recipe parameter.{ Go to Step 2 when reactor
is 8O percent full.

DeviceDriver
123- 12 ls FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code 123

Step 2 Empty reactor. Open FV5. When reactor ls less than flve per-
cent full, start ten mlnute ttmer. When t[ner tlmes out, go to
Step 3.

Step 3 Feed component A- Close FV5 and open FVl. Set FIC-I set
potnt equd to reelpe parameter B. Integfate flow untll the
totat amount added ls gfeater than the Ermount tndtcated by
recipe parameter C. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Feed component B. Close FVI and open FVZ. Set TIC-2 set
potnt equd to reclpe parameter D. Integrate flow unill total
amount added ls greater ttran the amount tndlcated by reclpe
parameter E. Go to Step 5.

Step 5 Feed component C. Close FV2 and open FV3. Integrate flow
until total amount added ls gfeater than the amount fndt-
cated by rectpe parameter F. Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Cook reactants. Close FV3. Ramp reactor temperature up to

recipe par€rmeter G at a constant rate. When TT-2 ls greater
than recipe parameter G, go to Step 7.

Step 7 Empty reactor. Open FV5. When reactor level is below five
percent, start ten mlnute tlmer. When tlmer tlmes out, go to
Step 8.

Step 8 Cue operator to revlew and prfnt out batch report. After oper-
ator acknowledges that he has done this, go to Step 1.

NOTE:The processis not a continuousbatchsequence.The pro-

cess ends at Step 8, and requiresoperatoraction to restartthe
batchsequence.

3. The recipe parameters must be deflned. These parameters

should be selected to dlow varlatlons in tlme, ternperature
and relative amounts of reactants from recipe to recipe. The
example batch reactor has seven reclpe parameters:

7 starttng reactor temperature

2 - rate of additlon of components to reactor (set potnt of

Frc_1)
3 - uunount of component A to add to reactor

4 - reactor temperature for the addltfon of comPonents B

and C

5 - amount of component B to add to reactor

6 - €rmount of comPonent C to add to reactor

7 - reactlon temperature

DeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 123 - 13
FunctionGode 123

4. The actlons requtred upon devlce fatlure must be deflned.

One emergency actlon may be deflned for a devlce fatlure tn
any step, or separate emergency actlons may be deftned for
devlce failures ln each step. For thts erample, a general fatl
safe conditlon odsts for response to arry devlce fallure.

Step 0 E-STOP (executed stop). Pl and Ml are left mnntng, and all
valves are set to fall safe posttton. Thts step erecutes when
the operator manually tnttlates an E-STOP, or the controller
detects a devtce fallure.

Flgures 123-5 through 123-l I show the conflguratlon used to

achleve the control. Figure 123-5 shows the loglc that corl-
trols the dlscrete devtees. Ftgures 123-6 through 123-l I
show the atudltary loglc requtred to tmplement each step.
Cross referenctng between the sequence deff,nttlon and these
figures provides a good tndicatlon of tJle fledbilIty and opHons
available for lmplementlng batch control.

In Flgure 123-5, the devtce drlvers control and monltor the dls-
crete control devlces used ln the example. The example batch

DDRIVE
c t o
FBI cs
FB:r sr T
OP sll
os SAT
ES
sl{
sAP
s10
sl1
s
s13

FEEDBACK
INPUTS

STEP INDICATORSTO
AUXILIARY LOGICS

Ftgure 123-5. Logic D@ramJor Example BatchReactor

DeviceDriver
123- 14 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 123

reactor has five onloffvalves, a pump and an agltator. The on,/

off valves have two llmlt swltches and requlre a ma:dmum of
five seconds for full tr:avel. The states of the llmtt surltches are
used as tJre feedback lndlcators, and feedback walfing tlme ls
five seconds to lnsure that the valve has ftntshed changtng
posltlons before the feedback values conflrm valve operatlolt.
The pump and agltator motor have only one feedback signal,
and requlre a ma:dmum of two seconds to confirm operation.
The feedback wattlng tlme for those devtces will be defined as
two seconds.

NOTE:OutputN is Step 0 indicator.lnput Sl to BMUXis Step 0

trigger.

Ttre devtce drtver has two outputs, a boolean output that

drlves the fleld device, and a real output that lndtcates lf the
field device is tn the correct state based on the lnput and feed-
back values. The real output goes to a device monltor block
that collects the outputs from all the devlce drtver blocks and
outputs a combined status for the proeess.

Atl device driver blocks connect to a device monitor block.

Each device monltor btock monitors the status of uP to eight
device driver blocks. It ls, tn effect, a speciallzed logic OR
block. If any input to the devtce monttor block ls bad or walt-
ing, then the output is bad or waltlng.

The output of the device monitor block is the control output

status for the whole process. That value (good, bad or waiting)
goes to a sequence monltor block. The sequence monitor
block controls step executlon. It determlnes whlch steps are
to be executed and when. It selects the next step to be exe-
cuted based on the value from the device monltor and a step
trigger value. The sequenee monitor block can be configured
to act on either or both tnputs. Each step ts defined by three
speclfications: the next nonnal step, the next fault step, and a
stop t54le. If the tnput from the devtce monltor block ls bad
(arry fleld device not in proper state), the sequence monltor
block witl select a fault step (Step O tn the example) to be exe-
cuted next. If the lnput is good, the step chosen depends on
the three specifications and the step selection configuration.

The number of the next step to be executed and a booleart

step trigger are sent from the sequence monitor block to a
sequence gener:ator block. Each sequence generator block
ineludes an array of up to eight outputs that can be used to
control device driver blocks. The sequence monitor block (in
its rnost commonly used form), wlth step tlpe 00, initiates
executlon of the next step when the step trig$er is on and the
status of all devtces for the batch untt is good.

The sequence monitor and sequence generator blocks are also

used to control and monltor the atr:dliary logics that must be
executed with each step. In the sample configuration, when

DeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB19!t5 123- 15
FunctionGode 123

the sequence generator block lnltiates a step, tlre output

mask for that step goes to the device driver blocks, and the
step number goes to a real stgnal demultlplexer block. The
real slgnal demulttplexer block converts the real step number
value to a series of boolean outputs whtch are used to select
the auxiliary logic correspondlng to the curent step. If the
red lnput ls a one, then outputs zero and two through seven
u/ill be zeros, and output one wfll be a one. Thus, the atr:dllary
logtc correspondlng to Step I wtll be lnttlated.

Ftgure 123-6 lllustrates the au:dllary loglc for Step l. Step I

includes opentng FV4, startlng Ml and Pl, settlng TIC-2 set
point equal to reclpe parameter A, and golng to Step 2 when
the reactor ls 80 percent full. The output mask controls FV4,

STEP 1 DESCRIPTON: VALVEFV4lS @ENED

srEp r TRTGGER A tD AGTTATOR Ml At{D pUMp pl ARE STARTED.
- nGz |S SET TO RECIPEPARAI,IETERA (SHOWN
BErOW). STEP I TRTGGERtS ENERGTZED WHEN
TA}.IKLEVEL IS ABOVE 8IO%.THIS WIU. CAUSE
STEP 2 TO BE DGCUTED.

CTNRENTNC€
TIC-z TAKESTHE SET POINT FROM RECIPE
SET POS{T VALUEA D OR G. THE CORRECTVALUEIS
SEI€CTED W]TH A MULTIPI.DGR IF STEP
1,4 OR 6 IS BEINGE)(ECUTED.THEN THE
CONTROL LOOP READ THE @RRECT
VALUEAS THE SET POINT.
OUTPT'TTO
Fgr€
s4
s5
slE
I sr9
A C/R
I
I
s20
cJn
I s21
t t r c
I s22
CI
I

I
s2. q
rf^
I s25
I tt^
t
sao
toA
I
I
97
toA
I sa8
p
I

I
sae
IRgl _^.
I
s30
I

I
nttQ
I

r !
t '

l l

1 l
I

l l
t l
r l
l
p
l
l
THE PURPOSEOF THE PULSE(rDOtG)
t l lS TWOFOU): FIRST.tT PUTS THE
t
l
l
!
CONTROIIER IN AUTOMATIC.SECONDLY
t t IT FORCESTHE WA STATIONTO TRACK
t
I
l
t
THE VALUEFROMTHE RMUX BLOCK
t l THIS DRVES TIGz TO THE CORRECT
t
t
l
l
SET POINT.
t l
t l
1 l
l L
l 1
l 1

r l

TP45190C

Figure 123-6. AtrrtIir:rv Logic.for Step 1 in Example

DeviceDriver
123 - 16 ls FEBlees l-Eg6-200B
 Function Code 123

Ml and Pl; the aurdltuy logtc controls the set polnt and reac-
tor level measurements.

The step number (one) goes to a red stgnal multtplexer, whlch

outputs lnput value number one. Input value number one ls a
reclpe value A, the startlng reactor temperature. That value
goes through a rate llmtter and the rate the temperature
ramps up (deflned uslng €rn adapt block). The output rate
ttren goes to a manuaUauto statton as the set potnt, artd PID
control is performed based on that set potnt and the cur:rent
temperature read from a temperature tndlcator ftT-2).

The digttal timer block shown at the bottom of Figure 123-6

seryes two puqposes. When a step requlrln$ a change in reac-
tor temperature executes, the tlme trsures that the controller
ls ln automatlc, and lt forces the ma,nual/auto station to
track the temperature value from the real signd multlplexer
block. Ttris drives the curTent set point to the correct value for
each step. Ttle dtgital tlmer ls conflgured as a pulse to Put the
controller lnto auto and then to go off. Thts removes a lock in
auto condltion €rnd allows puttlng the controller tnto manual
from keyboard.

The loglc at the top of Flgure 123-6 lllustrates the step trl$$er
which signals the completion of Step I. A tank level value
goes to a hfgh/low compare block. When tl:e tank level
exceeds the high limit (fn tl:ts case 80 percent) the high
alarm output goes to one. This value is AItlDed with the
Step I indicator from the real stgnd demultlplexer to create a
step trigfgfer. When the high alarm output goes to one, the
output of the AM block goes to one also. That zero to one
transition of the output of the AI{D block is the step tri$$er
shown in Figure 123-5 slgnallng the comPletlon of the auxil-
iary logic for Step 1.

The values of all the completton step trtgsers go to a boolean

stgnal multtplexer block tllat selects one of ten input signals
and provldes it as the output. The signal is selected with an
input select slgnal. Flgure f23-5 lllustrates that the lnput
select signal is .tJ:e step number output from the sequence
generator block (in t}ts ffiample one). Therefore, the value
output from the boolean signal multtplexer block is the value
of the completion flag for Step 1. The output of the boolean
signal multiplexer bloek is the step tri$flier ilrput for the
sequence monitor block. When that value makes a zero to one
transition, the sequence monttor selects the next step ln the
process. This arrangement lnsures that tl:e current step runs
to completton before the next step ls lnltlated.

NOTE:All step logicshavethe samestructure.They are triggered

by a step indicatorand whenthe step logicis completea steptrig-
ger generates.All devicechecking(to insurecorrectoperation)is
doneautomatically via the devicedriversthroughthe devicemoni'
tors by the sequencemonitor.

DeviceDriver
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 123- 17
Function Code 123

Flgures L23-7 through 123-11 lllustrate the atudllary logtcs

associated urtth Steps 2 through 8 ln the example process.

NOTE:Althoughnot specificallyshownin the drawings,all integra-

tors havea defaultvalueof blockaddressfive for S3. This means
the integratorstrackzero when not active.Whenactive,they start
froman initialvalueof zero.

Recipe values A through G atre selected from seven real reclpe

table blocks as shown tn Ftgure L23-l 1. A remote m€rnual set
constant block ls used by the operator to seleet one of ten real
values for each reeipe value, enab[ng the operator to ffne tune
a recipe and create several products wtth one set of equlpment.

STEP 2INDICATOR

OI{E SHOTruSE TO RESETETAPISED

TI|ER
STEPE T|^|x S€QT.|EIICE
@ilTROt OPE}ts F\'€TO
EilPTY REA TOR W}€N R€AgfOR IS BELCR'Y S.
A 10 UNUTE EI,APISEDTNffiR
|s STARTED.U'IGN IO
TN&'TE3HAVEM$|ED. S|TEP2 AOHPLENOXTEOGER
ls ETGRSZEO.T}ilS DBI'ES TAs| SGCI.,E}ICE
@ifrRotsto silEP 3.

,..11 STEP 3 TRIGGER

STEP 3INDICATOR S'TEPS T}€ FLOUV OF @ffi'}IE}IT A |s ITEGRATED.

rirlcfl rcTAtFloyvxt gGATERTr{Ail REcpErf,$f c.
srEP 3 lRrcloER ls €ilEnctrED. TlrS c^ulEtg grEP a
TrOSEGll{EXECtttPftt

OUTPUTTO
FC1/-1

FICI REICEfi/EgIT3 S€T FCNNfFROI RECIPE

\Atu€ 8. wr{EN STEP3. a OR 5 tS BES|G
pGcr.,TgD. Tt{E 6}lTROt LOOPtS n.AC€D tN
AUTOTTANC. Ul'}|Eil OftER SIEFS AREEXECUTED
TllE LOOPilSPI.ACEDr,l UAtSrAtAiFTl€
orrTPuT 13CIOSED.

RECIPEVALUEB

STEP 3INDICATOR
cl ---1 I
I

srEP 4 rNDrcAToR L I

(3s) i o csf{orrurs€rocrosE
\,AII/EATD ruT @t(fROL
STEP
-l SINDICATOR r N L@P nu,AmJAt
t - - -

Figure 723-7. Atrxilia;ry LogicJor Steps 2 and 3

DeviceDriver
123- 18 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 123

STEP 4: THE FLOW OF COMFONENT B lS

STEP 4 TRIGGER
INTEGRAIED UNTIL IT IS GREATER T|'|IAN
RECIPE VALUE E THE STEP 4 TRIGGER IS
ENERGIZED,CAUSING STEP 5 TO BE E)GCUTED.

STEP 4 INDICATOR

g4L--;

STEP5: THEFLOWOFCOMPONENT C IS
STEP 5 TRIGGER INTEGRATEDUNTILIT IS GREATERTHAN
RECIPEVALUEF. THESTEP5 TRIGGERIS
ENERGIZED,CAIJSINGSTEP6 TO BE DGCUTED.

STEP 5 INDICATOR

(?4!_
_ _;

TP45t92A

Figure 723-8. Attxilinrv Logic.for Steps 4 and 5

DISTRIBUTEDRECIPE HANDLING

Dependtng on the memory requlrements for the actual batch

control conflguratlon, rectpes can be stored ln the same mod-
ule as the control conflguratlon, or ln another module located
elther on the same Controlway/module bus or ln a different
process control unit on the communleatlons hlghway.

This dtstributed reclpe handllng capablllty generally elimi-

nates the requtrement for a centrallzed computer to store
batch reclpes, and lts assoclated costs, proJect complicattons,
and operatlonal unrellabllttles. Furttrer, reclpe storage can be
expanded lncrementally as the need arises by slmply adding
another module to the control system.

Storing Recipe Data

A specLallzed functlon block has been provtded tn the module

to stmphry reelpe handllng. The red reclpe table function block
(RECIPR, functlon code 118) stores up to ten values of one rec-
ipe parameter. The output of the RECIPR block corresponds to
the parameter value for the recipe number lnput to the
RECIPR block. Ttre RECIPR block can be used to ehange the
value of arry variable parameter from reclpe to reclpe. Further,
the RECIPR block can change whlch steps are used for prepa-
ration of a batch, and the order that the steps are executed.

DeviceDriver
l-E96-2008 rs FEBlees 123 - 19
FunctionGode 123

STEP6INDICATOR STEPOTRI@ER
I
STEP4: THE FLO,\, OF COMPIONEHT B IS
INTEGRATED UiITI.1T IS GREATERT}IAN
RECIPEVALUEE THE STEP. TRICTGER lS
ENERGIZED.CAUSINGSTEP5 TO 8E EXECUTED

q1L ;

RAilP RATE

THIS LOGICATUUSTSTHE RAMPRATEOF NC2 N

STEPO. THE TMNSFER BLOCKWITLOUTPT'TA Lcn,Y
VALUEWHICHLHITS THE RATEAT WHICHTHE SET
POINTCAN BE CMNGED. WHENATiIYSTEPBUT6
IS BEINGDGCUTED. A HIGHVALUEIS OUTPUT
STEP6 INDICATOR FROMTHETMNSFER BLOCK THE RESULTIS
INSTAI.ITCHANGEIN THE SET FOINTOF TPA

STEP7 INDICATOR STEP7 TRIGGER

STEP7 EMPTYREACTORgY OPENINGFV€.

WT{ENREACTORLE]YELIS BETOVI'5%, START
10 MINUTETIMER. WHEN 10 MINUTESIS UR
STEP7 TRIGGERWIU- BE ENERGIZED
CAUSINGD(ECT'TIONOF STEP8

Figure 123-9. Atrxilio';ry Logic-for Steps 6 and 7

(45)
'-
81

STEP6TRIE€ER

STEP 8 DESCRIPTilCT*A BATC}I TICKET |s PRINTED

OUT. TTIE@ERATOR IS ASKEDTO ACK}IO/VLEDGE
THAT IT IS PRINTEDOIJT. HE DOESTHIS TTROT'GH
THE RCM BLOOC TTIESEOI..IET.ICEWILL ADVAI.ICETO
THE NDff I.IORMALSTEP. NOTE THATTHIS IS STEP
1 WHICH wlLl- INITU$ET}IE BATCFISECIUENCEACrAlN.

Tlr4{tl958

Figure 123-70. Arrxiltury l-ogicfor Step I

DeviceDriver
123- 20 15FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionGode 123

srEcrPR
ES

EPs
El'

#EcrPR
ES
EPrs
E1'

#rEclPR
ES

EPIS

Ev

#rEclPR
ES

EPS

F'

srEcrPR
ES

EPS
Ev

PBECTPR
ES

EPIS
El/

srEcrPR
ES

EPS
ET'

Ftgure 723-77. Rectpe TablesJor Dmmple Process

RECIPR blocks can be llnked together ln parallel (each block

recelves the reclpe number as an lnput), wlth each block stor-
lng up to ten values for each of the reclpe parameters. If more
than ten values are regulred for each parameter, the RECIPR
blocks can be llnked together tn serles to provtde the neces-
sary number of values for each pararneter (the second block is
slaved to the first, the thfrd ls slaved to tl:e second, etc.). Con-
sequently, a batch process requtdng etght reclpes, each wittr
five parameters, requlres flve RECIPR blocks to store the rec-
ipe data. A batch process requlrlng 28 reclpes each urfth flve
parameters, requlres 15 RECIPR blocks (two slave blocks con-
nected to each of ftve master blocks).

DeviceDriver
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 123 - 21
FunctionCode 123

RECIPEHANDLINGFORA FIXEDBATCHSEQUENCE

In a fixed batch sequence, the order ln whtch the steps are

accomplished remalns ftxed from reclpe to reclpe, but the
arnounts of itrgredlents and the condltlons they are added ln
may v€uJr. The following lube otl blendtng example lllustrates
how flxed-sequence reclpes can be edlted. Table L23-2 shows
the contents of a serles of reclpes.

Table 123-2. Rectpe Contents

Parameter Descrlptlon
1 Percentcomponent
A in blend
2 PercentcomponentB in blend
3 Percentcomponent
C in blend
4 Percent component D in blend
5 PercentcomponentE in blend
6 Percent component F in blend
7 Maximum flow rate of blend
I Parameternumberof componentto be usedfor viscositytrim
9 Mscosity set point (SUS) for blend
10 Totalamountof blendproduction(barels)

Each of these parameters is stored in a RECIPR block. Ttle

recipe is stored in ten RECIPR blocks tied together ln parallel.
The module configuration logic required to manipulate and
store this recipe is shown in Figure 123-12.

NOTES:
1. EachRECIPRblockcontainsone of the recipeparameters.

2. REMSETblocksload the new valuesinto the RECIPRfunc-

tion blocks.These blocks show the currentvalue of the recipe
parameterbeforeany changesare entered.

3.. The recipe being selectedfor use is from the REMSETat

blockaddress1000.

4. The RCMat blockaddress907 is usedto writethe newvalues

intothe RECIPRblocksthroughREMSETS at blockaddresses908
through917.

5. In thisconfiguration,
boththe REMSETthat sefectsthe recipe
parameterfor editing and RCM that writes the new pararneter
valueto the RECIPRblockare interlocked to alloweditingof the
recipeonlyduringStep1 of the batchsequence.Withoutthisinter-
lock,the recipecan be editedat any time duringthe executionof
the batch.

6. After recipeediting is complete,the edited recipe can be

downloaded to the RECIPRblocksby triggeringthe RCMat block
address907fromthe console.

DeviceDriver
123 - 22 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 123

RSCfETRATCT(
- - - - - I >

}IOTES:
I. TI{IS PAGE AtTilIIS THE UITERTO ENTER RECNPE
VATUES FOR |TEilS A THRq'GH G. NOTE THAT RECIPE
ITEMSICAI{ BE C}IAI{GED ONLY TN'flNG STEP T.
DEFIilITPTIS OF TI{E REOPE ITET{S ARE:

r- - -{F }|()f gfEP f RECNPEA. PERCEITAGE OF A lN Flt{At PROIXTCT

RECNPEB. PERCEII|TAGEOF 8lN Ffl{At PROIXTCT
RECIPE C. PERCEilTAGE OF C lN FI}{AI PRODUCT
RECIPE D. PERCEITTAGEOF O lN Flt|At PRODT CT
RECIPE E. PERCEI{TAGE OF E lN FhrAt PROdTCT
RECNPEF. PERCEI{TAGE OF F lN FlMt PROttt CT
RECNPEG . llAXllluil FIChY OF PRODiTCT

CASTCADELooF SEI-ECT r CASCADED LOOP | .6

AC SETPONNT. DESIRED Vl{lCoSlTY OF PROOTCT
TOTAL FtOUl, . TOTALIZED AIIOUNT OF PRODUCT

2. THIS TOGIC ATLOA'TI THE OPERATOR TO VIEW THE

RECTPEVALUES AND EOT TTIE RECIPE ON{JNA

3. THIS ALLCn,I'STI{E OPERATOR TO CI{ANGE

ARECIPE ONLYWI{EN IN STEP 1. THE REMSET
TRACf€ ITSELF WHEN tK)T lN STEP f .

RECTETRACX
I
I
I
a
I
a
I
'r-- -
RECPEV^II..|EA 1

RECIPEVALTEC

t8l RECmVTUJEE

RECP€T'ALI.EF

RECIP€ I'ALUE F

C^SCADE
tooP sEl,Egr

Arc SETFOOTT

AIC SETFONT

TOTALFLOUV

TOTALFtOVV 917

IN STEP1.
NOTE:A RECIPECAl{ BEETXIEDOT{LYVI'HEN

Ftgure 123- 12. Modrtle Corfigwallon LogicJor Flxed-*qterce B atch @ntrot

F,:ampte u;flh On'line MiW
DeviceDriver
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 123- 23
W
I

I
 FunctionCode124- SequenceMonitor

GENERAT DESCRIPTION

The sequence monltor functlon code controls the execution of

a sequence generator block by selecttng the order of step exe-
cutlon ln a process based on system and external fnputs. The
sequence monltor block performs a log[c actlon based on the
value of tlre control stahrs trrput from a devlee monltor block
and a boolean step trtgger lnput. Dependfng on the value of
the control status tnput, the next step can be a fault step or a
norrnd step determtned by lnternal loglc. The sequence mon-
Itor block can be placed tn elther automatlc or sernl-auto-
matlc mode, and lncludes hold/lnltlall-'e and executed stop
(E-STOP) lnputs. Each sequence monttor block handles up to
eight steps. If more than etght steps are required, a number of
sequence monltor blocks can be chatned together in series
fashion urtth S 1. The sequence monltor block deflnes step
t54re, next step, and fault values for each step.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlption

N R Jumpstepnumber
N+1 B Jumpsteptrigger

SPECIFICAT'ONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 l Note 1 Block address of next sequence monitor block associated
with this sequenoe of steps:
0 = no more blocks
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof controlstatusinput
S3 N 0 Note1 Blockaddressof steptrigger
S4 N 0 I Note 1 input(holdcurrentstepon 0
Blockaddressof hold/initialize
to 1 transitionof input)

SequenceMonitor
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB1995 124-1
FunctionCode 124

SPECI FICATION S @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S5 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof semi-automatic trigger(inltiatenext step
on a 0 to 1 transitionof input)
S6 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof E-STOPinput(blockwill be resetto Step 0
when<56>=1)
S7 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof initialstep number(resetstep)
S8 Y 1 I Note1 Blockaddressof semi-automaticpermissive:
<S8>= 0 = semi-automaticmodeallowed
<S8>= 1 = seml-automaticmodenot allowed
S9 Y 0 I 0-22 Step 1 type:
0X = permitholdand semi-automaticmodes
1X = permitholdonly
2X = permitno option
X0 = advancewhen <S2>= 0.0 and <S3>= 1 only
Xl = advancewhen<S2>= 0.0
)(2 = advancewhen<S3>= 1 only
sl0 Y 0 I 0-22 Step2 type
sl1 Y 0 I o-n Step3 type
sl2 Y 0 I 0-22 Step4 type
sl3 Y 0 0-22 Step5 type
sl4 Y 0 I o-22 Step6 tlpe
sl5 Y 0 I o-22 Step7 type
sl6 Y 0 I 0-22 Step8 type
sl7 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafterStep 1 if input is good
sl8 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafter Step2 if input is good
sl9 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafter Step 3 if input is good
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafterStep4 if inputis good
s21 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafter Step 5 if input is good
s22 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafter Step 6 if input is good
s23 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafterStep 7 if input is good
s24 Y 0.000 R Full Stepto executeafterStep I if input is good
s25 Y 0.000 R Full Step 1 fault step (controlstatusinput bad)
s26 Y 0.000 R Full Step2 faultstep(controlstatusinputbad)
s27 Y 0.000 R Full Step3 faultstep(controlstatusinputbad)
s28 Y 0.000 R Full Step4 faultstep(controlstatusinputbad)
s29 Y 0.000 R Full Step5 faultstep(controlstatusinputbad)
s30 Y 0.000 R Full Step 6 fault step (control stiatusinput bad)
s31 Y 0.000 R Full Step7 faultstep(controlstatusinputbad)
s32 Y 0.000 R Full Step8 faultstep(controlstatusinputbad)
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare:2046for NMFCOIIO?,
!MMFC0S,|MMPC01,
CBC01andCSC01
9998for IMMFCOS/O4
and IMMFPOUOAO3

EXPLANATION

The sequence monitor block uses the values of two tnputs to

determine the next step number ln a batch process. The ffret
input is tlle control stahrs input read from a device monitor
block. This input defines the crurent state of the devtces that the

Monitor
Sequence
124-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Function Gode 124

sequence generator block controls. Thls lnput can be O.O(good),

1.0 (bad), or 2.O (watflnd. If even one device ls bad, thls tnput is
marked bad (value equals 1.O).The second lnput ls the step trig-
ger. The step trtgger ts dependent on the current step and tlle
results of au:dliary logic ulssoclated wfth the devlce tir questlon.

Each step of a batch sequence often requlres au:dllary logtc to

perform functlons tn addltlon to actlvatJng /deactlvating dls-
crete devlces (1.e., change controller set potnts, totall"E flow,
etc.). Flgure L24-L shows hovr thfs audllary logfc tles llrto the
batch executlon conflguraflon. The au:dltary loglc exeeutes
accordlng to the current step nurnber read from the sequence
generator block. Ttte current step number lnput then selects
from the results of that aurdltuy loglc the boolean stgnal that
will be output to the sequence monltor block as the step trigger.

The values of the step trigser and tl:e control status input are
tested against several operator defined parameters to deter-
mlne whtch step executes next.

SEQGEN
I
cs 2
cAs
T J T
S5 sll T 3
s6 SAT
Jf s H 4
Es
58 SN T H 5
s9 s P
R o
s10
s11 J 7
s J t 8
sl3
s D C S
FEEDBACK I
INPUTS sr6

STEP TRIGGER

2
RDEMUX
3

4
STEP INDICATORSTO
AUXILIARY LOGICS
5

FIgure 124- 1. LqIc Diogran SholDiulg*qtenre Monilpr Blodc Used ln a Batch Opuallon

SequenceMonitor
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB19es 124 - 3
FunctionCode 124

The sequence monltor block has both a next step and a fault
step for each step number. When the control status lnput ls
bad (1.O), thls functlon automatlcally selects the fault step
number. The fault step number goes to the sequence generia-
tor block if the step tSpe requlres a good status lnput to con-
tinue with the sequence. If the control status lnput ls good
(O.0), or walting (2.O1, the output depends on the step tSpe
deflned ln the speclflcatlon descrlptlons.

The sequence monltor block can operate ln elther €rn auto-

matlc or seml-automatlc mode. fn the automatlc mode, ttre
sequence ls dependent on the values of the control stahrs
lnput and the step trlgfgfer. In the seml-automatlc mode, the
seguence ls dependent on the values of the control status
lnput, the step trigger, and the seml-automatlc step trlgger.
The operator must actlvate the seml-automatlc step trtgger
manually to proceed with the sequence as one of the condl-
tions to go to the next step. The block c€rn be placed ln seml-
automatic mode only lf both the seml-automatlc permtsslve
and step type specifications permit lt.

NOTE:For the sequencemonitorto beginexecutionfrom Step 0,

input<S4>musttogglefrom one to zerowhilethe
the old/initialize
valueof <S7>dictatesthe beginningstep numberto execute.

Specification Sl ts the block address of next seguence monttor

block ire the serles of blocks used to execute the sequence. If thfs
value equals zero, there are no more blocks ln the sequence.
Each sequenee monitor block can accorrmodate efght steps of a
sequence. If the sequence contalns more than efght steps,
sequence monltor blocks can be ltnked Ir a serles, wlth the last
step of tlle first block inttlalt"tngl the ffrst step of the nort blodr,
etc. Therefore, Steps I through 8 Xr ttre second sequence monl-
tor block are Steps 9 through 16 fn the sequence.

s2 - csl Specification 52 ts tlre block address of control stahrs lnput

(tJpically a device monltor block). Ttre value ln thfs block repre-
sents the control status of all the devlces tn the control loop.
The output of thts block ls good when all tl:e lnputs are good,
bad when any one input is bad, and uraittng tf arry input ls walt-
ing for a reply from a devlce driver block and no lnputs are bad.
This value and the value of the step trtgger are used to select
the next step in the sequence. When the control status lrrput ls
bad, the fault value for the next step is automatlcally output tf
the step t5pe ls one that requlres a good status to contlnue wtth
the sequence. If the control status lnput ts good oruratttng, out-
put depends on the step tlpe (S9) for the current step.

0.0 - good
l.O = bad
2.O = w&iting

SequenceMonitor
124-4 ls FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 124

NOTE:Any step trigger (Sg) or semi-automaticmodetrigger(S5)

that occurswhilethe controlstatusinputis 2.0 (waiting)is remem-
bered and therefore acted upon when the control status input
becomes0.0 (good).

s 3 - STEP Spectficatlon 53 ts the block address of step trlgger. The value

ln thts block, used wlth the control status lnput, selects the
next step tn the control sequence. Au:dllary logtc used for the
batch process generates the step trtgger, Ttte sequence monl-
tor recognDes the trtgger when lt goes from a zero to one state
and when lt ts held hlgh fn lts one state.

s 4 - HOLD Speclflcatlon 54 ls tlle block address of hold/tnttlalkn value.

The sequence monltor block can hold the sequence at certaln
steps. The hold/tnlflallze functlon ls actlve only when the step
tSpe speclflcatlon ts conflgured to permlt lt.

<S4> = 1, the sequence holds at the culTent step.

<S4> = I to O transitlon, the sequence monitor block begtns

execuflon wtth the lnlfial step speclfied by 57.

<S4> = O, sequence ts tn run mode.

NOTE:To enablethe sequencemonitorto resumerunningfrom

the currentstepafterthe hold,it is necessaryto feed the iumpstep
numberoutputN intoinPut57.

s 5 r SEMI Specificatlon 55 ls the block address of seml-automatlc mode

trlgger. When the seml-automatic mode is permttted by step
tlpe (Sg) and the seml-auto perrnissive (SS1, the operator
must change thls value from ?.ero to one as one of the condi-
tions for tntttation of the next step of ttre sequellce.

s 6 - E-STOP Speclflcatlon SO ls the block address of E-SIOP (executed

stop) tnput. Ttle E-gfOP spectflcatton drlves the sequence to
Step O (the reset step) whenever tt has a value of one. The
block referenced by thts speclflcatlon ls nonnally a remote
control memory funetJon block used as an E-STOP. Thus,
resenre the dlsable mask (Step O) ln sequence generator
blocks drlven by the sequence monltor block for E-S[OP.

s 7 - INIT Speclflcatlon SZ ts the block address of lntilal step number.

When the bloek ls lnltlall-ed by a one to zero transition of
<S4>, the sequence begtns wtth the step ldentllled in this
block.

S8 - PERM Speclflcauon 58 ls the block address of the seml-automatlc

permtsslve. When the vdue ln the block ls a zeto, the seml-
automauc mode ls permltted unless step tJrpe (S9) overrldes lt.

<S8> = 0, seml-automatlc mode permttted.

<S8> = l, automatlc mode permltted.

SequenceMonitor
l-E96-200B 1sFEB199s 124-5
FunctionCode 124

s9 - wPEl Spectflcatlon 59 ls the Step I t5pe. Each step tlpe ls made up

of two digits. The ones dfglt deflnes the states of the control
status input and step trigger necesszrrJr for the block to lril,-
tiate the next step of the sequence. The tens dlst ldenttfles
the control optlons avallable to tJre operator for the step.
x x
| - ones dlglt
Controlstatusinput stateand steptrigger
X0 = Advancewhen<S2>= 0.0 and <S3>= 1
Xl = Advancewhen<S2>= 0.0
)(2 = Advancewhen<S3>= 1
Tensdlglt
Controloptions
0X = Permitholdand semi-automatic
modes
lX = Permithofd
2X= Permitno option

S10to 516- Specifications S10 through 516 €ue the step tlpes for Steps 2
TYPE2to TYPES through 8 defined in 59.

S17to S24- These specilications define tJ:e number of the step the system
STEP1to STEPS should execute after Step n (n equals one to efght) ls com-
pleted when the block is operattng nonnally.

S25 to S32 - These spectfications define the number of the fault step the
FAULT1to FAULTS system should execute after Step n (n equals one to elght) ls
completed when tl,e block recelves a bad (1.0) treput from the
device monitor block and step t5r1perequlres a good control
status input.

Outputs

N (Jump step number) Output N identifies the number of the

step performed at the conclusion of the current step.

N+1 (Jump step trigger) Upon a zero to one transltlon of output

N+ 1, initiates a step jump tn the sequence generator block.
The sequence generator block then executes the step tdentlfied
by the jump step number. A zero to one transitlon of this value
occurs when the sequence monltor block proceeds to the next
step in ttre sequence (when the condltlons deflned by the step
t5pe specification are met). Thls output malces a one to zero
transition one segrnent cycle aft,er the zero to one transltlon.

APPLICATIOruS

Refer to function code 123 for an example of the sequence

monitor block used in a batch process. Sequence monltor
blocks c€rn also be used for sequenttal control.

SequenceMonitor
124-6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 125- DeviceMonitor

GENERATDESCRIPTION
sl
The devtce monltor bloclc takes the control status outputs
s3. from up to f6 devlce drlvers or devtce monltors to provide a
s4.
s5 common control output status. Ttre control output status can :
s6. be sent to another devtce monltor block, or to a sequence mon-
s7
58 Itor block that determtnes the next step ln a Process. When all
s9 tnputs are good (0.0), ttte output ls good (O.O).When any lnput
s10
sl1 ls bad (1.0), the output ls bad (1.0). When any input ls waiHng ;
'
s12 (2.0) and no lnput is bad (l.O), the output ls watttn$.
sl3
s14
ss 1 6 UTILIAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N R Control output status:
0.0 = gOod
1.0 = bad
2.0 = waiting

SPECIFICAT'OATS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of CO status 1
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO stratus2
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status3
94 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status4
S5 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of CO status 5
S6 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status6
S7 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status7
S8 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status8
S9 N 5 l Note 1 Block address of CO status 9
s10 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof GOstatus10
s11 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status11
s12 N 5 Note 1 Block address of CO status 12
s13 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status13

Device Monitor
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB19e5 125-1
FunctionCode 125

SPE ClFl CATIO,A|S@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl4 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status14
sl5 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof CO status15
sl6 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof CO status16
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: zo4;O
for NMFCOIIO?,
fMMFCOS, CBC01,CSCO1and lMMPC0l
9998for |MMFC03/04
and IMMFPOIIOUO3

EXPLANATION

The device monitor block monltors a group of control output

status values. It reads those values from a devlce drlver or
other device monitor block and outputs a value dependent on
the values of the lnputs.

For example, if a sequence generator block deflnes output

states for ten field devlees, the devlce monltor block assocl-
ated with that control loop recelves the control output status
for the devices and generates a common output. That output
goes to the sequenee monltor block controlltng the step out-
put of the sequence generator block. Ttle sequence monltor
block then uses that inforrnatlon to select the next step tn the
process. It is used as a feedback from the field to alert the
system of an abnormal state of the fleld devlces.

Figure L25-L lllustrates tlrls control scheme. If a control loop

controls more than 16 devices, the output of addlttonal devlce
monitor blocks can be fed lnto another devlce monltor block
to establish a common output. Therefore, no matter how
many devices Errebeing controlled by a stngle sequence gener-
ator block, the control output status can be reduced to one
value representing all fnputs.

Specifications

51 to 516- Specifications Sl through 516 are the block addresses of the

COS1to COS16 device drivers control status output or the devtee monitor
block contalning the control output status values for other
monitored devices.

Outputs

N Output N is the control output status based on the control out-

put status of the devices monitored by the devtce monltor block.

O.O= all inputs good

1.O = €rry input bad
2.O = no inputs bad and at least one tnput waittng

NOTE:Onlyone inputmustbe bad for the outputto be bad.

DeviceMonitor
125-2 15 FEB 1995 t-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode 125

APPLICATIO'VS

Devtce monltor blocks can be used to control any system that

requlres the output of a group of devtces be a certaln value
before a control step ls lmplemented. Refer to functlon
code L23 for an example of tlre devlce monltor block used ln a
batch control process.

DDRIVE
sl _ lPDrilvE^l(123)
c r o
FBT
Fn sr
OP
os

sl

DDRIVE SEQMON
cr o cs
FBl
T J T N+5
Fep, ST
SH
OP
SAT
os Es
Jt

SN
SAP
99
51t
sl I
5T

DDRIVE
c r o
FBl
s7
FB2 sr
OP
OS

TO FIELD DS/ICE

FIgure 725-l . Deuice Monttor Block used tp @rttr:ol Mrifiple F1a;ldDeuires

DeviceMonitor
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 125 - 3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode126- RealSignalDemultiplexer

GENERALDESCR/,Pr,ON

The real slgnd demultlplexer functlon code outputs boolean

stgnals based on a real lnput value. Ttle real nalue can be
converted to boolean values ln three modes (seleet, lnteger
and BCD). An unllmlted number of real slgnal demultlplexer
blocks may be ltnked togetlrer lm tlle select mode (demultfplex
the real lnput tnto the requtred number of boolean outputs).
Up to four blocks may be llnked together ln the tnteger and
BCD modes for demulflplodng. Ttle ffrst block ln the llnk ltst
ls the group master. ttre master aecepts the lnput slgnal and
drtves the outputs for the grouP.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N B Outrut 0 (leastsignificantbit)
N+1 B Output1
N+2 B Output2
N+3 B Output3
N+4 B Output4
N+5 B Output5
N+6 B Output6
N+7 B Output7 (mostsignificantbit)

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof selectinPut
S2 N 0 I 0-2 Conversionmode:
0 = s€lect(unlimitednurnberof blocksin linklist)
1 = integer(maximumof 4 blocksin link list)
2 = BCD(maximumof 4 blocksin link list)
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof nextblockin link list
NOTE:
CBCO|,CSC01and lMMPC0l
1. Maximumvaluesare: 2046for NMFCOil1O?,!MMFC0S,
and lMMFP0l/02/03
9998for |MMFC0S/O4

RealSignalDemultiplexer
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 1 2 6- 1
FunctionCode 126

EXPLANATION

SelectMode

In the select mode, ttte block output ls all zeros and a one ln
the position speclfled by the red tnput. For orample, tf the real
input is a seven, the elghth boolean output ls a one and all
others are zeros. In t}ts mode, an unlmlted number of red
stgnal demulttplexer blocks can be llnked together. tf <S1> ls
less than zero, output znro equds one. If <Sl> ls gfeater than
the ma:dmum, the last output ts set. If a number outslde of tlre
avatlable range (for example, reto througfr seven ln the case of
a master) ls selected, the nearest output ts set. For el€mple, lf
the number selected ls - 1, the zero output changes to a one.

IntegerMode

The integer mode eonverts the real input to a blnary blt pat-
tern. For example, tf the tnput ts 135, the blnrary output ls
f 0OOlf l, slnce 135=128+4+2+L Ttle least sfnficant dlglt ls
output zero of the master block. Thts ts tnre no matter how
many blocks are ln the nnk [st. Table 126-1 shows the lnte-
ger mode input to output relatlonshlp.

Up to four real signal demultlplexer blocks can be llnked

together in the integer mode, allourlng the converslon of arry
real number up to 4.2 x los to blnary dtglts.

Table 726- 7. Integer Mode lrput to Output Relationslrrp

Output MSB Realto Blnary LSB
OutputNumber 7 6 s 4 3 2 1 0
WeightedDecimalValue 128 64 32 16 I 4 2 1
BooleanOutputsExample:135= 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

BCD Mode

The BCD mode converts the real input to BCD dtgts. Each
digit of the real number converts to four boolean dfgfts by
\Mriting the real digit as the sum of the frrst four powers of two
(eight, four, two, one). For example, tf the real dlglt is a slx,
the boolean outputs for that dlgft are Of f O sfirce
6=0(8)+r(4)+1(2)+O(1). Table L26-2 shows how each group of
outputs represents two real dlglts.

Up to four real signal demulttplexer blocks ca,n be ltnked

together ln tl:e BCD mode dlourlng for the converslon of arry
real number up to eight digrts ilr lengf,h. The least s[nffcarrt
digit is always represented by outputs zero through three of
the master block, no matter how many blocks are ltnked ln
series. Figure f 26- I and Table 126-3 show tl:ls €urangement.

RealSignalDemultiplexer
126-2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionGode 12b

Table 726-2. EechGroup oJorrfufis

Represents Tluo ReaI Dpifs.
Output MSB Realto Blnary LSB
Outputnumber 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Weighted decimal value Iens Digit Ones Digit
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Booleanoutputsexample:06 = 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

WE|GHTED A
VALUES oUTPUTS
<S1>= 12
<S2>= 2
I 1 0
(BCDMODE)
2 2 0
RDEMUX
3 4 1
4 I 0
5 1 1
6 2 1

7 4 0

E 8 0

1 0

2 1
RDEM
3 4 0
4
8 0
5 1
1
6 2 0
7 4 0
8 I 0
TP45215C

Ftgure 7 26- 7. Representatwn oJ O@trt Vafues Jrom a

ReaI Sigrlrrl Demifipletcer BIrck in the BCD Mode

Table L26-3 shows sample outputs for each of the three

modes. There are two blocks in tJre link llst. Outputs zero
through seven are from the group master, and outputs eight
through 15 are from the second block.

RealSignalDemultiplexer
r-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 126 - 3
FunctionGode 126

Table 126-3 . Samgtb Outputs oJ a ReaI Sigr:r.l Demiftpluer BIrck

MSB OutputNumber LSB
InputValue Conversion Type
1 5 1 41 3 1 2 1 11 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6 Select IntegerBCD 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
(master only)
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
15 Select IntegerBCD 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(bothblocks) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
1234 lntegerBCD 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
(bothblocks) 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

APPLICATIOA'S

Real signal demultiplexer blocks ea,n be used for a varlety of

control pu{poses. Figure L26-2 shows how, tn the select
mode, the boolean outputs ca,n be used to trtgger executlon of
auxiliary logic sequences ln a batch process.

In the select mode, the real signal demultlplexer block corl-

verts the real step number input from the sequence generator
block into a series of boolean outputs. The boolea,n outputs
act as triggers for the auxiliary loglcs assoclated wtth the
sequence. A value of one is output as the tri€ger for the auxil-
iary logic associated with the current step, inttiating the exe-
cution of that logic.

2
RDEMUX
3

4 TO
FROM AUXILIARY
SEQUENCE 5 LOGICS
MONITOR
BLOCK 6

TP45198A

Ftgure 126-2. ReaI Signr.l Demultiplexer BIrck

Us ed Jor Recipe &lection

Real SignalDemultiplexer
126-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode127- PlantLoop GatewayNodeMap

GENERAT DESCRIPTION

The Plant Ioop gate\ilay node map functlon code performs two
functlons. F'lrst, lt enables gateway tlme synchronlzattolt, and
second, lt deflnes each node t5pe on the loop lt resldes ln. ;
Thts functlon resldes ln ffxed block seven of the gateway mod-
ule and dlffers between the loeal and remote gateway module.

Spectflcatlons Sl through S63 deflne the node tlpes for ,

respectlve Plant l,oop addresses one through 63. Thls block'
must be deflned tn the local gateway to enable tlme synchro-
n1zatjoI1.EachremotethathasthlsblockdefIrredlssynchro-
nized to the locd Plant l,oop tlme. '

Every node on the Plant Loop must be defined by thls bloek.

Fallure to deflne every node correctty results tn the loss of
trend data. If multlple remote gate\ilays reslde on the sa,me
Ptant [oop, only one must have thls block deflned. Failure to
follow thls rule results tn the loss of trend data. If a Bailey
1O9Osystem resldes on the same Plant Loop as a remote gate-
way, tJre tlme synchronlzatlon functlon ca,nnot be used.

NOTE:For moreinformation,referto the NPPG0IPlant Loop to

Plant Loop Gatewayproductinstruction.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Description

7 I Spare

SPECIFrCATTONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 16 Node 1 definition
S2 N 0 I 0 - 16 Node 2 definition

PlantLoopGatewayNodeMap
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 1 2 7- 1
FunctionCode 127

SP ECIFl CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deserlptlon

S3 N 0 0 - 16 Node 3 definition
S4 N 0 0 - 16 Node 4 definition
S5 N 0 0 - 16 Node 5 definition
S6 N 0 0- 16 Node 6 definition
S7 N 0 0 - 16 Node 7 definition
S8 N 0 0 - 16 Node 8 definition
s9 N 0 0 - 16 Node 9 definition
sl0 N 0 I 0 - 16 Node 10 definition
a a o a o o

o a o a o o

O o o o a o

s61 N 0 I 0 - 16 Node 61 definition

s62 N 0 I 0 - 16 Node 62 definition
s63 N 0 I 0 - 16 Node63 definition
NOTE:The range(r|odedefinition)can be sol to 0, 1,8, 10,or 16,
0 = vicnnl
1 = I,4oGtag operatorint€rfaceunit
8 = processcontrolunit
10 = lNPCl0l PlantLoopto Computsrlnterlace
16 = NC|UoZ|NPC|o2PlantLoopto Computerlntertace.ManagementCommandq/stem, NPPGO1Phn[ Loopb Pbnt l-oop Reme
lntertac€and 5,000TagOperatorIntertaceUnil

PlantLoopGatewayNodeMap
1 2 7- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode128- SlaveDefaultDefinition

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The slave default deflnltlon functlon code provtdes the default

values for functton bloclcs that lnrterface urtth two dtgttal I/O
modules (e.8., BCD output, functlon code 115).

There are four t5pes of dlgltal I/O modules. The IMDSOOI,

IMDSOO2 and IMDSOO3 modules have elght outputs, and the
IMDSOO4 module has 16 outputs. TIle slave default deflnttlon
functlon code provldes the default values for up to 16 outputs
per ll0 module. Ttre outputs are tn two groups (grouP A and
B) of elght per module. When deflrrfng the def;ault values for
IMDSOOI, IMDSOO2 and IMDSOO3 modules, place them ln
group A. Group B rernalrrs unused slnce IMDSOOI, IMDSOO2
and IMDSOO3 modules have elght outputs.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Ilescrlptlon

N R 0.0 (no usefuloutput)

SPECIFtCATIO^rS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Btocknumberof firstdigitalUOmodule Usedwith
functionblock functioncode83
B Full Defaultstatefor output1 or
S2 N 0
functioncode115
S3 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output2
S4 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor ouPut 3
S5 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output4
S6 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor output5
S7 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor output6
S8 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatelor ouput 7
S9 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output8

SlaveDefaultDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 128-1
FunctionCode 128

SP ECIFI CAT, ONS @onti

nued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl0 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouput I Usedwiffr
sl1 N 0 B Full Defaultstratefor ouput 10 functioncode 115
only
sl2 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor ouput 11
sl3 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouptn 12
sl4 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor ouput 13
sls N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouput 14
sl6 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor output15
sl7 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor ouput 16
sl8 N 0 I Note1 Blocknumberof seconddigitall/O Usedwith
modulefunctionblock functioncode 8il
sl9 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouput 1 or
functioncode 115
s20 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output2
s21 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output3
s22 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output4
s23 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor ouput 5
s24 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouput 6
s25 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouputT
s26 N 0 B Fulf Defaultstiatefor ouput I
s27 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouput 9 Usedwith
s28 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output10 functioncode 115
only
s29 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output11
s30 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor ouput 12
s31 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output13
s32 N 0 B Full Defaultstiatefor ouput 14
s33 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output15
s34 N 0 B Full Defaultstatefor output16
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare: 1023 for !MLMM02
2C46for NMFC01|02,|MMFC05and IMMPCOl
9998 for IMMFC03/04 and lMMFP0l/0203

EXPLANATION

Function code L28 selects the default values for all outputs
associated with any t5rye of DSO module. If ttre control module
goes bad, then the outputs can be forced to the default values
unill the module can be replaced or repalred.

The BCD output (function code t 15) selects the fallover to

default settings for each group of elght outputs. Speclflcaflon
S2 of function code lf 5 deftnes the I/O module. If the hun-
dreds digit of 52 equals logic O, then the outputs go to the
default vdues as conflgured by functlon code f 28 on loss of
the control module. Setting the hundreds dfgft to logtc I holds
the current output. Functlon code L28 provtdes default val-
ues for a maximum of two DSO modules. If one or both of the
modules have eight outputs, then outputs one through etght
are the default values, and outputs nlne through f O remaln
unused.

SlaveDefaultDefinition
128-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 129- Multi-StateDeviceDriver

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The multt-state devtce drlver (MSDD) functton code provtdes a

means of control[ng fleld equtpment (1.e.,varlable speed motor)
or control schemes ttrat have more than one control mode. Ttte
MSDD block provtdes four state controls wtth feedback. TVro
control tnputs or an operator tnput selects one of four output
masks for control actlon. Ttre output masks provide tJrree bool-
ean slgnals stmultaneously to the actual control loglc. The
MSDD block accepts four boolean feedback lnputs that deflne
the actual state of the control scheme. A control output stahrs
signal from tlle MSDD block may tnterface to sequenclnr$ logic
to trigger the next step ln a process. The control output status
represents the status of the controlled process as deflned by
tJle feedback lnputs and a feedback watt tlme. Control output
status c€rnbe good (O.O),bad (1.O), or waltfng (2.O).

The MSDD block ts exception reported. Exception reports

contaln the output states, feedback states, alarm states, corl-
trol output status and mode status. An exceptlon report gen-
erates when the block output mask changes, the block
generates an alarrn, a feedback treput changes state, or T-",.
for exceptlon reporttn$ exPires.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descriptlon

N B Controloutput1
N+1 B Controloutput2
N+2 B Controlouput 3
N+3 R Control output stiatus:
0.0 = gOOd
1.0 = bad
2.O = waiting

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 129 - 1
FunctionCode 129

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range D,escrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 1 Block address of control input 1
S2 N 0 Note 1 Block address of control input 2
S3 N 0 Note 1 Block address of feedback input 1
S4 N 0 Note 1 Block address of feedback input?
S5 N 0 Note 1 Block address of feedback input 3
s6 N 0 Note 1 Block address of feedback input 4
S7 N 0 000- 111 Defaultmask
S8 N 0 0 0 0- 1 1 1
Outputrnask1
S9 N 0 000- 111 Outputmask2
s10 N 0 000- 111 Outputrnask3
sl1 Y 0 0000 - 2222 Feedbackcorresponding to outputmask1
sl2 Y 0 0000- 2?22 Feedbackcorresponding to outputmask2
sl3 Y 0 0000 - 2222 Feedback conesponding to output mask 3. Each digit can be:
0 = input should be 0
1 = input should be 1
2 = input could be 0 or 1
s14 Y 0 Full Controloutputstatusoverride:
Statusoverride:
XXO= DoDe
XX1= oUputstatus
XXz = outputstiatusand alarm
Controloverrlde:
XOX= go to manualmodeand defaultcontroloutputs
Xl X = holdcurrentmodeand controloutputs
XzX = go to manualmodeand holdcurrentcontroloutputs
X3X = go to automodeand set outputsas selectedby
currentcontrolinputs
X4X = go to manualmodeand set outputsas selectedby
tp"r"tor interfacedevice
Operation:
OXX= Donnaloperation
1XX- earlygoodstatusenable
sl5 Y 1 B 0or1 Manual mode permissive:
0=DO
1 =!BS
sl6 Y 0.000 R 0 - 9.2E18 Feedbackwaitingtime (seconds)
sl7 Y 0.000 R 0 - 9 . 2E l 8 Fault waiting time
sl8 N 0 0-255 MSDDdisplaytype
sl9 Y 1 1-32 Nextallowablemasknumbersfromoutputmask1 in manualmode
s20 Y 2 1-32 Nextallowablemasknumbersfromoutputrnask2 in manualmode
s21 Y 3 1-32 Nextallowablemasknumbersfromoutputmask3 in rnanualmode
s22 Y 0.000 R 0 - 9 . 2E l g Lengthof pulsedoutputs(if 0, sustainedoutputs)
s23 N 1 B Full Initialmode:
0 = ffi€lllU?l
1 = auto
s24 Y 0.000 R Full Start-uptrackflag:
0.0 = no trackduringstart-up
1.0= controloutputstrackcontrolinputsduringstart-up
s25 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof controloverride
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 1023 for |MLMMO2
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,|MMFCOS,CBC01,CSCO1and lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFCOS/04and lMMFP0llOUOg

Multi-State
DeviceDriver
129-2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode 129

EXPLANATION

The MSDD block controls output logic or other control

schemes that c€rn be operated in more than one state, for'
example, variable speed mtxers and motors. Ttte output state
depends on two control lnput signals or a.n operator input.
The values of these slgnals determlne whtch of four output :
masks wlll be sent to the controlled process. Each output
mask provtdes three user-deflned boolean stgnals that drive
the process.

The user deflnes the output masks based on which state the
process should be tn foi given comblnations of inputs. The
user also defrnes feedback masks corresponding to the output ,
rnasks. Ttre block compares the feedback inputs from the Pro-
cess with the feedback mask containing normcrl feedback val-
ues for a given output mask. If the feedback inputs do not
match the feedback mask within the feedback waiting tlme,
an alarm generates and ls excePtion reported. Table L29-L
defines the output and feedback masks selected with various
'
combinations of control lnputs. Figure I29-L illustrates how
the block tnterprets the feedback masks.

Tabte 129-1. TnihTabte Jor *tection oJ oupttt Mosrcsln AutD Mde

Control lnput Corresponding Nert Allowable State Mask
Mask Selected (appllcable only in manual mode)
1<S1> 2 <S2> FeedbackMask
0 0 Default mask (S7) None None

0 1 Outputmask1 (SB) Feedbackmask1 (S11) Nextstatemask 1 (S19)

1 0 Outputmask2 (S9) Feedbackmask2 (S12) Nextstate mask2 (S20)
1 1 Outputmask3 (S10) Feedbackmask3 (S13) Nextstatemask3 (S21)

MSDVDR
11 1
P , 2
0 F1
1 F2
3
0 F3
0 F4
sr
0

Figure 129- 1. RelatiolrshiP

Betuseen Feedback InPuts
artd FeedhackMasks

If ttre control lnputs are: <Sl; = O, <S2) = l,

then output mask one (S8), feedbaek mask one (St l), and
next state mask one (S19) are implemented.

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 129 - 3
FunctionCode 129

If feedback mask one (Sf 1) = OIOO,

then the values of 53, 54, S5 and 56 must correspond to

Sf f as shown tn Flgure f 29-f to produce a good control
output status (N+3).

NOTE:AII feedbackmaskscan input a fourdigit numberfor the

specificationin which each digit is either a zero, one or two.
Figure129-2illustratesthis relationship.

X x x x (4-DrGtTNUMBER)

t1 2
I t
t
3
l
l
4 (FEEDBACR
<s3> <s4> <s5> <s6>
TPsEoe4A

Figure 129-2. Fow-Digit Feedhack Mask

This block supports both automatlc and manual modes. The

user selects the iniUal mode with S23. In automatic mode, two
boolean inputs from the control system select the mask that
drives the outputs as shown ire Table 129-1. Ttre default mask
may not be manually inltiated. To operate the devtce tre manual
mode, tfte manual mode permissive (Sf 5) must be one (yes).

Auto/manual status may be monltored Irternally by ustrg the

test alarm function (functlon code 69). Figure 129-3 shows thts
simplified corrfiguration. A control output status value is gen-
erated based on the feedback leputs, feedback urafting flme,
and feedback masks. If the value of arry feedback tnput does
not match the value of the feedback mask for a glven output
mask, art exception report generates and goes to the console,
and the control output status value will be set to bad (1.0)
unless overridden. The control output status can have one of
three values (O.Q= good, l.O = bad, or 2.O = waiting).

AI-ARM INDICATION
Q = NO AI-ARM
(69) 1 = ALARM
-------'- -' ----'-'
1-oo7

MODE INDICATION
Sl = 100O(MSDDBLOCR 0 = IdANUAL
52=2 (MSDDwPE) 1 = AUTO

Figure 129 -3. Auto / Mwunl Stafirs Monitored

usithTest Alarm Block

The user can set a fault walt tlmer to allow a delay between
the time the exception report lndlcates an alarm, and when
the control output status reflects that alarm. Th,e exception

Multi-State
DeviceDriver
129-4 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Gode 129

Specifications

sl - cll Specification Sl ls the block address of control input one.

s2 - cl2 Specificatlon 52 ts the block address of control tnput two.

NOTE: A block address of zero (default)in both 51 and S2

enablesusingthis blockwithbatchlanguageonly.

s3 - FBl Specifica6on Sg is the block address of feedback input one.

ttte feedback tnputs are slgnals from the fleld that deflne the
actual state of the devlce. The values of the feedback inputs
are compared to the feedback status masks to determlne tJle
control output status. If the feedback inputs do not match the
feedback status masks for given control outputs, an exceP-
tion report with alarm generates.

S4 - FBz Specifica6on 54 ls the block address of feedback input two.

Refer to S3 - IBI for an exPlanatloll.

s5 - FB3 Specification 55 is the block address of feedback lnput three.

Refer to S3 - EBI for an s(Planatloll.

56 - FB4 Specification 56 ls the block address of feedback input four.

Refer to S3 - F|B.I for an etqPlanatloll-

S7 - DMASK Specification 57 is the default output mask. Ttre default out-

put mask is a value conslsting of three boolean digits that
Lontrol the output logtc. This ts conflgurable, artd cErnbe any
combination o{zeros and ones. This output mask wilt be sent
to the output togtc when the control tnputs €rre both zeto. Ttre
output mask configuration is shown as follows:
xxx
Onesdlgit
Stateof outPutN+2
Tensdlglt
Stateof outPutN+1
Hundredsdlglt
Stateof outPutN

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 2 9- 5
FunctionCode 129

S8 - MASK1 Specification 58 is output mask orle. Thls value conslsts of

three boolean digits that control the output loglc. It can be
configured as any comblnatlon of zeros and ones. Thls out-
put mask is sent to the output loglc nrhen control lnputs one
arrd two are zero and one ln tl:at order (ln auto mode) or the
operator depresses the state one pushbutton (ln manual
mode). Refer to 57 - DMAlSKfor output mask conflguratlon.

s g - MASK2 Specification 59 is output mask two. Thts value conslsts of

three boolean digits that control the output loglc. It can be
configured as any combination of zeros and ones. Thts output
mask ls sent to the output logtc when control tnputs one and
two are one and zero, respectively (in auto mode) or the oper-
ator depresses ttre state two pushbutton (Iil manual mode).
Refer to S7 - DMAS,KfoT output mask conflguratlon.

s 1 0 - MASK3 Specificatlon SfO is output mask three. This value conslsts

of three boolean digits that control the output logie. It can be
configured as any combination of zeros and ones. This out-
put mask is sent to the output logic when control inputs one
and two are both one (in auto mode) or the operator
depresses the state three pushbutton (in manual mode).
Refer to SZ - DMASK for output mask conflguration.

s l l - FDMSKl Specification S f I is the feedback corresponding to output

mask one. This value consists of four boolean values that
identiff the normal state of the feedback lnputs when output
mask one is the control. See Figure 129-2 for four-digit feed-
back masks.
xxx
Feedback4

Feedback 3

FeedbacK2

Feedback 1

s 1 2 - FDMSI(2 Specification S12 is the feedback corTesponding to output

mask two. This value consists of four boolean values which
identiff the normal state of ttre feedback inputs when output
mask two is the control. See Figure L29-2 for four-digit feed-
back masks. Refer to SI I - ADtrISKI for output mask config-
uration.

s 1 3 - FDMSKS Specification Sf3 is the feedback corresponding to output

mask three. This value consists of four boolean values which
identiff the normal state of the feedback inputs when output
mask three is the control. See Ftgure 129-2 for four-dtglt
feedback masks. Refer to SI I - F,D*IS,B'I for output mask
configuration.

s14 - COSOV Specification S14 is the control output status override. Thts
value defines the override tSpe currently tmplemented. The

Multi-State
DeviceDriver
1 2 9- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode129

control output status overrlde forces the control output to

good, regardless of the feedback tnputs and masks when the
ones diglt ts set to a one or two. The alarm status ls also over-
ridden when the ones dlglt ls set to a two. The tens digft over-
rides control output status and dtctates block control only
when <S25> ls a logtc l.

NOTE:Earlyrecognitionof feedbackcanels the feedbackwaiting

time(S16)oncefeedbackconditionshavebeenmet.Thiscanresult
in badstatusand alarmpriorto feedbackwaitingtimetime-out.
xxx
L- Status overrlde
Q= No override.
1 = Overrideoutputstatusonly.Alarmsare still exceptionreported
to console.
2 = OverrideouFut statusandalarm(disableexceptionreprt alarms).
Control overrlde
0 = Go to manualmode(if manualmodepermissive)anddefault
controloutputs.
1 = Holdcurrentmodeand controloutputs.lf outputsare pulsed,go
to defaultcontroloutPuts.
2 = Go to manualmode(if permitted)and holdcurrentcontroloutputs.
lf outputsare pulsed,go to defaultcontroloutputs.
3 = Go to automodeand set controloutputsas selectedby the
currentcontrolinputs(S1and S2).
4 = Go to manualmode(if permitted)with currentcontroloutputs.
OnlyapplicablewhenS25= l. Controlstatuswillbe forcedto good
whileS25= l. lf outputsare pulsed,go to defaultcontroloutputs.
Operatorregueststo changestate are allowedsubiectto next
altowablestate(S19,S20,S21)constraints.Requeststo change
modeto autoare refused.
Operatlon- early recognltlonof feedbacks
0 = Normaloperation' waitfor durationof S16.
1 = Earlygoodstatusenable.Whenthe hundredsdigitis set to one,
the controloutputstatusis set to goodas soonas the feedbacks
indicatethiscondition.

NOTE:Earlyrecognition of feedbackcancelsthe waitingtime(S16)

oncefeedbackconditionshavebeenmet.This can resultin bad status
and alarmpriorto feedbackwaitingtimetime'out-

S15 - MPERM Specification Sf 5 sets tl:e m€ulual mode permissive. This tun-
able value defines if manual mode is permitted. This specifi-
cation has no influence on these parameters and the output
masks are never tunable while the feedback masks are always
tunable.

Q = no (auto mode)
| = yes (manual mode)

NOTE:lf S15changesfromoneto zero,thenthe blockis forcedto

automodewhenS25 is a zero.

S16 - FDWAIT Specificafion 516 ts the feedback waiting time. This value
defines the tlme ln seconds that the MSDD block waits before
comparing the feedback tmputs with the feedback masks. For
exarnple, if the block controls a variable speed motor, the

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 2 9- 7
FunctionCode 129

feedback waiting time is the ttme lt takes the motor to ramp

from stopped to its top speed. Ttrls lnsures that measure-
ments talcen while the device ls starting up or changfng
speeds are not used for control or tndicatiorl. If at the end of
the feedback time the feedbacks €rre not correct, then an
alarm generates if not overrldden by SL4.

NOTES:
1. Withoutearly good recognitionimplemented,the check for
feedbackfollowsthe formula522+ 516 = checktor feedback.

2. Withearlygoodrecognitionirnplemented, updatedcontrolout-
put statusis updatedafter 522 + 5/6expires or goodfeedbackis
met. Earlygoodfeedbackcancelsthe feedbackwaitingtime atter
the feedbacksmatchthe statemask.

Example1 Check for feedback at 5 seconds (516 = 5). Maintainedoutputs (S22 = 0).
522 + 516 = check feedback
0+5=5seconds

Example2 Check for feedback at2 seconds (S16 = 2). Pulse output of 3 seconds (S22 = 3).
522 + 516 = check feedback
3+2=5seconds

S17 - FLTWAIT Specification S t 7 is the fault waltlng tlrne. Thls value deflnes
the delay in seeonds between €rn exception reported alarm
and when the control output status indicates the fault condl-
tion to the rest of the control system. This allows a fixed inter-
val of time during which the control output status override
may be activated.

slg - DDls Specification S18 is the MSDD display t54re.The console pro-
vides the capacity to create dynamic graphtc and faceplate
displays. This specification defines the console display tlpe
that represents the particular device. Custom dlsplays can be
created with the graphic display builder. Refer to the console
operators instmction for information on buildftrg dlsplays.

s19 - NXT1 Specification S19 is the next allowable mask number for out-
put mask one in manual mode.'When the block ls in manual
mode, the operator selects the output mask by pressing the
appropriate state pushbutton from tlle operator console.
Table 129- I identifies the masks selected for dlfferent combi-
nations of inputs. This speciflcatlon identlfles whtch masks
can be implemented after mask one. It is used to keep the
operator from accidentally upsetting the process. For exam-
ple, if Sf 9 equals 23 or 32, then the operator c€rn go to state
two or state three directly.

Example: St9 = 23 Either state two or three can be selected next.

520 = 1 Only state one can be selected next.
521 = 1 Only state one can be selected next.

s20 - NxT2 Specification S2O is the next allowable mask number for out-
put mask two in manual mode. Refer to SI9 - IIDITI for an

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
1 2 9- g 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 129

explanation of l{Xf. If S2O equals 13 or 31, tJren the operator

c€rn go to state one or state three directly.

s21 - NXTS Spectfleatlon S21 ts the next allowable mask number for out-
put mask three ln manual mode. Refer to SI I - IYXFI for art
explanatlon of l{Xf. If S2f equds L2 or 2L, tJren the operator
can go to state one or state two dlrectly.

s,22 - PULSE Speelflcatlon S22 is the length of the pulsed outputs in sec-
onds. Output masks can be pulsed or sustalned. If Sl22 ls not
equal to zero, the outputs are pulsed to the selected output
state (determtned by control lnputs one and two or a console)
for the length of ttme selected \illth S;22, then set back to the
default state (SZ). If Sl22 equals zero, then the outputs are
sustained.

s23 - INIT Specification S23 is the infflal mode. This value deftnes the
operating mode at start-up.

Q = manual
f = automatic

s24 Specification 524 is the start-up track flag. When this value is
set to 0.O, ttre inifid values for the control outputs are deter-
mined by S23 during start-up. When this value ls set to I.O,
the iniEal values for the control outputs will track the control
input values regardless of tJle S23 setting. This speciflcation
is used when the state of functlon code L29 block must be
synchronized wlth the state of Ern external Process at the
start-up of the module.

s25 r CoVRD Specification S25 ls the control override. lVhen this input is
one, the eontrol status ls forced good (O.O).The mode and out-
put state control are selected wlth ttre tens dist tn the control
override deftnition specified by the control status overrlde (Sl4).

Outputs

N Output N is control output one. The three control outputs are

grouped together to form output masks. Each eontrol output
is user conligurable (zero or one). Th,e control outputs are
defrned during configuration based on the function the coll-
trol devlce is to perform for dtfferent comblnations of control
inputs. During execuilon, the values of the control inputs or
an operator action determines the control output mask
selected. This value is the current value of control output one
being used for control.

N+1 Output N+ t is control output two. Thts value is the cunent

value of control output two betng used for control. Refer to
output N explanatlon.

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 2 9- I
FunctionGode 129

N+2 Output N+2 ls control output three. Thls value ls the current
value of control output three betng used for control. Refer to
output N oqplanation.

N+3 Output N+3 is the control output status. Thls value ts output
from the MSDD block to a sequence monttor block or ottrer
control loglc to lnform the control s5rstemof the current state
of the driven derrlce.

O.0- good
1.0 = bad
2.O = watting

@d - feedback waltlng ttrne has elapsed or the tnputs from

the ffeld agree wittr ttre feedbaeh mask whlch corresponds to
the current output mask.

B@d - feedback u,aiting ttme has elapsed and one or more

inputs from the fleld do not agree wittr tJ:e feedback mask cor-
responding to the current output mask.

Waiting - feedbackwaiUng time has not elapsed, and no com-

parisons between fleld lnputs and feedback masks have been
made yet.

NOTE:A logic1 at S25forcesthisoutputto 0.0(good).Thisover-

rides a bad stratus(1.0). Duringoutputstratetransition,N+3
pulsesfrom0.0to 2.0thenbackto 0.0.
momentarily

MSDDELEMENT

The MSDD element represents an MSDD functton block in a

PCU module control scheme. Thls functlon block has three
sep€rrate output signals ttrat provide three state process
device control. An MSDD tag ls requtred to both monltor and
change the output as provtded by the console. Figure L29-4
detatls the lnformatlon presented ln an MSDD standard dls-
play element.

TAG DESCRIPTOR STATESETECTINDICATORS

FACEPIATESELECTOR COMMANDSTATE

REDTAGDESCRIPTOR

THREESTATEOESCR]PTOR START / /STARTD FEEDBACK1 DESCRIPTOR

TWO STATEDESCRIPTOR LKOUT / / READY FEEDBACK2 DESCRIPTOR
ONE STATEDESCRIPTOR -sroP! < sr_g?Pg FEEDEACK3 DESCRIPTOR
ZEROSTATEDESCRIPTOR FEEDBACK4 DESCRIPTOR
MODE MANUAL OVR OVERRIDEINDICATOR
A 10 TGTMODE:

ALARM
STATUS/QUAUVGROUP

Figwe 129-4. MSDD Element

Multi-State
DeviceDriver
-
129 10 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 129

The MSDD block exceptlon reports current output state, four

feedback states, overrlde status, mode, and alarm status and
quality presented at the MSDD element. Attributes that relate
to ern MSDD W and that can be tncorporated into any :
graphlc or custom faceplate are:

T/nree stste deseriptor shows the logic state descriptor

related to a three state (output mask tJrree) output of the
MSDD functlon block. Thls descrtptor ts the three state
descriptor set ln the ta;g database for ttris tag. The descriptor ,
is llmlted to slx characters.

Tuto state descriptor shows the logic state descriptor

;
related to a two state (output mask two) output of the MSDD
function block. Thts descrlptor ts the two state descriptor set
in the tag database for this tag. The descriptor is limited to six
characters.

One state daseriptor shows the loglc state descrlptor

related to a one state (output mask one) output of the MSDD
functionblock.Thisdescriptoristheonestatedescriptorset
in the tag database for thts tag. The descriptor ts limited to six
characters.

Zero state descriptor shorvs the logtc state descrlptor

related to a zero state (default mask) output of the MSDD
function block. This descrlptor is the zero state descriptor set
in the tag database for thts tag. The descriptor is limited to six
characters.

Stgrte select indieator - the posttlon of this tndicator identi-

fies the currentty requested state of the MSDD function bloek.
When a state change ls requested, the requested state is iden-
tified with ttre state select indicator and the command state
indicator.

;ieedborck I, 2, 3 ornd 4 de*riptot:s - dlsplay the logic state

descriptors related to the feedback slgnals input to the MSDD
function block. All feedback fields can indtcate either €rn on
(loglc l) or off (logtc O) state. The element displays the descrip-
tors configured as the feedback one through four, zero and
one state descriptors set tn the tag database. The descriptors
are limited to six characters.

These feedback indications provide a verilication of the actual

output logic status. Ttre MSDD block uses the feedback signals
to determine if the control output status ls elther good or bad.

@mmantd, state - the position of this tndicator identifies the

state being requested for command. The lndicator maintains
its position r:ntil the end of the feedback waittn$ time and
confirmation of good feedback status for the selected state.
After conllrming good feedback, the tmdieator disappears.

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 129- 11
FunctionCode 129

Ouerride indieator lndlcates an overrlde condltlon. Nor-

mally, the MSDD block determlnes the control output status
by comparing the feedback slgnals to Ern expected condition
set in its configuration. An OVR ledicatton occurs when the
MSDD block is set to override lts reported control output sta-
tus. The override forces the status to zero, or good. Ttre MSDD
can also be configured to default to a speciftc mode and out-
put when in an override condltion.

NOTE:A logic 1 at S25 and S14 equals)fi1 or )O€ will cause

OVRto be displayed.

IWode indicates the current operatlng condltlon. The block

operates in either ma.nual or automatlc mode.

NOTE:An MSDDblockmay be configuredto operatein autornatic

modeonly,or automaticand manualmode.Parameterssetfor the
MSDDfunctionblockdeterminethe acceptable
operatingmodes.

While in quto mode, the control logic sets the MSDD output
states; the block only provides an update to the display. Nor-
mal moltual mode allows changing the output state through
keyboard actions.

NOTE: When in auto mode, the inputs to Sl and S2 must be

maintainedto remainin the selectedstate.

MSDD CONTROL

MSDD control allows manually changing the MSDD block

outputs. The MSDD block provides three state process device
control.

The MSDD function block ean develop its outputs based on

control logic or console lnput. [n auto mode, two digttal
inputs from the control seheme select a mask that drlves the
outputs (St and 52 rnust be malntained to hold the state). In
mo;nual mode, tire operator selects tJ:e output rnasks by
pressing specific keyboard keys. The function block can be
set to allow automatic mode only, manual mode only, or auto-
matic and ma,nual mode.

Four separate output masks defined in the MSDD configura-

tion set the control output signals that are sent to a process
device. Each mask is defined as a three-bit code ttrat spectlies
the state of each of the three MSDD block outputs. The spe-
cific output mask is selected by the state of the two inputs to
the block in auto mode or the operator selecting a state via a
console in manual mode.

The MSDD element cannot be controlled tf the element dts-

plays auto in the mode field. Manual control may or rnay not
be allowed while the OIR lndicator is present. Thts depends
on the MSDD configuration.

Multi-State
DeviceDriver
129 - 12 ls FEBlees l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 129

To change the MSDD control output, flrst press MAN/AUTOto

toggle the MSDD element to manual rnode. Once ln manual
mode, press the follorrdng keys to change the output state:

o Changes the MSDD to tts three state outputs (output

mask three).

Changes the MSDD to lts two state outputs (output

@ mask two).

Changes the MSDD to a one state output (output

@ mask one).

NOTES:
1. The MSDDfunctionblockmay be configuredto preventrandom
ouput changeswhile in manual mode.This preventsthe operator
from accidentallyupsettingthe process.In this case, the operator
mustfollow a sequencedefinedin the functionblock configuration.
Theblockidentifieswhidr ouput stiatescan be selectedbasedon the
cunentoutputstate.Referto S19,S20andS21for moreinformation.

2. Zerostatecannotbe commandedfrornthe operatorconsole.

3. The mytar keyboardon the operatorinterfaceunit console

may not have the keys labeled.The keys are locatedon the top
rightof the keyboard.

The ?IRGET: field changes to the target state after pressing any
of these keys. As soon as the change ls made, the dlsplay begins
to update. The state select tndtcator moves elther uP or down to
posttlon itself at the requested state. The feedback descriptors
update aft,er recelrrtng feedback slgnals from the Process.

APPLICATIO'VS

Figure L29-5 shows a sample faceplate. Figure f 29-6 shows

how to use functlon code L29 to control a variable speed
motor. The allowable state transltlons are off to low, low to
htgh, low to off, hfgh to low, artd high to off.

HIGH HI SPD
LOW LO SPD
OFF tr STOPPD
TPs8025A

Flgure 129-5. Sample

Faceplate

Multi-StateDeviceDriver
l-Eg6-200B 1s FEB1995 129- 13
Function Gode 129

AUTOMODETABLE
AUTO I AUTO2 OTJTPUT
0 0 000
FROM 0 1 001(oFD
CONTROL LOGIC 1 0 0 I 0 (LOrv)
1 1 I 0 o (H|GH)
AUTO 1
AUTO2
TO
t
r
l
l
MOTORCONTROL
r

; is -
l

s l
(1?91 HIGH
s ,
r
2 1000
FROM , - - - o - r - - - - - - : - -

MOTORCONTROL s3
-'----'-'--S4 LOW
FEEDBACK i-
OFF
HIGHFEEDBACK
LOW FEEDBACK
LOW FEEDBACK
1003

s7= o =DEFAULTMASK re FIELDAtAR[rt

sB = ml = ourpUTMASK1 - oFF lrsrru-u | 1010
5 9 = 0 1 0 = O U T P U T M A S K 2 - L O WI ut- MANUAUAUTO
S10=100 = o U T P U T M A S K 3 - H | G HI 11011
S11= 0010 = FEEDBACK [4ASK1 - OFF Si = 1000
S12= 0100 = FEEDBACK MASK2- LOW S2=2
S13= 1000 = FEEDBACK MASK3 - HIGH
S14= 100 = EARLYGOODEMBLED
S15= | = T|ANUALMODE PERMISSIVE
516 = 10 = FEEDBACK WAITlN SECS
(tF FEEDBACKDOESNOTiTATCH
WITHIN10 SECSTHENAI-AFIM,
OTHERWISE GOOD)
S17= 0.0 = FAULTWAITINGTIME
S18= 0 =MSDDDISPI-AYTYPE
(REFERTO CONSOLEOPERATOR.S
MANUAL)
S19= 2 = ONLYOUTPUT2(OFF TO LOW)
S20 = 13 = AhfYOUTPUTALTOWED(OFFOR H|GH)
S21 = 21 = AIW OUTPUTAIIOWED (OFFOR LOWI
S22 = 0.0 = SUSTAINED OUTPUTS
S23 = 0 = IvIANUALMODEAT START-UP
THAffi7A

Figure 129-6. MSDD Block Controlt@ avariable Speed Motor

Multi-State
DeviceDriver
-
129 14 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode130- PlantLoopGatewayExecutive

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Executlve block functlon codes deflne the vartables that affect

module operatlons. The Plarrt Loop gateuray ffiecutlve func-
tlon code deflnes the globd executlon characterlsttcs of the
gateuray communlcatlon module. Wlth the gateuray conrmunl-
catlon module, comlrrunlcatlon ltnks between wtdely sepa-
rated Plant lnops can be establlshed.

The communlcatlon ltnk can be mlcrowave, radlo llnk,

modem, or a dlrect hooliup. Up to 32 Plant Loops can be
llnked ustng Plant Loop to Plant IooP gate\rrErys. Ttle system
handles one local Plant Loop and up to 31 remote loops. Gate-
ways can be conflgured to operate ln one of two modes.

The flrst mode ls two way control, whtch allows exceptlon

report data and eontrol to occur ln both dtrectlons (local to
remote and remote to local). In thls mode, only two gateways
can be llnked, one locd and one remote. Ttle second mode ls
one way control, whtch dlows one local gateway to collect
exceptlon report data from one or more remote gatesrays. Ttle
local loop ctrn perform control Xr all the remote loops, but the
remote loops cannot perforrrr control tn the local loop.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK TVpe Ilescrlptlon

1 B Port0 communicationstatus:
g = good
1 = alarm- bad or no alarm(unused)
2 B Port 1 communicationstatus:
0 - good
1 = alarm- bad or no alarm(unused)
3 Exceptionreportsper second
4 Averageexceptionreportsper second
5 Maximumexceptionreportsper second
6 l Unused

PlantLoopGatewayExecutive
l-Eg6-200B 1s FEB1995 130 - 1
FunctionCode130

SPECtFtCATIO^fS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 B Full lock:
Configuration
0=DO
| =lOS
S2 Y 0 I 0-31 Addressof remoteloopfor tuningand configuration
S3 Y 1 I 0-63 Addressof remotePCUfor tuningand configuration
S4 Y 0 I 0-31 Addressof remotemodulefor tuningand configuration
S5 N 0 I Full Port 0, commandreplydelayaftertransmittertumEdon
(msecs)
s6 N 0 I Full Port0, transmittertum off delayafter@mmand/replysent
(msecs)
S7 N 0 I Full Port 1, command/repfdelayaftertransmittertumd on
(msecs)
S8 N 0 Full Port 1, transmittertum off delayaftercommandreplysent
(msecs)
S9 N 30 Full Maximumexceptionreporttime (0 - 255 secs)
sl0 N 60 Full Communication statuswatchdogtimer(secs)
sl1 N 0 Full Actionon oommunication equipmentfailure:
0 = Doaction
1 = halt
2 = togglestateof equipmentselectoutput
3 = switchprimary/secondary state
sl2 N 0 I Full Numberof comrnunication retries
sl3 N 0 I Full Portdataoommunlcation Wrt 0 + portI
characteristics
s14 N 0 I Full Reserved

EXPLANATION

Figure 130-f shows the architecture of the Plant Ioop to

Plant loop gateway. In one way control there ls one local
Plant Ioop and up to 3l remote loops. The remote loops can
be manned or unmanned, but they are stlll consldered
remote. This arrangement provldes control for remote lnstal-
lations without having operators at the slte. For enample, the
Plant Loop to Plant Ioop gateway could be used to monltor
and control drilling platforms durlng a persorurel erracuatlon.

There are two types of loop to loop communlcatlon anallable:

one way and two way. One way or turo vray control ls selected
by a dipswitch on the communlcatlon module. Funcdon
code l3l, Plant Loop gatevray polnt deflnitlon, deftnes data
t5pe and address for the exceptlon report data that ts trans-
mitted over tJ:e gatevray.

One way communication allows the local loop to control and

tune the remote loops, but the remote loops can only send
exception reports to the local loop.

TWo vray communicatlon occurs betqzeen the local loop and

one remote loop. With two way comnunlcatlon, not only ts

PlantLoopGatewayExecutive
130 - 2 15 FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode130

PCU6
MODULE2

LOCALLOOP
LOOP1

PCU2
MODULE2

= CONTROL FROM LOCAL PPG

--- E XRP FROM REMOTE PPG
TP45213A

Figure 730-7. Plnnt Loop to Plnnt Loop

Gatewag Architectttre

tJre lnformatlon transmttted between the two loops, but both

loops have control capablllttes (the locd loop can control the
remote loop, and the remote loop can control the local loop).

Each GCM module occuples a PCU address on lts loop and

always resldes at module address two. Each GCM module must
have a function code f 30 block deflned at block one. Specifiea-
tlons 52 through 54 deflne the loop address, PCU address, and
module address of a remote module for configuratlon or tuning
purposes. These specilicatlons are tunable to allow the opera-
tor to change the address of the module being worked in. For all
rernote GCM modules, 52 always points to the local loop
(remote loops cannot communicate dlrectly with each other).

A function code 131, Plant loop gateway point definition,

must be defined for each exception reporting point passed
through the gateway. Identtcal Plant Loop gateway point defi-
nltion function codes must be defined ln both the local and
remote GCM modules for each polnt.

To tune, monltor, or control a point on a remote loop from the

local loop, tl:e operator selects the PCU address that the local
GCM module occuples, and any module address other than two.
This initiates monltoring of the module that the GCM module is
poirrtfng to as deflned by 52, S3 and 54 of the local GCM mod-
ules function code l3O. All potnts defined by a function code

PlantLoopGatewayExecutive
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1e9s 130 - 3
FunctionCode 130

lSf |rr both the local and remote GCM modules can be tuned. If
the point is a statlon, remote contrrol memory or remote marrual
set constant, it can be modtfled from the tocal loop.

In summarJr, to tune the local GCM module, select the PCU

address of the local GCM module and module number two. To
monltor, tune or control a remote module, trrne 52, Sg and S4
of the local GCM module to polnt to the deslred remote mod-
ule. Then, select the PCU address of the local GCM module
and any module other than two.

NOTE:All GCM modulesoccupymodulsaddresstwo. They may

be any PCU and loop number.However,in two way controf,both
gateways must have loop address zero. To tune the modute
selectedwith the GCM module,select the PCU addressof the
localGCMmodule,and selectany moduleaddressotherthantwo.
Thiswill pointthe operatorinterfacedeviceto the moduleselected
with52, 53 and 54 of the localGCMmodulesfunctioncode130.

Specifications

S1 - CONFIG Spectficatlon S I ts the conligur:atlon lock.

O=r1o
I =f€S

If this value is a one, then tl:e operator cannot change the

configuratlon of the GCM module thts block deflnes. That
means no function code f gl blocks can be added or deleted.
Once a configuration is locked, lt cannot be unlocked. To
change a locked configuratlorl, the module must be lnltlalf-ed
and reconfigured.

s 2 - LOOP Specification 52 is the address of the remote loop contalnlng

the points to be tuned, conflgured, or monltored.

s 3 - PCUADR Specification S3 is the address of the remote PCU contalnlng

the points to be tuned, conflgured, or monltored.

s 4 - MADR Speclfication 54 is the address of tJre remote module eontaln-

ing the points to be tuned, conflgured, or monitored.

s 5 - COMDEL Spectflcatlon 55 ts the command delay for port zero expressed

in mllliseconds. This speclficatlon deffnes tJle amount of tlme
in milliseconds between when a transmttter actlnates and the
actual transmission of the message: It ls used when transmls-
sion is by radio and there is a lag between when the radlo
activates and when a message is sent.

55 in portzerocouldbe commandsor replies

NOTE:Specification
dependingon communicationconfiguration.

s6 - coMsNT Specification SG is the command delay for port zero after a

command is sent. This specificatlon deftnes the arnount of

PlantLoopGatewayExecutive
1 3 0- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 130

ttme tn mllllseconds between the concluslon of a command

and the concluslon of ttre transmlsslorl.

NOTE:SpecificationS6 in port zerocould be ommands or replies

dependingon communication configuration.

s 7 - REPDEL Speclflcatlon SZ ls the reply delay for port one expressed ttn
mllllseconds. Thls speclflcatlon ls used when the transmls-
slon ls by radto. It deflnes the amount of ttme ln mllltseconds
between when the transmltter ls turned on and when trans-
mtsslon of tJre reply actually beglns.

57 in portone couldbe commandsor replies

NOTE:Specification
dependingon communicationconfiguration.

58 - REPSNT Speclflcatlon S8 ls the transmltter turn off delay for port one
after reply ls sent. Thls spectflcatlon deflnes the amount of
ume ln milUseconds between when a reply ls sent and when
tlee transmttter ls actually turned off.

NOTE:Specification58 in port one could be commandsor replies

dependingon communication configuration.

59 I MA)( Speciflcatlon 59 ts the ma:dmum exceptlon report tlme. Thts

deflnes the ma:dmum lnterval between updates of lnforrlla-
tlon sent on the Plant loop from statlon blocks. If the value of
a point has not e:(ceeded the sfnfflcant change deflned tn t]re
individual modules, a report of lts current value wtU automat-
ically be sent on the Plant loop at the end of thls tlme perlod.
Exception report tlme ts selected ln one second fircrements,
wlth the default value belng one report every 3O seconds.

s10 - coMwD Speclflcatlon S10 ts the communlcatlon status watchdog

timer. Thls spectllcatlon deflnes an [rterval that ls used to
ume communicatlons between two gate\ray modules. Tlming
starts when a message ts sent from the module the functlon
code f 30 block resldes ln. When a return message ls recelved
from another gateway module, the tlrner ls reset to zero.

S11 - FAULT Specification S11 deflnes the action to be taken upon a eom-
munications fallure. Ttre communlcatlons equipment ls con-
sidered fatled lf the gate$ray cannot communicate wlthln the
period speclfled by SlO.

Q = no aetlon
I = halt
2 = toggle state of equipment select output
$ = switch primary/secondary state

sl2 Speciflcation S 12 ts the number of communlcatlon retries.

sl3 Specificatton Sl3 ts the data communtcatlon characterlstics.

lhis defines the conrmunlcatlon and validatton modes of
ports zero and one. The ports can be conffgUred for one or two

Plant Loop GatewayExecutive

l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 130-5
FunctionCode 130

stop bits (even, odd, or no parf$ and checksum or CRC-16

validatton as shown ln Table l3O-1. The tens dtst of the value
is for port one and the ones dtglt ls for port ?Ero.

Table 730-7. Port One and, PortTllo

CommunicafwnCharacterlsfrcs
Stop Data Valldatlon Valldatlon
Port 0 Port 1 Parlty
Blts Blts Checksum cRc
OX XO 1 8 Even Yes No
1X X1 1 I odd Yes No
2X ><2 1 8 None Yes No
3X ><2 2 8 None Yes No
4X x4 1 I Even No Yes
5X xs 1 I qrd No Yes
6X X6 1 I None No Yes
7X x7 2 8 None No Yes

sl4 Resenred.

Outputs

1 Output one is port zero communlcatlon status wtth quallty.

Output block one is available to the Plant Loop as a dfgttal
exception report (e.9., function code 45).

Q = good
1=bad

There are two communicatlon ports on each GCM module.

This block identifies whether the lnformatlon comtng through
the first port is valid. Only one port c€rn be tn use at a tlme.

Output two is port one communicatlon status wtth quallty.

Output block one is available to the Plant t oop as a dtgltal
exception report (e.9., functlon code 45).

Q = good
I =bad

There €rre two communicatlon ports on each GCM module.

This block identifies whether tJre lnformatlon comtng through
the second port ls valid. Only one port can be tn use at a tlme.

Output three displays actual exceptlon reports per second.

Output four displays average exceptlon reports per second.

Output five displays maxi.mum exceptlon reports per second.

Unused.

PlantLoopGatewayExecutive
1 3 0- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode131- PlantLoop GatewayPoint Definition

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The Plant Loop gateu/ay polnt defLrttlon functton code deflnes

the exceptlon report data recelved or transmltted between a
palr of gateway modules. The allowable block range ls from
etght to 5,OOO. For blocks conflgured ln the range of elght to
1,023, exceptlon reports are avatlable at the GCM modules
PCU address, module address two and the functlon code 13f
block number. For bloclcs greater than I,023, exception
reports are generated at a rdrtud module address. The mod-
ule address and the block number€ are derlved according to
the lnformatlon lrr Table 131-1.

NOTE:The actualoutputof a functioncode 131 block does not

ihdicatethe exceptionreportvalue.The actualexceptionreported
data is containedwithinthe internaldata structuresof the block
and reporteddirectlyto the PCUthat requestedit. The actualout'
put of a functioncode 131 block is the status of the exception
reportdata.

Table 737-7. Block Nu;rdcers and Addresses for Erception

Reports to Consoles and InterJace Units
FunctlonCode 131 Module
Offsetl
Block NumberRange Addrcss
8-1023 2 0
1024- 2047 3 1024
2048- 3071 4 2048
3072- 4095 5 3072
4096- 5000 6 4096

. ( configuredblock number\
Virtual
modufe =2+ integer
address )
\
blockno.- [(virtualmoduleaddress- 2) 1024J
Virtualblock= configured
NOTE:
1. Block number = function code 131 block numbEr - otfsEt

UTILIZATION

PlantLoopGatewayPointDefinition
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 3 1- 1
FunctionCode131

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N l Statusof incomingdatrawith qualityflocalGCMmoduleonly):
00 = goodstatus,goodquality,specsand exceptionreports
received
10 = bad status,goodquality,specsreceived,no exception
reportsreceived
11= bad status,bad quality,specsnot receivsd,exception
reportsnot received

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range ll^escrlptlon

S1 N 0 B Full Exceptionreportdirection:
0 = from the remotegatewayto the local gateway
1 = to the remotegatewayfrom the local gateway
S2 N 0 I 0-31 Loopaddressexceptionfromwhichreportreceived
S3 N 0 I 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 ,4 Exception report data type:
or5 0 = digital
1 = analog
2 = station
3 = rgtnote control memory
4 = fglTlote manual set constant
5 = device driver
S4 N 1 I 1-63 PCUaddressexceptionfromwhichreportreceived
S5 N 2 I 2-31 Module address exception from which report received
S6 N 0 I 0-1023 Blockaddressexceptionfromwhichreportreceived

EXPLANATION

A GCM module has a function code 131 block deflned in tt for

every block exception reported through the gateway. For
exarnple, if there are 2,OOO exceptlon reported polnts tn the
system and 70 of them a,re passed between t}re local loop and
loop four, the loop four GCM module must have these 70
points configured with function code fgl bloeks. These
blocks must be configured in both the local and remote GCM
module regardless of direction of exceptlon report.

The maximum number of points ttrat may be configured in

the GCM module depends on the point t5pe and the number
of devices that receive the exception reports generated by tlre
GCM module. The total memory available is 450,560 b5rtes.
Use Table 13I -2 to calculate memory usage.

PlantLoopGatewayPointDefinition
1 3 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 131

Table 737-2. Memorg Usqe.for Pornts

Recefi;edand Polnts Sent
Erceptlon Report Polnts Reelved Polnts Sent
Data TVpe Bytes Requlredl Bytes Requlred2
Digital 16 18
Analog 30 ?2
Station 76 70
Remotecontrolmemory 22 22
Remotemanualset constrant 38 26
Devicedriver 22 22
NOTES:
1. Add 6 bytesper pointlor eachdestination.
2. Add 16bytesfor eachPCUthat sourcssexceptionreports.Add 10 bytesfor eactt
modulethat sourcesexceptionreports.

Specifications

51 - XDIR Specificatton S I is the excePtlon rePort directiolf..

Q = from remote gate\ilay to the local gateuray

I = to remote gateway from the local gateway

NOTES:
l. The remote gatewayis the GCM module with the remote
dipswitchset to remote.
S1 is meaningless.
2. In oneway communication,

This spectflcauon deflnes how lnformatlon travels through

the gateways. Dlrectlon ls based on the local GCM module as
a reference poirirt. For example, tf information transmlts to the
local GCM module frorn a remote loop, the direction parame-
ter is zero. The observer sltting at tJle locd GCM module
receives information coming from another gateway. When the
conflguraflon ls entered tnto the remote GCM module, Sl
remains zero, because the perspective remains the sarne.

Set the comrnunication tylpe with S1. Since the local GCM
module is the reference potmt, arty block that has Sl equal to
one transmits exceptlon reports from the local loop to a
remote loop. Thls action ls permitted only in two way commu-
nicatiorf,. With two way communication, only two loops can be
linked, and both loops have the capabilities to control each
other. If all exception reports have S1 equal to zeto, then com-
munication is one way, with remote loops transmitting data
to the local loop, and the local loop transmltttng data, tuning,
and controlllrrg the remote loop.

s 2 - LADR (Inop ddress) Spectllcatlon 52 identifies the loop from

whlch the exceptlon report deftned ln ttrts block comes.

PlantLoopGatewa PointDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 3 1- 3
FunctionCode131

S3 - XDATA Specification S3 is the exception report data t54re.

Q = dlgttal
I = analog
2 = station
$ = remote control memory (RCM)
Q = remote m€utual set constant (RIVISC)
5 - device driver

This specification defines the t5r1peof lnformatlon carrted tn

the exception report. The value of arry tlpe of data through
logie can be changed with 53.

s 4 - XPCU Specification 54 is the PCU address. ThJs spectlication ldentl-

fies the PCU from which the exceptlon report ln thls block
comes.

s 5 - XMOD Specification 55 is the module address. ThIs spectflcatlon

identifies the module from which the exceptlon report in tlrts
block comes.

S6 - XBLK Specification 56 is the block address. ThJs spectflcatlon lden-

tifies the block from which the exception report ln thfs block
comes.

Outputs

N Output N is the exceptJon report status.

e = good
I =bad

This output is not the value of the point, but a reflection of

the status of the point. The value of the point is routed
directly to the PCU that requested it.

PlantLoopGatewayPointDefinition
131 - 4 ls FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode132r AnaloglnpuUSlave

GENERALDESCHPTION

The analog lnput/slave functlon code reads flve andog lnputs

from an IIVIASIO? Analog Input Slave or an IMFBSOI Fleld
Bus Slave. Three analog lnput/slave functlon codes are ,
required to uttllze all 15 tnput channels on the module.

Thls functlon block has slx outputs. The ftrst flve are Urel
trirputs from tlre analog tnput module. The stxttr output ls the .
:
status of the analo€ tnput module.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Ilescrlptlon

N R Firstanaloginputin engineeringunits
N+1 R Secondanaloginputin engineeringunits
N+2 R Thirdanaloginputin engineeringunits
N+3 R Fourthanaloginputin engineeringunits
N+4 R Fifthanaloginputin engineeringunits
N+5 B Inputmodulestiatus:
Q= good
1=bad

sPECrFlCArronfs

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 lnputmoduleaddress
S2 N 2 Note 1 Blockaddressof nextanaloginputmodule
S3 N 0 0or1 Continueon inputmoduleerror:
0 = trip mastermodule
1 = Gohtinueto operate

AnalogInpuUSlave
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 132-1
FunctionGode 132

SPE CIFI CATIO,IVS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 0 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 ,4 Inputsignaltypeof first input:
or5 0=4-20mA
1=1-5VDC
2 = -10- +10VDC
3=0-*1 VDC
4=0-*5VDC
5=0-+10VDC
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Engineeringunit zerofor firstinput
s6 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering unitspanfor firstinput
S7 N 0 I 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 ,4 InputsignalUpe of secondinput:
or5 0=4-20mA
1=1-5VDC
2 = -10- +10VDC
3=0-*1 VDC
4=0-*5VDC
5=0-+10VDC
I Y 0.000 R Full Engineeringunit zerofor secondinput
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering unitspanfor secondinput
s10 N 0 I 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 ,4 Inputsignaltypeof thirdinput:
or5 0=4-20mA
1=1-5VDC
2 = -10- +10VDC
3=0-*1VDC
4=0-*5VDC
5=0-+10VDC
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering unitzerofor thirdinput
sl2 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering unitspanfor thirdinput
sl3 N 0 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 ,4 Inputsignaltypeof fourthinput:
or5 0=4-20mA
1=1-5VDC
2 = -10- +10VDC
3=0-*1 VDC
4=O-*5VDC
5=0-*10VDC
sl4 Y 0.000 R Full Engineeringunit zerofor fourthinput
sl5 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering unitspanfor fourthinput
sl6 N 0 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 , 4 Inputsignaltypeof fifth input:
or5 O=4-20mA
1=1-5VDC
2 = -10- +10VDC
3=0-*1VDC
4=0-+5VDC
5=0-*10VDC
sl7 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering unitzerofor fifthinput
sl8 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering unitspanfor fifthinput
sl9 N 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
s20 N 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
NOTE:
1. Maximurn
valuesare:2C/,6for NMFCOI/O2,
tMMFcOsand tMMpCol
9998for |MMFCOUO4and IMMFPOU0A}3

AnalogInpuUSlave
132-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 132

EXPLANATION

Spectflcatlon Sl ls the address of the analog tnput module.

Speclflcatlon 52 ls the block address of the next analog lnput

block. Th,e flrst block ln tlre llst ls the master block. Ttle rest
of the blocks are under lts control. Use the default value for
the last block.

s3 Spectflcatlon SB can be set to allow the module to contlnue to

operate lf there ls €rn analog lnput module problem.

Q = trlp master module

I = continue to operate

s4 Speclflcatton 54 deflnes the lreput slgnal t54peof the fust lnput

from the module.

O = 4to 20 mfruamps
l = I to 5 \IDC
2 = -1O to +f 0 rDC
$ = O to +l rDC
Q = 0 to +5 TVDC
$ = O to +lO TYDC

s5 Speclflcatlon 55 deffnes the lour Umlt of the flrst lnput ln engl-

neerlng unlts.

s6 Speclficatlon SO deffnes the r€rnge of the flrst lnput tn engl-

neering untts. If thts speclflcatlon ls set to zeto, the tnput ts
consldered u,nused.

57 throughS18 The rematnlreg speclflcatlons deflne the lnput slgnal t54le, low
limit and range for the other channels on ttre analog lnput
module.

519 and S20 Spare parameters.

APPLICATION

Figure f 32- I shows analog input blocks llnked together. The

inputs must be numbered consecutlvely.

NOTE:When using smartpoil,block numberingis criticalwhen

The blocknum-
configuringanaloginputsfrom smarttransrnitters.
bersfor the threeanaloginpuVslavefunctioncodesmustbe num-
bered consecutivelyand the 15 smart transmitter definition
functioncodesass@iatedwith the inputsmust be numberedcoll-
secutiveimmediatelyfollowingthe inputs.

AnaloglnpuUSlave
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBrees 132 - 3
Function Code 132

TO PROCESS
COlrlTtr)L
@l.tRGuRAno{

TOPrcCESS
@NTROL
rrptrns
I THRU5
TO PROCESS
@ltlTROL

rc PROCESS
CONTROL

TO PROCESS
CONTROL

TOPROCESS
@iITrcL
@NFIGURANON

TO PROCESS
CONTROL
DruTS
CTHRU10
TO PROCESS
CONTROL

TO PROCESS
CONTROL

TO PROCESS
CONTROL

TOPROCESS
@NTrcL
corrtFrcuRAnoil

TO PR@ESS
CONTROL

llrPUTE
rl T}|RUt5

NOTE:IF THE INPUT1SNOTA BAILFTSMAR|TDEVICE

THE CORRESPONUNG FC 13i}IS NOTREqJRED.

Figure 732-7. Linking AnaJog Inptft/slo,ue Blcrilrs

and Optional Smart Transmttters

AnalogInpuUSlave
132-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode133- SmartTransmitterDefinition

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The smart transmltter deflnttlon functlon code lmplements

smart transmltters wlth deflned speelflcatlons. The control
module verilies the configuration of the transmitter at start-
up. Three speclflcatlons can be modtfled whlle the control
module is ln execute mode. In execute mode, the control mod-
ule gets the output of the transmitter and monltors the value.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Transmitterstatus:
Q= good
1 =bad

SPECIFICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 Note 1 Blockaddressof transmitterinput
S2 N 0 I 0-800 definition
Transmitter
S3 N 0 I Full Engineeringunitsof transmitter
S4 Y 0.000 R 0 - 9.2E18 Dampingtime (secs)
S5 N 0 I o-12 Mode definitions
S6 Y 0 0-6 Operationselect:
0 = hOrTI|4|
1 = zereup (usesoperationtrigger<S7>)
2 = zerodown(usesoperationtrigger<S7>)
3 = spdnup (usesoperationtrigger<S7>)
4 = sp"n down(usesoperationtrigger<S7>)
g = fix output
6 = downloadconfiguration
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of operation trigger
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Percentageof fixedoutput
S9 Y 0 I 0-102 Communication selectand ternperature
compensation
definitionffBN only)

SmartTransmitterDefinition
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 133- 1
FunctionGode133

SP ECIFICATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s10 N 0 0 - 16 Transmitterouput definition
sl1 N 0.000 R Full Spare
sl2 Y 0 1 -255 Transmitteraddress
sl3 N 0.000 R Full Transmitterlowerrange
sl4 Y 0.000 R Full Transmitterupperrange
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 2046lor IMMFCOS
9998for |MMFC0S/04
and lMMFPOllO2lOg

EXPLANATION

Speclficatlons

s1 Specificafion Sl is the block address of the transmttter lnput.

Thts trput must be ltnked to the analog lnput/slave block
(funetion code 132).

s2 Spectfication 52 is the transmltter definitton.

Transmitter Type:

OOO = smart BC transmttter (pressure)

lOO = PTS transmttter (pressure)
2)o( = smart Eg transmltter (temperature)
300 = reserved
4O0 = smart BCN transmttter (pressure)
5)o( = smart EgN transmttter (temperature)
6)0( = smart TBN 58O transmttter (pH)
7OO = smart TBN 581 transmttter (OneTpIOt{)
800 = smart INFIIVIAG transmltter

where:

)o( = sefrsor t5pe

SmartBC,smartBCN,emartTBNSgl and PTS
00= smartBC,smartBCN,smaftTBN,PTSandINFIMAG
SmartEQ andEQNtransmltter(tempenturd
01= mVinputthermocouple 16= singleRTD(100Cl,385)
02 = dualRTD 17 = singleRTD(100Sl,392)
03 = singleRTD 18 = 3 wireRTD(O)
04 = type D thermocouple 19 = 3 wire RTD(100(), g8S)
05 = type B thermocouple 2o = 3 wire RTD(100fi, gg2)
06 = type E thermocouple 21 = type D thermocouplenonlinear
07 = typeJ thermocouple 22 = type B themrocouplenonlinear
08 = type K thermocouple 23 = type E thermocouplenonlinear
09 = type R thermocouple 24 = typeJ thermocouple nonlinear
10 = type S thermocouple 25 = typeK thermocouple nonlinear
11= typeT thermocouple 26 = type R thermocouplenonlinear
12 = type C thermocouple 27 = typeS thermocouple nonlinear
13 = type N thermocouple 28 = typeT thErmocouple nonlinear
14 = dualRTD(100f,l 385) 29 = typeC thermocouple nonlinear
15 = dual RTD(100f,l, 392) 30 = type N thermocouplenonlinear

SrnartTransmitterDefinition
133 - 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode 133

)O( = s€rsor t}rye (cprftfiul,ed)

Smart TBN 580transmttter (pH)

40 = standard 42 = lr0z
41 = antimony 43 = reserved

S3 Spectflcatlon Sg ls the englneerlng unlts of ttre transmltter.

Table 133- 1 ltsts the avallable englneerlng unlts for 53.

Tahle 133-L Specfuafion S3 Erqlneer@ Units

Englneerlng Englneerlng
Value Transmltter Value Tranemltter
Unlts Unlts
0 Undefined Any 20 In. H2O BC or BCN (pressure)
1 oc EQ or EQN(temperature) 21 mm HeO BC
2 oF
EQ or EQN(temperature) 22 mm of mercury BC or BCN(pressure)
3 oK EQ or EQN(temperature) 23 psl BC or BCN (pressure)
4 Mv EQ or EQN(temperature)
or 24 mPascals BC or BCN(pressure)
TBN 581 (ORP/pION)
5 w EQN 25 kPascals BC or BCN(pressure)
10 Reserved Reserved 26 Bar BC or BCN(pressure)
11 Reserved Reserved 27 mBar BC or BCN (pressure)
12 Reserved Reserved 28 cm H2O BCN(pressure)
13 Reserved Reserved 29 kg per squarecm BCN(pressure)
14 Reserued Reserved 30 pH TBN580 (pH)
15 Reserved Reserved

s4 Thts value deftnes the damplng tlme ln seconds.

S5 Speclflcatlon 55 ts the mode deflnitlon.

Fall Mode
X0 = fail low
Xl = hold current values
)(2 = fail high

lnltlallze Mode
0X = initialize low
1X = initializehigh

s6 Speetflcatlon SO ts the operatlon select.

Q = normal
I = zgto up (uses operatlon trigger <S7>)
) = zero down (uses operatlon trtgger <S7>)
$ = span up (uses operatlon trtgfgfer <S7>l
4 = span down (uses operatlon trt$$er <S7>)
$ = fix output
$ = download conllguratlon

SmartTransmitterDefinition
l-E96-2008 ls FEB19e5 133 - 3
FunctionCode 133

Ttre operatlon select input allows the modificatlon of the

transmltter calibration. To adjust a transmitter calibratlon:

l. Select the level to adJustwtth SO (56 = L,2,3 or 4).

2. Tllgger the adjustment wlth <S7>. Each zero to one tran-

sltlon of <S7> changes the selected operatlon by O.O25o/o.ThIs
allows adJustment of the 4 mA or 20 mA value when the
trarrsmltter span ts at Oo/oor I OOo/o.

Operation seleet can also fix the transmltter output at tlre

percentage defined by 58. SettJng 56 to five flxes the output.
Settfng 56 to zero resumes normal operatton. The transmttter
recelves the downloaded conliguratton when 56 ls set to slx.
When fnstalling a new transmttter, ttlts operation forces the
transmitter configuratton to match the deftned spectflcattons.

s7 Speclficatlon 57 ts the block address of the operation trlgger.

Each zero to one transition changes the selected operation
(S6) by O.O25 percent.

s8 Specification 58 is the percentage of fixed output. Refer to 56.

s9 Speclfication 59 is the temperature compensatlon deflnltton

for TBN transmitters and communlcation select function for
all transmltters.
x x
Temperaturecompensatlonalgorlthm
X)(0 = rl?hU8l
)frl = neffistian
XX2= ?utosolution
)fi3 = pUrowater

Temperaturecompensatlonsensor Upe and unlts

XOX = fioh€
XI X = Balcowire and "F
X2X= Balcowire and "C

Gommunlcatlonselect
OXX= cotntnunication
to transmifterenabled(on-line)
1XX= cotnfnunication
to transmitterdisabled(off-line)
1)fi = balcowire

NOTE: Although 59 is tunable, tuning of this specificationdoes not

affect transmitterconfiguration.

SmartTransmitterDefinition
133- 4 ls FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 133

sl0 Specification SIO ls the transmltter output deflnltlon.

x x
Output
X0 = ouput is linearwith respectto input
Xl = outputis the squarerootof the input
)(2 =3/epowerflow mode
X3 = s/epowerflow mode
X4 = functiongenerator
X5 = volumetric(specialtank)
XG= volumetric(flat end tank)

Actlon
0X = normalacting
lX = reverseacting

sl1 Reserved.

sl2 Specificaflon S12 ls the transmitter address. VaUd transmit-

ter addresses are from one to 15. In potnt to polnt mode, this
ls the channel number the transmltter ls connected to on the
termtnatlon unlt. When thts spectflcatlon ls zeto, the engt-
neerlng unlt vdues stored tn correspondlng functlon code
I32 blocks are used as transmltter lower and upper range
values. EU zero ls used as transmltter lower range and the
dtfference of the EU span and EU zero ls used as transmitter
upper llmlt.

sl3 Speclficatlon Sfg ts the transmltter lower range. Thls ls the

lower range value of the transmttter conflguratlon. If S12 ls a
valid transmttter address (one to 15), this speclficatlon ls
compared wlth the lower range value stored tn the transmit-
ter. Thts specificatlon value ls downloaded to tlte transmitter
when thts spectffcatlon ls tuned. Thls value ls also down-
loaded to the correspondtng transmttter when the download
conflguratlon optlon ls selected (SO).

sl4 Specificatlon Sf4 ls the transmttter upper range. Thls is the

upper range value of the transmltter conflguratlon. If S 12 is a
valid transmttter address (one to 15), tl:ls specificatlon is
compared wlth the upper range value stored tn the transmit-
ter. Thts specificatlon value ls downloaded to the transmltter
when thts spectflcatlon ts tuned. Thls value ls also down-
loaded to the correspondtng transmltter when the download
configuration optton ls selected (S6).

Definition
SmartTransrnitter
l-Eg6-2008 1sFEBiees 133 - 5
FunctionCode133 ffi
APPLICATION

Figure 133- I shows how the smart transmltter deflnttlon

block could be used ln a tlpfcal appltcatlon.

52 = 0 (PULSE)
53 = 0.25

Figwe 73 3 - 7. Smart Transmitter Deftnilion Example

Specification Sl of the smart transmttter defrnitlon block

defines the transmitter input value and the I/O module to utl-
Lize for transmitter communications. When a tunable specifi-
cation is changed, the new value ls sent to the transmttter by
this link.

The remote control memory and tlmer blocks are set up to

produce a zero to one transitlon on the operatlon trtgger tnput
<S7>. Each zero to one transition on <S7> changes the
selected operation by O.O25 percent. Thts configuratlon allows
the fine adjustment of the transmttter four mtlltamp or 20
milliamp values.

SIVIARTPORTrequires 33 consecutlve block addresses ln the

module for each l/O module (up to 15 lnput devlces per l/O
module). The default block address of 33 consecutlve blocks
for each I/O module is calculated as follows:

Defaultstartingblockaddress= (UOmodule addressx 33) + 7000

Figure f 32- 1 shows the block numbering configuration for

analog input/slave (function code 132) linked to smart trans-
mitter definition (function code 133) functton blocks.

SmartTransmitterDefinition
1 3 3- 6 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode134- Multi-Sequence
Monitor

GENERALDESCRIPTION

MON The mulfl-sequence monltor controls ttre execution of a

cs
T sequence generator by selecting the order of step execution ln
Es J* a process. It operates ltke the sequence monltor (functlon code
1{R
L241, but has entranced functionallty. Ttre multl-sequence
monltor block provldes multl-batch reclpe control, halts
RES
CP*
sequences and lnserts steps. Each multt-sequence monitor
block controls the executlon of elght phases. A phase ls a step
Yrr
that may vary from reclpe to reclpe. Thl,s block provldes a
wA
sr2 means to change the order ttrat predeflned steps execute ln
sr3
sr4 dtfferent reclpes. The phases always execute tn numerical
sTs order from one to eight. Four parameters (step t54re, normal
sT6
sT7
step number, fault step number, ernd reclpe value) define each
sr8 phase.
NSr
hrsz
N53 The multt-sequence monltor bloek performs a loglcal actlon
Ngl
NSs
based on the value of a control status lnput from a device
NS6 monitor block, and a boolean step trigger input. Depending on
NS7
the value of ttre control status tnput, ttre next step can be
NS8
FPI either a fault step or one determtned by lnternal logic. The
FP?,
multi-sequence rnonitor block can be placed ln eitlrer auto-
FPTI
FP4 matic or semi-automatic mode, and lncludes hold/resume,
FPs executed stop (E-STOP), tnsert step and lnsert phase inputs.
FP6
Ffil
Each multi-sequence monltor block handles up to elght
FP8 phases. If more than etght phases are requlred, multi-
Rl/t
m/2 sequence monltor blocks can be ltnked together tn sertes fash-
ml3 ion with 51.
RV4
m/5
R1/6
R\|7
UTILIZATION
m/8

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Ilescrlptlon

N R Jumpstepnurnber
N+1 B Jumpsteptrigger
N+2 R Jumpsteprecipevalue
N+3 R CurrEntphasenumber

Monitor
Multi-Sequence
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB199s 134- 1
FunctionGode134

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N+4 B Insertstepdone
N+5 B RurVhold state:
0=ilfl
1 = hold

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default rVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 1 Blocknumberof nextmulti-sEquence monitorblockassoci-
atedwith this sequenceof steps(0 = no more blocks)
S2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof controlstatusinput
s3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof steptrigger
s4 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof E-STOP
ss N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof hold/resume
input
S6 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof autopennissive:
0 = fi?llU"l
1 = auto
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof autotrigger
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inserttrigger
S9 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof resumephasenumber
sl0 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof insertstep number
sl1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof insertrecipevalue
sl2 N 0.000 R Full Reserved
sl3 N 5 Note 1 Block address of phase 1 step type
sl4 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof phase2 steptype
sls N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase3 steptype
sl6 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase4 steptype
sl7 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase5 steptype
sl8 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof phase6 steptype
sl9 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof phase7 steptype
s20 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof phase8 steptype
s21 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase1 normalstep
s22 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase2 normalstep
s23 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase3 normalstep
s24 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof phase4 normalstep
s25 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof phase5 normalstep
s26 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of phase 6 normal step
s27 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof phase7 normalstep
s28 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase8 normalstep
s29 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof phase1 faultphase
s30 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase2 faultphase
s31 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase3 faultphase
s32 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of phase 4 fault phase
s33 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase5 faultphase
s34 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase6 faultphase

Multi-Sequence
Monitor
13p.-2 ls FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 134

SPECI FICATIO N S @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deserlptlon

s35 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase7 faultphase
s36 N 5 l Note 1 Blockaddressof phase8 faultphase
s37 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase1 recipevalue
s38 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase2 recipevalue
s39 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase3 recipevalue
s40 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase4 recipevalue
s41 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase5 recipevalue
s42 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of phase 6 recipe value
s43 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phase7 recipevalue
s44 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof phaseI recipevalue
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 20/;6lor NMFCO1|D?,IMMFCO5,CBC01, CSCO1and |MMFCOI
9998 for IMMFCOS/04and IMMFPOI|OU0p^

EXPLANATION

Each multt-sequenee monltor block *ecutes efght phases in

numerteal order. The step nurnber executed tn each phase
comes from a different functlon bloek. The step d4le, fault
phase, and recipe value for each phase also come from otJrer
function blocks. Stnce all the values are speclfied external to
the multt-sequence monltor block, thJs €urangement enables
the operator to vary those values etther manually or through
loglc (for example, reclpe table blocks). Thus, the multi-
sequence monitor block can control the executlon of many
different sequences, dlorrrtng the operator to control several
consecutJve sequences wlth one block. Flgure 134-f shows a
common configuratton uslng a multt-sequence monltor block
to control several sequences ustng reclpe table blocks.

The multt-sequence monltor block uses the values of two

lnputs to determlne the next step number ln a batch process.
The first ts the control status tnput, whlch deflnes ttre current
state of the devtces controlled by the multl-sequence monltor
block. Ttrls lnput c€rn be O.O (good), 1.O [bad), or 2.O (watttn$.
Thts value determtnes whether the next step wlil be a normal
step or a fault step. When the control status lreput ls 1.0
lbad), a fault step tnltlates unless eontrol ls overrldden.

The second input ls the step trlgger. The step trlgser is depen-
dent on the curent step and the results of atr:dltary logic
assoctated wtth the devlce ln questlon. Each step of a batch
sequence often requlres au:dllary logtc to perforrn functlons
ire addltion to controlllng the device (1.e., change controller set
points, totallze flows, etc.). Thls au:dllary logic tles lnto the
batch executlon conflguratton. Executlon of the audllary
logic assoclated wlth the current step number lnltlates when
the current step number ls read from the sequence generator
block. The current step number dso selects from the results

Monitor
Multi-Sequence
l-Eg6-2008 is FEBr99s 134 - 3
FunctionGode 134

MOr{
cs
T
Es Jf
,-r-F_UlrUlJQtDP_B__
tr-----.-t
_ o r-
ss r{,N

lr c'r
nes

RECNPR
P8
N
Eg
EF8
El/

(118)

il97
lrSt
FPI
FHz
FPiI
FP'
FP6
FP!
FEl
FPI
Rvt
F\'2
R1^!
Rlra
RV6
Fl,c
R\t7
Rrrl

[,phl
c8

lr
cPr
REs
t3
IR
RECNPR
P8 sTl
ES sEr
EFS Srl
E\/
gT.
ar6
sTt
sll lElEqFRl(118) PI{ASE 9 gr7
3f1l
t(ir
NSt
ifs3
l{8.
srt IREOPRI(118)
]r93
Ner
l{sz
trts!
FPI
FPI2
FRI
7?.
FP6
FP!
FF'
FP!
Rl/t
Rv:I
R\t3
Rt/a
R\,6
R\,c

TP452148

?lgure 134-1. tabdagramShouttng Mtr@c Wuerce

and fuxiliarg Lqrc @nnrctions

Multi-Sequence
Monitor
134-4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 Function Code 134

of tllat audllary loglc the boolean slgnal output to the multl-

sequence monltor block as the step trlgger.

The values of the step trfgger and the control status tnput are
then tested agalnst the step tlpe to deterrntne whether the
nst step ean be executed. Ttle step tSpe deftnes the values of
the step trlgger and the control status that must eldst for the
sequence to proceed to the next step. The step tlpe also
deflnes whether seml-automatlc control ts permltted (opera-
tor lnterventlon).

To tnttlate the multl-sequence monltor operattorl, conflgure

the resume phase (S9) as some number other than rruro, artd
place the sequence tre hold flrst and run later.

The rnultl-sequence monitor bloek can operate ln automatic

or seml-autornatlc mode. In the automatlc mode, the
sequence ls dependent on the values of the control status
tnput and the step trlgger. [n the seml-automatlc mode, t]te
sequence ls dependent on the values of the control status
tnput, ttre step trlgger, and the seml-automatlc step trtg$er.
The operator must (as one of'the condttlons to proceed to the
next step) actlvate the seml-automatlc step trlgger manually
to proceed wtth the sequence. The block can be placed in
seml-automatic mode only if both the seml-automatic permis-
slve and step tlpe spectficatlons are conflgured to permlt lt.

Execution of a phase tn a multt-sequence rnonitor block eart

be halted when the step tlpe and hold/resume spectllcations
permlt. When a phase halts, a step can be lnserted lnto the
phase sequerlce. On a r,eltoto one transltlon of the lnsert trlg-
ger, the lnsert step number and ttre lnsert reclpe value are
output wtth a Jump step trigger. The lnsert step done speclfl-
catlon toggles from a zero to one when the lnsert trlgger goes
to zero and the step trl€ger makes a zero to one transltlon. If
the hold/resume speclflcation goes to zero (resume) durtng art
lnsert step, the sequence remalns ln hold until tJre insert step
ls complete. When the lnsert step ls complete, the tnsert step
done output goes from zero to one and the sequence resumes
at the resume phase number.

The E-STOP speciflcatton drlves the sequence generator block

and multt-sequence monltor block to the reset step when it is
one. Thls ls norrndly a remote control memory block set up
as urn E-STOP.

Specifications

sl - NXT Speeificatlon Sl is the block address of next multt-sequence

monltor block tn the series of blocks used to execute the
sequenee. If thfs value equals zero there €rre no more blocks in
the sequenee. Each multl-sequence monitor block can accom-
modate eight phases. tf the sequence contalns more thart

Monitor
Multi-Sequence
l-E96-200B rs FEBlees 134 - 5
FunctionGode134

elght steps, blocks can be ltnked

phase of the flrst block trrfflaIztng
ond block, etc. Therefore, phases
tn a serles wtth the last
the ftrst phase of the sec-
one through elght tn the
I
second multi-sequence monltor block are phases nlne
through 16 lre the sequence.

s2 - csl Spectfication 52 is the block address of control status lnput.

The vdue in this bloek represents tJre control status of the
devlces used in the control loop. The output of tlrts block ts
good when all tnputs are good, bad when arry one lnput ls
bad, and watttng if arry one tnput ls wattlng for a reply from a
devlce driver or devlce monltor block. Th.ls value and t]le
value of the step trtgger select the next step tn the sequence.
When the control status tnput ls bad, the fault step ls auto-
matlcally output. If the control status tnput ts good or walt-
lng, output depends on the step tlpe for the curTent phase.

O.O= good
1.0 = bad
2.O = waiting

s 3 - STEP Specification 53 is the block address of the step trlgger. The

value in this block, wlth the control status tnput, selects the
next step tn the control sequence. The step trtgger generates
by au:dliary logtc used for the batch process. The step tr[ger
lnput c€rn either be one or zero. The state acted on depends on

s 4 - E.STOP
the step tlpe for the current step.
I
Specilicatlon 54 ls the block address of E-STOP lnput. Ttre E-
STOP specification drlves the block to step zero (the reset
step) whenever it has a value of orle. The block referenced by
this speeification is normally a remote control memory block
set up as €rn E-STOP.

s 5 - HOLD Specification 55 is the block address of hold/resume lnput.

The multt-sequence monltor block can hold the sequence at
certaln steps. TIle hold/resume functlon ls actlve only when
tlle step type is configured to permit lt (tens digit ls zero). This
spectfication enables the holdlng of the sequence or lnsertlon
of a step into the sequence. If the sequence holds at a step
and the insert trigger mahes a zero to one transltlon, then a
step will be inserted into the sequenee. Otherwis€, the
sequence holds until the hold/resume lnput makes a one to
zero transition. The block then resumes operation at the
phase speeified urith 59, the resume phase number.

<S5> = O, no hold

<S5> = 1, hold the sequence at the current step

<S5> = 1 to 0 transltion, resume operatlon at the phase

specified by <S9>

Multi-Sequence
Monitor
-
134 6 15 FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 134

S6 - PERM Spectflcatlon 56 ls the block address of the seml-automatlc

perrnlsslve. When the value ln ttrts block ls ?,rlro, the seml-
automatlc mode ls permltted unless <S9> overrules lt.

<56> = O, both automatlc and manual modes permttted

<56> = 1, only automatlc mode pennttted

S7 - SEMI Speclflcatlon 57 ts the block address of the seml-automatlc

triggier. When the seml-auto mode ls permltted by step t5pe
and the seml-auto perrnlsslve <56> ls zero, the operator must
change thts value from zero to one to tnltlate the next step of
the sequence.

58 - INTRG Spectflcatlon 58 ls the block address of lnsert trlgfgfer. The

vdue tn thts block lntttates the lnsertlon of a step tnto a
sequerlce. If the hold/resume tnput <S5> ls at hold and tttis
input makes a zero to one transltion, the tnsert step number
<S10> and lnsert reclpe value <S11> wtll be output from the
block. Thls firnctton ls appltcable only when tlle hold/resume
input ts perrnttted.

s9 - RES Spectficatlon 59 ts the block address of resume phase mrm-

ber. When the hold/resume lnput makes a one to zero transi-
tlon, tJ:e block resumes operatlon at the phase spectlled here.

SlO I INSTP Speclllcatton SIO ts the block address of lnsert step number.
The step ldenttfled here wlll be trserted ln the sequence on a
zero to one transltlon of the lnsert trtlger <S8>, when the
hotd/resume input <S5> ls at hold.

S11 I INRCP Spectflcatlon Sl f ts the block address of lnsert reclpe value.

The recipe value tdenttfied here ls tnserted ln the sequence on
a zero to one transltton of ttre tnsert trtgger <S8>, when the
hold/resume tnput <S5> ls at hold.

sl2 Reserved.

s13 - TYPE1 (Block clddness oJ tlrc step typ for Step Il Each step Erpe
ls made up of two dlglts. The ones dtglt deflnes the state of the
control status lnput and step tr189er necessary for the block
to tnitiate the next step of ttre sequence. The tens dlgit ldentl-
fles the control opttons avallable for the step.
x x
lnput states requlred to advanceto next step
X0 = advancewhencontrolinput= 0.0 and steptriggeris (1)
Xl = advancewhencontrolinput= 0.0
)(2 = advancewhensteptriggermakeszero to one transition

Optlons permltted for thls step

0X = permithold/resume<S4>and somi-auto<56>
lX = permitsemi-auto<S5>
2X= permitno option(autocontrolonly)

Monitor
Multi-Sequence
l-E96-2008 rs FEBr99s 1U - 7
FunctionCode134

S14to S20- Speclflcattons S14 through S2O are the block addresses of the
TYPE2to TYPES step tlpes for steps two through elght. Refer to SI g - TYPEI
for deflnltlons.

S21 to S28- Spectflcatlons S2l ttrrough S28 are the block addresses of the
STEP1to STEPS phase n nonnal steps. These spectflcatlons ldentlff ttre block
contalnlng the number of the step the system should execute
when lt ls tn phase n (n equals one to elght) when the block ts
operating nonnally.

S29to 536 - Specifieations S29 through 536 are the block addresses of the
FAULT1to FAULTS phase n fault phases. These spectflcatlons ldentlff the block
contalning the number of the phase the system should exe-
cute after phase n (n equals one to etght) when the block
receives a bad tnput from the devlce monltor block.

S37 to S44 - Specifications S37 through S44 are the block addresses of the
REC1to RECS phase n reclpe vahles. These spectflcatlons tdenusr the block
contalntng the recipe vdue used to lmplement phase n (n
equals one to etght).

Output

N (Jump step number) This output tdentifies the step that exe-
cutes after the current step completes.

N+1 (Jump step trigger) A zero to one transltton of thls output

lnltiates a Jump step tn the sequence generator bloek. The
sequence generator block then eKecutes the step tdentlfted by
the Jump step nurnber. A zero to one transltlon of thts value
occurs when the multl-sequence monltor block proceeds to
the next phase in the sequence (when the condttlons deflned
by the step tlpe are met).

N+2 (Jump step reeipe ualue) This value ls the reclpe value
defined for the phase that ts to follow the curTent phase. If the
block is held and a step is inserted, thJs value reflects the
insert recipe value <S11>.

N+3 (Cwzlent pha,se number) This is the phase number of the

phase being executed. There are elght phases numbered one
to eight. Although the step number in each phase c€rn vary
from sequence to sequence, the phases always execute tn
ascending numerical order.

N+4 (htsert step done) This output ts a zero when an tnserted

step is belng executed. It will make a zero to one transltlon
when the inserted step ls finished. Thls trtggers the bloek to
resume executlon wlth the phase selected ln <S9>.

0 = a step has been lnserted ln the sequence and ls cur-

rently mnntng

Multi-Sequence
Monitor
1 3 4- 8 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode134

1 = the sequence ls proceedlng nonnally wtth no lnserted

steps at thts polnt

0 to I transltlon = the lnserted step has been executed and

the block ls resumtng nonnal operation

NOTE:An insertedstep sequenceis complete(done)when the

insertsteptriggergoesto zero and the step triggermakesa zero
to onetransition.

N+5 (nunlhold sto;tr,) Thts output shows when the multl-

sequence monltor block ts ln ttre hold mode.

1 = hold
Q=run

APPLICATIOruS

Figure f 34- f shows a multl-sequence monltor block used to

control a number of sequences through real recipe table
btocks and a remote manual set constant block. The operator
uses the remote manual set eonstant bloek to select the val-
ues that wtll be output from the real reclpe table blocks. For
example, tf the operator selects zero, then the first parameter
value defured in each real reclpe table block will be output
from the blocks. The real recipe table blocks are the normal
steps for phases one through elght in the multi-sequence
monitor block (SZl through S28). By ganging recipe table and
multt-sequence monltor blocks, any number of sequences
wtth any number of steps can be executed. The operator con-
trols whlch sequence ls executed wtth the remote manual set
constant block. To select different sequences, enter different
numbers.

Monitor
Multi-Sequence
l-E96-200B ls FEB1995 1 3 4- 9
ffi
o

I
 FunctionCode135r SequenceManager

L DESCRIPTION

The sequence manager functlon code controls the access to a

subsequence from several main sequences. It ldentlffes the
step in a sequence monitor block or the phase tn a multl-
sequence monltor block that the other sequences access.
SI
Each sequence manager block can accommodate etght
sl1 requests. For more than etght [rserted steps tn a sequenc€,
sl2
s llnk severd sequence monltor blocks wtth S1. The bloek
sl4 deflnes the mtrnager tSpe as Jirst infitst out (FIFO), or prl-
S1
sl6
ortty (lowest actlve request processed flrst) basls and executes
sl7 requests accordlngly. Requests become actlve on a zeto to one
sl transltlon of the request trlgger.
s19

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N B Holdresettrigger
0 = f€S€t
1 = hold
N+1 R phasenumber
Strarting
N+2 R Activerequestnumber

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blocknumberof nextsequencemanagerblock
S2 N 0 0orl Managertype:
O- FIFO
1 = lowestactiverequestnumberfirst
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof hold/resetinput
0 = IOS€I
1 = hold

SequenceManager
t-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 3 5- 1
FunctionGode135

SPECI FICATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range I),escrlPtlon

S4 N 0 I Note 1 Holdoutputstatusfor no activerequest:
0 = do nothold
| = put sequencemonitorinto hold/reset(step0)
S5 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof requestno. 1 trigger
S6 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof requestno. 2 trigger
S7 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof requestno. 3 trigger
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof requestno. 4 trigger
S9 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof requestno. 5 trigger
s10 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof requestno. 6 trigger
s11 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of request no. 7 trigger
sl2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof requestno. I trigger
s13 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of no. 1 complete trigger
sl4 N 0 l Note 1 Blockaddressof no. 2 completetrigger
sl5 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof no. 3 completetrigger
sl6 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of no. 4 complete trigger
s17 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of no. 5 complete trigger
s18 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof no. 6 completetrigger
sl9 N 0 Note 1 Block address of no. 7 complete trigger
s20 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof no. 8 completetrigger
s21 Y 0.000 R Full Requestno. 1 startingphasenumber
s22 Y 0.000 R Full Requestno.2 startingphasenumber
s23 Y 0.000 R Full Requestno.3 startingphasenumber
s24 Y 0.000 R Full Requestno.4 startingphasenumber
s2s Y 0.000 R Full Requestno. 5 startingphasenumber
s26 Y 0.000 R Full Reguestno.6 startingphasenumber
s27 Y 0.000 R Fu Requestno. 7 startingphasenumber
s28 Y 0.000 R Fu Requestno.8 staftingphasenumber
s29 N 0 I FU Spare
s30 N 0 I Fu Spare
s31 Y 0.000 R Fu Spare
s32 Y 0.000 R Fu Spare
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare:2046for NMFC01/02,
IMMFCOS,|MMPC01,
CBC01andCSCO1
9998for |MMFC0S/O4
and IMMFPAUOUO3

EXPLANATION

In batch processes, it ts necessary to control both the primary

reactors and peripheral equipment. A sequence that controls a
reactor is a main sequence. One that controls peripheral
equipment such as a header common to several reactors or a
cooling system common to several units ls a subsequence.
Several main sequences use subsequences at different times
in their operafiorf.. The sequence murnager block manages
requests to a single subsequence from severd main sequences
in an orderly and predlctable manner.

Sequence Manager
1 3 5- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode135

Each seguence man4ger block can acconrmodate etght

requests for a slngle subsequence. If more than etght maln
sequences requlre access to a subsequence, the sequence fllorl-
ager blochs can be ganged to provide as marry as necessarJr.

The sequenee manager block executes requests based on the

manager t54re, and the vdues of the request and completlon
triggers for each of ttre etght requests.

Requests can be managed ln two ways: .firct in, .firct out

(FIFO) and on a prlority basls (lowest actlve request processed
flrst).

A request becomes actlve when lts request trt$$er makes a

zero to one transltlon. The sequence manager block chooses a
request from all of the active ones based on the mzrnager t54le.
For example, tf the manager ts set to priortty, and requests
three and seven Erre actlve, request three witl be processed
first even tf request seven was generated Ilrst.

The sequence manager wilt not process the next active

request until the completlon trtgger for ttre current request
makes a zero to one transltlon, stgnallng that the step has
been completed.

Figure 135-1 shows a sample configuration with the connec-

tion between the sequence monitor block for the maln
sequence, ttre sequence manager block, artd the sequence
monitor block for the subsequence. Elther or both of the
sequence monitor blocks can be a multi-sequence monitor
block.

SEOMON STEPJLN'PTRGGER
GENERAI DEI/ICE STATT'S
c9 Jf
: srEPTfloGeR sl
t
' " r
STARThG PI{ASENUMBER
9r J.
SEQMGR (135) I

Sg l-._--'''-"
l3n
| 8AT
H,FI
RTT e8

frIf sPrl 9l

nEr 8lP

: ...REOI,ESTSFTr,MAIN n.T AF{

sEouENcE"... sEouE!{cElroNlToR EtocK
: N'f FORSUBSEOIJEIICE
ET
FN
Rtf

ctr
qrr

qr
qf
qtr

otf,
crf
ctr

Ftgure 135-1. fumple ConftgurafiontJslrtg *quenre Manager BIrck

SequenceManager
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 135- 3
FunctionCode 135

Each of the eight requests has a starttng phase number. Tttls

number defines the phase (or step) ln the subsequence that
executes when the request activates. Each request can ask
I
for a different step from the subsequence, or all reguests can
ask for the sarne one.

Specifications

sl - NXT (E,loek ddress of next sequenee man;o.ger block) If more

than eight maln sequences need to acqulre the s€rme subse-
quence, ttre sequence manager blocks can be ganged to enable
any number of maln sequences to access a subsequence. If
tlrls value equals zero, there are no more blocks tn the
sequence. Only the outputs from the flrst sequence manager
block in the series will be eonnected to the sequence monitor
or multi-sequence monitor controlling the subsequence.

s2 - wPE (hla;no;ger Wpe) The sequence m€rnager block executes tJre

requests in one of two ways: first in first out, and priority. In
the priority mode, the block always executes the lowest num-
bered request first, even if higher numbered requests were
generated before it.

Q = first in first out (FIFO)

I - priority (Iowest number first)

53 - HOLD (Bloek qddress of holdlreset input) The hold/reset input

ean halt operation of the sequence manager block tempo-
rarily. If the hold/reset input goes to a one while a step is
being executed, the block will fintsh executtng the step, but it
will not fitl the next actlve request. It will not allow any more
requests to be processed until the lnput goes to a zero. On a
one to zero transition of the input, the sequence rnanager
resets. This clears the FIFO stack and allows the sequence
manager to begin again as if a power up had occurred.

Q = reset
I = hold

S4 Hold output status for no active request.

O = do not put sequence monitor into hold when there is

no active request.

I = put sequence monitor into hold when there ls no

active request. Hold means that the sequence rnan-
ager outputs a zero value and trlgger.

55 to S12 - (Bloek cddress of request triggerc on;e th;rough. eight)

RTRIG1to RTRIGS When a request trigger malces a zero to one transltion, the
request activates. Only actlve requests e:recute. The order of
execution depends on the manager tlpe (S2). If the request
goes from zero to one without the request complete trigger

SequenceManager
1 3 5- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode135

belreg one, then the request ls stlll walttng to be processed. If

ttre request stays lrr the one state even after the comPletlon
trigger goes to on€, a new request urtll be generated. The com-
pleted request will be sklpped.

S13to S20- (Block ddress of completion triggerc one th;rough eight)

CTRIGIto CTRIGB The completlon trtgger malres a zero to one transltion upon a
completed requested step. When the completion tri$ger for
the current step goes to one, the block ls free to answer the
next request.

S21 to S28 - (Stcr*ing ph;asr number Jor requets one th;tough eightl
START1to STARTS These speclflcatlons tdentlff the requested phase or step ln
ttre subsequence. All the requests can choose the sztme step
or select different steps.

Outputs

N (Iloldlreset trigger) Ttrfs output drives the hotd/reset trtgger

of the sequence (or multi-sequence) rnonltor associated wtth
the sequence manager.

Q = reset
I = hold

N+1 (Stclfting ph;ase number, Thfs output is the value of the sub-
sequence phase (or step) that ts being executed.

N+2 (Actiue request numfur) This output is the number of the

request that is being executed.

APPLICATIOA'S

The two t51pesof control the sequence manager uses €rre p?r-
allel proeesslng and common element control.

Parallel processing descrlbes a sltuatlon tn which several

events must occur simultaneously. A common example ls
adding several components to a reactor slmultaneously. The
advantage of parallel additton over sequentlal additlon is that
parallel addition will ma:dmlze the throughput of the unlt. A
disadvantage of parallel addltion is that lt requlres sepElrate
ptpe runs, valves and flow meters for each component. Thls
increases equipment costs.

Common element control is used when sever:al different maln

sequences use the same equipment. Examples of this are com-
mon headers, pumps, cooling systems, etc. A problem lnher-
ent in common element control is prioritizing requests. In
some cases, there is no priority, so requests are Processed on
a FIFO basis. In other cases, certain main sequences requlre
access to the common elements more urgently than other
main sequences. In this case, requests for common elements

SequenceManager
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 1 3 5- 5
FunctionCode135

are handled on a priority basls, wlth the lowest numbered

active request executed first. The sequence manager block
provides a choice between these two tSpes of control.

Figure 135-2 shows a control situation uttllztng several eom-

mon headers for a series of reactors. Reactor Kl must be
slmultaneously filled wfth components A and B ln parallel
through common headers. Components A and B do not share
the same piping but the headers servlce more than one reac-
tor. This example will illustrate both parallel addltlon and the
use of common headers. Iogtcally, the process ls subdtvtded
into several sequences. TIvo mairr sequences control reactors
KI and K2. There is a subsequence for each common header.
A sequence manager block controls each subsequence.

REACTORKl REACTORI(2

Figwe 135-2. Apph:r,a/wn Requting Parallet

Addition througtt Common Hea.d.ers

In this example, Step 4 of the maln sequence for reactor Kl

adds components A and B in parallel. Figure 135-3 shows the
logic ln the main sequence to perform thJs operatlon. This
logic generates requests to add varlous components to Kl,
but it does not insure that the headers Erre both available.
With this logic, it is not guaranteed that A and B will be added
in parallel to reactor Kl, since one of the headers could be Xr
operation with reactor K2.

Sequence
Manager
1 3 5- 6 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode135

TOSEOUENCE IIAMGER
CONTROIIINGACCESSTO HEADER
A
REOUEST tlA,l{AGER
TOSEQUENCE
STEP4INDICATOR -?-----
ACCESSTOHEADER
CONTROIUNG B

RESET

AT'OUI{TA TOADD

AIIOUNTBTON)T)

ADDATO K1COUPLETE

STEP 4
CoMPLENON TRIGGER

Figure 135-3. Mah *qterrce Lqlc Jor Panilel Addltion oJ A atld. B

Figure 135-4 shows logic that checks to make sure that the
sequence managers for both reactors are lnactlve. The loglc
checks the actlve request number for each reaetor. If the
acuve request number ls zero, then the header ls avallable. In
thls case, requests to add A and B urttl be processed only lf
bottr headers are avallable.

Figure f 35-5 shows the logtc used to control common header

A (or B). Outputs from the sequence manager block control
the seguence monitor block that controls and monttors the
subsequence for the header. A hold/resume trtgger puts the
sequence monitor block in the hold mode. A new number ls
loaded into the sequence monltor block as the intflal step
from the sequence manager block. The sequence manager
tlren outputs a zero to the hold/resume trl!f,ier of the
sequenee monitor. Thls causes the sequence monltor block to
go into run mode and begin executlon with the step number
selected with the sequence manager.

SequenceMana
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 135 - 7
FunctionCode135

RESET
I
I

:
: ONESHOTPULSE
STEP4 INDICATOR:
c=:- o--
, :
i
:
ACTIVEREQUEST:
NUMBEn
rnou i
SEQUENCE i REOUEST
]IIANAGER:
CONTROLLING: .i---(-) ADDATO Kl

: REOUEST
: ADDBTOKl
L - - - - , -

AcrMEneouesri
NUMBEnrnou i
SEQUENCE:
MANAGERi
coNrRoLLtNG
i I- ___-.,i
HEADERB; sr i "l_I131_
I N

i
I I .l-i,;;
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I

ADD B TO K1
COMPLETE 6rI
- ---qL-

AITIOUNTA TO ADD
RECIPR TO K1
PS
ES
EPS
a/

AIIIOUNTB TO ADD
RECIPR TO Kl
PS
ES
EPIS
E\/

TP45205C

Ftgure 135-4. Main *qrcncc Lqic Jor Simitoneous Addttion oJA and B

Sequence
Manager
1 3 5- I 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode13b

REOI'ESTTO ADDA TO KI
FRoIJ|IIAIN SEOI'ENCE }PU}NE$JME TRIGGER
@NTROIUNG KI TO SEOUENCEUONTTOR
H,R IUET CONTROII.INGHEADERA
RIT
wt sPN NUMBER
INITIAI PTTASE'ISTEIP
REOUESTTOADDATO I(2 RTT
FROMMAINSEOUEI.ICE R4r ARN
CONTROTUNGI(2
Rsr
R6T
RzT
R8T
crT
cgr
G'T
o.T
csr
c6iT
cn
REOUESTSTARTINGP}I,ASE}IO. ctf,
S2l . ADD A TO Kl OOMPLETEFlllG
V,.ADD A TO le @MPI-ETEFIAG

Ngwe 135-5. *qtrence Mannger Ingic used

to @nfrotbmmonHeader A

The sequence manager block selects Step 5 and ls the step ln

the subsequenee that adds component A to reactor KI.
Figure 135-6 shows thts loglc. The amount of A added to t}te
tant< is integrated untll lt is greater than the amount called
for, then the Step 5 completion trt$fier energizes. Thls causes
the sequence to execute Step 6. Step 6, also shown ln
Figure 135-6, energizes the add A to Kl cornpletton fl"€,
wliich feeds back to the sequence manager (see Ftgure 135-5),
and to the main sequence logic (see Figure 135-4).

RECIPR
PS
ES
EPS
EIt

TP4s207B

Figure 135-6. Sub seqtrcnce Wic to Add. A to KI

tlvough Common Head,er

SequenceManager
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 135- 9
FunctionCode135

In this application, all logic resides withln a single module.

Logic does not have to reside tn a slngle module. The maln
sequence c€rn be in one module, and a subsequence in
I
another. When slgnals go between modules (on a polled
basis), there could be several scans performed on one module
before the data is recelved from other modules. In the case
where a subsequence resldes ln another module, lt ls not
much of a problem. However, if two requests for a common
header come in, then the completlon flag for one subsequence
may be on for only one scan. With two requests for header A,
the add A to Kl completton flag will be on for only one scan. If
another rnodule must see the flag ln order for the sequence to
contlnue, a tlmer block must be placed ln the loglc to lnsure
that the flag stays on long enough to pass through the com-
munlcations hlghway.

Figure 135-7 shows an appllcatlon requldng request prtontlz-

ing. Four chemical reactors are fed through common header
D. In this example, each reactor is making a dlfferent prod-
uct, and these products have different levels of profitability.
The priority is:

K3>K4>K5>K6

Figwe 135-7. Apphication Reguirtg Reqrrcst Priorifizirtg

Requests for header D should be prioritized to process

requests from reactor K3, then K4, then K5, then K6. The
sequence manager block will process requests on the basis of
the lowest request number 52 equals one. Each request num-
ber is identified via a block address that ls read into 55
through S12. The request for header D from Kg is ldentified in
55, the request from K4 is identified in 56, etc. Wfth this
arrangement, if two requests €rre received whlle the subse-
quence is mnning a previous request, the request with the
lowest request number ls processed next. Flgure 135-8 illus-
trates the logic required to implement the scheme.

Manager
Sequence
1 3 5- 1 0 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode135

STEPJUMP
SEQMON TRIGGER
CS JT
SEOMGR HOLD/RESUME T STARNNGPHASE
FUR TRIGGER NUMBER
H/RT SH Jf
EST FROM1€ RlT STARTINGPI.IASE SAT
R2T SPN ES
R3T SN
R4T ARN SAP
RsT
sl0 R6T
sl1
R7l
s12 R8T
REQUESTK3 COMPLETED sl3 ctT
G".f
qlT
K6 COMPLETED S16 UT
sl7
csr
sl8 c8T
sl9
CTT
s20
c8T

Figure 135-8. Logic Used to Impl.ement Reqtrcst .HoW

SequenceManager
l-E96-200B ls FEB1995 1 3 5- 1 1
ffi

o
 FunctionGode136- RemoteMotorControl

GENERALDESCR'PTION

The remote motor control (RMC) functlon code has two baslc
functions. F'lrst, tt performs the logtc necessary to control a
dfgltal output. Second, lt conrmunlcates the result of that
logic to the console.

Ftrnctlon code 136 must be placed tn a block numbered lourer

tharr LO24 tn a Plant Loop system because of the message
packe tlziinlg method of lnformatlon transfer.

UT'LIZATION

OUTPUTS

BII( Type Deecrlptlon

N B Runstate:
1 = running
0 = stopped
N+1 B Pulseon
N+2 B Pulseoff
N+3 B Controlouput status:
0.0 = gOOd
1.0= alarm
2.0 = waitingfor feedback

SPECIFICATIO,TVS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Deecrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof start
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof stop
S3 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof interlock1
S4 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof interlock2
S5 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof interlock3
S6 N 1 I Note 1 Block address of interlock 4
s7 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof feedback1

RemoteMotorControl
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 3 6- 1
Function Gode 136

SP ECIFICATIO,wS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s8 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of feedba*,2
S9 N 1 I Note 1 Blockaddressof start permissive1
s10 N 1 I Note 1 Bfockaddressof startpermisslve2
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Start-upfeedbacktirne(secs)
s12 Y 0.000 R Full Pulse on time (secs)
s13 Y 0.000 R Full Pulseoff time (secs)
s14 N 0 I Full Displaytype
s15 N 0 I Full Spare
s16 N 0.000 R 0.0,1.0or Statuscontrol:
2.0 0.0 = holdstatusdisabled
1.0= holdstatusenabled
2.0 = holdstatusenabled(resetstatuson exit)
s17 N 0.000 R Full Shutdownfeedbacktime (shutdownsuse the stiart-up
feedbacktimewhenset to 0.0)
NOTE:
1. Maximurnvalues are: 2046 for NMFC01|02,|MMFC0S,|MMPCOI,CBC01 and CSCO1
9998 for |MMFC03/04and IMMFP01IoAO3

EXPLANATION

Ftgure 136-1 shows the baslc loglc of a remote motor control

block.

Normal Operation of the Remote Motor Control

Start a device When <S1> malres an off to on transltlon or recelves a start

(energize output) command from the console keyboard, the block undergoes a

INTERLOCK1
INTERLOCK2
INTERLOCK3
INTERLOCK4

STOP

sroP (KBD)

START
FEEDtsACK TIMER : f-l
a- - - - ----l TD-DIGl-- prrLsE
oN
START(KBD)
t l l
PERMISSIVE1 I
I

PERMISSIVE2 i , - , *{ puLsE
oFF
TD-DIG[--
FEEDBACK1
FEEDBACK2 i -
"...*lr.rorl-- l l

TPaS:n7A

Ftgure 736-7. Basic Logtc oJRemoteMo|rir ControtBlrck

RemoteMotorControl
136-2 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 136

start. The output of the block ls energlznd when all lnterlocks

<S3> to <S6> and permisslve tnputs <S9> and <S1O> are
loglc l.

Malntaina start When <Sl> makes the transltton from off to on or recelves a
start command from the keyboard, the feedback tlmer starts.
When the start-up feedback tlme ls exeeeded (Sl l), the feed-
back lnputs (<S7> and <S8>) must be logtc 1. If they are not,
then a ba,d sto,rt occurs and the output (t{) goes to t}re
stopped state (N equals zero).

NOTE:After the outputof the blockgoes on, the permissivesare

not used.Permissivesare not usedto maintainan output.

Normal stop (de- When <S2> mdres an off to on transltlon or the keyboard
energizeoutput) sends a stop, the output of the block ls de-energlzed and a
shutdown ls lnitlated. When a shutdo\iln occurs, the RMC
cznrnot be restarted unttl the stop feedback tlme (S17 or Slf
when Sf Z equals O.O)explres.

Abnormal Operation

Badstart A ba,d. sta;rt occurs when:

l. Elther lnterlocks <S3> to <56> or permlsslves <S9> and

<SlO> are not loglc I when <S1> makes an off to on transltlon
or a keyboard start corrmand has been recelved. In thts case,
block output N never goes olt.

2. If Ieterlocks and permtsslves are loglc 1 and <S1> mahes

an off to on transttlon or a keyboard start ls recelved, then the
output of the block ls energlzed. However, tf ttre feedbacks do
not come on wtthln the allotted feedback titrte, then a bad
start has occurred. Output N ts de-energlzed and the shut-
down sequence ls lnltlated.

Fault After a successful start, lt ls posslble that one of the lnter-

locks or feedbacks de-energlze. When thJs happens, a Jault
has occurred and the output of block N ls de-energlzed and
the shutdown sequence ls lnlttated.

PulsedOutpufs

Outputs N+l and N+2 are pulsed outputs that coordlnate

wtth output N. When output N makes an off to on transltlon,
N+l stays on for the length of ttme speclfled by S12. When
output N makes €rn on to off transltlon, output N+2 stays on
for the length of tlme spectfled by S13.

RemoteMotorControl
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 1 3 6- 3
FunctionGode13b

Remote Motor Control Block Element

The remote motor control block element represents a remote

motor control functlon block ln a control scheme. ThJs func-
tion block implements a start or stop loglc sequence to dtrect
the start-up or shutdown of a process devlce. An RMC tag ls
requlred to both monltor and change the output provlded by
the block from the console.

Flgure 136-2 detatls the lnformatlon presented ln a devlce

drtver element (faceplate on the console).

TAG MME TAG DESCRIPTOR FEEDBACK

FACEPLATE INDICATOR
SELECTOR

REDTAG 1E RMCB6
PERMISSIVE 2
DESCRIPTOR RMCBTAG DESCRIPTOR
ONESTATE RT PERMISSIVE1
DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTOR
ZEROSTATE FEEDBACK2
DESCRIPTOR
RUN ./ zERo DESCRIPTOR
BADSTART
-sroPF ( OFF FEEDBACK 1
TEXT BADSTART 1 FAULT DESCRIPTOR
LOCK-1 \
A 1 \TARGET FAULT TEXT
ERRORCODE
TEXT
AIJNIM OUTPUT CONTROLPROMPT/
STATUS/QUALIw/GROUP INDICATOR FIELD

Figure 136-2. Deuice Drfiser Elemertt

The remote motor control block exceptlon reports current out-

put state, two feedback states, two permtsslve states, fault
status, error code, and alarm status and quallty whlch display
at the RMC element. Attrlbutes that relate to an RMC ta;g can
incorporate treto any graphtc or custom faceplate and lnclude:

One state deseriptor shows the logtc state descriptor

related to a one state output of the RMC functton block. A one
state for the RMC block sets a device to a runntng state. Thts
descriptor is the ONE state descriptor set ln the tag database
for this tag.

Zero state deseriptor shows the logtc state descriptor

related to a zero state output of the RMC function block. A
zero state for the RMC block sets a devtce to a stopped state.
This descriptor is the reRO state descriptor set in the tag
database for this tag.

Cunent output indieator - the posttton of thts tndlcator

identifies the currently requested output of the RMC block.
When next to the one state descriptor, the requested output

RemoteMotorControl
1 3 6- 4 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Function Gode136

runs (toglc l). The block outputs a stop state when poslttoned
next to the zero state descrlptor.

Iieedba,ck one and fioo descriptorc - dlsplay the loglc state

descriptors related to the feedback slgnals lnput to the RMC
functton block. Both feedback flelds can lndtcate elther an ON
fioglc 1) or OFF (loglc O) state. The element dtsplays the
descrtptors conllgured as the feedback one and feedback two
reRO and ONE state deserlptors set ln the tag database.
These feedback lndlcatJons provtde a verlflcatlon of the actual
fleld devtce status. The RMC block uses the feedback slgnds
to determtne tf ttre control output status ls elther good or
alarm, and to determlne whether to malntaln a run output or
force the output to stop.

F:eedharck indicator - the posltton of thls tndtcator ldentlfies

the current output based on feedback from the process. When
a change ls tnttlated, tJre tndlcator malntalns lts posltlon untll
a speclfled ttme elapses before testlng the feedback lnputs.
Once the tlme elapses, the tndtcator poslttons ltself at the
approprtate state.

Permissirrc one and fioo descriptorc - shour the descriptor

reported for the permtsslve inputs to the functlon block. The
element displays the descriptors conflgured as the permlsslve
one and permlsslve two reRO and ONE state descriptors set
tn the tag database. Both permlsslve tnputs to the block must
be ln a permtssive status (one state) to allour the operator (or
control logic) to change the RMC to a one or run state.

Elard,start text- dlsplays when the RMC block has detected a

bad start of the process devlce. The text that dtsplays ls con-
ftgurable through text substitutlon functlons; refer to the
console conflguratlon sectlon. The bloek monltors the feed-
back stgnals to determtne a bad start. The bad, start message
remalns dlsplayed untll a good sto;rt ls made unless S17
equals 2.O (thls clears the alarm).

E;r'llor eodc text - ten different text messages dlsplay at tltis

field dependfng on the error code betng sent by the RMC
block. The error codes are:

Q = nO eITOr
I = stopped
t, = tnterlock one equals zero
$ = lnterlock two equals zero
Q = lnterlock three equals zero
$ = Irterlock four equals zero
$ = feedback one set to zero state whlle runntng
f = feedback two set to zero state whlle runntng

RemoteMotorControl
l-E96-2008 i5 FEBrees 136 - 5
FunctionCode 136

8 = feedback one set to one state whlle stopped

$ = feedback two set to one state whlle stopped I
NOTE:The blocksendsan interlockeror codewhen an interlock
equalslogic0 state.

The console associates and dtsplays a text strlng for each of

the error codes. The process englneer must flrst create a text
set that defines a text string for each code, and ldenttff the
text set during RMC tag configuratlon. Only one text strfng
dlsplays at a tlme.

Io;ult tex;t - indlcates a fault condltlon. The text that dts-

plays is configurable through text substltutlon functtons;
refer to tJ:e console conftguratlon sectlon. A fault llildlcailon
occurs when one of the four interlock tnputs to the block ts
OFF (or logic O) or when one of the two feedback inputs ls
turned OFF while the RMC is nrnntng. All tnterlocks must be
ON (or logic 1) to clear a f,ault.

If an interlock ls lost whtle the RMC is tn the nrnntng state,

the RMC stops tJre devlce and alarrrs. It remalns tn the alarm
state even lf alt lnterlocks are establlshed unttl a successful
state ls made.

NOTE: Once a start is commandedand is unsuccessfulor the

devicetrips,an alarmis generatedand remainsuntila successful
startis achieved.Clearthe alarmby initiatinga stopin RMCblocks
thathaveS16= 2.0.

RemoteMotor Control (RMC)

Remote motor control block control allonrs changtng the out-

put of an RMC functton block. Thts functton block ts part of a
PCU control module conftguratlon. The remote eontrol mem-
ory block provides a start and stop slgnal to a process devlce.
The RMC functlon block acts on one of two trrputs to develop
its output. The block accepts both a control scheme drlven
input and an input from the console.

The control logtc input (Sl) acts on the rtslng edge of the logtc
signal. The S I input acts only on a logtc O to 1 translflon. All
interlocks and permissives must be present at ttretr respec-
tive inputs before the logic and Sl ls trlggered. Otherwis€, a
bad start results.

To perfonn RMC control, flrst enable the RMC element for

control. Etther enter lts faceplate selector through the key-
board or use an optional mettrod of selectlon. A TARGW: con-
trol prompt appears when the element ls flrst selected.

The RMC can only be changed through keyboard actlons (or

control logtc) if ttre permlsslve descrlptors tndtcate a permls-
slve state (one state). A FAUUI must dso be cleared before a

RemoteMotorControl
1 3 6- 6 15 FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode136

change can occur, the fault beIrg drtven by the state of the
lnterlock tnputs. Press the followtng keys to change the state:

O changes the RMC to a one state output (run).

@ changes the RMC to a zerostate output (stop).

The TARGET: fleld changes to the target state after pressfng

either key. As soon as the change ls made, tJre dlsplay beglns
to update. Ttle crurent output and feedback tndcators move
etther up or down to reflect the entered ehange. The dlsplay
element, explatned earlter, wtll update to lndtcate a bad. start
tf an unsuccessful start-up occrlrs.

Specificatton Sl ls the block address of the start tnput. This

input trtggers on the rtslng edge of thts slgnal.

Spectflcation 52 ls the block address of the stop tnput. Thls

lnput must be momentary. A maintalned stgnal at 52 causes
an darm condlttorl.

53 through SO Speclftcatlons Sg through SG are the block addresses of the

[rterlock lnputs.

57 and S8 Spectficatlons SZ and SB are the block addresses of the feed-

back lnputs.

59 and 510 Specificatlons 59 and SlO are the block addresses of the start
permtsslve lnputs.

sl1 Speciflcatlon S11 ls tl:e start-up feedback tlme. Thts ls the

amount of ttme the remote motor controt holds the run state
to a loglc 1 whtle walting for a logtc 1 to appear on both feed-
back lnputs when a start-up ts lnlttated. If thts feedback (loglc
1) does not reach the RMC wlthln thts tlme, a bad start ls
assumed and the controller lnttlates a shutdown wlth an
alarm status.

sl2 Specification S12 is the pulse on tlme. Thls ls the amount of

time the pulse on output stays at a loglc I after a start-up is
lnittated.

sl3 Speclllcatlon S13 ls the pulse off tlme. Thts ls the amount of
tJme that the pulse off output stays at a loglc I after a shut-
down ls lnltlated.

sl4 Speclflcatlon S14 ls the dtsplay t5rpe.

sl5 Spare.

RemoteMotorControl
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBregs 136 - 7
FunctionCode136

sl6 Spectflcatlon 516 ls the status control speclflcatlon. [t con-

trols the control output status when €rn alarm condttlon
forces the RMC to tnttlate a shutdo\f,rrr. After the shutdo\iln
feedback tlmer explres, 516 deterrntnes lf:

l. The RMC goes to stopped state (SfG equals O.O).

2. The RMC enters a holdfng state that holds the control out-
put status to an alarm value (l.O) until a there ls a start or
stop lnttlated. The control output status ls set to a good value
(O.O)when the holding state ls termlnated (S16 equals l.O).

3. The RMC enters a holdfng state that holds the eontrol out-
put status to an alarm value (1.0) untll there ls a start or stop
lnttiated. The control output status ls set to a good value (O.O)
when the holdlng state ts termtnated. When the hold state ls
terminated, arry bad start or fault (St6 equals 2.Ol condltlon
present will be cleared.

sl7 Specification S17 is the shutdown feedback tlme. ThIs ts the

amount of time the RMC watts for a motor to shutdo\iln aft,er a
shutdown ls lntttated. If thts spectficatlon ls set to O.O, tlle
value ilr Sl l ls the shutdown feedback tlme.

Outputs

N Output N ls the run state. A loglc I me€rnsthe block ts run-

nlng and a logic 0 is stopped. Output N has an alarm status
associated with lt. The darm status ls set when a bad start,
fault, or error conditton exlsts.

N+1 Output N+l displays ttre pulse on. A logtc I means the pulse
on is on Ernda logic O ls off.

N+2 Output N+2 dlsplays tl:e pulse off. A logtc I means the pulse
off ts off and a logtc O ls on.

N+3 Output N+3 displays the control output status.

0.0 = good
l.O = alarrn
2.O = wdting for feedback

RemoteMotorControl
1 3 6- g 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode137- C and BASICProgram
Real Output With Quality

GENERATDESCRIPTION

The C and BASIC real output urtth quallty functlon code pro-
vtdes a means of transmlttfng a real data value and lts quallty
from a C or BASIC program to other functJon blocks. There
are no speclflcatlons for t}Is block. The BOLJT command ln
the C or BASIC program deflnes the four outputs. ThJs func-
tlon code ls slmllar to functlon code 93, except thts code has a
qua[ty lndtcator. Ouattty can only be measured wlth a test
qua[ty block (functfon code 31). Quallty ts etther good (zero)
or bad (one). Ttrere are no speclflcatlons for tlrls block. The
BOITT eommand ln the C or B.\SIC program defines the four
outputs. Refer to the C Lantgu;o;ge Implementqtion Guide or
the MFIC IIASIC Programming Languo;ge Reference tlo;tr-
ualfor tnstmctlons on progfammtng the modules.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R C or BASICprogramoommandBOUTsetsthe outputvalue
N+1 R
N+2 R
N+3 R

SPEC|FICAT|OwS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 I Full Not used

C and BASICProgramRealOutputWithQuality
I-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 3 7- 1
ffi
o

I
 FunctionGode138- C or BASIGProgram
BooleanOutput With Quality

GENERATDESCRIPTION

The C or BA,SIC program boolean output wlth quallty functlon

code provtdes a means of transmtttfng a boolean data value
and tts qualtty from the C program or BASIC program to other
functlon blocks. There are no spectflcatlons for thls block.
The BOUT command ln the C program or BASIC program
deflnes the four outputs. Thls functlon code ls slmllar to func-
tlon code 93, except thls code has a guallty tndlcator. Suality
c€rn only be measured wtth a test qualtty block (functlon code
31). guallty ls elther good (zerol or bad (one). Tltere are no
spectflcatlons for thts block. Ttre BOUT command ln the C
program or BASIC program deflnes the four outputs. Refer to
the C Lo;ngrr;oige Implementation Guide or the MFIC BASIC
Hogramming Languo;ge Reference Mo;nuo,l for lnstt-ttc-
tlons on programmfng the module.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B C programor BASICprogramcommandBOUTsetsthe output
N+1 B value
N+2 B
N+3 B

SPECIFICATTOA'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Full Not used

C or BASICProgramBooleanOutputWith Quality
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 3 8- 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode139- PassiveStationInterface

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The passlve statlon lnterface functlon code emulates a control

statton using boolean and real lnputs. Each passlve statlon
interface block llnks to €rn assoctated statlon block (functlon
code 8O). Speclflcatlon 516 of the statlon block must be set to
254. Thls value deflnes a passlve statton lnterface.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Autobypassrequest
N+1 B Reserved
N+2 B Reserved
N+3 B Reserved
N+4 B Reserved

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 Note 1 Blockaddressof stationblock(functioncode80)
S2 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof set pointraise
S3 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof set pointlower
S4 N o I Note 1 Blockaddressof controloutputraise
S5 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of control output lower
S6 N 2 I Note 1 permissive
Blockaddressof auto/rnanual
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof auto/manualtransfer
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof manualbypassrequest
S9 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof bypasscontroloutput
s10 N 0 Full Checkinputquality:
0 = disable
1 = enable
s11 Y 2.500 R Full Set pointramprate (units/sec)

PassiveStationInterface
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 3 9- 1
FunctionCode139

SP ECIFI CATIONS pontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl2 Y 2.500 R Full Controloutputramprate (units/sec)
sl3 N 1 I Full Badqualitybypasscontroloutputoption:
Q= pfoventbypassexit
| = peffnitbypassexit
sl4 N 5 I Note 1 Sparerealinput
s15 Y 1.000 R Full Maximumrateof changein bypasscontroloutput(units)
sl6 N 5 I Note 1 Sparerealinput
sl7 N 0 I Note 1 Sparebooleaninput
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:2o4;6for NMFC0I/02,|MMFC0S and GBC01
9998for |MMFC0S/O4 and IMMFPOUOAO3

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specilicafion SI is the block address of the statlon block

(function code 8O). Specification 516 of the statlon bloek must
be set to 254. This value deflnes a passlve statton tnterface.

S2 Specification S2 is the block address of set polnt ralse. This

input c€rn simulate set potnt ramplng. Speclflcaflon S11
adjusts the set point ramp rate.

s3 Specification Sg is the block address of set potnt lower. Thls

input can simulate set point ramping. Specification S11
adjusts the set point ramp rate.

s4 Specification 54 is the block address of eontrol output ralse.

This input can stmulate control output ramping. Spectficatlon
S12 adjusts the control output ramp rate.

S5 Specification 55 is the block address of control output lower.

This input ca.n sirnulate control output ramptng. Spectllcatlon
Sf 2 adjusts the control output ramp rate.

S6 Specification 56 is the block address of auto/manual permts-

sive. A mode change is possible when thJs lnput ls actlve
(logic 1). Refer to 57.

S7 SpecificaUon 57 is the block address of the auto/manual

transfer. A zero to one transttion on tl:ls input will cause a
mode change (auto /mutual) lf SG ls actlve.

s8 Specification 58 is the block address of the manual blpass

request. The station is put in blpass when this input is active
(logic 1).

PassiveStationInterface
139 - 2 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code 139

s9 Specificatlon 59 ls the block address of ttre b1ryass control

output. Thls lnput allows the alfnfng of the statlon output to
the actual output (in b5pass).

NOTES:
1. The lMMFP0trwill enter the error mode when S13 equals
zero and S9 referencesa block output that does not have a
definedqualitystatus.

2. Thestationwillalwaysenterautobypasswhenthe qualityof the

associatedanalogoutputdefinedby S28 of functioncode80 is bad.

sl0 Speclflcatlon Sf O enables lreput guality checktng:

Q = disable lnput qua[ty checldng

I = en,Erbleinput qua[ty checktng

NOTE:The stationentersauto bypasswhen an inputof function

code139has badqualitywhenS10equalsone.

sl1 Speclficatlon Sf I controls the set polnt ramp rate. The rate ls
exllressed tn untts per second.

sl2 Specilication S12 determlnes the control output ramp rate.

The rate is expressed tn units per second.

sl3 Specification S13 ls tJle bad quality blpass control output

I option.

Q = blpass odting not permttted when <S9> has bad qualtty

I = bypass e:dting always perrnltted

sl4 Spare real input.

sls Spectficatlon SI5 is the ma:dmum change ln the blpass coll-

trol output tnput <S9> tJ:at is allowed for eciting bnass. Thls
speclficatlon ts only tn effect while tJ,e station ls in auto
byryass. Ttte station wtll be prevented from erdting auto blpass
tf the change ln the <S9> input from one segment cycle execll-
tion to the next is greater than this value. To derive tl:e Sf 5
value from a rate of change value, ltse the follorving formula:

FC|39 Sts setting= nttoof change(units/secor unitslmin)x S2 of FC82

The <S9> input is tlpicdly connected to a feedback from the

control output of the statton block (functton code 8O). When
this is the case, the use of thts speclficatton allows the station
to malntain itself in the b1ryass conditlon untll lt is detected
that the control output is not changing rapidly. The use of this
specification prevents ttre auto b1ryass output from switching
control of the control output analog output stgnal back to the
CIS or ASO hardware while the control output is changing.

516 and S17 Spare real and boolean inputs resPectively.

PassiveStationInterface
t-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 3 9- 3
FunctionCode139

Outputs

N (Auto bgpass request) Thts boolean output slgnals auto

blpass when actlve (loglc 1).

N+l through N+4 Reseryed.

APPLICATION

Figure 139-l shows a tlplcal conftguratlon uslng the passlve

statlon lnterface block. Thls xample shows a conflgur:atlon
that dlows slrnultaneous control of a statlon funetlon from
both a eonsole and enternal pushbuttons. A hard statton can-
not be used with thls conflguratlon.

NOTE:The inputsto the passivestation interfacedo not have to

come frorn external inputs. Internal logic can generatethese
inputs.For example,the auto permissivecouldbe generatedfrom
logicthat only allowsautomaticduringcertainportionsof the pro-
cessoperation.

(8f) sPfl€

4uro -J.gts-
PERIIIT O O
-{F-------
FORCI
TO
- - - - - - - -

BP REO

AT'[O BYPASS
FECUS;TED
floAumo

OUTruTrcRA}.IALG
ourPuTstcf.t LoR
PIJLSEPCISITIONER
(FIJNCnONCOO€4)
rcRCONTACT
(P{r.sE) oIJTPUT
TP200208

Figure 1 39- 1. P&ssiue Station Interface Examplc

PassiveStationInterface
1 3 9- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode140- Restore

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The restore functlon code saves and restores crttled block

values (e.9., totallzers, counters, tlmers) to and from nonvola-
tile random access memory (IfltIRAIvI). Table l4O-2 shows
t{VRAI\d and checkpolnt utllizatlor}. During normal executlon
aft,er start-up, the lnternd and output block data referenced
by thls block goes to t{\ZRAI\d. After a module po\iler loss or
recovery, the block refereneed by thfs functlon bloek restores
to the last saved state. Sarrlng the block data c€rn be dlsabled
by elther boolean lnput (SZ and Sg). Both tnputs must be
loglc 1 for the save to occltr.

Data restore ean be selected upon po\ver restore, mode

ehanges to execute, or both. If the module ls off-ltne longer
t]lan the maximum downtime, an external timer can be used
to trip a dfgttal lnput on €rn NDSIOI, NDSMOS, NCISOf or
IMCISO2 module to prevent a restore after the tlmer explres.
The expired logtc state for the dlgital lnput ls conflgurable.
The data restores to the saved value before the flrst executlon
cycle of the configuration. Ttre restore function block must be
located at a block number greater than the functlon block
being restored (Sl).

When restortng a multiple output block (e.9., M/A statlon

functton code 8O), the lowest output number (I{) of that block
must be specilied by S1.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Description

N B No meaning,N must be greaterthan 51

Restore
l-Eg6-200B 1s FEB1995 140 - 1
FunctionCode140

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Block address to be restored
s2 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof saveflag:
0 = DO SaVe
1 = s?ve datia to NVRAM if <S3> = 1

S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof savepermissive:

0 = disabled
1 = eo€lbled
S4 N 0 I 00,01,10or Restorecondition:
11 X0 = restoreon powerup
Xl = no restoreon powerup
0X = restoreon modechanges
1X = no restoreon modechanges
S5 N 0 l 0-63 l/O moduleaddressof timerinput
S6 N 0 I 0 - 123 Pointnumberof timerinput:
unused = 000
DSI/DSM = XlZ = GroupA (Z=1 -8)
= X l Z = G r o u p B ( Z =1 - 8 )
CIS =X2Z (Z=1-3)
Expirelogicstate:
OYZ= logic0
1YZ= logic1
S7 N 0 I Full Spare
s8 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
S9 Y 0 I Full Spare
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:20Ei6for CBC0I and CSCO1
1023for SLG01/21
9998for |MMFCOS/04 and IMMFPOIIOUO3

Spectfication S I is the block address of the block to be

restored.

Specification 52 is the block address of the save flag. This spec-

ification is used in conjuncilon w'ith <S3> to cause the internal
and s<ternal output data to be saved to I,I\ZRAIVIevery time the
restore block executes while <S2> and <S3> equal one.

s3 Specification Sg is the block address of the save permissive.

The save permissive enables or disables the save flag input
<S2>. Table l4O- I shows the save acflon dependent upon
<S2> and <S3>.

Table 740-7. Saue Actwn

<s3> <s2> SaveActlon
0 0 No save
0 1 No save
1 0 No save
1 1 Save data to NVRAM

Restore
140-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode140

S4 Specifleation 54 is the restore conditlon. Thls specificatlon

determlnes whtch condttlons cause the saved data tn IS\IRAIVI
to be restored to the tnternal and external outputs tn RAI\{.
The ones digit of 54 determlnes tf the data is to be restored
when a power up of the module occurs. The tens dlgtt of 54
determlnes lf the data ls to be restored upon a mode change
or module reset vta the reset button.

xo = restore on Power up
xl = fio restore on pourer up
OX = r€store on mode changes
lX = no restore on mode ehanges

S5 Spectfication S5 is the I/O module address of the tlmer lnput.

This specification is the expander bus address of the digital
UO module that provides the tlmer input slgnal.

S6 Specification 56 ts the potnt number of the timer lnput. This

specification defines t}re digital I/O module input point num-
ber of the time lnput stgnal. The timer lnput prevents the
module from restorlng outdated informatlon after lt has been
powered down for an extended pertod of tlme. The hundreds
digit of 56 defines the explred logic state when a tlme-out coll-
dltion occurs.

unused = O0O

DSI/DSM - XOZ = GroupA (Z= 1-8)

- XLZ = GroupB (Z= 1-8)

CIS = X2Z ( Z =1 - 3 )

Expire logic state:

OYZ = logic O
LYZ = logic I

S7, S8 and 59 Spare.

MODULE MEMORY UTILIZATION

To determlne I\ilIRAIvI module mernory utilizatlon, use Appen-

dix B in conJunctlon wtth the formula:

NVRAM= 40+ N

where:

N = Appltcable functlon code slze from Table L4O-2 or

140-3. IMAI\/f ls set to 46 when N ls less than slx.

Restore
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 140 - 3
Function Code 140

Tahle 140-2. Fttttction0cde 14OAdditfornlM/RAtuI and0hmlqolntUflliznfronBgte

Function
Code
Size
Functlon
Code
Size
Functlon
Code
Slze
Functlon
Code
Slze
Size
o
1 4 59 2 116 2 165 26+4xS2
2 4 61 6 117 2 166 16
3 14 62 10 118 4 167 4
4 12 63 118 119 2 168 6
5 10 64 70 120 4 169 36
6 4 65 4 121 12 170 36
7 4 66 80 slow 122 4 171 4
8 10 66 332 fast 123 20 172 4
9 14 68 24 124 12 173 4 .
10 4 69 4 125 4 174 4
11 4 79 60 126 16 177 82
12 4 80 68 128 4 178 36
13 2 81 52 129 26 179 Referto
Table140-3
14 4 82 36 132 40 180 130
15 4 83 2 133 12 181 136
16 4 84 34 1U 24 182 56
17 4 85 10 135 24 184 56
18 18 86 16 136 38 185 52

o
19 22 87 2 137 24 186 68
20 2 88 18 138 16 187 24
24 4 89 4 139 24 188 24
25 34 90 52 140 4 190 4
26 10 91 4 141 16 191 88
28 34 92 4 142 2 192 104
30 14 93 16 143 14 193 62+S5
31 2 94 20 144 2 194 50+S4
32 2 95 26 145 14 198 16
33 2 96 26 146 46 199 I
34 2 97 I 147 66 210 178
35 10 98 6 148 188+S12x1O24 211 70
36 2 99 4 149 44 212 24
37 2 100 18 150 28 215 18
38 2 101 2 151 14 216 8
39 2 102 12 152 18 217 32
40 2 103 12 153 22 219 156+513x56
41 28 104 24 154 2A 220 214+S11
42 4 109 12 155 52 230 130
45 8 110 6 156 40 231 38
50 2 111 6 157 12+4-x(521+5) 241 18
+ 4 x (522+5)
51 4 112 6 160 114 242 88
52 2 113 2 161 38
55 80 114 10 162 16
58 14+S5x4 115 4 163 24

Restore
140-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode140

Tahle 140-3. Functlon Code 14O AdditlonnINVRlIM and.

Checkpotnt Utilizatton Jor hthnnced Tfend. Fltnctlon Code 1 7I
lnput Block Type NVRAMUtlllzatlonSlze NVRAMUtlllzatlonSlze
(s2) When 53 = 1 Whengg = 63
52=0or3 102+ 54 x12 150+S4x12
5 2 = 1 , 2 , 5 ,6 , 7 o r 9 90+54x10 118+54x10
52=4or8 150+ 54 x25 U2 + 54 x25

APPLICATIO.IVS

Flgure 140-f shours an example of ustng functlon code 140.

In the appltcatlon, the movlng average block (functlon code
165) calculates the average of the square root value at block
4OO. The moving average is calculated every 15 seconds and
is calculated based on one hour's worttr of collected data. The
average calculation is suspended whenever the quality of the
analog input ls bad.

The restore bloek (functlon code f 40) insures that the hour's
worttr of collected data ts not lost tn the event that the con-
troller module loses porf,rer.The restore block ts configured for
restore on po\rer up. The elapsed tlmer block controls the
update rate of I\I\IRAIVI data. The I\NIRAIVI data is saved once
every 15 seconds.

52 =240
S3= 15.0

Ftgure 740-7. UsW the Restore Block

Restore
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 140- 5
ffi

o
 FunctionGode141r SequenceMaster

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The sequence master funetlon code contalns a serles of masks

selected by the stepJump tnput. Ttre rnasks deflne the states of
the four boolean outputs for each step. A mask ls speclffed as a
serles of znro€s, ones or twos. Each dlst ln the mask ls assocl-
ated wlth a speclffc output. A vdue of two represents the don't
elene state. When thfs state ls selected, the output value
assumes the value of the prevlous step's state. Tttere ls a dls-
able mask ln addttton to ttre step masks. Ttre dlsable mask
deffnes the safe state of tlre oudluts. The default mask ls out-
put for step zero. If addtttonal steps are requtred, a sequence
master block can be ltnked to a sequence slave block. Sequence
slave blocks can also be ltnked together. Sertes of sequence
master and slave bloeks can be run ln paraltel to provtde multl-
ples of four boolezuil outputs.

UT'LIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK TVpe Deecrlptlon

N B Onesdigitof currentrnask
N+1 B Tensdigitof currentmask
N+2 B Hundredsdigitof cunentmask
N+3 B Thousandsdigitof currentmask
N+4 R Cunentstepnumber
NOTE:lf rnaskdigit is two,then outputequalspreviousstepoulPutvalue.

SPECIF'CATIO,'VS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof sequenceslave(0 = end)
S2 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof stepiump trigger.Requiresa 0 to 1
transitionafterstart-upis complete.
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof stepiump number

SequenceMaster
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 141-1
FunctionCode 141

SPEC,FICATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S4 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Defaultmask
S5 Y 0 I o - 2222 Step 1 mask
S6 Y 0 I o - 2?22 Step2 mask
S7 Y 0 I 0-n22 Step3 mask
S8 Y 0 I 0 - 2?22 Step4 mask
S9 Y 0 l o - 2222 Step5 mask
sl0 Y 0 I o-2n2 Step 6 mask
sl1 Y 0 o - 2222 Step7 mask
sl2 Y 0 0 - 2222 Step 8 mask
sl3 Y 0 o - 2222 Step 9 mask
sl4 Y 0 I o - 2222 Step 10 mask
sl5 Y 0 0 - 2222 Step 11 mask
sl6 Y 0 o - 2222 Step 12 mask
sl7 Y 0 o - 2222 Step 13 mask
sl8 Y 0 I o - 2222 Step 14 mask
sl9 Y 0 I o - 2222 Step 15 mask
s20 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step16 mask
s21 Y 0 I o - 2222 Step 17 mask
s22 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step 18 mask
s23 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step19 mask
s24 Y 0 0-n22 Step20 mask
s25 Y 0 0 - ?222 Step21 mask
s26 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step 22 mask
s27 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step23 mask
s28 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step24 mask
s29 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step25 mask
s30 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step26 mask
s31 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step27 mask
s32 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step28 mask
s33 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step29 mask
s34 Y 0 I 0 - 2222 Step 30 mask
s35 Y 0 o - 2222 Step31 mask
s36 Y 0 o - 2222 Step32 mask
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 2046for |MMFC05,CBCO1and CSC01
9998for |MMFCOS/O4
and IMMFPOIIOUO}

Speciflcatlon Sl ls ttre block address of the sequenee slave

(function eode 142).

Q = none (Steps zero to 32 supported)

Each additlonal sequence slave adds another 32 step masks

to the selectiorf,.

SequenceMaster
1 4 1- 2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 141

s2 Spectflcatlon 52 ls the block address of ttre step Jump trlgger.

When <S2> transltlons from ?rlro to one, the step Jump nlrm-
ber <S3> ls loaded as the curTent step number (N+4) and the
appropriate mask ls loaded to update ttre outputs N, N+1,
N+2 and N+3.

S3 Spectffeatlon Sg ts the block address of the step Jump num-

ber. The tnput value ls forced equal to zero when tt ts less
than or equal to zero. If the lnput value ls greater ttran the
ma:dmum step number, the ma:dmum step ntnnber ls used.
The ma:dmum step number ls determlned from the number of
sequence slaves ltnked to the sequence master block.

matcimumstepnumbeT=(mdster+ N) 32

where:

N=0 S2steps
N= 1 64steps
N=2 96steps
N=3 L28 steps
etc.

Thousandsdigitis ouput N+3

s4 Spectflcatlon 54 ls the default mask.

StepQ=defaultmask

S5 through 536 Speclficatlons 55 through 536 are Step I mask to Step 32

mask.

where:

X=0 Output equals zero

X=1 Output equals one
X=2 Output equals hold prevlous output

Figure 141-l and Table 141-1 shour a serles of sequence mas-

ter and slave blocks run tn parallel to provtde multtple outputs.

SequenceMaster
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEB199s 141 - 3
FunctionGode 141

SEQMST
sst 1
I
J
Jf t0

100

1000

STP

SEQMST
sstt t
J
Jf t0

-,f 10

JUMPTRIGGERCAUSES THE rm
SELECTED &BlT ITIASK
TO
APPEARAT THEOUTPUTON
A LOVI/(0)TO H|GH(1)TRANSTTTON sfP

STEPJUMPVALUE
MAYBE READTO
OBTAINTHECURRENT
STEPJUMPIITASK
NUMBER

Figwe 747-1. Parallel Seqtrcnce Ma.ster to Slat:e

Table 74 7- 7. Orftpfi Descripfions

Step No. Output

Mask
<s3> N+4 N+3 N+2 N+1 N
0.0 54 = 0000 0.0 0 0 0 0
1.0 55 = 0101 1.0 0 1 0 1
2.0 56 = 1200 2.0 1 1 0 0
3.0 57 = 2012 3.0 1 0 1 0
4.0 SB= 0001 4.0 0 0 0 1

Flgure 141-2 shours a logtc dlagrarn wtth the sequence master

block used ln a batch operatlon. The sequence master block
can be thought of as a slmpler verslon of the sequenee gener-
ator block (function code 161). fn most batch appllcatlons of
the sequence generator block, ttre sequence master block may
be used instead.

The number of steps for an application can be elpanded tn

multiples of 32 by linking sequence slave blocks (funetton
code I42). Additional sequence master blocks can be run in
parallel to provide expzrnded step masks ln multiples of four
output states per step number.

Sequence
Master
141-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode141

CONTROL INPUT

DDRIVE
c r o SEQMST
FB1 cs sst t
I
FB:l sr T J
t
l
l
l OP SH J' t0
a l
l
t
l
l
os SAT
t
t
l
l
ES r00
l l
t l
SN
t
l
l
l SAP r000
t l
a
t l
l
I
t l
sll STP

sr3

FEEDBACK
INPUTS

STEP TRIGGER

TO
STEPINDICATORS
LOGICS
AUXILIARY

Wure 141-2. Logic Dingram of Uslng &quenre Mashr Blrck In BatcfT

SequenceMaster
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 141-5
ffi
I

o
 FunctionCode 142- SeguenceSlave

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The sequence slave functJon code contalns a serles of masks

that a sequence master functlon code steps through on a
selected step basts. The pu{pose of the sequence slave func-
tlon code ls to e4pand tJre step number capabf[ry of the
sequence master functlon code. Ttre masks deflne the states
of tlre sequence master block's four boolean outputs for each
step. A sertes of zeroes, ones, or twos speclfles a mask. Each
dfgit ln the mask ls assoclated wlth a speclflc output. A value
of two represents ttre donT c(Te state. When thts state ts
selected, the output value assumes the value of the previous
step's state. If addlttonal steps are requlred, the sequence
slave block can be linked to another sequence slave block.

NOTE: Functioncode 142 must be used in combinationwith a

sequencernasterblock (functioncode 141).Referto the applica-
tionssectionof functioncode 141for moreinformation.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Ilescrlptlon

N B No meaning

SPECIFICATIO.'VS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 2 Blockaddressof nextsequenceslave(0 = end)
s2 Y 0 0 - 2222 StepN+l mask
S3 Y 0 0 - 2222 StepN+2 mask
S4 Y 0 I 0 - ?222 StepN+3 mask
S5 Y 0 I 0 - ?222 Step N+4 mask
S6 Y 0 I o - ?2?2 StepN+5 mask
S7 Y 0 I 0 - ?2?2 StepN+6mask

SequenceSlave
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 142-1
FunctionCode 142

SPECI FI CATTOwS @onti

nued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s8 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+7mask
s9 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+8 mask
sl0 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+9 mask
sl1 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+10mask
sl2 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+11mask
sl3 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+12mask
sl4 Y 0 o-n22 StepN+l3 mask
sl5 Y 0 o - ?222 StepN+14mask
sl6 Y 0 o-n22 StepN+15mask
sl7 Y 0 o - 2222 Step N+l6 mask
sl8 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+17mask
sl9 Y 0 0 - 2222 Step N+l8 mask
s20 Y 0 o - 2222 Step N+l9 mask
s21 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+20mask
s22 Y 0 o - 2?22 StepN+21mask
s23 Y 0 o-222 StepN+22mask
s24 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+23mask
s2s Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+24mask
s26 Y 0 0 - 2222 StepN+25mask
s27 Y 0 0 - 2222 StepN+26mask
s28 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+27mask
s29 Y 0 o-n22 StepN+28mask
s30 Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+29mask
s31 Y 0 0 - 2222 StepN+30mask
s32 Y 0 o - ?222 Step N+31 mask
sStl Y 0 o - 2222 StepN+32mask
NOTES:
1. N = 32 (forfirstsequsnoeslavein linkedlist)
N = 64 (for secord sequenoeslavein linkxl list)
N = 96 (forthirdsoquenceslavein linkedlist)
etc.
2. Modmumvaluesare: 2W for |MMFC0S, CBC01andCSC01
9998for |MMFCOS/04 and IMMFPOUOA0S

SequenceSlave
142-2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 '
Function Code 143r Invoke C

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Functlon code 143 lnvokes the C progran. Speclflcally, the

irrvoke C block calls a firnctlon wlthtn the C program deslg-
nated as a *gment entry point .

The C progftrm can have as many as efght segment entry

polnts. Each entry polrrt has a functlon block segment (seg-
ment entry polnt zero wtth functlon block segment zeto, etc.). '
;
A functlon name (1.e., ttre name of the functtons that compose
the C program) connects wtth each entry potnt. The same
functlon name may connect wtth more than one entry potnt.
'
Durlng functton block executlon, arl encounter wtth an lnvoke
C block transfers control to the C program at the assoclated
entry polrt (1.e., calls the approprtate functlon). When that
program retums, functlon block executlon contlnues ltor-
mally at the next bloek. Ttre entry polnt program functlon
may cdl other functtons of the C program before returnlng.

Besldes the nonnal utlllzatlon constralnts, there are no fur-

ther restrlctlons on the conflgudng of lnvoke C blocks. Specif-
lcdly, lrlvoke C blocks may appear tn arry or all functton block
segments. Stnce each functlon block segment ls a separate
task, more than one task may execute the C prograln. When
the C program ls subJect to multttasktng, all shared functlons
among tasks must be coded so as to be reentrartt.

For more lnformatlon on C program developmert, consult the

C Langu;olgq Implg,mento;tion Guide product lnstmctlorl.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK TVpe Descrlptlon

N R Valuemay be set by C prograrnusingt'n puhrgs function

InvokeC
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 143 - 1
FunctionCode 143

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range &scrlptlon

s1 Y 0 I 0,1or2 Programoperatingrnode:
0 = C programwill executenormally
1 = C programexecutionis inhibited,blockswill run
2 = C programis in debugmodefor usewith the
EWSC debugger
s2 N 0 0 - 99gg Blockaddressof inhibitexecutionflag
s3 Y 0 I Full Programreadablepararneter
s4 Y 0 I Full Programreadableparameter
S5 Y 0 I Full Programreadablepararneter
s6 Y 0 I Full Programreadableparameter
s7 Y 0.000 R Full Programreadableparameter
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Programreadableparameter
S9 Y 0 Full Spare
sl0 Y 0 I Full Spare
sl1 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

APPLICATIO,TVS

Figure 143- f shows a configuratlon of a tlmer used to monttor

and provide alarm capabfif. Flgure L43-2 shours the entry ln
the C utility prograrn for thts example. There are ntrmerous
ways to use the invoke C command block and several ways to
configure a timer. This ls Just one example.

I
I
I

I
- _ _ _ _ 1 |
r l

S9. I (gAtrtlOF51) 52. {15 t

t
l
l
9f - -l (OAINOF Se) $lr.(15 l l
r l
t l
I t
t l
t l
t l
l l
t l
t l

94 - LOI{GESTilME t
t
l
l

H V

ETIMER
i L-s-l R A

SS.TllE
9l r AllFll VA|-UEATA+IHI
55 r Ar A|ilf, VrurE OftlRESET SEOMENTIO
fPzF,'g

Ftgwe 7 43- 7. Watchdq Tlmer CrmfigwalTon

InvokeC
143-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-200B
 Function Code 143

EDIT USER RAM SPECIFICATIONS

Ma( size of C idata section o

Max size of C udata sectlon o
Min slze of dynamic rnemory pool o

Segment Nane of Stack

Number Entry Point Size

o Main 1024
1 o
2 o
3 0
4 o
5 0
6 0
7 o

Alt-H Help
TP?zrof,,'A

Ftgure 743-2. Ertfry tnOUttW Program

The example tn Flgure 143-1 shows a C program called maln

betng executed llr segment zero of the module. The lnvoke C
functlon code ls placed lrr numerlcal order after the segment
control block.

The C program has €rn output to ttre tnvoke C speclflcatlon

whtch trlggers a ttme delay command (functlon code 58) tn
the succeedIrg conflgurattolr.

Thts tlmer conflguraflon starts wlth a ttme delay command

(functton code 58). Ttre lnput comes from the lnvoke C com-
mand block. Ttte delay ls equd to the longest lnference cycle
tlme pertod antlctpated, and the number of tntervals set to
one. Functton code 15 (2-tnput summer) ls next. The sum-
mer's tnputs come from the lnvoke C conrmand block (gain
equds one) and the tlme delay block output (gatn equals -1).
Spectficatlon <S2> of the summer block subtracts from <S1>
arrd the value goes to the htgtr/low compare (ftrnetton code I2).

The htgtt/lonr compare block compares the tnput wlth the

htgh and lour llmlts speclfted. The hlgh nmtt equals +0.5 and
the low limit equds -O.5. If the lnput ts egual to or greater
than the htgh llmlt, the hlgh output ls logle I and the low out-
put a loglc O. If the tnput ls equal to or less than the low llmlt,
the low output ls loglc I and the hfgh output a loglc 0. If the
input value ls between tJre hfgh and low ltmlts, both outputs
are loglc O.

lnvokeC
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 143- 3
FunctionCode 143

Botlt of tJ:e high/low compare outputs go to the 2-tnput OR

block (functton eode 39). [f elt]rer or bot]r lrrputs to the OR
block equal logtc 1, the output equals loglc 1. When both
tnputs equal loglc O, the output ls loglc O.

The output of the OR block goes to the NOT block whtch

reverses the signal (1.e., log[e O tnput equals logtc 1 output).
The NOT output srgnd goes to the reset lnput of the elapsed
tlrter block (function code 86). A constant loglc 1 slgnal goes
to the hold lnput. Ttle elapsed ttmer block sets the alarm out-
Put to a logtc I when the reset lnput drops to a logtc O for the
tlme specified.

Thts configuratlon compares tl:e present vttal slsl wfth the

prevlous cycles vital slgn. If there ls no stgnlflcant change
(plus or mlnus 0.5), the elapsed tlmer starts tfmhg. When the
spectfied ttme elapses, the alarm output goes to loglc 1. Upon
a slgniflcant change, the conffguraflon contlnues comparlng
vttal signs.

InvokeC
143-4 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 144 rr C Allocation

GENERAT DESCRIPTION

The C allocatlon functton code declares the amount of volatlle

and nonvolattle memory dlocated for C programs ln the mod-
ule. The declarattons serve as a marker for module memory
utlltzatlon calculatlons.

Spectflcatlon Sl sets the arnount of random access memory

(RAI\{) ln one ldlobyte lncrements. Spectflcatlon Sl should be
greater than or equal to tlre total RAI\{ allocated to C specfl-
eatlon for memory forrnat deflned tn the C uttllty program. For
more tnformatlon on memory spectflcatlon refer to the prod-
uct tnstmctlon C Lalngntolge Implementatilon Guide.

Spectflcatlon 52 sets the amount of nonvolatlle random

access memory [{VRAIvt). Thts should be greater than or
equal to the total NnmAI\d allocated to C speclflcatlon for
memory format deflned ln the C uilltty program. For more
information on memory specificatlon refer to the product
instnrction C Loinguorge Implementation Guide.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Unused

SPEC//FICATTOwS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-320 RAM allocation in 1 kbyte increments
S2 N 0 I 0-80 NVRAMallocationin 1 kbyteincrements

C Allocation
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 144-1
ffi
I

I
 FunctionGode145- FrequencyCounter/Slave

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The frequency counter/slave functlon code lnterf,aces ttre fre-

quency counter slave to a multl-functlon controller or mulfl-
functlon processor.

Output N provldes the frequency ln hertz tlmes the galn (S5).

The quallty and alarms on thts output reflect the curent
state of the block. Thls lncludes the rate alarms and the htgh
and low rate darms. Ttre hfgh and lour rate alar:ms dtsplay on
operator devtces as HD and LD respectlvely. Ttre hlgb and low
darrrs and quallty are tncluded ln tl:e frequency output N.
These ala:rrs can be detected uslng the test alar:m functlon
(functlon code 69).

Oualty ls detected ustng the test qua[ty functlon (functton

code 31). Hlgh rate of change occurs when the frequeney out-
put N changes in a posltlve dtrectlon from tJre prevlous output
in excess of 59. Low rate of change occurs when the frequency
output has changed trr a negaflve dlrectton from the prevlous
output ln excess of 59. The conflgurable hfgh and low alarm
nmlts (SO and SZ) deterrntne when the alarm outputs N+l
arrd N+2 are set. To prevent alarm eh;o;tten the alarm dead-
band (SB), e>lpressed tnr englneertng untts, ls provtded for 56
and 57. The last output N+3 reports the status of I/O module
conrmunlcatlons.

The IMFCSOI module t5plcally measures rotatlonal speed of a

turbine uttltzlng a toothed wheel attaehed to the shaft and a
magnetlc plckup.

UT'LIZATION

FrequencyCounter/Slave
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 145- 1
FunctionCode 145

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Frequenry(hertz)
x gain (withalarms)
N+1 B High alarm:
Q = good
1 = alarm
N+2 B Lowalarm:
e = good
1 = alarm
N+3 B UOrnodulecommunication:
g = good
1=bad

sPEC'FtCArrOrVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-63 Expanderbus addressof UOmodule
S2 N 0 I Full Spare
s3 N 1 Full Spare
s4 N 0 Full Sparebooleaninput
S5 Y 1.000 R Full Engineeringunitgain
s6 Y 9.2 E18 R Ful Engineeringunithighalarm
S7 Y -9.2El8 R Ful Engineeringunitlow alarm
S8 Y 0.000 R Ful Absolutealarmdeadband
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Engineeringunitrateof changealarm.A valueof 0.0 indi-
catesa no elarm condition(i.e.,the rate alarmis tumed off)
sl0 N 0 0 - 9998 Sparebooleaninput

FrequencyCounter/Slave
145-2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 146 r Remote l/O Interface

GENERALDESCHPTION

Ttre remote l/O tnterface functlon code deflnes ttre lnterface

srA between a (control module) multl-functlon controller or mulfl-
STA
srA
firrrctlon processor and a local remote l/O module. Ttle local ,
STA remote I/O module ls the remote master processor (RMP).
STA
Ftrnctlon code 146 deflnes the expander bus addresses for
srA
srA both the prlmary and secondary remote master processors. "
STA
STA
srA NOTE:The remotel/O interfaceblock must be configuredin the
srA samesegmentasthe|/ob|ocksthatarereferencedinS1,andS5
srA
rvA
throughS16.
hUA

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk TVpe Descrlptlon

N B PrimaryRMPstatus:
Q = good
1 =bad
N+1 B SecondaryRMPstiatus:
Q= good
1 =bad
N+2 R Cycletime of rEmotemasterprocessor(secs)

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof remotel/O definition
S2 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus addressof primaryRMP
S3 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbus addressof secondaryRMP
S4 N 0 I Full Spareparameter
S5 N 2 I 0 - gg98 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
S6 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstiation

Remotel/O Interface
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 146 - 1
Function Code 146

SPECIFI CAfrOn S pontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s7 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
S8 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
S9 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstration
sl0 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
sl1 N 2 I 0 - 99gg Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
sl2 N 2 I 0 - 99gg Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
sl3 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
sl4 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
sl5 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
s16 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlor indicatorstation
sl7 N 0 I 0 - gggg Sparebooleaninput
sl8 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Sparebooleaninput

EXPIANATION

The following explanatton adds detall to tJre speclflcatlons for

the remote I/O lnterface block.

Speciflcation Sl is the block address of the flrst remote I/O

definition (funetion code L471. Thls speclficatlon links the
remote I/O defrniUon block to the remote UO trrterface block.
This link defines the remote l/O module processors and thelr
associated I/O modules. Spectflcatton Sl can be set to zero lf
there is no remote I/O definltton block.

s2 Speciflcation 52 ls the expander bus address of the prlmary

remote master processor. The local remote I/O module ls the
remote master processor. Remote master processors can
address up to elght control statlons and four lndtcator sta-
tlons. Stations addressed by remote master processors are
conflgured as inputs to thts block.

s3 Speclfication S3 ls the e4pander bus address of the secondary

remote master processor.

NOTE:lf redundanryis not implemented,

the definitionof the sec-
ondary expanderbus addressmust be set equal to the primary
(s2).
s4 Spare parameter.

55 through516 These specifications are the block addresses of the eontrol

stations or indicator stations. VaUd statton addresses are zero
through eight. Valid indicator addresses are ntne through I 1.

S17 and S18 Spare boolean inputs.

Remotel/O Interface
146-2 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Functlon Code 146

APPLICATIO^'S

Flgure 146-1 shows the block dfagfam conffguratlon detatltng

the relatlonshlp between a multl-functlon controller or multl-
firrrctlon processor module and a remote l/O module tnterface
and the control statlon and lndlcator statlon. The assoclated
module functlon codes requlred to deflne t}ts lnterface are
also shown.

E(PAi-IDERBUS

RMP
(REMOTE
IVIASTER
PROCESSOR)
(148)

SERIAL LINK

TPz!0@58

Flgwe 146-1. Remote I/O Interface hcanple

The remote I/O interface block deffnes the lnterface between

the multl-functlon controller or multl-functlon processor and
the remote I/O module. Thls lnterface ltnks the statlon func-
tlons tn the module to thetr respectlve remote \/O modules.
Refer to functlon code 147 for a bloek dlagram example show-
tng the remote IIO block worklng tn conJunctlon wtth the
remote llO deflnltton block.

Ftgure 146-2 lllustrates a conflguratlon uslng the remote I/O

lnterface and the remote I/O deflnltton blocks (funetton codes
146 and 147 respectlvely). Ttle control lnterface slave (func-
tlon code 79) references the UO from a control tnterface slave
connected to ttre remote slave processor. Notlce that tltts corl-
flguratlon has the control statlons tnterfaced vla the remote
rnaster processor.

Remotell0 Interface
l-E96-200B ls FEBlees 146 - 3
FunctionCode 146

TOOTI{ER
Sf,ATlOf.l
BL@|(S

TP20019A

Flgure 146-2. Remote I/O Interface Conf,tguration

RemotellO Interface
146-4 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 147- RemoteUODefinition

L DESCRIPTION

RI/OD The remote I/O deftnttton functlon code deflnes the commu-
cs Rs'
nlcatlon address and enrrlronment of remotely located remote
UO modules. Thls module ls the remote slave processor
(RSP). Each processor has a untque sertal Unk communlca-
sl0
tion address. ThJs block deflnes that address.
sl1
sl2 The remote l/O deflnltlon block also deflnes the dlgttal and
S1
sl4 arralogl/O module types lnterfaced wtth the remote slave pro-
S1 cessor.
7
.l

-
I NOTE:The remotel/O definitionblockmust be configuredin the
9
samesegmentas the l/O blocksreferencedin 51 and S5 through
S36,as well as functioncode 146.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N B Remoteslaveprocessorstatus:
Q= good
1 =bad
NOTE:lf runninga redundantremoteUOconfiguratior,blockN indicatesgood(zero)whenboth
RSPsfunctbnproperly.BlockN indicatesbad (one)whenone or bothof the RSPsare off-linE.

SPEC'FtCATtO,^fS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof nextrernotel/O dEfinition
S2 N 0 I 0-63 Remoteslaveprocessorseriallink communication
address
S3 N 0 I Full SparEparameter
s4 N 0 I Full Spareparameter
S5 N 2 I Note1 Blockaddressof UOblockor station
S6 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof l/O blockor station

Remotel/O Definition
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 147 - 1
 FunctlonCode 147

SPECIFI CATI ONS @onti

nued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s7 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof UOblockor station
s8 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof llO blockor station
s9 N 2 I Note 1 Bfockaddressof llO blockor stiation
sl0 N 2 I Note 1 Bfockaddressof llO blockor station
o o o o a o

o o o o O o

o o a o O o

s34 N 2 I Note 1 Bfockaddressof llO block or station

s35 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof UOblockor station
s36 N 2 Note 1 Blockaddressof UOblock or station
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: Zo4;G
for IMMFCOS
9998 for !MMFC03/04 and IMMFPOUOAO}

EXPLANATION

The follorving explanatlon adds detatl to the spectncatlons and

shows an aPpltcation ustng the remote l/O deflntflon block.

Specillcatton Sl ls the block address of tJle next remote l/O

definition. This spectflcation should be set to zero ff aU of the
l/O for all RSPs can be deflned by one remote I/O deftnttlon.

s2 Speeilication 52 is the remote slave processor sertal lfnk com-

munication address.

S3 and 94 Spare parameters.

55 through Siito Spectflcatlons 55 tlrrough 536 are the block addresses of the
VO blocks.

The remote I/O definrtion block deflnes the tSpe of UO mod-

ule blocks the remote slave processors tnterface. Speclflca-
tions 55 ttrrough 536 potnt to l/O related functlon blocks
such as the control tnterface slave (functlon code 791, dlgttal
output group (functton code 83), statlon (functlon code gO),
and the digital tnput group (functton code 84). Ttds llnk
deflrres the tlpe of I/O module eaeh remote slave processor
handles. If a DCS or SAC statlon ls to be corurecteA to a sta-
tlon ltnk at the rernote end (RSp end), then functlon code 8O
must be defined for ttrat staflon ln sE ilrrough sg6.

Function code L47 can select up to 32 I/O blocks. Each

remote slave processor can address up to &l modules. Marry
remote UO definition blocks may be requtred for each remote
slave processor.

Remotel/O Definition
1 4 7- 2 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 147

The analog/lrryut slave (functlon code 1321, the andog/output,

slave (firnctton code 149), and the entranced analog slave defl-
nltlon (functlon code 215) use a llnked ltst of blocks \iltth the
base block belrg the control block. Only the control block for a
multt-block I/O module deflnttlon should be deflned tn 55
through 536. When the control bloek ts a remote I/O module,,
all assoclated llnked llst blocks are remote blocks. Thl,s,
lncludes any smart transmttter deflnttlon blocks (functton
code 133) ltrrked to an analog lnput/slave (functton code L32)
or €rny enhanced andog lnput deflnltlons firnctlon code 216) ori
the entranced callbr:atlon conrmand (functton eode 2L7) ltnked
to an enhanced analog slave deflnttlon (functlon code 215). '

Functlon codes lO2, LOz, 104 and lOg each deflne only one
lnput. Ttle modules assoclated wtth these functton codes have
up to elght tnputs. Each tnput for ttre IMDSMO4 module ls,
deflned by one of these functlon codes. All functlon codes'
assoclated wtth the remote IMDSM04 module must be lndl-'
vidudly allocated a unlqpe entry fn S5 through 536.

Multiple blocks deflnfng tJre same remote slave processor'

should be aranged consecuttvely ln the llnked llst. Thls
implementatlon results ln zrn efflclent conflguration. The
remote I/O deflnttlon block supports the l/O related blocks
shown lnTable 147-L.

Table 147 - 1. F'Unctlon Blrcks Sqprpor1rld

by Remote IlO DefinttlonBlock
Functlon Functlon
Descrlptlon Deccrlptlon
Code Code
20 Indicatorstiation 104 PulseinpuUtotalization
79 Controlinterfaceslave 109 PulseinpuUduration
80 Controlstation 114 BCDinput
83 Digitaloutputgroup 115 BCDoutput
84 Digitalinputgroup 132 AnaloginpuUslave
102 PulseinpuUperiod 149 AnalogoupuUslave
103 PulseinpuUfrequency 215 Enhanced analog slave

APPLICATIONS

Flgure L47-L shows a block dlagram conflguratlon uslrrg the

remote l/O lnterface and the remote I/O deflnttlon blocks
(functlon codes 146 and I47 respectlvel5r).

This example uses the remote I/O deftnltton block to support

varlous I/O related blocks. The remote I/O deflnttton block
deflrres the relatedl/O blocks. The remote I/O lnterface block
deflnes the lnterface between the multl-functlon controller or
multt-functlon processor and ttre remote I/O module. Refer to
functton code 146 for remote l/O lnterf,ace detatls. Ttrls exarn-
ple ls one of marry posstble conffguratlons.

Remotel/O Definition
l-Eg6-200B ls FEBrees 147 - 3
FunctionCode 147

E)(PANDERBUS

RMP RMP
(REMOTE (REI,IOTE
IT|ASTER TIIASTER
PROCESSOR) PrcCESSOR)
(146) (146)
EXPANDERBUS D(PANDER BUS

RSP RSP
(REMOTE
(83) (64) (84)
(RElrrOTE
SIAVE sl-AvE
PROCESSOR) PrcCESSOR) (83) (84) (83)
04n u4n
SERIALLINK
D(PANDER BUS

RSP
GEMOTE
S.AVE
E)(PANDERBUS PROCESSOR)
(4n

(84) RSP
(REI,OTE
srsvE
(&0) PR@ESSOR)
(114-

TP200068

Figure 147-1. Remote I/O DeftnifionEr,ample

Remotel/O Definition
147-4 ls FEB199s !-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 148- BatchSeguence

GENERALDESCR'PTION

Ttre batch sequence (BSEO) functlon code coordlnates

sequence actlvltles for a batch process.

UT'LIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R CurrentrecipelD Number
N+1 R Cunentphasenumber
N+2 B Currentstatus:
Q= hold
1=ilO
N+3 B Faultlogicactive:
0=oO
| =tOS
N+4 B Hold logic active:
0=]lO
1 =leS
N+5 B Batchcomplete:
Q=DO
| =leS

N+6 B Resetoperatoracknowledge:
0=1lO
| =!€S
N+7 R Fault code
N+8 R Currentstatementnumber

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ileecrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof recipelD number
S2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof phasenurnber
S3 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof run/holdpushbutton

BatchSequence
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB199s 1 4 8- 1
FunctionCode 148

SPECIFICAfrOruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S4 N 0 Note1 pushbutton
Blockaddressof operatoracknowledge
S5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof E-STOP
S6 N 0 Note 1 Sparebooleaninput
s7 N 0 Note 1 Spare boolean input
S8 N 0 I Full Spareparameter
S9 Y 0.000 R Full BatchprogramlD number
s10 Y 1 Full Debugoperation
s11 N 1 I Full RAMallocationfor obiectfile (1 kbyteincrements)
sl2 N 256 I Full RAMallocationfor data (1 byteincrements)
sl3 N 0 I Full Spareparameter
s14 N 0 I Full Spareparameter
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare:9998for IMMFCOUO4
and IMMFPCI.TAO}

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specification Sl identifies the current reclpe ID number for

the BSEQ block. The recipe ID number ts defined by the oper-
ator. A new recipe ca,nnot be loaded lnto the BSEO block untll
the previous recipe is complete or the sequence is ln hold.

s2 Specification 52 deflnes the start/restart phase number for

the BSEQ block.

s3 Specification S3 eontrols the status of the batch sequence. A

zero to one transltion causes the sequence to begln or resume
nrnnin$. A zeto input causes the sequence to hold unless
external hold is disabled.

s4 Specification 54 is the operator acknowledge input. It latches

in the trre state by a zero to one transition. It remalns tnre
until read by an ACK statement.

s5 Specifieation S5 is the block address of the E-STOP (executed

stop).

SOand 57 Spare boolean input.

S8 Spare parameter.

s9 Specification 59 defines the ID number of the batch program

that the BSEQ block will execute. The program ID number ls
determined by the last two digits of the program name or the
compiler directive #PROGRAIVIID.

BatchSequence
148-2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code148

sl0 Thts speclftcatlon deflnes a debug operatlon. Under normal

program executlon requlrements, use the default value (one).

f OO0 = transltlon to 1OOO(from any otlrer value) causes a

debuglgfer STOP command S to be exeeuted

fOOl =transltlon to lOOl (from any other value) causes a

debugger GO conrmand G to be executed

9OO0 =value of 9OOOcauses a debugger STOP command S

to be executed whenever the program ls started
(complete to runnfn$ or restarted (hotdlng to run-
nind

sl1 Specification Sl f controls the RAI\{ allocatlon for the obJect

ffle in one tdlobyte lncrements. The program llsting file
<name>.IST shows the mfilmum vdue for tlrts speclflcatlon
in its last comment llnes.

sl2 Speciflcation Sf 2 controls the RAI\{ allocatlon for the dynamtc

data. Thls data conslsts of batch, local and stack data for the
active step subroutlne. The program [stfng flle <name>.ISf
shows the mtnlmum value for thts speclflcatlon ln tts last
comment lines. For redundant conflguratlons, the prtmary
MFP module coples the entlre dynamtc data space to the
backup. Therefore, to mlnlmlze update tlme, ttre smallest
amount of mernory should be allocated.

OUTPUTS

The block outputs show the status of ttre BSEQ block. Tltese
outputs can be ltnked to any other block tn the conflguration
to monitor the batch process. The output of block number
N+7 is a fault code.

RuntimeFault Code Explanation

Positive Nwnfur - asslgned (arry posttlve number) tn the

batch language program to show what tlpe of fault has
occurred. There ts no llmlt to the number of fault codes the
user may assl$n.

-7.O flold @rnmo;nd - batch sequence ls ln hold, through

either the BSEQ block or a command tn the batch language.
Gotng to hold suspends nonnal logtc and starts executlon of
hold loglc.

-8.O Stcclc Owrllout El zor - tndtcates a problem wtth the

compiler or module flrmware. If thls error occurs, contact
Bailey Controls technlcal support center.

4.O E}ror B;ea,dlng ObJect frle - occurs when no batch pro-

gram erdsts ln the I\nmAI\d that matches the nurnber shown ln

BatchSequence
l-E96-2008 ls FEBrees 148 - 3
FunctionGode 148

59 of the batch sequence block. Normally thls means that the

batch obJect file ls not downloaded to the module or 59 of the
BSEQ block references an undefined prograln number.

-5.O Object File Exceed-s Memory Alloeqtion - S11 of the

BSEQ block sets aside a portion of ttre RAIVIof the MFP mod-
ule to contain the batch program. If the batch program slze
exceeds the amount specifled by Sl l, then the batch program
will not run and this error occurs. Correct t}ts problem by
lncreasing Sl f of the BSEO block.

-7.O Step Datrr Size Ex;ceeds Memory Alloeotion - certaln

data stmctures of the batch language fbatch data deelara-
tions, global and local tlmers, integrators, etc.) are copled tnto
a stack. Speciflcation Sfz determlnes the amount of RAIVI
assigned to the stack of the BSEQ block. If Sfz ls not large
enough to contain this stack, ttren tlle batch program wlll not
run and this error occurs. To correct, lncrease the value of
S12 in the BSEQ block.

-8.O Recipe Refers to andefined Step Subroutine - tells the

BSEQ block what order to execute step subroutlnes. If ttre
reclpe contalns a step subroutlne ntrme not contalned wtthtn
the batch program, then tJ:e batch program wil go lnto fault
with this error code. This sttuation c€rn happen when a batch
program is edited to remove a step subroutine, but the corre-
sponding recipes are not changed. Thls error occurs at run
time. To corect tJ:is error, either add the undeflned step sub-
routine or remove the call (undeflned step subroutlne) from
the recipe.

'IO,O Reeipe FiIe E;rror - occurs when attemptfng to run a

recipe that does not exist withh the I{\IRAIVI of the MFP mod-
ule or a nonsdstent recipe ID number ls speclfted. To correct
this eror, create or download a new recipe to the module or
input a valid recipe number and then restart the sequerlce.

-72.O Reeipe Does Not Mo;tch Pr:ogrolm 'for each step sub-
routine named in a recipe, there ls a ltst of actual arguments.
Each argument has a data tSpe tre tl:e batch program. Each
step subroutine has a forrnal argument ltst that speclftes the
expected data types. Fault eode -12.O shows a data t1rye con-
flict between the recipe and the program. To corect thts
error, recompile the batch program and reclpe. Then, down-
load both the recompiled batch program and reclpe.

'I3.O DSfiOP - E-STOP (executed stop) tnput to the BSEO

block (S5) is olt. This drives the bateh program uncondltton-
atly to phase zero of the current reclpe. To get out of thJs con-
dition, the E-STOP input must go off.

'15.O Inaalid Phase Number - occurs upon Ern attempt to

start a batch sequence at a phase number not deflned wfthfn
the mnning recipe. Correct fault code -15.0 by etther creattng

Batch Sequence
148-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode148

a reclpe wtth a phase number that matches the one attempt-

Xrg to run or by changlng the phase number.

-76.0 Bc,d. Funct!,ron Blrck Referenee - tn ttre batch data

declaratton sectlons of the batch languErse, the program ctrn
reference any functlon block urtthfn the MFP module. How-
ever, tt ls posslble to reference a functlon block that does not
e:dst or one whose tSpe does not match the functlon code tlpe
ln the declarattorl. If thts ls the case, then the program wtll
not run and tlrts error code wfll be generated. Use the DBG|
option tn the dynamfc debugger to query tJre BSEQ block and
the error code and descrtptlon. Furtherrnore, tf thls error
occurs, lt wfU glve the functlon block number wtthtn the
batch data sectlon that ls maldng the reference. Correct the
problem by changlng the functlon block number to a valtd
number, erase the reference from the program, or correct the
t5pe to match the functlon block tir the MFP module.

-77.O erag Elror - occurs when urn €uray subscrtpt ls out of

bounds. For example, conslder the case where A(1:10) ls a ten
element array declared ln a batch data sectlon. It ls possible to
reference the ffieenth element ln thls affay througlt an
expresslon x=A(15). Thls statement ls nonsense because there
is no ffieenth element. In addltlorl, because the €uray sub-
script can be an expresslon, lt ls possible to have x=A(fl where
y could be based upon a calculatton uslng a process l/O
value. Therefore, tt is lmposslble for the compller to detect t}is
tSpe of error. Consequently, thts error can happen at any polnt
during the nonnal exeeutlon of a program. Thl,s suspends nor-
mal loglc and beglns executlon of fault loglc. Note that tt ls
possible to tnspect the value of the fault code to detect when
thts fault has occurred.

-78.O BCODE Reuision Mismo;tc,h- - each revlslon of MFP

firmware operates wlth a parttcular verslon of Batch 90. If
thts error occurs, recomplle ttre batch program urtth the com-
piler that matches the ftrmware wtthtn the MFP module.

-19.O Recipe Requires Too Mang Parellel Steps - reclpe

contains more parallel steps wtthln it than allowed ln the pro-
gram that ls mnnlng ln the RAM of the module. Each phase of
the recipe is checked Just before tt beglns executlon. To cor-
rect this error, edlt and recomplle the reclpe to contaln less
parallel steps or edlt the #WL statement.

-2O.O Recipe or Step Subroutine Po;ro;meter Erzror - r€ctpe

contalns either the wrong number of reclpe parameters or the
tlpe of parameters tn the reclpe does not agree wtth those
withln the program runntng tn RAIVI. Each phase of tl:e reclpe
ls checked Just before tt begtns executlon. To comect tttts
error, eorrect the reclpe or the program (normally the reclpe).

-27.O ltro;lid Ott-line Progro;m Change - ztrr attempt to run

a new program that dlffers from the prevlous one. There has

BatchSequence
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 148 - 5
FunctionCode148

been a change in the batch data urrea or there has been a

change in the local declaration sectlon of the actlve step snb-
routlne.

-22.O Bo;tch. Deseriptor not Unique. - batch and lot number

in the batch htstorian (BHIST) block are not unlque on the
BHIST block. Change the batch and/or lot number and
restart the program.

-29.O Wqitfor BIIIST - BHISTblock ts busy and the program

may not proceed until tt ts avallable. Thls ts a normal, tran-
slent condltlon. No correctlve actlon ls requlred.

-24.O BItrST Oflf-lhte - BHIST block ls off-llne and the pro-

gram may not proceed untll the BHIST block ls on-llne and
the program restarts.

-25.O Bloek Referenee Etror - reclpe contalns a reference to

an lncorrect or nonexistent block. Correct the block number
in the recipe.

-26.0 Bo,d Do;ta ReJerence in Recfirc - occlrrs when a data

entry in the recipe does not match the program. Thls most
commonly happens when a reclpe argument vdue was
selected from a selection list and the program was changed to
no longer include that selectlon. In order to recover from thls
error, eompile the reclpe urith the Batch 90 program and
resolve any discrepanctes.

-27.O Bad F,loek Referenee in tINtT DXEA - results when a

block declaration in the UNIT DEF file does not match the
MFP module configuration (either the functton block address
or the function code t5pe are in error). Determtne the error by
usin$ the DBG * optton to query the BSEQ block. The mlnl
debugger displays the block address of the declaratlon that
does not match the conflguraflon.

'28.O Bc'd Data Reference in UNI,T D#n - occurs when a

data entry in the UNIT DEF flle does not match the program.
In order to recover from tlrls error, comptle the UNIT DEF flle
against the Batch 90 program and resolve any dlscrepancles.

-29.O TINIT DATA Does lllot Mo;tch the Bo;tch 90 Pr:ogranr -

indicates that the UNIT DEF file does not match the B9O pro-
gram structurally (the number or t5pe of declarattons do not
match). In order to recover from this error, comptle the UNTT
DEF file against the Batch 90 program and resolve any dls-
crepancies.

-8O.O E;rzlor Rerrding IINilT DEII. OB, FtIe - occurs when no

UNIT DEF file exists in the t{VRAI\d t}rat matches t}re number
indicated by 59 of the BSEQ block. Normally thts me€rns that
the UNIT DEF object file has not been downloaded to the
module.

BatchSequence
1 4 9- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode148

APPLICATION

Flgure 148-l ls a batch sequenee example. Speclflcatlon Sf

llnks tJle BSEQ block to the-flrst remote manual set constant
(REMSET) block. Thls Unk gtves the BSEQ block the reclpe ID
number. Speclllcatlon 52 ltnks the BSEQ block to the second
:
REMSETblock. Thls llnkglves BSEQ blockthe phase number.

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

?--- (6s) RECIPE sr I eseo

BSEQ ittaal
RT R#

Pf{r P}lf

ESP H

: [-l
i--sr-,
E iH--
-el
--l
ro-o,u
l
f5Tj l
N/A R

1 SECOT.IDPULSE

51 -31O
SZ -315
gg -320
s4d}
SS E325
SO=O
SZ =O
58'0.0
59 =1
SlO=f
S11-10
S12=256
s13d)
S14=()
TP502038

Flgrre 148-1. Balch Seguen@ Erarnple

The output of the first remote control memory (RCM) block ts

llnked to Sg of the BSEQ block. Thls lnput value describes
the status of the mn/hold pushbutton. The second RCM
block output suppltes the BSEQ block urtth the status of the
E-STOP pushbuttolt.

Output N of the BSEQ block ts the current recipe ID number.

This output functions as a feedback signal for the first REM-
SET block. Tfte N+l output of the BSEQ block ls the current
phase number. Thls output functlons as a feedback signal for
the second REMSET bloek. The N+2 output ldentlfies the
nrn/hold status of the BSEQ block. If thts output ls one, the
BSEQ block ls running. If the output ls zero, the BSEQ block
ls ln hold rnode.

BatchSequence
l-E96-2008 ls FEBregs 148 - 7
ffi
I

I
 FunctionGode149- AnalogOutpuUSlave

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The analog output functlon code writes seven analog outputs

to €rn analog output module. TWo blocks of thls t5pe may be
linked together to uttllze all 14 channels on the analog output
module.

The analog output functlon block has elght outputs. The first
seven are the calculated output values ln percent. The eighth
output ts the status of the UO module.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Firstanalogoutputin percent
N+1 R Secondanalogoutputin percent
N+2 R Thirdanalogoutputin percent
N+3 R Fourthanalogoutputin percent
N+4 R Fifthanatogoutputin percent
N+5 R Sixthanalogoutputin percent
N+6 R Seventhanalogoutputin percent
N+7 R l/O modulestatus:
0 - good
1=bad

SPEC//F'CArrOntS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 l/O moduleaddress
S2 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof nextanalogouPut
S3 N 0 I 0or1 Q= trip controlmoduleon l/O moduleerror
1 = cootinueto operateon l/O moduleerror
S4 N 2 Note1 Blockaddressof outputN

AnalogOutpuUSlave
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 1 4 9- 1
Function Code 149

SPECI FICATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S5 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof outputN+l
S6 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof outputN+2
S7 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof ouput N+3
S8 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof ouput N+4
S9 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof ouput N+5
s10 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof outputN+6
sl1 N 2 I 0 , 1o r 2 Defaultstateof ouput N
s12 N 2 I 0 , 1o r 2 Defaultstateof outputN+l
s13 N 2 I 0 , 1o r 2 Defaultstateof outputN+2
s14 N 2 I 0 , 1o r 2 Defaultstateof outputN+3
sls N 2 0 , 1o r 2 Defaultstateof outputN+4
sl6 N 2 0,1or2 Defaultstateof outputN+5
s17 N 2 0 , 1o r 2 Defaultstateof outputN+6
sl8 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitzerofor outputN
s19 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitspanfor outputN+l
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitzerofor outputN+2
s21 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitspanfor outputN+3
s22 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitzerofor outputN+4
s23 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitspanfor outputN+5
s24 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitzerofor outputN+6
s25 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitspanfor outputN
s26 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitzerofor outputN+l
s27 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitspanfor outputN+2
s28 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitzerofor outputN+3
s29 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitspanfor outputN+4
s30 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitzerofor outputN+5
s31 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitspanfor outputN+6
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare:2046for |MMFCOS
9998for |MMFCOS/O4
and IMMFPOUOA}S

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specification Sl is the address of the analog output module.

S2 Specification 52 ts the block address of the next analog out-

put block. The first block in ttre list is the control module
block. The second block ls the I/O module.

s3 Specification S3 can be set to allow the module to contlnue to

operate if there is an analog output module problem.

Q = trip control module

I = continue to operate

AnalogOutpuVSlave
149-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode149

54 throughS10 Spectflcatlons 54 through SIO are the block addresses of the

outputs N through N+6.

S11throughS17 Spectficatlons S11 through Sf 7 define the default state of

outputs N through N+6.

Q = O.Opercent
I = 100.0 percent
2 = hold

When power ls supplled to the analog output module, the out-

puts are at r,elro percent. The default states defined by Sf f
through S17 are actlve after the multt-funetlon controller
completes tntflallzaflon ln execute mode. Infflallz.atlon ls com-
plete when ttre green LED on the I/O module ls olt. The out-
puts wtll now enter the configured default state when a loss of
the bus clock ls detected. The outputs are held in their cur-
rent state upon entry to corfigure mode.

S18 through S31 Specifications S18 through S31 defrne the low limit (EU zero)
and range (EU span) of outputs N through N+6.

<Output>- EU Zero
Odput percent = x 100.0
EU Span

If the EU span of an output ts set to zero, the output is con-

sidered unused.

APPLICATIOA'S

Figure 149- I shows two analog output blocks linked together

to uttllze all 14 channels on an analog output module.

Ana OutpuUSlave
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 4 9- 3
FunctionCode149

ANALOG
OUTPUTS
1 THROUGH7

Figure 749-7. Linlciry Analog Ort@ut Bloclcs

AnalogOutpuVSlave
149-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode150- HydraulicServoSlave

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This function code tnterfaces a hydraulic servo slave (HSS) to

a multi-function controller or multi-functlon processor.

The hydraullc seryo slave provtdes the necessary lnputs and

outputs to positton a hydraullc actuator.

The value of the linear variable differentlal transformer

(LVDT) dtfferentlal voltages determlned durfng the UO mod-
ule calibratlon cycle are stored permanently ln 58 and Sg
replaefng the hfflal values or prevlous edtbratlon values. On
HSS module or module restart, the callbratlon data from SB
and 59 ls downloaded from the module to the HSS module. If
necessarJr, new 58 and Sg vdues can be establlshed vla an
interface device such as a console.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R position
Percentactuator with quality
N+1 B LVDTat nullpoint:
0=]lO
| =!€S

N+2 B Actuatorpositioningstatus:
0 - good
1=bad
N+3 B ND or D/Astatus:
0 - good
1=bad
N+4 B LVDTprimarystatus:
Q = good
1=bad

N+5 B LVDTsecondarystatus:
Q= good
1=bad

HydraulicServoSlave
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 1 5 0- 1
FunctionCode150

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Brk TVpe Descrlptlon

N+6 B Output1 status:
g = good
1=bad
N+7 B Output2 status:
9 = good
1=bad
N+8 B l/O modulemode:
0 = oofindl
1 = E-STOPmanual
N+9 B Calibratestatus:
0 = in progress
1 = coffiplete
N+10 B UOmodulehardwarestatus:
0 - good
1=bad
N+l1 B l/O modulecommunication
and watchdogtimerstatus:
9 = good
1=bad

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Expanderbusaddressof l/O module
S2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof the percentpositiondemand
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of calibrate mode sElect:
1 = calibrate
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Bfock address of the calibration gahold select:
0 = hold
l =go
s5 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof the LVDTnullcheckmodeselect:
0=OO
1 =|OS
S6 N 6 I Note 1 Blockaddressof the calibrationstroketimeselection:
1.0= 30 secs
2.0 = 60 secs
3.0= 35 min
4.0 = 70 min
S7 N 6 Note 1 Blockaddressof the calibrationcyclescount(1.0to 8.0
cycles)
S8 Y -10.000 R Full LVDT differential voltage at 0% actuator position
S9 Y +10.000 R Full LVDTditferentialvoltageat 100o/o
actuatorposition
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Sparerealparameter
sl1 N 0 Note 1 Spare boolean block input
NOTE:
1. Maximurn
valuesare:2A4Gfor IMMFCOS
9998 for fMMFCOSIO and lMMFPOllOU}g

HydraulicServoSlave
150 - 2 15 FEB1995 f-E96-2008
 Function Code 150

EXPLANAT'ON

The posttton of the actuator ls measured uslng a llnear vari-

able dtfferentlal transformer (LrDT). The HSS module pro-
vtdes an adJustable AC frequency excltatlon slgnal for the
LIUDT and demodulates the two Lrr/DT outputs. The dtfference
between the LrDT outputs ls a measure of the aetuator posl-
tlon. The actuator ls postfloned by a servo valve whtch rnoves
hydraullc fluld lrrto and out of the actuator drlve cylIeder. The
HSS module compares the actuator posltlorl, from the L\IDT,
to the posltlon demand from the module and modulates the
current flow tn the servo valve colls to move the actuator to
the desired posltlon. The posttlonlng functton ls performed by
the analog controller on the HSS rnodule. Otlrer hydraulle
seryo slave functtons are performed by lts on-board mlcropro-
cessor. In the normal operatlng mode, ttte actuator ls posl-
tioned to match the posltton demand from the module.

For ma:dmum L\IDT ltneartty, the LVDT null potnt should

occur at the actuators mid-travel positiolt. To check and
adJust the Lrr/DT null polnt, the callbrate and null check
modes are selected. When the go mode ls selected, the actua-
tor rzrmps to and holds at tJre LVDT null polnrt (LTVDTsecond-
arles have equal voltages). Whlle the actuator ls held at the
Lrr/DT null point, the mechantcal zero on the LrDT can be
adJusted until the actuator ls at its mld-travel posittol:,. After
L\IDT zerolng, turn the null check mode off, select ,wld and
proceed wttJ: callbratlolt.

In the callbrate mode, the actuator ls held at tts last posltlon

until the go mode ls selected. When ln the cdibrate go mode,
the actuator moves to the f 0O percent posltlon at ttre seleeted
stroke tJme <56>. The HSS module drives the actuator to the
lOO percent end of travel stop as vertfled by no further posl-
tion movement and saturated servo valve coll current. The
LVDT differential voltage ls recorded tn (Sg) whtle the actua-
tor ls held agalnst the f OOpercent end of travel stop.

After recording the lOO percent reading, the actuator moves at

the selected stroke time to the ?Ero percent actuator poslttolt.
The HSS module drtves the actuator to ttre zera percent end of
travel stop as verlfied by no further positlon movement and
saturated senro valve coll current. The LrtDT dtfferenttal volt-
age ls recorded ln 58 whtle the actuator ls held 4galnst the
?r:ro percent end of travel stop. After recordlng the ?rlro per-
cent readlng, the actuator moves at the selected stroke ttme to
the posttlon demand from the module. If the number of call-
bratlon cycles (SZ) to be performed ls greater than one, the
lOO percent to ?rcropercent cycle wtll be repeated the speclfled
number of tlmes before rampIrg to the posltton demand <S2>.

HydraulicServoSlave
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 150- 3
 FunctionCode150

The HSS module provldes a number of status outputs. The

actuator positioning status will be bad lf the measured actua-
tor posltlon deviates beyond an establtshed deadband from
the position set point establtshed ln the HSS module. For
stean turbine valve control appltcatlons, thts bad status ts
called a ua,lae contingencg. The A/D or D/A status ts bad
when the A/D readtng of the voltage reference ts outstde spec-
ifications or the D/t output as read by the A/D ts outstde
specifications.

The L\ZDT primary status ls bad tf both LrDT secondartes

read approximately zero volts. LVDT secondary status ls bad
if one seeondary reads appro:dmately zero volts, whlle the
otlrer is reading a r:rotrzero value.

NOTE:Thesealarrnsare only enabledwhenthe actuatorposition

statusis bad. For moreinformation,referto the IMHSSD?
Hydrau-
Iic SeruoSlaveproductinstruction.

The output one or two status is bad lf lts servo valve cotl volt-
age indicates the coil ls open or shorted. Ttre HSS module can
continue to control the actuator even lf one coll ls open or
shorted.

The current output to the servo valve colls ls set to zero tf the
A/D or D/A status is bad, or the l/O module hardware watch-
dog timer times out. The output ls also set to zero unfll HSS
module restart procedure is eomplete. The seryo valve wtll
hold the actuator approximately tn place if the coll current ls
zero. The servo valve wlll begtn to drtft based on tts mechanl-
cal btasing when the coll ls zero.

If the watchdog timer (time-out conditton) determlnes that

communication urith the module ls lost, the HSS module
reverts to and indicates the E-STOP (executed stop) manual
mode. In the E-STOP manual mode, the actuator posttlon c€rn
be changed by activating the module's ralse and lower contact
inputs. When communlcations are re-establtshed wtth the
module, the HSS module will not transfer to posttton control
from the module until tJre module's posttlon demand equals
the present actuator positioll. Thts is to prevent ag undesired
actuator position change.

The HSS module is t5pically used tn the posttlontng of ste€rm

turbine, ttrrottle and control valves, gas turblne fuel valves,
tnlet guide vanes and nor,zle angle.

Hydraulic
SeruoSlave
1 5 0- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode151- TextSelector

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Ftrnctlon code 151 sends message numbers and color

(selected by loglc) to a console. The rnessage numbers corre-
spond to teKt strlngs conftgured tn the console message llst.
Message number and color reporttng occur uslng INF'I 90
exceptlon reporttng technlques.

The text selector can operate ln one of two modes. The ffrst
mode uses the message number lnput, color tnput and bltnk
lnput to select ttre message nunber and attrtbutes. The second
mode uses the value of a control status lnput to select one of
three predefirred message nurrrbers and attributes. Control sta-
tus reflects the current operaflng state of a devtce as good (0.0),
bad (1.0) or walti4g (2.O). The text selector block references a
control status output contalned tn functlon codes I23, L25, 129
and 136. Maldng thts reference automadcally selects the second
mode of operatlon. A set of spectflcatlons that deflne the mes-
sage number, color and bllnk are assoclated wtth each state of
tlle device control status. The message number, color and bllnk
are then set accordlng to the curent status of the devlce.
Table 151-1 ltsts the console color codes for an OIS console.

NOTE:In the consoletag databasethe text selectortag number

mustbe definedas type real.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Messagenumber

SPECIFICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deecrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof messagenumber
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof colorselect

Text Selector
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 5 1- 1
FunctionCode151

SPECI FI CATI ONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of blink select:
0 = solid
1 = blink
S4 N 2 I Note 1 Block address of control status:
0.0 = gOOd
1.0 = bad
2.O = wait
S5 N 0.000 R 0 - 65535.000 Goodcontrolstatusmessage
S6 N 0.000 R 0 - 127.000 Goodcontrolstatuscolor
S7 N 0 I 0or1 Goodcontrolstiatusblink
S8 N 0.000 R 0 - 65535.000 Bad controlstratusmessage
S9 N 1.000 R 0 - 127.000 Badcontrolstatuscolor
s10 N 1 0or1 Badcontrolstiatusblink
sl1 N 0.000 R 0 - 65535.000 Waitcontrolstatusmessage
sl2 N 3.000 R 0 - 127.000 Waitcontrolstiatuscolor
sl3 N 0 0or1 Waitcontrolstatusblink
s14 N 0 Full Spareintegerparameter
sl5 N 0.000 R Full Sparerealparameter
s16 Y 0.000 R Full Sparerealparameter
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:2046for IMMFCOS
9998for |MMFC03/04
and IMMFPOUOAO}

Table 757-7. Console Color Cd,es

Gode Color Gode Color Code Color
0.0 Black 6.0 Magenta 12.0 Blue-Magentia
1.0 White 7.0 Yellow 13.0 Magenta-Red
2.0 Red 8.0 Orange 14.0 DarkGray
3.0 Green 9.0 Yellow-Green 15.0 Ught Gray
4.O Blue 10.0 Green-Cyan
5.0 Cyan 11.0 Cyan-Blue
NOTE: The console may have color display limitations. Refer to the console instruction for pos-
sible display colors.

Specifications

s4 Determines if the control status is good, bad or wait. If good,

message (S5), color (56) and blink (SZ1are exception reported.
If bad, message (S8), eolor (S9) and blink (SlO) are excepuon
reported. If wait, message (Sl l), color (Sl2) and btfnk (S13)
are exception reported. If the control status input (S4) ts not
defined, 55 through Sl3 are tgnored and Sl through SB spec-
iry the message number, color and blink to be excepuon
reported.

NOTE:When implementing functioncode 151 for BatchgO use,

51, 52 and S3 must remainat defaultvalues.All other specifica-
tionsare ignored.

TextSelector
1 5 1- 2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode152- ModelParameterEstimator

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The model parameter estlmator functlon block uses a recur-

slve least-squares algorlthm to ldentlff a mathematlcal model
of a process. Thts functlon block calculates the parameters
for a linear, first-order dynamlc model wtth deadttme of the
speclflc form.

Yt = aYt_, + bur_k* c

where:

Yt Vdue of the process varlable at tlme f.

Y,, Value of the process vartable at one sample
time before tlme f.
Ut* = Value of the control output one process dead-
ttme (e:cpressed as k sample tlme lncrements)
before t
a , b , c = Model parameters.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Ilescrlptlon

N R Modelparametera
N+1 R ModelparameterD
N+2 R Modelparameterc
N+3 R Residualbetweenactualand calculatedprocessvariabledata
N+4 B Qualityof modelparameterestimates:
Q= psr"meterestimatorlockedon
1 = Dowparameterestimationin progress

ModelParameterEstimator
t-E96-200B 15FEB1995 152 - 1
FunctionCode 152

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof controlfedprocessvariable
s2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof cpntroloutput
S3 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof resettrigger(resetson a 0 to I transition)
s42 ys 0.250 R -
0.25 9.20E1g Sampletime (secs)
s52'4 ya 1.000 R 0.25- 9.20Elg Processdeadtirne(secs)
Secondsmustbe < 54 x 40
S6 y3 0.000 R -
0.00 9.20Elg Expectednoiselevelin processvariable(peak-to-peak)
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Sparereal parameter
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Sparebooleaninput
NOTES:
1. Maximumvaluesar6: 254for IMCOMO4 andCLC02/O4
1023for SLC01/21
2O46for IMMFC05
9998lor 1MMFC03il04 and lMMFPolOzyo3
2. The rehtionshlpbetwaen54 and S5 mustbe valid for prop€.operation.lf addingthis blockwlth an hfeontial smlthcontroller(]SC)
(functioncode I 60) the sampletime 94 musl bo gEater than th6 ISCdeadtime(functioncode I 60. 58) dMded by 4().
3. The inltlalizationtoutin€in the ISC parameterconve.tor(tu]rctioncode 153)aubmadcallyspe<tfies54, SSand 56.
4. Specification55 is usedonlywhenthe modalparamelereslimatorb not usadwithfh6 |sC paramoteraonveiler(fundloncode I 53).

EXPLANATION

The model parameter esfimator conUnuously monltors the

value of the controlled process variable and the control out-
put. The value of the model parameters are calculated when-
ever the process behavlor deviates slgntflcantly frorn the
established parameters. The model parameter esflmator out-
puts the vdue of the calculated process model pzrrameters,
the statistical residual between the actual data and the calcu-
lated model, and the status of the parameter estlmator.

The model parameter estlmator contains a set of heuristlc

rrles to eliminate the practical difficulttes of estimatlon the-
ory. These rrles prevent long-term drift of the model parame-
ter estlmates during consistent proeess performance, and
inappropriate reaction of tJ:e model parameter estlmator to
external process disturbances.

Specifications

s1 Specification 51 ts the block address of the process variable.

This identifies the controlled process vartable used by the
model parameter estimator.

S2 Specification 52 is the block address of the control output.

This identifies the controller output used by the model
parameter estimator.

s3 Specification 53 is the block address of the reset trlgger.

When this tri$ger changes from zero to one, the model pararrr-
eter estimator is irititialized. The reset trtgger also updates the

ModelParameterEstimator
152-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 152

ISC parameter converter (functlon code 153) to the default i

settings (process galn and process lag) stored ln I\nmAIvI of
the inferential smtth controller (functlon eode 160). These set-
:
tings can be updated manually by tuning tl:e corresponding
ISC speclflcatlons.

NOTE:The estimatordoes not stopwhenthe loopis in rnanualor :

the processis shut down.Resettriggermust be used on start-up
of process.

s4 Speclllcatlon 54 ls the sample tlme. This provldes tlme scal-

Xrg for the estlmatlon algortthm. To assure proper operatlon
'q
of the model pararneter estJmator, the sample tlme should be
selected so that it ls between 2O percent and 50 percent of the .
;
process lag tlme. Because of the strong dependency of the cd-
culated model coefflctents on the selected sample time, when
the sample time ls changed more than ten percent or in
excess of 0.5 seconds, the model coefficients a,re automati- '
cally hffiallzed.

S5 Specification 55 ls the proeess deadtlme. Thts defines the

deadttme or transport delay exhibited by the process. Under-
estlmatlon of deadttme adversely affects parameter estima-
uon rnore severely than overestlmatlon. When the model
parameter estimator is linked with an ISC Parameter con-
verter (function code f 53), the process deadtime is automati-
cally updated by the ISC Parameter converter.

S6 Specification SO is the expected process noise level. The

model parameter estlmator uses SO in tts tdentification of
process upsets. This value lndlcates the maximum devtation
from set polnt that can be attrtbuted to noise ln the process.
The model parameter estlmator treats devlattons greater than
this value as process upsets.

APPLICATIOA'S

The speciallzed functlon blocks required for self-tuning of the

inferentid smith controller (functton code 160) are the model
parameter estimator (functton code 152) and the ISC Parame-
ter converter (function code 153). The use of €rn adaptive
parameter scheduler (function code 154) ts optional.

The model parameter estlmator conflguration is shown irn the

applications sectlon of functlon codes 153 and 154. The ISC
parameter converter (functlon code 153) applteatlon is a self-
tuning configuration. The adaptive parameter scheduler
(function code 154) application is advanced self-tuning con-
figuration with deadtime scheduling and adaptive gain and
lag scheduling.

For more application informatlon on self-tuntng control, refer

to tlre *Uf:Tuning @ntrot appllcatton guide.

ModelParameterEstimator
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 152 - 3
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode153- ISCParameterGonverter

GENERALDESCRIPTION

rsc
E
The ISC parameter converter functlon block calculates optl-
rsc mal tunlng parameters for ttre assoclated lnferentlal smlth
PDT
H
controller fiSC controller, functlon code 160) uslrg the output
til/A of the model parameter estlmator (functton code 1521. The
tuntng values are the process galrr, process deadtlme and
process lag tlrle. The outputs descrlbe process dynamlcs at
one operatlng polnt.

Through a dtrect llnk wlth the ISC controller, the tuntng

parameters may be dtrectly adapted. However, they wfll only
be adapted when:

o The approprtate adapt optlon ls selected ln S9.

qd,

. The quality output of tlre assoclated model parameter estl-

mator ls good (zero).

The ISC pararneter converter also supervlses an automated

hfilallzatlon routtne for establbhfng Xrfflal esttmates for the
associated ISC and model parameter estlmator. After comple-
tlon of lnttiallzatlon, the converter tunes:

. The ISC, gatn and lag tlme.

. The ISC tuntng tlme constant.

. The mtnlmum and mardmum process gatn (S5 and SG).

o The mfnimum and ma:dmum process lag tlme (S7 and S8).

o The sample ttme and expected nolse level for the model
parameter estJmator.

The ISC parameter converter also updates the estlmated pro-

cess deadttme for the assoclated ISC controller and model
parameter estlmator whenever tnput Sg ls connected to a
function block other than number flve, and the tnftfal|zation
trtg$er equals zero. The hfflahzatlon value of deadtlme will be
used as long as the lnlttallzatlon trlsger equals one. If Sg ls
set to five then, the ISC parameter converter updates the
model parameter estlmator wtth ttre value used by the ISC
controller.

ISC ParameterConverter
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 153- 1
FunctionCode153

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Ilescrlptlon

N R Estimatedprocessgain
N+1 R Estirnatedprocesstimeconstant
N+2 R Adjustedprocessdeadtirne
N+3 R Estimatedprocessoperatingpoint
N+4 R Initializationoutput:
0 = initialization complete, not in progress (normat)
1 = initialization failed or aborted
2 = initialization in progress
N+5 B Pulseoutputfrom 0 to 1 and after 5 cycles,backto 0, initiated
aftercompletionof the automatedinitializationroutine.

SPECIFICATIO^'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deecrlptlon

S1 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof associatedmodelparamsterestimator
S2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof associatedISCcontroller
S3 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressfor deadtime
S4 N 0 Note1 Block address of hold signal
S5 y2 -9.2Elg R Full Minimum allowablevalue for process gain
S6 yz 9.2E18 R Full Maximumallowablevaluefor processgain
S7 yz 0.000 R - g
0.0 9.2El Minimumallowablevaluefor processlag timo
S8 y2 9.2E18 R 0.0- 9.2Elg Maximumallowablevaluefor processlag time
S9 N 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Adaptoption:
0 = Doadapt
1 = adapt processgain only
2 = adaptlag time only
3 = adapt bothprocessgain and lag time
sl0 Y 0 B 0or1 Initialization
trigger(on 0 to 1 transition)
s11 Y 5.000 R Full Maximumcontroloutputchangefor initialization
s12 Y 0.000 R Full Spare real parameter
s13 N 0 I Note 1 Spare boolean input
NOTES:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 2* tor CLC02/04and IMCOMO4
1023for SLC01/21
2046for IMMFCOS
9998for |MMFCO3/O4 and tMMFp0l.rcztog
2. Valueautomatically
specifiedby the initialization
routine.

ISCParameter
Converter
1 5 3- 2 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode153

EXPLANATION

The ISC parameter converter functton block calculates optlmal

tunhg parameters for the assoclated lnferentlal smtth control-
ler ustng the outputs of the model parameter estlmator. Dlrect
links between the functlon blocks slmphff tmplementatlon.

The model parameter esttmator generates the rnlue for tlle pro-
cess gatn and process lag tlme. The outputs descrlbe process
dynamtcs at one operatlng poilrt. Thls tnfonrraflon dtrectly colr-
verts to opttmal hmlng parameters for the lnferentl,al smlth eolt-
troller at thts operatlng potnt uslng slmple algebralc equatlons.

The tuntng parameters for ttre ISC controller (process galn

and lag tfme) are automattcally adJusted by the ISC parame-
ter converter as the model paftlmeter estlmator changes lts
estimates. However, the controller tunfng tlme constant (Sf 0)
for tJ:e ISC controller ls not automatlcally adJusted; thts tun-
Xrg ttme constant provldes a mechanlsm for establtshlng the
deslred controller performance.

The ISC parameter converter also supenrlses an automated

iniflallz.atlon routlne for the self-tunIrg lnferenttal smttlt eon-
troller. When the eontrol statlon ls set to atrtomatlc mode
after the Xriflalizaflon trtlger ls changed from zero to one, the
ISC parameter converter exerclses tlre control output by a
serles of two step changes (ln opposite dtrectlons) of a size
previously establtshed (bplcally t5 percent), artd monitors
the reaction of the controlled process varlable to estlmate the
process deadtime, galn and lag tlme. The automated filUal-
izatton routlne ls tmmedlately aborted lf the control statlon
for the ISC controller ls set to manual mode.

After enough data has been collected to establtsh statlstlcally

valtd estlmates, the XrfflaUzaflon routlne ls automatlcally ter-
mlnated and the control statlon for the ISC controller ls set
automattcally to rnanual mode.

The process deadtlme estJmated from the hfflatlzatlon rou-

tine ts used by the model parameter estlmator to determlne
on-ltre values of the process galn and lag tlme whenever S3
specifies block address flve. If the process deadttme ls exter-
nally calculated as a functlon of some process varlable, then
thts value ls connected to S3 and ls used by the model param-
eter estlmator and ISC controller.

The estlmated values of process deadtlme, gafn and lag ttme

from the initidizatlon routtne are used by the ISC parameter
converter to automattcdly establlsh the lrrfild values of a
number of other speclflcatlons:

o Minimum process gatn (S5) ls set to 5O percent of the hfflal

process galn obsenred durtng the tnltlaltzatlon routl,ne.

ISC ParameterConverter
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 153 - 3
 FunctionCode153

Maximum process gain (SO)ls set to 2OO percent of the lnl-

Ual process gain observed durtng the tnlttaltzatton routlne.

Minimum process lag tlme (SZ1 ls set to 5O percent of the

iniflal process lag tlme observed durlng ttre tnlttallzatton
routine.

Ma:dmum process lag tlrne (S8) ls set to 2OO percent of the

hfflal process lag tlme obsenred durlng the lnlttallzatton
routirte.

Controller time constant for the lnferenttal smtth control-

ler (function code 160, SIO) ls set to lOO percent of the
iniilal process lag tlme observed durtng the tnlfla[zaflon
routine.

o Sample time for the model parameter estlmator (funetton

code 152, 54) ts set to 20 percent of ttre process lag tlme
observed during the fnfHahzatfon rouflne.

o E:pected noise level for the model parameter estlmator

(function code L52, SO) ls set based on the pealc to peatr
value of the nolse on ttre controlled process vartable
observed during the intttallzatton routlne for constant
valve position.

The iniflalwed specificatlons c€rn be manually changed after

the inifiali-ation routine ls complete. Hourever, they should be
valid for most applicatlons.

Upon completion or fatlure of the automated tnttlaltzatfon rou-

tlrte, the ISC parameter converter automatlcally returns the
control station for the ISC controller to manual mode, and
sets the value of the appropriate controller speelficaflons. At
tttis point, the iniilal setttngs can be monttored and valldated
before they are actually used by the controller. The hfualtza-
tion trigger must be manually set to zero for norrnal operaflon.

Specifications

s1 (Block address o/assoeiated nrodel parameter estimqbr)

Specification Sl establishes the link between the ISC parame-
ter converter and the assoclated model parameter estlmator.
The ISC pararneter converter obtalns the estlmated value of
the process model parameters and the status of the estlmates
through this link. The process deadttme for the model param-
eter estimator is updated through thrs llnk.

S2 (Bloek address of assoeiated inferential smith controller)

Specification 52 links the ISC parameter converter wlth the
assoctated ISC controller. Updatfng of the ISC controller tun-
ing parameters and the process deadttme occur through thls
link.

ISCParameter
Converter
1 5 3- 4 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 153

s3 (Block address for pnocess dr;a,dtime) Speclllcatlon Sg :

locates the value of the deadttme the ISC controller and model
parameter estlmator llse. If the deadtlme ls not predleted as a
functlon of a process varlable, use the default address to per- '
mtt the process deadtlrre settlng of tJle ISC controller to be
used by the ISC parameter converter.

s4 (Bloak e,ddte,,ss of ,told signat/. Speclflcatlon 54 tdentlfles a

hold swttch for the ISC parameter converter. If the vdue of
thts swttch ts set to one, parameter converslon contlnues but i
the tuntng parameters of the ISC controller are not automati-
cally updated. New values for the calculated tunlng pariame-
ters are avallable at tlre block outputs whenever the status of
tlre model parameter estlmator lndteates parafiEter estitnstor ,
locked orL When ttre estlmator status tndtcates rreu) pclrafiaelter
estimntlon in prqress, the tuned ISC parameter will be dts-
played and the operator can m€rnually tune the ISC controller.
'
If tlle value of the swltch ls set to zero, the ISC parameter colt-
verter automatlcally tunes the parameter of the ISC spectffed
by the adapt optlon. The operator can manually tune the ISC
controller when the status from tlle rnodel parameter estlma- :
tor tndlcates n€u, parameter esttnntlon tn progress.

35 through SB (Minimum o;nd maximum tuning puro;fiteterc) Spectflco,-

tions 55 through 58 are requlred for commlsstonlng of the self-
tuning ISC controller and to lncrease the fault tolerance of ISC
controller operatlon. Mhfmum and ma;dmum values are pre-
set by the automated llirfflaltzaflon routlne, but can be adJusted
:
to match the process. hr the enent that the ISC parameter con-
verter generates values for the funtng parameters outslde of
the prevtously spectfled constraln'ts, ttre hrnfng parameters for
the controller are ltmlted to the constr:alned values.

s9 (Adapt option) Speclflcatlon 59 permtts selectlon of self-tun-

irlg for either or both controller tuntng parameters. If ustng
the adaptlve parameter scheduler (functlon code f54), the
scheduled parameters should not be selected for self-tuntng
with ttris speclflcatlon.

sl0 (Initiqlization triggerl Speclllcatton SIO provtdes the trigger

for the automated lnltlaltzatton rouflne. When the trtgger
changes from zero to one and the ISC controller ls ilr manual
mode, the Irfflallzatlon routtne ls actlvated. As a safeguard,
the station assoclated wtth the ISC controller must then be
placed ln automatlc mode for hfflallzatlon to proceed. The
routlne is automatlcdly termlnated when adequate data has
been generated for process ldentlftcatlon. As long as the lnl-
tialtzation trilger equals one, the process deadttme wtll be
that estlmated by the lnlttallzatlon routlne. Thls value can be
ehanged manually by tunlng the ISC controller. The model
parameter esttmator ls automatlcdly updated to tltls value.
When tl:e liltfa[zatlon trlgger ls set equal to zero, <S3> (block
address for process deadttme) ls utlllzed for process deadttme
lf Sg does not equal flve.

ISC ParameterConverter
l-Eg6-200B rs FEBlees 153 - 5
FunctionCode153

sl1 (Iulox;imum eontrol outytut ch;o;n'ge.for initia,lizetion) Spec-

ification S11 establlshes the ma:dmum change from the man-
ually set valve posltlon to be permltted durtng the automated
initialwatlon routlne. Elther a posltive or negatlve step change
c€rn be specffIed.

APPLICATIO'VS

The specialtzed functlon blocks requlred for self-tunfng of the

lnferential smith controller are the model parameter estima-
tor (function code L52), ISC parameter converter (functton
code 153) and the smith predictor (functton code 160).

Figure 153- f shows a baslc self-tuning conflguratlon. For

more application informatlon on self-tuning control, reference
the *V-Tuning ContrcI appllcation guide.

OFF-GAS VALVE

OUTLET
TEMPERATURE

PARAMETER PARAMETER
ESTIi'IATOR CO}.|vERTER

CONVERTER
HOLD SWITCH

Fignre 153-1. Ba.siceLJ-nrnW @nftgurafion

ISC ParameterConverter
1 5 3- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode154- AdaptiveParameterScheduler

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Ttre adaptlve parameter scheduler functlon allows process

characterlstlcs such as a measured or calculated lndex varl-
able to be used to adJust the tuntng parameters for the asso-
clated lnferenttal smlttr controller 0SC functlon code 160).
Thts feature opttmlzes controller perfonnance for predlctable
changes ln proeess operatlon and prevents perlods of poten-
ttally unacceptable control whlle the ISC controller ls betng
retuned by the model parameter esttmator (functlon eode
L52) vla the ISC parameter converter (functlon code 153).

The adaptlve parameter scheduler can automattcally estab-

Itsh the relattonshlp between an ISC tuntng parameter and a
measured or calculated lndex varlable uslng llnear regres-
slon. The adaptive parameter scheduler uses ttrts relatlonshtp
to automattcally adJust the speclfled ISC tunlng parameter
based on the value of the speclfled lndex varlable.

Alternatlvely, thls functlon curn automattcally determlne the

correctlon btas requtred for a pre-establtshed gafn schedule.
Thts perrntts a nonllrear relatlonshtp between the ISC tunftrg
parameter and the fiedex varlable, wfth automatlc correction
of the relattonshtp for deslgn lnaceuracles and changes ln
process behavlor.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk TVpe Deecrlptlon

N R Scheduledtuningparameter
N+1 R CoefficientA of conectionequation
N+2 R CoefficientB of conectionequation

AdaptiveParameterScheduler
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 154 - 1
FunctionCode154

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of index variable
S2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof fixedgainschedule
S3 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof scheduledparameter
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof resettrigger
S5 N 5 I Note 1 Addressblockcontainingspecificationto be adapted
S6 N 0 I 0-255 Specification to be adapted
S7 N 0.000 R Full Minimumirdex value
S8 N 0.000 R Full Maximumindexvalue
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Sparereal parameter
s10 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof coefficientupdatehold:
0 = updateA and B
1 = hold updatesof A and B
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254tor CLC0U04and |MCOM04
1023for SLC01/21
2A46for |MMFCOS
9998for IMMFCOS/O4
and lMMFP0llOUOg

EXPLANATION

When a process controlled by an tnferenflal smtttr controller

(function code f6O) shtfts from one operaflrg potnt to
anotJrer, the inferential smtth eontroller (ISC) ts automattcally
retuned to malntain the deslred controller performance at the
new operatlng point. Howerrer, during self-tuntng, flre ISC
controller performance can be temporartly less than deslr-
able. In applicatJons where the speetffc value of an ISC tuntng
parameter (process galn or lag ttme) ts related to some pro-
cess variable or discrete event (an tnde:<nartable), ttrese pert-
ods of suboptimum controller performance durfng self-hrntng
can be elimtreated by adapflve schedultng of the tunfng
parameter.

Ttre adaptive parameter scheduler utilizes a least-squares

technique to automatically corelate a preselected tndex vart-
able with one controller tuntng parameter output by the ISC
parameter converter. Once an effective llnear conelaflon has
been established, the adaptive parameter scheduler adJusts
the tuning parameter for tJ:e ISC controller as a function of
thls lndex variable. If more than one tunfng parameter must
be scheduled, more than one adapflve para:neter scheduler
must be used.

The adaptive parameter sctreduler uflllzes a btn data stnrc-

ture for regresslon of the llnear relaflonshtp between the
tndex variable and the correction blas. The range of the tndex
value is divided tnto ten blns, and when a valtd data set
becomes avallable, tt goes tnto the btn correspondtng to ftre
value of the lndex variable for the data set. Only one data

AdaptiveParameterScheduler
154-2 15FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 Function Code 154

polnt ls stored ln each bln. As ne\r data becomes avallable for

a bln, t{re old data ls replaced and the regresslon ls recalcu-
lated. To factlttate commlsslonlng of ttre adaptlve parameter
scheduler when there ls only one data set, a ltne passlng
through the data potnt wtth zero slope ls assumed.

Scheduledtuningparameter= Outputfrom fixedgain schedule<52> +

correctionbias

Correctionbias= lv + B

where:

x = Value of the lndqr varlable <S1>.

The A and B coefftclents are updated by the regresslon algo-

rltirm.

(Block a,ddness of index uqrilq,btel Speclflcatlon Sl tdentJfies

the tndex vartable used by the adaptlve parameter scheduler.

(Block arddress of ftxed. gain *hedule) Speclflcatlon 52

tdenttfles the output of the assoclated ftxed gatn schedule. If
not uslng a pre-establlshed gafn schedule, thls speclflcatlon
should be set to block address flve (default value), whlch pro-
vides a constant value of zeto.

S3 (Bloek cddress of *heduled plcrolmetrlr) Spectflcatlon Sg

identifles the estimated value of the scheduled tuntng param-
eter. Thts value determtnes the relatlonshlp between tJre tun-
ing parameter and index varlable. The tnstantaneous
correctlon blas (S2-S3) ls used wfth the lndex varlabte (SU as
a data polnt set for regresslon determlnatlon of A and B.

s4 (Blrck qddress of reset trigger) Speclflcatlon 54 ldentllies

an external trigger used to reset the regresslon data. When
the trigger changes from zero to one, all hlstortc data used for
determining the correlation equation ts erased and the cor-
rection bias is set to zeto.

S5 (Addrss of block contoiining parameter to be odepted)

Speclficatlon 55 ldenttfles the block address for tJle parame-
ter adJusted by the adaptlve parameter scheduler.

S6 (specification to fu adapted) Speclflcatlon 56 tdentilles

whtch spectflcatlon of the tdentlfted block ts adJusted by the
adapttve parameter scheduler.

AdaptiveParameterScheduler
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 154 - 3
FunctionCode154

57 and 38 (Minimum o;nd maximum aalues.for the futdex aatf;qble)

Spectflcatlons SZ and 58 deflne the allowable range for the
lndex varlable.

sl0 (Block address of coelfrcient updarc fleg) Spectflcaflon

SlO allows suspension of the recalculatlon of the A and B
coefflclents. The correctlon btas wtll sttll be computed and the
output updated. Also, the parameter tn ttre target block and
specification continue to update.

APPLICATIO,IVS

The specialwed function blocks requlred for self-tunIrg of the

inferential smith controller are the model parameter estlma-
tor (funcilon code L52), ISC parameter eonverter (funcUon
code 153), and the smtth predtetor (functton code f6O). Ttle
use of the adaptive parameter scheduler (functton code f 54)
is opttonal.

Figure f 54- I shows an advanced self-tunfng conflguratton

with deadtime scheduhng and adaptlve galn/l4g schedullng.
For more application lnformatlon on self-tunlng control, ref-
erence the *lf-:tuning @ntro! app[caflon gulde.

AdaptiveParameterScheduler
154-4 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 154

PROOUCT
FLOW RATE

Ftgure 154-1. Aduotrced fuV-Tur'lurgCorlfigwation rurithtuadtune etedu@

and.Adaptioe Cainl W *heful@

AdaptiveParameterScheduler
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 5 4- 5
ffi
o

?
 Function Code 155r Regression

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The regresslon block correlates up to four tndependent varl-

ables to a stngle dependent vartable. Data c€rn be collected on
a ttrne or trtgger basls, and buffered elther sequentlally or ln
blns. The slze of the data buffer ls conflgurable.

A goodne$s of frt ls speclfied,. Thts output dtsables tlle "

updatfng of parameter estlmates when a mlsmatch between ;
the colleeted data and the estlmated curye ls beyond the sPec-
tfled goodness oj.ftt

A reset lnput provtdes the abtllty to suspend the start data ,

collectlon when flagged.

Calculatlon and edtt are the two operattng modes. In both

modes, the flrst four outputs are dedlcated to the computed
coefflclents. The rematnlng outputs are dependent on the
mode. TIl,e calculatlon mode outputs lnformatlon about the
current calculatton. The edtt mode tdenttfles the tnputs to the
calculatlon and allows the operator to change the quality of a
row of data tn the regresslon matrlx.

UTILIZATlON

OUTPUTS

Descrlptlon
Btk Type
Calculate llode Edlt Mode
N R Parameter1 ParametEr1
N+1 R Parameter2 Parameter2
N+2 R Parameter3 Parameter3
N+3 R Parameter4 Parameter4
N+4 R Goodnessof fit Dependentvariable,(y)
N+5 R Maximummodelmismatch Firstindependent variable,x1
N+6 R Rowno.producingmaximum Second independent variable, x2
modelmismatch

Regression
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 155- 1
FunctionCode155

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Descrlptlon
Btk Type
Calculatellode Edlt ilode
N+7 R No. of rowswith goodquality Third independentvariable,xe
N+8 R Timeof last computationin Fourthindependentvariable,xa
mmddhhformat
N+9 B Stateof outputs: Qualityof datrapoint:
0 = cotTlputed 0 = bad,excludEdfrom computation
1 = default | = good,inc'ludedin computiation

SPECIFICATIO^IS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of dependent variable
s2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first independent variable
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondindependent variable
S4 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof thirdindependent variable
S5 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthindependent variable
S6 N 1 1-4 Numberof independent variablesto use in calculation
s7 N 5 I 5-32 Numberof setsof datato buffer
S8 N 5 I 5-32 Minimumnumberof goodsetsof datarequiredfor calculation
S9 N 1 B Full Triggeror time modeflag:
0 = trigger
1 = time
s10 N 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2Elg TimeintervalbetwEencalculations(minutes)
sl1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof extemaltrigger
sl2 N 0 B Full Datastoragemodeflag:
0 = SeQuential
1 = bins
sl3 N 100.000 R Full Highrangeof firstindependent variablefor bin storage
sl4 N 0.000 R Full Low rangeof firstindependent variabletor bin storage
sl5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof edit modeswitch:
0 = calculate
1 = edit
s16 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof set to edit value
sl7 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof set qualitytoggleflag:
1 = togglequality
sl8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof resetflag:
1 = I€SBI
sl9 Y 0.000 R Full Initialdefaultfor first parameter
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Initialdefaultfor secondparamEter
s21 Y 0.000 R Full Initialdefaultfor thirdparameter
s22 Y 0.000 R Full Initialdefaultfor fourthparameter
s23 Y 1.000 R 0.000- 1.000 Desired goodness of fit
s24 N 0.000 R Full Defaultupdate
s25 N 0.000 R Full Fullspare
s26 N 0.000 R Full Fullspare
s27 N 0.000 R Full Fullspare
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:2040for NMFcolloz,lMMFcOs
andcBc01
9998 for fMMFC0S/O4and IMMFPOUOAO3

Regression
1 5 5- 2 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 155

EXPLANATION

The regresslon block has two modes of operatlon. Flrst ls cal-

culatton of parameter estlmates, and second ls edltIrg of data
contalned fn the data table. Speclflcatlon S15 selects the
mode of operatlon (the edlt mode surttch). Setttng Sf 5 to zero
selects the calculatlon mode and one selects the edlt mode.

In the calculatton mode, the regresslon block stores the mea-

surements xr, xz, xs, xa fitrdependent vartable) and y (depen-
dent varlable) tn a data table. The matrlx Xand ttre vector Y
represent thts data table as shourn belour. Each rour of the
matrlx and tlle correspondhg element fir Y contaln data from
one sampltng perlod.

X=

where:

a n = The values of parameter n where r?= I to 4

X = Matrix of lnput values for tndependent varlables.
Each column contalns the group of samples for
one of the four lndependent varlables; xtu = values
for lndependent varlable x,, etc.
Y = Matrlx of values for the dependent varlable. The
number of rours ls the number of samPles taken.

The regresslon dgorlthm solves the equatton Xa=Y. If the

number of samples (rows ln Xl equals the number of parame-
ters to flnd (columns ln X), creatlng a square matrlx, the solu-
tlon ls a--X'tY. However, the matrlx Xts not always lnvertable.
If the rows of X are not untque, the matrlx ts stngular and the
inverse does not e:dst. The lnternal loglc of the regresslon
block prevents entry of data that creates a stn$rlar matrDc.

When collecfing live data, there ls always uncertalnty tn the

values collected, resulttng from the lnfluence of uncontrolla-
ble effects in the surroundlng enrrlronment. To counteract
this influence, more data polnts are collected to lncrease con-
fldence ln the model parameters. When thts ls done, the
matri:r X ts not square. ThJ,s leaves more equatlons thart
unknown purrameters to spectS, artd tJre slmple algebralc
solution explalned above ls not posslble.

Rearanglng the equatlon Xa=Y glves X(a-y)=r where rls the

vector of reslduals. Generally, any a selected leaves a non-
zero vector of reslduals, Iedlcattng the mlsmatch between

Regression
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBrees 155 ' 3
FunctionCode155

model and data. To solve thts problem, the regresslon block

uses the least squares method to mtnlmlze the squtrre of tJre
residuals. The solutlon talces the form X'(X(a-Y))=0. Thls ls a
set of llnear equattons, solved by the Gausslan Ellmlnatlon
method. Thts method provldes numertcally stable solutlons
while requlrlng less processlng tlme than more dlrect solutlon
techntques.

A mtnimum number of sets of data wfth good quallty must be

present in the data table before the parameters may be cdcll-
lated. Speclflcatlon S8 speclfles the ffi number. But,
the mlnimurn number must be equal to or greater than flve.
The data set can be viewed and changed tn the edtt mode.
Each time a good qualtty data set ls entered, the values of a1
throug}r aoare recalculated.

If the calculation of a is valld, and the goodness of flt ls less

than that specified with S23, then the values of a, through. ao
are output from the block. The goodness of.frt ls deftned as
the me€rn relative residud:

GF=
l(r*aG)x x ( j , k , ) - y t ) l
m a ( ( 1 , 1 y ( / ) lx)J

where:

J = Number of lndependent vartables used tre the cal-

culation (SG).
K = Number of data sets used tn ttre calculatlon (S21.

a(K) = Value of a determtned when k data sets are used

for calculatlon.
X = Matrix of input values for tndependent varlables.
y(i) = Value of the dependent varlable assoctated wlth
independent variable number j.

The block also performs a test on reslduds r after acceptfng

neur data. The old set of data ts always buffered for the dura-
tion of the calculation, and replaces the new set of data ln the
event that the block ts unable to calculate valld parameters.
When the computed godness ofift ts greater than the toler-
€rnce limit (S23), the new data set ls rernoved from the data
table X and ttre old data ls relnstated.

Data can be collected in two ways (tfme basts and transltlon

of external trigger). Specification 59 selects the mode. If data
is colleeted on a time basls, the collectlon frequency ls specl-
fied tn mlnutes with SlO.

Regression
1 5 5- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 155

The data can be stored ln the data table ln one of two ways.
Data can be stored elther ln btn mode or sequentldly. Speclfl-
catlon S12 selects tl:e mode.

512 = ono = bin stonge

The bln mode of data storage dlows the system to matrrtatn a

spread of data over a range of the tndependent varlable X1 .
The bfn mode of data storage should be used when the corre-
latton ls not expected to change (e.8., due to sensor contaml-
natlon or lndependent varlable changes over a wlde range). In
thls mode the data ts sent to the approprtate bln and calcu-
lated as sho\pn:

BinNo.=
trffi
where:

<52> = Ftrst tredependent riarlable.

S7 = N, the number of data sets used for calculatlon.

<St3> = Higb end of range of allowable XI values.

<Sl4> = [,our end of range of allowable Xl values.

Any trirput greater than S13 or less than S14 ls dtscarded. In

the sequentlal mode of data collectlorl, the data table ls flrst tn
ff.rst out (FIFO queue). The new potnts flll the data table ro\r
by row, and the newest data set replaces the oldest data set.
Thts mode ls used when tJre correlatlon ls e4pected to change.

In the edlt mode, a set of data from the data table can be
selected and displayed by entertng a number between one and
N as 516. The set of data selected ls then avallable ln output
blocks N+4 through N+8. Block N+9 contalns a quallty blt
that indicates lf the data selected ls currently ln use ln the
calculatlon.

Q = good data
I = bad data

The operator can change the qudity assoctated urith a set of

data by togg[ng S17 to one. By changtng the quallty assocl-
ated wtth an erroneous set of data as bad, tt ls eltmlnated
from the parameter calculatlon.

Default values for each of the four parameters €rre spectfled

with Sf g through S22. T\e default values czrn be perlodtcally
updated from the data tables by selecttng the update tlme ln
hours with 524. If Sl24 ts set to O.Othere ls no updattng of the
default parameters. The mlnlmum update ttme ls l8.O hours.

Regression
l-Eg6-200B rs FEBlees 155 - 5
 FunctionGode155

The default update ls an tmportarrt feature because the data

table is stored tn RAIVI and ts lost on pourer down, module
reset, or entedng conflguratlon mode. The default parameters
are stored in t{\IRAI\d whlch ls not affected by these lnter:rrp-
tlons of normd operatlon. Thus, when the module ls started,
real vdues are avallable. The default parameters are output
after start-up, and unttl there are the spectfled number of
good quality data sets (S9).

A reset input ls also avallable. If lt ls set to one lt marks all

sets of data in the table to bad and mahes the default param-
eters Sf g through S22 avallable at the output to tlre block.

Specifications

51 -Y Specification Sl is the block address of dependent varlable.

s2 -xl Specification 52 is the block address of tndependent vartable

xl .
s3 -x2 Specification S3 is the block address of tndependent vartable
x2.
s4 -x3 Specification 54 is the block address of rndependent vartable
x3.
s5 - x4 Speciflcation 55 ls the block address of lndependent vartable
x4.
I J
S 6 Speeification SO ls the number of lndependent vartables (one
to four) used for cdculatlon, Select the number of varlables
from one to four used tn the calculaflon.

57 -K Specification S7 is the number of sets of data used for calcu-

lation. This identifies the number of sets of data to be drawn
from to perform tJ:e calculatlon. There c€rn be up to 32 sets.

S8 -MD Specification S8 is the minimum number of good sets of data

required for calculation. Ttre miretmum number of good data
sets required to perform the calculafion ls five.

s9 - MDl Specification S9 is the time and trlgger mode flag. Thls specl-
fication defines the mode of data collectlon used. In the ttme
mode, data is collected at a flxed interval of tlme spectfled
with Sl0. In tJle trigger mode, data ls collected each flme the
externally controlled colleetlon trtgger (S f f ) goes to one.

O = trigger mode
I = time mode

S1O - DT Specification SfO is the time in minutes between collectlons

of data when the regresslon btock ts tn the tlme collectton
mode (Sg equals one).

Regression
1 5 5- 6 ls FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 FunctlonCode 155

sll - ET Speclflcatlon S1l ls the block address of the external eollec-

tlon trlgger. Thts lnput determlnes when collectlons of data
occur tn the trlgger mode (S9 equals zerol. lVhen tlts trput
makes a zeto to one trarrsltlon, the block reads tJre tncorntng
data.

s12 - MD2 Specificatlon S12 ts the data storage mode flag. Thls speclff,-
catlon deftnes the data collectlon mode. In the btn mode, the
system matntalns a spread of data over a range of the tnde-
pendent varlable Xl ,(SZ). In the sequentlal mode, the newest
set of data replaces the oldest set of data llr the data table.

Q = sequenttal
I =bln

s13 - HR Spectficatlon S13 ls the htgh end of the range of XI for bfn
storage. If ttrere ls data stored tn the bfr mode, any lnput val-
ues greater than thts number are dlscarded. If data storage ls
in the sequentlal mode, retaln the default value.

s14 - LR Spectficatlon Sf 4 ls the low end of tJle range of Xl for bfn stor-
age. If stodng data in the bln mode, lnput values less thart
t}ts number are dlscarded. If stodng data tn the sequentlal
mode, retaln the default value.

s15 - MD3 Specificatlon S15 ls the block address of calculate and edit
mode suritch. Thls value controls the operattng mode of the
regresslon block.

Q = calculate mode
I = edlt mode

516 - EDN Specilicatlon 516 ls the block address of the number of data
sets from one to n vlewable tn ttre edtt mode. Ttrls speclfi@-
tion is only actlvated ln the edit mode (Sf 5 equals one). When
in edit mode, the vartables tn the set selected wtth 516 output
to blocks N+4 through N+8.

s17 - SQ Specificatlon S17 ls the block address of the quallty sw'ltch.

This specification ts actlve only tn edtt mode. When <S17>
changes from zero to one, the quallty value of the row 516
specifles changes to the oppostte guallty. Good quallty can be
forced bad or bad qudtty, llkewls€, can be forced good.

I = ch€rnge quallty

slg - RS Specificatlon S18 ls the block address of the reset swltch.

When tlris value goes to one, all ro\ps tn the data table are
marked bad qua[ty, and the default parameter values from
S19 through S22 are output from the block.

I = f€s€t
Q = normal

Regression
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 155 - 7
FunctionCode155

slg - Dl Speclfication Sf 9 is the hfflal default value for parameter a1.

If S24 ls not equal to zero, the calculated value replaces the
fnlflal vdue at the lnterval speclfled wtth S;24. If S24 equals
zero, S19 equals default value.

s20 - D2 Speclflcatlon S20 ts the hffial defiault value for parameter a2.
If S24 ls not equal to zero, the cdculated value replaces the
hfflal value at the lnterval speclfled wlth S24. If S24 equds
zero, S2O equals default value.

s21 - D3 Specllication 52 f is the tniflal default value for parameter as.

If S24 is not equal to zero, ttre calculated value replaces the
initial value at the interval spectfled wlttr S24. If S24 equds
zero, 521 equals default value.

s22 - D4 Specification S22 is the hfflal default value for parameter aa.
If S24 ls not equal to zero, ttre calculated value replaces the
initial value at the interval spectfled wtth S24. If S24 equals
zero, 522 equals default value.

s23 - GF Speclflcation S23 ls the deslred goodness of flt parameter. tf

the caleulated values are not less than thts value, tlrey wtll
not be output from the block. Ttre calculated values wtll be
discarded and the last set of suecessfully calculated values
urill be output. This treput can be used to reJect nolsy data.

S24 - DEFUP Specification 524 is the default update perlod. At the end of
this tlme, the calculated values of ttre parameters a, to a4 are
copied to the default parameters. The mlnlmum update
period is 18 hollrs.

S,24 = O, no update of default values.

S.24 * O and
update at the end of the update period.

S25to S27 Spare.

Outputs

N Output N is the value of the first caleulated parameter ln bottr

calculation and edit modes.

N+1 Output N+l ls the value of the second calculated parameter ln

both ealculation and edit modes.

N+2 Output N+2 is the value of tlle thlrd cdculated parameter ln

both calculation and edit modes.

N+3 Output N+3 is the value of the fourttr calculated parameter ln

both calculation and edit modes.

Regression
1 5 5- g 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctlonGode155

N+4 Cg;lcr.tlo;tionMod'e

lu,-Ytl
orrit=>ffl
soodness
Ed;itMode
Vdue of dependent vartable Y.

N+5 CslculqtionMod,e
( tv;t- v,)
matcimummodel mismatch= MN(l
wI )
"
Ed;itModc
Value of flrst tndependent varlable XI .

N+6 CalculationModr,
Row number of rna:dmum mlsmatch.

Dd;itMod.e
Vdue of second tndependent rarlable X2.

N+7 Cg;lc:l.tlo;tionMod,e
Number of data ro\rs wlth good quallty.

MitModc
Value of thtrd lndependent vartable X3.

N+8 CqlcttlationMcd,e
Tlme of last successful computatton ln mmddhh format wtth
hours llr mf[tary tlme.

Ed;itMode
Value of fourth tndependent vartable X4.

N+9 CaleulationMode
State of outputs:

I = corlputed

Q = default; when the module ts reset, all vdues tn the

data table are marked bad quanry and the default val-
ues spectfled by S19 through 522 are output.

Ed;itMode
Ouality of tJre curTent data set (selected urfth S16):

I = good quallty lncluded tn comPutatlon

Q = bad qualtty excluded from eomputatlon

The curent qualtty can be changed by settlng S17 to one.

This toggles the quallty tnrput to the oPposlte vahle.

Regression
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 155- 9
FunctionCode 155

APPLICATIOAIS

The regresslon block can be used for economlc optlmlzatlon.

It operates on functlons descrtbed as ltnear, urHch means y ls
a linear function of a. Thts does not [nply ttrat y ls a llnear
functlon of the measurements formfng X. For tnstance, to
identiff tJ:e cost functlon of a steam generatlng unlt, a qua-
dratie form ls employed.

f = cost
XI = steamflow
M = steamflovf
X3=1

Y=a(I)Xt +a(2pQ+a(S)l

The eguation provides a steady state economic model used by

an optimwatton progr€rm to mlnlmtze operatlng expenses.

Another application is mode[ng of the ktnettc parameters ln a

batch reactor.

ertent = a(1) x (time,temperature,concentration)

+ a(2)

The wtent of the reacfi,on ls a laboratory measurement, and

f(t,TCl is a dlmensionless group representtng relatlve reactlon
rate computed by the module. The lab data is entered through
the console or control statton. The ldenttftcatlon of the parame-
ters allows on-line prediction of requtred batch reactlon tlme,
given measurements for temperature and Irfttd concentratton.

The two preceding appltcatlons represent models as power

series. Linear regresslon can also compute model parameters
for more complex functton forms. Ttre regresslon block corre-
lates up to four independent variables to a slngle dependent
variable.

For instance, the model tn = b(1) x (flrt) x (ft)) contalns two

independent variables ire a nonlinear relationshtp. Ttre follow-
ing equation results after taklng the log of both sldes, maktng
the model linear in the parameters:

Iog(m)= tog(b(l)) + b(2) tog p + b(3) tog(q)

making the definitions:

y = log(m),XI = 1, X2 = tog(il, and X3 = log(q)

The regression block finds the best parameter set a for the
equation:

y= a(I)Xt + a(2)X2+a(3)X3

Regression
1 5 5- 1 0 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 155

Ffgnre f 55-1 shours the contours of equal m plotted tn the p - q

plane.

Figure 755-7. Contours of WunlmPlotted

intIE p - qPlnne

The t5rpe of data storage used depends on the sltuatton.

Sequenttal storage retalns the last seven data sets and calcu-
lates the parameters from them. IJse tlts mode when the cor-
relation is expected to change. Btl storage retalns the data
sets that glve evenly spaced sets across the entlre range of the
independent varlable. It should be used whenever the colrela-
tion is not expected to change due to such thfr1gs as sensor
contaminatlon. Bln storage should also be used when the
tndependent varlable changes over a wlde range, but ls not
expected to assume dl or nearly all of the range of values. For
example, a machlne that commonly runs at 6O to 8O percent
load for extended pertods of ttme would run most effictently
wfth btrr storage. Bln storage retalns values that fall wtthtn
zero to 6O percent and 8O to lOO percent load whlle frequently
updatlng the fall between values 6O to 80 percent load.

Regression Block Application Considerations

The regression block ls very fledble. Determlne whlch combl-

nation of data collectlon and storage technigues ls needed for
the application. A balance must be maintalned when setttng
data collection, storage and acceptance speclflcatlons. More
eertalnty and stablltty ln ttre calculated coefflclents ls gener-
ally obtalned at the elqpense of speedy adaptatton to slgntfl-
eant changes in process behavlor.

Numberof DataSets The spectftcatlon of 32 data sets ln tlre data table (the ma:d-
mum for SZ) provldes more lnformatlon about the process and
stabilDes the value of calculated model coefflelents. However,

Regression
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEBlees 155 - 11
FunctionCode155

specification of 16 data sets would speed up adaptatton of the

coefficlents lf process behavtor was eq)ected to change rapldly.

BlnnedDataStorage Segregaflng the data tnto blns accordhg to the value of x, (at
52) signillcantly inereases the rellabilfty of the calculated
model coefficients. The bins lnsure that data collected over
the entire range of treterest for x1 ts tncluded tn the coeffl-
clents, not Just ttre most recent data. The most recent data
may be concentrated around a long term operatlng potrt of
the process, and the coefftctents calculated from thls data
may not be representattve of the process outslde thls operat-
fng polnt.

Figure f 55-2 shows the effect of the data storage teehnlque.

Thls example shows two models of sampllng 20 polnts of a
known function. The function was distorted by the addttton of
random noise. The first model uses btns for data storage, the

BINNED DATA STORAGE

SEQUENTI AL DATA STORAGE

Figure 155-2. Efiect oJDatn storage Techniqtrc

Regression
1 5 5- 1 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode155

second model uses sequenttal data storqge. Ttte flrst model

adequately represents the actual functlon over tlle entlre
range of lnterest whlle the second only represents tJre func-
tton ln the local range of the data collected.

The lncreased rellabtltty provtded by blnned data storage

comes at the prtce of slower adaptatton to process changes. If
some data polnts are collected at operatlng ranges entered
rarely, they corrupt the crurentness of ttre eurye flt. Narrow-
ing the collectlon range speeds the adaptatlon process, but
renders the coefflclents lnaccurate outslde the range of data
collectlon.

MaximumResidual The madmum resldual spectfled ln S23 also has a strong

effect on the abtltty of the regresslon block to adapt and tts
rate of adaptatlon. To reJect nolsy data, a small resldual ls
desirable. However, tf the resldual ls set too small, all new
data wtll be reJected. To gtve the regresston block some pli-
ancy, a larger residud must be speclfled.

Regression
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 1 5 5- 1 3
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode156- AdvancedPIDGontroller

L DESCRIPTION

The advanced PID controller functlon code implements a pro-

w portlond tntegral derlvatlve controller. Some of the advanced
TR
TF features of ttris functlon code above the other PID controllers
R (function codes 18 and 19) are:
FF
N/A
}UA . Dlrect lncorporatlon of a feedfor-ward stgnal tnto a PID
tl
DI
controller.

Improved algorlthm for derlvative actlon calculatlon.

Improved algorlthm for lncorporating an external reset or

manual reset slgnal.

Control output lncrease and decrease fnhftlt slgnals to

constraln controllers ln cascade conflguratlons when llm-
lts are encountered. Thls prevents the prlmary loop from
urlnd-up when the secondary loop control output satu-
rates.

Provldes dtgttal lmplementation of a nontnteractln$ PID

control dgortthm or a classical (analo$ serles lnteractlng
PID controller.

. Provides a quick saturation recovery opfloll.

In addition to the advanced features, function code 156 has

the nonnal features of a PID, including:

o Bumpless manual-to-auto transfer.

. Bumpless proportlonal band tuning.

. Antt-reset (iretegral) wind-up functioll.

. Reverse acttng or direct actin$ direction swltch.

. Set potnt modlfler optlon allorvlng bumpless set potnt

changes.

NOTE:PID reset mode (S5) and PID gain (SO)of the segment
controlblock (functioncode 82) do not atfect the advancedPID
controller.Maximumderivativegain for PID (S11)and extemal
resetforPID(S12)of the executiveblock(functioncode53)do not
affect the advancedPID controller.These functionsare directly
controlledwithinthe advancedPID controller.This featureallows
PIDcontrollers withandwithoutexternalresetto be includedin the
samesegment.

AdvancedPIDController
l-Eg6-200B rs FEBrees 156 - 1
FunctionCode156

UTILIZATION
t

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N R Control output with feedforward
N+1 B Block increase flag:
0 - permit increase
1 = inhibit increase
N+2 B Blockdecreaseflag:
0 - permitdecrease
1 = inhibitdecrease

SPECIFICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of process variable
S2 N 5 Note 1 Block address of set point
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof track reference
S4 N 0 Note1 Blockaddressof trackflag:
0 = track
1 = release
S5 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof extemalor manualreset
S6 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof feedfonrardsignal
S7 N 5 I Note 1 Sparerealinput
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Spare boolean input
s9 N 0 Note 1 Block address of increase inhibit:
0 = hOrmdl
| = prevent increase
sl0 N 0 Note 1 Block address of decrease inhibit:
0 = DOnn?l
| = prevent decrease
s11 Y 1.000 R Full Gain multiplierK
sl2 Y 1.000 R Full Proportionalgain Kp
sl3 Y 0.000 R Full lntegralresetresetVmin.or manualresettimeconstantK1x
min.
sl4 Y 0.000 R Full DerivativerateactionKo x min.
sls Y 10.000 R Full Derivativelag constantKt(typically- 10)
sl6 Y 105.000 R Full Highoutputlimit
sl7 Y -5.000 R Full Lowoutputlimit

Advanced PID Controller

1 5 6- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Function Code 156

SPECIFICATI ONS (continued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl8 N 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Algorithm type:
0= classical
1= Doninteracting
2= classical with external reset
3= ffianud reset noninteracting
sl9 N 0 I 0or1 Integrallimittype:
Q= quicksaturationrecovery
1 = collventionalsaturationrecovery
s20 Y 0 I 0or1 Set pointmodifier:
0 = IloIItl8|
1 = int€gralonly on set point change
s21 Y 0 I 0or1 Directionswitch:
Q= tsvsrse rnode error= sP - PV
1 = directmodeeffor = PV - SP
s22 Y 0.000 R Fulf Sparerealparameter
s23 Y 0 Full Spareintegerparameter
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor |MCOM04 and GLCOA0A
1023 for SLC01/21
2046 for IMMFCOSand CBCO1
9998 for IMMFCO9O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

EXPLANATION

Specification Sl is the block address of the process variable.

ttris input identifies the process varlable that ls controlled by
the PID algorlthm.

s2 Specification 52 is the block address of the set polnt.

s3 Speclficauon Sg ls the block address of tlle track reference.

Speeiflcaflon Sg ldentilies the slgnal that the PID outputs
when in track mode.

s4 Specification 54 is the block address of the track flag. Thts

input signal controls the track or release mode:

Q = track mode
I = release mode

In track mode, the output is forced to the value of the tmck

reference (Sg). In release mode, the block output ls calculated
as a function of the process variable and the set point.

S5 Specification 55 ts the block address of the external or man-

ual reset. This treput has two functiorrs. It carl link the exter-
nal reset signal that ls used tn the tntegral calculatlon (S18,
algorithm t5rye two). It also curn link the manual reset signal
for manual reset control (S18, algorithm tSpe three).

AdvancedPIDController
l-E96-200B ls FEB199s 156 - 3
FunctionCode 15b

S6 Speelficatlon 56 ls ttre block address of ttre feedforward slg-

nal. Thls lnput ls the stgnal added to the output calculated by
the PID algortttrm. Thls comblned output becomes the block
output ln tl:e release mode.

57 and 58 Spare real and boolean lnput.

S9 Specification 59 is the block address of increase tnhibit sig-

nal. An input of one prevents the control output from lncreas-
lng beyond lts current value when the controller Is not ln the
track mode. An input of zero does not affect the PID control-
ler. If the 59 and SIO lnputs €rre bottr one (tn release mode),
the output of the PID controller ls held at tts current vahle.
These lnputs also go to outputs N+l and N+2.

sl0 Speclfication Sf O ls the block address of the decrease lnhfbft

stgnal. An tnput of one prevents the control output from
decreasing below its current value when tJre controller ls not
ln the track mode. An tnput of zero does not affect the PID
controller. If the 59 and SlO inputs are both one (ln release
mode), the output of the PID controller ls held at lts current
value. These inputs also go to outputs N+l and N+2.

sl1 Specificatlon 511 ts the gain multipller K. The galn rnultiplier

ls one of the terms ln the PID calculatlon.

sl2 Specification Sf 2 is the proportional galn Kp The proportlonal

gain is one of the terms in the PID cdculatlon.

sl3 Specification Sl3 is the integral reset K, resets/min The lrete-

grat reset (controller fipe zero, one or two of S18) is one of the
terms tre the PID calculatlon. Speclfication S13 ts the manual
reset time per minute for manual reset controllers (controller
tlpe three of Sl8).

sl4 Specilication S14 is the derivative rate actlon Ko min. The

derivative rate action is one of the terms in the PID calculation.

NOTE:The derivativerate actionis calculatedbasedon changes

in the processvariableonly.To calculatethe derivativerate action
on set pointchangesas well,calculatean errorsignalextemalto
the advancedPID controller.This error signalcan then be intro-
ducedas the processvariablewitha set pointof zero.

sl5 Speciflcation S15 is the derivative lag constant K^. The deriva-
tlve lag constant ls one of the terms in tJle PID calculatlon.

Controllers refrain from dlrectly lmplementlng derlvatlve con-

trol ln favor of filtering the derivative contribution. The deriv-
afive lag constant allows speciffing the extent of this flltering.
This fllterlng is a simple first order tag with a time constant of
K/K^. For the default setting of K1 - 10.0, the filter has a time
constant of r/ro the derivative time. T5pical values are from ten
to 20 for Kn.

AdvancedPIDController
1 5 6- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode156

sl6 Spectflcatlon 516 ls the hlgh output Umlt. The output (PID
algortthm plus feedfonnrard stgnal SG) ls llmtted by thfs value
before it is kansferred to the block output.

sl7 Specilication S17 ls the low output limlt. The output (PID
algorithm plus feedforward stgnal SG) ls limited by thfs value
before it is transferred to the block output.

sl8 Spectfication S18 selects the type of algorithm for the PID cal-
culation:

O = classical - PID output ls calculated ustng a classlcal

lnteractlve controller. Tuntng any of the Proportlonal,
integral or derlvatlve terms changes the effecttve value of
the other terms.

I = noninteracting - PID output ls calculated usln$ a

noninteracting control algorithm. Tunfng the ProPor-
tional, integral or dertvatlve terms tndivldually has no
effect on the other terms. Thl,s ls the same type as fttnc-
tlon code 19.

2 = clcrssic al utith external re*t - cascade and overrlde

configuratlons use thls grye of algorlthm. Ttle PID output
is calculated using the classlcal interactive control algo-
rithm. TIte integral contrtbutlon ls calculated as a func-
tion of tJre external reset slgnal.

3 = mornual re*t noninteracting - PID output ts calcu-

lated from the proportional and derivatlve terms wtth
manual reset. For manual reset control, a manual reset
tirne constant (Sl3) is used for bumpless transfer between
the track and release states.

NOTE:The transferis not bumplessif the manualresettime con-

stant (S13)is set to zero. Any changein the manualreset is fil'
teredby a first orderIagwiththe manualresettirnespecified.

All versions of the algortthm provide burnpless auto or mart-

ual transfer and tuning of the proPortional band.

sl9 Specifieation S19 is tl:e integral limit t54re. Thls lnput specl-
fies the Urnfung t5rye applied to the integral calculatton. Both
forms of limiting prevent controller wtnd-up during satura-
tlon of the control output.

O = quiek sotttro;tion recoaery timiting - lntegral llmlt-

ing equals (specified limtts mlnus feedforward stgnal
mlnus proportional action).

Proportionataction= Kx Kpx (SP - PV) (reverseacting)

Proportionalaction= Kx Kpx (PV - SP)(directacting)

AdvancedPIDController
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 1 5 6- 5
FunctionCode 156

The quick saturatlon recovery limitation uses the propor-

tlonal action calculation for all dgortthm types specified in
S18. Ttrts type of llmiting prevents the integral action from
dupltcatlng tl:e efforts of the feedfonrard stgnal and the pro-
portlonal actlon when the control output ls saturated. Wtren a
decrease ln error between the process vartable and set potnt
occurs, the control output lmmediately moves out of satura-
tion mlnimizing the posstblltty of set point overshoot.

NOTE:This actionis not desirableif the PIDcontrolleris usedas a

limitingcontrollerholdinga valve or other deviceat a limit (e.9.,
holdinga valveclosed)and set pointchangesare madethat result
in a decrease,but not a changein sign,in the eror. In addition,the
use of this option may not be desirablewhen the integral reset
(S13)is set to zero (i.e.,a P or PD controller).

Example Thesystemis initiallyat a steadystatewithzerooffset,an eror slgnalbetweenthe

pr,cessvadableandset pointdevelops,resultingin controlouFutsaturation. Then,
the useof this optionshittsthe integralvalueto the integrallimit.Thisresultsin an
offsetlromtheinitialsteady-state whentheenorsignalreducosto zero.

7 = conaentional saturation reeouery limiting - tnte-

gral limiting equals (spectfled limtts mlnus feedforward
signal).

With ttrts tlpe of limifing, the control output moves out of

saturatlon only after the error between the process variable
and the set point has changed sign; this may result in slg-
nificant overshoot of the set point by the process variable.

s20 Specificafion S2O is the set potnt modlfler. Thts tnput defrnes
the acflon to be taken on a set point change.

O = rtormo,l - this typically results ln ajump tn the control

output due to the proportional contribution from the error
created by a set point change.

7 = integra.l onlg ott set point eh,ange - proportional

contribution of tlle error is subtracted from the integral con-
tribution. This action eliminates the jump tn control output
and results in only integral acfion on a change ln set polnt.

s21 Specification S21 is the direction switch. Thts tnput defines

the direction the control output must move to compensate for
an error between the process variable and the set polnt.

O = reuerp,e mode controller - an increase in the control

output results in an increase in the process variable. The
controller error signal is equal to the set potnt minus the
process variable.

error= SP - PV

7 = direet mode controller - an lncrease ln tlle control

output results in a decrease tn the process varlable. The

AdvancedPID Controller
1 5 6- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 15b

controller erTor slgnal is equal to the process variable

minus the set polnt.

error= PV - SP

Sl22and S23 Spare parameters.

OUTPUTS

N Output N ls the control output wtth feedfonvard.

N+1 Output N+l ls the block lnerease flag.

Q = perrnlt lncrease
I = lnhlblt lncrease

Figure 156-1 shows an advanced PID output erample. Output

N+l from block B should be llnked dfrectly to 59 of an advanced
PID block A, whose output forms the set polrrt to block B.

NOTE:Do not usethe outputblockincreaseflag if usingthe quick

saturationrecoveryoption(S19equalszero).

sP/ sP-
A'
s1 AI
TR
s3 TR
TF
s4 TF
R
ss. R
FF
s6 FF
N/A
s7 lgA
N/A
s8 Nr
tl
s9 tl
u sl0 u
_ B
A
( o u r e n l o o p ) ( | N N E R L o o P }

Figure 15&1.'Mvancnd PIDOu&fi Emmple

N+2 Output N+2 is the block decrease flag.

Q = permit decrease
I = inhlbit decrease

NOTE:Donotusetheouputblockdecrease flagif usingthequick

option(S19equalszero).
recovery
saturation

Refer to Flgure 156-1. The N+2 output from block B should be

linked dlrectly to SIO of an advanced PID blockA, whose out-
put forms the set potnt to block B.

NOTE:lf blockB is placedin track,bothof its statusflagsareset

to one.Thislimitscontrolactionof blockA in bothdirections.

AdvancedPID Controller
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 156- 7
FunctionGode156

The advanced PID controller lmplements a llmlt ehecktng and

status passlng mechanlsm. Thls feature ls deslgned to con-
straln controllers in cascade configuratlons when llmlts etre
encountered.

TWo boolean status flags lmplement this feature. The outputs

N+ I and N+2 reflect two condltions:

l. The limit status of the local advanced PID controller.

2. The limit status of downstream controllers. Thls lnforma-

tlon ls supplted by 59 and S10.

When the advanced PID controller saturates at one of lts Umlts,

the approprlate output ls set (1.e., block lncrease or block
decrease). Thls tndtcates that a further lncre€rs{eor decrease of
the set point wtll attempt to drlve the local advanced PID con-
troller furttrer ilrto saturatlon. The N+l and N+2 outputs can be
monltored by any advanced PID controller whose output forms
ttre set point for the loop. Setting the N+l or N+2 outputs pre-
vents the higher level adrranced PID controller from lncreaslng or
decreasing lts output f tttis action causes furttrer saturatlon.

NOTES:
1. The N+1 and N+2 outputsare adjustedfor the direct or
reversemodeof eachadvancedPID controller.

2. The use of the quick saturationrecoveryoption (S19 equals

zero)in the innerloopAPIDmayresultin ringingof the increaseor
decreaseinhibitflag value as the inner loopsaturatesat one of its
limits.Ringingis wherethe inhibitflag valueflips betweenzero and
onefrequently. Thismayresultin creeplng of the outputloopcontrol
output(i.e.,insteadof holdingthe outer loopcontroloutput(inner
loopset point)constantwhenthe innerloopsaturates,the outerloop
mntrol outputmay move, or craep, as ringingof the inhibitflag
occurs).Thequicksaturationrecoveryoptionis designedto havethe
controloutputmoveimmediately out of saturationwhena decrease
in error betweenthe processvariableand set point occurs.There-
fore,if the innerlooperrorvalueincreasesanddecreasesfrequently
near saturation,its controloutputmoves in and out of saturation
resultingin ringingof the inhibitoutputflag. ln such instiances,
it is
recommendedthat the conventionalsaturationrecoverylimiting
option(S19equalsone)be usedin the innerloopAPID.

For example, lf an inner loop controller (reverse mode) satu-

rates at its upper limit, the block lncrease flag will be set. Set-
ting this flag indicates to the outer loop controller that tt
should not increase its output (which acts as tlle set point to
the inner loop).

NOTE:A directmodecontrollersetsthe blockdecreaseflag when

it saturatesat its upperlimit.

AdvancedPIDController
1 5 6- g 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionGode156

CLASSICALPID CONTROLLER

Standard form of a classlcal PID controller.

=r ( t .
output
fi)[ # ),,,o,
where:

error SP - P\f (reverse mode)

error PV - SP (dtrect mode)

Advanced PID controller block Parameters.

Sf I = Gain multtplier K.
St2 = Proportiond gain KF
S13 = Integral reset (resets Per min.) Kp
S14 = Derivatlve rate actlon (min.) KD,
S15 = Derivative lag constarrt (bpfcally equals ten) Ka.

NOTE:This controllerworks in secondsintemally.lt is assumed

that Krand Keila in resetsper minuteand minutes,respectively.
The 60 tenn convertsKrand Ke into resetsper secondand sec'
onds,respectively.

Substituting block parameters tnto the ori$inal equatlon.

Standard conventlon excludes the effects of derivative action

on set point changes. Uslng supe{position, this is achieved for
reverse mode.

,. #lsP -KKp(
= KKp(
output ,.'ry

output= ,* ry)fr"
KKp[ ' L

AdvancedPIDController
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 156- 9
FunctionCode156

To make the algorithm suttable for external reset, the propor-

tional and lntegral sectlon ls lmplemented uslng posltlve feed-
back of a first order lag fllter. Ftgure 156-2 ls a block dlagram
I
of a reverse mode classlcat controller. Ftgure 156-3 ls a
detailed block diagram of the reverse mode classlcal controller.

ALGORITHM OUTPUT

DCTERMI FEEDFORA'ART'
RESET

Figure 156-2. Reuerse Mde Classical Corttoller

FEEDFORWARD t
EXTERNAT
RESET

ALGORITHM
OT'TPUT

Ftgure 156-3. Reuerse Mode Classfcal Contotler - Detail

AdvancedPIDController
1 5 6- 1 0 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode156

fruetions to implement the reuersie mode classieal cotr-

trollen

Blockoutput= feedforward+ algarithmoutput

60KAKD?V- previousPV)
PVLL = PreviousPVLL *

. DtKAeV- previousPVLL)
+
' !

60KD+ KoDt

PVLL= PV duringinitializationor trackmode or Ka= O

error'= SP - PVLLreversemode

error'= PVLL- SP directmode

Algorithmoutput= gain + PI

NOTE:Algorithmoutputis limitedto the specifiedlimitsminusthe

feedforwardvalue.

Gain= (K K) error'

( KPt )
pt =(-Sg ),--^--'- PD-lfuJlprevious ou?fi)
atgorithm
[ 60.'*]previous

or

( KPt
pt =(+ ) ' - - ^ " ' 2 ' PD *l@r)text ) reset- feeilorward)
\60 . \rr)lprevious

NOTES:
1. The integralvalueis limitedto the specifiedlimitsrninusthe
feedfonrardand minus the proportionalcomponentwhen quick
saturationrecoverylimitingis selected.The integralis limitedto
the specifiedlimitsminusthe feedforwardwhenconventional satu-
rationrecovery limitingis selected.

Z. The Pl valueis adjustedto compensatefor bumplesstransfer,

burnplessproportional tuningand implementation of the set point
modifieroption(S2O).The Pl term can be forcedoutsideits nonnal
limitsdue to one of theseconditions.Atterthis happens,o newly
computedvalue is only allowed to move toward the region
betweenits limits.The Ptvalueis notforcedwithinthe limits,but it
is alsonotallowedto movefurtherfromits limits.
g. Usingexternalreset and feedforwardcontrolsimultaneously
maycausecontrollerinstability.This is possibledueto the interac'
tion betweenthe feedforwardand extemalresetsignals.lf thereis
a significantlag betweena changein the feedfonnrard signaland
the resultantchange in externalreset,the controloutput will first

AdvancedPIDController
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 5 6- 1 1
FunctionCode156

respondto the feedfonrardchangeand then tend to convergeto

the extemalreset signal.The extemalreset signalwill dominate
wheneverthe controlleroutputis saturated.

4. The classicalcontrol algorithmcannot be used for integral

only controlwith intemalresetand Keequalto zero.With Keequal
to zeroand externalresetnotspecified,the blockwill automatically
defaultto a noninteractingPIDcontroller.

A'O'V'AITERACTI
NG PID CONTROLLER

Stcn dard form of o noninterrcting PlL controllen

r=[,..+.#)",,o,
where:

error SP - PV reverse mode

error PV - SP direct mode

Advanced PID controller block parameters.

Sl f = Gain multiplier K.
Sl2 = Proportional gain Kp
Sl3 = Integral reset (resets per min.) Kp
Sl4 = Derivative rate action (min.) Kp.
Sl5 = Derlvatlve lag constant (Erptcally equds ten) Kr.

NOTE:This controllerworks in secondsintemally.lt is assumed

that Krand Ko are in resetsper minuteand minutes,respectively.
The 6Oterm convertsK and Ke into resets per secondand sec-
onds,respectively.

Substituting block pErrameters into the original equatlon.

Output =

The standard conventlon ls to exclude the effects of dertvatlve

action on set point changes. Ustng superposltlon, this ls
achieved for reverse mode as:

AdvancedPIDController
156 - 12 l s F E Bl e s s l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode156

Refer to Figure 156-4 for a block dtagram of a reverse mode

noninteractlng controller. Ftgure 156-5 tllustrates a detailed
block dlagrarrr of tlre reverse mode nonlnteractlng controller.

F'igure 756-4. Reuerse Mode Nonrnteracting Controtler

Figure 156-5. Reuerse Mde Nonrnteracting Controtler - Detail

fiuatiotts ta impletnent thre reaeru;e mode noninterqcting

eontrollen

Blockoutput= feedforward+ algorithmoutput

Algorithmoutput= proportional+ integral- derivative

NOTE:Algorithmoutputis limitedto the specifiedlimitsminusthe

value.
feedforward

AdvancedPIDController
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 5 6- 1 3
FunctionGode156

Proportional= (KKr) error

(KKPI\ 'sintegral
lntegnl=t error+previou,
60 )

NOTES:
1. The integralvalueis limitedto the specifiedlimitsminusthe
feedforward valueand minusthe proportional term whenthe quick
saturationrecoverylimitingoptionis selected.The integralvalueis
limitedto the specifiedlimits minusthe feedfonrardvalue when
conventionalsaturationrecoverylimitingis selected.

2. The integralvalue is adjustedto compensatefor bumpless

transfer,bumplessproportionaltuning and implementation of the
set point modifieroption (S20).The integralterm can be forced
outsideits normallimitsdue to one of theseconditions.After this
happens,? newlycomputedvalueis only allowedto movetoward
the regionbetweenits limits.The integralvalueis not forcedwithin
the limits,but it is alsonot allowedto movefurtherfrom its limits.

( ooKK^K^ \
=
Derivative - previous
Pn +
lffir)rrv
'\
( 6oKD
@reviousderivative)
l tt -,.,q^)

NOTE:Derivativelimitingequalst spanof specifiedlimits.This is

shown for a reverseacting controller.For direct action,change
(PV - previousPV)to (previousPV - PV).

MANUAL RESET PID CONTBOLLER

The manual reset PID control algorithm provides a noninter-

actlng controller with a fixed integral (reset) term. Use this
type of controller when only proportlonal or derlvative actlon
is required. The manual reset enables the balance of the con-
trol loop at a specific operatlon point. Thls reduces the steady
state offset between the process vartable and set polnt.

Taking the transfer function for a noninteracting PID control-

ler (wtttr derivative actlon on the process varlable) and replac-
ing the integral term with a first order lag ylelds the following
transfer function:

Output =

AdvancedPIDController
1 5 6- 1 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 156

NOTE:This controllerworks in secondsintemally.lt is assumed

that K, and Ke are in resetsper minuteand minutes,respectively.
The 6Oterm convertsKrand Ko into resets per second and sec-
onds,respectively.

where:

error SP - PV reverse actlng

error PV - SP dlrect acttn$

NOTE:Kyis a time constant(min.),not a rate setting(resetsper

min.).The firstorderIagon the manualresetinputavoidsbumping
the processwheneverthe manualresetvalue is changed.Manual
or auto(trackor release)transitionsalsoutilizethis time constantto
performbumplesstransferand rampingto the manualresetvalue.

Refer to Figure 156-6 for a block dtagram of a reverse mode

manual reset PID controller.

Figure 156-6. Reuerse Mde MantnlReset PID Crintroller

Figure L56-7 illustrates a detailed block

reverse mode manual reset PID controller.

Ttne equations to implement the reuense

re*t PE controller o;res

Blockoutput= teedforward+ algorithmoutput

Atgorithmoutput= proportional+ integral- derivative

NOTE:Algorithmoutputlimitingequalsspecifiedlimitsminusfeed'
forward.

AdvancedPIDController
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 1 5 6- 1 5
FunctionGode156

SP
+
-/-.\ERROR
PROPORTIOML

FECDFORruNNO

F'igure 756-7. Reuerse Mode MantnlReset PID Crrnf:oller - Detail

Proportional= (KK) error

lntegral= manual reset.f#=,] integrat- manuat reset)

@revious
I'
\60K, + Dt)

NOTE:The integralvalueis adjustedto compensatefor bumpless

transfe[ bumplessproportionaltuning and implementation of the
set point modifieroption (S20).The integralterrn can be forced
outsideits normallimitsdue to one of theseconditions.After this
happens,? newlycomputedvalueis only allowedto movetoward
the regionbetweenits limits.The integralvalue is not forcedwithin
the limits,but it is also not allowedto movefurtherfrom its limits.

( IIKKDKA'1
= l@)
Derivative rrn - previous
Pw
( 6oKD )
+ ton'ious derivative)
lffi )

NOTE:Derivativelimitingequalst spanof specifiedlimits.This is

shownfor a reverseacting controller.For direct action,change
(PV- previousPV)to (ytrevious
PV - PW.

AdvancedPID Controller
156 - 16 1sFEB
lees l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode 15b

APPLICATIO.A'S

Flgure 156-8 shours the use of the advanced PID controller ln

a stngle lnput/slrgle output control loop.

CISUO

sPAPID
At co
TR
owAo
rF BI (MFC)
?56 D
R 9t
FT BD
E? q9 A
l{t^ srt
N'A sl9
c/R
ll s29.
DI s21 c
vs?l
szs w
s26
s27
sg
s?9.
slo

(66) TO OIS

Figure 156-8. SWb Inprftl Sitlgrle Oufpt &nflrol Loop Us|ttg APID

AdvancedPIDController
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 156 - 17
W
I

t
 FunctionCode157- GeneralDigitalGontroller

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The general dlgttal controller funetlon code lmplements a

fourth order dlfference equatton wlth vartable deadtlme. ThIs
functlon block uses prevlous outputs and error slgnals (Sp
mlnus PV) to calculate the present output. The startlng polnt
for calculatlons can be lnttlated by tfme or trlgger. ThIs block
can funcflon as a dlgltal controller, dtgltal fllter, or a dtgltal
process model for the lmplementatlon of sophlstlcated control
schemes.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N R u(t)

SPECtFICATIO,ruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressol processvariable
S2 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof set point
S3 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof trackvalue
S4 N 5 Note 1 Block address of feedfonarard
S5 N 0 Note 1 flag:
Blockaddressof release/track
0 = track
1 = release
s6 N 1 B 0or1 Executionmode:
Q= trigger
1 = time
S7 N 0 I Note 1 Block address of extemal trigger flag:
1=lUh
S8 N 1.000 R 0 - 9.2E18 Timebetweenrunsin seconds
S9 Y 105.000 R Full Highoutputlimit
s10 Y -5.000 R Full Lowoutputlimit

GeneralDigitafController
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 157-1
FunctionCode 157

SPECIFI CATIO,wS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl1 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient a0
sl2 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient al
sl3 Y 0.000 R Ful Coetficient a2
sl4 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient
a3
sl5 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient a4
sl6 Y 1.000 R Ful Coetficient b0
sl7 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient bl
sl8 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient b2
sl9 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient b3
s20 Y 0.000 R Ful Coefficient b4
s21 N 0 I 0-255 Numerator deadtime expressed as a number of sample
interuals
s22 N 0 0-255 deadtimeexpressedas a numberof sample
Denominator
intervals
s23 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
s24 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
NOTE:
1. Maximum and|MMFCOS
valuesare:2046for NMFCOI|O?
and IMMFPOUOA}S
9998lor |MMFC0S/O4

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 (Block address of process variable) Speciflcation Sl is the

current value of the input from the process. Specificatlons Sl
and 52 define the error term in the difference equation:

e(t)=<52>-<St>

s2 (Bloek qddress oJ set point) Specificafion S2 is the block

address of the set point. This is the current value of the set
point input. It defines the desired value of the process vari-
able. Specifications S I and 52 define the error term tn the dif-
ference equation:

e(t)= <52>- <St>

s3 (Block address of track value) Specification 53 supplles the

block output N when the controller is traeking. The output is
limited before it is output to the field and before it is used to
update the output buffer. The final output frorn the general
digital controller is the sum of this limited ireternal control
output value and the feedforward signal.

s4 (Block address of feedfottosrd input) Speciflcation 54 is

the block address of the feedforward input. This input biases
the output of the general digital controller based on the

GeneralDigitalController
1 5 7- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 157

changing value of some other variable. The feedforward input

is an externally generated signal.

S5 (Block c'ddresis of input *lecting controller tracking)

Speclflcatlon S5 ls the block address of tJre tnput that selects
controller tracktng. When tracking ls selected, the output N
tracks the value referenced by 53.

Q = track <S3>
I = release

s6 (time ornd trigger mode *leet) Spectlication SG deflnes the

mode of data eollection. In the time mode, data ls collected at
fixed lntervals of tJme defined by 58. In the trl$ger mode, data
ls collected when <S7> makes a zero to one transltlon.

Q = trigger mode
I = time mode

s7 (Block crddress oJ external triggerf Specification 57 ls the

block address of the external trigger. If tl:e trigger mode of
execution is selected, the calculation is ilritiated each time
this input malces a zero to one transition. The calculatlon ls
also initiated when the track switch <S5> is set to zero to
force the output to track the desired value.

s8 (Intental betuteen executions) If the time based mode of exe-

cutlon ts selected, thls value ldentlfies the lnterval between
executions ln seconds.

S9 (tligh output limit, Ttte actual control output will not exceed
this value.

NOTE:The actualcontroloutputequalsthe sum of the low limited

internallycalculatedcontrol output plus the feedfonarard
input
value,then highlimitedif necessary.

sl0 (Iaut output limit) The internally calculated control output

will not be less than thts value. The actual control output wlll
not be less than this value plus the feedfor-ward lnput value.

NOTE:The actualcontroloutputequalsthe sum of the low limited

internallycalculatedcontrol output plus the feedfonrvard
input
value,thenhighlimitedif necessary.

S11 through S20 (Corlfliicients ttsr;d. in dilferenee equation) Specificatlons

Sl f through S2O are the values of the coefficients used in the
dtfference equatiorl. The coefficient values are determined from
the relationships between the operattng parameters of the
device being controlled (control theory modelleg of process).

s21 (Iltumerator deadtime) Specification S21 is the numerator

deadtime expressed as a number of sample lntervals. The
error signal entering the generd digital controller block ls not

GeneralDiqitalController
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB199s 157-3
FunctionCode157

acted on by the block until thts number of sample lntervals

has passed.

s22 (Denominator deadtime) Speclficatlon Sl22 ls the denomlna-

tor deadtime expressed as a number of sample tntenrals. The
outputs of the generd dlgttal controller are recycled back lnto
the equation after they are calculated. The outputs being fed
back into the controller are not acted on untll the sample
intervals have passed.

NOTE:Thevalueof S21 and 522 affectsmemoryutilization.Refer

to AppendixB for details.

S23 and S24 Spare parameters.

Outputs

N Output N is the output cdculated from previous outputs, cltr-

rent and previous errors, and the feedforward value. During
module start-up or tracktng, the output ls controlled by the
track value input.

APPLICATION

, GeneralInformation The general digital controller ls used to tmplement control

algorlthms that are based on dlscrete time sampled data that
are sampled at a rate that can be ireternally generated (<S8>
when SO equals one) or externally generated (<S7> when 56
equals zero).

Discrete time based functions are simple continuous tlme

based functions that have been sampled at some periodic
rate. Just as la,place transforms are useful to represent com-
plex continuous time functlons in a simple manner, Z-domain
transforms are used to represent complex discrete time sarn-
pled functions ln an analogous stmple marlner. Ltke l"aplace
trarrsforms, Z-dornain transforms can be used to simpliff a
complex contlnuous function into a simple equation. Since tn
the world of digital control systems all continuous tlme based
data is sampled into discrete time based data, it is more rele-
vant to perform complex continuous time based control algo-
rithms using their equivalent discrete time based algorithms.
These continuous time based control algorithms ean be con-
verted into discrete time based algorithms vla the use of Z-
domain transforms. As in l.aplace transforms, Z-domairr
transforms can be algebratcally manlpulated and stmpltfled
into simple equations consisting of stmple terms. Conversion
tables exist for eonverting these simple terms back and forth
between their equivalent continuous time and Z-domain func-
tions. Furtlter information on this can be found in any good
basic control textbook.

GeneralDigitalController
157-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 157

Any complex controller algortthm can be lmplemented by flrst

determintng lts contJnuous tlme base transfer functloll. Wlth
the use of the knowledge of Z-domaln transforms, the contLn-
uous tlme based functlon can be translated tnto the Z-domatn
functlon representation of the equtvalent discrete ttme based
function. The Z-domaln equatlon can then be algebratcally
manipulated feto one or more terms ttrat is equtvalent to the
Z-domain transfer functlon of functlon code 157. Therefore,
one or more functlon code L57 general dfgltal controller func-
tlon blocks c€rn be used to lmplement the ortglnd complex
time based control algorltltm.

The Z-domatn transfer functton representatton of the general

drgltal controller ls:

-4 -3 -2 -1
Ul6t' ^ Z atZ + aF +aF +arZ *do
A
: - = -4 -1
"(4 E a i
E
bnZ * bF + brZ + bo

where:

Z - transfer function of u(t).

Z- transfer functlon of e(t).

Specific Information The general dlgltal controller block calculates a.n output
based on previous outputs and error signals. Ttte calculatlon
uses the discrete function:

1
u ( 0 = f t a x e ( t - I V )+ d t x e ( f - N - t ) + e e x e ( f - N - 2 )
UO
1
+ ?gx (ef- N- Q + atx e(t- N- 4>l -; tbtx u(t- D- 1)
"0
+ b z xu ( t - D - 2 1+ b s xu ( t - D - Q + b e xu ( T - D - 4 ) I

where:

Ssto 8a = Coeflicients fspecified in Sl t through S2O)

bo to be

N = Numerator (inPut) deadtime expressed as a

number of sample tntervds (S21)
D = Denominator (output feedback) deadttme
expressed as a number of sample tntervals
(s22)
e(t) = Present errof = (<S2> - <Sl>)

GeneralDigitalController
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 157- 5
FunctionCode 157

e(t - N - n) = Error from (N+n)th prevtous run of the algo-

rlthm
= Current lnternal control output value
o
u(t)
u(t - D - n) = Internal control output from the (D+n)th
prevlous run of the dgorlthm

The general dtgltal controller takes lreputs and holds them for
a spectfled number of tlme lntervals for each step before
releasfng them to the next step as shown ln Flgure L57-1. On
start-up, the error queue ts fllled wlth the error slgnal and the
output queue ls fllled wtth the track value mlnus tJre feedfor-
ward value.

TRACK
REFERENCE FEEDFORtft/ARD

ADJT'STED ADJI.'STED
LOWLIMIT -+ HIGH UM]T

o
Ftgwe 157-1. Intsnal WIc ReprcsentalTortJorthe Gensal WItaI Confrotler BIrck

The general digltal controller block tmplements a deadtlrne

queue for the error stgnal and prevlous output values. The
length of these queues are speclfted as lnteger multtples of
sample tlme. On start-up and transfer frorn manual to auto-
matic, all elements of the error queue are hfilallzed wfth the
current error vahr€, and the output queue ls fnfilalle;ed urtth
the track value mlnus the feedfonrard. Both queues are of the
first-in, first-out (FIFO) bpe. A new value ls placed ln the
queue at each execution time; values already tn the queue are
shifted one element to malce room for the new value, and the
oldest value ln tlle queue ls dtscarded.

The internal control output of the general dlgttal controller

block is formed by adding together the followlng values:

a/b$ (fifth oldest value tn error queue)

ar/bX (fourttr oldest value tn error gueue)

azlboX (third oldest value ln error queue)

at/bX (second oldest value ln error queue)

GeneralDigitalController
1 5 7- 6 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 157

aoht (oldest value tn error queue)

-b,ht (fourth oldest value ln output queue)
-brh{ (thlrd oldest value ln output queue)
-bs/box (second oldest value in output queue)
-b4/box (oldest value ln output queue)

The output ts limlted before lt ts output to the fleld and before

It ls used to update the output quelle. The flnal output from
the generd dlgltal controller ts the sum of thts llmlted lnter-
nal control output value zrnd ttre feedfonnrard signal.

GeneralDigitalController
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 5 7- 7
ffi

t
 FunctionGode158- EnhancedAnalog Point Definition

L DESCRIPTION

The enhanced analog potret deflnttlon functlon code sets up

blocks tn an II\{AMMO3 Analog Master Module that are
requlred to perform:

. Analog lnputs.
. Analog adJustments.
. Alternate cold Junctlon references.
. Exceptlon reports.
. Alarm functlons.

Thts block resldes tn frxed blocks one though 64 on the

IIVIAMMO3 module.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Deccrlptlon

N R lnputvalueand quality

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deecrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Full Input Upe:
000 = undefined
l)fi = extemalcoldjunctioninput(referto S11)
lilASM0l Analog Input Slave Module:
X40 - highlevel(1-5V)
X41 = highlevel(t10 V)
X42=0to+10V
X43=0to+5V
illAsllO2 TC lnput Slave Module:
X01=STC,X02=RTC
X03=ETC,X04=JTC
X05=KTC,X06=TTC
X07=ChineseETC

EnhancedAnalogPointDefinition
l-Eg6-200B ls FEB1995 1 5 8- 1
FunctionCode 158

SP ECIFICATIOruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Full IMASMO2 TC lnput SlaveModulez(enflnud)
(cont) X08=ChineseSTC
X60 = -100to +100mV
X 6 1= 0 t o + 1 0 0 m V
X62 = (1-5V) mV input
X63 = (4-20mA) mV input
|MASMO3100WRTDSlave:
X2A= US laboratorystandard100O platinumRTD
CICR= 0.003926)
Yr21= US industrialstandard100f,l platinumRTD
(TCR= 0'(X)3911)
X22 = Europeanstandard100O platinumRTD
OCR = 0'003850)
Yr23= 120OchemicallypurenickelRTD
(TCR= 0'00672)
>(25= Chinese53 f,l copperRTD
|MASMO4 10WRTDSlave:
X24 = 10 Q copperRTD
Not lmplemented- Invalld entry:
XU - X59= oot implemented
X64 - X99 = rot implemented
s2 N 0 I Full Engineering unit:
)C(0= Celsius
)fi1 = Fahrenheit
XX2 = eogineeringunitconversion(highleveland mV)
XX3 = sguarerootafterengineeringunit conversion
XX4 = squarerootbeforeengineeringunitconversion
1XX= p€dormpolynomial on input
s3 N 0 I Full Engineering unitidentifier
S4 N 0.000 R Full Zero
S5 N 0.000 R Full Span (full scale range)
S6 N 1.000 R Full Significant change in o/oof span
S7 Y 9.2Elg R Full High alarm value
S8 Y -9.2E1g R Full Low alarm value
s9 N 0.000 R Full Leadwire resistance,(l (not relevantfor lMASM0l module
inputtypes)
s10 N 0 I 0 , 1 6 5 - 1 9 6 Block number of polynomial adjustment block (0 = oot
defined). Any block can reference 165 through 196.
sl1 N 0 I 0 - 64, 255 Blocknurnberof coldjunctionblockoC:
0 = oo blockdefined(useCJ RTD)
255= ro CJ needed

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 Specilication S f defines the tnput t5rye and must be consls-

tent with the tlpe of ASM module providing the input.

Input tgpe:

OOO= Undefined
UO( = External cold junctton lnput (refer to S I f )

EnhancedAnalog Point Definition

1 5 8- 2 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctlonCode 158

IM,ASMOI Anelog Input Slcue Module Types:

X40 = Hlgh level (1-5 V)

X4L = Htgh level EfO V)
X42=Oto+f0V
X43=Qto+5V

IMAS,MOZ TCInput Stcue Mdule:

XOI - STC, X:Oz= ftTC

XOg = PTC, XO4 =JTC
XOs = I(Te, XOO=JTC
X:OT= Chlnese ETC
XO8=ChlneseSTC
X60 = -1OOto +1OOmV
X61 = O to +100 mV
X:62 = (l to 5 V) mV lnput
X63 = (4 to 2O mA) mV tnput

IIWAS,MO37OO Oh;mRTD Slarle;

lf.zO = US laboratory standard f OOCl platlnum RTD

ffCn = O.O03926)

XZI =US lndustrfal standard f O0 Q plattnum RTD

[fCn = 0.003911)

X22 =European standard lOO Q plattnum RTD

frcR = 0.003850)

X23 = f 20 O chemlcally pure ntckel RTD frcR = O.OO672}

lf.25 =Chinese 53 Cl copper RTD

IMrcMO4 70 Oh;rn RTD Slcue;

X24 = 10Cl copper RTD

Not implemented - ittuo;lil entry:

lf44 - X59 = Dot lmplemented

X64 - X99 = Dot lmplemented

S2 Specificatlon S2 deflnes the englneertng unft t54te.

XOO = Celslus
XOI = Fatrrenhelt
X:Oz = En€fineertng unlt converslon (htgtr level and mV)
XOg = Square root after englneerlng unlt converslon
XO4 = Squ€rre root before englneering unft converslon
lOX = Perform polynomlal on lnput

s3 Specificatlon S3 ls the engineerkrg untt ldentlfler.

EnhancedAnalogPointDefinition
l-Eg6-200B ls FEBlees 158 - 3
FunctionCode 158

s4
s5
Speclficatlon 54 sets the zero value of the lnput.

Speclflcatlon 55 sets the span value of the lnput.

I
S6 Speclflcatlon SO ls the slgntflcant change ln percent of span.

s7 Speclflcation SZ is tJre high alarm value.

S8 Speciflcatlon S8 is the low alarm value.

s9 Specification 59 ts the lead nrire reslstance tn ohms.

NOTES:
1. Specification
S9 is not relevantfor lMASM0lmoduleinputtypes.

2. SpecificationS9 is not requiredby any type of input.lt is an

optionusedfor accuracy.

TC = total ohms
RTD = ohms Per leg (3 rryfre)
RTD 2 rvire = ohms ln leg I - ohms tn leg 2
RTD 3 nrire = ohms tn any leg

sl0 Spectficatlon S10 ts the block number of the polynomtal

adJustment block (zero equals not deftned). Any block can ref-
erence 165 through 196.

sl1 Speciflcation Sl l is ttre block number of the cold Junctton

block in degrees Celsius.

Q = no block defined (use cold Juncflon RTD)

255 = r1o cold junction needed

Blocks 165 through f96 are predeflned. If 52 equals UO(

(external cold junction inrput), a block number must be
entered for Sll.

Outputs

N output N displays the tnput value wrth quallty.

Enhanced
AnalogPointDefinition
1 5 8- 4 15 FEB 1995 f-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode159- Polynomial
Adiustment

GENEHAL DESCRIPTION

The polynomlal adJustment functton code deflnes a flfttr order

polynomtal equatlon:

Y=AlP+Bf+Cf+D*+Eltt+F

A range of 165 through f 96 czrn have up to 32 blocks deflned.

Enhanced analog polnrt deflnltlon blocks (functlon code 158)
can link to thts block. Llnldng functlon codes 158 and f59
results tn a polynomld adJusted lnput. A coefflclent mantlssa
of O.Oeffecttvely removes that term from the equattolt.

NOTE:Eventhoughonly 32 blockscan be defined,all 64 blocks

can be adjusted.Due to memorylimitationon the AMM module,
only 32 uniqueadjustmentscan be defined.Thus, two or more
blocksmustsharethe samescalingfactors(i.e.,the sarnefunction
code159)to adjustall 64 inputson the AMMmodule.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk TVpE Deecrlptlon

N R No usefuloutput

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlonls

S1 Y 0.000 R Full A coefficientmantissa
S2 Y 0 Full A coefficientexponent
S3 Y 0.000 R Full B coefficientmantissa
S4 Y 0 I Full B coefficientergonent
S5 Y 0.000 R Full C coefficientmantissa
S6 Y 0 I Full C coefficiEnterponent
S7 Y 0.000 R Full D coefficientmantissa

Adjustment
Polynomial
r-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 1 5 9- 1
FunctionGode159

pontinued)
SPECIFI CATTOATS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deserlptlonls

S8 Y 0 Full D coefficientexponent
S9 Y 0.000 R Full E coefficientmantissa
sl0 Y 0 I Full E coefficientexponent
sl1 Y 0.000 R Full F coefficientmantissa
sl2 Y 0 Full F coefficientexponent
sl3 Y 0 Full Prescaleexponent
NOTES:
1.A =31x1052
B =S3x10s
C =55x10So
D =57x10$
E =59x1Os10
F =Sllx1gSl2
X =lnputylgsls
2. To generate a negative exponent, add 256. For example, for an exponent of -1 for term A (S2):
((-1)+ 2s6) = 255
52 = 255
Valueof Exponent Valueof 52
0 0
-1 255
-2 2il
-3 253
J J
_20 236

Polynomial
Adjustment
1 5 9- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode160- InferentialSmithController

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The lnferentlal smtth controller (ISC) functlon code provldes

predtctlve control on an erTor slgnal developed from the pro-
cess vartable and set potnt tnputs rneasured agalnst an lnter-
nal model of the process. The ISC controller utlllzes a ftrst
order dynamlc model wlth deadttme to predlct the current
value of the process varlable based on past values of the con-
trol output. The ISC controller functton block provtdes regula-
tory process control slmllar to a PID algortthm. However, the
ISC controller has ttre added advantage of effectlve control for
processes with a sfnffIcant transport delay (deadtfme). The
ISC controller prevents controller nrtndup by llmttfng control
output to operator speclfled hfgh and low llmtts. Ttte ISC con-
troller also prevents wlndup tn cascade configuratlons wlth
the use of an externd reference value.

Processes wlth long deadttmes are dtfflcult to control wtth PID

controllers uslng tradttlonal tuntng methods. The ISC con-
troller algorithm functlonally replaces the standard PID con-
troller functlon. The ISC controller eastly deals wfth process
deadtirne and tunes wlth a slngle tunlng parameter.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Controlouput (CO)

SPECIFICATIO'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Bange Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof processvariable
s2 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of set point
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof track referencevalue

InferentialSmithController
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 6 0- 1
FunctionCode160

SPECI FICATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof track switchslgnal:
0 = track
1 = reloase
S5 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof (cascade)extemalreferencevalue
S6 N 0 0or1 Extemalreferenceflag:
0 = I|Offir8l
1 = uSoextemalreference
S7 Y 1.000 R Full Processmodelgain
S8 Y 0.000 R 0 - 9.2El8 Processmodeldeadtimein secs
S9 Y 0.000 R 0 - 9.2Elg Processmodellag time constrant in secs
sl0 Y 9 . 2E l g R 0 - 9.2E1g Controllertuningtime constantin secs
sl1 Y 105.000 R Full Controlouput highlimit
sl2 Y -5.000 R Full Controlouput low limit
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:254for CLCOUO4.
and |MCOMO4
1023for SLC01/21
2046for NMFGO1|0?,|MMFCOS,
CBC01andCSCO1
9998for |MMFC0S/O4
and IMMFPOilOAO3

EXPLANATION

Many processes have open-loop step responses stmtlar to the

one shown ln Figure 160-1. In an open-loop step test, the
controller ls in manual and the controller output (CO)
increases or decreases ln a slngle step. Ttle process response
is the behavior of the process varlable (PV) ln response to the
CO change. In tJ:e test, PV and CO are hftlally at steady-state
ne€rr the desired operatlng potrt (1.e., the vdues of P\f and CO
are constant over a reasonable period prtor to the CO step
change). The value of CO stays constarrt after the step
change, and PV is monltored unttl lt has reached a ne\il con-
stant value.

The ISC controller uses three parameters to characterlze the

open-loop step process response: 57, process model galn (K);
58, process model deadtime (D); arld 59, process model lag
time eonstant (L). Figure 160-1 shours an example of these
parameters. In this example, PV ls intttatly at steady-state at
30 degrees Celsius and CO is at ten percent. CO changes from
ten percent to 25 percent at ttme to. PV starts to move from lts
lniflat value at tim€ tr and reaches a new steady-state temper-
ature of about 70 degrees Celslus. Proeess model galn ls the
ratio of the steady-state change Xr P\I to the change ln CO, for
ex€rmple,

70"c-30"c =
K= 2.67C/%
25% - 10o/o

In this ex€rmple, K ts a posltive value (i.e., PV lncreases as CO

increases and PV decreases as CO decreases). In other cases,

lnferential
SmithController
-
160 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode160

q
ACO =ez- Cl

PROCESS
(s7) MODEL
GAIN

PROCESS
(s8) D - \ - b lrroDEL
DEADTIME

PROCESS
(se) L = L - t r MODEL
ISGTIME

TP?2Oa,ee

Figure 160'1. ISC @nfr:oller Process

MdelParameters

Kmay be a negative value (1.e.,PV lncreases as CO decreases

and PV decreases as CO increases).

Process model deadtime is the time of a change ln the control

output until a change ln the process varlable. Process model
lag time ls the time to reach 63 percent of the final value after
the response begins.

Inslde the ISC controller function code calculations, the algo-

rithm trles to predtct the behavtor of the real process based
on process model parameters 57, SB and S9. Because these
parameters are only approximations of the real process, there
will generally be erTors ln the predtction. A controller tuning
parameter (SlO), T, takes tnto account the effects of the pre-
dtction error. Smaller values of T would result tn more rapid
changes ln CO; whereas larger values of T would result ln
slower changes ln CO.

More specifically, lf T is less than L, there ls more lead action

in the control output; if T is greater tJran L, there is more lag

lnferentialSmithController
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 6 0- 3
FunctionCode160

actlon tn the control output. Control output ls llmlted to hfgh

and low limits specified tn Sl f and S12. Qualltattvely, larger
values of T should be used tf the model representatlon ls poor,
or qulck and large movements of CO are undeslr:able. One
metJrod for tunfng ts to hftlally set T to the sum of the process
model deadttme (S8) and the process model lag tlme constant
(Sg). Place the controller ln auto, perform set potnt changes
and adjust T to get a destrable response. Decrease T lf the
closed-loop response appears too sluggtsh. Increase T tf the
closed-loop response ts too osclllatory.

The process model parameters are appro:dmate descrtpttons

of the real process about a stngle operattng polnt. The model
becomes less accurate as operatlng condttlons move a\ilay
from the infflal point. Process model pararrreters may have to
be re-estlmated as operatlng condttlons change.

The ISC controller should not be used ln hfghly nonllnear

processes (example, pH control), or ln very fast processes (1.e.,
processes wlth dynamlcs domtnated by process galns wlth
negligible deadtime and lag effects). The ISC controller ls use-
ful for regulatory control with step-t5pe dlsturbances (e.9.,
load disturbances through processes where deadttme ls dom-
inant over lag effects). The ISC controller provtdes bumpless
tuning (i.e., CO will notjump as a result of changlng the value
of S7, 58, 59 or S10). In additiorl, the ISC controller provldes
bumpless manual-to-auto transfer.

Figure 160-2 shows the use of an external referenee stgnal tn

a cascade configuratlon. In t}ts case, the outer loop model
refers to the effects of the lnner loop PV on the outer loop PV;
the inner loop model refers to the effects of the tnnei loop
manipulated variable (example, valve posltton) on the lnner
loop PV. The inner loop PV is the external reference slgnal to
the outer loop ISC controller. Thts prevents controller nrtndup
in the outer loop ISC controller should the lnner loop satu-
rate. Specification SO of the outer loop ISC controller must
equal one.

SMITH
SP
PV
c
TR
TS

Figwe 160-2. Usittg ErternalReJereruce rn Cascade Cnnfrol

Inferential
SmithController
1 6 0- 4 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code160

Speclflcatlon Sl ls the block address of process varlable (PV).

Spectftcatlon S2 ls the block address of set polnt (SP).

Spectfleatlon Sg ls the block address of track reference ffR).

Ttre ISC control output (CO) wlll track the value tn thfs block
when the track swltch (TS) sfgnal ls zero.

s4 -TS Spectflcatlon 54 ls the block address of track swltch ffs). The

ISC control output (CO) wtU track <S3> when the value of TS
ls zero.

O = track
I = release

s5 rc Speciflcatlon 55 ls the block address of the cascade (C) exter-

nal reference value. When the ISC controller ls a control mod-
ule or outer loop controller tn a cascade conflguratlon, the
control loop uses the external reference value to prevent con-
troller rvlndup should the l/O module or lnner loop eontroller
saturate. T)rplcally, the external reference value ts the inner
loop process varlable. To use the external reference vdue, So
of the outer loop ISC controller must equal one.

S6 Spectfieatlon SO ts the externd reference flag. Set the value of

SO to one to use the external reference value deflned tn 55;
otherwlse, SO should always equal zero.

Q = nonnal conflguratlon, externd reference not used

I = us€ external reference

S7, S8 and 39 Parameters 57, 58 and 59 characterlze the response of the

process varlable to a step change ln control output. The ISC
controller uses a first-order lag urtth deadtime appro:drnatlon
of the actual process tn lts lnternal calculatlons. These
pErrameters are the ISC process model parameters. Refer to
Figure 160-1 for sample calculations of these parameters.

s7 -K Specificatlon SZ ts tlle process model galn (K). K can be posl-

tlve or negatlve.

S 8 - D Specification 58 is the process model deadttme (D).

sg -L Spectflcatlon 59 ls the process model lag tlme constant (L).

s10-T Specificatlon SIO ls the ISC controller tuntng parameter (T). T

must be greater than zero, Wthout lnforrnatlon on model
uncertalnty, a startlng potnt for tuntng T ls to set tt to the
sum of D (S8) and L (Sg).

InferentialSmithController
l-E96-2008 ls FEBregs 160 - 5
FunctionCode160

For control with an aceurate model, this parameter may be

set to 3O percent of process lag tlme, L (S9). For slower con-
troller response, or when the process model ls not consldered
accurate, the value of thts par€rmeter can be lncreased to the
o
process deadtime, D (S8) plus 3OO percent of the process lag
time, L (S9).

sl1 Specification S I I is the htgh control output llmlt. This specl-

fies the maximum output of the ISC controller block.

sl2 Speciflcation Sf 2 ls the low control output llmlt. Thts specl-

fies the mlnlmum output of tlle ISC controller block.

,SC Structure

Figure f 60-3 shows a block dtagram representatlon of the ISC

controller strrcture. In the diagram, IJ represents the effects
of disturbances on the process. U" ls an estlmate of the dls-
turbances and effects of modeling error. The ISC controller
uses a first-order \Mith deadtime approximation of the pro-
cess. If there are no modeling errors (i.e., process model
equals process), the process output is:

PV(s)= F(s) SP(s)+ [1 - F(s)] U(s)

where:

F(s) =
*exp(-sD)

ISC

- - - - - l
I
I
I
I

t
t- lsc

Figure 160-3. ISC Structwe

Inferential
SmithController
1 6 0- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode160

F(s) ls the closed-loop response of the system to a set polnt

change, and T ls a measure of the closed-loop response speed.
The controller ls baslcally a lead/lag feedforward controller
wtth the dtsturbtrnce estlmated by subtractlng the model out-
put from the actual measure process value. In real appltca-
tlons, there are always modellng errors and T ls a tuntng
parameter Ir the lead/lag controller.

Control output constralnts and process constralnts must be

consldered tn any controller deslgn. In the ISC controller
aforfttrm, thts ls done by constralrrlng the controller output
to wtthfn high and lour Umfts (Sf f and S12), and by taklng
into account the predlcted model output tn the controller cal-
culattons. If the control output saturates at a control limlt,
the tnput to the model wtll be a constarrt vdue (CO = htgh
limlt or low nmffl and hence the predtcted model output also
reaches a constant value.

The controller sees the saturated predlcted model output and

prevents the control cdculations from gro$dng beyond the
control limlts (1.e.,prevents controller wlndup). The same rea-
sonlng appltes to cascade control. When uslng the ISC eoll-
troller as the control loop, the lnner loop PV ts the external
reference stgnal (Flg. 160-2) and the firput to the process
model (Ftg. 160-3, 56=l). Thts external reference feedback
prevents controller nrlndup should the lnner loop saturate.

APPLICATIO,AIS

Figure 160-4 shows how to use the lnferenttal smlth control-

ler with a manual/automatlc statlon (functlon code 8O).

Ftgtre 160-4. Using the ISC withthe MIA Stntlon

InferentialSmithGontroller
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1e9s 160 - 7
ffi
I

I
 FunctionGode161- SequenceGenerator

GENERAT DESCRIPTIO'V

The sequence generator functlon code contalns a series of

masks tl:at are stepped through on an event or tlme basls. The
masks deflne the states of etght boolean outputs for each step.

In additton to the elght step masks, there ls a default mask

often called Step 0 or E-STOP. If the block resets or Jump to
Step 0 executes, E-STOP (executed stop) is the output. E-
STOP defrnes the state of the outputs. Sequential stepping in
ascending numerlcal order, and Jumphg to speclflc step
numbers are the two methods of event stepping.

If a sequence has more than elght steps, sequenee generator

blocks can link ln serles. If there are more than eight outputs
per step, sequence generator blocks cEIn be llnked in parallel
to provtde the requtred number of outputs.

Unllke the other batch functton blocks (123, L24, L29, etc.),
the last sequence generator ln the series is the output.

UTILIATION

NMFCOl

IMLMMOz
IMMFCO3

IMMFPOl

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N B Output1 of currentstep
N+1 B Output2 of cunentsteP
N+2 B Output3 of currentstep
N+3 B Output4 of currentsteP
N+4 B Output5 of cunentsteP
N+5 B Output6 of currentstep
N+6 B Output7 of currentstep
N+7 B Output8 of cunentsteP
N+8 R Cunentstep number
N+9 R Seconds remaining in cunent steP
1r1+10 B Steptaken(logic0 to 1 transition)

SequenceGenerator
l-E96-200B 15FEB1995 1 6 1- 1
 FunctionCode 161

SPECtFtCATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deecrlptlon

s1 N 0 I Note 1 Strartingblockaddressof previouss€guencegeneratorin
series(0 = firstin series)
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof step trigger(0 to 1 transition)
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof step hold:
0 = release
1 = hold
S4 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof steptimerhold:
0 = rolease
1 = hold
S5 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof resettrigger(0 to 1 transition)
S6 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof stepjump trigger(0 to 1 transition)
S7 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof stepjump number
S8 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof outputdisableflag
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Disablemask
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Step 1 outputmask
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Step 1 time in secs
s12 Y 0.000 R Full Step2 outputmask
s13 Y 0.000 R Full Step2 time in secs
s14 Y 0.000 R Full Step3 outputmask
s15 Y 0.000 R Full Step3 time in secs
s16 Y 0.000 R Full Step4 outputmask
s17 Y 0.000 R Full Step4 time in secs
s18 Y 0.000 R Full Step5 outputmask
s19 Y 0.000 R Full Step5 time in secs
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Step6 outputmask
s21 Y 0.000 R Full Step6 time in secs
s22 Y 0.000 R Full Step7 ouput mask
s23 Y 0.000 R Full Step7 time in secs
s24 Y 0.000 R Full Step8 outputmask
s2s Y 0.000 R Full Step I time in secs

1. Maximumvaluesare: 254tor cLcozt04and tMCoMo4

1023for |MLMMO2 andSLCOI4Z1
2046for NMFCollOz,lMMFc0s, tMMpcol, cBcot andcsc0l
9998for IMMFCOS/O4 and tMMFpOllDztOg

EXPLANATION

The sequence generator block controls a batch process by

providing outputs that define the operaflng states for each
step in a process for all the devtces used. Ftgure 161-1 lllus-
trates a tlryical €ura,ngement. A sequence monltor or mul6-
sequence monitor block monitors the process and selects the
order ln which tJre process steps execute. Ttre step number
then goes to the sequence generator block that outputs the
values identified with that step. Any number of sequence gen-
erator blocks can be linked ln serles or parallel to provtAe tne
required number of outputs or steps.

SequenceGenerator
1 6 1- 2 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode161

cs
T
SH
SAT
ES
sll
SAP
sr0
sl1
sl
s1 STEP s8

FEEDBACK
INPUTS

STEP INDICATORS TO
AUXILIARY LOGICS

F-Igure76 1- 1. &quencn Monltor Block U sed b Corrfitolta B atch hocess

Flgure f 61-2 lllustrates a conflguraflon wlth sequence gener-

ator blocks ganged Xr serles and ln parallel. Sequence genera-
tors Ir serles lncrease the step range by factors of elght. In
Ftgure f Ol -2, blocks 60, 7L and 82 zrre ln serles, provtdlngz4
steps. Runnlng pardlel to thts sequence ls tl:e block serles
93, lO4 and I15. The flrst sequence generator has the value
of zero for 51, ldenttfftng tt as ttre ftrst block tn the serles,
urlth outputs zero through etght. In the flgure, blocks 6O and
93 are the first tn the serles. Ttte second block ln the serles
must be greater ln number tllan the flrst. Blocks 7l and 104
€rre the second blocks tn the serles, they have values of 60
and 93, respecttvely, for Sl. Thts shows that they are not the
first blocks ln the serles. They have step outputs nine
through 16. Thts series relatlonship contlnues untll the ma:d-
mum number of steps needed ts reached.

Sequence generators ln serles monltor the step number and

step tahen outputs from the precedtng sequence generator
block. Therefore, the outputs of tlre last sequence generator

SequenceGenerator
l-E96-2008 1sFEBises 161 - 3
FunctionCode161

I
(161) OI,TPUT 1

STEP
JUMP

OUTPUT
DISABLE

Ot,TPUT 9
0s1 1O4 sl

OTJTPUT 16

STEPS o.8 STEPS 9.16

Figure 767-2. *qtrcrrce Generator Blocles Ganged rn Serfes

andinParalletto houide 24 Stepsfor 16 Otrtpnts

in a series represent the outputs used to drive devlee drlver

blocks.

In batch control applications, tt ts necessary to run the out-

puts (step jump trigger and step Jump number) from the lead
sequence monitor block (functton code I24l to all of the
sequence generator blocks used by the sequence. In thts way,
all blocks will move from step to step tn unlson. Furthermore,
when using a sequence monitor (functlon code L24l or mulH-
monitor block (function code 135), leave dl step timers ln the
sequence generator blocks at the default (zero) value.

Figure 16r-3 shows an applicatton not ustnr$ sequence monl-

tor or multi-sequence monltor blocks. When sequence monttor

SequenceGenerator
1 6 1- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode161

or multl-sequence monltor blocks are not used, all sequence

generator blocks ganged together must reference the same
reset, Jump trtgger, Jump step number, and dlsable lnputs.
Thls wlil force the sequence generator blocks to work ln unl-
son. If the step tlmer ts belng used, a good technlque ls to take
the step taken lndlcator and current step output from the last
sequence genemtor block for tlre flrst etght outputs, and use
ttrem as the step trtgger and step number lnputs for the other
sequenee generator blocks used ln the sequence. Set the step
tlmers for outputs greater than elght to zeto. Thls way, the
flrst serles ch;orin of sequence generator blocks wtll be tlmer
controlled, and wlll drtve the rematnlng blocks ln untson.

(16l) OUTpUTI
60 si 71 si

srEPs 0-8 ST EPS 9.16 STEPS 17-24

(161) OttTPuTe

0sl 1O4 sl

121
ouTPUTio

STEPS O-8 ST EPS 9- 16

NOTE:Slt, S13,S15,S17.S19,S21,S23andS25ofbtocks60,71and82 alg allmnzeo. Sll, Sl3, S15,S17,Stg, S21'S23andS25

of blocks93, 104and 115arBall zero.

Ngure 767-3. *qterlce Generator Bloclcs Ganged in Serfes

and in ParaIIeL to Prouid,e Aulrlmrrtic Tvned Steppiry

SequenceGenerator
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 6 1- 5
FunctionCode161

With series sequence generator blocks, the sequence genera-

tor bloek handling outputs one through elght must have a
lower block address than the block for Steps I through 16.
Likewis€, the sequence generator block Steps 9 through 16
must have a lower block address tlran the one for Steps 17
throug}e 24. This is trre for all chatned blocks.

Processlng of inputs to sequence generator blocks ts done ln

the follonring order: reset, dtsable, Jump, step hold, next step,
and tlme hold.

To define the output masks, the operator enters a real value

that interndly converts to btnary dtgtts. Ttle operator deflnes
the output values needed for a gtven step, ttren converts them
to a real number as shown ln Table f61-1. The real nurnber
representlng the desired output ts the step mask for tl:e
deslred step output.

Table 767-7. Deftnition of Step Inputs

Jor Seqtrcnce Generalpr Blrcles
ilSB Blt number LSB
Typesof Values
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Weighted decimal value 128 &r 32 16 I 4 2 1
Example output values needed for a 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
given step

Specifications

51 - PREV (Block address of preuions sequence generator blor;k in

series) If the value equals zero, then the block ts the ftrst ln
the series. Each sequence generator block can output elght
values for eight steps of a process. If more steps are requlred,
the blocks can be ganged ln serles. If more than elght outputs
are required, the blocks can be ganged rn parallel.

S2 - STRIG (Bloek address oJ step trigger) The value tn thls block con-
trols sequence generator step executlon when the sequence
generator block is performtng sequenttal stepplng. On a zero
to one transition of this lnput, the block wtll exeeute the step
number which immediately follows the current step number.

53 - HOLD (Bloek qddress of step hold input)When thJs tnput ls a one,

and steps are being executed sequentidly, the advance to the
next step is disabled. When the input goes to zero, the next
step will be executed. The step hold wfll not dtsable the step
timer, but will prevent the block from executtng the next step
once the timer has exptred. All blocks ln serles must have the
same step hold input.

O = execute next step

I = hold

Sequence
Generator
1 6 1- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 161

54 - THOLD (Blrck qddress of timer ,rold Tnput) When thts lnput ts a

one, the step tlmer ls frozen at lts current value. Art tnput of
zero wtll cause the tlmer to resume Umlng exactly where lt left
off. All blocks tn sertes must have the same tlmer hold lnput.

Q = release
I = hold

55 I RESET (Blrctc qddress of rcsrlt trigger) On a zero to one transltlon

of thts lnput, the block wlll output the dtsable mask and reset
to Step O. Atl sequence generators ganged together ln serles or
parallel must have the same reset lnput.

56 - JMPTRG (Block address of step jump trigger) When the value ln the
block indlcated by tlrts speclflcatlon makes a zeto to one tran-
sition, the step tndtcated by the step Jump number (S7) wlll be
executed.

S7 - JMPSTP (Block address oJ thle step to fu e;xeeutrld utlreltr thre jump

step trigger makes o O b 7 transition) Jumptng to a step
number less than reto \nllll cause a Jump to Step O (same as
reset). Jumphg to a number htgber than the tdghest step
number avallable ln the sertes ch;o;in urtll eause the hlghest
avatlable step number to be executed. All sequence generator
blocks ln a serles or parallel chatn must have the same Jump
step number and Jump step tr189er to operate ln untsolt.

S8 - DISFLG (Bloek qddre$s of output disable triggerl When thJs output

ls equd to one, tt sets tl:e outputs equal to the dlsable mask,
but does not move the step number. If the steps are ttmed, the
output dtsable trigger wlll hold the bloek at the current step
arrd freeze the step tlmer. The output dtsable trtgger does not
disable step trtggers; the block wtll sttll execute the sequence
and advance the step number, but tJle output \illll be the dls-
able mask. All sequence generators ganged togetJrer ln serles
or parallel must have the same dtsable trlgger.

59 - DISMSK (Disable mask) Thls lnput ls a real value whlch, when sub-
jected to a bireary converslon as shown tn Table 16f-1, pro-
vides safe outputs for dl devlces controlled by the sequence
generator block. Ttre dlsable mask ls output tn three sltua-
tions: when the disable tnput ls set, when the block ls reset,
and after dl steps have been completed. In batch control, the
dtsable mask ls the same as Step O and ls resenred as an E-
STOP (executed stop).

s10,s12,s14,S16, (Mask 7 through mask 8)These lnput values are real values
518,S20,S22and representtng the output mask assoclated urlth Step I (mask
s24 one) tJrrough Step 8 (mask elght). The output mask ts a serles
of binrary digits deftnfng the operatlng states for all devlces
assoctated wlth the sequenee generator bloek. Refer to
Table 161- I for the definltlon of step tnputs for sequence gen-
erator blocks.

SequenceGenerator
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 6 1- 7
 FunctionCode161

sll , S13,515,S17, (Time I through time S, Thls represents the ttme ln seconds
S19,S21,S23and that tt urill take to run the step. Ttre Xtdlvtdual step tJmers
s25 start whenever the correspondtng step ls entered. If a step
tlmer ls enabled for a partlcular step, the sequence generator
automatically advances to the next sequentlal step when ttre
step timer expires. Step tfmers are dlsabled when less tJran or
equal to r.ero. The tlmer hold and dlsable flags freeze tlre step
tlmer. The step hold tnput does not freeze the step ttmer, but
does disable the advance to the next step when the tlmer
exPtres. When the step hold ts removed, the block urlll
advanee to the next step. Adaptfng the value of a currently
ntnnin$ step timer causes t}re tlmIrg to begln agaln at the
adapted value. T\rning any speclflcatlon durfng an actlve step
restarts the current step timer to tts beglnnfng value.

Outputs

N throughN+7 Outputs N through N+7 are tJ:e outputs (one tlrrough eight) of
the current step. The output is a boolean value representlng
the operating state of the devtce controlled by the sequence
generator block. All outputs should be read from the last
sequence generator block tn the serles.

N+8 Output N+8 is the current step number.

N+9 Output N+9 is the time rematning ln curent step Xr seconds.

N+l 0 Output N+10 is the step talcen lndtcator. Thl,s output reflects
whether tJle next step has been taken. A zeto to one transltton
of thts output lndicates that the block has begun the next
step in the sequence.

APPLICATIOAIS

Refer to the applications section of functlon code 123 for an

example of a sequence generator block used ln bateh control.

SequenceGenerator
1 6 1- g 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode162- Digital SegmentBuffer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The digftat segment buffer funetlon code talces a snapshot of

four dtgttal values slmultaneously to ellmlnate the posslblltty
of lnconslstent data fithfn a segment. Any serles of segment ;
buffer blocks (analog or dtgltal) unbroken by nonbuffer blocks
ls €rn unili'rternrptlble sequence wtthtn a segment. Thus, ?ll
outputs of the serles of blocks are conslstent for tJle duratlon !
of the segment cycle.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Valueof first input
N+1 B Valueof secondinput
N+2 B Valueof thirdinput
N+3 B Valueof fourthinput

SPECIFICATIO,N'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
S2 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof third input
S4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthinput
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor CLC02/04 and IMCOMO4
1023 for |MLMMO2and SLCO1|21
z@;Gfor NMFCD1|O?,|MMFC05,lMMPC0l, CBCO1and CSGO1
9998 for IMMFCOUO4and |MMFPOI|OUO3

DigitalSegmentButfer
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 162 - 1
FunctionCode 162

EXPLANATION

Use functlon code 162 tn segments that are not hfgh prlortty.
Thts insures a hlgher prforlty segment cannot tntermpt the
cument segment untll all four speclfted tnputs update. If a
hlgher priortty segment trles to lnternrpt the current segrnent
after one or more of these lmputs update tn tlre crurent cycle,
this block suspends executlon of the hfgher prtortty segrnent
untll lt recelves tJ:e updated values for all four of the lnputs. If
tJ:e higher prlorfry segment lnternrpts the lower prlortty seg-
ment before any of the values update and whlle the functlon
ls executtng, the prevlous outputs are used.

DigitalSegmentButfer
162-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode163- AnalogSegmentBuffer

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The analog segment buffer functlon code takes a snapshot of

four analog values slmultaneously. Slmultaneous snapshots
ellmtnate the posslblllty of lnconslstent data wtthilr a seg-
ment. Any serles of segment buffer blocks (analog or dlgltat)
unbroken by nonbuffer blocks ls an unlrrternrptlble sequence
fithfn a segment. Thus, all outputs of the serles of blocks a,re
consistent for the duratlon of the segment cycle.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Valueof first input
N+1 R Valueof secondinput
N+2 R Valueof thirdinput
N+3 R Valueof fourthinput

SPECIFICATIO.IVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof first input
s2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof secondinput
S3 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof thirdinput
S4 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof fourthinput
NOTE:
1. Ma:<imumvalues are: 254lor CLC0U04 and |MCOMO4
1023 for IMLMMO2and SLCO1421
2046 for NMFGOI|O?,|MMFCO5,lMMPC0l, CBC01 and CSC01
9998 lor |MMFG03/04 and lMMFP0l/0203

AnalogSegmentButfer
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 6 3- 1
FunctionCode 163

EXPLANATION

Use the analog segment buffer functlon code tn segments that

I
are not the hfghest prlorlty. Thts lnsures a hlgher prtortty seg-
ment cannot tnternrpt the cur:rent segment untll all four of
the specllled lnputs update. If a hfgher prtorfty segment trles
to lnternrpt the current segment after one or more of these
lnputs update in the current cycle, thts block suspends eKe-
cutlon of the htgher prtortty segment untll the four values
update. If the higher prtortty segment lnternrpts the lower one
before any of the values update whlle thts functlon ls execut-
ing, the previous values are output.

NOTE: The output updateis protectedfrom interruption,but the

functioncode executioncould be interruptedwhile readingthe
inputvalues.

AnalogSegmentButfer
163 - 2 15 FEB1995
l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode164- SegmentControl(|MCOM04)

GENERAT DESCRIPTION

The segment control functlon code groups subsequent blocks

tnto a scan cycle executed at a speclfted rate and priority.
Each IMCOMO4 Controller Module can support up to seven
segrnent control blocks. Each segment control block provldes
two outputs: the elapsed tlme of the prevlous cycle and tJre
elapsed tlrne of the current cycle. Addlflonal IMCOMO4 Con-
troller Module segments do not perrntt functlon blocks for
lnput and output operatlons.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Segmentperiodmeasuredfromthe startof the previouscycleto
the startof the cunentrycle in the units specifiedby S2
N+1 R Executiontirneof the curent segmentcyclein the units
specifiedby 52

SPECIF'CAT'OA'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 1 I 1 -255 Uniquesegmentpriority,1 through255with 1 beingthe high-
est priority
S2 N 0 0orl Timeunitsof cycletime:
0 = se@nds
1 = minutes
s3 Y 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2E18 Minimum cycle period of segment in the units specified by S2
S4 Y 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2E18 Cycle period alarm limit in the units specified by 52.
Segment alarm is reflected by module status
S5 N 0 I 0or1 PIDextemalresetoption:
0 = normal
1 = extemal
S6 N 0 Full Spare
S7 N 0.000 R Full Spare

SegmentControl(|MCOMO4)
t-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 164-1
FunctionCode164

EXPLANATION

The segment control block dtvldes the set of functlon bloeks

lnto subsets (segments), and speclfles ttre operatlng parame-
ters for each segment hdFfdually. A segment starts urlth a
segment control block and ends at the next htgher segment
control block or last block. Funcflon blocks for tnputs and
outputs are only permttted wtthin the flrst segment.
Table 164- I lists these permttted blocks.

NOTE:FixedI/O blocks(201through252)are consideredto be in

the firstsegment.

Table 764-7. Permitted Input arld" On&fi

Ftnction Blocks utithrn the FTrst Segment
Function Functlon
Descriptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
4 Pulsepositioner 41 DigitalinpuUmodule bus
20 Indicatorstation 42 DigitalinpuUloop
21 Basicstation 45 DigitaloupuUloop
22 Cascadestation 62 Remotecontrolmemory
23 Ratio station 63 AnaloginputlisUmodule bus
25 AnaloginpuUmodule
bus u DigitalinputlisUmodule
bus
26 AnaloginpuUloop 66 Analogtrend
28 AnalogoutpuUmodule
bus 68 Remotemanualset constant
30 AnalogoutpuUloop

If a segment is in alarm, blt three of the module's second sta-

tus byte fbit seven is the most sfgnfflcant btt) [rdtcates the
alarm. A value of O.O overrldes the tuntng or adapttng cycle
period (S3) or alarm limit (S4) to a negailve value.

Specifications

51 - SPRI (Segment prioritg) Specification Sl asstgns executlon prlorl-

ties to up to seven active segments. An active segment ls one
that is ready to run or is in the process of belng run. If two or
more segments etre active, the processor wlll run the highest
priority segment. Assign segment prtorlty from one to seven.
The segments execute in ascending numertcal order.

52 - TUNIT Time units of execution cycle.

Q = seeonds
I = minutes

s3 - cYcTlM (Target segment exeeution time in *eonds) In each seg-

ment, blocks execute in ascendlng numertcal order. A cycle
consists of one execution of the blocks plus any tdle flme
(cycle time remaining after the blocks have been executed).
Cycle time is defrned as the length of ttme frorn ttre start of

SegmentControl(|MCOMO4)
164-2 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctlonCode 164

one cycle to the start of the ner<t cycle. Clcle tlrre should be
set for the length of tlme lt talres to run all the segments. If
the cycle tlme ls set to the tlme lt talres to run the htghest prl-
ortty segrnent only, none of the other segments wlil run.

NOTE: The minimumcycle time resolutionis ten milliseconds

(0.01second).Therefore,the fastestpossiblecycletime is ten mil-
liseconds(S3 equals0.00or 0.01).

s 4 - CYCALM (sfegment cgele time o;larrn limit, SpectflcaUon S4 ls the

segment cycle tlme alarm llmlt, expressed ln the ttme unlts
selected wlth 52. If cycle ttme exeeeds tlrts value, blt three of
the module's second status byte wlll be set.

s 5 - XRES PID reset mode.

Q = normal
I = external

This speclflcatlon affects all functlon code 18 and 19 blocks

in the segment. When 55 equals one, the lnternal memory of
all functlon code l8 and 19 blocks ln the segment wtil follow
the track lnput, regardless of the status of the track release
flag. A change Ie tnput ls modtfled by proportlonal and deriva-
tive action, and ls added to the track stgnal. Th.ls comblned
signal ls the output.

Reset prevents controller wtndup. Reset wtndup may occur ln

batch systems where controllers may be monltorlng the eon-
trol vartable but not performlng any control actlon durtng the
current step. In other words, the output of the PID block ts
not used tn the curTent step. The controller recelves the slg-
nal, talces correctlve actlon, sees no result, and talres correc-
tlve actlon 4gatn. As long as tJre controller recelves no results
from lts control actlon, lt contlnues correctlve actlon. When
the controller ts later called lnto servlces on some other step
of the proeess, lt ls wound up so far beyond the value of the
controlled varlable that lt cannot control lt. The external reset
optlon keeps the controller altgned when lt ls not used for
control functlons.

Outputs

N Output N is the elapsed ttme of the prevtous cycle tn seconds.

The elapsed ttme lncludes any segment ldle tlme. If the ttme
required to run tlre block ts less than the requested cycle
tlme, the remalnder ls ldle tlme spent waltlng before starttng
the next cycle. Any tdle ttme ls avallable for lower prtortty seg-
ments. This output verlftes that the cycle ttme speclfled wlth
53 ls met. If the output ls greater than ttre requested cycle
time set by 53, the segment ls consumIrg more proeessor
time than requested. If thts happens, Sg must be lnereased
until N is equal to the ttme lt really talses to run the segment.

SegmentControl(!MCOM04)
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB199s 1il -3
FunctionCode 164

N+l Output N+I ls the elapsed tlme of curent enecuflon cycle tn

the tlme untts spectffed with 52. Thts elapsed ttme does not
lnclude any segment ldle "me. It [s a measure of the achral
runtime of the blocks wtthtn the segment, plus ttre block
mntlme of all htgher prlortty segments. Ttrts output verlfles
that the segment is runntng. A contlnual upward ramp tndt-
cates that the segment ls not runnhg. Thls occurs when
higher priortty segments consume dl the processor flrre.

QgglnentControl(lMCOMO4)
164-4 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode165- MovingAverage

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The morrlng aver4ge functlon code computes a morrlng average

from n s€rmples talren at a deflned tnteryal. The sample buffer
fllls with €rn lnput value at the end of each cycle. At every
sample tnterval, ttre curent tnput value replaees tfie oldest
value in the sample buffer. At each sample tntervd, a ne\il.
average is calculated.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Sumof samplesdividedby the numberof samples

SPECIFICATIO,IVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof averagedvalue
S2 N 1 I Note2 Numberof samplesin movingaverage
s3 Y 1.000 R 0.0- 9.2El8 Sampleintervalin seconds
S4 N 1 I 0or1 Ouput track switch:
0 = track
1 = DOilIl8|
NOTES:
1. Maximum valuss are: 254 tor |MCOMO4and CLCOAO4-
1023for SLC01/21
zC4;O for NMFC01|02,|MMFC05and CBC01
9998for fMMFC0S/O4 and IMMFPOUOAA9
2. Ranges are: 1 to 40 for CLC0Z04and |MCOM04
CB@l andSLGO1
lMMFPOllOUOg,
1 to 255for NMFCOI4O2,|MMFC0S/04/05,

MovingAverage
t-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 165 - 1
FunctionCode 165

EXPLANATION

The morrlng average block calculates the average of n values

by dividitrg the sum of the samples by the number of samples.
It operates in two modes, normal and track. [n t]re normal
mode, the block reads a neril tnput, dlscards the oldest sam-
ple, and calculates a ne\il average eaeh tlme tlre sample tnter-
val passes. In the track mode, the output equals the tnput. At
each cycle, the buffer fills with the tracked value.

The sample interval and the number of samples used €rre con-
figurable. The samples are stored ln a firct in .firct out
(FIFO) sample buffer. During module start-up, the sample
buffer fills with the lnput values from each scan cycle. After
start-up, the moving average functlon code computes the
starting average witll the first sample lnteryal. Therefore, the
first output is the s€rme as the trirput (flrst sample dlvlded by
one), the second output ls the average of the ffrst two lnputs
(first and second sample dtvtded by two), and so on.

Example: lf n equalsfiveat powerup andthe inputequals2.0:

2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

tt=lvalidsamPle

2.0+ 0.0+ 0.0+ 0.0+ 0.0

Output = = 2.0
- = 2.0
l

On secondscanthe inputequals4.0:

4.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

tt=2 valid samPles

4.0+ 5.0+ 0.0+ 0.0+ 0.0

Output = = 6.0
- = 3.0
2

Specificationst
sl -x Specification Sl is the value of the current tnput.

52 -N Specification 52 is the number of samples used ln ttre average

calculatlon. Th,e allowable number of samples ts one to 4O tn
COM and Crc modules and one to 255 tn other modules.

s3 - INT Specification 53 is the sample interval ln seconds. Thts specl-

fication defines tJ:e length of time between tnputs. It also
defines the lengttr of ttme between calculatlons, because a
new avera$e is calculated each ttme a ne\il vdue ls added.

MovingAverage
1 6 5- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 165

54 - TRCK Spectflcatlon S4 ls the block address of track lnput. [n the

track mode, the output tracks the lnput; there ls no operatlon
performed on the lnput. Ttle tracked values flll the lnput
buffer, but they are not averaged. In tlre normal mode, the
lnput feeds lnto a sample buffer and a ne\nr output ls calcu-
lated each tlme an tnput ls entered.

O = track
I = Irofmal

Outputs

N Output N ts the sum of the samples dlvtded by the number of

samples tn the nonnal mode. [n ttre track mode, the output
equals the lnput. In both modes, the cruTent (prevlously cal-
culated) vdues are not retalned.

NOTE:ln normalmode,the movingaverageoutputis valid only

aftern sampleshavebeen processed.

MovingAverage
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 6 5- 3
ffi
I

I
 Function Code 166,r Integrator

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The lntegrator functlon code cornputes the tntegfal of an

tnput stgnal uslng the trapezoldal n.le of lntegratlon and
double preclslon artthmetlc. The result of the lntegratlon
umes the galn (SZ1 ls the output. Integratlon begtns at an
rnrilal value (Sg). Htgh (S5) and low (56) llmtts affect the
output (l{).

Speclflcatlon 52 spectfles the tlme untts: seconds, mlnutes or

hours.

The automatic reset option (S8 equals one) restarts the tntegfa-
tion from the tntflal value when the integrator reaches the htgh
or low llmit. In the automatlc reset mode, the Umit flag ls set for
one cycle after the integrator reaehes a limit. In automatle
reset mode, a counter or second integrator can count overflows
from the tntegrator, formtng a multistage lntegratlon.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N R Value of integral
N+1 B Limit flag:
Q = good
1 = high or low limit reached

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof processvariable
S2 N 1 I 0 , 1o r 2 Timebaseof integration:
0 = Soconds
1 = mihutes
2 = hours

Integrator
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 166 - 1
FunctionCode166

SP ECIFl CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of initial value
S4 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof resetsignal:
0 = tesot
1=ilfl

S5 Y 9.2 El8 R Full High limit

S6 Y -9.2E18 R Full Low limit
S7 Y 1.000 R Full Gain
S8 Y 0 B 0or1 Automaticreset:
0=off
1=OD
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare:254lor CLCOUOAand |MCOMO4
1023for SLC01/21
zo4,O
for NMFCOUA?,MMFCOS, CBG01andCSC01
9998lor |MMFC0S/O4
and IMMFPOIIOUO3

EXPLANATION

The integrator block computes the area under a curve using

the trapezoid rrle:

*(t)dt=hl\ .
f ,=='on Yt+ Y z + .*. .Y n - r - A

where:

h = TLme between sarnple potnts on the curve (step sDe).

The integrator block reads the segment control block
to determine the scan time for the segment that tl:e
integrator block is in.
n = Number of samples taken. Ttre samples are always
tahen at equal intervals (h).
Y = Value of t]:e integrated signal . Ysequals tlre signal at
the start of the tntegratiorl, and % equals the signal
at interval n of the integration.

The trapezoid mle executes by the tntegrator block \Mith h

equal to sc€rn time. This provides the smallest posslble step
size. Since the error in the trapezoid rule ls a functton of step
size, the smallest step stze results in the smallest error. The
integrator block then scales the result of the tntegration
based on the value of 52. Specilication 52 reflects the time
base of the integrated signal. For example, lf input flow ts in
gallons per minute, 52 equals one (minute).

Integrator
1 6 6- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 166

The tntegfator block operates in two modes: norutal and

track. In normal mode, the block tntegrates the values from
the tnput block Sl on the tJme basis selected with 52. In track
mode, the output tracks the lnput and integration does not
take place.

NOTE:The two modes,normaland track,are basedon the reset

input signal set in S4. When S4 is set to one, integrationtakes
place.WhenS4 is set to zero,it tracksthe S3 input.

Specifications
sl -x Speclficatton Sl ls the block address of the desired slgnal.

S2 -TB SpecificaUon 52 ls the tlme base of the tntegratioll.

Q = seconds
I = minutes
t = hours

s3 - lNlr Specificauon 53 ts the block address of tlre lniilal value. Ttle

hfual value ts the output value during start-up and after an
automatlc or forced reset.

54 - RESET Specification 54 ls the block address of the reset sfgnal. When

<S+> equals zero, the tntegral output N inittalizes to the ltnl-
tial value <S3>. When <S4> equals one, integratton talres
place.

S5 -HL Speciflcation 55 ls the high output limit. When the input

rCaches or exceeds this value and 58 equals one, the block
resets to the inlfld value.

S6 -LL Speclficatlon 56 ls the lornr output llmlt. When the lnput

reaches or falls below thts value and Sg equals one, the block
resets to the inifid value.

57 -K Specificauon 57 ls the gain value. This speciflcatlon scales

the output N to a desired value ran$e.

S8 -AR Speciflcation S8 ts the automatlc reset flag. In the automatlc

reset mode, the block resets to a deflned fdtfal lrput <S3>
value after the input value reaches either llmit.

Q = off (no reset)

f = on (automattc reset)

Outputs

N Output N ls the value of tl:e lntegral. [f the value of t]re lnte-

gral reaches or exceeds either of the limits and 58 equals
iero, the output holds at the limit and the llmlt flag is set.

Integrator
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 166 - 3
FunctionGode166

N+l Output N+l is the ltmit flag. Ttrts output is a boolean signal
that tndicates when the tntegral output N has reached or
e:rceeded the high or low ltmit spectfled by 55 or 56. If the
block is in automatic reset mode, this value goes to one for
one cycle when the integral reaches either Umtt. After tJ:e
cycle, the value returns to zero. If the block ts not tn auto-
matic reset mode, t}ls value goes to one and remalns there as
long as the integral ls at the limit.

O - good
I = linrlt reached or exceeded

Integrator
1 6 6- 4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionGode167r Polynomial

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The polynomlal functlon code tmplements a seventh order

polynomlal.

Output= 12( + Btf + N + Df + Exs+ Fxz+ Gx + H

TWo spectftcatlons dellne the coefflclents A through H:

o T\.rnable marrtlssa value.

o Nontunable po\rer of ten.

The actual value of the coefflclent ls tJre product of the man-

tlssa and the power of ten. For example:

= Amanx l$w
A= St6 x 10s17

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N R Resultof polynomialevaluation

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

s1 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof X input
S2 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissaof H coetficient
S3 N 0.000 R Full Powerof 10 of H coefficient
S4 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissaof G coefficient
S5 N 0.000 R Full Powerof 10 of G coefficient
S6 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissaof F coefficient
S7 N 0.000 R Full Power of 10 of F coefficient
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissaof E coefficient

Polynomial
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 167 - 1
FunctionCode 167

SPECI FI CATI OwS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S9 N 0.000 R Full Powerof 10 of E coefficient
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissaof D coefficient
sl1 N 0.000 R Full Powerof 10 of D coefficient
sl2 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissa of C coefficient
sl3 N 0.000 R Full Powerof 10 of C coefficient
s14 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissa of B coefficient
sl5 N 0.000 R Full Powerof 10 of B coefficient
s16 Y 0.000 R Full Mantissaof A coefficient
s17 N 0.000 R Fufl Powerof 10 of A cpefficient
NOTE:
1. Maxirnum
valuesare: 254tor CLCOAOAand IMCOMO4
1023for SLC01/21
2046for NMFCOlrcz,|MMFCOSandCBC01
9998for |MMFCOUO4 and !MMFP01|0U03

Polynomial
1 6 7- 2 15 FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode168- lnterpolator

GENERATDESCRIPTION

The tnterpolator functlon code outputs a value determlned by

a two dlmensional llnear Interpolatlon of the two inputs. The
coordinates of the vdues fithfn a deflned five-by-five table
are the basls of the tnterpolatton. If elther lnput ls outstde the
table, the flrst output becomes the largest posslble number.
The second output ls a boolean value that tuedtcates lf the
input potnts are tn the flve-by-flve table ra.nge. If elther lnput
ls outslde the table, the second output becomes a orle.

UTILIATION

O
OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N R Interpolated outputvalue
N+1 B Ftangeof inputs:
g = good
1 = at leastone inputis out of range

SPECIFICATIOfVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 6 Note 1 Block address of X value
S2 N 6 I Note 1 Blockaddressof Yvalue
S3 N 0.000 R Full Minimum value of X (X coordinate of 21)
g N 100.000 R Full Maximum value of Y (Ycoordinate of 21)
S5 N 100.000 R Full Maximumvalueof X (X coordinateof Z5sl
S6 N 0.000 R Full Minimumvalueof Y (Y coordinateof Zss)
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Zn tableentry
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Zl2table entry
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Zgtable entry
s10 Y 0.000 R Full Zl,atable entry
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Zlstableentry

lnterpolator
r-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 1 6 8- 1
FunctionCode 168

SPECIFI CATIO,wS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

sl2 Y 0.000 R Full Z2l tableentry
s13 Y 0.000 R Full Zz tableentry
s14 Y 0.000 R Full Z2stableentry
sls Y 0.000 R Full Zz4tableentry
sl6 Y 0.000 R Full Zzstableentry
sl7 Y 0.000 R Full Zil tableentry
s18 Y 0.000 R Full Z'o_tableentry
sl9 Y 0.000 R Full Z$table entry
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Z34tableentry
s21 Y 0.000 R Full 4stable entry
s22 Y 0.000 R Full Z4l table entry
s23 Y 0.000 R Ful Z42tableentry
s24 Y 0.000 R Full Zgtable entry
s25 Y 0.000 R Full Z44table entry
s26 Y 0.000 R Full Z45tableentry
s27 Y 0.000 R Full Z5l table entry
s28 Y 0.000 R Full Zs2tableentry
s29 Y 0.000 R Full Z5stableentry
s30 Y 0.000 R Full Z54tableentry
s31 Y 0.000 R Full Zsstableentry
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare:Zil for CLC0Uo4-
and|MCOM04
1023for SLC01/21
2046for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS
andCBC01
9998for |MMFCOS/O4
and IMMFPOU0AO3

EXPLANATION

Interpolation determines the value of the dependent vartable Z

based on the values of ttre two tndependent varlables X,Y.
Specifications 53 through SO speciry the hfgh and lour Umfts
for the independent variables. The flve-by-flve table shown ln
Figure f68-f is for the interpolatlon. Input 211 ls the value of
the dependent variable Y that corresponds to the ma;dmum
value of the Y variable and the mtnlmum value of the X varl-
able. Likewis€, input Zssts the value of the dependent vartable

ztt Ztz ZB Ztt Zts

zzt z2 z8 224 225
zst Zsz z8 za zss
ztt 242z& z4 245
Zst 252Z8 Zil Zss

Figwe 768-7. Fiue-Bg-Fiue ArraA

Used bg Interpolation Block

lnterpolator
1 6 8- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode168

that eorresponds to the mtnlmum value of the Y vartable and

the ma:dmum value of the X variable. If elther of the depen-
dent varlable values go outslde the ma:dmum value tn the
table, the output becomes the largest posstble number (2,, and
Z;1. fiie lncrements of X must be egual and the lncrements of
Ymust be equal . X and Yneed not be equal to each other.

Thts block can eastly handle any sltuatlon requlrlng a two

dlmenslonal llnear tnrterpolatlon, for example, steam tables.
Ustng temperature and pressure as the Xand Yvartables, artd
enthalpy as tlre Z varlable, the user could flnd the enthalpy
assoclated wlth any temperature pressure comblnatlon that ls
withtn the confines of the table.

Implementing thls block requlres the creatlon of a lookup

table and entertng lt lnto the block vla S7 through S31. For
example, if using thts block for enthalpy values, go to the
steam tables, and transfer the informatlon needed into the
block via the specificatlons. The values in the table €rre pre-
defined values of the dependent vartable that correspond to
the destgnated values of the lndependent varlables.

The block calculates the tnterpolated output value with the

equations:

(Zvt- Zv) x (Y"ct-Y^h)

Output = * Zvt
YrP"n

where:

(Xact- Xmin)x [Z(Xna* Y^i) - Z(X^in Y^r)l

zr, = + Z(X^in Y^")
xrp"n

(X"rt- Xmin)x lZ(Xmin Y^"*) - Z(Xm"n Y^")l

7
LYz - + Z(X^in Y^r*)

X"o =Actual value of X.

Xrn =Value of Xfor column before X*.
X^u = Value of X for column aftet X"a.
X** = Range of X values between columlts. The range
between columns ls automattcally defined when select-
tng tJre mlntmum and ma:dmum values for X. Slnce the
data table ls dtvtded tnto flve colurnns, the range
X^"r- Xmin
between columng =

Y =Aetual value of Y.
"^
Y,,,t,=Value of Yfor row before Yur

Interpolator
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 168 - 3
 FunctionCode 168

Y^u = Value of Y for rour after YnF

Yspn = Range of Y vdues betrveen rows. The
range between rows ls automatfcaly
deflned when selecflng the mlntmum and
ma:dmum values for Y. Shce the data
table ls dlvtded lnto flve rows, ttre range
Y^"r- Ymtn
betwe€n rows =
4
Z(X,*,, Y,*) = The Z value tn the €uray correspondtng to
the X and Y values deflned by nnn and
mlllm.

APPLICATIO.IVS

Use this block in arry situation requtrtng the ltnear lnterpola-

tlon of one variable from tlre values of two others. Extarnal
logic is easily implemented to form a large loolnrp table from
multiple interpolator blocks. The followtng examples lllustrate
use of the tnterpolator block for both two dlmenslonal and
single dimensional tnterpolaflon.

The interpolator block can be used to determlne steam prop-

erties as mentloned earlier. Flrst, select the range of X ald Y,
in this case, pressure (P) and temperature fI). slnee steam
table data is in absolute pressure, Table 168-l uses pounds
per square inch absolute, and the range of pressure ls altered
for tnput to the tnterpolator block.

Table 168-1. Interpolator Block Determules

Steamhoperties
Prue T
Pgngp I h
0 - 600 psla 2000- 900"F
0.3(M 15 200 1.7472 11U.70
Or", = 213.0) 350 1.8l,97 1216.20
500 1.9242 1287.90
650 1.9940 1359.40
800 2.0563 143i1.20
150.304 165 200 0.2939 168.44
(1", = 366.0) 350 1.5519 1186.60
500 1.&[95 1272.90
650 1.7240 1370.70
800 1.7995 1427.00
300.3M 315 200 0.2936 168.79
(Tr* - 421.0',) 350 1.4552 1155.90
500 1.5635 1255.90
650 1.6465 1341.40
800 1.69?2 1420.70

Interpolator
1 6 8- 4 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-200B
 Functlon Code 168

Table 1 68- 1. Inttltolator Blrck Determines

Steam Propertles bonttuurcd)
P15i T
Prr. I h
0 - 600 psla 2000- 800 F
450.304 465 200 0.2935 169.11
(Tsat= 460.0) 350 1.3829 1121.50
500 1.5043 1236.20
650 1.5968 1331.50
800 1.6667 1414.20
600.304 61s 200 0.2933 169.45
ftsat = 489.0) 350 1.3195 1083.20
500 1.4il2 1213.40
650 1.5587 1320.90
800 1.6320 1407.60

The abrupt changes ln the ortglnal s and h values sho$r that

tJre values are on both sldes of the saturatlon llne. Verlff thts
by loolcing at the saturatlon temperature (T*J. In order to .
have valtd data down to the saturatlon ltne (only tn the super
heated regton), extrapolate valtd superheated data down to
the next lower temperature. At f5 pounds per square inch
absolute, the superheated reglon permtts temperatures down
to 213 degrees Fatrrenhelt. When uslng the 2OO degrees Fatrr-
enhelt vdue of h (168.09) for extrapolatlon, the tnterpolator
block cdculates h at 275 degrees Fatrrer*relt as 692.1. The
corTect value ls 1180.7.

Obvtously, there ts a need to determtne a new value of the

minlmum allowable temperature for superheated steam (from :
steam tables: T = 22O, h = 1154.21. By uslng these two polnts
(1216.2 and LI54.21, e:rtrapolate llnearly to get h = II44.7 at
f = 200.

Similar cdculations are made for the remalnln$ Presslrres.

The below saturatlon ltne value remalntng (2OO degrees Fatrr-
enheit for P > 165 psla) can be made equal to the 35O degrees
Fatrrenhelt value or remaln as they are (current calculations
never permtt ttrelr use). Addttlond functlon blocks may be
added to monltor below superheated vdues. The second out-
put of the lnterpolator block (status) determtnes lf the pres-
sure ts less ttran 15 pounds per square lnch absolute. lnw
pressures cause ffxed values of h and s to be output from the
block.

Use the tnterpolator block for stngle dtrnenslonal tnterpola-

tion by setflng the range of y equals zero to ten, altd fLdng the
y input (S2) at O.O.Then only one row (y - O.O)needs fllled in.
Thts functlon block will llnearly tnterpolate between two val-
ues in lts table. For curye segments that do not have lnflec-
tion potnts (second dertvative crosstng through zerol, the
resulting error dways has the same slgn as shown ln
Figure 168-2. For appllcatlons requtrtng greater accuracy,
use a functlon generator block. When ltnearlzlng the curve
with a functlon generator block, the straight llnes are selected

lnterpolator
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEB199s 168 - 5
FunctionCode 168

such that errors are equal on both stdes of the curye as

shown in Flgure 168-3. If a segment requlres greater accrl-
racy (such as €rround an operatlng polnt), the functlon gener-
ator brealcpolnts can be spaced closer together.

Figure 768-2. Approximallon oJ Ctrue

Usfr4g Interpolotor

Figure 168-3. Approximnllon oJ Cunse

U sing F\tnction Generator

Interpolator
1 6 9- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 169r Matrix Addition

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The matrlx addltton functlon code adds two three-by-three

matrlces to provtde a three-by-three matrlx output. Use thts
operatlon for mode[ng and slmulatlons, artd advanced con-
trol strategles.

s9 UTILIZATION
sl
s11
sl
S1
S1
sl
S1
s17_

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe Ilescrlptlon

N R Sum of A1t + Brr or <S1> + <S10>
N+1 R Sum of As2+ Bre or <S2> + <S11>
N+2 R Surn of A13+ Brg or <S3> + <S12>
N+3 R Sum of A21+ Ber or <S4> + <S13>
N+4 R Sum of A22+Bn or <S5> + <S14>
N+5 R Sum of A6 + 86 or <56> + <S15>
N+6 R Sum of A31+ Bfi or <S7> + <S16>
N+7 R Sum of As2+ Bgaor <S8> + <S17>
N+8 R Sum of As + B33or <S9> + <S18>

SPECIFICATIOA'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of A11value
S2 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof A12value
S3 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of A13value
S4 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of A21value
s5 N 5 I Note 1 Bfock address of A,22value
S6 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof A2.value
S7 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof As1value
s8 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof As. value
S9 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof As value

MatrixAddition
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 169 - 1
FunctionGode169

SPE CI FI CATIONS pontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl0 N 5 Note 1 Block address of 811value
s11 N 5 Note 1 Block address of 812value
sl2 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof B1svalue
sl3 N 5 Note 1 Block address of B21value
sl4 N 5 Note 1 Bfockaddressof Bpvalue
sls N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof 86 value
s16 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof Bssvalue
sl7 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof B32value
sl8 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof %s value
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 tor CLC0Z04 and IMCOMO4
1023 for SLC01/21
2046 for NMFC01IO2,|MMFCO5,CBC01, CSCO1and IMMPCOl
9998 for IMMFCOS/O4and IMMFPOIIOUO3

EXPLANATION

Figures 169-1 shows how thls block adds the two matrlces.

The results of the matrix addiilon are real values that a,re out-
put from the block as shown ln Figure 169-1. The values ln
the rnatrices are defined by their block addresses. The A
matrix is filled in numerical order, followed by the B matrlx.

A,zAt4 Btz,,4 +Btt Atz+ Btz

le, Az nttl+ lt,, lo,
Bz 'ol = + Bzr Az+ Bzz
lou lBu lor,
Vt, AszAA LBt,Be Bd Vt,* Bst Asz+ Bsz

or

( srr) N+1 r*4

( s|4) N+4 N+ 5f
(s|n N+7 N+ €l

Figwe 7 69- 7. Mafrix Addition

MatrixAddition
1 6 9- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode170- MatrixMultiplication

L DESCRIPTION

The matrk multtpllcaflon functlon code mulflplles a patr of

three-by-three matrlces. The output ls a three-by-tltree mattlx.
Llke matrlx addltlon (ftrnctlon code 169), nse matrln multlpll-
catlon for system mode[ng and slmulatlon. The outputs show
S7
s8 the effects of varlous values of several dlfferent parameters.
s9
sl
sl1 Matrix multtpltcatlon can lmplement advanced control strate-
gtes that tncorporate several lndependent varlables.
sl
s1 UTILIATION
sl
slz

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe Deecrlptlon

N R Product (Arrx Brr)+ (Arex tlzr)+ (Arsx Bgr)
or (<S1>x <S10>)+ (<Sb x <Sl3>)+ (<S$ x <516>)
N+1 R Product (Arr x Brd + (Arex tlzil + (Argx Bga)
or (<S1>x <S11>)+ (<Sb x <S14>)+ (<S3>x <S17>)
N+2 R Product (Arr x Brd + (Arzx t3d + (Argx %s)
or (<S1>x <S12>l+ (<Sb x <S15>)+ (<S3>x <S18>)
N+3 R Product (Azrx B11)+ (A'22x&r) + (Azsx Bgr)
or (<S4>x <S10>)+ (<S5>x <Sl3>)+ (<S6>x <516>)
N+4 R Product (&r x Bre)+ (Aax B2j + (&g x E}32)
or (<S4>x <S11>)+ (<S5>x <S14>)+ (<S6>x <S17>)
N+5 R Product (&r x Brg)+ (Anx B23)+ (Aegx B33)
or (<S4>x <Slb) + (<S5>x <S15>)+ (<S6>x <S18>)
N+6 R Product (Aarx 811)+ (Asax Bar)+ (Aggx Bsr)
or (<S7>x <S10>)+ (<S8>x <Sl3>)+ (<S9>x <516>)
N+7 R Product (Agrx Brd + (Ag2x Bz) + (A33x Bsa)
or (<S7>x <S11>)+ (<S8>x <S14>)+ (<S9>x <S17>)
N+8 R Product (Agrx Brg)+ (Asax Bd + (Aggx &s)
or (<S7>x <S12>l+ (<S8>x <S15>)+ (<S$ x <S18>)

MatrixMultiplication
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 170- 1
FunctionCode 170

sPECtFtCATtO^tS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 Note 1 Block address of A11value
S2 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof A12value
S3 N 5 Note 1 Block address of A1svalue
S4 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof A21v?lue
S5 N 5 I Note 1 Bfockaddressof Apvalue
S6 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof A6 valuE
S7 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of A31vsluo
S8 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof A32value
S9 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof As value
s10 N 5 I Note 1 Block address of B11v?lue
s11 N 5 Note 1 Block address of B12value
s12 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof B1svalue
s13 N 5 I Note1 Blockaddressof B21value
sl4 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof Bpvalue
s1s N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof 823value
s16 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof 831value
s17 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof 832value
s18 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof Bs value
NOTE:
1. Maximum
valuesare:254for CLCOUO4and|MCOMO4
1023forSLC01/21
for NMFCOIIO?,|MMFCOS,
zO/,G CBC01,CSCO1
andtMMpCOt
9998for fMMFCOS/O4
and IMMFP0ITA}}

EXPLANATION

The matrlx multiplication functlon code muttlplles two three-

by-three matrices to form a tlrree-by-three matrlx of real val-
ltes. Matrices multiply row by column. To form ttre flrst ro\M of
the product matrix, row one of matrlx A multlpltes by col-
umns one, two and three of matrtc B. The seeond and thfrd
rows of the product matrDc form slmtlarly. Row two of matrlx
A multtplies by columns one, two and tlrree of matrtx B to
form tJ:e second row of the product matrlx and row three of
matrix A multiplies by columns one, two and tJrree of matrtx
B to form the last row of the product matrrx.

The row by column multiplication sums the products of the

like elements to get one value. Ttre flrst value tn row one of
matrix A multiplies by the flrst value ln column one of
matrlx B. That product adds to the products of the second
and third values to produce the value tn the product matrlx
as Figure L7O-l shows.

MatrixMultiplication
170-2 ls FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode170

Btz AttBtz+AnBzz+ ABBsz

lo,,Atz
Azz Bzz AzrBtz+ArrBzz+AzsBsz
lo',Asz Bsz AstBtz+At Bzz+AssBsz
Vt,

[<sr) ( s 2 ) N+1 il
l<sa) ( s 5 ) N+4 "*
N+ 5l
L<sz) ( s 8 ) N+7 N+ QJ

Figure 170-1. Inlernnl Operafion oJMaffix Mt@lfcatwnBlock

MatrixMultiplication
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 7 0- 3
ffi

I
 FunctionCode171- Trigonometric

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The trtgonometrlc functlon code cdculates the standard trlg-

onometrlc functlons.

o Slne
. Coslne
. Tangent
o Cotangent
o Secant
o Cosecant

The lnput may be expressed tn elther degrees or radlans. The

output ls the selected trlgonometrlc functlon of the lnput
value multlplled by the galn f,actor.

Use trigonometrlc functlons for perforrnzrnce calculatlons and

monltorlng.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N R valuemultipliedby the gainfactor
Trigonometric

Trigonometric
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 7 1- 1
FunctionCode 171

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof input
S2 N 0 I 0or1 Typein input<S1>:
0 = Edians
1 = degrees
S3 N 0 I 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 ,4 Trigonometricfunctionperformedon input<S1>:
or5 0 = sine
1 = cosine
2 = tangent
3 = @tiongent
4 = SgG?]lt
5 = COSeCant
S4 Y 1.000 R Full Gainfactor
NOTE:
1. Maximumvalues are:.254for CLG0U04 and |MCOM04
1023 for SLC01/21
2046 for NMFCOI|O?,|MMFCOS,CBC01 and IMMPCOl
9998 for IMMFCOS/O4and IMMFP0.1'TAO3

Trigonometric
1 7 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode 172r Exponential

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The exponentlal functlon eode ralses e to the power speclfled

by the lnput <S1>. The result ls multtplted by ttre galn factor
(s2).
Use tJre exponentld firnctlon code tn process control for per-
formance calculatlons and monltortng capabl[ty.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Deecrlptlon

N R Value=Kxex

SPECIFICATIO,'VS

Spec Tune Il,efault Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof inputvalueX
S2 Y 1.000 R Full Gainfactor
NOTE:
1. Maximumvaluesare: 254tor CLC0A04-
and |MGOM04
1023for SLC01/21
2046lor NMFCOI|O?,|MMFCOS andGB@l
9998for |MMFCOS/O4
and IMMFPOUOAO3

Exponential
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 172-1
ffi
t

I
 Function Code 173r Power

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The po\rer functlon code ralses the value of the flrst tnput <S1>
to the pourer speclfled by the second lnput <S2>. The result ls
multlplted by the galn factor (Sg) to provlde the output.

Use the power funetlon code tn process control for perfor-

mance calculatlons and monltorlng.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk TyPe Descrlptlon

N R Value=Kx(y)'

SPECIFICATIO,'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 6 I Note 1 Blockaddressol y
S2 N 6 I Note 1 Blockaddressof x
S3 Y 1.000 R Full Gainfactor
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 for CLC0U04-and |MCOMO4
1023 for SLC01/21
for NMFCOI|O?,|MMFC05 and CBCO1
?:CE;G
9998 for |MMFC03/04 and IMMFPOIIOP/)9

Power
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 173- 1
ffi

o
 Function Gode 174r Logarithm

GENERALDESCR'PTION

The logartthm functton code talres the logartthm of the lnput

to the deflned base. Ttle result ls multlplled by a galn fiactor to
provide the output. The logartthm functlon code ls not ltmlted
to natural logarlthms. The log of arry value ln base zero (natu-
rat) to ten can be talren.

Use the logarlthrn functton code ln process control for perfor-

m€rnce calculatlons and monltorlrrg.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N R Value= K x [ogru.r"r(X)l

SPECIFICATIO,TVS

Spec Tune I}efault Type Range Descrlptlon

s1 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputvalue,X
S2 N 0 I 0 - 10 Baseof logarithm:
0 = Dsturallog
S3 Y 1.000 R Full Gainfactor
NOTE:
1. Maximum values are: 254 for CLCOZO4and |MCOM04
1023 lor SLC01/21
2046 for NMFCO1|O?,|MMFCOSand CBCO1
9998 for |MMFCOS/O4
and IMMFPOIrcUA3

Logarithm
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 174-1
ffi

o
 Seguence Executive
Function Code 175.rrr

GENERALDESCRIPTIO'V

The sequence executlve (CSC) functton code selects the optlon

of outputtfng the *ceptlon report to the CSC RS-232-C port.
Thls functlon resldes tn flxed block address zero. It allows the
operator to vlew the easg step conflguratlon.

UTIL'ATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

0 B Logic 0
1 B Logic1
2 B 0 or 0.000
3 R -100.0
4 R -1.0
5 R 0.0
6 R 1.0
7 R 100.0
I R -9.2El8
I R 9.2E18
10 B in progressflag:
Strart-up
0=no
| =loS
11 R Reserved
12 R Systemfree time (%)
13 R Revision level
14 R Reserved

SequenceExecutive
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB1995 175-1
FunctionCode 175

SPECtFtCATtO,fVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 B 0or1 Requestto ouput exceptionreportto RS-232-Cport:
0=OO
| =lOS
S2 N 0 I 0 , 1o r 3 Easystep status:
0 = ro easystepconfigurationin unit
1 = Bosystep configuredand restoreoptionnot
selected
3 = o"sy stepconfiguredand restoreoptionselected
S3 Y 0 I Full Easystep configurationnumberof steps
S4 N 0 I Full Easystepconfiguration numberof inputs
ss N 0 Full Easystep configurationnumberof ouputs
S6 Y 0.000 R Full Sparespecification
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Spare specification
S8 Y 0 I 2446 Spareinputspecification

EXPLANATION

The sequence executive (CSC) funetlon code provldes easy

step configurafion informatlon (status, lnputs, outputs,
steps). The easy step status (S2) ldentlfles to the devtce con-
flguring the sequence command controller when Ern easy step
configuration is present in ttre unlt.

Specifications

s1 This input signals the CSC to output exeeptton reports to the

RS-232-C port. Function codes 3O and 45 generate exception
reports. This feature enables when ttre lnput equals loglc 1.
Specificatlons SZ and 58 of the segment control block (func-
tion code 821 determine the rate of exceptton report genera-
tion. The segment control block resldes ln flxed block 15.

s2 Status of easy step.

Q = no easy step configured

I = €asY step configured and restore optlon not selected
3 = easy step configured and restore optlon selected

NOTE:LIM and BIM deviceshavepriorityfor exceptionreporting

over easystep.

s3 This specilication stores the ma:dmum number of steps that

the sequencer Ltses. The faeeplate refers to thts tnput whle
manually changing the step number.

SequenceExecutive
175-2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Functlon Code 175

Invoktng easy step automatlcally sets Sg to the entered num-

ber of steps.
NOTE:lf easystep is not usedto generatethe configuration, but the
capabilityto drange the step numberfrom the facephte is desired,
this specificationshouklbe set to the maximumnumberof stepsused.

s4 Speclflcatlon 54 stores the ma:dmum number of dtgltal

lnrputs tn tlre easy step conflguratlon.

Invoking easy step automattcally sets 54 to the entered num-

ber of lnputs.

ss Speclflcatlon 55 stores the ma:dmum number of dtgttal out-

puts ln the easy step conflguratlon.

Invoklng easy step automattcally sets 55 to the entered num-

ber of outputs.

56 through S8 Spare.

Outputs

10 Output block ten ls the start-up ln progress fl4g. The progress

flag ls loglc I durtng the start-up perlod speclfled by 54 of
function code 9O when the module ts ln execute mode. After a
successful start-up, thts stgnd reverts to loglc O and remalns
zero as long as the module ls ln execute mode.

Q = start-up compete
I = start-up lncomplete

11 Output 11 ls reseryed.

12 Output 12 ts the system free ttme ln percent. Thts ls the per-

centage of free tlme left ln the CSC.

(free time= 100- totalmoduleutilization)|00%

13 Output 13 ls the revlslon level. ThJs output ls a four dlglt

number representlng the module nomenclatur€, hardware
revlslon level and flrmware revlslon level.

xYzz
where:

X = Unlt nomenclature (1 = CBCOI).

Y = Hardware revlslon (O = r€v O).
Z Z = Flrmware revlslon (Ol = rev AEII).

14 Resenred.

SequenceExecutive
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlss 175 - 3
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode176- SequenceStation(CSC)'

L DESCRIPTION

The sequence statlon functton code provldes an tnterface

between ttre control conflguratlon and the seguence com-
mand (CSC) faceplate and eontrols. Thls functlon code passes ;
l/O darrn data to the faceplate. It also allornrs the operator to
plaee the devlce drlver blocks (functton code 123) assoclated
wtth ttre outputs lnto automatlc or mErnual mode, attd change
the state of an output ln manual mode. Addlflonally, lt glves ;
the operator a way to send a hold/hfflallze lrrput and the lrd-
Ual step number (restart step) to the sequence monltor (func-
tlon code L24l block. .

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk lYpe I}escrlptlon

N B Hold/initializeouput
N+1 R Initialstep number
N+2 R Unused
N+3 B Alarmacknowledgekey indicator

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deocrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 2046 Blockaddressof input1 alarmsignal:
1=alarm
0=DolTllal,
S2 N 0 I 2046 Blockaddressof input2 alarmsignal:
1=alarm
0=Dotrllal,
S3 N 0 I 2046 Blockaddressof input3 alarmsignal:
1=alarm
o a o a o .O=nonnal,
a a o o o o

o o a o o o

sl6 N 0 I 2046 Blockaddressof input16 alarmsignal:

1=alarm
0=hOtTrlal,

SequenceStation(CSC)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 176- 1
FunctionCode 176

SP ECIFICATI OntS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

s17 N 0 I 2046 Blockaddressof output1 devicedriverblockcontrolouput
(CO)status
s18 N 2 2046 Blockaddressof ouput 2 devicEdriverblockCo status
sl9 N 2 2046 Blockaddressof ouput 3 devicedriverblockco status
s20 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof output4 devicedriverblockCo status
s21 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof ouput 5 devicedriverblockCo status
s22 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof ouput 6 dEvicedriverblockCo status
s23 N 2 2446 Blockaddressof ouput 7 devicedriverblockCo status
s24 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof output8 devicedriverblockCo status
s2s N 2 20d;6 BlockaddrEssof ouput 9 devicedriverblockCo stratus
s26 N 2 2046 Blockaddressof ouput 10 devicedriverblockCo status
s27 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof ouput 11devicedriverblockCo status
s28 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof ouput 12 devicedriverbfockCO stratus
s29 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof currentstep number
s30 N 0 I o-7 Stationaddress
s31 N 2 I 2046 Blockaddressof run/troldsignal(booleanvalue):
0 = holdstrate
1 = rufl state
s32 N 1612 -
0 1 6 1 2 l/O utilization:
((no.of inplts used)x 100)+ (no. of outputsused)
s33 Y 0 0 0 , 0 1 , 1 0 ,Manualoverridelockout:
1 1 ,2 0 o r 2 1 X X
X0 = normal
Xl = lockout
0X = faceplatehas run priority
1X = configuration has run priority
2X = no run priority
s34 N 1 I 0or1 Default mode of outputs:
0 = m?DU8l
1 = automatic
s35 Y 9 . 2E 1 g R Full Laststepnumber(donestep number)
s36 Y 0.000 R Full Reserved

EXPLANATION

Flgure L76-L lllustrates a sequenilal logtc process control

system interfaced with a sequence statlon bloek. TIte ffrst
group of lnputs shown are to the lnput alarm states. These
inputs are boolean values ttrat indicate when an alarm state
for each digital input exists. When the values are a logtc O, the
sequence station block provldes the seguence commagd con-
troller's faceplate with the normal operatlng states of the
inputs. If any of the values become a loglc l, tftts block pro-
vides the faceplate with the alarm conditlon data. Thts data
causes both the faceplates LED indtcator for the inputs ln
alarm and the alarm LED to flash. If selected, an ludble
alarm acfivates also. To return the faceplate to lts normal
operating state, the operator should depress the ALARM ACK
pushbutton and eorrect the alarm eondtflon for the lnput.

SequenceStation (CSC)
176-2 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 176

ct
T
- - q 3fl
Nrt ; 3 r
I
E3
r l _ TI
EAP

s4
sEo[rsr ss,
sst t gc,
t st:
I r o f
se
ro sr0
slr
r@ s[
slg
slP sg
sr5
sr0

F-tgrre 176-1. Wuenre S-totlonBlock E ample

As an addtttonal feature, the alarm input state lnputs can

tndicate the boolean output value of a block tnstead of the
alarrr state. If the block input is specifted as negaHve, Ute
conespondtng sequence command faeeplate indicates the
state of the blocks boolean output. For example, if the output
of block 5O goes to LED four, then 54 is -5O.

Devlce drivers provide the next grouP of inputs to the

sequence station block. Thts station block uses the control
status outputs of the devtce drlver blocks for two different
funcUons. Ttre flrst functton ls to decode the current state of
the devlces befng drlven by the sequence master block. There
can be three values for this lnput O.O(good)' 1.0 (bad)' and
2.O (waiflng). If the value ls bad (l.O), then the station block
provides ttre controller's faceplate wtth the alarm data. The

SequenceStation(CSC)
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 1 7 6- 3
FunctionGode 176

faceplate's dlsplay is slmtlar to the tnput alarm condltlons,

except the output LED tndlcator flashes wtth the alarm LED.

The second function of thts lnput ts to determtne the block

address of the devtce drtver block. ThIs address ls for the roll-
tlne tJlat perrnlts the operator to place an output trto manual
or automatic control wittr the pushbuttons on the eontroller
faceplate.

The next input shown ts tlle current step number provlded by

the sequence master block. The value of t}ts lnput has two
functions. The first functlon ls that tlrts number goes to the
faceplate for operator information. The other functlon is to
allow the sequence station block to provlde the sequence
monitor block with the current step number. By provtdlng the
current step number to that block, ttre operator can hold the
sequence at any step and restart the sequence at that s€une
step tf deslred.

The current step number ls the sequence statton block's [rl,-

Ual step number output. Thts output along wtth the hold/lnI,-
tialbe output allows performing four dtfferent operatlons. The
Iirst is the hold function. To hold the sequence at a certaln
step, the hold/inifialize output changes from a zero to a one
to infonn the sequence monltor block to hold at that step. To
restart at that step, the hold/tnltlallze output changes frorn a
one to a zero and the sequence monltor block starts the
sequence at the step seen on the lntttd step number output of
the station block. fftre controller faceplate should dlsptay
f:r/.d, before pressing the 1 pushbutton to start the sequenee
at the current step.)

The mn/hold value <S3l> of the sequence statlon can also

start or hold the sequence from the conftguratlon. If the
sequence is mnning, the faceplate or the configuratlon can
put it on hold. To do so, change the run/hold lnput from a
one to a zero. If the sequence is on hold and the mn/hold
input goes from zero to one, the sequence starts running at
the current step number value <S29>. Thls depends on the
prlority set by the tens dlgit of the manual overrlde lockout
input (S33). If the tens digit of this speciflcation ls a zero, the
faceplate has priority over ttre configuration lnputs. Thus, if
the faceplate puts the sequence on hold, only the faceplate
can start it. If the tens dfglt of the manual overrlde loekout
input equals one, the configuration has priority over the f,ace-
plate. Thus, if the configuration puts the sequence on hold,
only the conflguration can start lt. If the tens dfgft of S33
equals two, there is no priority and either the faceplate or the
configuration can start ttre sequence.

The other three operations performed wtth the sequence sta-

tion bloek outputs are restart, start and E-STOP. These opera-
tions perform similarly to a hold except that the hfflal step
number output places a different step number there dependfng

9gquenceStation(CSC)
176-4 ls FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Functlon Code 17b

on the deslred operatlon. When a restart ls deslred, change the

step number from tJre crurent step number to a one before the
hold/hfila[ze output toggles from one to zero.

NOTE: The controllerfaceplatedisplay should read RESTART?

before pressingthe 1 pushbuttonto start the initializationof the
sequence.

The start operatlon can start the sequence at any deslred step
number. SfrART OI dlsplays by presslng the 0 pushbutton
when RE$DART? ts shown on the dlsplay. Presstng tlle 0
pushbutton agaln keeps tncreaslng ttre step number. Presstng
tlre 1 pushbutton at the deslred step number (START ]Q{),
places the deslred step number on the tnlflal step number
output and the sequence monltor block starts the sequence at
tl:at step number.

NOTE:Specification55 of functioncode 175(sequenceexecutive)

mustcontainthe numberof stepsbeingused.

The E-STOP operatlon ts slmllar to the restart functlon et(eept

ttrat tJ:e hfilal step number output changes to a ?Ero. Thts
causes the sequence monltor block and tts assoclated sequenee
master block to go to the default step zero.

Specifications

S1 - Alarmfl Specificatlon Sl ls the block address of boolean value lndlcat.

ing tnput one alarm state.

Q = nonnal, no alarm
I = lnput one ls ln alarm

When ilnput one goes lnto darm state, the faceplate lndlcator
for input one flashes, tJre audlble alarm sounds, artd ttre face-
plate alarm LED flashes. Once the operator presses the
ALARM ACK button, the audlble alarm sllences and the alarm
LED stays on solld. The lndicator for trrput one contlnues to
flash untll the alarm condltlon goes away.

The faceplate tnput tndtcator flashes the color corTespondfng

to the curTent loglc state of the df$tal lnput.

If the block speclfled number ts negattve, tttls speclflcatlon

dlsplays the boolean value of the block output on the face-
plates tnput LED.

52 throughS16- Refer to SI - Alerm Il for explanatlon.

Alarm 12through
Alarm116

S17 - Alarm01 Speclficatlon S17 ls the block address of devlce drlver block
control output status assoclated urfth output one.

SequenceStation(GSC)
l-Eg6-200B ls FEB1995 1 7 6- 5
FunctionCode 176

This ileput has two functlons. FIrst, lt provtdes an alarm lndt-

catlon for the output by decodtng the control status value.

O.O= good
1.O= bad
2.O = ws,iflng

If the control status indicates bad, then output one ls ln an

alarm state in the same muurner as the tnputs are (refer to SI -
Alarm I7).

The second function of the statlon lnput ts to tndlcate the

block address of the devlce drlver block assoctated wfth thls
output. Calculate t}rls by subtractlng one from the block
address entered. The locatton of the devtce drlver block ts for
the routlne tl:at allows the operator to place an output tn
elther manual or automatlc control.

S18throughS28- Refer to SI 7 - Alo;rrnn Ol for explanaflon.

Alarm 02 through
o12

S29 I CURSTEP Speclfication S29 is the block address of the curent step
number. The value of thls block dlsplays on the faceplate
when selecting the sequence mode screen. An lntttated hold of
the sequence also uses tlrJs number to allow ttre sequence
command controller to restart at the proper step upon a dls-
abled hold.

S3O - STATADR Specification S3O is the value of the hardware sequence sta-
tlon address that the statlon functlon block ts represenflng.

S31 - RUIVHOLD This block input has two functlons:

First, it controls the mode of the sequence monltor block

(function code L24) after start-up. If the lnput ls a one at
start-up, the CSC function code automattcally enters run
mode of the sequence monltor block starttng at step one. If
thls lnput is a zero at start-up, the sequence monltor block
goes lnto hold mode.

Second, it controls the mn/hold mode after start-up ls com-

plete. If ttris input goes from one to a zero and the sequence ls
nrnntrg, the sequence station puts the sequence ln hold
mode. If the input goes from a zero to a one and tJre sequence
is in hold mode, the sequence statlon puts the seguence ln
run mode depending on the priority set by S3B.

s32 - UTIL Speeification S32 is the dlsplayed number of lnputs and out-
puts.

((no.of inputsused)x 100)+ (no.of outputsused)

SqquenceStation(CSC)
1 7 6- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Functlon Gode 176

Thts speclllcatlon turns off faceplate lndlcators not belng

used. Thts reduces operator confuslon by eltmtnattng mean-
tngless lnformatlon from the faceplate dtsplay.

For example, when uslng only 12 Xrputs and nlne outputs on

a sequencecommartd, the value to enter for S31 ls:

(12x 100)+ (9)= 1200+ 9 = 1209

Now only lnputs one through 12 and outputs one through

nlne dlsplay on the faceplate.

s33 o MANLOCK Spectflcatlon S33 ls the manual overrtde lockout vahre.

x x
X0 = normal,no lockout

Xl = manuallockout(outputscannotbe placedln manualmode

by the operator)

0X = faceplatehas run priority

lX = functioncode 176blockhas priority

2X = no priority

s34 - OUTDFLT Default mode of outputs at tlme of lnttf all",a;flolt.

Q = manual; all outputs are ln manual eontrol mode after

hftfalk.atlon ls complete

t = automatlc; all outputs €rre ln automatlc control mode

after Xrfflallzaflon Is complete

UANLOCK OUTDFLT
Xlescrlptlon
s33 s34
Operatorhas manualcontrolavailable,devicedriver x0 0
blockis in manualmodeon start-up
Operatorhas manualcontrolavailable,devicedriver x0 1
blockis in automaticmodeon start-up
Devicedriverblockis in manualmodeon start-up. xl 0
But onceit is put in automaticmode,it cannotbe
changedby the operator
Operatoris lockedout of manualoverrideat all times x1 1

s35 - DONE Step number at whtch to halt the sequence and dtsplay DONE
)O( where lO(.ls the step number. Thls executes a slngle cycle
of a sequence. Durtng normal sequencer operatlon, the
sequence statlon monltors the curent step number <S29>
and compares lt to the step number S35. If the DOM step ls
reached, the sequence statlon lssues a HOLD slgnal that puts
the sequence monltor block trrto a hold state. Also, DOAIE )O(
displays on the alphanumerlc dlsplay.

SequenceStation(CSC)
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB19es 176 - 7
 FunctionCode 176

Outputs

N Output N is the hold/inltlall-e output. The value of thts out-

put tnforms tJre sequence monltor block to hold the sequencer
at a parttcular step or to contlnue to eKecute the sequence.

Q = sequencer ts Ir run mode

I = s€guencer wlll be held at the current step

I to O transltton = sequencer should begln executlon at

the speclfied intflal step

N+1 Output N+l ls the lnttlal step number. The tntttal step num-
ber specilies the step where ttre sequencer should begln ffie-
cutlon. This ca,n be used by the sequence monttor block along
with its hold/initialize value to start or hold the sequence at
particular steps.

N+2 Unused.

N+3 Output N+3 is the ALARM ACK key tndlcator. Ttds output ts a
logic 0 during normal operatlon. Pressfng and holdtng ttre
ALARM ACK key causes the output to become a loglc 1. Releas-
ing the ALARM ACK key causes the output to return to logtc O.

O - normal
I = ALARM ACK pushbutton depressed

APPLICATIO'VS

Refer to the example for tlre devtce drtvet funcflon code lzg.
This erample is a batch process uslng the sequence staflon
block. Also, referto ttre Seguenee @mmand, @nfiptlerprod-
uct tnstruction for detalled faceplate operation descrlptlon.

SgquqnceStation(CSC)
1 7 6- g ls FEB199s
l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionGode177- DataAcquisitionAnalog

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The data acqulsltlon andog (DAAI{G) functlon code provtdes a

number of unlque data selectlon, condltlonlng and monltor-
lng functlons. These lnclude support for enhanced alarm
management capabllltles at tJre module level of a Plant Loop
or INFI-NET system. .

The default speclflcatlons allow slngle level alarmtng and ;

exceptlon reporttng of the red lnput. '

UTILIANON

OUTPUTS

BIK IVPE Desclptlon

N R Cunentvalue,quality/status
N+1 R Cunentextendedstatus

SPECIFICATIO'VS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Deecrlptlon

S1 N 100.000 R Full Engineeringunithighdisplayreferencs
S2 N 0.000 R Full Engineeringunitcenterdisplayreference
S3 N 0.000 R Full Engineeringunitlow displayreference
S4 N 9.2El8 R Full Engineeringunithighconstraintlimit
ss N -9.2 El8 R Full Engineeringunitlowconstraintlimit
S6 N 0 0-255 Engineeringunitidentifier
S7 N 5 Note 1 Sparereal input
S8 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof quali$ strateovenidE
S9 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputselectcontrol
s10 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof realvatueinput
s11 N 2 I Note 1 Blockaddressof inputshapingalgorithm
s12 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof calculatedvalueInput
sl3 N 0.000 R Full Engineering unit selected inserted value

DataAcquisitionAnalog
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 177-1
 FunctionCode 177

SPECIFI CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Deecrlptlon

sl4 N 0 Note 1 Blockaddressof permitlnputselection
sls N 0 I Note1 Blockaddressof requestexceptionreport
sl6 N 0 I Note 1 Blockaddressof actlvateatarmsuppresslon
sl7 N 5 I Note 1 Blockaddressof variablehigh 1 alarmlimit
sl8 N 5 Note 1 Blockaddressof variablelow 1 alarmlimit
sl9 N 5 Note1 Blockaddressof deviationalarmreferencevalue
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Alarmcontrol
s21 v 2.000 R Full Engineering
unithighalarmdeadband
s22 y2 0.000 R Full Engineering
unithigh3 alarmdifference
s23 v 0.000 R Full Engineering
unithigh2 alarmdifference
s24 v 9 . 2E 1 8 R Full Engineering
unithigh1 fixedalarmvalue
s2s yz -9.2E1g R Full Engineering
unitlow 1 fixedalarmvalue
s26 v 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitlow2 alarmdifference
s27 v 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitlow3 alarmdifference
s28 y2 2.000 R Full Engineering unitlowalarmdeadband
s29 yz 9.2Elg R Full Engineering unitdeviationalarmlimit
s30 Y 2.000 R Full Engineering unitsignificantchangeto forceexceptionreport
s31 Y 100.000 R Full Periodfor timebasedalarmsin seconds
s32 Y 9.2 El g R Full Engineering unit high rate of change
s33 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitlow rateof change
s34 Y 2.000 R Full Timesequencealarmcount
NOTES:
1. Maximum valuesare:9998for tMMFcOg/04 and lMMFpouoao3.
2. Specification
is tunablebut not adaptable.
Adaptedspecification
valuesare invalid.

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specificafion Sl is the englneertng untts hfgh dtsplay reference.

A numeric or graphical dtsplay element c€rn use thts value as
the maximum positive reference of the monltored value.

s2 Specification 52 is the engineering untts center dtsplay refer-

ence. This specificafion allows bidirecttonal bar chart elements
on consoles by defrning a posltlve and negaflve segment for the
display (1.e., upward movement when tlre lnput ls greater than
52 and downward movement when the lnput ls less than S2).
Specifleafions 52 and Sg deflne the lower segrnent. SpectIlca-
tions Sl and 52 define the upper segment. To dlsable ttre cen-
ter display reference, set 52 equd to Sg.

S3 Specification 53 is the engineerlng untts low dtsplay refer-

ence. Numerical or graphlcal dlsplay elements use thls value
as the maximum negaflve reference of the monltored value.

DataAcquisition
Analog
1 7 7- 2 1s FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Functlon Gode 177

s4 Speclflcatlon 54 ls the englneertng untts hfgh constralnt llmlt.

The tnput select control <S9> enables thls ltmlt. Enabled con-
stralnt llmtts cause the selected Xnput value to report as less
than or equal to the hlgb constr:alrrt Umlt. The lnput wtll be
constralned when tt eKceeds thls conflgured vdue. When the
real (constratned) tnput ls selected (by a value of 4.O or 5.O at
<S9>), the constratrrtng actlon ls the resultant value of the
tnput charactertzatlon algorlthm deftned by <Sllt (tf used).

NOTE:S4 mustbe greaterthan S5.

ss Speclllcatlon S5 ls the englneerlng unlts low constralnt Umlt.

The tnput select control <S9> enables thJs llmlt. An enabled
constralnt ltmlt malces the selected tnput value always greater
than or equd to thts low llmlt. The tnput ls constralned when
below thts conflgured vdue. When the real (constrafned)
input is selected tby a value of 4.O or 5.O at <S9>), tlte con-
strainlrg actlon ls the resultant value of the lnput character-
lzatJon algorlthm deftned by <S1l>.

NOTE:S4 mustbe greaterthan S5.

s6 Spectflcatlon SO ts the englneerlng unlfs ldentlfler. Dlsplay

systems use thls specifieatlon to select an englneerlng unit
descrlptor.

s7 Spare real lnput.

S8 Speciflcatlon S8 ts the block address of the quallty state over-

ride. Thls tnput allows an external source to overrlde the
quallty and status of the reported value. fite qua[ty state
overrlde vdue converts to a tnrncated Irteger and the btts are
shown tn Table 177-L.

Table 777-7. SwIW State OuerrideBAMap

Blnary Welghted
Blr Attrlbute
Value
Ail 0 Genemte quallty state Internally (default)
0 1 Forcegoodquality
1 2 Forcecalculatedmode
2 4 Forcemanualmode
3 8 Limited
4 16 SuspEctor out of range
5 32 Hardwarefailureor bad quality
6 64 E-STOP
7-15 Reservedfor futureuse

The quallty state overrlde does not affect the processtng of

the DAAI$G functlon code. The overrlde state speclfled ls logl-
cally ORd wlth the lnternally derlved state. Thls permlts the

DataAcquisitionAnalog
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 177 - 3
FunctionCode 177

selectlve use of the tnternal functlons or speclal external

functlons.

NOTE: lf an extemalfunctiongeneratesany of these controlbits,

the internalfeaturesthat correspondto the definedfunctionsmust
be inhibited.This preventsa possibleconflictbetweenthe exter-
nallydrivenstatusand the intemalstiatus.

Qualtty ls normally derlved from the selected lnput unless:

. Bit zero ls set to loglc l. Thls forces the qualtty to be good

regardless of the actual lnput quahty state. Btt flve over-
rides blt zero if both are set.

Bit five ls set to loglc l. Thls forces the quallty to be bad

regardless of ttre actual tmput qualtty state. Btt flve over-
rides bit zero if both are set.

A real <SlO> or calculated <S12> tnput wlth bad qualtty, from

any block except one contalning functton code 178, sets ttre
hardware failure btt in the DAAI{G exceptlon report. Normally
the qua[ty associated wtth an *ceptlon report ls set by the
communlcation system to tredlcate a communlcatlon fallure.
Therefore, the qua[ty state assoctated wtth an exceptlon
report ls actually the communlcatlon status for functton code
L77 exception reports.

In the DAAIVG function code the hardware f,allure blt ls set to

propagate the bad quallty of the tnput. The state of the hard-
ware fatlure bit sets tlre quanry of the block output.

s9 Speciflcatlon 59 is the block address of the lrrput control. Ttrls

specification gives an external sonrce the ablltty to control the
input selection when enabled by the permlt tnput selectlon
<S14>. The real input value ls converted tnto a tmncated lnteger
and the bits are mapped as shown lnTables 177-2 and !77-3.

Table 177-2. 76 BXMap

Binary Weighted
Blt Attrlbute
Value
A'I 0 Real,unconstralned,on scan(default)
0 1 Selectinput:
0 = <S13>
1= calculated<S12>
1 2 Customenableselect:
0 = Io?l<S10>
1 = selectinputfrombit 0
2 4 ConstraininputhigMow limit:
0 = disabled
1 = enobled
3 I Spare
4 16 Spare
5 32 Spare

Pgl$cquisition Analog
177-4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 1TI

Tahle 777-2. 76 Btt Map (crlnfrnttcd)

Blnary Welghted
BIt Attrlbute
Value
6 at Spare
7 128 Reportmode:
0 = OhSCan,OnrepOrt
1 = off scan,no report
8- 15 Spare

Table 177-3. 76 BABtnarU Mtmber

lnput Select Btr Mode
Value Pattern
0or1 Bit0=X Realvalue<S10>input(unconstrained)
Bitl=0
Bit2=0
2 Bit0=0 Selectedvalue<Sl3> input(unconstrained)
Bitl=1
Bit2=0
3 Bit0=1 Calculatedvalue<S12>input(unconstrained)
Bitl=1
Bit2=0
4 or5 Bit0=X Realinputvalue<S10>constrainedbetween<S4>
Bitl=0 and <S5>
Bit2=1
6 Bit0=0 Selectedinputvalue<S13>constrainedbetween
Bitl=1 <S4>and <S5>
Bit2=1
7 Bit0=1 Calculatedinputvalue<S12>constrainedbetween
Bitl=1 <S4>and <S5>
B i t 2 =1
>128 Bit0=X No report,no exceptionrepodsgenerated(normal
Bitl=X processingat the modulelevel)
Bit2=X
BitT=1
NOTE:X=Don'tcare.

When a transitlon talces place on blt zero or one, the new

input source and status are selected. The console can also
select the lnput source. A transttton on the lnput control blt
cancels arry pendtng console request.

Input select and console requests are dtsabled durlng module

start-up. The block ffi the saved mode and ldtfa[zes the
input select dtrrlng start-up. Thls prevents a translflon from
being detected when start-up ls complete. When addtng the
block to a module conffguratlon, the default mode ls lnput select
equals real value, orl report, unconstralned (<S9> equals ?Ero).

The constraln lnput htghllow ltmlt (blt two) controls ltmlflng

for the selected lnput. Speclflcatlon 54 deflnes the upper colt-
stralnt nmft and 55 deflnes the lourer constralnt llmlt.

Ttre report mode [btt seven) controls the *ceptlon reporttng

mode. No report dlsables excepflon report updates. Enabltng

DataAcquisitionAnalog
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1e9s 177 - 5
 FunctionCode 177

no report causes one *ceptlon report to generate whtch shours

that no report ls enabled. The block contlnues to eKecute and
lts outputs update, but no excepflon reports generate.

The console ca.n control the exceptlon reportlng mode. When

a point ls no report, the console can lssue a force eKcepflon
report update command to cause the potnt to update. Thls
feature allours updatlng of the polnt value vrtthout putung lt
back on report. The block outputs (locd block outputs N and
N+1) continue to update when a new exceptlon report nor-
mally generates. The curent report mode of an lnput ls
stored rn f{\ZRAI\d and ls stored upon a reset or mode change.
Atl report mode change requests (loglc and console) are locked
out during module start-up.

sl0 Spectllcatlon Sf 0 ts the block address of the real tnput value.

The real input value ca.n be the block output value of any block
in tJle module addressed by thts vector. It ls selected when
<S9> equals zero, olte, four or ffve. The console can also select
this input value in auto mode. Changes to the selected mode
are disabled when tlle block addressed by S14 equals zero.

sl1 Specification S I f is the block address of the lnput shaplrEg

algorithm. This function allows addttlonal ltnearlzatlon on th;
real input value for unique characterlzatton or scaltng. ThJs
specification can point to either a functlon generator (functton
code 1) or polynomial (functlon code 167) block. Multfple
blocks can point to the same functton gener:ator or polynomlal
block. This permits a single block to provtde common tnput
characterTzation or scaling data for many DAAIVG trputs.
When either <S9> equals zero, orle, four or five, or a console
command selects the real tnput, <SlO> wtll be the tnput value
to the function code configured at the block addressed by thts
specification. Ttle output of the algortthm ls the actual real
input value. The case of <Sl1> equals two dlsables thls fea-
ture and causes <slo> to be used as recelved.

sl2 Specifieation S12 is the block address of the catculated value.

The calculated value is an alternate tnput value selected when
<S9> equals three or seven. Ttte console carr select the ealcu-
lated input from auto mode. Changes to the selected mode are
disabled when the block addressed by S14 equals zero.

s13 Specification Sfg is the engineertng untts selected leserted

value. The selected inserted value ls an alternate lnput value
selected when <S9> equals two or six. TIle console can rirmp
or set this value after selecting manual mode. Changes to tha
selected mode are disabted when the block addressed by SIa
equals zero.

sl4 Specification Sl4 is the block address of the permtt tnput

selectioll. When the tnput value of thls block ls a loglc l,
changes at the <S9> input or the console commands wtll

DataAcquisition
Analog
1 7 7- 6 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-200B
 Functlon Code 177

change the tnput select mode. If the tnput ls loglc O, tJren

requests for lnput select mode changes are lgnored.

sl5 Speclficatlon Sf 5 ls the block address of the send exceptlon

report request. When there ls a zeto to one tr:ansttlon on tltls
block address, an fficeptlon report of the curent data and
status ls generated. Thls lnput ean ltnk to a tlmer that explres
on the scan perlod for the lmplementatton of a flned scan t5pe
system. When the polnt ls off scan thts lnput effectlvely dls-
ables. Ttle console can force an eKceptlon report update that
reports the current value even when the potnt ls off sean. The
polnt remalns off scan after sendtng one update tf lt was pre-
vlously off report.

sl6 Spectflcatlon Sf 6 ls the block address of the actlvate darm

suppresslon. Alarm suppresslon functlons speclfled ln S2O
enable when thts tnput equals logte 1. The console also can
control alarm suppresslon.

High o,larms supplessed:

Htgh alarm and level.

Hlgh devlatlon.
Htgh rate.

Lout o,lo;rm,s suppressed:

Low alarm and level.

Low devlatlon.
Low rate.

The current alarm suppresslon state (on/offl ls stored tn

I{\IRAIVI and ls stored upon a reset or mode change. All alarm
suppresslon requests (console and loglc) lock durlng module
lnfUallzatlon.

S17and S18 Speciflcattons S17 and S18 €rre ttre block addresses of the
variable hfgh one and lour one alarms respectlvely. These
inputs are active only when varlable mode alarms are selected
with tJle alarm control S20. Effectively, these dynamtc values
substttute for the htgh one alarm value S24 and low one
darm value 526 when uslng thts feature.

sl9 Speclflcatlon S19 ls ttre block address of the devlatlon darm

reference. Thts speclftcatlon combtned wfth the devlatlon
alarm hmft S29 determlnes when tl:e monltored tnput value
has a hfgh or low devlatton darm.

Hfgh devlatton alarm ltmlt = (S19> + S29

Low deviation alarm llmit = (S19> - S29

s20 Specillcatlon S20 ts the darm control. Ttre lnput value colt-
verts to a truncated lnteger and the blt map as shown tn
Table L77-4.

DataAcquisitionAnalog
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEBiges 177 - 7
FunctionCode 177

Table 177-4. BAMap

Blnary
Blt Welghted Attrlbute
Value
0 1 High alarm mode:
0 = fixed level alarms; alarms based on Hl = S24
1 = v?dable level alarms; alarms based on Hl = <S17>
1 2 Lowalarmmode:
0 = fixedlevelalarms;alarmsbasedon Ll = S25
1 = voriablelevelalarms;alarmsbasedon Ll = <S18>
2 4 Multilevelalarmingenable:
0 = oD€highlevelalarm,one low levelalarm
1 = threehighlevelalarms,threelow levelalarms
3 I Lowalarmsuppressionselect:
0 = do not suppresslow levelalarms
1 = suPpresslow levelalarmsduringenabledalarmsuppression(enabledthrough
<516>or consolecommancl 3)
4 16 Highalannsuppression select:
0 = do notsuppresshighlevelalarms
1 = suPpresshighlevelalarmsduringenabledalarmsuppression (enabledthrough
<S16>or consolecommand3)
5 32 De-alarmenable
6 64 Returnalarmenable
7 128 Rateof changealarmenable
I 256 Digital alarm filter enable
9 512 Alarmsuppression indicationmodeselect:
0 = alarmsuppressionindicationin extendedstatus(bit 1) indicatesenabledalarm
suppression (through<516>Or a consolecommand3) and selected(throughS20
bit 3 or 4)
1 = alarmsare currentlysuppressed
1 0- 1 5 Spare

Bit zero selects the mode for the hfgh one alarm level. tnglc O
selects the frxed value of S24 and loglc I selects ttre dynamlc
input of the block addressed by S 17.

Bit one selects the mode for the low one alarm level. Ioglc O
selects the fixed value of S25 and loglc I selects the dynamtc
input of the block addressed by Sl8.

Bit two selects siregle level hfgh one and low one alarms when
false (logic 0). Bit two selects multilevel htgh three, hJgh two,
high one, low one, low two, and low three when trre (loglc 1).

Bit three and bit four control alarm suppresslon for all low or
all high alarms based on the logic state of <slo>.

Bit five and bit six enable the de-alarm and return alarm
functions. The de-alarm and return alarm control the alarrns:

High/low level.
high/low deviation.
High/low rate.

DataAcquisition
Analog
1 7 7- g 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctlonGode1TI

De-alarm fblt flve) suppresses alarms when tlre tlmer ocplres.

The tlmer resets any tlme the lnput vdue erdts the alarm
state. The alarurs must remaln present for the entlre flmer
pertod (Sgl) before they can be de-alarmed. The darms
remaln suppressed unttl the lnput value e:dts the alarrn state.
The de-alarm, when actlve, ls tdentlcal to alarm suppresslon
when both the hlgh and lour alarur suppresslon ls selected by
S2O, btts three and four and enabled by <S16>.

Return alarm (btt stx) ciauses the eonsole to relnstate the

alarm by changlrg ttre state of the return alarsr blt ln the
extended status output and qrceptton report tf an alarm state
ts sttll present slnce t}re last alarm report. Untll the lnput
vdue qdts the alarrn state, the tlmer automattcally starts
after each return alarm message and a new return darm
issues after each S3f flrne perlod.

If both the de-alarm and return alarm blts are select€d, the
return alarm functlon overrtdes tJle de-alarm functlon. Specl-
fication S31 deflnes the ttme pertod (ln seconds) to de-alarnr
or return alarm the lnput.

Bit seven enables tlre rate of change alarm feature. Speclflca-

tion 531 deflnes the sample ttme tnterval (speclfled ln seconds).
The rate of change ts the absolute (EU) value of tJ:e dfferenee
between the prevlous sampled tirput value and the current
sampled lnput value. The conflgured tlme tnterval (Sgl) deflnes
tlle sampling ttme between the two values. The prevlous lnput
value tnltlallzes durlng start-up to the current selected lnput
value. Refer to S32 and S33 for addltlonal detalls.

Blt elght enables the dtgttal alarm count fllter. The tlme
period Xr S31 (speclfied lrr seconds) deflnes the sequenttal
count tJme lnterval. The value tn S34 deflnes the number of
transltlons that actlvate the alarm count fllter. Refer to S34
for addtttonal detalls.

Bit nine allows mode conftguratlon of the darm suppresslon

indicatlon at the extended status output (N+1, blt one). When
thls blt ts logtc O, the alarm suppresslon tndlcatton sets when
alarm suppresslon ts selected (throug;h S2O, blts three and
four) and enabled (through <S16>). When thts blt equals
logic 1, the alarm suppresslon lndtcatlon ls set when an
alarm ls suppressed.

s21 Speclficatlon S2f ls the hlgb alarm deadband. Thts ls the

deadband eompensatlon value, llr engtneertng unlts, that
subtracts from each hfgh alarm threshold value to determlne
the value at whlch the e:dsttng alarm level wtll be reduced.

s22 Speciflcatlon Sl22 ts the hlgh tlrree alarm dlfference. Wtth mul-
tilevel alarmlng selected, thls value adds to S23. The resultant
total adds to the value used for hlgh one level to determfire the
high tlrree alarm tlrreshold value. [f the monltored varlable

DataAcquisitionAnalog
l-Eg6-2008 is FEBrees 177 - g
 FunctionCode 177

becomes greater than thts value, a hlgh three alarrn state

e:dsts.

s23 Specification S23 is the hfgh two alarm dlfference. Wtth mul-
tllevel alarming selected, thts value adds to the value used for
hrgh one level to determtne the hrgh two alarm threshold
value. [f t]re monltored vartable becomes greater than thls
value, a htgh two alarm state dsts.

s24 Speclflcatlon Sl24 is the htgh one ffxed alarm value. When flxed
alarm levels €rre selected, and the monltored lnput value
becomes greater than thts rm,lue, a hlgh one alarm status erd,sts.

s25 Speciflcatlon S25 is the lornrone flxed alarm value. When ftxed
alarm levels are selected, and the monltored tnput value
becomes less than thls value, a low one alarm status erdsts.

s26 Speclficatlon 526 is the low two alarm dlfference. Wtth mulu-
level alarming selected, this value subtracts from the value
used for low one alarm level to determtne the lour two alarm
threshold value. If the monltored varlable becomes less than
thJs value, a low two alarm state e:d,sts.

s27 Speciflcation 527 is the low tlrree alarm dlfference. Wlth mul-
tilevel alarming selected, thls value adds to the value of 526.
The resultant total subtracts from the value used for the low
one alarm level to determlne the low three alarm tJrreshold
value. If the monitored varlable becomes less than thts value,
a low ttrree alarm state e:dsts.

s28 Specification S28 is the low alarm deadband. Thts ls the dead-
band compensation value that adds to each low alarm tlrresh-
old value to deterrnine the value at whtch the edstlng alarm
level urilt be reduced. Table L77-5 shows alarm thresholds.

Tahle 177-5. Alnrm Ttvestwlds

Alarm Level Thresholds Level Returnfrom Alarm Thresholds
High1 (F or V) + S23+ S22 HIGH3 High1 (F or V) + S23+ S22- S21
High 1 (F or V) + S23 HIGH High1 (F or V) + S23- S21
High 1 (F or V) H I G H1 High1 (F or V) - S21
Low 1 (F or V) LOW 1 Low I (F or V) + S28
Low 1 (F or V) - S26 LOW2 Low 1 (F or V) - S26+ S28
Low 1 (F or V) - S26 - S27 LOW3 Low 1 (F or V) - 526 - S2Z+ S28

Figure L77-L illustrates the relattonshtp of S21, S2Z, SZg,

526, S.27 and S28 to actual alarm thresholds when ustng
<S17> artd <Sl8>.

The striped line in Figure 177-L tllustrates the monltored

variable. The a:rowhead shows the relatlve movement of thls

qelq4cquisitionAnatog
1 7 7- 1 0 1s FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctlonGode177

S21 IS(HIGHDEADMND)

+ l@+5O-5)
HIGH 3
S24+S29+S22 S24+S2t l + S 2 2 -S 2 l

HIGH 2 +lOO-
S24 + S?3 S24+S23-S21

(600)
FDGD S24
lvAnnBLEl sl

S25 + S28
FrxEDS25
IVARIABLEI

LOW2 S25+326 + S 2 8
S25 + 526
-lOO.5O+1
40G1
LowS S25+526 + S 2 7 + S 2 8
szs-s26-s27

s2rB= 10 (LOWIEAD'BAND)

Flgure 7 7 7- 7. Leuet Detecfton Alarms

dynamlc vartable away from ttre qutescent (left stde) and ln

the dtrectlon of nomtnal (rtght stde).

Higln Alarm Vqlues:

<S17> (vartable hlgh alarm value) = 600

524 (fixed hrgh alarrn value) = 6OO
S23 (hrgh 2 alarm delta) - lOO
Sl22 (htgtt 3 alarm delta) = 5O
S2f (hEh alarm deadband) = $

Data isitionAnalog
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB199s 1 7 7- 1 1
FunctionCode 177

Lout AlarmVq,lues:

<S18> (variable low alarm value) = 4OO

S25 (fixed low alarm value) = 4OO
526 (low 2 alarm delta) = lOO
S'27 (low 3 alarm delta) = 50
S28 (low alarm deadband) = f O

s29 Speclflcatlon S29 ls the devlatton alarm llmlt. The hlgh devla-
tion alarm ls vlolated when the selected lnput <SlO>, <S11>
or <S 12> as selected by <S9> ls greater than or equd to the
sum of the devtatton alarm reference <S19> and the devlatlon
alarm lirnit S29.

The low devlatton alarm ls vtolated when the selected lnput

<SlO>, <Sll> or <Sl2> as selected by <S9> ts less tllan or
equal to the difference between the devlatlon alarm reference
<S19> and the deviation alarm [mft S29.

Deuiation Alarm Leuels :

High deviatlon = (S19> + S29

Low deviatiofi = <Sl9> - S2g

Deuiation De oldh and, Leuels :

Htgh deviation deadband = <Sl9> + S29 - S2f

[,ow deviatlon deadband = (S19> - S29 + S28

s30 Specification S3O ls the signfflcant change tn engtneertng

units input. A new exception report generates when the
selected input change is greater than the level deflned by thts
input, artd the exception report mfilmum tJme has been
exceeded (as defined by the segment control block).

s31 Specilication Sg l is tl:e period for ttme based alarms. Thts

time period is in seconds. Refer to S2O.

S32andS33 Specifications S32 and S33 defrne the rate of change ln engli-
neering units. Speciftcation S2O enables thls funetion. Speclfl-
cation Sg f determines the time perlod to sample the Input. Ttte
rate of change is the absolute value of the dlfference between
the previous sampled input value and the current sampled
input value. The configured time tnterval deflnes the samp[ng
time between the two values. The prevlous trput value lnlflal-
izes during start-up to the current selected tnput value.

A high rate of change is present when the absolute value of

the difference between the new sample value and the prevlous
sample value is greater than the hlgh rate of change S32.

A low rate of change is present when the absolute value of the

difference between the new sample value and the prevlous
sample value is less than the low rate of change Sgg.

Pele4cquisitionAnalog
177 - 12 ls FEB
lees l-Eg6-2008
 Functlon Gode 177

s34 Speclflcatlon S34 ls the alarm count ltmlt for the tlme sequence
alarm fflter. Speclflcatlon S2O enables thls alarrrr functton. Ttle
ttme pertod deflrred by Sgf ls the ttme trterral. Thls feature,
when enabled by S2O, malntalns an alarrr lerrel lf the monl-
tored vartable ls morrlng tnto and out of that alam lwel X
times (deffned by S34) durtng a pettod. Y(deffned by S31).

Each crosslng of an lndtvtdual alarm level lncrements an

internal counter ln the functlon code. Ttrls counter resets to
zr*lroat the end of the ttme speclfled tn S31. When the counter
value ls equal to or greater than the value of S34, the edstlng
alarm level matntalns through the next count perlod. Th,ls Jfrl'
tcredalarm level malntatns as long as the tnternal sequentlal
count per tlme perlod (Sgl) equals or exceeds (S34), or the
monitor varlable ts tn vtolatlon of the posted alarm threshold.

The filtered alarm level cancels lf any other alarm level ls vlo-
lated or if a tlme pertod (S31) occurs wlthout (Sga) alarm level
crossings.

NOTE:Normaldeadbandactionis includedin the determination of

retumfrom each alann levelviolationused by the time sequence
alannfilter.

The hold state automatlcally cancels when the ne:rt alarm level
is violated or edted. Ttre tnternd darm state ts used before
performtreg alarm suppresslon. Ttlus, alarm suppresslon does
not affect the pxrcesstng of the sequentlal alarm count Umlt.

Outputs

N Output N ts the current value and status. The eurrent value

and status output provides the current output value and the
status blts. Table 177-6 shows the status blts for output N.

Tahle 177-6. Outputff BitMap

Blr Attrlbute
7 Quality: 1=bad Q=good
6 Highalarm: l=les 0=Do
5 Lowalarm: l=teS 0=I|O
4-3 Alarmlevel: ff) = normal 10 = unused
01 = level2 11= level3
2-O Reservedfor futureuse

Refer to Flgure L77-2 for an example of ttre module access to

status. The test qua[ty block (functton code 31) curn retrleve
the quality status blt. Ttre qualtty state ls bad when the hard-
ware failure status ls bad. The test alarm block (functlon code
69) can retrleve the alarm status fblts three t]rrough slx]. Set-
tfirg 52 (funetton code 69) to zero tests the hfgh and low
darms. Settlng 52 (functlon code 69) to one tests the alarm
level.

DataAcquisitionAnalog
l-Eg6-2008 rees
ls FEB 177 - 13
FunctionCode177

GOOD/BAD
QUALITY

HIGH ALARM

DAANG LOW ALARM

hr/A Rv
OUAL ST
IN-SEL
LB/ELz AISRM
RV
o-rAR
LB/EL 3 AIARM
cv
lN-Ph,lT
X.RPT
ALM.SUP
TIME IN AT.ARMTOGGLE
VHA
vtJ
AIARil/ilSSUPPRESSED
DEV

VARIABLEALART\,IS
ACTIVE

LOW RATE AIJARM

HIGH RATE A1ARM

LOW DEVIATIONAT-ARM

HIGH DA/IATION AI-ARM

NO REPOHT
N+7

1
QUALITYOVERRIDE

CALCUI.ATEDVALUE

AUTO (l)/lvlANUAL (o)

CONSTRAINED

OUT OF RANGE

HARDWAREFAILURE

E.STOP

RESERVED(ALWAYS= 1)

Ttzocxflc

Ftgure 777-2. Mdtie Access tp Status

N+l Output N+l is the current extended status. Figure L77-2

shows an example of the module access to status. The
*tended status output converts to a real output as an lnte-
ger. Table L77-7 shows the bit map for output N+1.

DataAcquisition
Analog
1 7 7- 1 4 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 1TI

Tahle 777-7. Outpttt N+ 1 Btt Map

Blnary Welghted
Blr Value
Attrlbute

0 1 Retumalarm(bit toggles)
I 2 Alarmsuppresslon(referto S20,bit 9)
2 4 Variablealarm
3 I Low rate alarm
4 16 High rate alarm
5 32 Low deviationalarm
6 al Highdeviatlonatarm
7 128 No report
I 256 Qualityoveridtlen
I 512 Calculated.Modes:
Auto/real- real inputselected<S10>
Auto/calculated- calculatedinput<S12>
Manual- customspecifiedvalue<S13>
10 1024 Auto/manual:1 = auto,0 = manual.Modes:
Auto/real- real inputselected<S10>
Auto/calculated - @lculatedinput<S12>
Manual- custort specifiedvalue<S13>
11 2W Constrained
12 4096 Out of range
13 8192 Hardwarefailure
14 16384 E-STOP
15 32768 Reserved(always= 1)
16 - 23 Reservedfor futureuse

APPLICATIOA'S

Figure 177-3 shows tJle data acqulsltlon analog block used fil
normal, varlable and devtatlon alarm sltuatlolts.

Figure 177-4 lllustrates a tlplcd appllcatlon uslng the data

acqutsltlon analog block. In thls appllcatlon, the value of the
S2O block ls 24 deelmal (18 hex).

Thls conflguratlon:

o Monltors the reactor outlet temperature frorn the analog

master module. If thts ternperature ls greater than 5O0
degrees Celslus tt ts suspect/out of ra,nge.

o Allows operator (console) selectlon of the polynomtal char-

acterlzatlon.

. Suppresses all alarms when the reactor ls ln shutdown

mode.

DataAcquisitionAnalog
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 1 7 7- 1 5
FunctionGode177

NORMAL ALARMING
(srNGLE OR MULTTLEVEL)
DAANG
rvA Rv
ot Ar sr
Itf-SEL
FiV
CHAR
cl/
II{-PMT
X.RPT
ALr,l-SUP
VHA
VIA
DA/

VARIABLE AISRMING
DAANG
rvA RV
ouAL sT
IN.SEL
RV
CFI.AR
cv
IN-PMT
X.RPT
ALM.SUP
vltA
vLA
DA/

DEVIATIONALARM

Figure 177-3. Normal, Vafinble and Deuio;tion Alarms

DataAcquisition
Analog
177 - 16 1sFEBlees l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode177

N : DAANG
Rv
L - - -
N/A
OUAL ST
I
I IN€EL
I

(12)i RV
S5=32 CHAR
36=16
cv
Itrlf,Mf
X.RPT
HIGH= 500'C AIM€UP

(FROMAtrM) wrA
OUTLETTEMPERATURE
REACTOR
vtA
DA/

Ftgure 7 7 7-4. Data Acquistfwn Analog Exomple

Analog
DataAcquisition
t-E96-2008 15FEBlses 177 - 17
ffi

o
 FunctionGode178- DataAcquisitionAnaloglnpuUloop

The data acqulsltlon analog tnput/loop functlon code pro-

vldes a way to lmport data from tJle data acgutsltlon analog
block (functton code L77l on Plarrt l,oop or INFI-NEI systems.

NOTE:lf a moduleutilizesan importedanalogvaluefromthe loop

the functionblocksthat uti-
in severalinstancesin its configuration,
lize that analogvalue must be connectedto only one DMNG UL
block.You cannotimportexceptionreportsfrom the same (loop,
node, module and block) addressto more than one destination
withina singlemoduleconfiguration.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK TVpe Descrlptlon

N R Cunentvalue,quality/status
N+1 R Nexthighestlimit
N+2 R Nextlowestlimit
N+3 R Extendedstatus

SPECIFICATIONS

Spee Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-31 Source module address
S2 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Sourceblocknumber
S3 N 0 I 1-63or Sourcenodeaddress
1-250 1 - 63 for PlantLoop
1 - 250for |NF|-NET
g N 0 I 1-250 Sourceloop number
S5 N 0 I Full Spareintegerinput
S6 N 0.000 R Full Sparereal input
S7 N 0 I 0or1 Sparebooleaninput

DataAcquisitionAnalogInpuVloop
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 178- 1
FunctionCode 178

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 Spectficatlon Sf is the souree module address. Thts ls the

module bus address of the module contalntng the monltored
DAAIVG block.

S2 Spectficatlon 52 is the source block number. Thls ls tlre block

number of the monltored DAAM block.

s3 Specification 53 ls tl:e source PCU address. Thls ls the PCU

address where the module contalnlng ttre monltored DAAI{G
block resides.

NOTE:Addressesone to 63 are avaihbb for Plant Loop systems

and oneto 250 for othersystems.

s4 Speci{ication 54 is the source loop number. ThJs ls t}re loop

number where the PCU contalnlng the monltored DAAM
block resides.

55 through 57 Spare inputs.

Outputs

N Output N ts the current value and quallty/status: the current

value, quallty and status of the monltored DAAI.IG block
addressedby S1, 52, Sg and 54. Table 178-l shows ttre sta-
tus bits at this bloek address.

Tahle 778-7. Status Bits at

Current Blrck Ad.dress
Blt Attrlbute
7 Quality: 1=bad Q=good
6 Highalarm: 1=les 0=ho
5 Lowalarm: l=!BS 0=Do
4-3 Alarrn level: 00 = normal 10 = level 2
01 = unused 11 = level 3
2-O Reservedfor futureuse

The test quality block (function code 3l) can retrleve the qlual-
Ity status bit. The quality bft ts bad when the corrmunlcatlon
status or the hardware fatlure status ls bad.

The test alarm block (function code 69) can retrleve the alarm
status blts. Setting 52 (functton code 69) to ?,rlro tests tlre
high and low alarms. Settfng 52 (functton code 69) to one
tests tJre alarm level.

DataAcquisition
A InpuULoop
179-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-200B
 Functlon Code 178

N+1 Output N+l ls the next hfghest llmlt. Thls value ls the next
htghest value Umtt that results tn alarm acttvtty by the
DAAIVGblock (functlon code I77) belng monltored.

N+2 Output N+2 ls the next lowest ltmlt. Thls output value ls the
next lowest value ltmtt that wtll result tn alarm actlvlty by the
DAAM block (functlon code L77l beleg monltored.

N+3 Output N+3 ls the extended status. Ttte extended status con-
verts tnto a red output as an lnteger wlth the blt map shown
inTable L78-2.

Tablc 778-2. Exterded Stafirs BIt Map

Blnary Welghted
Btt Attrlbute
Value
0 1 Retumalarm(toggledbit)
1 2 Alarmssuppressed
2 4 Variablealarms
3 8 Low rate alarm
4 16 High ratealarm
5 32 Low deviation alann
6 u Highdeviationalarm
7 128 No report
8 256 Qualityoverridden
9 512 Calculatedmode:
Auto/rEal- real inputsefected<S10>
Auto/calculated - calculatedinput<S12>
Manual- customspecifiedvalue<S13>
10 1024 Auto/manual:
0 = ffiODUd
1 = auto
11 2048, Constrained
12 4096 Out of range
13 8192 Hardwarefailure
14 16384 E.STOP
15 32768 Exceptionreportreceived
16 - 23 Reserved

The exceptlon report recelved (btt 15) lnltlallzes to zero on

entry to execute mode and sets upon the flrst exceptlon
report. The blt remalns set untll the module ls reset or a mode
charrge occurs. Refer to Ftgure 178-L for an exarnple of the
module access to status.

DataAcquisitionAnalogInpuULoop
l-E96-2008 ls FEBrees 178 - 3
FunctionGode 178

GOOD/BAD
QUALITY

HIGH ALARM

LOWALARM

LB/EL 2 AI-ARM

LEVEL 3 AI-ARM

TIME IN AI-ARM TOGGLE

AIJRMS SUPPRESSED

VARIABLE ALARMS ACTIVE

LOW RATE AI ARM

HIGH RATE AI-ARM

LOW DryIATION ALARM

HIGH DH/IATION AI-ARM

NO REPORT

QUALITYOVERRIDE

CALCUIJTED VALUE

AUTO (1)/iTANUAL (O)

CONSTRAINED

OUT OF RANGE

HARDWARE FAILURE

E.STOP

RESERVED (ALWAYS = 1)

TP2OGNC

Figure 778-7. Module Access to Stafis

APPLICATIOruS

Assume that the monitored DAAIVG function code is (also

shown in Table f 78-3):

High constraint limit = 900

High 3 alarm lirnit = 8OO
High 2 alarm lirnit = 7OO
High I alarm lirnit = 600
Nominal = 5O0
[,ow I alarm limit = 4OO

DataAcquisition
AnalogInpuULoop
178-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Functlon Code 178

Low 2 alarrn Umlt = 3OO

Low3 alarm Umlt =2OO
[.ow constralrrt llnlt = lOO

NOTE:Constraintsactive,multilevelalarmingand auto mode.

Table 778-3. Etcamytle DAAM Setfirtgs

MonltoredReal Referenced DAANGULOutputs
Output N
ValueInput of DAANGS
N N+1 N+2 N+3 Quallty
DAANG ReportedValue
950 900 900 900 900 35,840 High3 alarm
850 8s0 850 900 800 33,792 High3 alarm
750 750 750 800 700 3!f,792 Hlgh2 alarm
6s0 650 650 700 600 33,792 High1 alarm
s00 500 500 600 4@ 93,792 Good
350 350 350 400 300 33,792 Low 1 alarm
250 250 250 300 200 3tf,792 Lou 2 alarm
150 150 150 200 100 33,792 Lont 3 alarm
50 100 100 100 100 35,840 Low3 alarm
NOTES:
1. OutputN+3= 3{t,792(32,768+ 1024).E\coplion repodr€cah€dsince modulesta.t-upand DAAl.lGb rDnlbdng lhe t€al hpul
2. OutputN+3= 35,840(32,768+ 2048+ 1024).Exceptiont€portreoehredsincemodulestalt-up,oonstrdmd Input,and DAANGis mon'
itoringthe real input.

DataAcquisitionAnalogInpuULoop
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1ee5 178 - 5
ffi

t
 Function Code 179r EnhancedTrend

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The entranced trend deflnttton functlon code ls part of the

INFI 90 dlstrlbuted trendlnrg package. Thls functlon code col-
lects, compresses and stores trend data. A compresslon algo-
rlthm lncreases the amount of hlstorlcal data retalned by the
block for a glven amount of module memory utlllzaflon. Tlend
data may be collected from varlous e(eeptlon reportlng blocks,
ldenttfled by 52.

NOTE:Functioncode 179operatesonlyin |NFI-NETsystems.

Collected data may be retrteved from the block on demand by

any number of collectlon devlces for archtrdrtg and dlsplay.
The enhanced trend block lssues specld trend erceptlon
reports and notffIes collectlon devlces when a slgntflcant
amount of ne\il trend data ls recorded tn the trend buffer.

The amount of hlstorical data retalreed by the bloek varles

dependlng on:

. The slze of the block's trend buffer.

. The rate of change of tlle tnput value.

. The t51pesof data to be collected.

Functlon code L79 gives the followtng entrancements over the

analog trend functlon code 66:

o Abtllty to trend more tlpes of lnputs.

o Record status and alarm lnformatlon wtth value(s).

o Faster data collectlon rates avallable.

. More sfnficant dlglts on stored values.

o Uses data compresslon algortthm to reduce storage

requlrements.

. Flner resolutlon on time assoclated wtth recorded vahres.

EnhancedTrend
r-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 7 9- 1
Function Code 179

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N B Value is always 0. Quality is bad when the MFP module has not
been time synchronized.
N+1 R Approximate numberof minutesof hlstoricaldatacurrently
savedin the block'sbuffer.

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0 - 9998 Block address of input
S2 N 0 0-9 Inputblocktype:
0 = functioncode30 $ = functioncodE123
1 = functioncode45 6 = functioncode 129
2 = functioncode62 7 = functioncode 136
3 = functioncode68 8 = functioncode 1TT
4 = functioncode80 9 = functioncode211
S3 N 1 1-63 Trending mode:
1=S?lnpling 8=sverage
I = mifiimum 16 = sum
4 = rTl€ximum 32 = range (m?lt.-min.)
S4 N 50 20 - 65535 Buffersize (no.of events)
S5 N 40.000 R 0 - 100 Buffer threshold (%)
S6 Y 15.000 R Full Inputsamplingtime(secs)
S7 Y 1.000 R 0 - 100 Significantchange (%)
S8 N 1200.000 R Full Maximumelapsedtimefor eventrecording(secs)
S9 Y 1.000 R Full Statisticaltime baseperiod
s10 N 2 l 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Statisticaltime baseunits:
0 = SoOonds
1 = minutes
2 = hours
3 = days
s11 N 7200.000 R Full Maximum elapsed time for exception reporting (secs)
s12 Y 100.000 R 0 - 100 GOOD/SUSPECTthreshold
s13 Y 1.000 R Fulf Summationconversionfactor
s14 N 1 I Full Summationmodifier
s15 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof statisticaltirnebase resetsignal
sl6 N 0 I Full Spareparameter

EnhancedTrend
179-2 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code 179

S PE CIFI CATI O,ruS@ontinued)

EXPLANATION

Specitications

s1 (Blrck address of input) Block address of excepflon report

block to be the source of trend data.

NOTES:
1. Whenaddressinga multipleoutputblock,usethe lowestblock
number(N).

2. Selectinga value of zero disablesall samplingand statistical

trendingfor the functioncode 179block.

s2 (rnput block tgpe) tdenttfles tlpe of tnput to be trended.

Q = functlon code 3O, altalog exceptton report

I = functlon code 45, dlgltal exceptlon report
! =functlon code 62, remote control memory
g = functton code 69, remote marrual set constant
| = functlon code 80, control statlon
$ = functton code L23, devlce drlver
g = funcuon code Lzg, mulfl state devtce drlver
J =functton code 136, remote motor control
$ = functlon code L77, data acqulsltlon analog
$ = functlon code 21 1, data acqulsltlon dlgltal

NOTE:The blockaddressedin <S1> mustmatchthe inputblock

errorwill result'
typein S2 or a configuration

s3 (Tvend.ing mode) Selects any comblnatton of avallable trend-

slmul-
ing t1pes. None are qrclusrve, any or all may be selected
ta'eo""fy. Speclflcauon 56 selicts sample eollectlon speed,
whlle Sg anilSlg select the speed of statlstlcal collectlolls.

1 = SamPltng - current vdue'

trendlng
) =Mtnlmum - mLnlnillm value collected over the
lnterval (statistlcal)'
trend-
d =Ma:dmum - ma:dmum value collected over the
lng lnterval (statlsttcal)'
- collected
$ = Average - (artthmetlc mean) average value
over ttre trendlng lntenral (stattsttcd)'

EnhancedTrend
15 FEB199s 179- 3
t-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 1Tg

rG = Sum - total 'alues colected orrer ttre trendrng tnter-

val (staUsflcaD.

" =m5;;n::
:irffiffiffiHffiT"ii3*
Exampfe; The exceptionreportselectedis to be trendedlnthe Sampilng(one)and Rangc(321
modes.
1+ 3 2 = 3 3
53=33
53 = Sumof desiredmodes

NOTE: When sampling mode is selected, status and alarm infor-

mation is recorded as wefl as a varue for each input brock t1pe.

The tlpes of trend data a'ailrable for drsplay or a'al5rsts

depends on the capabrltttes of the devlce .t"ia io collect, -drs-
play, or anallze the data recorded by the enha'ced trend
block. consult the user's manual for the spectllc dwtce used
for a descriptton of tlre data available and ihe procedures for
conflguring that derdce.

When trendtnga
{igt t stgnal ust4g avenage,trend value rep-
resents percent of ttme ON or Onf. (duty cycle) (zero to f60
percent).
S4 (BWer size) The buffer size speclffes the mtnlmum number
of events ttrat may be recordedby setflrlg an anount of mod-
ule memory aside for the trend data birffer. Increasing ttre
trend buffer sDe will:

Increase the amount of hlstorteal data retained by the

block.

Decrease requlred polling frequency from the coUectJng

devices.

. Increase the module's RAI\{ uullzaflon.

An event is one of the followtng:

' Significant change ln sample or pertodtc stausttcal value.

. Status or quallty change.
o Change in a tunable parameter of funcuon code LTg.

ss (Bqffer fill threshold) The percent of buffer space

flUed wlth
new events before lnfoTmflrg collectfng devtces bf a stgntflcant
amount of new avallable trend data.

EnhancedTrend
179-4 15 FEB 1995
l-E96-2008
 Function Code 179

S6 (rnput sampling time, in *eonds; onlg u*d if sanryllng

is sel eeted-tr. SbrThe perlod of monltorlng the value and sta-
tus of the samPtlng lnPut.

NOTE:Selectinga valueol zerodisablesthe samplingmode.

s7 (Sign ificant c}rornge: in percent of *ain) Percent of varl-

€rnce between t;1e artatog lnput value and tts predtcted value
the
that causes the block to record the anatog lnput value tn
trend buffer. Ttre block proJects an expected value by obsery-
'When
tng the trend of prevloui values. tJre actual lrrput value
differs from thls expected value by more than the spectfled
amourt, a new value ls recorded. Ttre errhanced trend block
the
uses thts value along wtth the span values dellned ln
excepgon reporttng bi-ock that ls referenced by 51 to calculate
Its absolute- sgnricarrt span values. Ttre slgntficarrt change
not
values deflned ln these exceptlon reporttng blocks do
affect the enhanced trend compresslon algorltlun.

for
Spectflcagon SZ also affects the compresslon algorlthm
storage of stattstlcal computatlons (ffi, mardmum,
sum, range, and average). However, 57 does not affect calcu-
lation of stattstlcd values.

s8 (IuIg4;imum recording time) MaJdrnum lnterval between con-

potrrt. If
secuuve recorded values tn the trend buffer for one
does not change durin$ thls
the state of the lnput polnt
period, the curTent state wlll be recorded. Stattsttcal values
perlod
will not compress tf thts ttme ls less than the stattsttcal
(Sg and Sloi. They wtu be stored after ttre end of each stattstl-
sarn-
cal perlod. Llkewlse, tf thts ttme ts less than ttre tnput
pling ume (s6), the lnput sampung cornpresslon algortthm
to be
will be effectlvely dtsabled. Thta forces tnput s€unPles
sample pertod. This is use-
recorded at the end of every tnput
that ls recorded at flxed
ful in appltcattons that requlre aata
time lntervals.

(statistical time ba.se perid.; onlg ured if S3>Irwhen tlre

s9 functtons,
trendhg mode ln Sg ls set for one of the statlsttcal
The
Sg determlnes the pertod of tJre statlsttcal computatJon.
are set by sIo. For example: If sg
statisttcal tjme basi untts
1lve a11dSIO equals one, then tlre period of the statlstl-
"g""ls
cal functlon set by s3 ls flve mlnutes.
=2
NOTE:Usethe smallestnumberpossible(i.e.,59 = 1 and S10
foronehourratherthanSg=3,600andS10=0whichequalsone
hourin seconds).
(Sg
When the pertod set by 59 and SfO equals one hour
day (Sg equals one, S10
equals orr", SlO equals two) or one
equats three), t3e staustlcal computatlon period synchronJzes
the hour
to real time. The stattsucal functton ls calculated on
statlstical perlods
or on a dally (at midntght) basts. All other
are elapsed tlme and are not synchronlzed to real tlme.

EnhancedTrend
15 FEB1995 179- 5
l-E96-2008
 Function Code 1Tg

A reset on S15 disables real ttme synchrontza6ol. When

reset on Sfs occurs, real tlme synchronlzatton ls dtsabled
and the statistical pertod beglns on an hourly or datly basts
from the time of ttre reset. To enable real ume syrrctrio
a
O
1112.-
tlon, tune 59 to another value tJren return tt to a value of
one
(i.e., tune 59 to three, then tune Sg to one). If
Sg equals zero,
the statistical mode trendlng functlon ls dtsabled.

sl0 (stati.stieal time base unitsl Shows the ttme unlt assoclated
with 59.

O = seconds
I = minutes
2 = hours
B = days

sl1 (Iuraximum reporting time; in *eonds) Ma:dmum rnterval

between trend exc_entlon reports. Glves an exceptton report
lf
no other criteria has prompted one. Thts nottites co[Lcflon
devices to collect trend data.

s12 (fuodlsuspeet threshold) The mxrlmum pereent4ge of tnput

values durin$ a statisttcal pertod that musi be gooa-qualtty
to
receive a GOOD summary value. If at least onJgoodvalue
ls
observed, but the percent4ge of good values ls less than
tlrls
parameter value, the quafity of the suurmary
wtll be St/SpEC? If
no GOOD values are observed, the sunrmary rralue \ilt1 be
BAD.
sl3 (Sum mation eortaercion
frctori onlg u,sed. if, summatlon is
selected. in S3, Value used to compute th; sum over
ttre
period set by 59 and SlO. Surnmatlon converslon
factor ts a
divisor into the aecumulated sum and may be used to
adJust
for differences in the untts of a value. Summauon eomputa-
tion is calculated by addlng the current sampled tnput i"t,.,.
to the total every segment cycle flme.

Example: Target
segment
cycletimeequalso.2ssecond:

1 valuecollectedeveryO.ZSsecond=
4 valuesaddedto sum every I second=
240 valuesadded to sumevery I minute

If the source point value ls in untts of gatlons per

mlnute, a
conversion factor of 24O would adJust the sum to have
units
of gallons.

NOTE:Thetargetsegmentcycletime is set in the executive

block,
functioncode82.

For digital inputs, the sum mtght show the number

of seg-
ment cycle times during whlch the tnput was a one. fn
such a
case, the conversion factor might be used to convert
t5e sum
to units of run time.

EnhancedTrend
1 7 9- 6 15 FEB 1995
l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode179

sl4 (summqtion modifieri onlg used if sum is select'ed in S8'

ornd SZ = I, 2, 5, 6, or 7) Speclfles the t5rye of summatlon
functton for dfgttal tnPuts.

Q = count number of samples when tnput was zeto

] = count number of samples when tnput w€ts one
!, = count changes from zero to one
$ = count changes from one to zero
4 = count all state changes

sl5 (Block o,dtdtess of stctistical time bo.* reset signal)

Resets the perlodlc functlon tlmer based on 59 and SlO when
the referenied block shows a transltlon of O to 1. Th,e curent
sta6stical perlod lmmedlately ends and a new one starts. Thls
allows configuratlon control over pertodlc trend functlolls.

Example: Hourlystatistics to realtime(referto S9)'butmay

for a trendedpointsynchronizes
Uesynchronized to process such
events, as an operation by usingthisinput.
strart'up

516 through S18 Spare lnteger.

sl9 Spare real.

APPLICATIONS

To trend alalog values, the user conllgures th9 analog excep-

6on reports ana enhanced trend bloeks for each polnt
trended. Flgure L7g-L tllustrates a conflguratlon of a sarrl-
pnng (once a mtnute) and average (onee an hour) trend of an
poht wlth manual reset. Ttre stgnlff"?tl change alloqr-
l11"fog-(Szl
ance ls set to a htgher value than default. Thts wlll
decrease the amount of recorded values. The console may
then be conflgured to collect data from the enhanced trend
block for dtspl-ay or archfWrg vta speclal errhanced trend data
poll messages and rePlles.

Figure IT7-Z represents a sampllng and average fhourly) and

sum trend of a devtce drlver. The sum trend ls conflgured to
count changes from zeto to one. The enhanced trend block
gathers all data frorn the devlce drlver tncludtng state-of con-
Lol output, all feedback lnputs, artd other status lndlcators
such as feedback status and status overrlde.

The average wtll glve the duty cycle of the devtce (percent of
the period durtng whtch the devlce was OIVI and the sum wiU
show the number of ttmes the devlce turned ON during the
perlod (cycled from ORFto OIV).

When the entranced trend ls used for sampltng, mtnlmum and

ma:drnum trendtng of a control statton (functlon code 8O), any
or all potnts assoctated wtth the control statlon may be dls-
played. These polnts lnclude process varlable (PV), set polnt
(RI), and all sta-
iSpj, control output (CO), ratlo tndex value
uon status lndlcators such as auto/marrual, b54lass, etc.

EnhancedTrend
t-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 7 9- 7
 FunctionCode 179

Flgure 179-3 ts an ex€rmple of a sample (every flve seeonds)

trend of a control statton wlth a reset from the start of a batch
Process. An lncreased buffer slze (Sa) alows for retentlon of
more data.

Sl r 2OO SlO r DEFAULT

S2-O S11TDEFAULT
r/[ANUAL S3-O S12IDEFAULT
RESET 54 r DEFAULT S13 r DEFAULT
S5 - DEFAULT S14 - DEFAULT
56-60 5151250
S7 - 2.O 516 r DEFAULT
SB - DEFAULT Sl7 r DEFAIJLT
59 - DEFAULT S18 r DEFAULT
S19 r DEFAULT
TP4{iAOa

Figwe 779-7. Sample andAuerage

Annlq Tterd, uithReset

cl
FBT
FB2
OP 301
os Sl r 2@ SlO - DEFAULT
S2r5 S11rDEFAULT
53 - 25 S12 - DEFAULT
54 r DEFATLT S13 r DEFAULT
S5 r DEFAULT S14 r 2
SG- DEFAULT S15 r DEFAULT
57 - DEFAULT 516 - DEFAULT
58 r DEFAULT S17 - DEFAULT
S9 r DEFAULT S18 - DEFAULT
S19 r DEFAULT
TP4s!BAA

Figure 179-2. Sarnlrt@ andAuerage

and.Surn DigfualTfend,

: S1 =2O0 SlO - DEFAULT

' 52'4 S11 - DEFAULT
i sg-z S12 - DEFAULT
i S4g15O S13 = DEFAULT
I 55 = DEFAULT S14 - DEFAULT
I 56=$ S15 c 25O
i S7 = DEFAULT 516 - DEFAULT
I S8 = DEFAULT S17 - DEFAULT
; 59 - DEFAULT S18 - DEFAULT
I

I
S19 - DEFAULT
I

Figure 179-3. SarnpLW Minimulr. arud,Maximttrt

Tlend oJ hntrol Stafion withReset

EnhancedTrend
1 7 9- g ls FEB1995
l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode180r BatchInpuUOutput

GENERALDESCRIPTION
vo The batch lnput/output functton code ls the lnterface
cBc
All All between the control configuratlon and the batch command
Atz
Af3 Al2
controller l/O hardware. Ttte batch I/O block tnterfaces:
At4
Ats At3
At6
o Slx andog tnputs.
AOf At4 . T\rro dlgttal lnputs.
AO2
o T[ro pulse lnputs.
DOr Al5
w2 o TWo analog outputs.
Prl Al€
. TWo dlgttal outputs.
Pt2
AOI
The batch UO functton code deflnes parameters affectlng I/O
values as well as resPonses to I/O f,allure.

UTILIZAT'ON

OUTPUTS

Btk TVPE Descrlptlon

N R Analoginput1
N+1 R Analoginput2
N+2 R Analoginput3
N+3 R Analoginput4
N+4 R Analoginput5
N+5 R Analoginput6
N+6 R Analogoutput1
N+7 R Analogoutput2
N+8 B Digitalinput1
N+9 B Digitalinput2
N+10 R Pulseinput1
N+11 R Pulseinput2
N+l2 B l/O module status flag: 0 = 9@d, 1 = bad
N+l3 R Reservedfor futureuse
N+l4 R Reservedfor futureuse

BatchInpuUOutput
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 1 8 0- 1
FunctionCode180

sPECtFtCATIO^tS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 1- 15 Batchl/O expanderbus address
S2 N 2 I 2045 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition1
S3 N 2 I 2045 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition2
S4 N 2 I 2045 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition3
S5 N 2 2045 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition4
S6 N 2 I 20dl5 Bfockaddressof analoginputdefinition5
S7 N 2 I 2045 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition6
S8 N 2 I zo/ls Bfockaddressof analogoutput1
S9 N 2 I 20pl5 Blockaddressof analogoutput2
s10 N 0 2045 Block address of digital output 1
sl1 N 0 I 204s Blockaddressof digitaloutput2
s12 N 2 I 2045 Blockaddressof pulseinput1
sl3 N 2 20d}5 Blockaddressof pulseinput2
s14 N 0 0or1 Failureaction:
0 = trip module
1 = cootinueoperation
s1s N 0 2045 Sparereal input
sl6 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
sl7 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter

EXPLANATION

Specificafion Sf is the batch I/O expander bus address.

Addresses one through 15 are available.

Specilicaflon 52 is the block address of analog tnput deflnl-

tion (functton code 182) for analog lnput one. Thts Unk allows
communieation between tJle batch I/O block and the analog
tnput definition block.

NOTE:Specifications 52 through54 mustbe definedas highlevel

inputs(oneto fivevoltsor fourto 20 milliamps),

53 through S7 Refer to 52.

SB and 59 Specificatlon 58 ls the block address of the value for analog

output one. Spectflcatton 59 is the block address of the value
for analog output two.

S 1 0a n d S 1 1 Specificafion S10 ts the block address of the value for dtgttal

output one. Speciflcation S 1 I is the block address of the
value for digitd output two.

S12and S13 Specification Sl2 is the block address of first pulse tnput
block. Specification S13 ts the block address of second pulse

BatchInpuVOutput
1 8 0- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 180

lnput block. For more lrrformatlon refer to functlon codes

lO2, 103 and 104.

sl4 Thts spectftcatlon deflnes the system response to bad status.

Ia,ck of response or a bad analog tnput reference voltage
causes a bad status value.

Q = trfp batch command controller

I = continue operation

S15 through S17 Spare.

Outputs

Thts block produces a total of flft,een outputs. The ffrst 12

outputs provlde values to the system for the batch l/O. Out-
put N+ 12 ls a status flag and the last two outputs are
reserved for future rrse.

APPL'CATIO'VS

Ftgure 18O-I lllustrates a posslble conllguratlon usln$ the

batch I/O block. Spectflcatlons S2 through 57 are the block
addresses of the analog tnput definttton blocks. These speclfl-
cations provtde the ltnk between the batch I/O block and the
analog lnput deflnltlon block. Thls communlcatlon ltnk
deflnes how the correspondlng analog lnput ls lnterpreted.

Specifications S8 and 59 are the block addresses of the M/A

stattons. These speclflcatlons provlde tl:e values of the analog
outputs.

Specifications S10 and S11 are ttre block addresses of the

device drlver blocks. These ltnks provlde the dtgttal output
values.

Speclflcatlon S12 is the block address of the pulse lnput /fre-

quency block and S13 ls tJre block address of the pulse input/
totalizatton block. The pulse lnput functton code defines how
the correspondtng pulse tnput operates.

BatchInpuUOutput
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 1 8 0- 3
FunctionCode180

Att
cBcI
At2
Ai' A
At4
Afc A
At6
AOt A
Ac'z
DOl A
D@
PII A
H2

Ftgure 780-7. BatchI/O Ercfinple

BatchInpuUOutput
1 8 0- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode181- BatchStation(CBC)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

rwA The batch statton functlon code provtdes the tnterface between
, cB9t' the control conff.guratlon and the batch command controller
tvt/Al STP
ril^c RCP
(CBC) faceplate.
DOB1 Fl
DOBz F2
AUX1 SWr This functton code passes operattng parameter values to the
AU)e SW2 faceplate.
ALM1 SW3
ALMZ SWa
ASCil SWs Example operattng parameters lnclude the process variable,
STP Sw6
sw7
set point, control output and reclpe number. The batch sta-
R/H sw8 tion function code allows the operator to perform various con-
ACK
ALM
trol actlons and talce manual control of the outputs.
hr/A
ht/A
This function code has elght au:dltary swltches ttrat the face-
plate ctrn control. Addlilonally, lt provtdes au:dltary block
ireputs for dlsplaytng two real values on the faceplate.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B output
Hold/initialize
N+1 R Initialstepnumber
N+2 R Recipenumber
N+3 B Fl output
N+4 B F2 output
N+5 B Auxiliaryswitch1
N+6 B Auxiliaryswitch2
N+7 B Auxiliaryswitch3
N+8 B Auxiliaryswitch4
N+9 B Auxiliaryswitch5
N+10 B Auxiliaryswitch6
N+11 B Auxiliaryswitch7
N+l2 B AuxiliaryswitchI

BatchStation(CBC)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 8 1- 1
FunctionCode181

OUTPUTS @ontinued)
I
Brk Type Descrlptlon
N + 13 B ALARM ACK indicator
N + 14 B Alarmstatus
N + 15 R Reservedfor futureuse
N+16 R Reservedfor futureuse

SPECtFtCATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 2045 Block address of batch UO block
S2 N 2 2045 Block address of loop 1 M/A station
S3 N 2 2045 Block address of loop 2 MIA station
S4 N 2 2045 Blockaddressof output1 devicEdriverCO status
S5 N 2 2045 Blockaddressof output2 devicedriverCO stratus
S6 N 2 2045 Blockaddressof auxiliaryinput1
S7 N 2 2045 Bfockaddressof auxiliaryinput2
S8 N 0 2045 Block address of extemal alarm 1
S9 N 0 2045 Block address of extemal alarm 2
s10 N 0 2045 Blockaddressof firstASCIIstringdescriptor
s11 N 2 2045 Blockaddressof currentstepnumber
s12 N 0 0-7 CBCstationlinkaddress
s13 N 0 2045 Block address of run/hold signal:
0 = hold state
1 = tuD state
sl4 Y 0 0 0 , 0 11, 0 , Manualoverridelockout:
1 1 ,2 0 o r 2 1 X X
X0 = normal,no lockout
Xl = manuallockout
0X = faceplatehas run priority
1X = configuration has run priority
2X = no priority
s15 N 1 0or1 Default rnode of outputs:
0 = ffi€lnUal
1 = ?utomatic
s16 Y 0 0or1 Executedstop (E-STOP)lockout:
0 = oolrnal(enabled)
1 = locked(disabled)
sl7 Y 0 0or1 Displayselection:
0 = step names
1 = s€t point
s18 Y 9.2E18 R Full Laststepnumber
sl9 Y 0 Full Spare
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s21 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

Batch Station(CBC)
1 8 1- 2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode181

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 Speciflcatlon Sf ls the block address of batch I/O functlon

code 180.

s2 Speclflcatlon 52 ls tJre block address of ttre M/Astatlon (func-

tion code 80) tn loop one. Spectflcatton 52 has two functlons.

1. It allows the batch statlon block to get loop lnformatlon

from the M/A statlon. The CBC controller can dlsplay thJs
information on tJle faceplate. Conflgure the M/A statlon as a
passive statlon by setttng 516 to 25a (functlon code 80).

2. It enables the M/A statton to be placed tn automatlc or

manual mode from the faceplate. AdJustment of the control
output ls posslble tn manual mode. The set potnt value can be
adJusted ln automatlc mode.

s3 Speclflcatlon Sg ls the block address of the M/A statlon ln

loop two. Refer to 52.

S4 Specification 54 ts the block address of the devlce driver

(funetton code 123) control output status for dtgttal output
one. Specification 54 has two functions:

l. It provides Ern alarm lndication for the dfgttal output by

decoding the control output status value.

O.O= good
1.0 = bad
2.O = wdflng

The alarm status output of the batch statlon changes to a

logic I upon a bad control output status.

2. It provides the batch statton wlth the block address of the

device driver block. Thls block address allornzsthe batch sta-
tion to place €rn output ln manual or autornatlc eontrol.
Adjustment of the dtgttat output ts posslble tn m€rnual mode.

S5 Specificatlon 55 ts the block address of the devlce drlver con-

trol output status for dtgttal output two. Refer to 54.

s6 Specificatlon SO ls the block address of ar::dltary lnput olle.

This input allows the dtsplay of arry real bloek output.

s7 Specilication 57 is tlle block address of au:dliary tnput two.

This input allows the display of any real block output.

s8 Specification 58 ts the block address of external alarm signal

one. An input of one generates an alarm. The alarm LED on

BatchStation(CBC)
l-E96-2008 ls FEB199s 1 9 1- 3
Function Code 181

the CBC controller faceplate flashes and the alarm status

output of the batch station changes to a loglc l.

s9 Specification 59 is the block address of external alarm slgnal

two. An input of one generates an darm. Ttre alarm LED on
the CBC faceplate flashes and the alarm status output of the
batch station changes to a logtc 1.

sl0 Specification SfO is the block address of the ASCII strlng

descriptor block (function code f f g). Thls speclflcatlon passes
step and recipe names, loop tag names and englneerlng unlts
for display on the CBC faceplate.

sl1 Specification S I I is the block address of the cunent step

number. The batch statlon block uses thts lnput value to dts-
play the current step number on the CBC faceplate.

s12 Specification S12 is the batch command controller statlon

link hardware address.

sl3 Specification Sl3 is the block address of the nrn/hold signal.

The value of this input controls the mode of the sequence
monitor block (function code L24). Thls speciflcatlon per-
forms different functions depending upon the mode of the
control configuration.

Start-trp llIode - the unit inittates a start-up sequence when

transferring to the execute mode. Durlng thts tlme, tf the [rput
to S13 is a logic l, the batch statlon dlrects the sequ€nee mon-
itor to start running at step one. If the tnput to S13 ls a loglc O
during start-up, the batch station dtrects the sequence monl-
tor to go to step zero (E-STOP) and hold.

Illormol Executiott Dlode - after the start-up process ls com-

plete, S13 has two functions:

I. If the input changes from a zero to a one, the sequence

monitor enters the run mode. Thls functlon depends on the
rrrn priority set in S L4.

2. If the input is zero, the sequence monltor enters the hold

mode.

sl4 Manual override lockout value:

x
X0 = normal,no lockout
X1 = manual lockout (operatorcannot pface outputs in manual mode)

0X = faceplate has run priority

1X = configurationhas run priority
2X = no PrioritY

BatchStation(CBC)
181 - 4 ls FEBt99s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode181

sl5 This input value controls the mode of the M/A statlons and
device drivers at lnttialtzatlolt.

Q = manual (att M/A statlons and devtce drlver blocks are

in rnanual mode after lntttan"a;fton)

1 = automatlc (all M/A statlons and devlce drlver blocks

are ln automatlc mode after lnltlallzatlon)

sl6 Specificatlon Sf G ts the E-STOP lockout value:

Q = normal (sequence may be put lnto step zero wlth the

E-STOP key)

I = locked (sequence may not be put lnto step zero wfth

the E-STOP key)

sl7 Specifleatton Sl7 ts the dlsplay selectlon value.

Q = faceplate displays the step names on the top display

I = faeeplate displays the set potnt for the current loop on

the top dtsplay

sl8 Specification S18 ts the value of the last step number ln the
sequence. The batch statlon block monltors the current step
number at Sf I and comp€rres lt to the step number at S18.
When these two values €rre equal the batch statlon lssues a
hold signal to the sequence monltor block. Thls speclflcatlon
allows single cycle operatlon of the sequencer.

S19, S20 and S21 Spare pulrameters.

Outputs

N Output N ls the hold/ft[flall-g output Thts output controls

the mode of the sequence monltor block.

Q = run mode
I = hold mode

N+1 Output N+l is the iniflal step number. The intild step num-
ber is the step where ttre sequence monitor block begins exe-
cution. The sequenee monitor block uses tltts value to start
and/ or hold the sequence at partlcular steps.

N+2 Output N+2 is the reclpe number. The real recipe table (func-
tion code 118) uses thls output to select reclpe vdues. The
faceplate of the CBC controller c€rn control tltis output.

N+3 Output N+3 ls the Fl key output. Thls output ls a logic 0 dur-
ing normal operatlon. Presstng and holdIrg the Fl key on the

BatchStation(CBC)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 9 1- 5
Function Code 181

faeeplate causes the output to become a logtc 1. Releastng the

Fl key causes the output to return to loglc 0.

N+4 Output N+4 is the F2 key output. Thls output has the same
function as the Fl key output.

N+5 through N+l2 Outputs N+5 through N+ L2 are the au:dllty swltch outputs.
The CBC faceplate has control of these elght boolean outputs.
The configuration can use each output as a surltch.

N+l3 Output N+13 is tJ:e ALARM ACK key lndlcator. ThJs output ls
a logic 0 during normal operatlon. Presslng and holdtng the
ALARM ACK key causes ttre output to become a logtc 1.
Releasing the ALARM ACK key causes the output to return to
logic 0.

N+l4 Output N+ 14 is the alarm status. A logic I on thls output

indicates an alarm state. This occurs tf there ls an external
alarm input or the batch I/O, M/A statlon, or devlee drlvers
are in an alarm state.

APPLICATIONS

Refer to function code I23 for an ex€unple of a batch process.

This example illustrates tJle t1rye of process that could use the
batch station block.

Figure 181-f illustrates how the batch statlon block ltnks to

other blocks. Specification SI ls the block address of the
batch l/O function code l8O. Spectflcatlon Sl provldes the
link between the batch l/O block and the batch statton block.
Specification S I receives tJre current lnput and output values
from the batch command controller and passes tJrem to the
faceplate for display.

Specifications 52 and 53 are the block addresses of ttre M/A

statiolr,s. These specifications provlde the link between the
batch and M/ A statiorr.s. They allow the operator to control
the mode (manual/auto) and value of the outputs as well as
adjust the set points.

Specifications 54 and 55 are the block addresses of the dlgltal

output device drivers. The batch statton block uses the control
output status of the device driver block for two functlorrs.

1. Status check of the devices driven by the sequence master

block.

O.O= good
1 . O= b a d
2.O = wo.iting

Batchstation(cBC)
1 8 1- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode181

cBcAI
AIT
c{t
T
N2 Sll
SAT
ES
Ats At3 Sltl
At6 s P
AOt AL
AC

10
N+l1 REOPR
FS
2
ES
N+l3
EPIS
14
15 a,
N+|6

DIGITAOUTPUT2

Figure 78 7- 7. Balch Strltion Blrck Exnrnple

The batch station block sends alarm data to the controller

faceplate lf the status ls bad.

2. To determine tJre address of the devlce driver. It gives the

ability to change the mode (manual/auto) of the device drlver
from the CBC faceplate and control the output.

Spectflcations 56 and 57 are the block addresses of the auxtl-

tary inputs. These lnputs allow dlsplaying any real block out-
put. Some examples of possible bloek outputs lnclude a tlmer
value, a totalwer vdue or a spectflc temperature valtte.

Specifications 58 and 59 are the block addresses of the exter-

nal alarms. These are general Puqpose alarm inputs.

Specificatlon SIO ts the block address of the flrst ASCII strlng

descrlptor block. Thls block passes step narnes, tag narnes,
recipe names and englneering unlts to the batch statlon for
dlsplay.

BatchStation(CBC)
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 1 8 1- 7
Function Code 181

Specification S f I is the bloek address of tJre cutrent step

number. The batch station block uses thls tnput value for two
functions.
I
l. Supply the current step number to the faceplate for dls-
play.

2. The batch station block passes the current step number

to the sequence monitor block through the lnlfld step num-
ber output. This allows an intflal step number to be selected
from the faceplate and also allows mn/hold at any step.

The batch station block can command the sequence monltor

block to hold by changing the hold/inltlall-e output from ?.ero
to one. This occurs when the operator presses the HOLD key.
The sequence monitor block holds at the curTent step. Whtle
in the hold mode, the operator can change the current step
number. This allows the process to start at any polnt tn the
sequence.

The sequence monitor block starts the sequenee when the

hold/initialwe output of the batch statlon block changes from
one to zero. This occurs when the operator presses the RUN
key. The sequence monitor block then starts the sequenee at
the current step.

When the E-STOP key is pressed, the lnfflal step number out-
put of the batch station changes to zero. Thls causes the
sequence monitor and sequence master block to go to the
default step (executed stop). Speclficatlon 516 can dlsable the
E-STOP key.

Fl and F2 are boolean outputs from the batch statton bloek.

Each output is a logic O during normal operatlon. When the
operator presses and holds the correspondlng key on the
faceplate the output goes to a logic l. Releashg the key
returns the output to a logic O.

The batch station block also has eight boolean outputs that
the faceplate c€Lncontrol. The AUX SW key on the faceplate
selects the auxiliary switch output.

The up and down arrow keys change the state of the swltch.

EXAMPLE

The batch station block (function code f81) uses the ASCU
string descriptor block (functton code 113) to deflne step and
recipe names, loop tag names and englneertng untts for varl-
ables displayed on the CBC controller. To Unk the ASCII
string descriptor to the batch statlon, set S10 of the batch
station to tJ'e block address of the flrst ASCII string descrlp-
tor. ine the type of data (step n€rme, reclpe name, etc.) tn the

Batch Station(CBC)
1 8 1- I 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionGode181

string descrtptor. ThJs ID number also ldentlfles the format of

this data. The batch statlon block can recognlze the [D nurrl-
bers listed ilr Table 181-1.

Table 7I 7- 1. Batclr- StgrfronID Numbers

ID ASCIIStrlng Tlpe
0 Step name
1 units
Looptragname/engineering
2 Recipename
NOTE: lt is possibleto link ASCII string descriptorblocks
with differentlD numbers.Thereare no reguirements on the
orderof the blocks.

Sfep Name Format

Setting 52 to zero ln the ASCU strtng descrlptor block ldentl-

fies the block as contaFrfng step n€rme data. One ASCII strtn$
descrlptor block holds slx step narnes. It ts posslble to llnk
multiple ASCII strlng descrtptor blocks together when uslng
more than slx step narnes.

The top display of the CBC controller shours the step name
when in the execute mode. The batch statton block ffnds the
step name by searchtng tJrrough the ASCI strtng descrlptor
block for the name assoctated wtth the current step number.
Table 181-2 shows the ASCII step name descrlptlon. Each
step does not have to have a step name asstgned to lt. Ttre
display ls blank wtthout an assl$ned step name.

Table 787'2. A*SCtrStep Name Desatptlon

Speclficatlon Descrlptlon
1 Blockaddressof next stringdescriptorblock
2 lD=0
3 Stepnumber
4-11 Stepname(8 characters)
12 Stepnumber
13 - 20 Stepname(8 characters)
21 Stepnumber
22-29 Stepname(8 characters)
30 Stepnumber
3 1- 3 8 Stepname(8 characters)
39 Stepnumber
40-47 Step name(8 characters)
48 Stepnumber
49-56 Stepnam€(8 characters)
57 -64 Unused

BatchStation(CBC)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 8 1- 9
FunctionCode181

Loop TagNamelEngineeringUnits Format

Setting 52 to one in the ASCII strtng descrtptor block ldentl-

fies the block as containing loop tag name and englneertng
unit data. This data could be describireg etther of the two con-
trol loops associated with the batch statlon block (SZ and Sg
of function code 181). Pressing tlle TAG key on the CBC con-
troller displays the current loop tag name for 15 seconds.
Pressing the TAG key a second tlme [before any other k"y)
makes the other loop the actlve loop and dlsplays the loop tag
nam,e.

The variable display on the CBC faceplate dtsplays the engl-

neering units. The engineering untts occupy the three charac-
ter positions on the right of the bottom dtsplay. Table 181-3
shows the engineering unit descrtptton for each spectflcatlon.
The engineering units change to match the varlable selected
for display. The control output varlable dtsplay ls tn percent
of span.

Table 78 7-3. Spec!fication htglneefing Unft Desutptton

Specification Descrlptlon
1 Blockaddressof nextstringdescriptorblock
2 lD=1
3- 10 Loop1 tag name(8 characters)
1 1- 1 3 Loop 1 process variable engineering units (3 characters)
14-16 Loop 1 set point engineering units (3 characters)
17-19 Auxiliaryinput1 engineering
units(3 character)
20-27 Loop 2 tag name (8 characters)
28-30 Loop2 processvariableengineeringunits(3 characters)
3 1- 3 3 Loop2 set pointengineeringunits(3 characters)
34-36 Auxiliaryinput2 engineering
units(3 characters)
37 -64 Unused

Recipe Name Format

Setting 52 to two in the ASCII string descrtptor block ldentl-

fies the block as containing reclpe name data. One ASCII
string descriptor block holds six reclpe n€unes. It ls posslble
to link multiple ASCII string descrtptor blocks together when
using more than six recipe n€unes.

Pressing the RECIPE key displays the reclpe name on the

faceplate. The batch station block flnds the reclpe name by
searching through the ASCII string descrtptor block for the
narne associated with the current recipe number. Table 181-4
shows the recipe name and number descrlptlon for each spec-
ificatiolt. Recipe names a,re not required for each recipe. Ttre
display is blank when no recipe name ls asslgned.

BatchStation(CBC)
1 9 1- 1 0 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode181

o Table 78 7-4. RecfipeName and Mllnrrfur Descrlptlon

Speclflcatlon
1
Descrlptlon
Blockaddressof nextstringdescriptorblock
2 l D= 2
3 Recipenumber
4-11 Recipename(8 characters)
12 Recipenumber
13 - 20 Recipename(8 characters)
21 Recipenumber
?2-29 Recipename(8 characters)
30 Recipenumber
3 1- 3 8 Recipe name (8 characters)
39 Recipenumber
40-47 Recipe name (8 characters)
48 Recipenumber
49-56 Recipename(8 characters)
57 -il Unused

BatchStation(CBC)
l-E96-2008 1s FEB199s 1 8 1' 1 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode 182- AnalogInput Definition

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The analog lnput deflnltton functlon code deflnes the lnput

tSpe and the engtneertng untts for the batch command con-
troller (CBC). Input t5pes tnclude thermocouple, mllllvolt,
reslstance temperature detector (RTD) and hlgh level. Engt-
neerlng untts include degrees Celstus and degrees Fatrrerrhelt.

Thls function code outputs the input voltage and lts status.
The correspondhg block of the batch l/O module (function
code 180) and the Tlpe Src controller I/O module (functlon
code 230) outputs the equtvalent englneertn$ units.

The analog lnput deflnltlon functlon code allows the selectlon

of a square root or polynomtal functlon. Thls functlon can be
applted to a readlng before or after converslon to englneerln$
units.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descriptlon

N R Anatogterminalblockreadingin millivoltswith qgglrty
N+1 R Analoginputstatus

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 139 lnputtype:
0 = undefinedblock
O)fi = 2-wireRTD(or non-RTD)
1XX= 3-wireRTD
0 0 1= S t y p e T C
002=RtypeTC
003=EtypeTC
004-JtypeTC

AnalogInputDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 192 - 1
FunctionGode 182

SPECIFI CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 139 Inputtype:
(cont) 005=KtypeTC
006=TtypeTG
007=ChineseETC
008=ChineseSTC
009- 019= Dotimplemented
X20 = U.S.laboratorystardad 100(l platinumRTD
>Q1= U.S.industrystandard100O platinumRTD
><22= Europeanstandard100Q platinumRTD
Y\23= 120O chernicallypurenickelRTD
Y'24- X39 = oot implemented
040 = highlevel(+1 V to +5 V + mA to 20 mA)
041- 063= Dotimplemented
064 = millivoltinput(-20rnVto +80 mV)
S2 N 2 0 , 1 , 2 ,3 o r Engineeringunitstype:
4 0=oC
1=oF
2 = €ngineeringunitsconversion
3 = sQUarerootafterengineeringunitsconversion
4 = sguarerootbeforeengineeringunits
@nversionl
S3 Y 0 Full Reserved (catibration)z
S4 Y 0.000 R Full Engineering
unitszercvalue
S5 Y 100.000 R Full Engineeringunits span value
S6 Y 0.000 R Full Lead wire resistance
S7 Y 1800.000 R Full Offsetcorrectionfactof
S8 Y 40.000 R Full Gaincorrectionfactof
S9 N 5 I Note 3 Block address of the polynomial block
s10 N 5 I Note3 Blockaddressfor the remotecoldjunctionvalue
s11 Y 0 I Full Polynomialcorrectionoption
sl2 Y 1.000 R Full Lag filter time (seconds)a
sl3 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
NOTES:
1. DilferentialpFssuro to flow scluaroKrot@nversionin TypeSLC controlter.
2. Not relevantin TypeSLCcontrollsr.
3. Valuesare 0-l 023for TypeSLC controllersand G2046tor Typ€CBC controllers.
4. S12 activefor low lewl inputsin TypeCBC revisionA controllers.Activefor all inputtyp€s in TypeSLC revisionB controllers.

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 Specification Sf identilies the input t54re. Thermocouple,

RTD, millivolt and high-level are the available types of lnputs.
For RTD inputs, this specification also selects between a two
or three-wire RTD.

S2 Specification 52 defines the engineering unlts that the batch

UO module block uses. This specification can also apply a
square root function to the analog input.

Q = degrees Celsius

Analog lnput Definition

182-2 ls FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code 182

I = degrees Fatrrenhelt

!, = engineering untts converslon (use with mtllivolt and

high level lnputs ody)

$ = apply square root functlon to engtneertn$ unlts after

eonverslon (use wtth mtlllvolt and hlgh level lnputs
odY)

Q = apply square root functton to engimeerln$ untts before

converslon (use wlth millivolt and htgh level tnputs
odY)

Function code L82 converts the analog input to rnillivolts.

When S I equals O40 (htgh level) or 064, one of three patJrs is
tahen for tJ:e engineering units conversion.

If 52 equals two, only tlle engineering unit converslon ls exe-

cuted.

Y, = Ssx Xn+So

If 52 equals three, the engtneering untt conversion ls exe-

cuted, followed by the square root subroutlne.

Yn= Ssx Xn+So

If 52 equals four, the square root subroutlne ls followed by

the engineering untt converslon subroutine. Thls selectlon
represents a zero based dtfferenttal pressure to flour conver-
sion. In the TSpe CBC batch command controller, functlon
code I82, the conversion ls:

Yn = Ssx
Jv,-Jx^.,+ S a

where:

xn = analog input ln millivolts

Xrrin = I,OOOmillivolts

The Type CBC batch command controller perfonns function

code 182 conversion in millivolts.

AnaloglnputDefinition
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 182- 3
Function Gode 182

In Tlpe SI,C Strategtc loop Controller revlslon B flrmware,

function code L82 perforrns the follonrtng converslon:

Yn=

However, if 54 equds zero, the output further reduces to:

yn=ss*
m
s3 Reserwed for calibratlon.

S4 Specification 54 is the englneertng units zero value. Thls

value corresponds to a one-volt or four-mllltamp lnput when
using tJre high level lnput t54re. Wlth the selectlon of the mllll-
volt lnput, thls vdue corresponds to a -2O-mllllvolt treput.

ss Speclfication 55 ls the engtneertng untts span. Thts span ls

equal to the difference between ttre engtneertng unlts value at
ma:dmum (five volts or 20 mtlltamps) and the englneertng
units zero value. Thermocouple and RTD lnputs do not
require the engtneerlng untts sp€rn spectflcatlon.

s6 Speciflcation SG is the lead nrire reslstance ln ohms. Htgh level

inputs do not require the lead wire reslstance speclfication.

s7 Specification 57 is the offset corTection factor. The batch com-

mand automatically calculates this value during calibration.
The batch cornmand then stores thls calculated value in this
locatiolr.. High level inputs do not requlre the offset correction
factor specification.

S8 Specification S8 is the gafn correction factor. The batch com-

mand automatlcally calculates thls value durtng callbratlon.
The batch command then stores this calculated value in this
locatiorr,. High level inputs do not require the gain correctlon
factor specificatlon.

S9 Speclfication 59 ts the block address of the polynomial block

(function code 167). Thls potynomtal applles to tlre lnput.
Specification Sf f determines whether the polynomtal applies
before or after converslon to engineering unlts. [f the configu-
ration does not use 59, it must link to system constant block
five that has an output of O.O.

sl0 Specification S10 is the block address of ttre block that out-
puts the remote cold junction value. This link supplies tJre
temperature of the remote terminal block. This value func-
tions as the cold junction compensation for thts temperature

Analog Input Definition

182-4 1 5F E B1 9 9 5 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 182

tnput. If the configuratlon does not use SlO, lt must llnk to

system constant block flve that has an output of 0.O.

sl1 Specification S I 1 selects the option of applylng the polyno-

mtal to tl:e input before or after conversion to engineerin$
unlts (lf Sg ls not ltnked to system constant block flve). Set-
ting S I I to zero applies the polynomtal to the input after coll-
version to engineering units. Setting Sl f to one applies the
polynomtal to the tnput before converslon to englneerlng
untts. Refer to 59.

sl2 Spectflcatlon Sf 2 represents the lag fllter tlme ln seconds.

sl3 Spare parameter.

Outputs

N High leuel input 'mlllivolt readlng at the terminal block.

RTD input - millivolts of the input adJusted for lead wlre

resistance.

Thermosouple input - milllvolts of the input with lead rvlre

and cold junetion adjustment.

Milliaolt input - rrrillivolts of the input adjusted for lead nrire

reslstance.

Quality of output N is bad if one of the following conditlons

exist:

o Conversion erTor.
o A/D error.
o Cold junction error.
. Not calibrated or aborted calibratioll.
. Start-up.

N+1 Analog input status.

O.0 = rellable analog lreput reading

1.0 = bad status or unreltable analog input reading

2.O - input not cdibrated

3.0 = input t5rye undefined or function block I82 not

linked to batch I/O module block (function code
180)

AnalogInputDefinition
l-E96-2008 1s FEB199s 1 8 2- 5
 FunctionCode 182

APPLICATIOA'S

Figure 182-I lllustrates how the analog tnput deflnltlon block

links to the polynomlal block for polynomtal adJustment.
Spectflcatlon 59 ls the block address of the polynomtal block.
The polynomtal deflned by functlon code L67 appltes to the
input of the analog fnput deftnttlon block. Spectflcatlon S11
determlnes whether the polynomtal applles before or after
converslon to engilreertng unlts.

vo
o,rGBC',
Niz
Af3 Aa}
A4

DOl Ats
DOz
PIT A6
Pe,
AOI

Dtl

D12

Ptl

P,2

ST

N/A

N/A

Figure 182-7. Analog Input Definition

w ith Potynomial A4i t rsftnent

Figure 182-2 illustrates how the analog input definttion

blocks link to the batch I/O module block to monltor the
remote cold Junctton input.

The lower analog input definttion block monitors the tempera-

ture of the remote termlnal block. The output of this analog
input definition block is ltnked to 57 of the batch UO module
block. The corresponding output of the batch I/O module
block feeds back to Sf O of the two remainrng analog input
definition blocks. Thls allows the two thermocouple tempera-
ture inputs which are terminated remotely to have the remote
cold Junction compensation applted in order to maintatn
accuracy.

AnalogInputDefinition
1 9 2- 6 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode 182

An
cBcAtl
N+1
At2
At3 Ar2
At4
(182)
Ats Ar3
Ar6
AOI An
AO2
DOI A5
DO2
PIl AIE
PJ2
AOl

A02

Dl1

Dr2

Prl

Ptz

ST

N'A

N/A

Ftgure 782-2. Arulog lrWutDefinitions rlith

RemoteCold &rrctlon InPrfis

AnalogInputDefinition
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 182-7
ffi

o
 FunctionCode183- BatchExecutive(GBC)

GENERATDESCRIPTION

Exceptlon reports can go to an RS-232-C port wtth the bateh

executlve functlon code. ThLs block also provldes lnformatlon
about the ea.qg step plrc conflguratlon. Ttte batch executlve
block resides ln flxed block zero.

NOTE: Many batch process control applicationsuse function

blocksin a commonconfiguration.Thesebatchprocessescan use
method.This method,called easy sfep
a simplifiedconfiguration
plus, promptsfor variousparameters.Easystep plus usesthese
parametersto constructa configurationshellof functionblocks.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

0 B Logic 0
1 B Logic 1
2 R 0 or 0.0
3 R -100.0
4 R -1.0
5 R 0.0
6 R 1.0
7 R 100.0
8 R -9.2E18
9 R 9.2E18
10 B Start-upin progressflag:
0 = start-upcomplete
1 = start-upincomplete
11 I Reserved
12 R Systemfree time in percent
13 R Revision level
14 R Reserved

BatchExecutive(CBC)
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 1 8 3- 1
Function Code 183

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

o
S1 N 0 0 - 2046 Blockaddressof RS-232-Coutputrequest
S2 N 0 0 , 1o r 3 Easystepplusstatus
S3 N 0 Full No.of stepsconfigured
S4 N 0 Full No. of recipes configured
S5 N 0 Full No.of digitall/O in the CBCconfiguredwith easystepplus
S6 N 0 Full No.of digitall/O in the CSCconfiguredwith easystepplus
S7 N 0 Full No.of analogUOconfiguredwith easystepplus
S8 N 0 Full No.of pulseinputsconfiguredwith easystepplus
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s11 Y 0 0-31 Modulebus addressof the unitstoringthe recipetablesfor
easystepplus

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specification S I is the block address of the boolean slgnal

that deterrnines if the exception reports go to an RS-232-C
port. The analog and digital exceptton report blocks (functlon
codes 30 and 45) generate excepUon reports that go to the
RS-232-C port when SI ls one. When a LIM/BIM devtce (e.g.,
CICOI Computer Interface Command) ls not connected to a
CBCOI module bus and Sl ls zero, no exceptlon report goes
to the RS-232-C port.

NOTES:
1. The ClC01interfacetakespriorityoverexceptionreportsand
the RS-232-Cportis disabled.

2. When 51 equalsone and a ClC01 interfaceis present,the

exceptionreportgoesto the ClC01interface.

3. WhenS1 equalszero,thereis no exceptionreport.

4. When51 equalsone anda ClC01interfaceis not present,the

exceptionreportgoesto the CBC01controlle/sRS-232-Cport.

s2 Specification 52 is the easy step plus status. Speclflcatlon 52

indicates whether easy step plus was conflgured and modt-
fied. Do not modiff S2. Easy step plus automatlcally sets thts
specification. Status of easy step plus:

Q = no easy step plus conflgured

J = easy step plus configured and restore optlon not selected
$ = easy step plus configured and restore optlon selected

BatchExecutive(CBC)
1 8 3- 2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode183

S3 Specificatton S3 ls the number of steps conflgured uslng easy

step plus. Easy step plus automatlcally sets t}Is speelflca-
tion. Thts speclflcatlon ls referenced when a request ls made
to modiry the easy step plus conflguratlon. Thls value ls also
referenced when the step number is changed from the f,ace-
plate.

NOTE:lf the easystepplusis not usedto generatethe configura-

tion and the capabilityto change steps from the faceplateis
shouldbe set to the maximumnumberof
desired,this specification
steps used.

S4 Thts speclflcatlon ldenttfles the number of reclpes and reclpe

parameters conftgured wtth easy step plus. Spectflcatlon 54 ls
set automattcally when easy step plus ls lrrvoked.

The batch command controller references t}ts value when the

recipe number is changed from the fiaceplate.

XXYY

where:

xx Number of reclpe parameters.

YY Number of reclpes.

NOTE:If easy step plus is not usedto generatethe configuration

and the capabilityto changerecipesfrom the faceplateis desired,
shouldbe set to the maximumnumberof recipes
this specification
beingused.

S5 Specificatlon 55 tdentlfles the number of batch conrmand

controller dlgltal lnputs and outputs conflgured uslng easy
step plus. Easy step plus automattcally sets thts speclflca-
tion. This value ls referenced during a reguest to modi$/ the
easy step plus conflguratlon.

XY

where:

x Number of CBC dtgltal outputs.

Y Number of CBC dtgital lnputs.

S6 This input identifles the number of sequence cosrmand control-

ler digital inputs and outputs configured ustfg easy step plus.

BatchExecutive(CBC)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 1 8 3- 3
FunctionCode183

Easy step plus automatically sets 56. Thts value ls referenced

during a request to modiff the easy step plus conflgurafl.on.

XXYY

where:

X X = Number of CSC dfgital outputs.

Y Y = Number of CSC digttal lnputs.

S7 Specificatlon 57 identifles the number of analog lnputs and

outputs configured uslng easy step plus. Easy step plus auto-
matically sets this specificatlon. Ttrls value ls referenced dur-
ing a request to modi$r the easy step plus conflguratlon.

XYYZ

where:

X = Number of analog outputs.

YY = Number of hlgh level analog frputs.

Z = Number of low level analog trputs.

S8 Specification S8 identifies the number of pulse tnputs conflg-

ured using easy step plus. Easy step plus automattcally sets
this specification. This value ls referenced durfng a request to
modiff the easy step plus configuratlon.

59 and S10 Spares.

sl1 Module bus address of the untt storlng reclpe tables for the
easy step plus configuration. Easy step plus automattcally
sets this specification. Valid addresses are zero tlrrough 3 t.

Outputs

0 through9 Output blocks zero through nine are system constant blocks.
Refer to the function code output table for these values.

10 Output block ten is the start-up in progress flag. The output

of this block is logic I for the start-up pertod speetfled by 54
of function code 90 when the untt ts in execute mode.

If start-up completes successfully, thls stgnal reverts to

logic O and remains at zero as long as the unlt ls ln the exe-
cute mode.

O = start-up cornplete
I = start-up incomplete

BatchExecutive(CBC)
1 8 3- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode183

11 Reserved.

12 Output L2 ls the system free tlme tn percent. The output of

this block is the percentage of free tlme left tn the batch com-
mand controller.

(free time= 100- totalunit utilization)100%

13 Output f g is the revlslon level. The output of thts block ls a

four digit number ldenflfffng the unlt nomenclature, hard-
ware revision level and flrmware revlslon level.

XYZZ

where:

X = Untt nomenclature (1 = CBCOI).

v Hardware revision (0 = REV O).
Z Z = Ftrmware revlslon (Ol = REV Afll).

14 Reserved.

BatchExecutive(CBC)
l-E96-200B ls FEB1995 183- 5
ffi

I
 FunctionCode184- Factorylnstrumentation
,
ProtocolHandler

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The factory instnrmentatlon protocol (FIP) handler functlon

code provides €rn lnterface between a primary and a redun-
dant FIP module. Functlon code 184 ts used wtth the
IMFBMO2 WorldFIP Server Module. The FIP handler functlon
code manages the redundant operatlon by determlntng that a
valld f,allure has occurred before switchtng to the secondary
module. The lnput spectflcatlons contaln the startlng block ;
address for all eonflgured subscrlber blocks. The status of '
both the prlmary and secondary FIP modules are outputs
from the block. .

NOTE: For more infonnationon factoryinstrumentationprotocol,

referto the FIP Appllcatlon Descrlptlon C46-602whichis written
by the FrenchCommissionAFNOR,and the INFBAOIProgram-
mlng ReferenceManual.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk TVpE Descrlptlon

N B Primarymodulestatus:
Q= good
1 =bad
N+1 B Secondarymodulestatus:
Q= good
1=bad

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 Primarymoduleaddress
S2 N 0 0-63 Secondarymoduleaddress
S3 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of analog input subscriber block
S4 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of digital input subscriberblock

ProtocolHandler
Factorylnstrumentation
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 1 8 4- 1
FunctionCode 184

SPEC,Fl CATIOruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S5 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof analogoutputsubscriberblock
S6 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof digitalouput subscriberblock
S7 N 2 0 - 9998 Reserued
S8 N 0 0 - 9998 Reserved
S9 N 0 I 0-1 Continueon secondarymoduleerron
0 = trip primarymodule
1 = Gootinue to operate
sl0 N 0 0 - 60000 Synchronization lDl
s11 N 0 0 - 60000 Reserved
s12 N 0 0 - 60000 Reserved
sl3 N 0 I 0-100 Numberof synchronization
subsysteml
s14 Y 0.000 R Full Timer control2
sl5 Y 1.0 R 0.0- 255.0 Field bus segment number or WorldFlP field bus segment
number.Referto 515 explanation.
sl6 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
NOTES:
1. For most applications, the default value shown will suffice for the speciflcation.
2. Refer to 514 explanation for field bus communications speeds.

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specification S I is the module address of the prtmary FIP

module.

S2 Specification 52 is the module address of the secondary FIP

module.

S3 Specification 53 is the block address of the flrst analog input

subscriber (function code 186).

S4 Specification 54 ts the block address of the flrst digttat lnput

subscriber (function code 185).

S5 Specification 55 is the block address of the first analog output

subscriber (function code 187).

s6 Specification SG is the block address of the first digital output

subscriber (function code 188).

57 and S8 Resenred.

S9 Specification 59 sets the module operattng status upon a

module faihlre.

Q = trip primary module

t = corltinue operation

ProtocolHandler
FactoryInstrumentation
184-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode184

sl0 For rnost applications, the default spectflcatton value wtll suf-
fice. Specification SlO is the synchronizatlon ID. The s5m-
chronization ID is the FIP tdentifler of the synchronization
vartable that the FIP handler conflgures to synchronize the
MFP module and the associated vartables. At present, the
MFP module does not synchronize its segment executions to
this variable.

S11 and S12 Reserved.

sl3 For most applications, the default spectfication value wlll suf-
fice. Specificatlon Sf g ts tJ:e number of the synchtonwatlon
subsystem. This is the number of tlre subsystem that the cur-
rent FIP handler manages. When S13 ls zero, the current FIP
handler manages the prtmary system and synchronizes the
module. This refers to the synchronlzatton clock on the dual
port RAI\{ regtster of the other I/O modules (I/O modules
count the milliseconds and reset the clock on every synchro-
nization). Any number above zero means the current FIP han-
dler manages a subsystem and does no sJmchronization.

sl4 Specification S f 4 specifies several parameters dealing with

the physical timtng of ttre IMFBMO2 module and bus arbitra-
tion capabiltqy. This speeiflcation is set as follows:

514 = TXCKL+RP+ IEC+ BA

where:

TXCKL Bus speed

Q = 31.25 kbits/sec
I = I lfibit/sec
t, - 22.5 lW)lts/sec
RP RTri^"* 4

RTn^" Return time of the WorldFIP station tn bit-

time (time duration of one btt) tn the range of
zero to 63

Example At 1 MbiUsec,thebit.time if RTn,*=8,theactua|retumtime

equa|s1 psec.Therefore,
, RT7^"= $
equals31.25]rsec.In thisexample
is 8 psec.At 32 kbitJsec,thebit-time
meansanactualretumtimeof250psec.

The return time (also known as turnaround time) is the

length of time the WorldFIP station wlll wait before respond-
tng to transactions received on the WorldFIP field btts. In
additiorl, it is also the amount of time the WorldFIP statlon
will wait for other WorldFIP stations to respond to transac-
tions it initiates.

The setting for this return time parameter ls dependent on

several physical llnk criteria such as the length and media

ProtocolHandler
FactoryInstrumentation
15 FEB 1995 1 8 4- 3
l-E96-2008
FunctionCode184

t1rye (twisted pair, coa:dal, fiber optic, etc.) of the field bus
segment. The setUng for this parameter must correspond to
the ma:dmurn return tlme settJng for thls fleld bus segment.
t
The manrimum return ttme setttng for the fleld bus segment ls
determined by the madmum turnaround ttme of the slowest
device on the field bus segment.

The IEC physical layer standard specifles a mlnlmum return

time of four blt-tirnes and ma:dmum return tlme of 32 blt-
times. Interrnediate settings between these two ranges must
be ln four btt-tfme trcrements.

The physical layer pzrrameter (IEC/FIP) speclfles tJle cholce

between the IEC or FIP physfcal layer standard.

where:

rEc/FrP Physical layer

Q = IEC [WorldFIP)
32768 = FIP

The bus arbiter occupation parameter specifies the number of

kilobytes (within the range of one to 54) of RAIVI to reserve in
the IMFBMO2 module for the bus arbitration program. If BA
(bus arbiter occupation x 256) is set to zero, then the bus arbi-
tration function of the IMFBMO? ls disabled.

sl5 Specification Sf 5 is the WorldFIP field bus segment number

for the IMFBMO2 WorldFIP Senrer Module. This number is
used to uniquely identiff a specific WorldFIP field bus seg-
ment among several that may be connected together via
WorldFIP field bus bridge devices.

FIPUARIABLEINPUTlOUTPUT
TYPES

FIP variables may eonsist of one value or an €uray of vahres.

The various tlpes mentioned in 54 of function codes f 85 and
186 and S12 of function codes I87 and f88 actually refer to
the forrnat of the values within a FIP variable.

The FIP input and output subscriber blocks are used to inter-
face the INFI 90 MFP module with these FIP variables. Up to
four FIP subscriber blocks of the same t5pe may be associated
\Mith a single FIP variable. For FIP variables that contain an
€uray of values, the maximum number of values for that €uray
is 32. The individual elements of a FIP variable are associated
to a particular subscrlber block ustng the group number
found in S3. The number of elements specifled in Sg of the
subscriber block is used to identtff the number of values or
elements within the FIP variable. The input/output t51pe
describes the format of the elements of the FIP variable. For
most of the t1ryes, one block output is associated with each

ProtocolHandler
FactoryInstrumentation
184-4 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 184

element of the FIP varlable. The *ceptlon to thts rule ts for

the dtgttal t1ryes ln whlch etght block outputs or tnputs are
assoclated with one element that has packed wtthln lt, elght
values. FIP vartables can also have a check byte assoctated
urlth each element. The check byte ls used to assoelate a qual-
Ity flag urlth the data contatned wlthtn tJre element.

Refer to Flgure 184-1 for a llst of the varlous tnput/output

t51pesand ttrelr formats.

lvlA)(IMUM
ELEMENT FUNCTION SPEC NUMBER OF DATA ELEMENT FORI',AT
TYPE CODES VALUE ELEMENTS
WHEN USING THE DTGITALELEMENT TYPE, UP TO EIGHT
D|G|TAL 185, 188 0 4 BOOLEAN VALUES ARE EN@DED WITHIN EACFI ELEMENT.
WHEN SETTING THE VALUE FOR THE ELEMENT SPEC IN 53'
DIGITAL USE THE NUMBER OF BOOLEAT{VALUES FOR THIS SPEC.
WITH 185,188 1
Q=LO G IC O=BAD OU ALIT Y
CHECK QT LO G IC l =G O O D O U ALIT Y
(TH|S lS OPPOSITE OF THE INFI-9O/NETWORK 90
BOOLEAN 185, 188 Conveunor.t oF Q - LoGlc o - GooD ouALlw
QTLOGIGl -BADOUALITD
THE SUBSCRIBER BL@I(S IT.|\/ERTO
BOOLEAN TO CONFORM TO THE INFI 90 STA}.IDARD
wtTH 185, 188 o o
V - LOGIC O I FALSE OR OFF
CHECK V - LOGIC 1 rTRUE OR Ol'l

ANALOG I186, 187

REAL SINGLE PRECISION IEEE 488 FLOATING POINT

ANALOG
REAL WITH 186, 187
CHECK

ANTALOG It86, 187 WHEN FUNCTIOI.I CODE 187 @iIVERTSAN

TNTEGER AT{ALOGINPUT VALUE TO ATWO BYTE
SIGNED INTEGER, IT WILL SET THE O BIT TO
ANALOG BAD (LOGIC O) lF THERE lS Ar.l OVERFLOW lN
INTEGER
^t?-i"-' 1 32 THE CALCUUITION. THE SIGNED INTEGER
186, 187 VALUES I'I.AVEA VALID RANGE OF.32768
TO 32767.
CHECK
PACKED / FUNCTIOII @DE 126 (REAL SlGl'lAL DEMULTIPLDGR)
b-ociieen 186,187 CAI{ BE USED TO DECODE Ai.IY PACKED
BOOLEAN VALUES FROM THE AI.IALOG REAL
PACKED OUTPUTS OF FUNCTION @DE 187.
BOOLEAN 186, 187 THERE IS O}.ILYONE Q BIT ASSOCIATED WITH ALL OF THE ONE
wtrH BYTE UNSIGNED INTEGER VALUES OF A FIP VARTABLEWITH
CHECK ONE OR IPRE PACKED BOOLEAN ELEMENTS.
TP805264

FIgure 784- 7. FIP Input / Output Subs cfiber Varinble Ilpes

ProtocolHandler
FactoryInstrumentation
t-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 184 - 5
FunctionCode 184

APPLICAT'ON

Flgure L84-2 shows the FIP handler bloek ltnked to other FIP
TlO blocks (function codes f 85 through 188).

||'FIP
Ut
AO
DOt
N

DIGITAL
VALUES
TO OTHER
BLOCr(S

REAL VALUES DIGITALVALUES

FROM OTHER FROM OTHER
BLOCKS BL@KS

DIGITAL
VALUES
TO OTHER
BLOCKS

REAL VALUES DIGITAL VALUES

FROM OTHER FROM OTHER
BLOCKS BLOCKS

DIGITAL
VALUES
TO OTHER
BLOCKS

LINKED LIST OF
ANALOG INPUT REAL VALUES DIGITAL VALUES
SUBSCRIBERS FROM OTHER FROM OTHER
BLOCKS BL@KS

LINKED UST OF LINKED LIST OF

ANALOG OUTPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT
SUBSCRIBERS SUBSCRIBERS

Figure 184-2. Linktng RfP Ftrnction Codes

FactoryInstrumentation
ProtocolHandler
1 9 4- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode185- Digitallnput Subscriber

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The dlgttal tnput subscrlber acqulres a group of dtgltal values

from a factory tnstmmentatlon protocol (FIP) devlce. Each
dlgttal tnput subscrlber can handle up to etght dtgltal lnputs.
Up to four dtgttal tnput subscrtbers may be ltnked togetlrer
allowlng one FIP ldentJfler to reference up to 32 tnputs. Llnk
all FIP tdentlflers conflgured €rs dlgltal tnput subscrlbers
together. Each block specfies the next block address ln the
link.

The digital tnput subscriber has elght outputs comespondtng

to the eight dtgltal values acquired wlth qualtty.

NOTE:For more informationon factoryinstrumentation protocol,

referto the FIP Appllcatlon Descrlptlon C4&602which is written
by the FrenchCommissionAFNOR,and the INFBAO1Program-
mlng ReferenceManual.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Description

N B Firstdigitalinputwith qualitY
N+1 B SeconddigitalinputwithqualitY
N+2 B ThirddigitalinputwithqualitY
N+3 B FourthdigitalinputwithqualitY
N+4 B Fifth digital input with qualitY
N+5 B Sililh digital input with qualitY
N+6 B Seventh digital input with quality
N+7 B Eighth digital input with qualitY

DigitalInputSubscriber
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 8 5- 1
Function Code 185

SPECtFtCATtOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof nextdigitalinputsubscriberblock
S2 N 0.000 R 0 - 60000 FIP variable identifierl
S3 N 0 I 0 1- 3 8 Groupnumber(X)and numberof elements(Y):
X=0,1,2or3
Y=lthroughS
X Y Total
0 1-8 I
1 1-8 16
2 1-8 24
3 1-8 32
S4 N 0 I 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Input type:
0 = digital
1 = digital with check
2 = boolean
3 = boolean with check
S5 N 0.000 R Full Asynchronous promptitudeperiodin msecsz
S6 N 0.000 R Full Synchronous promptitudeperiodin msecsz
S7 N 00 l 0or1 Aperiodicand periodicvariable:
0= variable
1 = "Periodic
periodicvariable
S8 N 00 I 0 0 , 0 1 , 1 0 o Asynchronous
r andsynchronousrefreshevaluation:
11 00 = asynchronous and synchronous refresh
disabled
01 = synchronousrefreshenabled
10 = asynchronous refreshenabled
11= partialrefresh(asynchronous refreshand
synchronous refreshenabled)
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl1 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
NOTES:
1. Referto 52 underSpeclficatlonsfor additionalinformation.
2. Formostapplications,
the defaultvalueshownwillsutficefor the specification.

EXPLANATION

Specification S I is the block address of the next digital input

subscriber block.

Specificafion 52 is the FIP variable identifier. All data transfer

function codes refer to a FIP variable identffier. This is a 16-
bit value (unsigned integer) and defines the variable (read or
uritten from the controller module) for the application layer of
the FIP identifier implemented in the I/O module.

For rnost WorldFIP applications, FIP variable identifiers are

shown in a hexadecimal format. Refer to the following exam-
ple of converting hexadecimal values to decimal vahres.

DigitalInputSubscriber
1 8 5- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode185

Example The hexsystemis a base 16 system.Therefore,a hex numbercan be expressedas:

( H o x 1 ) + ( H t x 1 6 )+ ( H z x 1 q + ( H s x 7 & ) . . . ,

where Ho ts the least signtficant hex digit and Ht is the next

signtficartt, and so on.

Example lf the variableidentifierwas 3AE0,to conveftthe hex number3AE0 to decirnal:

The teast significant hex digit is O. The next digit is E or 14. The next digit is A or
10. The next digit is 3 or 3. Refening to the preceding equation,the decimal num'
ber is:

( 0 x | q + ( 1 4 x 1 6 t ) +( 1 0 x | q + ( 3 x l & ) =
0+ 224+ 2560+ 12288=15072

s3 Specification Sg is the tnput group. Dlgital input secondary

module subscribers handle up to four groups of ei$ht lnputs.
The input group is identlfled as shown in Table 185-1.

Table 7 85' 7. Inptrt Group ldentif,wation

GroupNumber Numberof Elements Total Elements
0 1 - 8 I
1 1 - 8 16
2 1 - 8 24
3 1-8 32

s4 Specification 54 ts the function t54le.

Q = digital
I = digital urith check
t, = boolean
$ = boolean with check

NOTE:Referro FtP UARIABLEINPUT|OUTPUTTYPESin func-

tion code 184for the formatof eachof thesefunctiontypes.

S5 Specification 55 is the as5rnchronous promptitude period. The

promptitude period is used to measure how
"iynchronous
ptomptly the FIP variable is being updated by the field bus rel-
lUve to the last time that is was updated. The as5mchronous
promptitude evaluatlon is dlsabled if this specification ls zero.

S6 Specification 56 is the synchronous promptttude perlod. The

synchronous promptitude pertod ls similar to the asJmchro-
nous promptitude period. The difference between the two is
that the synchronous promptitude ls used to measure how
promptty the FIP variable is being updated relative to a syn-
chronizatton variable produced on the field bus. (Refer to Sl0
of function code 184.) The synchronous promptitude evalua-
tion is disabled tf thts specification ls zero.

DigitalInputSubscriber
15 FEB 1995 1 8 5- 3
l-E96-2008
FunctionCode185

s7 Specification 57 is the periodic and apertodic varlable setttng.

Periodlc variables are produced and consumed on a periodlc

basis by devices on the fleld bus. Periodlc variables are tJapf-
cally used for process values that urre updated regularly, for
example, temperature and pressure values.

Aperiodic variables are produced and consumed on tlle fleld

bus only when requested by elther the producer or a con-
sumer of the variable. Aperiodic variables a,re t5lpically used
for status and alarm tnformatlon, or ln some cases, lnfre-
quently sampled process data such as chromatograph and pH
meter readings. The use of aperiodic varlables tnstead of perl-
odic variables, where approprlate, allows for a more efflclent
use of the field bus.

Funetion code f 85 always reads tJ:e latest consumed values

regardless of this setting. However, this specificatlon must be
set appropriately for the FIP I/O module to treat the variable
as either periodic or aperiodic.

s8 Specification S8 is the refresh evaluation setting.

The refresh evaluation setting determines how tJle FIP I/ O

module is to interpret the refresh status flag contained with
the FIP variable that is being consumed.

Refer to 516 of function code f 88 for defrnitlons of asynchro-

nous refreshment, synchronous refreshment and partial
refreshment.

The FIP I/O module will not consume FIP variables with bad
refresh statlLs.

APPLICATIO'VS

Refer to function code 184, the FIP handler, for an example

and application of function codes f 84 through f 88 (FIP func-
tion codes).

DigitallnputSubscriber
1 8 5- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode186- AnalogInputSubscriber

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The analog lnput subscrlber acqutres a group of real analog

values from a factory lnstnrmentatton protocol (FIP) devlce.
Each analog lnput subscrlber can handle up to etght analog
tnputs. Up to four analog lnput subscrtbers may be ltnked
together, dlowlng one FIP ldenttfier to reference uP to 32
lnputs. Lfnk all FIP ldenttfiers configured as analog lnput
subscribers together wtth each block spectfflng the next
block address ln the llnk.

The analog lrrput subscriber has eight outputs wtth qualtty

that correspond to the etght analog values acqulred.

NOTE:For more informationon factoryinstrumentation protocol,

referto the FIP Appllcation Descriptlon C46-602whichis written
by the FrenchCommissionAFNOR,and the INFBA0I Program-
mlng ReferenceManual.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R First analog input with qualitY
N+1 R SecondanaloginputwithqualitY
N+2 R Thirdanaloginputwith qualitY
N+3 R FourthanaloginputwithqualitY
N+4 R Fifth analog input with qualitY
N+5 R Si)ilh analog input with qualitY
N+6 R Seventh analog input with qualitY
N+7 R Eighth analog input with qualitY

AnaloglnputSubscriber
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 1 8 6- 1
FunctionCode186

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 I 0 - g99g Block address of next analog input subscriber block
S2 N 0.000 R 0 - 60000 FIP variable identifierl
S3 N 0 I 0 1- 3 8 Groupnumber(X)and numberof elements(Y):
X = 0 ,1 , 2 o r 3
Y=lthroughS
X Y Total
0 1-g g
1 1-g 16
2 1-8 24
3 1-8 32
S4 N 0 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 ,4 Input type:
or5 0 = ?r?log real
1 = ?D?log real with check
2 = atrailoginteger
3 = onolog integer with check
4 = packed boolean
$ = p"cked boolean with check
S5 N 0.000 R Full promptitude
Asynchronous periodin msecsz
S6 N 0.000 R Full promptitude
Synchronous periodin msecs2
S7 N 00 0or1 Aperiodic and periodic variable:
0 = sPeriodic variable
| = periodic variable
S8 N 00 I 0 0 ,0 1 ,1 Oo r Asynchronous and synchronous refresh evaluationz:
11 00 = asynchronous and synchronous refresh
disabled
01 = synchronous refresh enabled
10 = asynchronous refresh enabled
11 = partial refresh (asynchronous refresh and
synchronous refresh enabled)
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s10 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
NOTES:
1. Refer to 52 under Speclticatlons for additional information.
2. For most applications, the default value shown will suffice for this specification.

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 Specification Sl ts the block address of the next analog input

subscriber block.

S2 Specification 52 is the FIP variable identifier. All data transfer

function codes refer to a FIP vartable identtfier. Ttrls is a f 6-
bit value (unsigned integer) and deflnes the variable (read or
written from the MFP module) for the application layer of the
FIP identifier implemented in the FIP module.

AnaloglnputSubscriber
1 8 6- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode186

For most WorldFIP appltcatlons, FIP vartable ldentlflers €rre

shown ln a hexadectmd format. Refer to tlle followtng e!(anl-
ple of convertfng hexadeetmd values to dectmal vahres.

Example Therefore,
Thehexsystemis a base16system. as:
canbeexpressed
a hexnumber

(Hox1)+ (Htx 16)+ (Hzx lq + (Hsx 7&) ...,

where Ho ls the least sfgdflcant hex dlgit and Ht ls the next

slgnificartt, and so on.

Example lf thevariable was3AEO,

identifier 3AE0to decimal:
thehexnumber
to convert

hexdigitis 0. Thenextdigitis E or 14.Thenextdigitis A or

Theleastsignificant
to thepreceding
10.Thenextdigitis 3 or 3. Referring thedecimal
equation, hulrl-
beris:

) (10xlF) + (3x te)=

( 0 x l q + ( 1 4 x 1 6 t+
0+ 224+ 2560+ t22gg= 15072

s3 Spectfication S3 ls the input group. Analog inPut I/O module

subscribers handle up to four grouPs of eight inputs. The
tnput group ls ldentilled as shown ln Table 186-1.

Tahle 186-1. IntrnttGroup Identif,rcatwn

GroupNumber Numberof Elements Total Elements
0 1-8 I
1 1-8 16
2 1-8 24
3 1-8 32

s4 Specification 54 is the function t54le.

Q= andog real
I = analog real with check
2= analo$ integer
$= analo$ integer with check
4= packed booleart
$= packed boolean with check

NOTE:Referto FIP UARIABLEINPUTlOUTPUTIYPES in func-

tion code 184for the formatof eachof thesefunctiontypes.

s5 Specification S5 is the as5rnchronous promptitude perlod. The

asynchronous promptitude pertod ls used to measure how
promptly the FIP variable ls being updated by the field bus
relative to the last tlme that is was updated. The asynchro-
nous promptitude evaluation is disabled tf thts speciflcatlon
ls zero.

AnaloglnputSubscriber
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 8 6- 3
FunctionCode 186

S6 Specification 56 is the synchronous promptitude period. The

synchronous promptitude period is similar to the asJrnchro-
nous promptitude period. The difference between the two is
that the synchronous promptitude ls used to measure how
promptly the FIP vartable is being updated relatlve to a s5m-
chronization varlable produced on the fleld bus. (Refer to SlO
of function code 184.) The synchronous prornptltude evalua-
tion is disabled if this specification ls zero.

s7 Specification S7 is the periodic and aperiodlc varlable settlng.

Periodic variables are produced and consumed on a pertodtc

basis by devlces on the field bus. Periodlc varlables ErretJrpf-
cally used for process values that are updated regularly, for
exarnple, temperature and pressure values.

Aperiodic variables are produced and consumed on the field

bus only when requested by either the producer or a con-
sumer of tlle variable. Apertodic vartables are t5rpfcally used
for status and alarm informatlon, or ln some cases, lnfre-
quently sampled process data such as chromatograph and pH
meter readings. The use of aperiodic variables instead of peri-
odic variables, where appropriate, allows for a more eflicient
use of the field bus.

Function code 186 always reads the latest consumed values

regardless of this setting. However, this speciflcation must be
set appropriately for the FIP l/O module to treat the variable
as either periodic or aperiodic.

s8 Specification S8 is the refresh evaluation settlng.

The refresh evaluation setting determlnes how the FIP UO

module is to interpret the refresh status flag contained with
the FIP variable that is being consumed.

Refer to 516 of function code L87 for definitions of asynchro-

nous refreshment, synchronous refreshment and parttal
refreshment.

The FIP I/O module will not consume FIP variables with bad
refresh status.

APPLICAT'OA'S

Refer to function code f 84, the FIP handler, for an example

and application of function codes L84 through 188 (Flp func-
tion codes).

AnalogInputSubscriber
1 8 6- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode187- AnalogOutputSubscriber

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The analog output subscrlber functlon code sends a group of

real block outputs to a factory lnstnrmentatton Protocol (FtP)
devtce. Each andog output subscrlber can handle a mard-
mum of etght analog outputs. Four of these blocks wtth the
s€une FIP ldentifler number may be llnked togetJrer. This
allows one FIP tdenttfier to reference a total of 32 lnputs. All
FIP tdentJfiers conflgured as analog output subscribers are :
Itnked together wlth each block specifffng the next block
address ln tlre llnk.

The analog output subscrlber functlon code has one output ,

eorrespondtng to the qua[ty of the communlcatlon between
the FIP and the MFP module.

NOTE:For more informationon factoryinstrumentation protocol,

referto the FIP Appltcatlon Description which
C46-602 is written
by the FrenchCommissionAFNOR,and the INFBAOIProgram'
mlng ReferenceManual.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N B Qualityof output

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof nextanalogoutputsubscriberblock
S2 N 0.000 R 0 - 60000 FIP variable identifierl

AnalogOutputSubscriber
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 8 7- 1
FunctionCode 187

SPECIFI CATIOwS (continued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Groupnumber(X)andnurnberof elements(Y):
X Y Total
0 1-8 I
1 1-8 16
2 1-8 24
3 1-8 32
S4 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof ouput 1
S5 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof ouput 2
S6 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof output3
S7 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof output4
S8 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof ouput 5
S9 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof ouput 6
s10 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of ouput 7
sl1 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of ouput 8
s12 N 0 I 0 ,1 , 2 , 3 , 4 Output type:
or5 0 = ?nalog real
1 = analog real with check
2 = ?tr?log integer
3 = ?o8log integer with check
{ = p"cked boolean
$ = p"cked boolean with check
s13 N 0.000 R Full refreshperiodin msecs
Asynchronous
s14 N 0.000 R Full refreshperiodin msecs2
Synchronous
sl5 N 0 I 0or1 Aperiodic and periodicvariable:
0= variable
1 = "P€riodic
periodic variable
sl6 N 0 I 0 0 ,0 1 ,1 00 r Asynchronous andsynchronousrefreshsettingz:
11 00 = asynchronous and synchronousrefresh
disabled
01 = synchronous refreshenabled
10 = asynchronous refreshenabled
11= partialrefresh(asynchronousrefreshand
synchronous refreshenabled)
sl7 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl8 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl9 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
NOTES:
1. Refer to 52 under Speclfications for additional infonnalion.
2. For most applications,the default value shown will suffice for the specification.

EXPLANATION

Specilication S I is the block address of the next andog out-

put module block.

Specification 52 is the FIP variable identifier. All data transfer

function codes refer to a FIP variable identlfier. This is a 16-
bit value (unsigned integer) and defines the variable (read or

AnalogOutputSubscriber
1 8 7- 2 15FEB199s l-Eg6-200B
 Function Code 187

written from the MFP module) for the application layer of the
FIP identJfler lmplemented in the FIP module.

For most WorldFIP appltcatlons, FIP varlable tdentlfiers are

shown ln a hsradeclmal format. Refer to the follorving exam-
ple of convefting hexadeeimal values to declmal values.

Example The hexsystemis a base16 system.Therefore,a hex numbercan be expressedas:

( H o x 1 ) + ( H t x 1 6 ) +( H z x 1 q + ( H s x 7 & ) . . . ,

where H, fs the least significant hex digit and Ht is the next

significant, and so on.

Example lf the variableldentifierwas 3AE0,to convortthe hex number3AE0to decimal:

The least significanthex digit is 0. The next digit is E or 14. The no<tdigit is A oi
10. The next digit is 3 or 3. Refeningto the precedingequation,the decimalnum'
ber is:

(0x lq + ft4x 16')+ (10x 1&)+ (3x |e) =

0+ 224+ 2560+ 12288=15072

s3 Speeilication Sg is the output group. Analog output module

subscribers handle up to four groups of eight outputs. The
output group is identlfied as shown in Table L87-L.

Table 787 - 7. Ofipfi Group ldent!fication

Group Number Numberof Elements Total Elements
0 1-8 I
1 1 - 8 16
2 1 - 8 24
3 1 - 8 32

54 through S11 SpecificaUons 54 through Sf I are the block addresses of out-

puts one through eight.

s12 Specificaflon S12 is the function tJrPe.

Q = analog real
I = analog real with check
t, = analog integer
$ = analog integer with check
Q = packed boolean
$ = packed boolean with check

NOTE:Referto FIP UARIABLE,NPUTIOUTPUT7YPESin func-

tioncode 184for the formatof eachof thesefunctiontypes.

sl3 Specificatlon S13 is the asynchronous refresh period. The

as5mchronous refresh period measures how well the FIP mod-
ule is producing the FIP variable data on the lleld bus relatlve

AnalogOutputSubscriber
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 8 7- 3
FunctionCode 187

to when the MFP module refreshes the data. If the FIP vari-
able is not produced on the field bus wfthin the refresh
period, then the refresh status flag assoclated wlth thts FIP
variable is reset to indleate that the data ts old. Other FIP lleld
devlces that consume thls vartable can evaluate tl:e refresh
status flag to determine lf the FIP vartable data ls valld or not.
This specificatlon must be set to a value that ls equal to or
stightly larger than a multiple of the segment cycle ttme (S2 of
function code 82) of the segment in whJch tllls block resides.

sl4 Specification S14 is the synchronous refresh period. The sJm-

chronous refresh period is similar to the asJmchronous
refresh period. The difference between the two is that the syn-
chronous refresh period is used to measure how well the FIP
module is produeing the FIP variable on the field bus relative
to a synchronization varlable produced on the fleld bus (refer
to SIO of function code 184).

sl5 Specilication Sf 5 is the periodie and aperlodic variable setting.

Periodic variables are produced and consumed on a periodlc

basis by devices on the field bus. Periodlc variables €rre tJrpi-
cally used for process values that are updated regularly, for
exarnple, temperature and pressure values.

Aperiodic variables €rre produced and consumed on the field

bus only when requested by elther the produeer or a con-
sumer of the variable. Aperiodic variables are $pically used
for status and alarrn information, or tn some cases, lnfre-
quently sampled process data such as chromatograph and pH
meter readings. The use of aperiodic variables lnstead of pert-
odic variables, where appropriate, allows for a more efficient
use of the field bus.

When aperiodic is selected, function code I87 will produce

the variable on the field bus only when one of the input values
<S4> through <Sl 1> has changed since the last time the vari-
able was produced.

sl6 Specification S f 6 is the refresh setting. Thls setting deter-

mines how the refresh status for ttris produced FIP variable is
to be determined.

Asgnehronous refreshment - refresh status is set to good if

the FIP module produces the FIP variable on the field bus
within the asynchronous refresh period (S 13) of when the
MFP module refreshes the FIP variable data. Set bad other-
wise.

Sgnchronous refreshment - refresh status is set to good if

the FIP module produces the FIP variable on the field bus
within the synchronous refresh period (Sf4) of when the syn-
chronization variable (StO of function code 184) ls reeeived.
Set bad otherwise.

AnalogOutputSubscriber
187-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 187

Pcrrtial refreshment comblnatlon of both asJmchronous

and synchronous refreshment. For the refresh status to be
set good:

. The FIP module must produce the FIP variable on the field
bus within the as5mchronous refresh period of when the
MFP module has refreshed the data of the FIP variable.

o;nd

It must also have produced it wlthin the synchronous

refresh pertod (Sl4) of when the sJrnchronization variable
(SlO of functlon code 184) has been recelved.

Set bad otherurise.

APPL/lCATIOruS

Refer to function code 184, the FIP handler, for an example

and application of function codes f 84 through 188 (FIP func-
tion codes).

AnalogOutputSubscriber
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 1 8 7- 5
ffi

I
 FunctionGode188- DigitalOutputSubscriber

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The dlgltal output subscrlber functlon code sends a gfoup of

dtgttal block outputs to a factory tnstmmentatlon protocol
(FIP) devtce. Each dtgital output subscrlber cErn handle a
ma:rlmum of etght dlgltal outputs. Four of these blocks wlth
the same FIP ldentlfier number may be llnked together. Thls
allows one FIP ldenttfler to reference a total of 32 lnputs. All
FIP identiflers configured as digital output subscrlbers are
Itnked together with each block speclffing the next block
address ln the hnk.

The dtgttal output subscrtber functlon code has one output

correspondtng to the qua[ty of the communlcatlon between
the FIP and MFP modules.

NOTE:For more informationon factoryinstrumentation protocol,

referto the FIP Appllcatlon Descrlptlon which
C46-602 is written
by the FrenchCommissionAFNOR,and the INFBAOTProgram-
mlng ReferenceManual.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N B Qualityof output

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof nextdigitaloutputsubscriberblock
S2 N 0.000 R 0 - 60000 Fl P variable identifierl

DigitalOutputSubscriber
r-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 188- 1
Function Code 188

SP ECIF| CATI OnlS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S3 N 0 0 - 99gg Groupnumber(X)andnumberof elements(Y):
X Y Total
0 1-g g
1 1-8 16
2 1-g 24
3 1-g 32
S4 N 0 0 - 9998 Block address of output 1
S5 N 0 0 - 9998 Block address of output 2
S6 N 0 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof output3
S7 N 0 0 - gggg Blockaddressof output4
S8 N 0 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof output5
S9 N 0 0 - 9998 Block address of output 6
s10 N 0 0 - 9998 Block address of ouput 7
s11 N 0 0 - 9998 Block address of output 8
s12 N 0 0 , 1 , 2 o r 3 Output type:
0 = digital
1 = digital with check
2 = boolean
3 = boolean with check
s13 N 0.000 R Full refreshperiodin msecs
Asynchronous
sl4 N 0.000 R Full refreshperiodin msecs
Synchronous
s15 N 0 I 0or1 Aperiodic and periodic variable:
0 = ?Periodic variable
1 = periodic variable
sl6 N 0 I 0 0 ,0 1 ,1 00 r Asynchronous andsynchronousrefreshsetting2:
11 00 = asynchronous and synchronousrefresh
disabled
01 = synchronous refreshenabled
10 = asynchronous refreshenabled
11= partialrefresh(asynchronous refreshand
synchronous refreshenabled)
s17 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl8 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl9 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
NOTES:
1. Refer to 52 under Speclticatlons for additional information.
2. For most applications, the default value shown will suffice for the specification.

EXPLANATION

Specificafion Sl is ttre block address of the next dtgital output

UO module block.

Specification 52 is the FIP variable identifier. All data trans-

fer function codes refer to a FIP variable identifier. This is a
16-bit value (unsigned lnteger) and deflnes the vartable (read
or written from the MFP module) for the application layer of
the FIP identifier implemented in the FIP module.

DigitalOutputSubscriber
1 8 8- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode188

For most WorldFIP appllcations, FIP rrariable ldentlfters are

shown in a hexadeclmal format. Refer to the followlng eKam-
ple of converting heradecimal values to decimal values.

Example The hex systemis a base 16 system.Therefore,a hex numbercan be elgrcssed as:

(Hsx 1)+ (ftx 16)+(H2x 1&)+ (Hsx |F) ...,

where He ts ttre least slgntlicant hex dfgit and Hr ls tlee next

signtflcant, and so on.

Example was3AE0,to convertthehexnumber3AE0to decimal:

lf thevariableidentifiEr
Theleastsignificanthsxdigitis 0. Thenextdigitls E or 14.Thenextdigitls A or
to thepreceding
10.Then6lildigitls 3 or 3. Relening thedecimal
eguation, num'
beris:

( 0 x | q + f l 4 x 1 6 ' ) +( 1 0 x | e ) + P x t d ) =
0 + 224+ 2560+ 12299=15072

s3 Specilicafion S3 is the output group. Digital outputl/O mod-

ule subscribers handle up to four groups of eight outputs.
The output group is identified as shown in Table 188-1.

Tahle 188-1. Otrtptrt Groqp lfuntificafion

GroupNumber Numberof Elements Total Elements
0 1 - 8 I
1 1-g 16
2 1 - 8 24
3 1-8 32

54 through S11 Specifications 54 through Sl f are the bloek addresses of out-

puts one through eight.

sl2 Specificafion Sl2 is the function tJrpe.

Q = digital
t = dtgltal wrth eheck
), = boolean
$ = boolean with check

NOTE:Referto FIP UARIABLEINPUTlOUTPUTIYPES in func-

tion code 184for the formatof eachof thesefunctiontypes.

sl3 Specificailon Sfg is the asynchronous refresh period. The

as)mchronous refresh period measures hornrwell the FIP mod-
ule is producing the FIP variable data on the field bus relative
to when the MFP module refreshes the data. If the FIP variable
is not produced on the field bus within the refresh perlod,
then the refresh status flag assoclated with ttrts FIP varlable ls
reset to indicate that the data is old. Other FIP field devices
that consume this variable can evaluate the refresh status flag

DigitalOutputSubscriber
t-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 8 8- 3
FunctionCode 188

to determine if the FIP variable data ls valld or not. This specl-

fication must be set to a value that ls equal to or slightly larger
than a multiple of the segment cycle tlme (SZ of function
code 82) of the segment in whtch this block resides.

sl4 Specification Sf 4 is the synchronous refresh period. TIte sJm-

chronous refresh period is similar to the asJrnchronous
refresh period. The difference between the two ls that the syn-
chronous refresh period ts used to measure how well the FIP
module ls producing ttre FIP variable on the field bus relatlve
to a synchronlzation varlable produced on the fleld bus (refer
to S10 of function code 184).

sl5 Speciftcation S15 is the periodic and aperiodlc variable setting.

Periodic variables are produced and eonsumed on a pertodic

basis by devices on the field bus. Periodic variables are tJrpi-
cally used for process values that are updated regularly, for
example, temperature and pressure values.

Aperiodic variables are produced and consumed on the field

bus only when requested by either the producer or a con-
sumer of the variable. Aperiodic variables are t5pically used
for status and alarm information, or in some cases, infre-
quently sampled process data such as chromatograph and pH
meter readings. The use of aperiodlc variables lnstead of peri-
odic variables, where appropriate, allows for a more efficient
use of the field bus.

When aperiodic is selected, function code 188 will produce

the variable on the field bus only when one of the tnput values
<S4> through <Sl l> has changed since the last time the vari-
able was produced.

sl6 Specilication S f G is the refresh setting. This setting deter-

mines how the refresh status for this produced FIP variable ts
to be determined.

Asgnehronous refreshment - refresh status ls set to good if

the FIP module produces the FIP variable on the field bus
within the asynchronous refresh period (Sf 3) of when the MFP
module refreshes the FIP variable data. Set bad otherwtse.

Sgnclnronous reJreshment - refresh status is set to good if

the FIP module produces the FIP variable on the field bus
within the synchronous refresh period (S14) of when the syn-
chronwatton variable (S1O of function code 184) is received.
Set bad othenrise.

DigitalOutputSubscriber
1 8 8- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode188

Partia;l refreshment - comblnatlon of both asynchronous

and synchronous refreshment. For the refresh status to be
set good:

o The FIP module must produce tl:e FIP variable on tJ:e field
bus withlr the asynchronous refresh period of urhen the
MFP module has refreshed the data of the FIP variable.

o;nd

It must also have produced it wlthin the synchronous

refresh pertod (S L4l of when the synchrontzation varlable
(St0 of functton code 184) has been received.

Set bad otherwise.

APPLICATIOAIS

Refer to function code 184, tJ:e FIP handler, for €rn example
and applicatlon of functlon codes 184 through 188 (FIP func-
tion codes).

DigitalOutputSubscriber
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB1995 188- 5
ffi

I
 FunctionCode189- Reserved
ForFutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBrees 189 - 1
ffi
O

I
 FunctionCode190- UserDefinedFunctionDeclaration

GENERAT DESCRIPTIOA'

Ttre user deflned functlon declaratton functlon code declares

a user deflned functlon ruDn. Ttte UDF declaratlon selects
the program that belongs to the UDF block. Thls block specl- '
'
fles thtamount of RAIvI allocated for the executable copy of
the UDF program.
"
The UDF blocks (functlon codes f91 and 192) reference Sg ,
through SO for lnternal processln$.

For more lnformatlon regardlng user deflned functlons, refer'

to tlre II*r Defitrcd .Function (IIDF) Pr':ogramming Lan',
gusge product lnstmctlon and the IIDF - User Defined
Fnne tion @nfigtnr ation Languo;g e app llcatlon guld e.

UTILIUTION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrfptlon

N R Reservedfor futureuse

SPEClFICArrOlts

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0.000 R Full UDFprogramlD
S2 N 1 1 - 6553 UDF program size in 10 byte increments
S3 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
S4 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
S6 Y 0.000 R Fult Tunablereal parameter
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter

User DefinedFunctionDeclaration
I-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 9 0- 1
FunctionCode190

EXPLANATION

The UDF declaration block declares a user deflned functton.

This block performs the following:

. Selects the UDF program that belongs to the block. A

multi-function processor (MFP) or multt-functlon control-
ler (MFC) may have many UDF programs tn tts flle system.
Each of these UDF programs wtll have a dtfferent program
ID number. Spectficatton Sl speclfles the ID of the parttc-
ular prograrn that belongs to thls block.

. Specifles RAI\{ allocatlon for the executable copy of the

program. The copy of the UDF program tn ttre file system
is not in executable form. This copy must be ln a UDF
declaration block before it can execute. Spectficatlon S2
specifies the amount of RAI\{ allocated for the prograln tn
lncrements of ten b5rtes.

. Functlon code fgo does not execute the UDF program. A

UDF block (functton code lgf or L92 dependlng on whteh
one the UDF program specifles) performs executlon. A
UDF progra,m ls declared once (functton eode 19O) but
may be executed by many UDF blocks. UDF bloeks exe-
cute independently. Each block has lts own lnputs, out-
puts, parameters and local data.

o Specifications Sg through 56 (function code 19O) €rre

parameters that the UDF program references. If several
UDF bloeks share a program, they also share these
parameters.

UserDefinedFunctionDeclaration
190 - 2 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode191- UserDefinedFunctionOne

L DESCRIPTION

The user defined function one functton code executes a user

defined functlon (UDF). The UDFI block has tnputs, parame-
ters, outputs and progr€rm data. Spectfication 516 allocates
the program data space.

The number of lnputs, parameters and outputs ean be

expanded by use of au:dllary UDF blocks (functlon codes 198
and 199). Speciflcatlon S15 ltnks to the first au:dltary UDF
block.

Specificatlon S17 ltnks the UDF one block to a UDF declara-

tion block (functton code 19O).

For more lnformatlon regardlng user deflned functlons, refer

to tlre llser Defined. Fnnction (tIDF| Pr:ogrnmming LQnJ-
guage product lnstnrctlon and the IIDF - User Defined
Func tion @nfiguratiott Languolge appltcatlon gulde.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N R Realoutput
N+1 R Realoutput

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S2 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S3 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S4 N 2 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
S5 N 2 0 - 9998 Block address of any input

UserDefinedFunctionOne
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 1 9 1- 1
FunctionCode191

S P EC I F I CATI O,,fVS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S6 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S7 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S8 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S9 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
sl1 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
sl2 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
sl3 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablereal parameter
sl4 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
sl5 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof firstauxiliaryUDF
sl6 N 128 I 0 - 65535 Size of data (bytes)
s17 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of UDF declaration
s18 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s19 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

UserDefinedFunction
One
1 9 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode192- UserDefinedFunctionTwo

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The user deflned functlon two functlon eode e:cecutes a user

UDF2
defined functlon (UDF). The UDF2 block has lnputs, parame-
ters, outputs and program data. Speclficatlon Sl24 alloeates
the program data space.

The number of tnputs, parameters and outputs c€rn be

expanded by use of atr:dllary UDF blocks (functton codes f 98
and 199). Speclficatlon S23 links to the ftrst au:dllary UDF
block.

Specilication S25 ltnks the UDF2 block to a UDF declaratlon

block (functton code l9O).

For more lnformatlon regardtng user deflned functlons, refer

to the Elser Defined I''unction ([IDF) Programtning Lo;tr'
guage product tnstmctJon and the IIDF - User Deftned.
I'tunc tion @4figtlro;tion Languolge appltcatlon gulde.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descriptlon

N B Booleanoutput
N+1 B Booleanoutput
N+2 B Booleanoutput
N+3 B Booleanoutput
N+4 B Boolean output
N+5 B Booleanoutput
N+6 B Booleanoutput
N+7 B Booleanoutput
N+8 R Realoutput
N+9 R Realoutput

UserDefinedFunctionTwo
t-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 192 - 1
Function Code 192

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S2 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S3 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S4 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
S5 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof anyinput
S6 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S7 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S8 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S9 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
s10 N 2 I 0 - 9999 Blockaddressof any input
sl1 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
s12 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof anyinput
s13 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
s14 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
s1s N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
s16 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
s17 N 2 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
s18 N 2 0 - 9999 Blockaddressof any input
s19 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
s20 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
s21 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
s22 Y 0.000 R Full Tunable real parameter
s23 N 2 0 - 9g9g Blockaddressof firstauxiliaryUDF
s24 N 128 32 - 65535 Size of data (bytes)
s25 N 2 0 - 9998 Block address of UDF declaration
s26 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s27 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s28 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

UserDefinedFunction Two
192-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode193- UserDefinedDatalmport

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The user deflned data lmport functlon code acqulres user

data tnput from another module tn a dtfferent node vla the
INFI-NET conrmunlcatlon network. Ttle user data can tJren be
read by user deflned functlon (UDF), batch or C language pro-
grams wtthtr the module, or lt can be exported by a user
defined data export (functton code f 94) block.

For more informatlon refer to the C AfiliW Hogratn Product

instnrction, the Bo;tch 90 Languo;ge reference manual and
the llser DeJined. Frrtnction (tIDF) Hog?o;mming I'angru;o;ge
reference martual.

NOTES:
1. Functioncode193operatesonlyin |NF|-NETsystems.

2. Thisfunctioncodecan importuserdefineddatafroma source

modutein anothernodeor from a blockwithinthe samemodule.
This functioncode cannotimportuser defineddata from another
modulewithinthe samenode.To importuserdefineddata locally
importa file ratherthan usingthis func-
(acrossthe Gontrolway),
tioncode.
g. A modulecannot utilizemore than one user defineddata
import(functioncode193)blockto importdatafromthe sameuser
defineddataexportblock(functioncode 194)that is in a modulein
a differentINFI-NETnode.This restrictiondoes not applyto user
defineddata import blocks that import from user defineddata
exportblockswhichresidewithinthe samemodule.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N Userdefined Userdefineddataand statuswithquality
N+1 R Blockstatus

UserDefinedDatalmport
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 9 3- 1
FunctionCode193

SPECIFICATIOAIS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
S2 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Sourceblocknumber
s3 N 0 I 0-250 Source node address
S4 N 0 I 0-250 Sourceloopnumber
S5 N 0 I 0-80 Maximumuserdatalength
S6 N 0 I 0-255 Engineeringunits
S7 Y 0 I 0or1 Start-upcontrolandforcequalitycontrol:
0 = blockqualityon stiart-upis bad
1 = blockqualityon stiart-upis good
S8 N 0 R Full Spare
S9 N 0 Full Spare
sl0 Y 0 R Full Spare
s11 Y 0 Full Spare

EXPLANATION

The defined specifications of function code 193 include the

source module address, block number, node address, loop
address, maximum data length, engineertng unlts and start-
uP control. The module, block, node and loop spectflcaflons
must reference a user defined data e4port function block
(functton code 194). The ma:d,mum data length speciflcatlon
sets the maximum allowable user data length. If an lnput to
the block exceeds this length, tlrrncaflon occurs and the
count fields (tncluded in the user data block output) will be
set. The engineering unlts spectficaflon can be used to
describe the content of the user data (e.9., ASCII strings). The
start-up eontrol specificatlon can be used to force tJle block to
output good quality on start-up. The spectflcatlons, except for
start-up control, are not tunable.

Specifications

S1 Specification S I ls the source module address.

S2 Specification 52 is the source block number.

s3 Specification 53 is the source node address.

S4 Specification 54 is the source loop number.

ss Specification 55 defines the maximum user data length. The

maximum user data length is a nontunable integer specifica-
tion. If an input to the block exceeds ttrls length, truncatlon
occurs and the count fields (included ln output block N) are
set.

UserDefinedDataImport
193 - 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 193

s6 Specifleatlon 56 deflnes the engtneering unlts.

s7 Speclflcation SZ defures the start-up control. The start-up

control can be used to force the block to output good qualtty'
on start-lrp.

Q = block quallty on start-up ls bad

I = block quallty on start-up ls good

s8 - sll Spare.

Outputs

N Output N contalns the user data and its alarm wtth qualtty
status. The ma:d,mum output data length ts 82 bytes (80
bytes of data plus two count bytes). Updates to this user data
from the source user data export functlon block oceur on an
exception report basls.

N+1 Output N+ I ls the block status output multtplexed as a real

value. Refer to functton code L94, bloek output N+l for more
informatlon.

APPLICATIOruS

Refer to APPLICATIOIIIS ln functlon code 194.

UserDefinedDatalmport
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 9 3- 3
ffi
o

I
 FunctionCode194- UserDefinedDataExport

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The user deflned data export functton code outputs user data
vla Ern exceptton report. A batch program, user deflned func-
tlon (UDF), C language prograrm executlng tn the module or a
console command determlnes the user deflned data output
(output block N).

For more tnformatlon refer to the C AfiliW Progro;m product

lnstnrctlon, the Ba;teh 90 Langaage reference marrual and
the llser Defined, trrtnetion ([IDF) Pr:ogro;mming Lantguo;ge
reference manual.

NOTE:Functioncode 194operatesonly in INF|-NETsystems.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N Userdefined Userdefineddataandstatuswith quality
N+1 R Blockstatus

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of input data
S2 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of input control
S3 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof inputstatus
S4 N 0 I 0-80 Maximumuserdatalength
S5 N 0 I 0-255 Engineeringunits
S6 Y 0 0or1 Start-upcontroland forcequalitycontrol:
Q= blockqualityon start-upis bad
1 = blockqualityon start-upis good
S7 Y 0 R Full Retumalarmtime-outperiod(secs)
S8 N 0 R Full Spare

UserDefinedDataExport
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 194- 1
Function Code 194

SPECIFI CATI ONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S9 N 0 Full Spare
s10 Y 0 R Full Spare
s11 Y 0 Full Spare

EXPLANATION

The defined specificatlons of functlon code 194 tnclude ttre

input data block, input control block, lnput status block,
maximum data length, englneerlng unlts, start-up control
and return alarm time-out period. The speclflcatlons, except
for the start-up control and return alarm tlme period, are not
tunable.

Specifications

S1 Specification S I is the block address of the lnput data. The

default value of block address two lndlcates that the block ts
applicatlon prograrn drlven. When Sl ls set to two, the user
defined data export block ecpects to lnterface to a C language,
UDF or batch program and lgnores any block lnputs.

When S1 is set to any block other than two, the block must be
another valid user data block output (e.9., rlser data lmport
function code 193).

S2 Specification 52 is the block address of the lnput control. Ttre

input control pararneter ls formed by setttng the correspond-
ing bits of a real block output. ThIs block number must refer-
ence the output of a valid real block. Table 194-1 llsts the btts
of the input control.

NOTE:WhenSl is set to two,52 is drivenby a C language,UDF

or batchprogram.

Tabte 794-7. Input ControlSpecification<S2>

Bit Gontrol Descrlption
0 Auto/manual Thisfieldcontrolsblockoutputupdates.A leveltransition
from0 to 1 or 1 to 0 togglesthe modeof the block
betweenautoand manual(Table194-4).
1 Data interlock When data interlockis enabled, any updates to the block
output via console command messages are inhibited
(Table194-4).
2 Mode interlock When mode interlock is enabled, attempts to change the
block mode by toggling the auto/manual are ignored.

s3 Specification S3 is the block address of tl:e lnput status. The

input status parameter ls formed by settlng the correspond-
ing bits or a real block output. Thls block number must

UserDefinedDataExport
194-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode194

reference the output of a valtd real block. Table L94-2 ltsts

the btts of the tnput status.

NOTE:When51 is set to two, S3 is drivenby a C language,UDF

or batchprogram.

Tahle 794-2. Inprrt Stafirs Spec{ficat{on<S3>

Blr Status Descrlptlon
0 Quality Thisfieldsetsthe qualityof the output:
0 = g@d quality
1 = bad quality
1 Quality Thisfield setsthe qualityoverride:
ovenide 0 = flOffil3l
| = QU?lity override
a3 Not used
415 Alarm level This field sets 2 alarm bitsthat provide4 levelsof alarmInput:
0/0 = no alarm
Ol1= specificalarmlevel1
1lO= specificalarmlevel2
111= specificalarmlevel3
6n Not used
I New packet When the new packet flag is enabled, the block generates a
flag new exception report with a new sequence number even
though the data may not be new. The new packet flag of thE
exception report is set to indicate this operation.

s4 Speciflcatlon S4 deflnes the ma;rlmum user data length. Ttle

ma:d,mum user data length ls a nontunable lnteger speelffca-
tlon. If an lnput to the block exceeds thls length, truncatlon
occurs and the count flelds (tnrcluded ln output block f-D are
set.

S5 Spectficatton S5 deflnes the engineering units.

s6 Specification SO defines the start-up control. The start-up

control can be used to force the block to output good quality
on start-up.

Q = block qudity on start-up is bad

1 = block quallty on start-up is good

s7 Specificailon SZ deflnes the return alarm tlme-out pertod ln

seconds. If 57 ls set to zero seconds, return alarmlng is dls-
abled. If S7 ts not zero, return alarming occurs each tlme that
this time perlod explres. When return alarming occurs, ttte
return alarm status bit of the block output is toggled and a
new exceptlon report ls generated.

SB through S11 Spare.

UserDefinedDataExport
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 1 9 4- 3
Function Code 194

Outputs

N Output N ls the user data block output urtth qua[ty. Ttle max-
lmum output data length ls 80 bytes plus two count b5rtes.
Thls output ls exceptlon reported when slgnlflcant change
oecurs. Slgnlficant change ls a dlfference ln a memory block
comparlson function between the current output and the new
output or a change ln any of the status flelds.

Output N also includes a sequence number. Thls sequence

number is maintained at the system level by the multl-func-
tion processor module to asslst ln multlple user data packet
management and user data packet identlfication.

N+1 Output N+ I ts the block status output. The real value can be
demultiplexed to bits using functlon code 126. Table 194-3
lists the bits of the block status.

Table 794-3. Block Stafirs Output N+I

Bit Descriptlon Blt Descrlption
0 Packet restart 7 Qualityoverride
1 Data interlock 8 Auto/manual
2 New packet indicator 9 Redtag status
3 Not used 10 Echo
4 Mode interlock 11112 Not used
5 Retumalarm(toggle) lU14 Alarm level
6 Suppressalarms 15 Quality

EXCEPTION
REPORTDATA

Apptication programs such as C language, UDF or Batch 90

can read various types of data from the user defined data
export function code:

o Alarm level.
. Auto/manual state.
. Configured block size (number of user data bytes).
o Current byte count.
. Data interlock state.
o Echo indicator.
o Enable new specificaflons flag.
. Exception report time stamp (four bytes).
. Inhibit time stamp flag.
. Mode interlock.
o Origtnal byte count.
. New packet data.
o New packet indicator.
o Packet sequence number.
o Packet restart.
o Qualiff.
. Quality override flag.

UserDefinedDataExport
194-4 15 FEB 1995 I,Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode194

. Red tag state.

. Return alarm state.
o Suppress alarm flag.

The userdata-xr-read$ functlon provtdes the ablltty to read

thls data.

Appltcatlon programs such as C language, UDF or Batch 90

cEul write varlous exceptlon report data to the user deflned
data export functlon code:

o Quallty.
o Alarm level.
o Auto/manual state.
o guallty overrlde.
a New packet lndtcator (force excePtlon report).
o Data lnterlock state.
a Exceptlon report ttme stamp (four bytes).
. Packet data.
. Mode [irterlock.

The userdata_xr-writeQ functlon provtdes the abillty to wrlte

thls data.

PROGRAMS
APPLICATION

The lnput block address and lnput control block address pro-
vide tnputs that allow control of the data flow in the user data
export functton code. The tnputs that control thls flow lnclude
the input block address, auto/manual and data lrrterlock.
Figures f94-f through 194-5 show five operating modes of
the block tllat can be realized from a combination of these
three inputs.

The first example (Flg. 194-1) is an application program eon-

trol. This example allows application programs such as C lart-
guage or batch to wrlte dlrectly to the user data block output.
The applicatlon program sets auto mode and enables the data
interlock. The module denles console write access to this
block. Ttle applicatlon progr€rm is the only Process that
updates the block. Ttre data of the block ls exceptton reported
if the appllcatlon program changes or updates the block data
or any of the wrtte block status fields (e.g., alarm level).

Figure l-Z shows an appllcation prograrn control wtth console

access example. Applicatlon programs write dtrectly to the
user data block output. The appllcation program sets auto
mode and dlsables the data firterlock. Console text strfn$ data
ls accepted by the multt-functlon processor module. The
received eonsole command [rformation can be read by the
applicatlon program but lt wlll not update to the block output
unless it ls explicltty written there by the applicatlon pro-
gram. The data of the block Erre exception reported lf the

UserDefinedDataExport
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 1 9 4- 5
Function Code 194

CONFIGURAT

APPLICATION
@NTROL
(1s4) AUTO MODE
DATAINTERLOCK
ENABLED

SPEC|FtCATtONS
SET TO DEFAULT
SETTIi*lGS

Figure 794- 7. Applicatlon hqrcun Contot Exnmple

CONF GURATION

APPLICATION
CONTROL
(1e4)AUTO MODE
DATAINTERLOCK
DISABLED

SPECIFICATIONS
SETTO DEFAULT
SETNNGS

APPLICATION

Figure 194-2. Applicalion hqgrarn Contotu:ilh Console Access

UserDefinedDataExport
194 - 6 ls FEBlees l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode 194

appltcatlon program changes/updates the block data or a,ny

of the \rritable block status fields.

Ftgure f94-3 shows an appltcatlon program eontrol wtth colt-

sole access and eeho e:cample. The appllcatlon program sets
auto mode and dtsables the data tnterlock. When auto/manual
ls manual mode and the multt-functlon processor module
recelves ne\v user data from the console, thts informatlon ls
placed tn tlle block output and ls echoed back to the console.
The elcceptlon report deslgnates ectroed lnformatlon by settlng
€rn echo field. App[catlon programs can read the tnforrnatlon
sent from the console and wrlte to the block output. The exceP-
tion report contalns the lnformatlon from the last process,
etther console or appllcatlon program, wttlch updated the block
prlor to tts q(ecutlon rycle. The data of the block are excePtlon
reported tf the appllcatton prograrrl changes/updates the block
data or any of the \rrltable block status flelds.

CONFIGURATON

APPLICATION
CONTROL
AUTOMODE
DATAINTERLOCK
DISABLED

APPLICATION

\---AlPLICATION I
I
I

- BLOCK I -
| E)(CEPTtOtt
DArA oL,TPUT Il T REPORT
r

cq.tsoLE
MESSAGE
TWI6?A

Figure 194-3. ApPlicafion Prograrrr Contol

uttth Consob Access and, fufw

Figure L94-4 shows a block control ex€rmple. A user defined

data irnport block output is the input. Thls input lndicates to
the user defined data export block that lt is under block con-
trol. Console write access is not allowed slnce data lnterlock

UserDefinedDataExport
l-E96-200B 15FEB199s 194-7
Function Code 194

CONFIGURATION

I
t

' '
52 = O (PULSE OUTPLTD
S3- O.bOo i

55 - l.(DO
56 = 2.OOO
57 - O.OOO
S8 - O.OOO

USER.DEFINED
DATA IMPORT
FUNCTION CODE

APPLICATION

TP22163A

Figure 194-4. Blrc,k Contot bample

is enabled. This block exceptlon reports tts lnformatlon when

significant change of its output occurs.

Figure 194-5 shows a block control with console aceess

example. Information that is received from the console ls
placed in the block output. The lnput block address must ref-
erence a valid user data output bloek number. Accomplish
this by pointing the block at ttsetf (set Sl to block output II).
This block exeeption reports lts lnformation when a slgnlfl-
cant change of its output occurs.

- TEXTSTRINGELEMENT
COA'SOLE

The text string elernent allows the operator to lnteract with an

application program runntng ln a module. The user deflned
data export funcHon code ln a rnodule provtdes an inrterfaee
between the console and the program. At the console, a
TEICTSTR tag referencleg a data e4port block tn the module
allows an operator at the console to interact with tlle functlon
block. The data export function block c€rn also be drtven by
another function block rather than dlrectly by an applleatlon
program.

UserDefinedDataExport
1 9 4- I 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode194

CONFIGURATION

55 = 1.0oO
56 - aOOO
57 - 0.OOO
S8 = 0.000

APPLICATION

Ftgure 194-5. Blrck Contol uttth Console Access

The text string functlonallty provtd€s, for examPle, a means to

prompt or quesilon an operator and have the operator respond
to the prompt or quesflon ln some m€rnner. The response may
be to make some t5rye of selecflon, acknowledge an event or
provide an answer to a questlon. It can also be used to simply
allow the operator, through deseriptive text, to monitor and
vertff the progress of a process routlne.

The capabilities provlded by the text string function are not

Itmited to the uses previously described. A batch program or
C language program executfng h the module determtnes the
operatlons performed through the text strtng block and text
string element.

TEXTSTRELEMENTATTRIBUTES

The text string (TE)(TSTR) element gives access to a user

defured data oqport functlon block tr a module eontrol scheme.
A TE)ffSTR tag ls requtred to tnteract wtth thls functlon block.
Figure 194-6 details the trrformation presented Ie a text strin$
element.

Ttre user defined data export block reports the text strin$
message, alarm status and quallty l,nformation displayed at a
text string element. Attrlbutes that relate to a TEXTSTR tag

UserDefinedDataExport
l-E96-200B ls FEB1995 1 9 4- I
Function Code 194

FACEPISTE TAG I{AME TAGDESCRIPTOR LOCKSTATUS

SELECTOR INO'ICATOR
TDffSTRING

REDTAG
DESCRIPTOR
1C TEXTSTR1Ii TEXTSTRTAG
AI.ARM
STATUSi/
QUALITY/ UP TO 80 CHARACTERTEXTSTRINGFROMEXCEPTIONREPORT
GROUP

TEXTSTRING CONTROL \ QUru-TY OPERATOR.ENTERED

STATUSINDICATOR PROMPT/FIELD\ OVERRIDE TD(T STRING
INDICATOR

Figure 194-6. Text Sfnng Element

and ca.n be trecorporated trirto arry graphtc or custom faceplate

include:

Lock status indicator - indicates whether the functton block

is in a locked or unlocked condttlon. When locked, the block
does not accept text string tnputs from the console. The
default descriptors for this fleld are USER TF,,XTLOCK when
the block is locked and blank when tt ls not.

tlode - lndlcates the current operattng mode of the block. The

block operates ln either automatic (AUrc) or manual (IuI^NN-
UAI) mode, whl,ch determines how the output of the block ts
derlved.

Qualitg oaertde indieator - tndicates whether the block ts

in art override condltion or not. The block allows an external
source to override its quality status. A caret symbol (^) identl-
fies ern override condition.

Reported text string - shows the text string being exception

reported by the user defined data export function block.

The standard text string element provides for a text string

length of 80 characters, which is the maximlrm. User defined
text string elements may be configured to display less than 8O
characters. The console may locally tmncate data that ls too
long to be displayed in a user defrned text strlng element. This
tmncation is indlcated by an ellipsis (...) at the end of the text
string.

Ttttneo;tion indicator - tndtcates the presence or absenee of

remote tmncatlon for the reported text string. Remote tmnca-
tion is done by a module or the communicatlon lnterfaee of
the console. ?RMC appears lf remote tmncatlon has occurred.

UserDefinedDataExport
194- 10 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode194

Operator entered trixt string - appears only after the ele-

ment has been selected for control. Depending on configura-
tion, a TEXTSTR tag may or may not allow control. The text
that lnitially appears after selecting the element for control is
the same as the reported text strl,ng.

Text string stcrtns indicetor - provldes two functions. The

first ls to indlcate that there ls an alarm assoclated with the
text strlng betng entered tf the operator chooses to make this
association. For thts purpos€, the tnrdtcation is etther f J for no
alarm or W for alarm.

The second purpose ts to lndlcate that following an operator

entered response to a prompt or guestion, the tnitial prompt
or question ls recelved agafn at the console. Thls occurs when
the appltcatlon program has reJected the response for some
reason and has sent the same text strlng back to the console
for another response. If thts happens, tt ls possible for the
operator to be prompted agaln wtth the same text strtng wlth-
out flrst seeing the entered reply conflrmed wfth a new text
string, Ttle console dlsplays a negative acknowledgment indi-
cation to identiff that the curTent reported text string is the
same prompt or question tJlat the operator had previously
responded to, but regenerated. ThJs requir€s, however, that
the program be specifically wrttten to prompt the operator
again after rejecting an input.

The block also supports return alarming.

TEXTSTR CONTROL

TE)ffSTR control dlows responding to a prompt or question

introduced by a user-written applicatlon program. TEXTSTR
control also allows changing the operattng mode of the user
deftned data export functlon block to determlne the output of
the block.

To enable a TEXTSTR element for control, either enter its

faceplate selector through the keyboard or use an optional
method of selectlon. A TGT MODE: control prompt appears
when the element ls first selected. The tag of the TEXTSTR
element determlnes if tl:e element can be enabled for control.

The input souree for ttre user defrned data export function
btock can be either an appllcatlon program or another function
block. Besides these two sourc€s, the block also accepts input
from a console. This allows the operator at the console to toggle
the block between automatic and mElnual mode and to input a
text string. The operator can also change the alarm reporting
status of the block through the operating parameters functioll.

The user defined data export function block only accepts

input from the console lf the block is not ln a locked state.

UserDefinedDataExport
t-E96-2008 rs FEBrees 194- 11
FunctionCode194

Mode Ghange The operator can change mode to determlne the output of tlre
user deflned data export functlon block. Press [mTmETbl to
toggle the block between manual and automatlc mode.

The block operates in several ways dependtng on lts lnput

source and current mode.

Appliestion progro;m driuert - when an appllcatton program

drives the user defined data export block, and the appllcation
program is in auto mode, lt always controls the output of tJ:e
block. It also always sets the alarm status and quality for the
block.

When the block is placed fn AIUTOmode, the applicatlon pro-

gram can read any input from the console. Depending on how
the program ls wrttten, lt may or may not update the output of
the block based on this lnput. The block does not report a new
text string to update the console dlsplay unless the application
program itself updates the output of the block or changes
either the alarm status or quality status of the block. TIte appll-
cation program does not echo the terd strtng, entered by the
operator, back to the console unless tJle program Is expltcitly
written to do so. An echo feature like thls, whtch can be used to
confirm that the block recelved tlre entered text, must be butlt
into the program for lt to occur.

When the block is in IuIANUALmode, the appllcation program

can still read any input from tJle console. In this case, the out-
put may be either a new text string generated by the applica-
tion prograrn, or it may be an echo of tJ:e operator entered text
string. When the block receives an tnput from the console, it
immediately places the input lnto lts output buffer. This text
string is output in the next report to the console unless the
application program ovenrrites it before the block generates a
new exception report.

Bloek driuen - the block drlven user deflned data erport block
in AUTO mode operates bastcally the s€rmeas when lt ls driven
by an applicatlon program. Ttle dlfference ls ttrat tl:e function
block driving the user defined data uryort block sets the alarm
status and quality rather than the applicatlon progrErm.

When the block is in fuIANUALmode, only the console controls

the output of the block. Ttre block echoes back any text
strings entered by the operator at the console.

Table 194-4 summarDes the operatlon of the user deflned

data export function block based on the lnput source, and
current mode and loek status of the block.

UserDefinedDataExport
1 9 4- 1 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctlonCode 194

Tahle 794-4. llEKfSlllR Element Operattq Condif&cns

lnput Source Mode Lock Status Operatlon

Application AUTO Locked The applicationprogramcontrolsthe outputof the userdefineddata
program exportblocknot allowingany inputfromthe console.
Unlocked The applicationprogramcontrolsthe outputof the userdefineddata
exportbtockallowinginputfromthe console.The applicationprogram
mayor maynot updatethe outputof the blockbasedon the inputfromthe
console.lt dependson howthe programis written.
MANUAL Unlocked Boththe applicationprogramand the consolecontrolthe outputof the
userdefineddataexportblock.A text stringreceivedfromthe console
can be read by the applicationprogram.The text stringreceivedfromthe
consolebecomesthe outputof the blockunlessthe programupdatesthe
outputwith a newtext string.
Function AUTO Locked Anotherfunctionblockcontrolsthe outputof the userdefineddata export
block blocknot allowingany inputfromthe console.
MANUAL Unlocked The consolecontrolsthe outputof the block.A text stringreceivedfrom
the consolebecomesthe outputof the block.

TextString Input To enter a text strlng ln response to a prompt or question:

l. Press ffi| to enable the text string lnput field. The control
prompt ch€rnges to TGT TE)(T: and the current reported text
string is echoed ln the input fleld after presslng the key.

2. The ma:dmum number of characters tlrat can be entered

is 80. However, the TEXTSTR tags conflgurafion determlnes
the maximum number of characters displayed and accepted
by the element. Key ln a response.

to enter the text string.

3. Press IENTETI

When the module sends a question or prompt to the console,

there is a sequence number associated wlth that informatlon.
The module uses the sequence number to lnsure that the
response recelved from the operator at the console corre-
sponds to the questlon or prompt that was sent. The user
defined data e:rport block lncrements the sequence number
each tlme the appllcatlon program updates the output of the
block urtth a new text strlng.

The message the eonsole sends to the module in resPonse to a

prompt or questlon also contatns the sequence number of the
message to whteh the operator is responding. If the module
detects a mlsmatch between the curent sequence number
and the received sequence number, tt ignores the resPollse.
This insures the lntegrity between the prompt and the
answer.

Alarm State The operator has the ability to indicate an alarm state to be
associated with a response. The alarm state can be lndlcated
as either in alarm (N or no alarm ( ); the default ls no alarm.

UserDefinedDataExport
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlses 194 - 13
FunctionCode194

To indicate an alarm or no alarm condltlon for a text string,

press:
I

for alarrn.

for no alarm.

While the TE)([STR element is still actlve, a block details or

operating parElmeters display can be called by presslng a cor-
responding keyboard key.

To disable control of tl:e currenily selected element, press

lFdJ or select another element at arry tlme.

C LANGUAGE PROGRAM

This example demonstrates how two C language programs,

nrnnlng on two modules, resldlng ln separate PCU rnodules,
can exchange data using functton codes 193 and 194. The
data that are exchanged are an array of 16 floats (6+ bytes in
size), which ls exported from the module at l-2-4, block
address 200. These data €rre then lmported by the module at
L-3-4, block address 2OO.

The export module contains a functlon code 194 at block

address 2OO, and its C language program ls as follows:

#include<xr_bufs.h>
float matrix[4][4]; l' array of 16 floats to expotl*l
struct userdata_xr_bufxr; /* buffer for FCI 94 *l
void main(void)

t
longint status;
shortint row,col;
f setuparrayof floatsto someabitrary values'/
fo(row=0;row<4;row++)
t
for(col=O;col<4; col++)
t
= row* col | 5O:;
matrix[rowJ[col]
)
)
/* setupFC194buffer *l
xr.data= (char*) matrix; /* pointto floats*/
xr.mask- DATAI QUALITY; /* set dataand quality*/
xr.quality= GOOD3UALITY; /' set qualitygood'/
/* calfexportfunctionat block200*l
status= uS€rdata-xr-write(200,&xr,sizeof(matrix));
/* programcontinueshere... *l
)

UserDefinedDataExport
1 9 4- 1 4 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode194

The import module contains a functlon code 193 at block

address 20O, and tts C program is:

#include€fi-bufs.h>
floatmatrix[4ll4l; l' arrayof 16floatsto import*l
structuserdata-xr-bufxr; f bufferfor FC193*/
voidmain(void)
t
longint status;
shortint row'col;
f setupFC193buffer'l
xr.data= (char') matrix; f pointto floats*/
xr.mask= READJROM-ELOCK-OUTPUT; /* set to read
FC1g3*/
*l
f call importfunctionat block200
=
status USerdatia-xr-read (200,&xr, sizeof(matrix));
*/
f fi retumok (64 bytesread),printvalues
==
if (status Al)
{
row<4;row++)
for(row=Q;
t
col<4;col++)
for(col=O;
t
e (o/od,o/od)
printf('Valu : ?5f\n",
row,col, matrix[rowJ[colD;
)
)
)
else
t
erron7odno,status);
printf("lmport
)
)

The INFI 9O configuratton for thts ex€rmple is:

SourceMFP
Address:1-24
Block100: FC143
Block200: FC194

NPMfor PCU2

Loop

NPM for PCU 3

lmportMFP
Address: 1-3-4
Block 100: FC143
Bfock200: FCl93 (importingfrom 1-2'4, block200)

User DefinedDataExPort
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 9 4- 1 5
ffi
t

I
 FunctionCode195- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 rs FEBrees 195 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode196- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBiees 196 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode 197- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEBlees 197 - 1
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode198- AuxiliaryRealUserDefinedFunction

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The auxiliary real user defined functlon block deffnes addl-

ttonal real outputs, tunable parameters and tnputs for a user
defined functlon block (functton codes f91 and 192).

For more informatlon regarding user defined functlons, refer

to the llser De/ined llnnction ([IDF) Progrolmming Latr-
guage product instmctlon and the [IDF- - Aser DeJined
Fnnc tion Configuro;tion Lo;nguo;ge applicatlon guide.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Realoutput
N+1 R Realoutput
N+2 R Realoutput
N+3 R Realoutput

SPECtFtCATtOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S2 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S3 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S4 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
S6 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
S9 N 0 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof nextauxiliaryUDF(0 endslink)
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl2 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

AuxiliaryRealUserDefinedFunction
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 1 9 8- 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode199- AuxiliaryDigitalUserDefinedFunction

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The auxiliary dtgltal user deflned funetlon block deftnes addt-

ttonal dfftal outputs, tunable parameters and lnputs for a
user deflned functlon block (functlon codes 191 and 192).

For more informatlon regardlng user deflned functlons, refer

to the llser Defined Fnnction (UDF) frograntming Lerl-
guage product lnstmctlon and the IIDI" ) Aser Defined
Fnnc tion Con/igrtr ation Languo;g e app licatlon gulde.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Booleanoutput
N+1 B Booleanoutput
N+2 B Booleanoutput
N+3 B Booleanoutput

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Description

S1 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S2 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S3 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof any input
S4 N 2 0 - 9998 Block address of any input
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Tunable real parameter
S6 Y 0.000 R Full Tunable real parameter
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
S8 Y 0.000 R Full Tunablerealparameter
S9 N 0 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof nextauxiliaryUDF(0 endslink)
sl0 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s11 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
sl2 Y 0.000 R Full Spare

AuxiliaryDigitalUserDefinedFunction
l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 1 9 9- 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode200- !NF!-NET
to PlantLoop LocalTransfer
ModuleExecutiveBlock (lNlPTOl)

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Functlon code 2OO ts the INFI-NET to Plant l,oop executlve

EXEC functlon code. Thls functton code deflnes the pa,rameters that
control the operatlon of the INFI-NET to Plant l,oop transfer
module. Functlon eode 2OOresldes ln fixed bloek one.

The conflguratlon lock Sf dFables mode changes. Thls pre-

vents modtflcatlon of INFI-NET data potnt definttlon blocks
(functlon code 2Ol) once the module is placed in execute mode.

Speciflcatlons 52 through 54 [oop, node, module) define a loca-

tlon for redlrecflon of Plarrt l,oop mess4ges sent to INFI-NET.
Redireeflon dlows a Plarrt Loop device to send tunfng and eon-
figUratlon commands to an INFI-NET node. The module redl-
rects tunlng and conflguratlon commands addressed to module
number three or hfgher to the address specified in 52 through
54. The redirection address is tunable when tlre module is ln
the etcecute mode, and can be modilied when ttre module ls in
the configure mode. Any tuning or configuration corrmands
destined for the INFI-NET to Plant Loop transfer module should
be excluslvely addressed to module address two.

SPARE
Trend data poll commands should be redirected by settlng up
€rn INFI-NET data polnt definition (functlon code 201) for
SPARE
every INFI-NET potnt trended across the module, rather than
SPARE by tuntng the speclflcatlons of the executlve block.

The exception report poll rate for the INFI-NET and Plant Loop
sides of the gateway cern be set individually. The setting is ln
SPARE
terms of milllseconds and determlnes tlle frequency that the
database ls scanned for points that have been updated and
SPARE
require transmlsslon to the ultlmate destinations.

Inop time synchronizing can be isolated between INF[-NET

and Plant Loop or permttted to flow across the gate\ilay. If
time synchronlzlng ts lsolated, then trending is not permltted
to occur across the gateway.

UTILIZATION

INFI-NETto PlantLoopLocalTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPTOl)
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 200-1
FunctionCode200

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

1 R lncoming|NF|-NETexceptionreportsper second
2 R Outgoing|NFf-NETexceptionrepoftsper second
3 R Incoming Plant Loop exception reports per second
4 R OutgoingPlantLoopexceptionreportsper second
5 R Available bytes of RAM
6 R Available bytes of NVRAM
7 R Revision level
I R Availablepercentof CPUtimE
I R Timeand datesynchronization state:
0 = invalid(no synchronizationreceived)
1 = synchronized from |NF|-NET
2 = synchronized from PlantLoop
3 = Syochronized from|NF|-NETand PlantLoop(validonly
whencrosslooptime synchronization is disabled)
10 R Hourstimeof day (0 - 23)
11 R Minutestimeof day (0 - 59)
12 R Seconds time of day (0 - 59)
13 R Cafendatyear (0 - 99)
14 R Cafendar month (1 - 12)
15 R Calendarday (1 - 31)
1 6- 2 9 R Reserved

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 B Full Configuration
lock:
0 = unlocked
1 = locked
S2 Y 1 I 1 -250 Redirection
loopnumber
S3 Y 1 I 1-250 Redirectionnodenumber
S4 Y 2 I 0-31 Redirectionmodulenumber
S5 N 1000 I 100-32767 |NF|-NETexceptionreportpoll rate(msecs)
S6 N 1000 100-32767 PlantLoopexceptionreportpoll rate(msecs)
S7 N 1 B Full Crosslooptimesynchronization:
0 = disabled
1 = gh?bled
S8 N 0 Full Spare
S9 N 0 Full Spare
sl0 N 0 I Full Spare
sl1 N 0 Full Spare
sl2 N 0 Full Spare

!NF|-NETto PlantLoopLocalTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPTOl)
200-2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code200

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Spectflcatlon 51 ls the conflguratlon lock. If set to zero, con-

flguratlon changes are allowed. If set to one, conllguratlon ls
locked. Onee a conflgUratlon ts locked, lt cannot be unlocked.
The module must be firfilallzed and reconfigured.

s2 Speclflcatlon 52 ldentlfles the loop number where tunlng and

conflguratlon cornmands recelved on Plant Loop are to be
dlrected. Tunlng and eonflguratlon commands addressed to
module number tlrree or hlgher are redlrected by 52.

s3 Speciflcatton 53 ldenttfles the node number where tunlng and

configuratlon commands received on Plant LooP are to be
directed. Tunfng and configuratlon comrnands addressed to
module number three or higher are redirected by S3.

s4 Speclfication 54 ldentifies the module number where tuning

and configuratlon commands received on Plant Loop are to be
dlrected. Tunlrg and conflguratlon commands addressed to
module number three or hlgher are redirected by 54.

s5 Speclflcatlon 55 sets the exceptlon report poll rate (ln mt[l-

seconds) for the INFI-NET slde of the gateway.

S6 Spectflcatlon 56 sets the exception report poll rate (ln mllll-

seconds) for the Plant l,ooP slde of the gateway.

S7 Spectflcation SZ ts the tlme synchronlzation speclflcatlon. If

set to zeto, there ls no tlme sJmchrontzation between the cen-
tral loop and satelllte loops. If set to one, synchronlzatlon
exlsts between the central and satellite loops.

Outputs

1 Output btock one ls the number of exception report potnts

received by the INFI-NET side of the gateway per second.

2 Output block two is the number of exeeption report points

sent out by the INFI-NET side of the gateway per second.

3 Output block three is the number of exception report points

received by the Plant Loop side of the gateway per second.

4 Output block four ls tl:e number of exception report potnts

sent out by the Plant Loop slde of the gateway per second.

5 Output block flve ls the amount of available bytes of RAM.

6 Output stx ts the amount of available bytes of I{ilIRAI\{.

|NF|-NETto PlantLoopLocalTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPT01)
t-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 200-3
FunctionCode200

7 Output seven ls the revlslon level of the module flrmware.

8 Output eight ts the percentage of free tlme tn the CPU.

9 Output nine ls the ttme and date synchronlzatlon state.

O - invalld (no synchronlzaUon)

I = module is synchronlzed from tJre INFI-NET

2 = module is synchronlzed from the Plant l,oop

$ = module is synchrontzed from the INFI-NET and the

Plant lpop (valid only when cross loop time synchronl-
zatton is disabled (SZ eguals zero)

10 Output ten is the time of day tn hours (zero through 23).

11 Output I I is the time of day ln mlreutes (zero through 59).

12 Output 12 is the time of day ln seconds (zero through 59).

13 Output 13 is the calendar year (zero through g9).

14 Output 14 ts the calendar month (one through Lzl.

15 Output 15 is the calendar day (one through 3l).

16 through 29 Outputs 16 through 29 are reserlred.

lNFl-NETto PlantLoopLocalTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPTOl)
200-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode201- DataPoint Definition

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Ftrnctlon code 2OL ls the INFI-NET data point deflnltlon func-

tlon. It permlts a Plant Loop to tmport data from INFI-NET vla
the INFI-NET to Plant Loop gateway. Speclfication Sl deflnes
the polnrt data t54le. All potnt tlpes on INFI-NET, except trends,
generate exceptlon reports of the corresponding tlpe on Plant
Loop. Speclflcatlons 52 through 55 define the INFI-NET loop,
node, module and block address of the data polnt that thts
functlon code wlll lmport.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlption

N I Block status for all polnt Upes excepttrend:
0 = g@d (specifications and exceptionreportsreceived)
1 = spgcifications received,exceptionreportsnot received
128= bad quality(exceptionreportsreceived,specifications
not received)
129= bad (exceptionreportsnot received,specifications not
received)
Block status for trend point:
0 = trenddata requestreceived
1 = trenddata requestnot received

SPECtF/,CAnOAfS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 I 0 , 1 ,2 , 3 , 4 , lmportdatatype:
5or6 0 = digital(functioncode45)
1 = ?o?log(function code30,70 or 151)
2 = station(function code21,22,23or 80)
$ = r€rnotecontrolrnemory(functioncode62)
4 = r€rnoternanualset constant(functioncode68)
5 = devicedriver(functioncode 123,129or 136)
6 = trendpoint(functioncode66)
S2 N 1 1 - 2 5 0 Source loop for data

DataPointDefinition
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB199s 201-1
FunctionCode 2O1

SPECIFICATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S3 N 1 1 -250 Sourcenodefor datra
S4 N 2 I 0-31 Sourcemodulefor datra
S5 N 1 I 0 - 9998 Sourceblockfor data

EXPLANATION

The function block range for this functlon code ls 30 to 5,029.

Since Plant toop exception reported blocks must fall ln the
range of zero to 1,023, a virtual addresstng mechanlsm is
used. For blocks in the rzmge of 30 to 1,023, exceptton reports
are made available at the gateway node address, module
address two and function code 2Ol block number. For blocks
greater than 1,023, the module address and block number
are derived as shown in Table 201-1.

Tahte 2 O7- 7. Block Numb ers jor INEI-NET

Block Range Module Address Block No. Offset
30 - 1023 2 0
1024- 2047 3 1024
2048- 3071 4 2048
3072- 4095 5 3072
4096- 5029 6 4096
NorE: The block number of the Plant Loop exception report is the
function code 201 block number minus the block number offset.

For ex€unple, rnodule address three has function code 2Ol

assigned to block 2000. The block range it ls receiving is IO24
to 2047. Therefore, the block number to use for 55 is 976.

Consoles on the Plant Loop cErnrequest trend data from INFI-

NET by directing the requests at each INFI-NET data point
definition block specified as a trend point t5pe (Sf equals six).
For this case, a fixed module number of two and block num-
bers in the range 30 to 5,029 must be used for the trend block
location specified by 52 through 55.

The output of this block reflects the status of the block's

import data, rather than the exceptlon report data values
themselves. The output for a trend t5pe block indicates
whether or not a request for trend data has been received.

Data Point Definition

2 0 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode201

Specifieations

s1 Speclflcatlon S1 tdentlfles what type of data tJle INFI-NET slde

ls lmportlng to the Plant Loop.

0= dlgltal (funetton code 45)

1= an€rlog (functlon code 30, 70 or 151)
2= statton (functlon code 21, 22, 23 or 80)
3= remote control memory (function code 62)
4 = remote manual set constant (function code 68)
$= device drlver (functton code I23, 129 or 136)
$= trend polnt (function code 66)

s2 Speclflcatlon 52 ldentifles t}re INFI-NET loop data source.

s3 Specificatlon Sg ldentlfies the INFI-NET node data sottrce.

s4 Speciflcatlon 54 ldentifles the INFI-NET module data source.

S5 Speciflcation 55 tdentifles the INFI-NET module block data

source.

Outputs

N Functlon code 2Ol has one output. It provides the status of

all point tlpes exeept trend. Output N also provtdes conflrma-
tlon of recelpt for trend potrts.

Block stcrtus Jor o;ll point tgpes e;xeept trend:

Q = good (spectfications and exceptlon reports recelved)

I = specifications received, exception reports not received

I28 = bad quality (exeeption reports received, specifica-

tions not received)

L29 = bad (exception reports not reeelved, speclflcatlons

not received)

Block statrrc for trend point:

Q = trend data request received

I = trend data request not received

DataPointDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 201-3
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode202- INFI-NET
to INFI-NETRemoteTransfer
ModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllTOzl

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Function code 202ls the INFI-NET to INFI-NETTransfer Mod-

ule Executive (E)(EC IIT) block. Thls functlon code deflnes
how the INIITO2 INFI-NET to INFI-NET Transfer Module oper-
ates. It has a ftxed block address of one (urithln the INIITO2
module).

NOTE:Referto the INFI-NETCommunlcationsModule instruc-

concerningthe |NF|-NETto |NF!-NET
tion for detailedinformation
transfermodule.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

1 B Port 1 communicationstatus:
Q = good
1 - with no alarm = olror warning
1 - with alarm = port failed
2 B Port 2 communicationstatus:
Q = good
1 - with no alarm = offot warning
1 - with alarm = pofi failed
3 I Spare
4 I Spare
5 I Spare
6 Spare

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlption

S1 N 0 I Full Port1 transmission turnedon
startdelayaftertransmitter
(msecs)
S2 N 0 Full sent
turnotf delayaftertransmission
Port1 transmitter
(msecs)

lNFl-NETto lNFI-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllTO2)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 202-1
FunctionCode 202

SPECIFICATIOruS @ontinued)
I
Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon
S3 N 0 I Full Port2 transmission
startdelayaftertransmittertumedon
(msecs)
S4 N 0 Full Port2 transmittertum off delayaftertransmissionsent
(msecs)
S5 N 200 I Full Port1 mo<imumtransmissionduration(in tnsecs,half
duplexonly)
S6 N 200 I Full Port2 maximumtransmissionduration(in msecs,half
duplexonly)
S7 N 60 I Full statuswatchdogtimer(secs)
Port1 communication
S8 N 60 I Full stiatuswatchdogtimer (secs)
Port2 communication
S9 Y 12 I 1-12 Port1 baudrate:
1=110 5=6@ 9=4,800
2=134.5 6=1,200 10=1,800
3 = 150 7 =2,000 11= 9,600
4=300 8=2,400 72=19,200
NOTE: The defaultbaudratecan be selectedby switchset-
tingsin lNllTO2firmwarerevisionsB.1and later.
s10 N 12 I 1-12 Port2 baudrate.Samesettingsas 59.
s11 N 0 0-3 Port 1 data characteristics:
0 = I data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
1 = 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity
2 = 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity
3 = 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
s12 N 0 I 0-3 Port 2 data characteristics.Same settings as S11.
NOTE: Not used if port 2 enabled as diagnostic port
s13 N 0 I 0-1 Port 1 duplex mode:
0 = full duplex
1 = half duplex
sl4 N 0 0-1 Port2 duplexmode:
0 = fullduplex
1 = halfduplex
NOTE: Not usedif port2 enabledas diagnosticport
sl5 N 1 0-4 Port 2 mode:
Q = port 2 not used or diagnostic port
1 = standby for port 1 (port 1 preferred)
2 = altemate to port 1 (either port acceptable)
3 = both ports used (one port is acceptable)
4 = both ports required (one port not acceptable)
s16 N 10 I 0 - 100 Percenterrorrateusedto calculateserialchannelstatusfor
theexecutiveblockdigitaloutputs.Specification
S16is used
in conjunction withS7,S8, andS15to determineif a com-
munication equipment failurehasoccurred.Communication
equipment failuremayleadto the actionselectedin S17.
sl7 N 0 I 0-3 Actionon communication equipmentfailure:
0 = oo backupequipmentavailable
1 = switchstateof D03(selectaltemateequipment)
2 = switchto redundant module
sl8 N 0 I 0-3 Exceptionreportingrate(timebetweenscans):
0 = 2.00secs
1 = 1.00sec
2 = 0.50sec
3 = 0.25sec

lNFl-NETto lNFl-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllT02
202-2 15 FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 Function Code 202

APPLICATIO'VS

Serial DataChannel Operation

F\rnctlon code 2O2 ls the eKecutlve block that contalns the

speclflcatlons for sertal data channel operattoll. The serlal data
channels ca,n opemte ln etther hdf duplex or full duplex mode.
The RS-232-C serld ports are lndfddually conftgurable.

Half Duplex Operation

Half duplex ls the operatlon of a communlcatlon clrcult ln

whtch each end alternates as sender and reeelver. At any
irestant, electrlcal tnformatlon flows tn only one dlrectloll. The
dlrectlon of transmlsslon (1.e., local to remote or remote to
locat) alternates on the serlal llnk. Ttterefore, the modem car-
rter and the transcelver transmltter sectlon need to be
errabled before data cErn be transmltted. Addiflonally, the
transmttter needs to be dlsabled prior to shutttng down the
modem earrler after the data transmisslon. Finally, the pri-
mary IIT module may need to switch the antenna to the actlve
transceiver. The IMIR0I INFI-NET to INFI-NET Remote Inter-
face requires a dtgltal outputl/O module, cabllng, and a ter-
mination unlt to sw'itch external equipment ln the half duple>c
mode. The executlve bloek provides specificatlons to control
external communlcatlon equlpment.

NOTE:The digital VO module,cablingand terminationunit are

optionalpartsof the llR. The interfacerequirestheseoptionalparts
for operationin half duplexmodewhen switchingextemalequip-
mentis requiredand in applications usingredundantexternalcom-
municationequipment(Fig.202-1).

59 throughS14 The executlve block enables the IIT module to handle varlous
tSpes of communtcatlon equlpment. Setting S13 (channel one)
or S14 (channel two) to one enables half duplex mode. Specifi-
catlons 59, S10, Sl l and S12 select the transmisslon rate
(baud), t5pe of partty (odd or even), and number of stop bits.

The IIT module uses the request to send (RTS) signal to eon-
trol the modem calrler. Most modems have, or may be conflg-
ured to have, a calrler turn-on delay. A carrier turn-oll delay
provtdes an addtttond delay between the receipt of the RTS
signal and the actlvatton of the clear to send (CTS) stgnal. The
IIT module must receive the CTS signal from the modem
before it starts to transmit data.

|NF|-NETto |NF|-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllTO2)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 242-3
FunctionCode2A2

Sl through SG The RTS output of the serial port keys the modem canrler. A
digital I/O module output keys the transmttter carrler. The
digital output enables the transmltter ca:rler to be keyed ON
prtor to the data transmlsslon, and keyed OnFprtor to turnlng
off the modem carTler. Spectlicatlons 51, S2, Sg and 54 set
delays. Speclfications Sf and 53 dectde the carrler turn-on
delay. Spectlicattons 52 and 54 set the delay between drop-
plng the transmttter ca:rler and dropplng the modem carrler.
Speclfications 55 and 56 allow setttreg Umtts on the duratlon
of the transmissiorl. These speclflcatlons lnsure that each stde
of ttre INIIROI INFI-NET to INFI-NET Remote Interface has an
opportunfty to originate a message of tts ourn. Flgure 2O2-l
shows the Uming of external equtpment enable stgnals for half
duplex operatlon.

Figure 2O2-2 lllustrates redundant INIITO2 modules wlth con-

trol of external equlpment tn half duplex operatlorr. Table
202-1 lists the possible speclficatton settfngs for the E)(EC IIT
block for the configuratlon ln Ftgure 202-2.

TIMINGAT LOCAL INIITO2

51 1
'
TRAt,lSMlT S2 r| r| S i RECEIVE 1 S 2 lI
DEI-Ay MESSAGE DEIAY DELAY I MESSAGE I DEI.AY
I TxtxTxTxTxTx RxtufixRxRx&(
(DTEMODE)
RTSASSERTED
SETDO4 RTStNHtBtTED(DTEMODE)
RESETDO4

, TFUANSMITTERENABLED

MODEM CARRIER EhI,ABLED

TIMINGAT REMOTEINIITOz
s 2 l l S l l TRANSMIT s2
D E L A Y I ' D E T A Y I MESSAGE DELAY
TxTxTxTxTxTx
(DTEMODE)
RTSASSERTED (DTEMODE)
RTSTNHTBTTED
SETDO4 RESETOOI

TH25?2.4A

NOTE:To assurepropertiming,functioncf/de202specifications
relatedto seriatchanneloperation(S1 thrcughS14)mustbe getthe samein bothlocal
andremotellT modules.

Ftgwe 20 2 - I . nming Diogran oJ htable Sfgnc'ls in HaIJ Dttplpx Mde

lNFI-NETto lNFI-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllTO2)
202-4 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 202

SECONDARY

F-tgtre 202-2. Redwdortt IINITO2 utlth Confrol oJMemal

Equlpment In Half DWI* Operation

Table 202- 1. Specification SettlttgsJor INE[-NE? to INEI-NET TlansJer Mdule Esalcl.ttfr,e

Btock in Flgure 202-2 Configurafron
Spec Value Descrlptlon
S1 10 Pon 1 transmissionstan delayafter the transmitteris tumed on (msecs).Valuevariesaccordingto
ths transmitterus€d.
S2 10 Port I hansmittertum olf delay afbr the transrnissionis sent (msecs).Valuevaries accoding to
the transmittarus€d.
S3 0 Port2 is not usedin this example.
S4 0 Port2 is not usedin thisexample.
S5 200 Port1 maximumtransmission duration(msecs).2(X) msecsis a compromisebstweenmaximum
throughput(highvalue)and minimumresponsetime (lowvalue).
S6 200 Port2 is not usedin thisexample.
S7 60 Port 1 communication statuswatchdogtimer(secs).60 secsis a compromisebetweenrapid
failoverto the backupmodule,and potectionagainstmomentaryinterruptionsleadingto failover.
S8 60 Port2 is not usedin this example.
S9 6 Port1 baudrate(1200).Mustmatchthe modembaudrate.
sl0 0 Port2 is not usedin thisexamPle.
sl1 2 Port 1 data characteristics(8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity). Must matchthe modemcapabilities.
sl2 0 Port2 is not usedin thisexample.
sl3 1 Port1 is set to halfduplexmode.
sl4 0 Port 2 is not used in this example.

INFI-NETto INFI-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllT02)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 202-5
FunctionGode 202

Table 202-1. Spectficafion *tt/ngs Jor INHI-JVEI.to INFI-NETTlansJa Modtic E ceaiTue

Bl;clck in Flgure 202-2 ConfrguralTon (crlnttued)
Spec Value Deserlptlon
sl5 0 Port2 is not usedin this example.SettingS15 to 0 insuresthat the unusedpod 2 is not repoiled
as faifed by blockoutput2 (executiveblockouQut tor prt2 s&atus).
sl6 10 Percenteror rate usedto calculatesedalchannelstratusfor the channelI executivebloc* digltal
output.Specification S16 is alsousedin conjunction withS7 to set the sedalchannelI statusbit In
the modulestatus.Specification S16 is also usedIn conjunctionwith S7 and 515 b determinelf a
communication equipmentfailurehas occurred.Communication equipmentfailuremayleadto the
actionselec'tedin S17.
sl7 3 Actionon communication equipmentfailure.Action3 sp€cifiEsthat the pdmaryand secondaryllT
modulesswapstateswhena communication failurEoccurs.In this example,thls actionbdngsthe
secondaryllT moduleto pdmary.The newprimaryllT modulEusestho secondarytranscelver. The
secondarytransceiverconnectsto the antennaif the equipmentsel€ctoutput (SW4,pole 3) is set
differentlyon the two llT modules.
sl8 2 Exceptionreportingrate.The databaseis scannedfor exceptionsreportedacrossthe serial link or
the INFI-NETloopeveryhalfsecond.

Full Duplex Operation

39 through S14 Full duplex is the operailon of a communicatlon clrcuit lrl

which each end of the sertal llnk can simultaneously send
and receive. There ls no need to alternate the dlrectton of
transmission as in half duplex mode. Setttng S13 (channel
one) or Sf4 (channel two) to zero enables full duplex mode.
Specificafions 59, S1O, S11 and S12 select the baud rate,
type of pariff and number of stop blts.

Figure 202-3 illustrates the IMITO2 module using dual channel,

fuU duplex operaflorr,. Table 202-2 ltsts possible spedfieaflon

Ftgure 202-3. INIIT0? Mdule DunlCtunnel

rn FtdL Dtrylau Operation

lNFI-NETto lNFI-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllTO2)
202-6 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 202

settlnglsfor the INFI-NETto INFI-NETtransfer module execufire

bloch for thts conffguratton.

TabLe202-2. Specficatlon &tfittgs Jor INEI-NE? to INEI-NETTronsJer Module

Flcecl"ltlveBIrck In Flgwe 202-3 Cor1frgurafion
Spec Value Descrlptlon
S1 0 Not usedin full duplexmode.
S2 0 Not usedin full duplexmode.
S3 0 Notusedin full duplexmode.
S4 0 Not usedin full duplexmode.
S5 200 Not usedin full duplsxmodE.
S6 200 Not usedin full duplexmode.
S7 60 Port 1 communlcaUon statuswatchdogtimer (secs).60 secs is a compromisebetweenrapld
repoftingof channelfallure,and filtedngout momentarycommunication problems.
S8 60 Port 2 communicationstatuswatchdogtimer (secs).60 secs is a compromisebetweenrapid
reportingof channelfailure,and filteringout momentarycommunicationproblems.
S9 12 Port1 baudrate(19.2K).Mustmatchmodembaudrate.
sl0 12 Port 2 baud rate (19.2K). Must match modem baud rate.
sl1 0 Pod 1 datacharactedstics (8 databits, 1 stopbit, no padty).Mustmatchthe modemcapabilities.
sl2 0 Port 2 data characteristics(8 data bils, 1 stop bit, no padty).Must matchthe modemcapabilities.
sl3 0 Port1 is set to full duplexmode.
s14 0 Port2 is set to full duplexmode.
sl5 3 Poil 2 mode is set to 3 which lndicates|hat both port I aM poil 2 ar€ used lor data communica-
tionsand that failureof a singlechanneldoesnot causethir communlcation failureaction(S17).
s16 10 Percentenor rate usedlo calculatessrial channelstatusfor the executiveblock digital ouFuts.
Specification S16 is usedln conjurctionwlth 57, SBand Sl5 to determinelf a communicaton
equipmentfailurehas occuned.Communicatlon equipmentfailuremayleadto the actlonselected
in S17.
s17 0 Actionon communication equipmentfailurs.Actlonspecifiesthat no backupmoduleor equipment
existson communicatlonfailure.The moduleresetsitsell and attemptrsto establishcommunication.
sl8 2 Exceptionrepodingrate.The databaseis scannedfor exceptionsrcpodedacrossthe serial link or
the |NF|-NETloopeveryhalf second.

SerialLine Quality Management

sl6 The INIIT02 module contlnuously monitors the quaUty of tJ:e

serial Unks. Speclflcation 516 is the percent error rate used to
decide the status of serial channels. Specification 516ls used
in conjunction wtth S7 and S8 to determine that a serlal
channel has failed. When the percentage of messages wlth
errors exceedsttris value for a number of seconds exceeding
the S7 value for channel one or the S8 value for channel two,
then the channel ls considered unusable (failed). When a
channel ls consldered unusable, a channel failure btt ts set in
the module status, and dependtng on the setting of S15, the
actlon selectedtn Sl7 may be performed.

Specificatton 516 ls also used in the caleulations for serial

channel qualty reported tn the IMITO2 executlve block dlgltal
outputs. Ttrese distal outputs are updated every second. If
the percentage of messages wlth etrors on a serlal channel

lNFI-NETto lNFl-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllT02)
l-E96-2008 15FEB1ee5 202 - 7
FunctionCode 202

exceeds the 516 value (htgh error rate threshotd), then the
digital block output for that channel wtll be one wlth alarm. If
the percentage of messages wlth errors on a serial channel
exceeds one fifth of the Sf O value Oow error rate threshold),
then the dlgltal block output for tlrat channel wlll be one wtth
no alarm. Otherwls€, the dtgltal block output for that channel
will be zero wlth no alarm.

57 and S8 A serlal channel ls unusable when lt falls for a pertod of tlme

longer than the communlcatlon status watchdog tlmer. Speci-
fications S7 (channel one) or S8 (channel two) sets the eom-
munication watchdog tlmer. When a channel ls considered
unusable, the serlal channel status btt ln ttre module status
is set, and the action selected by S17 can be lnvoked.

515 and 517 Specifications Sf 5 and Sl7 select the action taken by the IIT
module when one or both serial channels are unusable. S15
determines the role of serid port two and sets the necessary
conditions for communication equipment f,ailure. Depending on
the setting of S15, either a single channel failure or a dual chan-
nel failure constitutes communtcatton equtpment failure. For
exarnple, there is a conrmunication equlpment failure when:

l. S15 optton ls I,2 or 3 and both channels fall.

2. Sl5 optlon ls 0 or 4 and one channel falls.

If a communlcatlon equlpment fiallure occuns, the primary mod-

ule will carry out the actlon selected ln S17. The module resets
I
itself if the S17 option ls zero. If Sf 7 optton ls one, and the
(optional) dlgital output l/O module ls tnrstalled, then digital
output three will be toggled. If SI7 opHon ls two, and a backup
module is avallable, then ttre primary INIITO2 module goes into
secondary mode and the secondary module goes into primary
mode. The primary INIITO2 module contlrruously attempts to
establish communicatlon on fatled sertal ports. If SW4 pole four
is set to one enabling port two to be used as a diagnostic port,
then the INIITO2 module will act as if the S15 option is zero.

lNFI-NETto lNFl-NETRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNllT02)
202-8 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 2Og- |NF|-NETto Plant Loop Remote
TransferModuleExecutiveBlock (lNlPT02)
GENERALDESCRIPTION

Functlon code 2Og ls the remote INFI-MT to Plant l,oop

transfer module executlve block. Thls functlon code deflnes
the parameters that control ttre operatlon of the IMPffi2
Remote INFI-IrIET to Plant l.oop Tlansfer Module. Thts func-
tlon code resldes ln ftxed block one.

UTILIATION

OUTPUTS

Btk TVpe D,eserlptlon

1 B Port 1 communicationstatus:
Q= good
1 with no alarm= effor waming(errorlevelexceedsl/s of
S18level)
I with alarm= poft failed(enorlevelexceedsS18specified
level)
2 B Port2 communication status:
Q= good
1 with no alarm= Brrorwarning(errorlevelexceedstr of
S18level)
1 withalarm= poft failed(errorlevelexceedsS18 specified
level)
3 Cunentexoeptionreportstransfenedper second
4 Averageexceptionreportstransfered per second
5 Maximumexceptionreportstransferredper second
6 Currentloop exceptionrepoftsreceivedper second
7 Curent loop exceptionreportstransmittedp€r second
I Cunentlink exceptionreportsreceivedper second
9 Currentlink exceptionreportstransmittedper second
10 Available bytes of RAM
11 Available bytes of NVRAM
12 lNlPTO2revisionlevel
13 Availablepercentageof CPUtime

|NF|-NETto PlantLoop RemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPT02)

l-E96-2008 15 FEB199s 203-1
Function Code 2Og

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Btk Type Descrlptlon

14 Timeand date synchronization strate:
0 = invalid(no synchronizationreceived)
1 = synchronized from|NF|-NET
2 = syrchronizedfrom PlantLoop
3 = syhchronized from INFI-NETand PlantLoop(validonly
whencross-loopsynchronizationis enabled)
15 Timeof day (hours)
16 Timeof day (minutes)
17 Timeof day (seconds)
18 Calendar(year)
19 Calendar (month)
20 Calendar (day)
21 Port 1 communications error rate in units of O.1o/o
22 Port2 communications
error ratein unitsof O.1o/o
23 B Linkcommunication status:
Q= good
1 with no alarm= offor rateon last port exceedslA of S18
level
1 with alarm= linkfailed (watcMogtimer on last port expired)
24-29 Unused

sPECtFrCArrOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-1 Configuration lock:
0 = Do (unlocked)
1 = les (locked)
s21 Y 0 I 1-250 Redirection loop
s31 Y 1 I 1-250 Redirection node
s41 Y 0 0-31 Redirectionmodule
s52 N 0 I 0-3 XR poll rate(timebetweenXR databasescans;XRs sentonly
if newXR received):
0 = 2.0 secs
1 = 1.0sec
2 = 0.5 sec
3 = 0.25sec
S6 N 1 I 0-1 Cross-looptimesync:
0 = Do(remotetime sync rejected)
1 = les (remotetime sync accepted)
S7 N 0 I Full Port1 command/reply delayaftertransmittertum-on(msecs)
S8 N 0 I Full Port 1 transmittertum-offdelayaftercommand/reply
sent
(msecs)
S9 N 0 I Full Port2 command/reply delayaftertransmittertum-on(msecs)
sl0 N 0 Full Port2 transmittertum-offdelayaftercommand/replysent
(msecs)
s11 N 200 32767 Port1 maximumtransmissionduration(msecs,half duplex
only)
sl2 N 200 32767 Port2 ma:<imum
transmission
duration(msecs,halfduplex
only)

INF!-NETto PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuteExecutiveBtock(lNtpr02)
203-2 1s FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Functlon Gode203

SP ECt F, CATION S (continued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

sl3 N 60 I Full Port 1 communicationstatuswatchdogtimer (secs)
sl4 N 60 I Full Port2 communicationstatuswatchdogtimer (secs)
sl5 N 0 I 0-1 Port1 duplexmode:
0 = full duplex
1 = half duplex
s16 N 0 I 0-1 Port2 dupfexmode:
Q= full duplex
1 = half duplex
sl7 N 1 I 0-4 Port2 usagerules:
0 = port 2 not used
1 = standbyfor port 1 (port 1 prefened)
2 = altematEfor port 1 (eitherport acceptiable)
3 = both portsused (oneport acceptable)
4 = both portsrequired(oneportnot acceptable)
s18 N 10 I 0 - 100 Acceptablelink error rate (enor ratesabovethis level
constitutelinkchannelfailure)
sl9 N 0 I o-2 Actionon communication equipmentfailure:
0 = Dobackupequipmentavailable
1 = switchstateof DO3(selectaltemab equipment)
2 = switchto redundantlNlPT02
s20 N 0 I 0-1 Equipmentselectouput (DOg)initialstratE:
0 = de-energized
1 = energized
s21 N 6 I 0-8 Port1 baudrate:
0=off 3=1200 6=9600
1=300 4=240A 7=19200
2=600 5-4800 8=38400
The 19200and 38400baudratesare mutuallyexclusive
withinthe lNlPTO2.lf port 1 is set to 19200,port2 cannot
be set to 38400,and vice-versa.Also,terminationunit
temperature conditionsmustbe withinlOoCof a nominal
25"Cto support38400baudrates.
s22 N 6 I 0-8 Port2 baudrate:
0=off 3=1200 6=9600
1=300 4=24O0 7=19200
2=600 5=4800 8=38400
The 19200and 38400baudratesare mutuallyexclusive
withinthe lNlPTOz.lfport 1 is set to 19200,port2 cannot
be set to 38400,and vice-vgrsa.Also,terminationunit
temperatureconditionsmustbe within10"Cof a nominal
25"Cto support38400baud rates.
s23 N 0 I 0-3 Port 1 data characteristics:
0 = 8 bit data, 1 stop bit, no parlty
1 = 8 bit data,1 stopbit, evenparity
2 = 8 bit data,1 stop bit, odd parity
3 = 8 bit data,2 stopbits,no parity
s24 N 0 I 0-3 Port2 datacharacteristics:
0 = 8 bit data,1 stopbit, no parity
1 = 8 bit data,1 stop bit, evenparity
2 = 8 bit data,1 stop bit, odd parity
3 = 8 bit data,2 stop bits, no parity
s2s N 0 I o -1 Unk RS-232-Ccharacteristics(bothlink serialports 1 and 2):
O-DCE
1=DTE

|NF|-NETto PlantLoop RemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPTO2)

l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB1995 203-3
FunctionCode203

SP ECIFl CATIONS @ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

s263 N 0 I 0-250 Loopnumberof rernote:
0 = connectwith first remotethat respondsto link
establishmessage
1 - 250 = eXpoctedloop no. of remote.Connectonly if
responseto link estrablishmessagecontainsthis loop
no. as souroeloop.subsequentmessagesfrom remote
mustalso containthis sourosloopno. Mismatched
messagesare discarded.
s27 N 0 Full Linkfailurebad qualityrepondehy (secs)
s28 N 0 I Full Spare
s29 N 0 I Full Spare
s30 N 0 I Full Spare
s31 N 0 I Full Spare
s32 N 0 I Full Spare
s33 N 0 I Full Spare
s34 N 0 I Full Spare
NOTES:
1. Rodit€ctionsp€cificalionsare for GMI trafiic from PlantLoopto INF|-NETonly.EachpossiblePhnt Looprequostorls asslgn€dlts
own individuallediroctionspecifications,thus p.snentingacrktentalc|osstalk A si(b eff€c{ol this ls that iach-plant loop rcquestor
will readits own redirectionspecificalionswhic{rmay noi agreewith any other Ptantloop requestots r€dir€cdonepecificdtions'.
?' X.Rpoll rategovemsthe time bEtweenscansot the e)eort database.An excaptionropo.twitl b€ s6nt only it a new€xceptionraport
has b€enreceiv€dlor that point.This allowsthe ac{ualdata source'smaxtirn€to govemthe updaterateat-thedestinatirns.
3. SpecificationS26 is us€dto alloiv muftiplelNlPm2 tnodul€s!o shar€an unretiablelink routo whorechannelcrgsstalkmig6tofrrer-
wisecauseremotemodulesto respondto link ostablishmessagesfrom local modulesothsr ttranlie onew'rthwhichthe connec-tbnls
intended.The value255 is resewedtor tulur€ use.

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specification S1 is the configuraflon lock. If set to zero, con-

figuration changes are allowed. If set to one, conflguraflon ls
locked. Once a configuration ls locked, lt cannot be unlocked.
The module must be initialved and configured.

S2 Specification 52 identifies the loop number where tuntng and

configuration commands received on Plant l,oop are to be
directed. Tuning and configuraflon commands addressed to
module three or higher atre redirected by thls speclficatton.

S3 Specilicafion Sg idenfifies the node number where tunlng and

configurafion commands received on Plant Loop are to be
directed. Tuning and configuratlon commands addressed to
module three or higher €rre redirected by thls speciflcation.

S4 Specification 54 identifies the module number where tunlng

and configuration commands received on Plant Loop are to be
directed. Tuning and conflguraflon commands addressed to
module three or htgher are redirected by thls speclflcatlon.

INFI-NETto PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlpro2)
203-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode203

ss Speciflcatlon 55 ldentlfles the exceptlon report rate (tfme

between scans).

0 = 2.O seconds
I = 1.0 seeond
2 = O.5 second
3 - O.25 second

s6 Spectficaflon SO enables or dtsables tlme synchronlzaflon

between the two loops. When SG ls zero, a tlme sync from the
remote IMPTO2 module ls reJeeted. When a tlme sync ls
reJected, the local INIPT02 module resynchronlzes the remote
loop. For independent tlmes to be allowed, both INIPT02 mod-
ules must be set up to disable tlme s5rnchronlzatlon. When SG is
one, a tlme synch from the remote INIPT02 module ls accepted.

S7 throughS10 The request-to-send [RTS) output of the serlal port keys the
modem carrier. A dlstal module output keys the trarrsmttter
catrier. The dfgttal output errables the transmltter carler to be
keyed on prior to the data transmlsslon, and keyed o.,ffprlor to
turning off the modem ca:rier. Speclflcattons S7, 58, Sg and
S10 set delays. Speclfications SZ and 59 declde the carrler turn-
on delay. Speciflcatlons 58 and SlO set the delay between drop-
plng the transmttter carrter and dropplng the modem carrler.

S 1 1a n d S 1 2 Specificatlons Sf I and S12 dlow settlng nmfts on the dura-

tlon of the transmtsslon. These speclflcatlons lnsure that
each slde of the INFI-NET to Plant Loop remote lnterface has
an opportunfty to ortgtnate a message of lts o'wn.

S13and S14 A serial channel ls unusable when lt falts for a perlod of tlme
longer than the communlcatlon status watchdog tlmer. Specl-
flcatlon Sf g (channel one) or Sf 4 (channel two) sets the com-
munication status watchdog tlmers. When a channel ls
considered unusable, the serld channel status blt tn the
module status is set, and the actlon selected by S17 and S19
can be lnvoked.

S15 and 516 Setting S15 (channel one) or 516 (channel two) to zero
enables full duplex mode. Setttng S15 or 516 to one enables
hdf duplex mode.

sl7 Specification S17 selects the action talcen by the INIPffi2

module when one or both sertal channels are unusable. Spec-
ificatlon Sf 7 determtnes the role of serlal port two and sets
the necessary condittons for communlcatlon equlpment fall-
rrre. Dependtng on the settlng of S 17, elther a stngle channel
fallure or a dual channel fatlure constltutes communlcatlon
equipment failure. For example, there ls a conrmunlcatlon
equlpment fatlure when:

. S17 option is one, two or three, and both channels fall.

. S17 optton ls zero or four, and one channel falls.

|NF!-NET Block(lNlPTO2)
to PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuleExecutive
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBrsss 203 - 5
FunetionCode 2Og ffi
sl8 Speclflcatlon Sf 8 ts the percent error rate used to declde the
status of serial channels. The IMPffi2 module contlnuously
monltors the quality of the sertd llnks. Speclffcaflon Sf 8 ts
used in conjunction wtth S13 and Sf4 to determlne that a
serial channel has failed. When the percentage of messages
with errors exceeds tlrts value for a number of seconds specl-
fied by the S13 value for channel one or the Sl4 value for
ehannel two, then the channel ls consldered unusable
(failed). When a channel ls consldered unusable, a channel
failure bit is set te the module status, and dependtng on the
setttng of Sl7, the actlon selected fn Sfg may be performed.

sl9 If a communication equtpment fatlure occurs, the prtmary

module will carry out the action selected lrr S19. The module
tahes no action if the Sf g option ls zero. If S19 optton ls one,
and the (optlonal) digltal output module ls tnstalled, then dlgt-
tal output three wiil be toggled. If Sfg optlon ts two, and a
backup module is available, then the prlmary INIPffi2 module
goes into secondary mode and the secondary module goes lrrto
primary mode. The prtmary INIPTO2 module contlnuously
attempts to establish communlcatlon on falled sertal ports.

s20 A unique equipment select output can qdst between the prt-
marJr and secondary INIPffi2 module. The equlpment select
output ls the third output of a dfgltal module (NDSOOI,
NDSOO?, NDSOOS or NDSOO4) and czrn be set to have the
default state as zero equals de-energized or one equds ener-
grzed. This enables conflguring redundant communlcatlons
equipment which witl operate with redundant INIPffi2 mod-
ules. Thus, when the primary INIPTO2 module fails and ttre
backup INIPD2 rnodule tahes over, the backup communlca-
tions equipment will also talce over, if configured.

S21 and Si22 Speclfications 52 f and 522 select the transmlsslon rate
(baud) that will be used to communlcate over the serlal llnk.
This allows t]le INIPffi2 module to interface to other commll-
nications equipment at 300, 600, 1200, 2400,49oo, 9600,
192OOor 384OObaud.

S23 and S24 Specifications S23 and Sl24 select the data bits (elght), t54le of
parity (odd or even), and the number of stop bits.

s25 The INIPffi2 module can be set up to operate tn elther data

communications equipment (DCE) mode or data termtnal
equlpment (DTE) mode. In DCE mode, the request-to-send
(RTS) line is always asserted. In DTE mode, the RTS llne ls
asserted before data ls transmltted and fnhblted after the
transmission occurs.

s26 Specification 526 specifies the loop number of the remote. A

value of zero allows the INIPffi2 module to connect wlth the
first remote that responds to the link establish message.

INF!-NETto PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuteExecutiveBlock(lNlprO2)
203-6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 2Ag

s27 Speclficatlon Sl27 spectfles ttre delay (ln seconds) of ttre llnk
fallure bad qua[ty reportlng. Thl,s occurs when there has been
a communcatlon equlpment fallure and S19 ls zero or one.
Llnk fatlure bad quallty reportJng ls cancelled lf the communl-
eatlon equlpment recovers before thls delay tlmer explres.

S28through S34 Unused.

APPLICATIOA'S

SerialData ChannelOperation

Fnnction code 2Og ls the executlve block that contalns the

spectfications for sertal data channel operatlon. The serlal
data channels can operate tre elther hdf duplex or full duplex
mode. The RS-232-C sertd ports €rre hdfddually conflgurable.

Halt Duplex Operation

Half duplex ts the operatlon of a communlcatlon clrcult tn

which each end alternates as sender and recelver. At any
tnstant, electrlcal lnformatlon flows ln only one dlrecttolt. The
directton of transmlsslon (1.e., local to remote or remote to
locd) alternates on the serlal llnk. Ttrerefore, the modem ear-
rier and the transcelver transmltter seetlon need to be
enabled before data can be transmltted. Addltlonally, the
transmltter needs to be dtsabled prlor to shuttlng down the
modem carrler after the data transmlsslon. Ftnally, the prl-
mary INIPTO2 module may need to surltch the arrtenna to the
active transceiver. The INIPTO2 INF'I-NET to Plant l,oop
Transfer Module requlres a dlgftat output module, cabltng
and a terminatlon untt to switch e:rternd equlpment ln the
half duplex rnode. Ttre executlve block provldes speclflcatlons
to control external communlcation equlpment.

Figure 203-1 shows the ttmlng of external equlpment enable

signals for half duplex operatlolt.

NOTES:
1. The digitaloutputmodule,cablingand terminationunit are
optionalpartsof the !NF!-NETto PlantLoopremoteinterface.The
interfacerequirestheseoptionalpartsfor operationin half duplex
modewhenswitchingexternalequipmentis requiredand in appli-
cations using redundant external communicationequipment
(Fig.203-1).

2. In Figure203-1, the 51 delayperiodequals57 for port 1 andS9

for port2. DelayperiodS2 equalsS8 for port 1 and S10for port2.

3. Referto Figure203-1. To assurepropertiming,functioncode

203 specificationsrelatedto serialchanneloperation(S7 through
S17and 519 throughS24)mustbe setthe samein bothlocaland
rernotelNlPTO2modules.

|NF!-NETto PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPTO2)
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 209-7
FunctionGode 203

Table 203-1 lists the posslble specification settJngs for ttre E>(EC
INIPTO2 block for the conffguration shown Ir Figure 203-2. Flg-
ure 203-2 tllustrates redr:ndarrt INIPT02 modules wtth control
I
of external equlpment fn half duploc operatlon.

TIMINGAT LOCAL INIPTOz

sl i TRANSMTT S2 s2
DEI.AY i MESSAGE DELAY DELAY
i TxTxTxTxTxTx fufi)fixtu(tufi(
RTSASSERTED(DTEMODE) RTS INHIBfTED(DTEIIODE)
SET DO4 RESETDO4

: MODEMCARRIERENABLED

TIMINGAT REMOTEINIPTO2
RECEIVE sz s1 i rMNsMlr i s2
MESSAGE li
DELAYI:DEI-AY i MESSAGE i DEIAY
RxRxRxRxRxRx TxTxTxTxTxTx
TIME .>
: RTS INHIilTED (DTEt ODE)
RESETDOr i
. :
: TRANSMITTER
ENABLED :

LMODEM CARRIERENABLED :

TP80523A

Ftgwe 203-1. TtmW DiagramoJEnnble Srgnafs IrLHa.lfDuplexMode

Table 203-1. Specification Setfirgrs3brlNEt-llET to PlortlapTransJer Modtie

Exeattiue Block tn Ftgtre 203-2 Co4ftguralton
Spec Value Descrlptlon
S1 0 Usedefaultvalue.Notconfiguration
dependentin this exarnple.
S2 0
S3 1
S4 0
S5 2 Exceptionreportingrate.The databaseis scannedfor exceptionsreportedacrossthe seriallink orthe
|NF|-NETloopeveryhalfsecond.
S6 1 Remote time synch accepted.
S7 10 Port 1 transmission startdelayafterthe transmitleris tumedon (msec).Valuevariesaccordingto tho
transmitterused.
S8 10 Port 1 transmittertum ofl delayafterthe transmissionis sent (msec).Valuevariesaccordingto the
transmitterused.
S9 0 Poil 2 is not used in this example.
s10 0
s 1 1 200 Port1 maximumtransmissionduration(msec).200 msecsis a compromis€b€tweenmaximum
throughput(highvalue)and minimumresponsetime (lowvalue).
s l 2 200 Port2 is not usedin thisexample.
s 1 3 60 Port 1 communicationstatuswatchdogtimer (secs).60 secondsis a compromisebetweEnrapid
failoverto the backupmodule,and protectionagainstmomentaryintarruptionsleadingto failover.

INFI-NETto PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPT02)
203-8 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode203

Tahle 203-1. Spectficalton SettingsJor INEI-NET to Plnrt Lnp TransJer Modtile

Execrftiue Block in Figure 203-2 Configuration (conttrued)
Spec Value Descrlptlon
sl4 60 Port2 is not usedin this example.
sl5 1 Port1 is setto halfduplexmode.
sl6 0 Port2 is not usedin this example.
sl7 0 Port 2 is not used In thls example.SettingSl7 to 0 insuresthat$e unusedpott 2 ls not |€pottedas
tailed by block ouFut 2 (executiveblock ouFut lor pot 2 status).
sl8 10 P€rcentenor rate usedto calculatssEdalchannelstatristor the channel1 exEcutiveblock digitalout-
put. SpecilicationS18 is usedin conjunctionwith S13 to set the serial channel I status blt in the mod-
ule status.lt ls alsousedIn conjunctionwith S13and Sl7 to determineif a communication squlpmont
failurEhasocc-tlrred. Communication equipmenttailuremay teadto the actlonselectedin S19.
sl9 2 Actionon communicationequipmentfailurc. Action2 speciliesthat the pdmaryand secondarylNlPTO2
modulesswapstateswhena communication failureoocurs.In this example,this actionbringsthe sec-
ondarylNlPT02modulesto primary.The newprimarylNlPTo2moduleusesthe secondarytranscetuer.
The secondarytransceiverconnectsto the antennaif the equipmentsel€ctouput (S20)is set differ-
entlyon the 2 lNlPTO2modules.
s20 0 Equiprnent selectionoutput(DOg)initialstateis de-energized.
s21 6 Port 1 baudrate is 1200.Mustmatchmodembaudrate.
s22 0 Port2 not usedin this example.
s23 2 Port t datacharactgristi6 (8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd padty). Must matchmodemcapabilities.
s24 0 Port2 not usedin this example.
s25 0 DCE communications.
s26 0 Connect to first remote responding.
s27 0 Usedetault.Notconfiguration dependentin thisexample.No delaybetweenlinkfailureandbadquality
repoiing or use the value.
default

SECONDARY

Ftgure 203-2. Redwdont INIPTO2Mod;nlr;sutlfh CalntlrotoJ E:dernal fiuipment

in HaIJ Dttplu Operation

Transfer
to PlantLoopRemote
|NF|-NET Block(lNlPTO2)
ModuleExecutive
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1ee5 203 - I
FunctionCode 203

Full Duplex Operation

Full duplex ls the operatlon of a communlcatlon elrcutt ln

which each end of the serlal llnk can stmultaneously send
and recelve. There ls no need to dternate the dlrectton of
transrnission as ln the half duplex mode.

Figure 203-3 illustrates the INIPTO2 module uslng dual chan-

nel, full duplex operatlon. Table z03-zltsts posstble specffIca-
tion settings for the INFI-NET to Plant loop transfer module
executive block for thls conflguratlon.

F'tgure 203-3. INIPTO2Mdtie Dv.tLChannelin

Ft;dIDrrylex Operalton

Toble 203-2. Specification *ttings Jor INEI-NE? to Plant Loop TransJer Modtic
Exeatttue Blrck in Ftgure 203-3 hrfigwafion
Spec Value Descrlptlon
S1 0 Use default. Not configurationdependentin this example.
S2 0
S3 1
S4 0
S5 2 Exceptionreportingrate.The databaseis scannedfor exceptionsreponedacrossthe serial link or
the |NF!-NETloopeveryhalfsecond.
S6 1 Remotetimesynchaccepted.
S7 0 Not used in full duplex mode.
S8 0
S9 0
s10 0
s11 200

lNFI-NETlo PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPTO2)
2 0 3- 1 0 15 FEB1995 t-Eg6-2008
 Function Code203

Table 203-2. Spe{lfrcofron *tfrttgs Jor INR[-NE? to Plont Lmp Tlansfer Mdtie
Exeattfise Block n F'lgure 203-3 Confrgrur:o;tTon(confiued)
Spec Value Descrlptlon
sl2 200 Notusedin full duplexmode.
sl3 60 Port I communicationstatuswatchdogtimer (secs).60 secondsis a compromisebetweenrapid
repofiingof channelfailure,and filtedngout momentarycommunlcation problems.
sl4 60 Pod 2 communicationstatuswatchdogtimer (secs).60 secondsis a compromisebetweenrapid
reponingof channelfailure,and filtedngout momentarycommunication problems.
sls 0 Port1 is set to full duplexmode.
sl6 0 Port2 is set to full duplexmode.
sl7 3 Poft 2 modeis set to 3 which indicatesthat both pons I and 2 are usedfor datracommunications
and thatfailureof a singlechanneldoesnot causethe communication failureadlon (St9).
sl8 10 Percentenor rate usedto calculatgserial channelstatuslot lhe execstivebloc* digltal ouputs.
Specifrcation518 is usedin conjunctionwith S13,S14and S17to determineif a communicatlon
equipmentfailurehas occun€d.Communicatonequipmentfailure may l€ad to the ac-tionselected
in S19.
s19 0 Actionon communicationequipmentfailure.Ac-tionspecifiesthat no backupmoduleor equipment
existrson communicationfailure.The moduleattemptsto establishcommunication.
s20 0 Equiprnent selectionoutput(DO3)initialstateis de-energized.
s21 7 Port1 baudrate(19200).Mustmatchmodembaudrate.
s22 7 Port2 baudrate(19200).Mustmatchmodembaudrate.
s23 0 Pon I data characterlstics(8 data bits, I stop bit, no padty). Must matchmodemcapabilltes.
s24 0 Port 2 data characteristics(8 data bits, I stop bit, no padty). Must matchmodemcapabilities.
s25 0 DCEcommunications.
s26 0 dependentin this example.
Usedefault.Not configuration
s27 5 Wait 5 secsafter communicationequipmentfailureto rEportbad qualityfor all rsmots points.

lNFI-NETto PlantLoopRemoteTransferModuleExecutiveBlock(lNlPT02)
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 203- 11
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode204- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlses 204 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode205- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 205 ' 1
ffi
o

t
 FunctionCode206- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1e9s 206 - 1
ffi

t
 FunctionCode2OT- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
r-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 207 - 1
ffi
I

t
 FunctionCode 2Og- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBrees 208 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode209- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 209 - 1
ffi
o

t
 FunctionCode210- Sequenceof EventsSlave

GENERALDESCRIPTION

SNR ELF The sequence of events slave functton code (SOE/S) provldes
SUR
t{/A
the ability to deflne up to 32 digital inputs and ttme stamp
SOE/S tlrose inputs tre sequence of events order wlth a resolutton of
one mtlltsecond. The df$tal inputs €rre accesstble vla consoles.
Only one SOE/S functlon code can be deflned h a module.
TWo IMDSIO? Dfgttal Slave Input Modules provlde tJre lnputs.

The SOE/S functlon code ts slmllar to the sequence of events

log (SOELOG, function code 99). Like the SOELOG block, the
SOE/S block logs data. Advantages to using the SOE/S block
over the SOELOG block are:

l. The SOE/S block does not require the sequentld events

recorder. The SOE/S block only requlres two IMDSIOZ Dt$ftal
Input Slave Modules and one master module.

2. The SOE/S block provides a mezrns to use parallel tnputs.

Functlon code 99, the SOELOG block, should be used when

more than 32 inputs are required.

NOTE:CPU utilizationis time criticalcausingan increasein CPU

overhead.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Eventsloggedflag:
Q=hO
| =lOS

N+1 B Currentvalueand qualityof input1

N+2 B Currentvalueandqualityof input2
N+3 B Currentvalueand qualityof input3
N+4 B Currentvalueandqualityof input4

Sequenceof EventsSlave
l-Eg6-200B ls FEB1995 210 - 1
FunctionCode210

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N+5 B Currentvalueand qualityof input5
N+6 B Currentvalueandqualityof.input6
N+7 B Currentvalueand qualityof input7
N+8 B Currentvalueandqualityof input8
N+9 B Currentvalueand qualityof input9
N+10 B Currentvalueandqualityof input10
N+l1 B Currentvalueand qualityof input11
N+12 B Currentvalueand qualityof input12
N+l 3 B Currentvalueandqualityof input13
N+l 4 B Currentvalueandqualityof input14
N+l 5 B Cunentvalueand qualityof input15
N+l 6 B Currentvalueandqualityof input16
N+l 7 B Currentvalueandqualityof input17
N+l 8 B Currentvalueandqualityof input18
N+l 9 B Currentvalueandqualityof input19
N+20 B Currentvalueandqualityof input20
N+21 B Currentvalueand qualityof input21
N+22 B Currentvalueandqualityof input22
N+23 B Current value and quality of input 23
N+24 B Current value and quality of input 24
N+25 B Currentvalueand qualityof input25
N+26 B Currentvalueand qualityof input26
N+27 B Currentvalueand qualityof input27
N+28 B Currentvalueandqualityof input28
N+29 B Currentvalueand qualityof input29
N+30 B Currentvalueand qualityof input30
N+31 B Cunentvalueandqualityof input31
N+32 B Curent valueandqualityof input32
N+33 B Firstl/O modulestatus:
g = good
1=bad
N+34 B SecondUOrnodulestatus:
9 = good
1=bad
N+35 R Composite
sequenceof eventsstatus:
0.0 = nOeffOf
1.0 = sequence butfer ovedlow
2.0 = time sync processed

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 0-63 First expander bus module address
S2 N 0 0-63 Secondexpanderbus moduleaddress
S3 N 4 1-32 Sequencebuffersize (kbytes)

Sequence
of EventsSlave
210-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 210

SPECI FI CATIO,^fS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 256 1 - 3500 Event buffer size (no. of events)
S5 N 180 I 1 - 32767 Age of event data in seconds before discarded from buffer
S6 N 0 I 0-63 Input1 qualifier
S7 N 0 I 0-63 Input2 qualifier
S8 N 0 I 0-63 Input3 qualifier
S9 N 0 0-63 Input4 qualifier
sl0 N 0 0-63 Input5 qualifier
s11 N 0 0-63 lnput6 qualifier
sl2 N 0 I 0-63 Input7 qualifier
sl3 N 0 I 0-63 Input8 qualifier
sl4 N 0 I 0-63 Input9 qualifier
s15 N 0 I 0-63 Input10qualifier
s16 N 0 I 0-63 Input11qualifier
sl7 N 0 0-63 Input 12 qualifier
s18 N 0 0-63 Input13qualifier
sl9 N 0 0-63 Input14qualifier
s20 N 0 I 0-63 lnput 15 qualifier
s21 N 0 I 0-63 lnput16qualifier
s22 N 0 I 0-63 lnput17qualifier
s23 N 0 I 0-63 Input 18 qualifier
s24 N 0 I 0-63 lnput19qualifier
s25 N 0 I 0-63 Input20 qualifier
s26 N 0 I 0-63 Input21 qualifier
s27 N 0 I 0-63 lnput22 qualifier
s28 N 0 I 0-63 Input23 qualifier
s29 N 0 0-63 fnput24 qualifier
s30 N 0 0-63 Input25 qualifier
s31 N 0 0-63 Input26 qualifier
s32 N 0 I 0-63 lnput27 qualifier
s33 N 0 0-63 lnput28 qualifier
s34 N 0 0-63 Input29 qualifier
s35 N 0 0-63 Input30 qualifier
s36 N 0 I 0-63 Input31 qualifier
s37 N 0 I 0-63 Input32 qualifier
s38 N 4 I 2-16 Debounce time (msecs)
s39 N 5 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof snapshotrequest
s40 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof summaryrequest
s41 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Spare boolean input
s42 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
s43 N 0 Full Spareparameter

Sequenceof EventsSlave
r-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 2 1 0- 3
FunctionCode 210

EXPLANATION

Outputs
t
N Output N shows the curent state of tlle event buffer. A one
indicates event data ls present tn the event buffer. A zero tndf-
cates that all event data is out of the event buffer.

N+1 through N+32 Outputs N+I through N+32 show the current value and qual-
ity of the digital inputs on the sequence of events module. A
bad quality signal occurs when the erqpander bus module
does not respond.

Inputs one through 16 are assoctated with the l/O module

specified by Sl and tnputs 17 through 32 are associated with
the l/O module specified by 52.

The input qualifier (SO through S37) deflnes the alarm state
for each block output for each associated lnput.

N+33 and N+34 The I/O module status outputs are logic O when ttre I/O mod-
ules are responding. Ttle output ts a logtc I when ttre module ls
not responding. Output N+33 coresponds to the module spee-
lfied by S1 and output N+34 conesponds to the module speci-
fied by 52.

O.O= r1Oerror
1.O - sequence buffer overflow
2.O = time sync processed

N+35 Output N+35 provides the SOE/S block's internal status bits.
The bits combine to an integer value, then convert to a real
number.

Specifications

s1 Specification S f is the expander bus module address of the

digital input module associated with the inputs one through
16 (SO through 52 1). Valid addresses €rre zero ttrrough 63.

S2 Specification 52 is tJle expander bus module address of the

digital input module associated with the inputs 17 through
32 (S.22 through S37). Valid addresses are zero through 63. If
the second module is not used, 52 must be set the sarne as
sl.
S3 Specification Sg is the sequence buffer slr;e tn one kilobyte
increments. The buffer saves the one mtlltsecond tnput data
for processing by the function code. The function eode con-
verts the input data to event data when it runs in its config-
ured segment. Therefore, the minimum size of this buffer

Sequenceof EventsSlave
210-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 21A

dtrectly relates to the ma:dmum scan pertod for the segment.

Cdculate the mlntmum buffer slze as follows:

in secsx 1@0x 81+ 10241

Size= l(period
1024

NOTE:The realvaluecan be truncatedto givethe integervalue.

s4 Spectflcatlon 54 ls the number of events that wtll flt ln the

buffer. Calculate the event buffer slze as follows:

Size= Bx (S3+ 1)

s5 Speclficatlon 55 ls the mardmum age ln seconds of the event

data tn the buffer. After data has been tn the buffer this
length of time, it is removed from the event buffer.

Speclflcatlons 54 and 55 are closely related to the console

conflguration. Ttrese parameters control the amount of data
that the console can recelve when a trlp occurs. Once the
ma:d,mum age (S5) ls reached, the data ts erased. Therefore,
the console must be configured to provide a data transfer rate
that is fast enough to remove the event data from the buffer
before the ma:dmum age (S5) ls reached.

56 through S37 Speciflcations 56 through S37 descrlbe the lnput point. The
quality state of the lnput ls bad when the exp€utder bus mod-
ule ls not respondlng.

Value Descrlptlon
0 Undefinedpoint
1 Normallyopen(NO)point,off-scan
2 Normallyclosed(NC)point,off-scan
3 NO point,on-scan
4 NC point,on-scan
NOTE: NO point alarm logic point
level= logic0.

s38 Specification S38 is the tlme period that an input must

remain in a steady state before it cEIn be considered a valid
state change, specilled in milliseconds. The configured
debounce time qualifies all 32 inputs.

s39 Specification S39 is the snapshot time. A constant real input

value inhibits thJs functton. When the lnteger portion of the
real lnput chang€s, a snapshot of the defined on-scan points
ls generated. The current value and alarm state reports for
each potnt that ls on-scan.

h.cflcal lnputs to S39 may be the system tlme or a pushbutton.

Sequenceof EventsSlave
l-E96-2008 is FEBrees 210 - 5
Function Code 210

s40 Specificatlon S40 ls the block address of the summary

request. The transltion of tlre block tnput from logle O to
logic I initlates a summary of the 32 lnputs. All polnts tn
alarm or off-scan are reported.

S41, S42 and S43 Spare.

Sequenceof Events Slave

2 1 0- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode211- DataAcquisitionDigital

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The data acquisltlon dfgttal (DADIG) functlon code and the

DADIG I/L (functton code 2L2l pafr are used for boolean data
acquisltlon functlons. The DADIG and DADIG I/L functlon
codes complement the data acqulsltion analog (DAAI$G) and
the data acqutsitton analog UL (DAAIIG I/L) functton eodes
by provtdlng the functton of the DAAM block for boolean stg-
nals. The DADIG functton code palr provldes a rne€rns to
accompltsh a number of unlque data acqulsltlons, alarm
detectlons and management functlons related to boolean loglc
stgnals lmplemented tn INFI-NEI systems.

NOTE:Functioncode211operatesonlyin |NF|-NETsystems.

The DADIG functlon codes support a range of features on the

operator lnterface statlon (OIS) console. Commands are
accepted from consoles and alarm lnformation is supplied to
consoles through exceptlon reports. The DADIG I/L functlon
code provtdes a means of fmportlng data from the DADIG
block ln INFI-NET systems,

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

N B Reportedlogicstate
N+1 R Extendedstratus

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Defaultl Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 5 I 0 - 99gg Blockaddressof inputselect
s22 N 0 I 0 - g99g Blockaddressof permitinputselect
S3 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof primaryinput

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 211-1
FunctionCode 211

SPEClFl CATI OruS@ontinued)

Spec Tune Defaultl Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof altemateinput
S5 N 0 B 0or1 Custominsertedvalue
s62 Y 0.000 R Full Input conditioning mode control
S7 Y 0.000 R Fu time reference(secs)
Inputconditioning
S8 Y 0.000 R Fu Input conditioning digital filter count reference
s92 Y 0.000 R Fu Alarmmodecontrol
sl0 Y 0.000 R FU Alarmtime reference(secs)
s11 Y 0.000 R Fu Alarmdigitralfiltertransitioncountreference
s12 Y 0.000 R Fu Retumalarm/de-alarm time periodreference(secs)
s13 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressol alarmsuppressenable
sl42 N 5 0 - 9998 Block address of quality override input
s15 N 0 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof alarmstatelatchenable
s16 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof exceptionrepoil request
s17 N 0 0-255 Typecode
s18 Y 0.000 R Full Spare
s19 N 0 I 0 - 9998 Spare block input
s20 Y 0 l Full Spare
NOTES:
1. Valuesreportedfor specifications
that havebeenadaptedwill be invalid.
2. The addressedblock'soutputvalueis convertedto a hexadecimal value.

EXPLANAT'ON

The DADIG block has two block outputs. The first output ls
the reported logic state and propagates one of three posslble
input signds. A tunable specllicailon selects whlch tnput ls
routed to the output and processed for darm detectlon. The
second output ls the extended status (internal qua[ty, status,
state and mode) of the functlon code. The DADIG block allows
thls quallty state to be overrldden through a block lnput.

The DADIG bloek supports exeeptlon reporttng. Exceptlon

reports provide consoles wtth alarm and functlon eode status
information through exception reports. Additional capabllittes
such as suppression and forced requests of exceptlon reports
are available through block ilrputs and tunable speclflcattons.

An option allows the input to be condlttoned uslng one of four

input conditioning modes. This optlon provtdes the abtllty to
select the conditioned input or the unconditioned tnput to be
the input for the alarm.

The DADIG block supports a number of alarm detection

modes. These alarm detection modes allow the selectlon of
various parameters to determine €rn alarm output. The tnput
state or a transition to be interpreted as Ern alarm can be
specified. Several tirning parameters, such as the length of
time the input has to remain at the alarm state before the

DataAcquisitionDigital
211- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 211

block generates an alarm, flxed duratlon of the alarm, ma:d-

mum duratlon of the alarm and de-alarm /return alarm tlme
are programmable. The DADIG also provtdes dlgttal alarm fll-
tering capabillttes and tl:e abtllty to suppress alarms.

The DADIG block provldes a latch optlon. Changes to the

reported logic state and extended status can be latched and
held based on the occurrence of an alarm. If ttme-stamptng ts
enabled, the tlme value wlll also be latched when the outputs
are latched.

The DADIG functlon code accepts commands from a console

as well as from lnput slgnals. Console comrnands are
accepted for [rput selectlon, enabllng and disabling exeeptlon
reportlng, forclng exceptton reports, settlng the extended sta-
tus alarm latch, and for enabllrg and suppresslng alarms.

The DADIG functlon code retalns tnformatlon ln I{\IRAIVI after

a reset, mode change or power lnternrptlon such as:

. Selected lnput.
o Exceptlon report enable and dtsable state.
o Alarm suppresslon lndlcattolt.

211-1 shows how the functions execute within the

block. The process ls executed by the function block
order:

1. Get the control information from the block input or con-

sole command.

2. Retrleve the selected lnput vahre.

3. Execute the lnput condlttonlng, if enabled.

4. Exeeute the alarm processlng ustng the raw input or the

condltloned tnput, lf enabled.

5. Process return darm or process de-alarm, lf enabled.

6. Suppress alarms, lf alarm suppresslon ls enabled.

7. Process quallty overrlde states.

8. Execute extended status alarm latch processlng, if

enabled.

9. Update the block output value and status.

10. Execute exceptton report processing, lf enabled.

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-Eg6-2008 15FEB19ss 211 - 3
FunctionCode 211

PERMISSIVE

TIME

RSDE TIME

OVERRIDE

REOUEST

TP2€r04,gA

Figure 271-7. Functiorts Exeatted usithin the DADIG Blrck

Specifications

S1 Specification S I is the block address of the tnput select con-

trol. The lnput select control determlnes whtch of the three
posstble inputs to the DADIG block wlll be output. The last
valid selectlon ls saved tn IS9RAIVIand ls stored on a reset or
mode change. Atl change requests (loglc and console) are
locked out durtng module start-up. Flgure 2LL-2 shows the
input selection logic.

PR|URNY

ALTERNATE ,^.

GUSTOM ^

TP220504

F-Igure 2 7 7-2. Input &lection Wic

Data AcquisitionDigital
211-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 211

Care should be exerclsed to properly control the permtt lnput

select <S2> to enable or disable changes. The tnput select
parameter c€rn be altered by elther module conflgured logtc
(output of addressed block) or command messages from a
console or computer. The lnput select tracks the last valld
selectlon value from etther source when <S2> ls true. The
value of <S1> ls converted to a hexadeclmal number and the
btts are mapped as shown ln Table 2l l-1.

Table 277-7. SI Status BitMap

Blnary
Blt Attrlbute
WelghtedValue
0-1 Referto 0 0 Selectprimaryinputvalue<S3>
Table 1 1 Selectprimaryinputvalue<S3>
211-2
2 2 SelectcustominsertedinputvalueS5
1+2 3 Select altemate input value <S4>
2 4 Spare
3 I Spare
4 16 Spare
5 32 Spare
6 &1 Spare
7 128 Exceptionreportingmode:
0 = reportmode
I = DOreportmode
8 - 15 Spare

To program <St>, add the values llsted tn the blnary weighted

value column of Table 21 1- I to tJre resultlng sum and enter
thls value for <Sl>. For example, lf the custom lnserted input
is selected and the block is ire no report mode, 51 would be set
to 2+128 or 130.

The bit column is separated by functlon and some functions

use multiple blts. Only one attrtbute optlon c€rn be selected
for that function. For example, only one attribute c€rn be
selected for bits zero and one (only one block lnput can be
selected). Table 2LI-2 llsts the valtd combtnattons for <Sl>.

Table 27 7-2. Valid Combinafwns;lor SI

BinaryWelghted
Result
Value
0or1 Primary input selected, on report mode (default)
2 Custom inserted state selected, on report mode
3 Alternateinputselected,on reportmode
4-127 Not valid
128, 129 Primaryinputselected,no reportmode
130 Custominsertedstateselected,no reportmode
131 Altemateinputselected,no reportmode
>132 Not valid

DataAcquisition
Digital
l-E96-2008 rs FEBlees 211 - 5
FunctionCode 211

When the MFP module ls ln execute mode and a transltlon

talres place on tJ:e tnput select (blts zero and one), the new
lnput value and status are selected. The three lnput states
c€rn also be seleeted from the console. A new transttton on the
o
lnput control cancels any pendlng console request. Input
selects [bits zero and one) and console requests are lgnored
during module start-up.

The DADIG block mode (selected lnput, r1o report state, and
alarm suppression indlcatlon state) ls defined durtng module
start-up based on the saved mode. The saved mode ts tnlttal-
wed to primary input selected, report mode, alarm suppres-
sion false, when the block is ADDed. After start-up (the
module ts put ln exeeute mode), the mode updates when <Sl>
changes or a console command ls recelved. However, changes
to <S1> and console commands will be ignored during module
start-up. This prevents a transition of the block modes when
start-up is complete. Therefore, any changes to <Sl> durtng
configuration mode will have no effect on the block modes.

NOTE:Thestateof <S1>maynotagreewiththe mode.Forexdfn-

ple, when changesare made in configuremode,<S1> will not
agree with the block's mode in executemode. Also, a console
commandcan changethe block'smode. Thus, <S1> may not
agreewiththe block'smode.

The report /no report bft (bit seven) ls reported once when tt ls
set throug[r an exceptlon report. It t]ren dtsables e(ceptlon
report updates after betng sent. The console can also request a
point to be in report or no report mode. A force exceptlon report
update command can be issued by the console to cause a potnt
to be updated even when tt ls set for no report. ThIs feature
allows the point value to be updated without puttlng it back tn
report mode. The block outputs (N and N+f) for a block tn no
report continue to update. The current report/no report state of
the input is saved in I\MRAIVIas part of the blocks mode and is
stored on a reset or mode change. All report /no report requests
(logic and console) are locked out during module start-up.

S2 Specification 52 ts the block address of the permlt tnput select.

When the output of the block addressed by thfs spectfication ls
a logic 1, ehange of input selection from either conflgured mod-
ule logic to <S1> bits zero and one or the console commands
will change the selected input source. When <S2> equals zero,
requests for input select mode changes from any source are
ignored (locked out). Ttle lock prevents changes in the selected
input after start-up testlng when uslng the DADIG block for a
control function. Table 2LL-3 shows the permit lnput blt map.

Table 27 7-3. Permit Inptft Bit Map

<s2> Functlon
0 Disable/lock
inputselection
1 Allowinputto be selectedfromconsoleor <S1>

DataAcquisition
Digital
211 - 6 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 211

s3 Spectflcatton S3 ts the bloclc address of the prfmary tnput to be

monltored by the DADIG bloelc. The reported loglc level (M wtU
equal thts level when the tnput select control ls tn select pri-
mary tnput mode (<S1> eguals ?rro or 128) and a boolean argu-
ment (rnro or one) ls present at the block addressed by <S3>.

s4 Speclflcatlon 54 ts the block address of the alternate lnput to

be monltored by the DADIG block. The reported loglc level tI{)
wlll equd thts level when the tnput select control ls ilr a select
alternate lnput mode (<S1> equals three or 131) and a bool-
ean argument (zero or one) ts present at the block addressed
by thls speclflcatlorl.

S5 Speciflcatlon 55 is the custom tnserted tnput. The reported

logic level 0q \ililI equal thls level when the lnput select colt-
trol ls tn a select custom lnput mode (<S1> equals two or f 30)
arrd a boolean argument (zero or one) has been input to thls
speclftcatlon.

S6 Speciflcatlon 56 ls tJre input condttfonhg mode control vahre.

This spectflcatlon defines the tSrpe of condttiontng performed
on the selected tnput. ThJs real lrrput value is converted lnto a
hexadecimal number and the btts are mapped as shown ln
Table 2Ll-4. Flgure 21 l-3 shows the tnput condttiontng logic.

Tahle 27 7-4. Selected Inprrt Bit Map

Blnary Welghted Attrlbute
Bit
Value
0 1 lnputreferencestiate.Ths specifiedinputconditioningcriteriawill be appliedto the input
whenthe selectedinputentersthe statedefinedby bit 0.
1-3 2 Pulsedmode;generatean ouput pulseof the statedefinedby bit 0 for the time
periodspecifiedby 57 whenselectedinputgoesintothe statedefinedby bit 0.
4 Timedout mode;generatean outputpulseof the statedefinedby bit 0 if the
selectedinputgoesintothe statedefinedby bit 0 for a time periodgreaterthanor
equalto the timedefinedby S7.
6 Timingrnode;generatean outputpulseof the statedefinedby bit zerofor maxi-
mumtimeperioddefinedby 57 if the selectedinputgoes intothe statedefinedby
bit 0.
I Inputdigitalfilter;generateandmaintaina pulseof the statedefinedby bit 0 if the
selectedinputtransitionsintoand out of the statedefinedby bit 0 a numberof
timesgreaterthanor equalto SBovera timeperiodlessthanor equalto the value
definedby 57.
4 - 15 Spare.

To program thts spectflcatlon, the values listed tn the bfnary

welghted value column of the destred functlons are added and
the resultlng sum ls the value to be entered. For exarnPle, lf
the lnput reference state ls a one and the deslred mode ls the
ttmlng mode, the vdue entered for thts speclficatlon would be
6+1 ot 7.

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-E96-2008 rs FEB199s 211 - T
Function Code 211

TUO51A

Figure 27 7-3. Inptft Condilloning Lqtc

The bit column is separated by function and some functions

use multiple blts. Only one attrlbute optlon can be selected
for those functlons. For example, only one attrlbute can be
selected for bits one through three. Only one lnput condltlon-
ing mode can be selected. Table 21 1-5 ltsts the valid combina-
tions for 56.

Table 27 7-5. Bits O artd 1

Valid Combinations Jor So
Value Result
0 Input conditioningdisabled (default)
1 Not valid
2 Pulse mode, logic 0 reference
3 Pulsemode,logic1 reference
4 Timedout mode,logic0 reference
5 Timed out mode, logic 1 reference
6 Timingmode,logic0 reference
7 Timingmode,logic1 reference
I Digitalfiltermode,logic0 reference
9 Digital filter mode, logic 1 reference
>10 Not valid

Prilse Dlode
In pulse mode, €rrr.output pulse of the input reference state
(56, bit zerol occurs for a specified amount of time (SZ1when

DataAcquisition
Digital
211-8 15 FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Function Code 211

the selected input matches the lnput reference state (56, btt
zero| After the ttme speclfled by S7, the output pulse ls
negated for a mlnlmum of one scan cycle before the next
pulse wtll be generated. The output pulse duratlon 57 and the
input reference state (56, blt znro) are tunable values. Flgure
2LI-4 shows the output and the tnput when operattng ln
pulse mode.

-- REFERENCE
STATE

Figwe 2 7 7-4. Pu/.seMde Inptrt and, Output

In pulse mode, the output pulse duration 57 ls tndependent

of how long the input stays tn the reference state. Each pulse
ls also negated for a minimum of one sc€rn cycle (ttme fJ
before being asserted. The tnput ls not sampled agatn untll
after S7 * f" (pulse two ls tgnored). At the end of thts tlme
period, the input ls sampled agatn and another pulse gener-
ated when the treput matches the tnput reference state. Pulse
tlrree generates a pulse and pulse four generates multlple
output pulses.

TimedOutMode
In the ttmed out mode, an output pulse of the lnput reference
state (56, btt zerol occurs when the selected lnput matches
the input reference state (56, blt zero) for a spectfied amount
of time speclfied by 57. The pulse remalns asserted until the
input goes out of the input reference state (56, bit zero). The
input reference state (56, bft zero) and reference match tlme
57 are tunable values. Figure 21 1-5 shows the input and the
output when operatlng lm ttmed out mode.

When the reference match tlme 57 is longer than the trput

pulse duration (tlme fJ, the output wltl not be asserted. Fig-
ure 2LL-6 shows the tnput and the unasserted output.

Timing Mode
In the Uming mode, an output pulse of lnput referenee state
(56, bit zerol occurs for a specilied maxlmum period of time
S7 when the selected input matches the tnput reference state
(56, blt zerol. The lnput reference state and ma:dmum pulse

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-Eg6-2008 1sFEBrees 211 - 9
FunctionGode211

_ REFERENCE

INPUT

Figure 2 7 7-5. Ttmed Ofi Mde, IrtprrtPrdse

Greater than ReJererrceMatchTUne

-REFERENCE

INPUT

OUTPUT
s7> ta

Figwe 2 7 7-6. Tlmed Out Mde, htgtut P'lJse

Irss thnn ReJerenceMatcttTlrne

duration are tunable vah:,es. If the maximum pulse duratlon

is defined as longer than the input pulse exists (ttme fJ, the
output pulse rernains untll the input ls recogntzed to no
longer match the input reference state (output tracks the
input). Figure 2Il-7 shows the output tracking tlre lnput.

If the input pulse duration is longer than the specified period

of time 57, the output negates after the specified time period.
Figure 21 f -8 shows the negated output.

Digital Filter Dlode

In the digital filter mode, ttre output pulse ls elther held or
tracks the input. Arr, output pulse ls generated and held lf the
selected lnput goes tnto and out of tl:e lnput reference state
(56, bit zerol a speclfled number of times SB wtthin a given
tirne period 57. The filtered pulse ls held for the next tlme

DataAcquisitionDigital
2 1 1- 1 0 1s FEB1995 I-E96-200B
 Function Code 211

INPUT

Figure 27I-7. IrWtftP.;Jse lrss ttlnrl

Maximumhise Widfh

Flgure 277-8. hWfiRrlse Greater thart

Maximumhtlse Width

period as long as the number of input pulses ls greater than

or equal to the count S8 durlng the ttme perlod.

If the selected lnput does not go tnto and out of the tnput ref-
erence state the speclfled number of tlmes over the tlme
period, the output pulse ls released and the output tracks the
lrrput. The lnput reference state (S6, blt zerol, the number of
tnput transltions or dlgltal filter transltion count reference
S8, and the fllter pertod SZ €rre tunable vdtres. Flgure 21 f -9
illustrates the digltal filter mode.

In Figure 2lL-9, tJ:e input initially enters the input referenee

state (56, bit zerol at t@ This marks the start of the filter
period. At time tr, S8 transitlons have occurTed which cause
the output pulse to be generated and held. At time tr, the filter
period 57 has ended and 58 or greater transltlons have not
occurred so the output ts released to traek tJ:e lnput.

DataAcquisitionDigital
r-E96-2008 1sFEBlees 211 - 11
FunctionCode 211

*REFERENCE
STATE

INPUT

t1 L2

I I .- REFERENCE
STATE

OUTPUT
|' - HSLD ;--rnACK -

Figure 27 7-9. DigUaI Filter Mde Input and At&ut

The lnput conditioning mode is tunable and can be changed

during operaUon. If the mode ls changed when the selected
input is at the reference state (REF), an edge (transition into
REF state) will be detected. Ttre result at tJle output when the
mode is changed ls dependent upon whlch mode ls curently
enabled and whtch mode is betng transitloned. Changlng
from pulse mode to timtng mode or from flming mode to pulse
mode, a pulse of up to turlce the specllled time period 57 may
occur.

Sz Speciflcation 57 ls the input condittonlng tlme reference. Thls

deflnes the tlme parameter, ln seconds, used by the input
condittoning mode selected by 56. The parameter thls value
delines is dependent on the mode of operatlon. Table 2ll-6
shows whtch time parameter is assoclated wlth each mode.

Table 277-6. Mode Time Parameters

Mode Tlme Parameter
Pulse mode Outputpulseduration
Timedout rnode Inputreferencematchtime
Timing mode Maximurn outputpulseduration
Filtermode Filterperiod

S8 Speeilication 58 is the lnput conditionlng dlgital filter count

reference. This defines the number of lnput transitions lnto
the specified reference state (56, bit zero) that are required
over the specified time period SZ ln order to force and hold the
output at the specified state (56, blt zero).

s9 Specification 59 is the alarm mode control vahre. Thls defines

the type of alarrn processlng to be accompltshed by the
DADIG. This real input value is converted to a hexadecimal
nurnber and the bits are mapped as shown in Table 2Ll-7.
Figure 21 l- 1O shows the alarm processing logic.

DataAcquisition
Digital
211 - 12 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode211

Table 2 7 7-7 . Alrrrm Mode Controt Btt Map

Blnary
BIt Welghted Attrlbute
Value
0 1 Alarm rEferencestab. Whenan alarm ls enabled,th€ s€l€ct alerm crileda wlll be appliedto the
input when th6 sel€ctedInputenbrs the state definEdby this bit.
0 = alarm rafergnceis logic 0
1 = alarm referenceis logic 1
1 2 lnput referenceselect.Whenalarm ls enabled,this lnput selectswhetheralarm wlll usEthe raw
selectedinput signalas a rEferenceor the conditionedselectedinput.
Clearthis bit for the unconditioned,raw input:
0 = use unconditioned, raw input
Set this bit to use conditionedInput
2 = uS6conditionedinput
2-4 4 4 Standarddigitatalarmmode;alarmwhenselectedinputgoesinto alarmstate(referto bit
o)
I I Deadbandingalarm mode; alarm for maximum time period defined by S10 whenever
selected input goes into alarm state (refer to bit 0)
4+8 1 2 Timedout atarmmode;atarmif selectedinputgoes into alarmstate(referto bit 0) for
greaterthanor equalto the timeperioddefinedry 910
16 16 Alarm digital filter; generate and hold an alarm if the selected input transitions into and out
of the alarm state (refer to bit 0) greater than or equal to the number of times defined by
S11 over a tirne period less than or equal to the value defined by 510
5 32 Enablealarmsuppression when<S13>= 1. Thls optionis validonlywhonan alarmis enablsd
(S9blts2 - 4 = 4,8, 12,or 16)
6 et Enablede-alarmafter <S12>time-out.This optionis rralidonly when an alarmis enabled(Sg bits
2-4=4,8,12,or16)
7 128 Enableretum alarm after <S12>time-out This optionis valid only wtten an alarm is enabled(S9
bits2 - 4 = 4, 8, 12, or 16)
I 256 Sstectmodeof the alarmsuppressionIndicationIn extEndedstratusblockoutputN+l (rcferto ES
bit 12)
O= alarmsuppressionindicationset whenalarmsare selectedthrough<S9>and enabled
through<S13>or a consolecommand
1 = alarmsuppressionindicationsetwhenan alarmis beingsuppressed. Thisoptionis validonly
whenan alarmis enabled(S9,bits2 - 4 = 4,8, 12,or 16) and alarmsuppressionis selected
(through59, bit 5)
9 - 15 Spare

Bit O - Alo;rrn Reference Sto;tc

This bit defines the state of the lnput to be considered the
alarm state. When the lnput is at tl,is level and alarm is
enabled, alarm processlng actlvates.

Q = input loglc O ls alarm state

I = input logic I is darm state

Bit I - Input Reference Sto;te

An alarm can use the raw lnput for alarm processing or the
output of the lnput condlflontng stage. Ttrls blt selects whlch
stgnal ls to be used.

Q = use raw lnput

I = use condlfloned tnput

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 211- 13
FunctionCode 211

RAW INPUT

@NDITIONED
INPUT

COUNT REFERENCE
Tu2/06,2A

Figure 2 1 1- 7 O. Alnrrn Plr:rcessirq Lqic

Bits 2 through 4 - Alarm DIode

Bits two through four deflne the alarm mode that ls enabled.

Bit 5 - Alqrm Suppression Select

Thts bft selects alarm suppresslon. When alarm suppresslon
ls seleeted with thls btt and enabled through <S13> or a con-
sole command, and an alarm ls enabled, alarm lndlcattons ln
the extended status output (N+1) and exceptlon reports wtll
be suppressed (forced to zerol.

Q = do not suppress alarms

I = alarm suppresslon selected

Bit6-De-AlormE;nable
This bit enables de-alarm. When an alarm mode is enabled,
de-alarm is enabled, and an alarm condition is detected, the
alarm indication is in the extended status output (N+ 1) and
exception reports will be de-alarmed or suppressed after a
period of time specified by SI2. When the alarm tndtcation ls
suppressed due to a de-alarm conditlon, the alarm suppres-
sion indication in the extended status output and exceptlon
reports will be brre.

Q = do not de-alarm
I = de-alerm enabled

DataAcquisition
Digital
2 1 1- 1 4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-200B
 FunctionCode 211

Bit 7 - ReturnAlarmBnable
Btt seven enables the return alarm functiorl. When an alarm
ls enabled, an alarm qdsts, and return alarm ls enabl€d, the
return alarm lndlcatlon ln the extended status output (N+f)
and exceptlon report wltl change states a fixed pertod of tlme
(Sf 2) after the alarm lmdlcatlon was ftrst generated. Addltlon-
ally, as long as the alarm condltton qdsts and thls functton ls
enablcd, the return alarm lndlcatton contlnues to change to
the opposlte state every ttme pertod speclfled by S12.

Q = do not return alarm

I = return alarm enabled

Bit 8 - Alo;rrn Suppression Indication Mode

Thts btt determines the mode of the alarm suppresslon lndlca-
tion in the extended status output N+l and exceptlon reports.

Q = alarm suppresslon tndlcatlon will be tnte when alarm

suppression ls selected through 59, btt five and
enabled through <S13> or a console command

I = alarm, suppresslon tndlcation will be trre only when

an alarm ls currently betng suPpressed

indicationin the
NOTE:De-alarmalso usesthe alarmsuppression
extendedstatusoutput.

Bits 9 th;rough. 75
Reserved.

To program thts speclflcatlon, the values listed fn the blnary

wetghted value column of the deslred functlons are added and
the resulttng sum ts the value to be entered. For example, to
get tl:e deslred functlons:

alarm reference state = Q

tnput reference = raw uncondittoned input (0)
alarm mode = deadbanding mode [8)
alarm suppresslon dtsabled = Q
de-alarm enabled = 64
return alarm disabled = Q
59 = 0+0+8+0+64=72
S9 =72

The bit column ln Table 2LL-7 ts separated by functlon and

some functlons use multlple blts. Only one attrlbute option
can be selected for those functiorls. For exarnple, only one
attrtbute and one darm mode can be selected for bits two
through four.

Digitcrl Sto;te Alarrn Mode

In ttre digttal state alarm mode, an alarm state occurs when-
ever the lnput matches the alarm reference state (S9, bft
zerol. The darm condition lasts untll the input no longer

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 211 - 15
FunctionCode 211

matches the alarm reference state (S9, blt zero). In thls mode,
the alarm tracks the input as shown tn Flgure 21 1-11.

.-. REFERENCE
STATE

.- ASSERTED
STATE

Figure 211-1 1. Digital Snb Alarrn Mde lrtprtt ard. Alarrn

Deadbanding Alarmffiode
In the deadbandtng alarm mode, an al€rrm state oecurs for a
specified arnount of ttme speclfled by SfO whenever tlee
selected input goes ileto the alarm reference state (S9, bft
zero). At the end of the time spectfled by S1O, the alarm state
ls not negated until the selected tnput no longer matches the
alarm reference state (S9, blt zero). fiie alarm duratlon Sf O
and alarm reference (S9, blt zerol are tunable values.
Figure 2LL-L2 shows the alarm state and tnput urhen operat-
ing in the deadbanding alarm mode.

- REFERENCE
STATE

Figure 211'72. De@ AlnrmMde Inpfi artdAlrrrrr-

Timed Out Alormffiode

In the timed out alarm mode, an alarm state occurs when the
selected input matches the alarm reference state (S9, bft zero)
for the amount of time speclfled by SlO. The alarm remalns
asserted until the lnput goes out of the alarrn state. The
alarm referenee and reference match ttme speclfied by SIO
are tunable values. Figure 21 1-13 shows the timed out alarm
mode input and alarm.

Data AcquisitionDigital
211 - 16 lsFEBlees l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 211

If the tnput reference match tfine SIO ls longer than the alarm
eondltton tlme t", the alarm ls not asserted. Flgure 2Ll-14
shows t}ts tnput and alarm state.

Flgure 2 1 1' I 3. Tlmed Out Alffm Modc Inpfi

and. Alarrrl (Sf O less fiurl A

AI-ARM
SIO t ta

Figure 211-74. MatchThrre Greater thart

&ndiLionTEme (St O greater thnn tJ

Digita.l Alo;rm Filter DIode

In the dfgital alarm fllter mode, the alarm ts either held or
tracks the input. The alarm ls generated and held if the
selected input goes into and out of ttre alarm state (S9, bit
zerol a number of tlmes specified by Sl l within a given time
period spectfled by S1O. The flltered alarm ls held for the next
tJme pertod SfO as long as tlle number of alarm pulses is
gfeater than or equd to the count 511 durtng the tlme period
S1O. If tl:e selected tnput does not go trrto and out of the alarm
state the number of tlmes speclfled by SIO over ttre period
spectfled by S11, the alarm ls released to track the trrput. Both
the number of darm transltlons 511 and ttre fllter period S10
are tunable values. Flgure 21 l- 15 shows the alarm fllter mode
input and alarm.

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-E96-2008 rs FEBlees 211 - 17
FunctionGode211

s 1 1 - 1S 1 1 1 _REFERENCE
STATE

INPUT
S10 secs

u
I ..-ASSERTED
STATE

I HoLD l--rnncK ""€-

Figure 2 1 1- 75. Alnrm Nhter Mde IrWtft artd Alnrm

In Ftgure 2ll-15, ttre input tnfflally enters tJ:e alarm condt-

tion at t, whlch marks the start of the fllter perlod. At flrne fr,
St I transitions have occuned ttrat eause the alarm to gener-
ate and hold. At tlme fz,the fflter perlod has ended and Sl l or
greater transltlons have not occurred so the alarm ls released
to track the input. If, at or before time to Sl l transittons had
occurred, tlre alarm lndication would have been held for
another SIO period of ttme.

T?realarm mode is tunable and can be changed during opera-

tion. If the mode is changed when the selected input is at the
reference state (REF), an edge (transitton lnto REF state) wtll
be detected. Ttre result at the alarm output when the mode is
changed is dependent upon what mode ls cur:rently enabled
and which mode is belrg transitioned.

s10 Speciflcation SIO is the time period for alarm modes. Ttre spe-
cific parameter thts value deffnes depends on the alarm
mode. Table 2f t-8 shows the tjme paraneters for the dtffer-
ent alarm modes.

Tahle 27 7-8. Tirrle Parameters Jor Atarm Modes

Mode Tlme Parameter
Standard digital mode No time parameterused
Deadbandingmode Alarmduration(secs)
Timedout mode Alarmstatereferencematchtlme (secs)
Filtermode Filterperiod(secs)

sl1 Specifieation Sf f is the number of times the selected input

must go into and out of the alarm state (Sg, bit zero) when
digital alarm filtering is enabled (Sg, bits two through four
equal four) in order for the alarm to be generated and held.

DataAcquisition
Digital
211 - 18 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 211

sl2 Speclflcatlon S12 ls the de-alarm tlme (ln seconds) when de-
alarm ls enabled. If an alarm lasts the amount of tlme deflned
ln S L2, the alarm wlll be suppressed.

When return darm ls enabled (S9, blt seven), Sl2 ts the

return alarm ttme (lre seconds). If an alarm sdsts for the tlme
deflned by S12, the alarm ls returned. Flgure 2LI-16 shows
the return alarm and de-alarm loglc.

sl3 Specification S13 ts the block address of the alarm suppress

enable. Flgure 2lL-L7 shows the alarm suppresslon loglc.

I = alarm suppresslon allowed through <S9>

Q = alarm not suppressed through <S9>

DE.AI ARM
EAIABLE

RETURN AI.ARM
ETTABLE

Figure 2 1 1- 76, Refi;urnAlnrm and, De-Alarm Lqic

9!F-
_qg[s_9LEanARr4s_u_pPR_E_s_s_E_ry _____. t

i
I

ALAFIM SUPPRESS EI.IABLE - - - - d

:

Ftgure 2 1 1- 1 7 . Alnrm Suppressfon Wic

DataAcquisition
Digital
l-E96-200B ls FEBrees 211 - 19
FunctionCode 211

sl4 Specification Sf4 is the block address of the qua[ty state

override input. This input allows an external source to over-
ride the quality and status of the reported logtc state and indi-
cations dlsplayed ln the extended status. The lnput ls
converted to a hexadeclmal number and the btts are mapped
as shown in Table 2lI-9. Table 21 1-10 shows the valld eom-
binations for S 14.

Tahlc 277-9. 514 BItMap

BlnaryWelghted
Blr Attrlbute
Value
0 1 Forcegoodquality
1 2 Force alternate input selected mode
2 4 Forcecustominsertedinputselectedmode
3 8 Outputsuspect
4 16 Hardwarefailure,badquality
5 32 E.STOP
6 - 15 Spare

Tahte 211-7O. Valid Combtnation-for 514

Value Result Value Result
0 Qualityoverridedisabled,default 2 1 - 2 3 Not valid
1 Force good quality 24 Force suspect quality, bad quality
2 Force alternate input selected rnode 25 Not valid
3 Force good quality,alternateinput selected 26 Forcealtemateinputselectedmode,suspect
mode quality,badquality
4 Forcecustominsertedinputselectedmode 27 Not valid
5 Forcegoodquality,custominsertedinput 28 Forcecustominsertedinputselectedmode,
selectedmode suspectquality,badquality
6-7 Not valid 2 9 - 3 1 Not valid
I Forcesuspectquality 32 Force bad guality, E-STOP
I Forcegoodquality,suspectquality 33 Forcegoodquality,E-STOP
10 Force alternate input selected mode, suspect 34 Forcealtemateinputselectedmode,E-STOP
quality
11 Force good quality,alternate input selected 35 Force good quality, altemate input selected
mode, suspect quality mode, E-STOP
12 Forcecustom inseftedinput selectedmode, 36 Forcecustominsertedinputselectedmode,E-
suspectquality STOP
13 Force good quality,custom inserted input 37 Forcegoodquality,custominsertedinput
selectedmode, suspectquality selectedmode,E-STOP
1 4- 1 5 Not valid 3 8 - 3 9 Not valid
16 Force bad quality 40 Forcesuspectquality,E-STOP
17 Not valid 41 Forcegoodquality,suspectquality,E-STOP
18 Force alternate input selected rnode, bad quality 42 Force altemate input selected mode, suspect
quality,E-STOP
19 Not valid 43 Force good quality, altemate input selected
mode, suspect quality,E-STOP
20 Force custom insertedinput selected mode, bad 44 Force custorn inserted input selected mode,
quality suspect quality, E-STOP

Data AcquisitionDigital
211- 20 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 211

Table 211-70. Valid CombVullonJor S14 (crlntturcd)

Value Result Value Result
45 Forcegoodquality,custominsertedinput 5 3 - 5 5 Not valid
selectedmode,suspectquality,E-STOP
46-47 Not valid 56 Forcesuspectquality,bad quality,E-STOP
48 Force bad quality, E-STOP 57 Not valid
49 Not valid 58 Forcealternateinputselectedmode,suspect
quality,bad quality,E-STOP
50 Force altemate input selected mode, bad qual- 59 Not valid
ity, E-STOP
51 Not valid 60 Forcecustominsertedinputselectedmode,
suspectquality,bad quality,E-STOP
52 Forcecustominsertedinputselectedmode,bad >61 Not valid
quality,E-STOP

The quality state overrlde does not affect the processlng of the
DADIG functlon code. The overrlde state speclfled ls loglcally
ORed wtth the tnternally dertved state. Thls permtts the
selected use of the lnternal functlon or spectal external func-
tlon.

NOTE:lf an extemalfunctiongeneratesany of thesecontrolbits,

the intemalfeaturesthat correspondto the definedfunctionmust
be inhibited.Thispreventsa conflictbetweenthe extemallydriven
statusand the internalstatus.

Quality is nonnally derived from the selected input with the

exceptlon of two condltions.

1. Bit zero ts set to a loglc l. Thts forces the quality to be

good regardless of the actual lnput quallty state. Bit four
overrides bft zero lf bottt are set.

2. Btt four ls set to a loglc 1. Thls forces the qua[ty to be bad

regardless of the actual lnput state. Blt four overrides btt zero
tf both are set.

sls Specification SI5 ts the block address of the alarm state latch
enable. When <Sl5> equals one, a,n5roccurrence of an alarm
causes the reported logic state output N and the extended
status output N+l to latch. These values do not change at the
bloek outputs or urtthin the exceptlon report untll elther
<S15> equals zero or a console sends a reset latch command.
If tlme-stamplng ls enabled, the ttme-stamp value ln the
exception report witl also be latched. While the values are
latched, a flag ls set in the extended status and the exceptlon
report to indicate to any receiver (e.9., console, function
block) ttrat the vdues are latched and requlre a reset. When
the output value of the block addressed by thls specificatlon
is logic O, the reported logic state and the extended status

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 211 - 21
FunctionCode 211

outputs reflect the current value of the teternd reported loglc

state and extended status.

Q = disable alarm state latch; reported loglc state output N

and extended status output N+l reflect cur:rent lnter-
nal states

I = latch reported loglc state and extended status upon an

alarm

sl6 Spectfication 516 ts the block address of the exceptlon report

request. When <516> goes frorn zeto to one, the exceptton
report data is updated and sent. When ltr no report mode,
<516> is disabled. The console can force an exceptton report
update that reports the current value even when the potnt ts
set for no report. The potnt remalrrs ln no report mode after
sending one update if lt was prevlously ln no report mode.

O - generate exception reports according to normal crtte-

ria; alarm conditions

I = force an exception report

sl7 Specification S17 is a custom ID tlpe code. The data in Sl7

goes in the exception report enable reply and will be sent to a
console when the console establlshes and connects a route to
this point.

S 1 8a n d S 1 9 Spare.

Outputs

N Output N is the prirnary input <S3>, the alternate lnput

<S4>, or the custorn inserted value 55 dependtng on the tnput
select control <Sl>.

N+1 Output N+I is the current selected lnput, alarm, atrd proeess-
ing status of the DADIG function block. Thls extended status
converts into indlvidual logic levels by eonflguration of red
demultiplexers (functton eode 126). Table 21 1-11 ls a bft map
of the extended status.

Bits 3 o;nd 4
Bits three and four indicate which of the three posslble tnputs
the input select block <SI> has selected to be output at tJre
reported logic state output N.

Bit 5
Bit five is the permit input seleet <S2> lnput.

Bit 6
Bit six is the quality overrlde. It tndicates that the qua[ty
override input <S L4> ls overrldireg the qualtty.

DataAcquisitionDigital
211 - 22 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 211

Table 2 1 1- 7 7. Extended Stafi,s Bit Map

Blnary
Blr Welghted Attrlbute
Value
0 1 Spare
1 2 Spare
2 4 Spare
3-4 0 00 Primaryinputselected<S3>
I 01 Primaryinputselected<S3>
16 1 0 Custominsertedinputselected55
8+16 11 Altemateinputselected<S4>
5 32 Permitinputselectenabled
6 &t Qualityoverridden
7 128 Reportedlogic stateand extendedstiatuslatched
I 256 Outputvalue
I 512 E-STOP
10 1024 No reportrnodeenabled
11 2048 Outputsuspect
12 4096 indication
Alarmsuppression
13 8192 Retumalann(toggled)
14 16384 Alarmstate
15 32768 Badquality

Bit 7
Bit seven shows when the outputs are latched through the
alarm state latch (enabled tlrrough <S15>).

Bit 8
Blt etght ts the state of the reported logtc output N.

Bit I
Blt ntne ls the executed stop (E-STOP).

Bit 70
Btt ten ts the no report field. Thls tndlcates when the tnput
select <Sl> places the block ln no report mode.

Bit 77
Bit 11 is the output suspect quality. The quality override
block <S14> sets the output suspect quallty.

Bit 72
This field ts the monitored DADIG block alarm suppression
tndication. Thts bit can be set by two of the monitored DADIG
block functions (on alarm suppression and by de-alarm).

1. For alarm suppresslon, thls bft can operate ln one of two

modes selected by the DADIG's alarm mode control <S9>, bit
eight.

DataAcquisitionDigital
l-Eg6-2008 ts FEBlees 211 - 23
FunctionCode 211

IJf bit eight of DADIG <S9> equo;ls zero, thls tnrdtcatton

will be set when alarm suppresslon ls selected and
enabled.

Alarm suppresslon is selected through the DADIG's alarm

mode control <S9>. Alarm suppresslon ts enabled through
elther the DADIG's alarm suppresslon enable block fnput
<Sl3> or a console command sent to the DADIG block.

. IJ bit eight oJ DADIG <S9> equals otte, thts tndtcatlon

will be set when the alarm suppresslon functlon ls sup-
pressing an alarrn.

2. For de-alarm, thls bit wlll be set when urn alarm ts belng
de-alarmed.

Bit 78
Bit 13 is the return alarm indlcatton. ThIs shows when an
alarm has been returned. This bit toggles to ttre oppostte state
to indicate an alarm has been returned. The alarm mode con-
trol Sg enables return alarm. Return alarm uses the return
alarrn and de-alarm tlme pertod reference S12.

Bit T4
Bit 14 is the alarrn field. The alarm fleld ls set when an alarm
indication exists and alarm is enabled through the alarm
mode control <S9>.

Bit 75
Bit 15 is the quality field. The quallty field tndicates when the
bloek is bad quallty. Quatfry reflects the quallty of the
selected tnput <S3>, <S4> or 55. Oualfty c€rn be forced bad
(set), or forced good (cleared) through the quatity overrlde
block input <Sl4>.

DataAcquisition
Digital
211 - 24 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode212- DataAcquisitionDigitallnpuULoop

The data acqulsitlon digitat (DADIG function code 2f 1) and the

data acquisltlon digttal input/loop (DADIG I/L functlon code
2L2) function code patr is for dtgital data acquisltlon of bool-
ean signal functions. The DADIG and DADIG I/L funcHon
codes complement ttre data acquisltion analog (DAAIVG) and
the data acqulsltlon analog fnput/loop (DAAIVG l/U functlon
codes by provldtng the functlons of the data aequisttlon analog
block for boolean signals. The DADIG functlon code pafr Pro- ;
vides a means to accomp[sh a number of untque data acqulsl-
tion, darm detection and management functtons related to
boolean logic signals lmplemented ln INFI-NET systems. ,

NOTE:Functioncode212operatesonlyin |NFI-NETsystems.

The DADIG function codes support a range of features on the

OIS console serles. Commands are accepted from consoles
and alarm lnformatlon ls supplied to consoles through exceP-
tion reports. The DADIG I/L function code provldes a means
of importing data from the DADIG block in INFI-NET systems.

NOTE:lf a moduleutilizesan importeddigitalvaluefrom the loop

the functionblocksthat uti'
in severalinstancesin its configuration,
lize that digitalvalue must be connectedto only one DAANGJIL
block.You cannotimportexceptionreportsfrom the same (loop,
PCU, moduleand block)addressto more than one destination
withina singlemoduleconfiguration.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

N B Source reported logic level
N+1 R Sourceextendedstatus

DataAcquisitionDigitalInpuVLoop
l-E96-2008 1s FEB199s 212-1
FunctionCode 212

SPECtFtCATtOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-31 Sourcemoduleaddress
S2 N 0 I 0 - 9998 SourceDADIGblocknumber
S3 N 0 I 0-250 |NF|-NETnodeaddress
S4 N 0 0-250 Sourceloopnumber
S5 N 0 0-255 Spare integerinput
S6 N 0.000 R Full Sparerealinput
S7 N 0 0 - 9998 Sparebooleaninput

EXPLANATION

The DADIG l/L provides the ability to aceess the DADIG out-
puts from an INFI-NET communlcation highway. Th.e DADIG
UL outputs the two DADIG block outputs (reported logic level
and extended status).

Specifications

S1 Specification Sl is the module address of the MFP module

containing the monitored DADIG block.

S2 Specification 52 is the block number of the monitored DADIG

block.

s3 Specification Sg is the process eontrol unlt (PCU) address of

the module containing the monltored DADIG block.

S4 Specification 54 is the loop number of the process control

unit containlng the rnonitored DADIG block.

55, 56 and 57 Spare.

Outputs

N Output N is a boolean output equal to output N of the morritored

DADIG (function code?f I) block speclfied by Sl, 52, 33 and 54.

N+1 Output N+ I is a real value containing ttre numeric representa-

tion of the extended status of the monitored DADIG (function
code 2 t 1) block specified by S l, 52, S3 and 54 currenfly in use.

The extended status and alarm detection modes may be con-

verted into individual logic level by configuratlon of real
demultiplexers (function code L26). Table 2L2-L ls a decoded
extended status bit map.

Bits O th;rougln 2
Unused.

DataAcquisition
DigitallnpuULoop
212 - 2 1sFEBlees l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 212

Tahb 272-7. Decod.edErtendedStaftrs BitMap

Blnary
Blr Welghted Attrlbute
Value
0 1 Spare
1 2 Spare
2 4 Spare
3-4 0 00 Primaryinputselected,<S3>
8 01 Primaryinputselected,<S3>
16 1 0 Custominsertedinputselected,<S5>
8+16 1 1 Altemateinputselected,<S4>
5 32 Permitinputselectenabled
6 il Quality is being ovenidden
7 128 Reportedlogicstrateand extendedstiatusare latched
8 2s6 Outputvalue
9 512 E.STOP
10 1024 No report mode enabled
11 2048 Outputsuspect
12 4096 indication
Alarmsuppression
13 8192 Retumalarm(toggled)
14 16384 Alarmstate
15 32768 Hardware failure/bad quality

Bits 3 through 4
The mode fleld lndlcates which of the three possible DADIG
(functton code 21 1) inputs a,re currently selected through the
DADIG ireput select block input <S1> to be routed to the
DADIG reported logic state output N.

Bit 5
The permit treput selection fleld lndicates the state of the
monitored DADIG blocks permit input select tnput <S2>.

Bit 6
The quallty overrldden field tndtcates when the monltored
DADIG blocks qua[ty ls belng overrldden through the DADIG
quality overrlde block input <SL4>.

Bit 7
When the monitored DADIG block alarm state latch functlon
is enabled through the DADIG alarm state latch enable tnput
<S l5>, this field indicates when the outputs are latched.

Bit I
This field contains the state of the DADIG blocks reported
logic output N.

Bit I
The E-STOP field lndicates when the monitored DADIG block
is exeeute stopped through a console or when the E-STOP

DataAcquisitionDigitalInpuULoop
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 212-g
FunctionCode 212

state ls being forced through the DADIG quatlty overrlde

block input <Sl4>.

Bit 70
The no report fleld indicates when ttre monltored DADIG
block has been placed in no report mode through the DADIG
block input select <Sl> or throug;h a console command.

BiI IT
The output suspect quallty lndlcatlon ts set through the mon-
ltored DADIG block quality overrlde block lnput <S14>.

Btt 12
This fteld ls the monitored DADIG block alarm suppresslon
lndicatlon. Ttris bit can be set by two of the monttored DADIG
block functions (on alarm suppresslon and by de-alarm).

1. For alarm suppression, this btt can operate ln one of two

modes selected by the DADIGs alarm mode control <S9>, bit 8.

. IJ bit eight of DN)IG <S9> equals ztfro, this turdication

will be set when alarm suppression ls selected and
enabled.

Alarm suppression ls selected througfr the DADIG's alarm

mode control <S9>. Alarm suppresslon is enabled through
either the DADIG's alarm suppression enable block tnput
<SI3> or a console command sent to ttre DADIG block.

. Ij bit eight of DN)IG <S9> equo;ls one, thts indicatlon

will be set when the alarm suppression functlon is sup-
pressing an alarm.

2. For de-alarm, this bit will be set when an alarm is being

de-alarmed.

Bit 79
The return alarm indicatton toggles each tlme the monitored
DADIG blocks alarm is returned. Return alarm is enabled
through the DADIG alarm mode control <S9> and uses the
return alarm/de-alarm time period reference <S12>.

Bit T4
Ttre alarm field is set when the alarm is selected through the
DADIG blocks alarm mode control <S9> and an alarm condl-
tion e:<istsat the monitored DADIG block.

Bit 75
The quality indication is set to indicate when the DADIG block
is bad quality. Quality reflects the quality of the selected
DADIG block input <S3>, <S4> or <S5> and can be forced bad
(set), or forced good (cleared)through the DADIG's qualit5r over-
ride block input <Sl4>. This field also wtll be set tf an enor
qdsts tn the link between the DADIG ULand DADIG blocks.

DataAcquisitionDigitalInpuVLoop
212-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-200B
 FunctionCode 213- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 213 - 1
ffi
I

t
 FunctionCode214- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBrees 214 - 1
ffi
I

I
 FunctionGode215- EnhancedAnalogSlaveDefinition

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The enhanced analog slave deflnttton functlon code (EASD)

S3
S2
defines an IIvIASIOS Unlversal Analog Slave Module to a mulfl-
function processor. For more information, refer to the IM,A$,IO3
tlniuensal Analog Slorae lllodule product lnstmctlon.

The EASD block deflnes the common spectficatlons for €rn

IIVIASI0S module. Individual input function code 216 blocks
are linked to tl:ts block to define tl:e channels available on the
IIVIASIOSmodule.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

BIK Type Descrlptlon

oC
N R Cold junction referencetemperature in
N+1 B l/O module status: Q = good, 1 = bad
N+2 R lnputscancycletime (secs)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 l/O rnodule address
S2 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of first enhanced analog input definition (FG 216)
S3 N 5 0 - 9998 Block address of cold junction reference input
S4 N 0 0or1 l/O module failure action:
0 = trip control module
1 = cootinue operation
S5 N 0 0or1 Normal mode reiection tYPe:
0=60H2
1=50H2
S6 N 0.000 R Full Length (in feet) of termination device cable
S7 N 0 I Full Spare
S8 N 0 I Full Spare
S9 N 0.000 R Full Spare
s10 N 0.000 R Full Spare

EnhancedAnalogSlaveDefinition
r-E96-200B 1s FEB1995 215 - 1
FunctionCode 215

EXPLANATION

Specifications
s1 Specification Sl is the I/O module expander bus address of
the IIVIASIOSmodule.

S2 Specification 52 points to the block address of the first

enhanced analog input definition (function code 216) function
block. Each function code 216 conflgures one of the channels
on the IIVIASIOSmodule.

NOTE: Blockaddressesand channelnumberscan be linkedin

any order.

s3 Specification S3 contains the block address of the cold Junctlon

reference temperature. The value speclfied by the block address
must be in degrees Celslus. Thfs ls used for compensation of
thermocouple inputs. Speclficatlon Sg norrnally refers to the
address of tJ:e function code 215 output block N whJch directs
the II\{ASIOS module to use the local cold Junctlon reference
available on the termination devlce. Figure 215-1 ls an example
of local cold junction compensatlon.

NOTE:Specification S3 normallyrefersto EASDblocks.lt can ref-

erenceany functioncode.

Specification S3 can also refer to tJle address of the block out-

put used for remote cold junction reference. Figure 215-2 is
an example of remote cold junction compensation.

S4 Specification 54 identifies the action to be talren in the event

of a failure of the IMASIOS module.

O - trip control module

I = cofitinue operation

ss Specification 55 identifies the domtnant noise frequency

rejected during the analog to df$tal eonverslon operatlon.

Q = 6O hertz
1 = 5O hertz

s6 Specification 56 is the length of tJ:e cable (in feet) between the

termination device and the I/O module. The I/O module uses
this to compensate the measured input value for the effects of
resistance in the cable.

Outputs

N Output N is the temperature in degrees Celsius of the cold

junction reference for thermocouple inputs as measured by tl,e
built in RTDs on the termination device of the IMASIO3 module.

EnhancedAnalog Slave Definition

215-2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode215

N+1 Output N+l lndtcates tf a fatlure of the IIVIASIO3 module ls

detected.

O = good
J = failed I/O module

N+2 Output N+2 represents the amotrnt of ttme between suecesslve

updates of an lndlvldual channel tnput value and quallty. Thls
is the total scan ttme of all polnts deflned for tlre I/A module.

APPLICATIO'VS

Ftgure 2L5-L shows a gryfcal example of local cold junction

compensatlon. Tables 2L5-1, 2L5-2, 215-3 and 2L5-4
explaln the spectflcatlon settlngs for the blocks used ln Fig-
ure 2L5-L.

EAs&
cl
Af fl

el
TERMhIATION
DB'ICE
Sl rl UOTrcOLI-EADR
(TlEUr S|BREOUnES Sf rl FAnfrREACTpttlp.fnB l.cOfflMJE)
EITHER ONENTAE S0 r0 ilRri.lrcOE REECilONWPE0160tE l.50lt0
TERt'il}{AflOt{UTSTOR S8 r10.0 T.u.CAB.EtEl{gTH(tll
TWOllt Al00TERMIIIAnoI{ 57 r0 SilRE
mool[.Es.] S8 IO SPARE
TIPE E SOrOO SNARE
Tr€Rri@ouPtE j'l Sl0rO0 SPARE
- F^t
q.J

+-l gl rl
- FA2 I'O UOOULEADR
cJ 83 rl UOI'ODUIE INPUTCHANNEL}IO.
9f 13 nruT $GttlAL TYPE
35 r0 EUCON\TERSIOX TYPE10r'C. | ''Fl
+-] 8t r 0.0 EUZEROOF IilPUT
- f-A3 Sl r I SLA\/EADR 37 r 0.0 EUSPAI{OF ]NPUT
cJ Sl r 2 SLAVE INPUT CltAililE! tlUU S8 r 0.0 tiIPUTSIONALRAXGELOWLITIIT
9f r60 INPUTSIGNALWPE 89 r 0.0 IIIPUTSIGIIA! RANGEHIGHLIMIT
55 r 0 EU CONVERSIOil IYPE (0 r'G. I r'F) 810 r S0.0 LEAOWTRE RES|STANCE ( O)
SG [email protected] EUZEROOFII{PUT 8ll r 22 ArOCOttlVERSlOt{ RESOLUTfOI(NO.OF BITS)
S7 r 200.0 EU SPAil OF lllPUT 812.0
IN TI{IS EHMPI.E 56 r 0.0 INPUT SIGNAL RANGE LOW LIMIT Sl3r0
INPI'T CI{ANNEUi 3ll r 0.0 OFFfAGE
59 r O.O INPUT StGilAL RAXG€ }IIGH UXIT
3 tHROrJGlr 15 Sl0 r 0 LCADWIRE RESISTAIICE (Ollus) 8lt r 0.0 @NNEgTOR
ARE 1{OT USED ArD CO}|VERSION RESOLUTIOIr (xUU BITS) TO@MTROL
Sll r 20
Sl2r0 SPARE
Sl3'0 SPARE
Slf r 0.0 SPAR€
Sl5 r 0.0 SPARE

@NN€CIFNS TO FC2l6. FOR FOIIfS ]t5 NOT t S€D

O.0e4TO ol V EACHFCf,{T
6rvPpeuy AFc:no s RESERiGDFOR
AT\DI${I(EDI{ TXECHAA{REN F }IOTT.E€D}.

Sl rl YOr|ODUTEADR
33 r tG UOHODUTEINPUTCIIANNELNO.
Sf r eO INPUTSleilAL
8t r 0 EUCONVERSION TYPE(0 r'C, I r'F)
SC r lO.0 EUZEROOF INPUT
S7 r 9O.O EUSPAHOF INPUT
58 r -0.0911INPUTSIGNALRAi{GELOWLIUIT
S0 r 1.0 INPUTSlGllAt RAIIGEl{lg}l Ll}llT
810 r ra.o IEAOWIRERESISTANCE ( o)
3lt r lt ArDCONVERSION RESOLUTION (NO.OF BITS)
Sl2r0 SPARE
Sll r 0 SPARE
Sll r 0.0 SPARE
815 r 0.0 SPARE
lPill0l.rA

Flgure 2 75- 7. Local Cold Jurrction Compensalton

EnhancedAnalog Slave Definition

l-E96-2008 15FEB1e95 215 - 3
Function Gode 215

Remote cold Junctlon reference lnputs automatlcally use the

on-board cold Junction reference for thermocouple compensa-
tlon. Figure 2L5-2 shoqrc a typlcal o<anple of remote cold
Junctlon compensatlon. Tables 215-5, 2f5-6 and 215-7 ltst
the speclllcation values and descrlpflons for Ftg;ure 215-2.

TabLe215-1. FurrctionCad,e216 atBlrckAddress 90

Spec Value Description
S1 1 l/O moduleaddress 1, set on the lMASlO3
S2 125 Pointsto the blockaddressof the nextfunctioncode216in the link(thedefaultvalueof 2 signifies
the finaltunctioncode216 in the link)
S3 2 lMASl03 module input channel number2
S4 60 Channel2 (referto S3) is configuredto be cunected to a -100 mVto +100mV inputsour@
S5 0 Not used when 54 is configuredas a voltage or current input type
S6 -100 The zero in engineeringunits is a value of -100.0
S7 200 The span in engineeringunits is a value of 200
S8 0 Only used when 54 is configuredas a custom voltage input type
S9 0 Only used when 54 is configuredas a custom vottage input type
s10 0 The wireftom the millivoltsourceinputto the l!l,ASl03terminationdevicehas a resistanceof 0 Q
or the resistanceis considerednegligible
s11 20 Conversionresolution is 20 bits

Table 215-2. LocalCold.JrrrctlonReJeretrce,hrrcttonOode 215 atBlockAddress IOO

Spec Value Descrlption
S1 1 l/O moduleaddress 1, set on the lMASl03
S2 110 Points to the block address of the first function code 216 in the link
S3 100 Pointsto blockoutputN of this functioncode215.Thisis the coldjunctionreferencetemperature
in oCmeasuredat the terminationdeviceof this lMASlO3
S4 1 Continueto operatecontrolmodule on an l/O modulefailure
S5 0 Rejectsambient60 Hz interference(setthis specification
to the linevoltagetrequencyusedin the
countryof operation)
S6 10 The cable from the lMASl03 to the terminationdevice is 10 ft in length

Tabte 215-3. Ftrnction Code 216 at Block Address 11O

Spec Value Description
S1 1 l/O moduleaddress1, set on the lMASl03
S2 90 Pointsto the blockaddressof the nextfunctioncode216 in the link(thedefaultvalueof 2 signifies
thefinalfunctioncode216 in the link)
S3 1 lMASl03module inputchannelnumber1
S4 3 Channel 1 (refer to 53) is configuredto be connectedto a type E thermocouple
S5 0 The output of channelone is displayedin oC
S6 0 Not usedwhen94 is configuredas thermocouple
inputtype
S7 0 Not used when 34 is configuredas thermocoupleinput type
S8 0 Not used when 34 is configuredas thermocoupleinput type
S9 0 Not used when 54 is configuredas thermocoupleinput type
s10 50 The wireftom the thermocouple
to the lMASl03terminationdevicehas a resistanceof 50 O
s11 ?2 Conversionresolutionis 22 bits

EnhancedAnalog Slave Definition

215-4 1 s F E B1 9 9 5 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode215

Table 275-4. FtnctTon Cde 216 at Block Ad.dress125

Spec Value Description
s1 1 l/O moduleaddress1, set on the IMASIO3
S2 2 Poinb to the block addressof the next tunctioncode216 In the llnk (the defaultvaluEof 2 signifies
the finaltunctioncode216 in the link)
S3 16 lMASl03inputchannelnumber16
S4 99 Channel16 (referto 53) is configuredto be connectEdto a qrstom defined\roltageinput source
S5 0 Not usedwhenS4 is configuredas a voltageor cutrentinputtype
S6 10 unitsis a valueof 10
The zeroin engineering
S7 90 The spanin engineeringunitsis a valueof 90
S8 -0.094 The low range of the input voltage is -0.094 V
S9 1 . 0 The highrangeof the inputvoltageis 1 V
s10 14 The wire from the millivoltsourceinput to the lMASlO3terminationdevicEhas a resisbncE of t4 Q
s11 18 Conversionresolution is 18 bits

St r 6 lro UODULEADR
REMOTE TERMIMTION 54 rt FAILUREACTION
(O-TRIPMFP,lrggNTlNUE)
TERMINALBLOCK DEVICE 35 - 0 NRMLITODEREJECTION TYPE
TY?EJ (0re0 Hz, lr50 Hz)
THERMC'COt'PI.E cIr{EnrAs|og
REOTflRES S0 r 6.0 T.U.CABLELENGTH(f0
EITHERONE I{TA106 37 =0 SPARE
TERMII,IATION UNIT OR S8 r0 SPARE
6(l
TWO NlAIOs TERMIMTION SO - 0.0 SPARE
PLAINwrRE MODULES.) Sl0 = 0.0 SPARE
8rl

(216)
175

Sl - $ lro MODULE ADR

S3 =| lrO MOOULE INPUT CHANNEL Ng.
S4 - Q, INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
S5 r I EU CONVERSION TYPE (0 -'C. | ='F)
SO '0.0 EU ZERO OF INPUT
S7 e O.O EU SPAN OF INPUT
CAELE 58 : O.O INPUT SIGNAL RANGE LOW LIMIT
(1On) 59 r O.O INPUT SIGNAL RANGE }IIGH LIMIT
Sl0 r 28.0 LEADWIRE RESISTANCE ( A )
Sll r 24 ArD CONVERSION RESOLUTION (NO. BITSI
Sl2 r 0 SPARE
Sl3 r 0 SPARE
Sl4 s 0.0 SPARE
Sl5 r 0.0 SPARE
THIS
EXAMPTE OONNECTPNS TO FC2l6s FOR PO6TTS2-15 NOT USED
INPI'T (rYPEALTY A FC2r6 F RESERNED FOR EACH POr{T
c}u[${ELS Alro LnKED N THE CHAN SVEN F ilOT USED).
2THROIJG}I
15ARE
NOT r.tSiEO

Sl -$ I/O MODULE ADR

S3 .16 UO IIODULE INPUT C}IAilNEL NO.
54 - lOG INPUT SIGNAL
55 sQ EU CONVERSION TYPE
(0 ='C. I g'F)
SO r 0.0 EU ZERO OF INPUT
57 r 0.0 EU SPAN OF INPUT
SO r 0.0 INPUT SIGNAL RANGE LOW LIMIT
Sg - 0.0 INPUT SIGNAL RANGE HIGH TIMIT
StO r 14 LEADWIRE RESISTANCE (O)
S11- 16 A/D CONVERS ION RESOLUTION
(NO. OF BITS)
S12.0 SPARE
S13-0 SPARE
S14 = 0.0 SPARE
St5 c 0.0 SPARE

Ftgure 2 15-2. Rerrwte Cold. Junctton Compertsation

EnhancedAnalog Slave Definition

l-Eg6-200B 1sFEB1se5 215 - 5
FunctionCode 215

Table 215-5. Furlctlon Cod,e 216 at Block Address 175

Spec Value Descrlptlon
S1 6 l/O moduleaddress6, set on the lMASlO3
s2 162 Pointsto the block addressof the next functioncode 216 In the llnk (the defaultvalue ol2 slgnifies
the finalfunctioncode216 in the link)
S3 1 |MAS|OS inputchannelnumber1
S4 4 Channel1 (referto 53) is configuredto be connectedto a typeJ thermocouple
S5 1 Theoutputof channel1 is displayedin oF
S6 0 inputtype
Not usedwhen54 is configuredas a thermocouple
S7 0
S8 0
S9 0
s10 28 Thewire fromthe millivoltsourcelnputto the lMASloSterminationdevicehas a r€slstanceof 28 O
s11 24 Conversion resolutionis 24 bits

Table 215-6. Ftmction Cod.e 216 at Block Address 2O2

Spec Value Descrlptlon
S1 6 l/O moduleaddress6, set on the lMASlO3
S2 2 Pointsto the blockaddressot the nexttunctioncode216in the link (thedefaultvalueof 2 signifies
the finalfunctioncod€216 in the link)
S3 16 |MAS|OSmodule input channel number 16
S4 106 Channel5 (refer to 53) is configuredto be connect€dto a type T thermocouple
measuresthe ambienttemperatureof the remotetsrmination
ln this example,this thermocouple
devicewherethe typeJ thermocouple (at blockaddress201) is lerminated
Whenan inputtype (S4)is speciliedto be a valuegreaterthan 100,thls thermocoupleusesthe
on-boardcold junction referencetor compensationand its ouput value ls filtered whlci acts to
slowits responsetime
S5 0 The outputmustbe in oCwhenusingthis channelas a remotecoldjunctionreference
S6 0 Notusedwhen54 is configured inputtype
as a thermocouple
S7 0
S8 0
S9 0
sl0 14 The wirefromthe millivoltsourceinputto the IMASIOS devicehas a resistanceof 14 O
tErmination
sl1 16 Conversionresolutionis 16 bits

Tabte 275-7. Ftrnction Code 215 at Block Address 25O

Spec Value Descrlptlon
S1 6 l/O module address6, set on the |MAS|OS
S2 175 Points to the block address of the first function code 216 in the link
S3 162 Pointsto blockoutsutaddressof the sensor(a typ€T lhermocouple) usedas the coldjunction
referenceat the rsmotethermocoupleterminationdevlcg
S4 1 Continueto operatecontrolmoduleon an l/O modulefailure
S5 0 Reiectsambient60 Hz interferenc€(setthis specification
to the linevoltagefrequenryusodIn
the countryof opera$on)
S6 6 The cablefromthe IMAS|OS deviceis 6 ft in length
to the termination

EnhancedAnalog Slave Definition

2 1 5- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode216- EnhancedAnaloglnput Definition

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The enhanced analog tnput definttlon (EAID) functlon code

speclfles an lrirput to an IIVIASIO3Untversal Analog Input Mod-
ule. Thts must be eonflgured ln the same segrnent as the
errhanced analog module deflnttlon (functton code 215) whlch
references lt. For more lnformatlolt, refer to the IilIAISIOS Uni-
uersto;l Analog Input Module product lnstmctlon.

The EAID funcflon code reads a slngle analog lnput from €rn
IIvIASIO3 module. Up to f 6 EAID blocks may be conflgured per
module.

For callbratlon of an IMASIO3 module, lt ls necessary to fnstall

one functton code216 for each lnput channel ln a conflguratlon.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Analoginputvalueand quality(specifiedin engineeringunits)

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0-63 l/O module address
S2 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of next EAID block
S3 N 1 I 1-16 Moduleinputchannelnumber
S4 N 1 I Full Inputsignaltype:
x07 = Chinesetype E thermocouple
x08 = ChinesetypeS thermocouple
x09 = typeL thermocouple
xl0 = typeU thermocouple
xll = typeN (14AWG)thermocouPle
x12= type N (28 AWG)thermocouPle

EnhancedAnalogInputDefinition
t-E96-200B 15 FEB 1995 216 - 1
FunctionCode216

SPECI FICATI OwS Gontinued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 1 I Full x13 = typeB thermocouple (lMASlO3 firmware
(cont.) revisionC-0 and above)
y€:O= U.S.laboratory standard100O platinum
RTD(TCR= 0.003926)
x21= U.S.industrialstandard100f,l platinumRTD
(TCR= 0'003911)
n2 = Europeanstiandard100f,l platinumRTD
(TCR= 0'003850)
y€.3= 120O chernicallypurenickelRTD
(TCR= 0'00672)
e4 = 10 O copperRTDCICR= 0.004;27)
Y25= Chinese53 O copperRTD
x40 = *1 V to +5 V 4 mAto 20 mA
x41= -10V to +10V
x42=0Vto+10V
x43=0Vto+5V
x60= -100mVto +100mV
x61= 0 mVto +100mV
x99 = userspecifiedvoltagerange(min.-10 V,
max.+10V)
where:
x = 0i normalinput.SpecificationS3 of functioncode 215
will be usedas the coldjunctionreferencefor thermocouple
inputs.
X= 1; this inputis a remotecoldjunctionreferenceand may
be usedas the coldjunctionreferencefor otherthermocou'
pleinputs.WhenX = 1:
1. A movingaveragefilterwill be appliedto blockoutput
N. Thisslowsthe responsetimeof the inputchannel.
2. lf the inputtypeis a thermocouple, 53 of functioncode
215willbe ignoredandtheon-boardcoldjunctionreference
of the lMASl03willbe usedto compersatethisthermo@u-
pleinput(if thethermocouples usedas remotecoldjunction
references areterminated directlyon the |MAS|OS termina-
tionunit).
S5 N 0 I 0or1 Engineering unitconversion type:
0="C
1=oF
s6 Y 0.000 R Full unitzerofor input
Engineering
S7 Y 0.000 R Full Engineeringunit span for input
S8 N 0.000 R Full Customrangelow limit(in V)
S9 N 0.000 R Full Customrangehighlimit(in V)
sl0 N 0.000 R Full Leadwire resistancefin A)
s11 N 16 16-24 ND conversionresolution
s12 N 0 I Full Spare
s13 N 0 I Full Spare
s14 N 0.000 R Full Spare
s15 N 0.000 R Full Spare

EnhancedAnalog Input Definition

216-2 1s FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 215

EXPLANATION

Specification Sl is the expander bus address of the II\4ASI03

module.

Specilication 52 ts the block address of the next EAID block

describlng one of the channels on the module. A value of two
indlcates thts ls the end of the llnk list.

NOTE:Blockaddressesand channelnumberscan be linkedin

any order.

s3 Specification 53 is the number of the input channel on the

module described by the EAID block.

S4 Specification S4 defines the input signal t5rpe of the input

from the IIVIASIO3module.

If an input sigrral that specifies a defrned range (e.S., +1 volt to

+5 volts) goes flve percent outside of tts range, ttte irrput signal ls
marked as bad quality wfth the status indication out oJ rottge.

For calibration of the IMASIO3 module, the calibration t5pe

defined in 54 of functlon code 217 must be consistent with
tlre input signal t5pe defined tn 54 of function code 2L6. Con-
sider the following examples.

Example1 a channel
ff calibrating formillivolts mde217must
thenS4offunction
orthermocouples,
besetto 0 and34 offunction orthermo'
code216mustbesetto anyoneof themillivolt
couple code216mustbewithinthefollowing:
inputtypes.Inthiscase,$4 offunction

x01>54<x20
or
x60>54<xgg

Example2 ff calibrating
a channel code217mustbe
then54 of function
for highlevelvoltage,
set to 1 and S4 of function code 216 must be set to one of the high level voltage
ranges (4 to 20 mA is considered high level input type). ln this case, function code
216 should be within the following:

x40>54<60
or
S4 = x99

Exampfe3 It catibratinga channelfor RTD mode,then 9l of functon code 217 must be set to 2
and S4 of func-tioncodE216 mustbe set to any one of the RTDtypes.In lhis case,
54 of functioncode216 shouldbe withinthe followingrange:

r20>S4<x40

ss Specification S5 defines the tlpe of temperature unit conver-

sion to be performed on the input signal. If 54 indicates other

EnhancedAnalog lnput Definition

l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 216 - 3
FunctionCode 216

than a thermocouple or RTD t54re, then S5 ts lgnored, and SG

and S7 are used to convert to engineering units.

s6 Specification SG defines the low value (zerol of the input in

engineering units. This value corresponds to the lnput stgnal
range identified in 54. ThJs speclfication ls lgnored ff the
input tlpe (S+1is a thermocouple or RTD.

s7 Specification SZ defines the sp€rn of tl:e input ln engtneering

units. The span plus the zero yields the output of the block at
full signal range. This specification is ignored if the input t5pe
(S+1is a thermocouple or RTD.

s8 Specification 58 is ignored unless the input signal t1rye (S+1

indicates a custom voltage range. In that case, thts spectfica-
tion defines the lower Umtt of the range, ln volts.

s9 Specification Sg is ignored unless the lnput signal tlpe (S4)

indicates a custom specifled voltage range. br that case, this
specification defines the upper limlt of the range, ln volts.

sl0 Specification Sf O is the resistance (ln ohms) of the fleld input

lead wire from the input to the termlnation device. Thls value
comects the value of the input signal. For millivolt and ther-
mocouple inputs, lead wire resistance is the sum of tl:e resis-
tance in both the plus and minus leads. For three-wire RTD
inputs, lead wire resist€rnce is the resistance in any one of the
three leads (the resistance of each nrire must be equal). This
value is ignored for high level input t54les.

sl1 Specification S I I is the resolution of tJ:e analog to digital eon-

version for each independent channel. This speclfication
specifies the resolution as the number of bits in the binary
representation of the raw input value when it is scanned by
the input module. A higher value for the resolution requires a
longer conversion time and a correspondingly slower sczrn-
ning rate for the inputs. Table 216-f lists the approxtmate
resolution and scarn time relationship.

Table 2L6-L gives approximate tlptcd channel analog to digi-

tal eonverslon rates for each channel. These rates varJr from
scErn to scan. This time c€rn be used to determlne an apprord-
mate l/O module scan rate.

For example, the IIVIASIOS module has six channels config-

ured with:

. TWo channels configured at 16 bits.

. T\wo channels configured at 20 bits.
o One channel configured at 22 bits.
o One channel configured at 24 bits.

EnhancedAnalog Input Definition

216-4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 21b

Tablc 216-1. Furlction Code 216 Resotutlon and. Scan Time

Resolutlon TVplcalAJDConverslonTlmes
(Blts of A/D)l ("/"of ArD Span) Per Ghannel
16 0.001500 30 msecs
18 0.000380 175msecs
20 0.000095 175msecs
22 0.000024 450 msecs
24 0.000006 2,000msecs
NOTE:
1. lf S11is set to an odclnumber,tre moduleperlormsthe conversionbasedon the next
higherevennumberof bits.

An approximate I/O module scan time can be found by add-

ing the analog to digitat conversion times beside the resolu-
tion value in Table 216-1.

. TWo at 3O mllllseconds.
. TWo at L75 milltseconds.
. One at 45O milliseconds.
o One at 2,OOOmilliseconds.

The appro:dmate scan rate is 2.860 seconds for these six

channels.

Outputs

OutputN Analog input value:

. High leoel input - input reading (in engineertng units

based on 56 and SA automatically adjusted for drlft, and
input channel nonlinearltles.

. RTD input - tnput reading (in degrees as specified in 55)

automatically adjusted for drift, lead wire resistance and
input channel nonlinearlties.

. Thermcrcouple input - input reading (in degrees as spec-

ified in 55) automatically adjusted for drift, lead wire
resistanc€, cold Junction temperature and input channel
nonlinearities.

Millivolt input lnput reading (in engineering units

based on 56 and 57) automatically adjusted for drift, lead
wire resistanee urnd input channel nonlineartttes.

EnhancedAnalogInputDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB19es 216 - 5
FunctionCode 216

Qualityof Output N The quality of output N ls marked bad lf one of the followtng
conditions exist:

o Input reading is out of range.

. Channel hardware has failed.
. Open ctrcult.
. Input channel has not been callbrated.
. Input channel ls dtsabled.
o Input channel has not been properly conflgured.

A thennocouple channel also indicates bad qualty if the cold

junction reference chosen for compensation shows bad quality.

APPLICATIO'VS

Refer to the applications section of function code 215.

Enhanced
AnalogInputDefinition
2 1 6- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode217- EnhancedCalibrationCommand

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The enhanced callbratlon comm€rnd functlon code [ECC) per-

mlts caltbratlon Ernd dlagnostlc testtng of the IIvIASIO3 IJnlver-
sal Analog Input Module. .

The operator lnlttates, guldes and termlnates a callbmtlon or

dtagnostlc sequence wtth thts enhanced callbratton command
functlon code. Commands are entered by tunlng thls block. ,
The status of the command may be determtned by examfnfir$
Sl after the tune operatlon ls completed. If Sf ls zero after
'.
tunlng functlon code 2L7, an erTor has occtured.
'
Before beglnnfng callbratlon, each channel must be conflg-
ured with one functlon code 2L6, and the callbratlon t5pe
defined in 54 of function code 2I7 must be conslstent wfth
the input signal defrned ln 54 of function code 216.

A detailed descrlptlon of arry command errors ls provlded as

an output (N+4) to thls function block. Thl.s output reflects
the status of the most recently lssued callbratlon conrmartd.

Erors encountered during callbratlon of a partlcular chan-

nel a.re also reported as €rn output (N+1) to thls functlon
block. Thls output reflects the status for the channel refer- l
enced ln the most recent command. For more lnformatlon
refer to the IMA9,IO9 llniaensal Anq.log Input Module prod-
uct lnstmctlon.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R Unconectedvalueof inPutsignal
N+1 R Channelcalibrationstatus
N+2 R Gustomgain adiustment

Command
EnhancedCalibration
r-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 217-1
FunctionCode 217

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N+3 R Customotfsetadjustment
N+4 R Calibration command status

SPECIFtCAT'O^rS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 I 0-255 Calibrationoperationcpde
S2 Y 0 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof functioncpde215 usedto configureinput
module
S3 Y 0 I Full Inputmodulechannelnumber
S4 Y 0 I 0 , 1o r 2 Calibrationtype:
0 = low level(millivolt,thermocuuple)
1 = highlevel
2=RTD
S5 Y 0.000 R Full Calibrationparameter 1
S6 Y 0.000 R Full Calibration parameter 2
S7 N 0 I Full Spare
S8 N 0.000 R Full Spare

EXPLANATION

Specification Sl is tuned to the proper command code for the

calibration operation to be performed. Speclflcatlon Sf ls
returned as a zero tn the event of a callbratton command
error, and must be changed before sending another calibra-
tion command to the module. Speclflcation St ts unehanged tf
calibration command processlng ls successful.

l. Disable point removes a channel from normal input

scan processing. A polnt must be dtsabled before performtng
a point calibration command to prevent cdlbratlon related
data from being interpreted as process data by the rest of the
system. Calibration should only be performed using precision
voltage or resistance sources applied at tJre termtral bloeks.
In additiofi, before a point ca.n be suecessfully disabled, the
point mnst first be configured with a function code 216.

2. Perform point ea,libratilon using externql referenee -

the precision voltage or resistance source must be connected
prior to issuing this command. Before a successful point cali-
bration can be implemented, the calibratton tSpe defined tn
54 of function code 2L7 mnst be conslstent wtth the input
signal $pe defined in S4 of function code 2L6. Refer to the
speciflc examples under the 54 explanatlons tn thts function

EnhancedCalibration Command
217- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 217

code. Also refer to the cdtbratton sectlon of the IIVIASIOS

product lnstmctlolt.

3. Enable poittt - terminates the fleld callbratlon sequence

for an tnput ehannel t54le. A potnt must be enabled before
normal tnput processtng can occur. Selected gafn and offset
values wtll be reset to 1.0 and O.O, respecttvely, if a successful
calibration has been performed.

4. Point etrcorpe resets (clears) calbratlon point ttforma-

tlon for a parttcular channel tlil the mtddle of a calibratlon
sequence. It clears only the polnt data. Thts allows a restart of
a cdlbratton procedure for the specifted channel. The point
escape courmand does not enable the channel.

5. Set qtstom goin snd olfset d|ustment - allows a lin-

ear adjustment factor to be entered. Ttrls will be applied to tJ:e
input signal after atl drift and nonlireearlty corrections, but
before conversion to engineering units. This value is applied
to low level, high level and reslstartce vahles.

6. Reset custom gain olnd olf*t adjusfinent - carr-cels any

prevtously entered custom gatn and offset adJustment for the
speclfied tnput channel t54re.After issulng thls command, tlre
gain for the tnput channel tSpe ls one and tJre offset ls zero.

Z. Displorg uneofieeted point do;to. (pereent of positiae

-
fiuill scale) performs no operation other tJran to update the
uncorrected output data value for the spectfied lnput channel
fblock output N of functlon code zLT).

8. Ilpdate point do;tq - causes a new scan of the specified

input channel to be performed and the output data value of
the block to be updated wlth the ne\il uncorrected value.

9. Input module escqpe commo;nd - performs point escape

command to all fO channels and cold junctlon reference on
the II\{ASIO3 module.

10. bcpander bns test command performs single test of

expander bus between the module and the secondary input
module. The test verifies transmission, receptton and data
integrity of messages passed between the module and the sec-
ondary input module (intended as an additional diagnostic for
the input module bus lnterface). Thls oPeration can be per-
formed with a local or remotely configured II\4ASIO3 module.
This test can be performed on-line.

l l. Restore frctory calihration commo;nd - overwrltes the

field callbratlon data fn NnmAI\d wtth the ori$lnal factory cali-
bratlon parameters. Thts command also resets any values
entered by the set custom galn and offset command.

EnhancedCalibrationCommand
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB199s 217-3
Function Code 217

s2 Spectfication 52 tdentifies the block address of the EASD

block (functton code 215) that tdenttfies whtch lnput module
is referred to by the command speclfled tn Sl.

NOTE: In MFP firmwarerevisionBE0, S2 is the input module

addressof the modulereferredto by the commandspecifiedin 51.

s3 Speciflcation 53 ldentifies the module tnput channel number

of the applicable command speclfled tnr Sl.

S4 Specification 54 identilies the t14peof calibratton performed.

Q = low level (millivolt, thennocouple)

I = high level
t=RTD

For calibration of the II\{ASIO3 module, the cdtbratlon t5pe

defined in 54 of function code 2L7 must be consistent with
the input signal tSpe defined in 54 of function code 216. Con-
sider the following examples.

Example 1 ff calibrating a channel for millivolts or thermocouples, then S4 of function code 217
must be set to O and S4 of function code 216 must be set to any one of the millivolt or
thermocouple input types. In this case, 54 of function code 216 must be within the
following:

x 0 1> 5 4 < x 2 0
or
x60>54<xgg

Exampfe2 lt calibratinga channelfor high levelvoltage,then S4 of function@de 217 mustbe

set to 1 and 54 of functioncode 216 must be set to on€ of the high level voltage
ranges(4 to 20 mA is consideredhigh levelinput type). In this case,lunctioncode
216 shouldbe withinthe following:

x40>54<60
or
34 = x99

Exampfe3 tt calibratinga channelfor RTD mode,lhen 94 of functionde 217 must b6 set to 2

and 54 ol func-tioncode 216 must be set to any one ol the RTD types. In this case,
54 of lunctioncode216 shouldbe withinthe followingrange:

x20>54<x40

S5 Specification 55 is used for channel tnput tSrpe calibration

and changing the custom gain and offset value. Calibraflon
parameter one provides a real value dependent upon the t1rye
of command Sl speclfles.

When S I equals two, polnt callbratlon, ttrls parameter specl-

fles the trre value of the slgnal applted to the tnput channel
during the calibration operatlon. Enter an 55 value for each
calibration point. Up to 11 points may be tdenttfled for adjust-
ment of input channel nonlinearitles, resulttng in ten linear

EnhancedCalibrationCommand
2 1 7- 4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Gode217

segments for correctlon. These calibratlon polnts may be

applted ln any order. The unlts for the polnt value are deter-
mined by the gpe of callbratlon operatlon speclfted in 54.

For example,

Low level = -1OOmtllivolts to +1OOmilllvolts

High level = -10 volts to +1O volts

RTD = $ ohms to 5OO ohms

When Sl equals five, spectfled galn and offset applications,

55 speclfies the gafn and SO speclfies the offset. When the
IIvIASIO3 module is shtpped, the default value for gatn is set to
one and the default value for offset ls set to zero. Thls corn-
mand (St equals flve) sets both the galn and offset parame-
ters simultaneously each tlme lt ls entered.

The galn, or slope, ts the llnear correctlon to be applied. Both

gain and offset adJustments are changed at one time.

S6 Speciflcation 56 ls used to speclff an offset for tlre custom

gain and offset command (St equals five). It provides a real
value dependent upon the tlpe of command specified tn 51.

This parameter spectfies the offset of the ltnear correctlon to

be performed. The units for the offset value are determined by
the tlpe of cdibration operation specified ln 34. For example:

Low level = -10O mtllivolts to +lOO millivolts

High level = -10 volts to +IO volts

RTD = $ ohms to 5OO ohms

Outputs

N Output N is the uncorrected value of the input signal. Thls

output gives tlle value of the input signal without any of the
calibration, drlft, lead wlre, or cold Junction compensations
applied. The raw digitized value is eonverted to a range of
-100 to +10O.

N+1 Output N+ I ls the channel calibration status. This output

gives the detailed status of the last cdibration operatlon per-
formed on the speclfied channel.

Q = channel calibration command was successful

I = channel reference error; the channel referenee for the

specifled lnput tlpe has malfunctloned

EnhancedCalibrationCommand
l-E96-2008 rs FEB19es 217 - 5
FunctionCode 217

2 = out of r€rnge error; tlle lnput source applted to the

IIVIASIO3 module termlratlon devlce ls not connected
properly or ls outside of the range speclfled

$ = channel not calibrated error; appltes when attempting

to set or reset the custom gain and offset of an uncall-
brated channel t5pe

4 = I\ilRAIVI error

$ = analog to digital converter erTor

$ = point not on curve error; polartty of the tnrput source

may be incomect or the value spectfted by 55 does not
correspond wtth the tnput slgnd rneasured

NOTE:Eventhoughthis error has occurred,the |MAS|OS module

will stillcalibrateto thesepoints.At leasttwo pointcalibrationcom-
mandsmustbe issuedto obseruethe polnt not on cunrc error.

N+2 Output N+2 is the selected gain adjustment. Thls output gives
the value of the specilied gain adjustment. The default value
is one.

N+3 Output N+3 is the selected offset adjustment. This output

gives the value of the selected specified offset adJustment. The
default value is zero.

The units for this value are ohms for an RTD tnput and volts
for high level and millivolt inputs.

N+4 Output N+4 represents the status of the most recently

issued calibration command. Output tnformatlon is orga-
nized in the format shown. Each declmal dlgtt represents one
type of status.

Q = command parameters were spectlied correctly

I = 51 eommand code not valtd; veriff that there ls a func-

tion code 216 conflgured for the potnt whtch ls being
calibrated

2 = 32 does not reference a valid IIVIASIO3 module func-

tion code 2L5 block

$ = S3 channel number not valid

4 = 54 calibration t5rye invalid or not same as t1rye already

in progress; veri$r tllat calibration tlpe (function code
2L7, 54) is conslstent with conflgured signal tlpe
(function code 216, 54)

5 - 55 calibration point out of range for type of input

specified by 54

EnhancedCalibrationCommand
2 1 7- 6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode 217

10 = polnt not dtsabled

20 = potnt already dlsabled

30 = calibration point count error must be more thart

one to enable point or less than 12 when performing
potnt callbratlons

40 = factory caltbratton data is lost; input module cannot

perform fleld callbratlon

50 = restore factory callbration operatlon failed due to an

NN/RAI\{ CITOT.

ro0 = €r'fof occurred durlng channel calibration; refer to

N+l

1000 = tnput module not responding

2000 = €xpander bus test failed

9999 = calibration command curTently proeessing

EnhancedCalibrationCommand
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 2 1 7- 7
ffi

I
 FunctionCode 218- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 218 - 1
ffi
o

o
 Function Code 219r GommonSequence

L DESCRIPTION

The common seguence (CSEQ) funetlon block serves as the

lnterface between the connected batch sequence (BSE9)
function block and other (remote) batch sequences.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N R CSEQcarnpaignnumber
N+1 R CSEQbatchnumber
N+2 R CSEQlot number
N+3 R CSEQreservationstatus
N+4 R CSEQownershipstatus
N+5 R Spare
N+6 R Spare
N+7 R Spare
N+8 R Spare
N+9 B Spare

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default TyPe Range Descrlption

S1 N 30 I 0 - 9998 Block address of batch sequence block
S2 N 1 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof controlmodeselect(boolean):
0 = op€rator(manual)
| = r€rnote(automatic)
S3 N 6 I 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof reserveallowinput:
0.0 = reservenot permitted
1.0= reservepermitted

CommonSequence
r-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 219 - 1
FunctionCode 219

nued)
SPE CI FICATIOruS@onti

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S4 N 6 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof ownershipallowinput:
-1.0 = ownershipnotpermitted,
queueis off andflush
0.0 = ownershipnot permitted,queueis on
1.0= ownershippermitted,queueis on
2.0 = ownershippermitted,queueis off
S5 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Sparereal input
S6 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Sparereal input
S7 N 2 0 - 9998 Sparereal input
s8 N 2 0 - 9998 Sparebooleaninput
S9 N 2 l 0 - 9998 Sparebooleaninput
sl0 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Sparebooleaninput
sl1 Y 1 R 0 - 9.2E18 Statusupdateminimumtime (in secs)
sl2 Y 120 R 0 - 9.2El8 Statusupdatemaximumtime (in secs)
sl3 N 1 I Full Ma,ximumnumberof programconnections
s14 Y 0 I Full Spareparameter
s15 Y 0 I Full Spareparameter
sl6 Y 0 R Full Spareparameter
sl7 Y 0 R Full Spareparameter

EXPLANATION

The following explanatlons descrlbe each speclficatlon and

provide a detatled descrtptlon of how t}re CSEQ block tnter-
faces urith the BSEO and Batch Hlstortan (BHIST) functlon
blocks.

Specifications

s1 Specification Sl links the CSEQ block to a BSEQ block. TIle

CSEQ block must be connected to the first output (N) of the
BSEQ block.

s2 Specification 52 selects the control mode of the CSEQ block.

Q = operator mode (manual batch sequence control)

I = r€rrote mode (automatic batch sequence control)

In the operator mode, the batch sequence recipe, phase and

mn/hold inputs control execution of the batch prograrlr.

Remote mode disables the batch sequence recipe, phase and

nrn/hold inputs and eontrol of program execution ls available
to other programs connected to the CSEQ block. Remote
mode disables the campalgn, batch and lot number lnputs to
the BHIST block. The campalgn, batch, and lot numbers are
passed to the BHIST from the CSEQ block.

Common Sequence
219-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 219

S3 Specification S3 ls ttre reserve allow input. The resenre allow

input determines ff the CSEQ block may be reseryed. Pro-
grams connected to the CSEQ block may request to reserve
the common sequence. The act of reservatlon restrlcts future
access to owrrershtp (remote program control) of the common
sequence.

O.O= r€senre not perrnltted, delete cun:ent resenratlon

1.O = r€s€nre permttted

s4 Speclficatlon 54 ls the ownershtp allow block lnput. Ttte

CSEQ block may be owned by only one program at a tlme.
Speclficatlon 54 determtnes lf a CSEQ block may be owned.
Program requests for ownershfp that cannot be granted may
be deferred to the ownershtp queue for later execution. Thls
tnput also determlnes the status of the ownershtp queue.

- 1.0 = ownershtp not perrnltted, ownershlp queue closed

and cleared

O.0 = ownership not permitted, ownershlp queue open

l.o = ownership permltted, ownership queue open

2.O = ownershtp permttted, ownershtp queue closed

55 through 37 Spare real lnput.

38 through S10 Spare boolean tnput.

sl1 Spectflcatlon Sl l ls the mtnimum tlme (in seconds) between

status updates. Thus, S11 determines the ma:dmum rate the
CSEO block reports status data to connected programs. Thls
speciflcatlon can limlt the bus and loop traffic generated by
rapldly changing CSEQ status data.

sl2 Specificatlon S12 defines the ma:dmum tlme (fn seconds)

between updates. In the event that CSEQ status data ls
unchanging, S12 determtnes the rate the CSEO block checks
the connection status of connected programs.

sl3 Specificatlon S13 defi.nes ttre mardmum number of progftlm

connections that may be supported by the CSEQ bloek at once.

S14 through S17 Spare parameters.

FUNCTIONBLOCKOUTPUTS

N (CS$ eampaign numberl Output N shows the curTent eam-

paign number of ttre BSEQ block.

N+1 (CS$ batch number) Output N+1 shows the current batch
number of the BSEQ block.

CommonSequence
l-E96-2008 rs FEB1e9s 219 - 3
FunctionCode 219

N+2 (CS9 lot numher) Output N+2 shows the current lot num-
ber of the BSEQ block.

N+3 (CSeg reseroation statns) Output N+3 shows tf ttre CSEO

block ls resenred and whtch productlon varlables (campalgn,
batch or lot) of ownershtp requestlng programs must match the
reservatlon. The value shown by N+3 ts a tlrree-dtglt tnteger:
x x x

Batchnumbermatchrequired
Hundredsdlglt
Campaignnumbermatchrequired
0=Do
| =lBS

Examples:

OO0= CSEQ block not reserved

f O0 = c€trlpaign number must match
011 = batch and lot numbers must match
11f = c€trnpaign, batch and lot numbers must match

N+4 (CSID$ ournerchip strztns) Output N+4 shows if a remote pro-

gram owns the CSEQ block.

O.O= CSEQ block not owned

l.O = CSEQ block owned

N+5 through N+9 Spare outputs.

APPLICATION

The primary objective of the CSEQ block is to reduce the

number of functton codes requlred to lmplement batch ma,n-
agement or unit management program stmctures. In a com-
mon sequence configuratlon, the CSEQ block provtdes the
interface between two BSEQ blocks. Thls tnterface senres as a
eommunication path established by one batch sequence (the
client) connecting to a second batch sequence (the seryer).

In order for a client program to galn eontrol of a CSEQ block

(server program), tfre client progrtrm must aequire ownership
of the seryer. The client program tl:at has aequired ownership
of the CSEQ block (server) may perform the following opera-
tions on the server via the CSEQ block:

. Select the recipe and phase and start or restart the pro-
gra,m.

o Select the progr€rm to execute.

CommonSequence
219-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 219

. Put the program tnto hold loglc.

. Send command-vartables to the CSEQ block.

. Unacqulre (release ownershlp o0 the CSEQ block.

In thts manner, the cllent to server relatlonshlp between pro-

grams, wlth the cllent potentlally controltlng the senrer pro-
gram executlon, ls posslble wtth the use of CSEQ blocks. One
program may be the owner (cllent) of a second program or
CSEQ (server) block, and be a server or common sequence to
a thlrd program. Flgure 219-1 shows an example of a produc-
tlon tratn that lllustrates thls polnt.

PROGRAMX: PROGRAMY PROGRAMZ

CLIENTTO UNIT2 CLIENTTO UNIT 3 CLIENTTO NEXT UNIT
SERVERTO SERVERTO UNIT 1 SERVERTO UNIT 2
PRB/IOUS UNIT

Flgwe 2 19- 1. Examytle Prductlon Trafrl

In Flgure 219-L, the BSEO block perfonns tts usual role of

executtng the batch program. The CSEQ block provldes t}te
interface by whtch the program may be shared and controlled
by other batch programs.

In the operator mode, the BSEQ block controls executlon of

the batch progra,m nonnally. Reeipe, phase and run/hold
inputs to the BSEQ block control program execution. In this
mode the BHIST block buffers data for batch records by batch
and lot numbers selected by the BHIST lnputs.

The remote mode disables ttre BSEQ block rectpe, phase and
mn/hold inputs and the BHIST block campalgn, batch and lot
number inputs. The CSEO block gatns control of these inputs
in the remote mode. Once a connected program acquires owrt-
ership of the CSEQ block, tJre program that o\ilns the CSEQ
block controls these inputs to the BSEQ and BHIST blocks.

NOTE:The E-STOP(executedstop) and operatoracknowledge

inputsto the BSEQremainenabledin both modes.The operator
cansuspendbatchsequenceexecutiondespitethe CSEQmode.

All connected programs recelve status lnformatlon from the

CSEQ bloek. SpecffIcatlons Sf f and S12 control the rate of
transmlsslon. Ttre CSEO block c€rn only have one owner at a
tlme and only the owner can send commands to the CSEQ
block. The CSEQ block can be resenred wlth productlon ID
numbers (campalgn, batch and lot). Thls restrlcts future

CommonSequence
l-E96-200B 1sFEBiees 219 - 5
FunctionGode 219

ownershlp of the CSEQ block to programs belongtng to

related productlon runs.

Before a program can communlcate wtth a CSEO block lt

must establtsh a connectlon to the CSEO block. The CSEQ
block has a configurable limit (Sl3) on the number of connec-
tions it can support at once. When a program is no longer
interested in a CSEQ block, it may unconnect from the CSEO
block. Thus, making the connection slot avatlable to other
programs. While a CSEQ block is connected, the following
data is available to all connected programs:

. Connection status.
. Reservation status.
. Ownershtp status.
o Control mode.
o Program status (inactive, mnntng, holdlnd).
o Recipe number.
o Phase number.
. Fault code.
. Campaign, batch and lot numbers.
. Eight status variables.

Table 219- f provides a descrtptlon of the speclflcatlon set-

tings for that CSEQ block lm Figure 2L9-2. Ftgure 219-2 ls an
example of a common sequence. Once there ls a connectlon
between the BSEQ block and the Sf [nput of t]re CSEQ block,
no other corul.ection to function blocks ls requlred.

Table 2 19 - 1. F.ttrction Cde 2 1I Specificalion ffitq s Jor Ftgwe 2 19-2

Spec Value Description
S1 N BlockaddressN of the BSEQlinksthe CSEQto the batchunitcontrolledby the BSEQand
its associatedprograms.
S2 N+1 The TSTALMblock providesthe booleansignaldeterminedby the modeof the BSEQcontrol
pushbutton.
S3 5 Defaultvalue(BLKADDR5 = 0.0)deteminesthat reservationof lhis GSEQis not permitted.
This applicationdoesnot usethe RESERVEfeatureof the CSEQstructure.
S4 6 Defaultvalue(BLKADDR6 = 1.0)determinesthat ownershipof the CSEQls permittedand
the acquirerequestqueueis enabled.Thus,if the CSEQis not owned,acquirerequEstsare
granted;if it is owned,requestswill be stored.
s5 - s10 Spareinputs.Usedefaultvalues.
sl1 1 Defaultvalueof 1.0limitsthe mar<imum rateat whichthe CSEQgeneratesexceptionreports
to no morethan one messageper second.This putsa limitto the amountof loopand bus
traffic that the CSEQmay inject to the system.
sl2 60 Defaultvalue of 60.0, in the eventof unchangingoommonsequencestatusdatia,detgrmines
the rate at which he CSEQsendsa messageto vedfy the CONNECTIONstatus ol all con-
nectedprograms.
sl3 2 Witha valueof 2 selected,the CSEQcan support2 connectedprograms(e.9.,current
owner,nextowner).
s 1 4- S 1 7 Spareparameters. Usedefaultvalues.

CommonSequence
219-6 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 21I

CAMPAIGN

+
O

sl
sa
sit

1{+5

ffi:
t r r l
I
ul-t-:---- ------! I
l t l
r r l
(ca) j I

!
l t l
I
t t l
I
r r l
r t l
l t l
r r l
r r l
l t l
r t l
r r l
l l l
l 1 l

NOTES:
BSEQ CONTROLPUSHBUTTON 1. IN MANUAL i,IODE, THE OPERATOR
BSEOTAG BSEODESCTD(T
SELECTS BSEO CO{TROL STATUS BY
PUTTING THE 'v|SDD EITHER IN
OUTPUTSTATE3 RUN I RUNNING FB INPUT 1 RUN, I{OLD OR E.STOP.
OUTPUTSTATE2 E-STOPE reuur FB INPUT2
2. IN AUTO i'OE)E, THE CSEO EI.IABLES
OUTPUTSTATE1 HOU) E XOUOttrlC FB INPUT3 RE]I'OTE PROGRATi,S TO @NTROL
DEFAULTSTATE AUTO DONE FB INPUT4 THE BSEO RECIPE, PFIASE AT.ID
IIODE: AUTdMANUAL MSDDlvlODE RU}U}OLD INPUTS.

TWA

Figure 2 19-2. TUpicaI Batctr *qt ence @rttrol

CommonSequence
l-Eg6-200 15 FEB 1995 2 1 9- 7
W
o

I
 FunctionGode220- BatchHistorian

GENERALDESCR/,Pr,ON

The batch htstorlan (BHISD functlon code supports the batch

histortan feature of Batch 90. Thls functlon block resldes
within the module and ls part of the overall functlon code
configuration. It links to the batch sequence block (BSECi,
functton code 148) and provides a buffer between a Batch 90
program and the batch historian and queues that lnformatlon
into the BHIST block. When a new event is added to the block,
the BHIST block generates €rn exceptlon report teflftrg the hls-
tortan that more data needs to be stored. Ttte batch hlstortart
then polls the lnformatlon from the BHIST block and stores lt
to disk. Each BHIST block can output data to up to etght hls-
torlans. For detatled tnformation on the batch htstorlan, ref-
erence the Bo;tch Historian instmction.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Description

N B Summarystatus: Q= not all bad
| = all bad
N+1 R Statusof historian1: -1 = not expected
e = good
| =bad
N+2 R Stiatusof histonan 2: -1 = not expected
g = good
1 =bad
N+3 R Statusof historian3: -l = not expected
e = good
1 =bad
N+4 R Statusof historian4: -1 = not expected
e = good
1 =bad
N+5 R Statusof historian5: -1 = not expected
Q= good
I =bad

BatchHistorian
l-E96-2008 1s FEB1995 220-1
FunctionCode 220

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Btk Type Descrlptlon

N+6 R Statusof historian6: -1 = not expected
0=god
1 =bad
N+7 R Statusof historian7: -1 = not expected
e = good
1=bad
N+8 R Status of historian 8: -1 = not expected
e = good
I =bad
N+9 R number
Campaign
N+l0 R Batch number
N+11 R Lotnumber
N+l2 R Eventnumber
N+l3 R Spare

SPECIFICATIO^'S

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 Y 0 0-1 H storian 1 expected; 0 = llo, | = los
S2 Y 0 0-1 H storian2 expected;0 = no, | = los
S3 Y 0 0-1 H storian 3 expected; 0 = ho, 1 = !9s
S4 Y 0 0-1 H storian4 expected;0 = llo, 1 = tos
S5 Y 0 0-1 H storian 5 expected; 0 = ho, 1 = |es
S6 Y 0 0-l Historian 6 expected; 0 = Do, | = 1los
S7 Y 0 0-1 H storian 7 expected; 0 = llo, | = tes
S8 Y 0 0-1 H storian8 expected;0 = no, 1 = les
S9 Y 0 0-2 Erroraction:
0 = alwaysstan
1 = startif any historianis good
2 = startonlyif all historiansare good
s10 Y 120 Full Time-outtime(secs)
s11 N 300 Full Butfersize (bytes)
sl2 N 2 0 - 9998 Block address of BSEQ block
sl3 N 2 0 - 9g9g Block address of campaign number input
s14 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof batchnumberinput
sls N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof lot numberinput
s16 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof checklD input
sl7 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof spareinput
s18 N 2 0 - 9998 Blockaddressof spareinput
s19 Y 0 Full Spare

Specifications

51 throughSB These specificafions identiff the hlstorian expected. Up to

eight batch historians can monitor the BHIST block. Each hls-
torian has an option page for spect$/ing the htstorian number

BatchHistorian
220-2 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 Function Code 220

(one through elght). All speclflcatlons that match a hlstorlart

number spectfled on the optton page should be set to one. For
example, tf hlstorlans one and four are used and speclfled on
the optlon page, Sl and 54 must be set to one, 52, S3, 55 and
S8 must be set to zero.

s9 This spectflcatlon determlnes how the Batch 90 progfam wtll

respond on a hold to run transttlon lf a batch hlstorlan has
gone off-llne. Speclflcatlon 59 has no effect lf an actlve batch
histortan goes off-ltne whlle the batch program ts runnlng. [f
59 equals zero, the program always starts. If 59 equals one,
the program starts lf at least one hlstort€rn ls good. If 59
equals two, the program starts only tf all hlstorlans are good.

NOTE:If the batchhistorianwill not allowthe programto start,out-

put N+3of the BSEQwill indicatea faultcode'24.

sl0 Ttre tlme-out tlme speclflcatlon determlnes how long tlle

BHIST functlon block walts for acknowledgement before
marktng a batch htstorlan bad. Bad htstorlans that resume
taf{ing events from t}re BHIST block are marked good. [f a tils-
tortan ls bad on a hold to run transltlon, the batch Program
wlll not start runnlng until the time set ln SlO explres.

sl1 Buffer slze sets the amount of RAI\{, ln one byte lncrements,
that is used for holding the event and watch events before
data is ovennrrltten. The average event ls 20 bytes. The send
message to the htstorlan ls lOO bytes. Under norrnal opera-
tion, the htstortan wtll typlcally potl the event data from the
BHISTblock at a maximum of every 20 seconds.

s12 ThJs input is connected to the lowest block address (t{) of t}re
batch sequence functlon block (BSEQ) controlli:rg the batch
program (Fig. 22O-L).

sl3 This input ls connected to the functlon block tllat deflnes the
batch campaign number. Campaign number can be used by
the eommon sequence functlon block (CSEQ).

sl4 Thls lnput ls connected to the funetton block that deflnes the
batch number. Batch number speclfies the batch file name of
the BSEQ data saved tn the batch htstoriall.

sls Thls tnput ls connected to the functton block that deflnes the
bateh lot number. I,ot number specifies the lot file name of
the BSEQ data saved tn the batch historian. On a complete to
run transltlon, both the batch and lot numbers EIrelocked ln.
They cutrulot be changed until the program completes.

sl6 This lnput checks the historian function block to vertff that
the current batch and lot number (identtfied by Sf 4 and S15)
are unique. If <516> equals zero, it does not check for unlque
batch and lot numbers. If <516> equals one, lt ehecks for
unique batch and lot files.

BatchHistorian
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 220-3
FunctionCode 220

THE BATCH HISTOHAN BL@I(

BELOT^'CCI.LESTS HISTORICAL
DATA GENERATED BY REASTOR A
REACTOR KA BATCH SEOUENCE AITIOSENDS ITTOTHE
LOGIC BATCH lD r I BATC}I HISTORIAT.I

1ee) sl_ lE]llfsl

301

&
3dt
G--
56e
I

Figure 22O - 1. Examytle oJ BHIST F\nctron Blrck Crinfiglurr:alion

S 1 7 ,S 1 8 a n d S 1 9 Resenred for future llse.

Outputs

N This output shows the overall status of the htstori€rns com-

municating with the BHIST block. If thts output is zero, at
least one batch historian is marked good. If thts output ls
one, all expected batch historians are bad.

N+l through These outputs indicate the status of historians one through
N+8 eight. If any of these outputs are zero, that batch hlstortan ls
active and operating correctly. If arry of these outputs Erreone,
the batch historian is expected, but tt ls not emptying the
buffer within the time set by speclficatlon SlO.

N+9 through These outputs indicate which campaign (N+9), batch (N+lO)
N+l1 and lot (N+ I l) numbers were locked ln on a complete to run
transition. T5rpically these outputs are used to track remote
manual set constants so that the operator can see the actual
numbers being used.

N+l 2 Output block N+12 ls an exceptlon report output. The event

number is zero buntll the batch program begins executing.
This output increments by one every tlme a neu/ ltem ts
inserted into the BHIST block event queue.

BatchHistorian
220-4 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode 221- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 221 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode222- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBtees 222 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode 223- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
t-E96-2008 rs FEBlees 223 - 1
ffi
I

o
 FunctionCode 224- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 rs FEBlees 224 - 1
ffi

t
 FunctionCode 225- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 1sFEBlees 225 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode 226- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 226 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode227- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
r-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 227 - 1
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode 228- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 rs FEB1e9s 228 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionGode229- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 15FEBlees 229 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode230- StrategicLoop Controllerl/O

GENERALDESCRIPTION

The strategtc loop controller tnput and output (Src VOI ftlnc-
tlon code provtdes the lnterfaee between the control conflgu-
ratton and the Tlpe SrcOl Strateglc LooP Controller I/O
hardware. Functlon code 23O resides in flxed block 1O0 and
uses 17 block addresses (blocks lOO through 116). Ttte Src
VO functlon block has:

. Four andog lnputs.

o Three digital lnputs.
o One pulse lnput.
. TIvo andog outputs.
o Four digltal outputs.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlption

100 R Analoginput1
101 R Analoginput2
102 R Analoginput3
103 R Analoginput4
104 R Analogoutput1
105 R Analog output 2
106 B Digitalinput1
fi7 B Digitalinput2
108 B Digitalinput3
109 B Digitaloutput1
110 B Digitalouput 2
111 B Digitaloutput3
112 B Digitaloutput4
113 R Pulseinput

StrategicLoopControllerl/O
r-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 230-1
FunctionCode230

OUTPUTS @ontinued)

Btk Type Descrlptlon

114 B Status:
0 - good
1=bad
115 R Reservedfor futureuse
116 R Reservedfor futureuse

SPECtFtCATtOfVS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Ilescrlptlon

S1 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition1
S2 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Block address of analog input definition 2
S3 N 2 l 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition3
S4 N 2 l 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof analoginputdefinition4
S5 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof analogoutput1
S6 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof analogoutput2
S7 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof digitaloutput1
S8 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Block address of digital output 2
S9 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof digitalouput 3
s10 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof digitaloutput4
s11 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Block address of pulse input
s12 Y 0 I 0orl Failureaction:
0 = trip TypeSLC01/21controller
1 = Gootinue operation
s13 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Sparerealinput
s14 Y 0.000 R Full Spare parameter
sl5 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter

EXPLANAT'ON

The Tlpe SLC Strategic l.oop Controller uses the executlve

block (functlon code 8 f at flxed block address zero), the seg-
ment control block (functton code 82 at flxed block address
15), and the extended executlve block (functlon code 90 at
frxed block address 20) to set up overall controller operatlons.

In addition to the fixed Src UO block (function code 230), the

T5rpeSrc controller also has three built-fn ASCII string descrip-
tor blocks (function code I l3) one Src statton (functton code
23I), and four analog input defurition blocks (function code
182). Table E-8 in Appendix E shows the fixed block addresses
for the Tlpe Src controller. For more lnformatlon, refer to the
S,I!C;OI Strategic Loop @ntroller produet tnstmction.

StrategicLoopControllerllO
230-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 230

Speclflcatlon Sl ls the block address of analog tnput deflnl-

tion (functlon code f 82) for analog lnput one. This nnk allows
communlcatlon between the Src UO block and the analog
input definttion block.

S2 Speclficatlon 52 ls the block address of analog lnput deflni-

tion (function code 182) for analog lnput two. This link allows
communicatlon between the Src I/O block and the analog
lnput deflnitlon block.

s3 Spectficatlon Sg ls the block address of analog lnput defint-

tlon (functton code 182) for andog lnput three. This ltnk
allows communlcatlon between the SI,C VO block and the
analog lnput defutftlon block.

s4 Speclflcatlon 54 ls the block address of analog lnput deflnt-

tlon (functton code 182) for analog lrput four. Thls llnk allows
communlcatlon between the Src I/O block and the analog
input deflnttlon block.

S5 Speclflcatlon 55 ls the block address of the value for analog

output one.

S6 Specification SO is ttre block address of the value for analog

output two.

S7 Specificatlon 57 is tJ:e block address of the value for digital

output one.

s8 Specification 58 is the block address of the value for dlgital

output two.

s9 Specificatlon Sg is the block address of ttre value for dlgital

output tttree.

sl0 Specificatlon SlO ls the block address of the vdue for digital
output four.

sl1 Speclflcatlon Sl l ts the bloek address of the pulse tnput /fre-

quency irrput block.

sl2 Specification Sf 2 defines the system response to a bad analog

input reference voltage.

Q = trip the Tlpe Src controller

1 = corrtinue operation

S13 through S15 Spare.

StrategicLoopControllerI/O
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 230-3
FunctionCode 230

Outputs

This block produces a total of 17 outputs. The flrst L4 out-

puts provlde values to the system for the Src VO hardware.
Output Ll4 ls a status ft4g and the last two outputs are
reseryed for future llse.

APPLICATIOA'S

Figure 23O- I illustrates a possible conflguratlon uslng the

Src VO block. Specificatlons Sl through 54 are the block
addresses of tl:e analog input deflnttlon blocks. Tttese sPectfl-
cations provide the link between the Src VO block and the
analog input definitlon block. ThLs corrmunlcatlon llnk
deflnes how the correspondlng analog tnput ls tnterpreted.

Specifications S5 and SG are tJre block addresses of the M/A

stations. These specifications provide the values of the analog
outputs.

Specifications 57 through SlO are the addresses of the dtgital

outputs. These links provide the digital output values.

Specification SI f is the bloek address of the pulse lnput /fre-

quency block. Ttle pulse lnput functton code deflnes how the
pulse input operates.

N2 Al
At3 Al
Al.1 Al

oor ul
oo2 0t2
ryWA
sP sP DO. DO I
MFC/P Pl I DO2
A O DO3
TR SPAREgpa
T s A
tfl
sl8
IJ( CJR
c/R
s20
t x c
o(
s?2,
l{ A e.rF
l.AA
s25
ltoA
s27 LDA
s27
s28 AO
s29 TRSA
r"",,Q

Fi,gure 23O- 7. Stafegic Loop Command. I/ O Blrck Configwation

StrategicLoopControllerllO
230 - 4 1sFEBlees l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionCode 231- StrategicLoop ControllerStation

L DESCRIPTION

The Tlpe SrcOl Strategtc lnop Controller (Src) statlon func-

tlon code provldes the lnterface between the control conflgura-
tlon and ttre strateglc loop controller faceplate. Thls furrctlon
code passes operatlng parameter values to the faceplate.

Example operatlng parameters lnclude the process varlable, set

polnt and control output. Functlon code 23L resldes at ffxed
btock 9OO and has L4 block outputs (9OO througlr 913). The
Src statton funcfl,on code allours performlng varlous control
actlorrs and tatrtng manual control of the outputs.

For more tnformatlon on the Tlpe Src controller, refer to

functlon code 23O and the TYpe SI,C Strategic LooP @tr'
troller product lnstmctlon.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk TyPe Descrlptlon

900 B Alarmstatus
901 B Alarm acknowledge key indicator
902 B Faceplate switch loop I
903 B Faceplate srvitch loop 2
904 B Auxiliaryswitch1
905 B Auxiliarysntitch2
906 B Auxiliaryswitch3
907 B Auxiliaryswitch4
908 B Mode (auto/manual)of digital output 1
909 B Mode(auto/manual) of digitaloutput2
910 B Mode(auto/manual) of digitaloutput3
911 B Mode(auto/manual) of digitaloutput4
912 R Reseruedfor futureuse
913 R Reservedfor futureuse

StrategicLoopControllerStation
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 231-1
Function Code 231

SPECIFICATIOruS
I
Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon
S1 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Block address of loop 1 iI/A stationl
S2 N 2 I 0-1023 Bfockaddressof loop zMll.stationl
S3 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof generalpurposealarm1
s4 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof generalpurposealarm2
S5 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockadclressof generalpurposealarm3
S6 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof generalpurposealarm4
S7 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof auxiliaryinput 1
S8 N 2 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof auxiliaryinput2
S9 N 0 I 0 - 1023 Block address of extemal alarm 1
sl0 N 0 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof extemalalarm2
sl1 N 1020 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof first ASCIIstringdescriptorblock
s12 N 1 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof digitaloutput1 outputoverride
permissive
s13 N 1 I 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof digitaloutput2 outputoveride
permissive
s14 N 1 0 - 1023 Blockaddressof digitaloutput3 outputoverride
permissive
s1s N 1 I 0-1023 Blockaddressof digitaloutput4 outputoveride
permissive
s16 N 1 I 0or1 Defaultmodeof outputs:
0 = ffi?nUal
1 = automatic
s17 Y 0 I Full Sparereal input
s18 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
sl9 Y 0.000 R Full Spareparameter
NOTE:
1. Retrievefromfunctioncode80.

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1 Specification Sl is the block address of the M/Astatton (fune-

tion eode 80) associated with loop one. Speciflcation S f has
two functiorls.

. Allows the Src station block to get loop informatlon frorn

the M/A station. Ttre Tlpe SLC controller can dlsplay thts
information on the faceplate. The M/A statlon must be
configured as a passlve station by setttng 516 of functlon
code 80 to 254.

o Enables the M/A station faceplate to be placed ilr auto-

matic or manual mode. AdJustment of the control output
is possible in manual mode and set polnt output tn auto-
matie mode.

StrategicLoopControllerStation
231-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode 231

s2 Spectflcatlon 52 ls the block address of the M/ A station (func-

tlon code 80) ln loop two. Refer to S1.

S3 Speclficatlon Sg ls ttre block address of general PurPose

alarm one. Its tnput ls a red number that ls usually the con-
trol output status of the devtce drlver block (functlon code
I2g, N+1) or andog tnput status of the analog lnput definttlon
(functlon code L82, N+1) lf so conflgured. Its purpose ls to
alarm the operator durtng bad status condltlons. Durlng a
bad status condltlon, the darm tndicator on the SLC f,aee-
plate flashes and the alarm status output of the SLC statlon
changes to a loglc 1. Ttre Src ahrm summary menu dlsplays
a GENERAL #l message whlle thls tnput ls a one.

s4 Spectllcatlon 54 ls the block address of general pu{pose

alarm two. The SI,C darm summary menu dtsplays a GEN-
ERAL #2 message whlle thts input ls a one. Refer to S3.

ss Specification 55 ls the block address of general Purpose

alarm three. The Src alarm summaly menu displays a GEN-
ERAL #3 message whtle thls lreput ls a one. Refer to 53.

s6 Speclficatlon SO ts the block address of general purpose

alarm four. The Src alarm summary menu dtsplays a GEN-
ERAL #4 message whlle this input ls a one. Refer to 53.

s7 Specificatton SZ ls the block address of atr:dllary lnput olle. Thls

tnput allows tl:e display of arry real block output. Engineering
units are dlsplayed using the ASCII block (function code 113).

s8 Specification 58 ts the block address of arrxiliary tnput two. This

input allows the display of arry real block output. Engineerin$
units are displayed using the A,SC[ block (function code 113).

s9 Specification 59 ls the block address of external alarm st$nal

one. A boolean input of one generates €rn alarm. The alarm
indicator on the SLC faceplate flashes and the darm status
output of the Src statlon changes to a loglc 1. The Src alarm
summary menu displays ErnW # I message whtle thls
input is a one.

sl0 Specification StO ts the block address of external alarm sig-

nal two. An lnput of one generates an alarm. TIle alarm lndl-
cator on the Src faceplate flashes and the alarm status
output of the Src station changes to a logic 1. The Src alarm
summary menu displays €ln W #2 message while t}tis
input is one.

sl1 Specification Sl l is the block address of the first ASCII strtng

descriptor bloek (function code l f g). ThJs specification Passes
loop tag narnes and engineering untts for display on the SLC
faceplate. Each fixed function code 113 contains lnformatlon
for lts respective loop.

StrategicLoopControllerStation
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 231-3
FunctionCode 231

sl2 Specilication S12 is the block address of the output overrtde

permissive for digital output one. When tle output of the
block specified by S12 ls a one, marnual overrlde of thts out-
put from the faceplate ls permltted (tf thls output ts unloeked
from the faceplate setup screen).

sl3 Speciflcation Sf g is the block address of the output override

permissive for digital output two. Refer to S 12.

sl4 Speclfication Sl4 ls the block address of the output overrtde

permissive for digital output three. Refer to Sl2.

sl5 Specification Sl5 is the block address of the output overrtde

permissive for digital output four. Refer to S L2.

sl6 Speclfieatlon Sf O controls the rnode of the dfftal outputs at

initialization.

Q = malual
t = sutomatic

517 through519 Spare parameters.

Outputs

900 Output block 9OOis the alarm status. A logic I on ttrts output
indicates an alarm state. Thts occurs tf there ls an external
alarm input or if the Src I/O, M/A statlon, or devtce drivers
(if a device driver control output status ls linked to the gen-
eral purpose alarm speclficatlon) are ln alarm state.

901 Output block 9Ol is the alarm acknowledge key indicator.

This output is a logic 0 during nonnal operatlon and becomes
a logic I for one executlon cycle when the darm acknowledge
key is pressed.

902 Output block 9O2 is the loop one faeeplate swttch output. Ttre
T5pe SLC controller has control of thts output from the pro-
cess display sereen for loop one if tl:is functton ls chosen ilr a
setup screen from the faceplate.

903 Output block 9O3 is the loop two faceplate switch output.
Refer to output block 9O2.

904 Output block 904 is the output of auxiliary sw'itch one. Ttre
operator has control of this switch from the au:dliary switch
control screen off the main menu of the faceplate.

Output block 905 is the output of au:dliary switch two. Refer

to output block 904.

906 Output block 9OO is the output of atr:dliary switch three.

Refer to output block 9O4.

StrategicLoopControllerStation
231 - 4 ts FEBtees l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 231

907 Output block 9O7 ls the output of atr:dltary swltch four. Refer
to output block 904.

908 Output block 9Og ls the mode of dtgltal output one. An output
of logic I lndlcates that dlgttal output one ls tn automatlc
mode and lts value ls controlled by the conflguratlon. An out-
put of logic O lndlcates that dtgttal output one ls in manual
mode and its value ls controlled from the faceplate.

909 Output block 9Og ts the mode of dtgltal output two. Refer to
block 9O8.

910 Output block 91O ts the mode of dlgltal output three. Refer to
block 9O8.

911 Output block I f f ts the mode of dlgltal output four. Refer to

block 908.

912and 913 Reserved for future use.

APPLICATIO'VS

Figure 23I-L lllustrates a posslble conflguratlon ustn$ the

Src station functlon code. Speclficatlons S1 and S2 are the
btock addresses of the M/A stattolts. They allour controllitrg
the mode (manual/auto) and value of the analog outputs as
well as the set points.

A|.u2 Aru
A,Sr Anr
oPr A/u

Flgure 23 7- 7. SI, Stntion bnfiguratwn

Specifications 57 and S8 are the block addresses of the aux-

iliary inputs. These inputs allow displaying any real block
outputs.

Specifications 59 and SlO are the block addresses of the

external alarms. Ttrese are general purpose alarm inputs.

StrategicLoopControllerStation
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 231-5
Function Code 231

Specifieatlon Sf f is the block address of the flrst ASCII strlng

descriptor block. This block passes tag name, engineertng
units, and other data to the SLC faceplate for dlsplay.

EXAMPLE

The Src statlon block (functton code 231) uses the ASCII
string descriptor block (functton code l f g) loop tag names
and engtneering units for vartables dtsplayed on the Src face-
plate. Figure 231-f shows a sample Src statlon conflglrra-
tion. Tables 231-1,231-2 and 23I-3 show the loop tag name/
engineering units format used for ASCII blocks 1020, fO21
and lO22 (refer to function code 113).

Specification 52 of the ASCII string descriptor ls an [D num-

ber and ca,n remain at the default value.

Table 237-7. Block 1O2O Conto;lursLoop One Data

Spec Descrlptlon
1 Blockaddressof the nextstringdescriptorblock(1021)
2 lD = 3 (seefunctioncode113)
3 - 16 Loop 1 tag name (14 characters)
17 -21 Loop1 processvariableengineering units(5 characters)
22-26 Loop1 set pointengineeringunits(5 characters)
27 -29 Loop1 controloutputhighbar graphlabel(3 characters)
3 0 - 3 2 Loop 1 control output low bar graph label (3 characters)
3 3 - 3 6 Loop 1 faceplate switch no. 1 ON label (4 characters)
3 7 - 4 0 Loop 1 faceplate switch no. 1 OFF label (4 characters)
41 Loop 1 PV and SP display decimal places
42 Loop 1 process display type
43-47 Auxiliary variable no. 1 engineering units (5 characters)
units(5 characters)
4 8 - 5 2 Auxifiaryvariableno.2 engineering
5 3 - 6 2 Reserved

Table 237-2. Block 1021 Contait?s InopTllo Data

Spec Descrlptlon
1 Blockaddressof the nextstringdescriptorblock(1022)
2 lD = 4 (referto functioncode113)
3 - 16 Loop2 tag name(14characters)
1 7- 2 1 Loop2 processvariableengineering units(5 characters)
22-26 Loop2 set pointengineeringunits(5 character)
27 -29 Loop 2 control output high bar graph label (3 characters)
3 0 - 3 2 Loop2 controloutputlow bar graphlabel(3 characters)
3 3 - 3 6 Loop 2 faceplate switch no.2 ON label (4 characters)
3 7 - 4 0 Loop 2 taceplate switch no. 2 OFF label (4 characters)
41 Loop2 PV and SP displaydecimalplaces
42 Loop2 processdisplaytype
4 3 - 6 2 Reserved

StrategicLoopControllerStation
231-6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Gode231

Table 23I-3. Blrck 1022 Contafns

futrtfisry Srtitctl l-abels
Spec Descrlptlon
1 Btockaddressof the nextstringdescriptorblock(0)
2 lD = 5 (referto functioncode113)
3-8 Auxiliaryswitch1 ON label
I - 14 Auxiliaryswitch1 OFF label
15 - 20 Auxiliaryswitch2 ON label
21 -26 Auxifiaryswitch2 OFFlabel
27 -32 Auxiliaryswitch3 ON label
33-38 Auxiliaryswitch3 OFF label
39-44 Auxiliaryswitch4 ON label
45-50 Auxiliaryswitch4 OFF label
5 1 - 6 2 Reserved

StrategicLoopControllerStation
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 231-7
ffi

o
 FunctionCode 232- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 1sFEBlees 232 - 1
ffi

o
 FunctionCode233- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 233 - 1
ffi
t

I
 FunctionCode234- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBless 234 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode 235- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBlees 235 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode236- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 236 - 1
W
o

a
 FunctionCode237- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEBrees 237 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode238- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 ls FEBlees 238 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionCode239- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReseruedFor FutureUse
l-E96-2008 rs FEBlees 239 - 1
ffi

I
 FunctionGode240- ReservedFor FutureUse

ReservedFor FutureUse
l-Eg6-2008 rs FEBrees 240 - 1
ffi
I

I
 FunctionCode 241- DSOEDatalnterfaceSEMto MFP

L DESCRIPTION

The SEM to MFP lnterface bloek for MFP modules provldes

tnterface to ttre INSEMOI Sequence of Events (SEM) Module to
access the ttme stamped data produced by the IMSETOI Dls-
trtbuted Sequence of Events TIme (SET) Module and the
IMSEDOI Dtstrtbuted Sequence of Events Dtgttal (sED) Module. .

Thts functlon code ls requlred for both MFP and INSEMOI '
modules to conllgure a distrlbuted sequence of events system. '

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Brk Type Descrlptlon

N B Eventsloggedflag (withqualityand alarm):
Q=rlO
| =leS
N+1 B Modulestatus:
Q= good
1 =bad

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 0-63 Address of SET input module
S2 N 100 1 - 32767 Number of events that will fit in butfer:
buffer size = 12 (S2 + 1)
S3 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of first digital event interface (function code
2421
S4 N 0 I Full Spare
S5 Y 0.0 R Full Spare

DSOEDataInterJace SEMto MFP

l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 241-1
Function Code 241

EXPLANATION

Speclfication Sf is the expander bus address conflgured by

means of dipswitches on the SET board.

Speclfication 52 ls the ma:dmum number of event records,

produced by any of the SED/SET modules connected to the
MFP module, that is posslble to store before a buffer overflow
occurs.

s3 Specification S3 is the block address of the flrst dlgttal event

interface (function code 2421. Fr,lnctlon codes 24I and 242
form a linked list that descrtbes the SED/SET conflguratlon
for this MFP module. Functlon code 241 must be at the head
of the list; thus, this speclficatlon ls used to polnt to the flrst
SED/SET descriptor.

54 and S5 Spare.

DSOEDataInterfaceSEMto MFP
2 4 1- 2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode242- DSOEDigitalEventInterface

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The dfgltal event lnterface block for MFP modules provldes

the paftlmeters needed to control the IMSETOI Dbtrlbuted
Sequence of Events TIme Module and the IMSEDOI Dlstrtb-
uted Sequence of Events Dlgttal Module.

Thls functlon code ls requlred for both the MFP module and
the INSEMO1 Dtstrlbuted Sequence of Events Module to con-
flgure a dlstrlbuted sequence of events system.

UTILIZATION

72

r3
OUTPUTS
Tq

N+|5
Btk TIpe Descrlptlon
N B Output1 with quality
N+1 B Output2 with quality
N+2 B Ouput 3 with quality
N+3 B Output4 with quality
N+4 B Output5 with quality
N+5 B Output6 withquality
N+6 B Output7 withquality
N+7 B Output8 withquality
N+8 B Output9 withquality
N+9 B Output10 withquality
N+l0 B Output11withquality
N+l1 B Output12 withquality
N+l2 B Ouput 13 withquality
N+l3 B Output14 withquality
N+l4 B Output15 withquality
N+l5 B Output16 withquality
N+l6 B Modulestatus:
Q= good
1=bad

DSOEDigitalEventlnterface
r-E96-200B 1s FEB1995 242-1
FunctionCode 242

SPECtFtCATTOwS
I
Spec Tune Ilefault Type Range Descrlptlon
S1 N 0 0-63 Addressof SET/SEDinputmodule
S2 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block address of next digital event interface (function code
242)
S3 Y 10 Full Debouncefiltertimevalue(in msecs)
S4 Y 0 Full Inputscan mask
0 = channelin-scan
1 = channelout-of-scan
S5 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 00 TON
S6 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 00 TOFF
S7 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 01 TON
S8 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 01 TOFF
S9 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel02 TON
s10 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 02 TOFF
sl1 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 03 TON
s12 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 03 TOFF
s13 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel04 TON
sl4 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 04 TOFF
s15 Y s0 0 - 8192 Channel05 TON
s16 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 05 TOFF
sl7 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 06 TON
s18
s19
s20
Y
Y
Y
50
50
50
0 - 8192
0 - 8192
0 - 8192
Channel 06 TOFF
Channel07 TON
Channel 07 TOFF
I
s21 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 08 TON
s22 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 08 TOFF
s23 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel09 TON
s24 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel09 TOFF
s25 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 10 TON
s26 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel10 TOFF
s27 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 11 TON
s28 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 11 TOFF
s29 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 12 TON
s30 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 12 TOFF
s31 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel 13 TON
s32 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel13 TOFF
s33 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel14 TON
s34 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel14 TOFF
s3s Y s0 0 - 8192 Channel15 TON
s36 Y 50 0 - 8192 Channel15 TOFF
s37 Y 0 Full Spare
s38 Y 0.0 R Full Spare

DSOEDigitalEventInterface
242-2 1s FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 Function Code 242

EXPLANATION

Specifications

s1 Spectflcatlon Sl ls the bus address conflgured through

dipswltches on the SET/SED board.

NOTE:For the SET boardof a singleMFP module,two distinct

functioncodes(functioncodes241and 2421areconfiguredfor the
samel/O moduleboard.

s2 Spectficatlon 52 is the block address for the next digttal event

lnrterface (functlon code 242). Functlon codes 241 and 242
form a linked ltst that descrtbes the SET/SED configuration
for the MFP module.

S3 Spectflcation S3 ts the time tnterval (fn milllseconds) used on

the SET/SED board to tell the valld state transitlons and
noise spikes apart.

s4 Specification 54 ts a l6-blt mask that descrlbes the deslred

configuratlon for the input channels on the UO module
board.

Q = channel ln-scan
I = channel out-of-sc€rn

55 through S36 Specifications S5 ttrrough 536, channels OOTON through f 5

TOFF, are time values that €rre subtracted from the registered
transition time values to get the correct time stamp for the
transition. The values depend on the physicd characteristics
of the transducer used.

S37 and S38 Spare.

DSOEDigitalEventInterface
l-E96-2008 ls FEBrees 242 - g
ffi

I
 FunctionCode249- ExecutiveBlock (|NSEM01)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The executlve block for the INSEMO1 Sequenee of Events

Module deflnes several varlables that affect module behavlor
whtle executlng a sequenee of events.

Thts functton code ts requtred to conflgure a dlstrtbuted

sequence of events system.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

0 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFtCATIOwS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 0 I 0 - 5000 Maximumnumberof pre-trigger
events
S2 N 0 I 0 - 5000 Maximumnumberof post-trigger
events
S3 N 0.0 R 0 - 8il00 Lengthof post-triggerperiod(in seconds)
S4 N 0.0 R -
0 86400 Longesttime intervalbetweentwo consecutiveevents(in
seconds)
S5 N 20 I 0-60 Maximum delay in receivingevents from MFP module (in
seconds)
S6 N 180 o - 32767 Age of eventdatabeforediscardedfrombuffer(in seconds)
S7 N 2 0 - 9998 Block number of first MFP-SEM definition (futtctioncode 244)

ExecutiveBlock(|NSEM01
)
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 243-1
Function Code 243

EXPLANATION

Specificatton Sl ls the ma:dmum number of events that c€rn

be recorded before trlgger.

Specificatton 52 ls the ma:dmum number of events that can

be recorded after trigger. When thls ltmlt ls reached, the
sequence will be closed.

S3 Specification S3 ts the ma:dmum ttme tnterval that can elapse

between tJre trigger event and the last post-trtgger event.
When this interval expires, the sequence wiil be closed.

S4 Speclfication 54 ts the madmum tlme tretervd ln seconds that

can pass between two consecutlve events belonglng to the
same sequence. From the last valid event recelved, the
sequence \rill be closed when t}ts tlme lnterval explres.

S5 Specificatlon 55 is the ma:dmum latency tlme Ir seconds

while receirring events from remote MFP modules.

s6 Specification SO ls the age of events data ln seconds before

discarded from the buffer. This ls the ma:dmum lnterval tlme
an event can spend in the output queue tourards the OIS con-
sole waiting for a request for finat presentatlon. After thts
period, ttre event ls discarded from the queue to prevent over-
flow and buffer lock.

s7 Specification 57 is the block address of the first MFP to SEM

addressing interface (functlon code 2441. Functlon codes 243,
244 and 245 form a linked llst wlth subllsts that describe tJre
configuration for the sequence of events system. Executlve
block zero is the head of the main list.

ExecutiveBlock(|NSEMOI )
243-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 FunctionGode244- AddressinglnterfaceDefinition

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The MFP to SEM lnterface deflnttlon functlon code ls conflg-

ured in the INSEMOI Sequence of Events Module, artd deflnes
the phystcal addresslng for data lnterface functlon code 24L. :

Speclflcatlons Sl ttrrough S4 deflne the standard INF'I 90

address for the polnt. Speclficatlon 55 ls a polnter to the next
MFP to SEM functlon block. Speclflcatlon SG ls a polnter to ;
the ftrst SED to SEM lnrterfaee block conflgured that refers to
the MFP module speclfled by the ftrst four spectflcatlons.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Blk Type Descrlptlon

0 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFICAT'OAIS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 1 I 0 - 2 5 0 Loopnumber
S2 N 1 I 0 - 2 5 0 Nodenumber
S3 N 0 I 0 - 3 1 Modulenumber
S4 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Bfocknumberof SEM-MFPinterface(functioncode2411
S5 N 2 I 0 - 9998 Block number of next MFP-SEM interface (functioncode
2441
S6 N 2 0 - 9998 Block number of first SED-SEM interface (functioncode
2451

AddressinglnterfaceDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 244-1
FunctionGode 244

EXPLANATION

Specifications

S1through54 Speclficatlons Sl through 54 are the standard INFI-NET coor-

dinates for a potrnt that, tn thls case, tdenttftes the functlon
code 24L bloek on the MFP module that ls the exceptJon
report source for the event data poU.

s5 Specification S5 is the block address of the next MFP to SEM

addresstng interface. Functlon codes 243, 244 and 245 form
a linked list with subllsts that descrtbe the conflguratlon for
the sequence of events system.

s6 Speciflcatlon 56 is the block address of the flrst SED to SEM

input channel interface. Each functlon code 244 block ts the
head of the sublist that descrlbes the conflguratlon for a par-
ticular MFP module in the system.

AddressingInterfaceDefinition
244-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 FunctionCode245- InputGhannelInterface

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The SED to SEM triTput channel lmterface functlon code

deflnes the charactertstles for each one of the f G hput chan-
nels of a speclfled IMSEDOf Sequence of Events Dlgttal Mod-
ule or IMSEmf Sequence of Events Tlme Module.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlption

0 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFICATIONS

Spec Tune Default TVpe Range Descriptlon

S1 N 0 0-63 Moduleaddress
S2 N 2 0 - 9998 Btocknumberof the nextSED-SEMinterface(functioncode
2451
S3 N 0 of channel0 input
0 - 1 2 7 Characteristics
S4 N 0 I of channel1 input
o - 1 2 7 Characteristics
S5 N 0 I of channel2 input
0 - 1 2 7 Characteristics
S6 N 0 I of channel3 input
o - 1 2 7 Characteristics
S7 N 0 I 0-127 of channel4 input
Characteristics
S8 N 0 of channel5 input
o - 1 2 7 Characteristics
S9 N 0 I o - 1 2 7 Characteristicsof channel 6 input
s10 N 0 I 0-127 Characteristicsof channel 7 input
sl1 N 0 I 0-127 Characteristicsof channel 8 input
sl2 N 0 I 0-127 of channel9 input
Characteristics
sl3 N 0 I 0-127 Characteristicsof channel 10 input
sl4 N 0 I 0-127 Characteristicsof channel 11 input
sl5 N 0 I 0-127 of channel12 input
Characteristics
sl6 N 0 I o - 1 2 7 Characteristicsof channel 13 input

InputChannelInterface
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 245-1
FunctionGode 245

SPECI FICATI ONS Gontinued)

Spec Tune Default TyPe Range Descrlptlon

sl7 N 0 I of channel14 input
0 - 1 2 7 Characteristics
sl8 N 0 I of channel15 input
0 - 1 2 7 Characteristics

EXPLANATION

Spectfication Sl is the expander bus address conflgured

using dipswitches located on the SET/SED board.

Speciflcation 52 is the block address of the next SED to SEM

interface. Each functlon code 245 block ls llnked wlth the
subsequent one in the sublist that describes the configura-
tion for a particular MFP module in the system.

S3 through S18 Spectficatlons 53 through Sf8 dentlff tJle follourtng charac-

teristlcs:

If this potnt has a simple trigger assoclated.

If it does, it tells if the trigger ls signffIcant to the zero to

one transitlon, the one to zero transltlon, or both.

If this point is a recotd,able euettt.

If it is, it tells if the trlgger ls slgntficant to the zero to one

trarrsition, the one to zero transltlon, or both.

If this point has an assoclated crlcrm.

If it does, it tells if the alarm is assoclated to the zero

state, the one state, or both.

. If this point is configured ln the system or not.

Specification information for Sg through S18 ls shown tn

Table 245-I.

Tabte 245 - 7. I4formation Formnt for

Specificafwrs S3 tlvottgh SI8
Polnt
Descrlptlon
6 s 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 No simpletriggerassociatedto the point
0 1 Simpletriggeron the transition,0 to 1
1 0 Simpletriggeron the transition,1 to 0
1 1 Simple trigger on both transitions
0 0 Thisis not a recordableevent

InputChannelInterface
245-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Function Code 245

Table 24 5- I . Inf,ormafion Format -for

Specificalions SL3through SI8 @rfinrcd)
Polnt
Descrlptlon
6 s 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 Recordableeventon the transition,0 to 1
1 0 Recordableeventon the transition,1 to 0
1 1 Recordableeventon bothtransitions
0 0 state is notan alarmstate
1 0 state ls an alann state
0 1 state is not an alarmstate
1 1 state ls an alarmstate
0 Pointis not configuredin the system
1 Pointls configuredin the system

InputChannellnterface
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 245-3
ffi

o
 FunctionGode246- TriggerDefinition

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The dtstributed sequence of events trfgger deflnttlon functlon

code descrlbes a sbrgle trtgger ln the sequence of events. It
accepts 32 operatlons or operands.

UTILIZATION

OUTPUTS

Btk Type Descrlptlon

0 None No usableoutputs

SPECIFICATIOruS

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptlon

S1 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
1
S2 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand
2
S3 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
3
S4 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
4
S5 N 1 -126- 16000 Operation/operand
5
S6 N -1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand
6
S7 N 1 I -126 - 16000 OperatiorVoperand
7
S8 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
8
S9 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatior/operand
9
s10 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand10
s11 N 1 -126- 16000 OperatiorVoperand 11
s12 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand12
s13 N 1 -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand13
s14 N 1 -126- 16000 OperatiolVoperand14
s1s N 1 -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
15
s16 N 1 I -126- 16000 OperatiolVoperand16
sl7 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand
17
sl8 N 1 l -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
18

TriggerDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 246-1
FunctionCode 246

SPE ClFI CATI OruS@onti

nued)

Spec Tune Default Type Range Descrlptfon

sl9 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
19
s20 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatior/operand
20
s21 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
21
s22 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
22
s23 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
23
s24 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand
24
s25 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand25
s26 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand26
s27 N -1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand27
s28 N 1 I -126- 16000 OperatiorVoperand28
s29 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand29
s30 N 1 -126- 16000 Operation/operand30
s31 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operation/operand31
s32 N 1 I -126- 16000 Operatiory'operand
32

EXPLANATION

SPECtFtCATtO,|VS

51 throughS32 Specifications Sl through S32 are the operations/operands

one through 32. Each specificafion can describe an operaflon,
an operand or the end of this trlgger.

Legal operation values €rre:

-126: not (-).

-38: and (&).
-94: xor (^).
-124: or (l).
- l: end of trigger.

Legal operand indexes €rre:

t through 16,000.

TriggerDefinition
246-2 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixA - List of FunctionCodes

INTRODUCTION

Appendlx A contalns cross referenees for all the functlon

codes. Table A-1 llsts the functlon codes numerlcdly along
wlth a descrtptlon of each code.

Table A-2 ls €rn atphabettcd [stfng of the functlon codes by

functlon code descrtptlon and ts followed by the functlon code
number.

Tables A-3 through A-44 categorTze the functlon codes by

functlonallty. Note that tn these tables functton codes may be
llsted ln multiple categorles.

- NUMERICAL
CROSSREFERENCE

Tahle A-1. Numefical liist@

Function Functlon Descrlptlon

Description Code
Code
1 Function generator 26 AnaloginpuUloop
2 Manual set constant (signal generator) 27 turaloginput
3 Leadllag 28 Analogouput (samePCUnode)
4 Pulse positioner 29 Analogouput
5 Pulse rate 30 Analogexceptionreport
6 HigMowlimiter 31 Testquality
7 Squareroot 32 Trip
8 Ratelimiter 33 Not
9 Analogtransfer u Memory
10 Highselect 35 Timer
11 Low select 36 QualifiedOR (8-input)
12 HigMowcornpare 37 AND(2-input)
13 Integertransfer 38 AND(4-input)
14 Summer(4-input) 39 OR (2-input)
15 Summer(2-input) 40 OR (4-input)
16 Multiply 41 bus
DigitalinpuUControlway/module
17 Divide 42 DigitalinpuUloop
18 PIDerrorinput 43 TCSdigitalinput
19 PID(PVandSP) M TCSdigitaloutput
20 Indicatorstation 45 Digitalexceptionreport
21 M/A station(basic) 46 Digitalinputlist
22 [rVAstation(cascade) 47 Analoginputexceptionreport(NAMM0l)
23 [,VAstation(ratio) 48 Reservedfor futureuse
24 Adapt 49 Digitaloutputbuffer
25 Analoginput(samePCUnode) 50 Manualset switch

List of FunctionCodes
ls FEB1995 A-1
l-E96-2008
AppendixA

Table A-7. Nttmerical Listing (elntiruted)

Functlon Functlon
Descrlptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
51 Manual set constant 96 Redundantanaloginput
52 Manual set integer 97 Redundant digitalinput
53 Executiveblock (COM) 98 Slaveselect
54 Executiveblock (NLMM0l ) 99 Sequenceof eventslog
55 Hydraulicservo 100 DigitaloutputreadbackchEck
56 Executiveblock(NAMMOI
) 101 ExclusiveOR
57 Reservedfor futureuse 102 PulseinpuUperiod
58 Timedelay(analog) 103 PulseinpuUfrequency
59 Digitaltransfer 104 PulseinpuUtotalization
60 Groupl/O definition 105 Executiveblock(|MLMM02)
61 Blink 106 Segmentcontrolblock(!MLMM02)
62 Remote control memory 107 Groupl/O definition(|MLMMO2)
63 Analog input list (same PCU) 108 Extendedexecutive(|MLMM02)
g Digital input list (same PCU) 109 PulseinpuUduration
65 Digital sum with gain 110 Rung(S-input)
66 Analog trend 111 Rung(1O-input)
67 Reserved for future use 112 Rung(2O-input)
68 Remote manual set constant 113 ASCIIstringdescriptor
69 Test alarm 114 BCDinput
70 Analog point definition 115 BCDoutput
71 Executiveblock NAMM0ZIMAMMOS 116 Jump/master control relay
72 Analog slave definition 117 Boolean recipe table
73 Calibration 118 Real recipe table
74 Calibrationcommand 119 Boolean signal multiplexer
75 Analog calibration status 120 Real signal multiplexer
76 Thermocoupletemperatu re 121 AnaloginpuUlNFl-NET
77 Analogpointservicestatus 122 DigitalinpuUlNFI-NET
78 Trenddefinition 123 Devicedriver
79 Controlinterfaceslave 124 Sequencemonitor
80 Controlstation 125 Devicemonitor
81 Executive 126 Real signal demultiplexer
82 Segmentcontrol 127 Plant Loop gateway node map
83 Digitaloutputgroup 128 Slave default definition
84 Digitalinputgroup 129 Multi-statedevice driver
8s Up/downcounter 130 Plant Loop gateway executive
86 Elapsedtimer 131 PlantLoopgatewaypointdefinition
87 DLS interface 132 AnaloginpuUslave
88 Digital logic station 133 Smarttransmitterdefinition
89 Last block 134 monitor
Multi-sequence
90 Extended executive 135 Sequencemanager
91 (MFC/MFP)
BASICconfiguration 136 Remotemotorcontrol
92 lnvokeBASIC 137 C and BASICprogramrealoutputwith quality
93 BASICrealoutput 138 C or BASICprogrambooleanoutputwithquality
94 BASICbooleanoutput 139 Passivestationinterface
95 Modulestatusmonitor 140 Restore

Listof FunctionCodes
A-2 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixA

Table A-1. Nt;lnr.efical Ltsttrg (onttwed)

Function Function Descrlption
Descrlption
Gode Gode
141 Sequence master 182 Analoginputdefinition
142 Sequence slave 183 Batchexecutive(CBC)
143 lnvoke C 1U Factoryinstrumentationprotocolhandler
144 C allocation 185 Digitafinputsubscriber
145 Frequency counter/slave 186 Analoginputsubscriber
146 Remotel/O interface 187 Analogoutputsubscriber
147 Remotel/O definition 188 Digitaloutputsubscriber
148 Batchsequen@ 189 Reservedfor futureuse
149 AnalogoutpuUslave 190 Userdefinedfunctiondeclaration
150 Hydraulicservoslave 191 Userdefinedfunctionone
151 Text selector 192 User defined function two
152 Model parameter estimator 193 User defined data import
153 ISC parameter converter 194 User defined data export
1il Adaptive parameterscheduler 195 -197 Reserved for future use
155 Regression 198 Auxiliary real user defined function
156 Advanced PID controller 199 Auxiliary digital user defined function
157 General digital controller 200 |NF|-NETto Plant Loop local transfer modufe
executive block (|NIPTO1)
158 Enhanced analog point definition 201 Data point definition
159 Polynornialadjustment 202 |NF!-NETto |NF!-NET remote transfer module
executive block (lNllT0z)
160 Inferential smith controller 203 |NF|-NET to Plant Loop remote transfer
module executive block (lNlPT02)
161 Sequence generator 2U - 209 Reservedfor futureuse
162 Digital segment buffer 210 Sequenceof eventsslave
163 Analog segment buffer 211 Dataacquisitiondigital
1il Segment control (|MCOMO4) 212 DataacquisitiondigitalinpuUloop
165 Moving avererye -
213 214 Reservedfor futureuse
166 Integrator 215 Enhanced analog slave definition
167 Polynomial 216 Enhanced analog input definition
168 Interpolator 217 Enhanced calibrationcommand
169 Matrixaddition 218 Reserved for future use
170 Matrixmultiplication 219 Common sequence
171 Trigonometric 220 Batch historian
172 Exponential 221 -229 Reserved for future use
173 Power 230 Strategic loop controller l/O
174 Logarithm 231 Strategic loop controllerstation
175 Sequence executive 232 - 240 Reserved for future use
176 Sequence station (CSC) 241 DSOE data interface SEM to MFP
177 Data acquisitionanalog 242 DSOE digital event interface
178 Data acquisitionanalog inpuUloop 243 Executiveblock (|NSEMO1)
179 Enhancedtrend 24 Addressinginterfacedefinition
180 BatchinpuUoutput 245 Inputchannelinterface
181 Batchstation(CBC) 246 Triggerdefinition

Listof FunctionCodes
l-E96-200B 15FEB1995 A-3
AppendixA

- ALPHABET'CAL
CROSSREFERENCE

Table A-2. Alphnbetical Listing

Functlon Functlon
Description Descrlptlon
Code Gode
Adapt 24 Blink 61
Adaptive parameter scheduler 154 Boolean recipe table 117
Addressinginterface definition 244 Boolean signal multiplexer 119
Advanced PID controller 156 Calibration 73
Analog calibration status 75 Calibration comrnand 74
Analog exception repoft 30 C allocation 14
Analog input 27 C and BASICprogramreal outputwith quality 137
Analog input definition 182 Commonsequen@ 219
Analog input exception report (NAMMOI) 47 Controlinterfaceslave 7g
Analog inpuUlNFl-NET 121 Controlstation 80
Analoginputlist (samePCU) 63 C or BASICprograrnbooleanouput withquality 138
AnaloginpuVloop 26 Dataacquisitionanalog 177
Analoginput(samePCUnode) 25 DataacquisitionanaloginpuUloop 178
AnaloginpuUslave 132 Dataacquisitiondigital 211
Analoginputsubscriber 186 DataacquisitiondigitalinpuUloop 212
Analogoutput 29 Datapointdefinition 201
Analogoutput(samePCUnode) 28 Devicedriver 123
AnalogoutpuUslave 149 Devicemonitor 125
Analogoutputsubscriber 187 Digitalexceptionreport 45
Analogpointdefinition 70 DigitalinpuUControlway/module
bus 41
Analog point service status 77 Digitalinputgroup 84
Analog segment butfer 163 DigitalinpuUlNFl-NET 122
Analog slave definition 72 Digitalinputlist 46
Analog transfer 9 Digitalinputlist (samePCU) at
Analog trend 66 DigitalinpuUloop 42
AND(2-input) 37 Digitalinputsubscriber 185
AND(4-input) 38 Digitallogicstation 88
ASCIIstringdescriptor 113 Digitaloutputbuffer 49
Auxiliarydigitaluserdefinedfunction 199 Digitaloutputgroup 83
Auxiliaryrealuserdefinedfunction 198 Digitaloutputreadbackcheck 1@
BASIC booleanoutput 94 Digital output subscriber 188
BASIC configuration(MFC/MFP) 91 Digital segment buffer 162
BASIC real output 93 Digital sum with gain 65
Batch executive (CBC) 183 Digital transfer 59
Batch historian 220 Divide 17
BatchinpuUoutput 180 DLSinterface 87
Batchsequence 148 DSOEdatainterfaceSEMto MFP 241
Batchstation(CBC) 181 DSOEdigitaleventinterface 242
BCDinput 114 Elapsedtimer 86
BCDoutput 115 Enhancedanaloginputdefinition 216

List of FunctionCodes
A-4 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 Appendix A

Tahle A-2. Alphnhettcal LisW (wtM)

Functlon Functlon
Descrlption Descrlptlon
Code Gode
Enhanced analog point definition 158 Low select 11
Enhanced analog slave definition 215 Manualset constrant 51
Enhanced calibrationcomrnand 217 Manualset constiant(signalgenerator) 2
Enhancedtrend 179 Manualset integer 52
Exclusive OR 101 Manualset switch 50
Executive 81 bVA station (basic) 21
Executiveblock(COM) 53 lvVAstration(cascade) 22
Executiveblock(|MLMM02) 105 lvUAstation (ratio) 23
Executiveblock(|NSEMOI
) 243 Matrix addition 169
Executiveblock(NAMMOI
) 56 Matrix multiplication 170
Executiveblock NAMMOZIMAMM0S 71 Memory u
Executive block (NLMMOI) 54 Modelparameterestimator 152
Exponential 172 Modulestatusmonitor 95
Extended executive 90 Movingaverage 165
Extended executive (|MLMMO2) 108 Multiply 16
Factoryinstrumentationprotocolhandler 184 monitor
Multi-sequence 134
Frequency counter/sIave 145 Multi-statedevicedriver 129
Functiongenerator 1 Not 33
Generaldigitalcontroller 157 OR (4-input) 40
Groupl/O definition 60 OR (2-input) 39
Group l/O definition (|MLMMO2) 107 Passivestrationinterface 139
HigMow compare 12 PIDerrorinput 18
HigMow limiter 6 PID(PVandSP) 19
High select 10 PlantLoopgatewayexecutive 130
Hydraulic servo 55 PlantLoopgatewaynodemaP 127
Hydraulic servo slave 150 Plant Loop gateway point definition 131
Indicatorstiation
'20 Polynomial 167
lnferentialsmith controller 160 Polynomial adjustment 159
|NF|-NET to |NF!-NET remote transfer module 202 Power 173
executive block (lNllTOz)
|NF|-NET to Plant Loop local transfer module 200 Pulse inpuUduration 109
executive block (lNlPTOl)
|NF|-NETto PlantLooprernotetransfer 203 PulseinpuUfrequency 103
moduleexecutive block(lNlPTOz)
Inputchannelinterface 245 PulseinpuUperiod 102
Integertransfer 13 Pulse input/totalization 104
Integrator 166 Pulsepositioner 4
lnterpolator 168 Pulserate 5
InvokeBASIC 92 Qualified OR (8-input) 36
InvokeC 143 Rate limiter I
ISCparameterconverter 153 Real recipe table 118
controlrelay
Jump/master 116 Real signal demultiPlexer 126
Lastblock 89 Real signal multiplexer 120
Lead/lag 3 analoginPut
Redundant 96
Logarithm 174 RedundantdigitalinPut 97

List of Function Codes

15 FEB 1995 A-5
l-E96-2008
AppendixA

Table A-2. Alphnbetical Lisf,,urg(confintrcd)

Functlon Func-tlon
Descriptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
Regression 155 Smarttransmitterdefinition 133
Remotecontrolmemory 62 Squareroot 7
Remotel/O definition 147 StrategicloopcontrollerVO 230
Remotel/O interface 146 Strategicloopcontrollerstation 231
Remotemanualset constant 68 Summer(2-input) 15
Remotemotorcontrol 136 Summer(4-input) 14
Restore 140 TCS digitalinput 43
Rung(S-input) 110 TCS digitaloutput u
Rung(1O-input) 111 Testalarm 69
Rung(2O-input) 112 Testquality 31
Segmentcontrol 82 Textselector 151
Segmentcontrol(|MCOMO4) 164 Thermocouple temperature 76
Segmentcontrolblock(IMLMMO2) 106 Timedelay(analog) 58
Sequenceexecutive 175 Timer 35
Sequencegenerator 161 Trenddefinition 78
manager
Sequence 135 Triggerdefinition 246
master
Sequence 141 Trigonometric 171
Sequencemonitor 124 Trip 32
Sequenceof eventslog 99 Up/downcounter 85
Sequenceof eventsslave 210 Userdefineddataexport 194
Sequenceslave 142 Userdefineddataimport 193
Sequencestation (CSC) 176 Userdefinedfunctiondeclaration 190
Slave default definition 128 Userdefinedfunctionone 191
Slave select 98 Userdefinedfunctiontwo 192

CROSS REFERENCE. CATEGORIZATION

Function codes may be listed in multiple eategories.

Table A-3. Adapt

FunctionCode Descriptlon
24 Adapt

Table A-4. Aduanced F,tncllons

Functlon Function
Descriptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
152 Modelparameterestimator 167 Polynomial
153 ISCparameterconverter 168 lnterpolator
154 Adaptiveparameterscheduler 169 Matrixaddition
157 General digital controller 170 Matrixmultiplication
160 Inferentialsmith controller 171 Trigonometric
162 Digital segment buffer 172 Exponential
163 Analog segment buffer 173 Power
165 Moving average 174 Logarithm
166 Integrator

Listof FunctionCodes
A-6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixA

Table A-5. ASCII

FunctionGode Descrlptlon
113 ASCIIstringdescriptor

Table A-6. BASIC Langunge

Function Functlon Descrlptlon
Descrlptlon
Code Code
91 BASIC configuration(MFC/MFP) 94 BASICbooleanouFut
92 lnvoke BASIC 137 C and BASICprogramrealoutputwith quality
93 BASIC real output 138 C or BASICprcgrambooleanoutputwithquality

Table A-7. BatchCommand. (CBCOI Conflr:otlrlr)

Function Functlon Descrlptlon
Descrlptlon
Code Code
82 Segmentcontrol 1 8 1 Batchstation(CBC)
90 Extendedexecutive 182 Analoginputdefinition
113 ASCIIstringdescriptor 183 Batchexecutive(CBC)
180 BatchinpuUoutput

Table A-8. BatctrFlrrrcfucns

Function Functlon Descrlptlon
Description
Code Code
117 Boolean recipe table 126 Realsignaldemultiplexer
118 Real recipe table 129 devicedriver
Multi-stiate
119 Boolean signal multiplexer 134 Multi-sequence monitor
120 Real signal multiplexer 135 Sequence manager
123 Device driver 141 Sequence master
124 Sequencemonitor 142 Sequenceslave
125 Devicemonitor 161 Sequencegenerator

Table A-9. Batr,h Langunge

Function Functlon Descrlptlon
Description
Code Code
93 BASICrealoutput 148 Batchsequence
94 BASICbooleanoutput 219 Commonsequence
137 C and BASICprogramrealoutputwithquality 220 Batchhistorian
138 C or BASICprogrambooleanouput withquality

Table A-70. C Langunge

Function Function Descrlptlon

Description Code
Code
93 BASICrealoutput 138 C or BASICprogrambooleanoutputwithquality
94 BASICbooleanoutput 143 InvokeC
137 C and BASICprogramrealoutputwithquality 1M C alfocation

List of FunctionCodes
l-E96-2008 ls FEB1995 A-7
AppendixA

Tahle A- 7 7. Commrl.;rlricalfonsHighutag
Function Functlon
Ilescrlptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
127 PlantLoopgatewaynodernap 201 Datapointdefinition
130 PlantLoopgatewayexecutive 202 |NF|-NETto |NF|-NETremotetransfermodule
executiveblock(lNlIT02)
131 PlantLoopgatewaypointdefinition 203 !NF|-NET to Plant Loop remote transfer
module executive block (!NIPT02)
200 INFI-NETto PlantLooplocaltransfermodule
executiveblock(lNlPTOl)

Table A-72. Computing

Function Functlon
Descrlptlon Descrlptlon
Code Gode
1 Functiongenerator 17 Divide
2 Manualset constant(signalgenerator) 51 Manualset constant
3 Lead/lag 52 Manualset integer
5 Pulserate 58 Timedelay(analog)
6 High/lowlimiter 65 Digitalsumwithgain
7 Squareroot 155 Regression
I Rate limiter 171 Trigonometric
14 Summer (4-input) 172 Exponential
15 Summer(2-input) 173 Power
16 Multiply 174 Logarithm

Table A-73. Controt Flrnction Blorjcs

Functlon Functlon
Descrlptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
4 Pulsepositioner 24 Adapt
18 PIDerrorinput 156 Advanced PID controller
19 PID(PVandSP) 160 lnferentialsmith controller

Table A-74. Controlway/Module Bus I/O

Functlon Function
Descriptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
25 Analoginput(samePCUnode) 63 Analoginputlist (samePCU)
28 Analogoutput(samePCUnode) al Digitalinputlist (samePCU)
41 DigitalinpuUControlway/module
bus 95 Modulestatusmonitor
46 Digitalinputlist

Listof FunctionCodes
A-g 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Appendix A

Table A-75. EsccepttonReport

Functlon Funetlon Descrlptlon
Descrlptlon
Code Gode
21 M/A station(basic) 123 Devicedriver
22 M/A station(cascade) 129 Multi-statedevicedriver
23 M/A station(ratio) 136 Remotemotorcontrol
26 AnaloginpuUloop 158 Enhancedanalogpointdefinition
30 Analogexceptionreport 176 Sequencestation(CSC)
42 DigitalinpuUloop 177 Dataacquisitionanalog
45 Digitalexceptionreport 178 DatraacquisitionanaloginpuUloop
62 Remotecontrolmemory 181 Batchstation(CBC)
68 Remotemanualset constant 193 Userdefineddataimport
70 Analog point definition 194 Userdefineddataexport
80 Control station 211 Dataacquisitiondigital
121 AnaloginpuUlNFl-NET 212 DataacguisitiondigitalinpuUloop
122 DigitalinpuUlNFI-NET

Tahle A-76. Exectrtiue

Function Functlon Descrlption
Descrlption Code
Code
53 Executiveblocl((COM) 130 PlantLoopgatewayexecutive
54 Executiveblock(NLMMOI) 1il Segmentcontrol(|MCOM04)
56 Executiveblock(NAMMOI) 175 Sequenceexecutive
81 Executive 183 Batchexecutive(CBC)
82 Segment control 200 |NF|-NETto PlantLooplocaltransfermodule
executiveblock(lNlPTOl)
89 Last block 202 |NF|-NETto !NF|-NETremotetransfermodule
executiveblock(lNllT0z)
90 Extended executive 203 |NF!-NETto PlantLoopremotetransfer
moduleexecutiveblock(lNlPTO2)
105 Executiveblock (|MLMMO2) 243 Executiveblock(INSEMOI
)
108 Extended executive (|MLMMO2)

Tahle A-77. Factory Instllmentation hotocol

Functlon Functlon Ilescrlptlon

Descrlption Code
Code
184 protocolhandler
Factoryinstrumentation 187 Analogoutputsubscriber
185 Digitalinputsubscriber 188 Digitaloutputsubscriber
186 Analoginputsubscriber

Listof FunctionCodes
r-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 A-g
AppendixA

Table A-78. Fteld,I/ O

Function Functlon
Descrlptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
27 Analoginput 115 BCDouput
29 Analogoutput 128 Slavedefaultdefinition
43 TCSdigitalinput 132 AnaloginpuUslave
44 TCSdigitaloutput 133 Smarttransmitterdefinition
49 Digitaloutputbuffer 145 Frequencycounter/slave
55 Hydraulicservo 146 RemoteUOinterfacs
79 Controlinterfaceslave 147 RemoteUOdefinition
83 Digitaloutputgroup 149 AnalogoutpuUslave
u Digitalinputgroup 150 Hydraulicservoslave
96 Redundant analoginput 180 BatchinpuUouFut
97 Redundantdigitalinput 210 Sequenceof eventsslave
102 PulseinpuVperiod 215 Enhancedanalogslavedefinition
103 PulseinpuVfrequency 216 Enhancedanaloginputdefinition
104 Pulse inpuVtotal
ization 217 Enhancedcalibrationcommand
109 PulseinpuVduration 230 Strategicloopcontrollerl/O
114 BCDinput

Table A-79. IIUIAMM0S Anslog Master Modtic

Function Function
Descriptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
20 Indicator station 76 Thermocouple temperature
71 Executiveblock NAMM0ZIMAMM03 T7 Analogpointservicestatus
72 Analog slave definition 78 Trenddefinition
73 Calibration 158 Enhanced analog point definition
74 Calibrationcommand 159 Polynomial adjustment
75 Analog calibrationstatus

Table A-2O. IMCOMOS Controller Module

Function Functlon
Description Description
Code Code
21 M/A station (basic) 29 Analogoutput
22 M/A station (cascade) 43 TCSdigitalinput
23 M/A station (ratio) 44 TCSdigitaloutput
27 Analog input 53 Executiveblock(COM)

Table A-27. IMCOMO4 Controtler Module

Function Function
Descrlption Descrlptlon
Code Code
21 MIA station (basic) 43 TCSdigitalinput
22 lr/VAstation (cascade) M TCS digitaloutput
23 M/A station (ratio) 53 Executiveblock(COM)
27 Analoginput 164 Segment control (!MCOMO4)
29 Analogoutput

Listof FunctionCodes
A - 10 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 AppendixA

Table A-22. IMLMMO? LqgltcMaster Module

Functlon Functlon Deserlptlon
Descrlptlon
Code Code
46 Digitalinputlist 106 Segmentcontrolblock(MLMMO2)
49 Digitaloutputbuffer 107 Groupl/O definition(|MLMM02)
105 Executiveblock(|MLMMO2) 108 Extendedexecutive(!MLMMO2)

Table A- 2 3 . IMMF00 3 / O4 / O5 MttltT-Fttnctlon Controller Mdule

Functlon Functlon
Descrlptlon Descrlpilon
Code Code
80 Controlstation 89 Lastblock
81 Executive 90 Extendedexecutive
82 Segmentcontrol

Table A-24. IMMFPO 1 / 02 / Og Mttlti-htnctlon hocessor Mo&rle

Functlon Functlon Descrlptlon

Description
Code Code
80 Controlstation 89 Last block
81 Executive 90 Extended executive
82 Segmentcontrol

Table A-25. INIITO?INFI-NET to INEt-NE?TransJer Module

Functlon Code Descrlptlon
202 |NF|-NETto |NFI-NETremotetransfermoduleexecutive
block(|NIITO2)

Table A-26. Ladder Logic

Function Functlon Descrlptlon
Descrlptton
Code Code
110 Rung(S-input) 112 Rung(2O-input)
111 Rung(1O-input) 116 Jump/mastercontrolrelay

Table A-27. Ingic

Function Function Description

Description
Code Code
33 Not 61 Blink
34 Memory 85 Up/downcounter
35 Timer 86 Elapsedtimer
36 OR (8-input)
Qualified 101 ExclusiveOR
37 AND(2-input) 110 Rung(S-input)
38 AND (4-input) 111 Rung(lO-input)
39 OR (z-input) 112 Rung(2O-input)
40 OR (4-input) 123 Devicedriver
50 Manual set switch 129 Multi-state device driver
59 Digital transfer

Listof FunctionCodes
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 A - 11
AppendixA

Tahle A-28. NAAfiMOI AnaIry Ma,ster Module

FunctlonCode Descrlptlon
47 Analoginputexceptionreport(NAMMOI)
56 Executiveblock(NAMM0l)

Table A-29. NAIUIMO2Analog Master Mdtie

Function Functlon
Descrlptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
70 Analog point definition 75 Analogcalibrationstatus
71 Executiveblock NAMMOZIMAMMOS 76 Thermocouple ternperature
72 Analog slave definition 77 Analogpointservicestatus
73 Cal bration 78 Trenddefinition
74 Cal bration command

Tahle A-3O. NCOMOL/02 Contoller Mdtile and,

CrcO 1/ 02 / 03 / 04 Lmp Command Contoll,er
Functlon Function
Description Descrlption
Code Code
21 M/A station (basic) 29 Analogoutput
22 M/A station (cascade) 43 TCSdigitalinput
23 lvVAstation (ratio) M TCSdigitalouput
27 Analog input 53 Executiveblock(COM)

Tabte A-37. NLMMOI Wic MasterModrie

Function Function
Descrlptlon Descrlptlon
Code Code
46 Digitalinputlist 54 Executive block (NLMMOI)
49 Digitaloutputbuffer 60 Group l/O definition

Table A-32. NMFCOL / O2 Mulfi-Flrnction Controller Mdule

Function Functlon
Description Descrlptlon
Code Gode
80 Control station 89 Last block
81 Executive 90 Extended executive
82 Segment control

Table A-33. Plnnt Loop I/O

Function Function
Ilescription Descrlptlon
Code Code
26 Analog inpuUloop 66 Analog trend
30 Analog exception report 177 Data acquisition analog
42 Digital inpuVloop 178 Data acquisition analog inpuUloop
45 Digitalexceptionreport 211 Dataacquisitiondigital
46 Digitalinputlist 212 DataacquisitiondigitalinpuUfoop

List of FunctionCodes
A - 12 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixA

Table A-34. Restore

Functlon Code Ilescrlptlon
140 Restore

Table A-35. &qterrce Comrnand

Functlon Gode Ilescrlptlon

82 Segmentcontrol
90 Extendedexecutive
175 Sequenceexecutive
176 Sequencestation(CSC)

Tahle A-36. SeqrrcnceoJ Euents

Function Functlon Description
Descriptlon Code
Code
99 Sequence of events log 243 Executiveblock(lNSEM0l)
210 Sequence of events slave 24 Addressinginterfacedefinition
241 DSOE data interface SEM to MFP 245 lnputchannelintedace
242 DSOE digital event interface 246 Triggerdefinition

Table A-37. Sigrru.l SeLect

Function Functlon Descrlptlon
Descrlptlon Code
Code
I Analog transfer 59 Digital transfer
10 High select 162 Digital segment buffer
11 Low select 163 Analogsegmentbuffer
13 Integer transfer

Tahle A-38. Signal Status

Function Function Descrlptlon

Descriptlon Code
Code
12 High/lowcompare 98 Slave select
31 Testquality 100 Digital output readback check
69 Testalarm

Tahlc A-39. Stafton

Function Functlon Descrlptlon

Descrlption Code
Code
20 lndicator station 88 Digitallogicstation
21 lvVAstation (basic) 123 Devicedrtver
22 M/A station (cascade) 129 Multi-statedevicedriver
23 M/A station (ratio) 136 Remotemotorcontrol
62 Remote control memory 139 Passivestationinterface
68 Remote manual set constant 176 Sequencestation(GSC)
80 Controlstation 181 Batchstation(CBC)
87 DLS intedace 231 Strategicloop controllerstation

List of FunctionCodes
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 A - 13
AppendixA

Table A-4O. SrcOI Strategic Loop Controllcr

Funetlon Functlon
Descrlption Ilescrlptlon
Code Code
81 Executive 182 Analog input definition
82 Segmentcontrol 230 Strategic loop controller UO
90 Extended executive 231 Strategicloop controllerstation
113 ASCII string descriptor

Table A-41. Text Selector

FunctlonCode Descrlptlon
151 Textselector

Table A-42. Trend

FunctionCode Description
66 Analog trend
78 Trend definition
179 Enhancedtrend

Table A-43. ?rp

Functlon Code Description
32 Trip

Tabb A-44. User Definedhtnction

Function Function
Description Descrlptlon
Gode Code
190 User defined function declaration 194 User defined data export
191 User defined function one 198 Auxiliary real user defined function
192 Userdefinedfunctiontwo 199 Auxiliarydigitaluserdefinedfunction
193 Userdefineddataimport

Listof FunctionCodes
A - 14 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixB - ModuleMemoryUtilization

INTRODUCTION

Appendlx B llsts the module memory reqtrlrements for each

funcflon code. Most modules llst the module memory utlllza-
tlon ln bytes. TWo guarrtltles are gtven for these modules. The
flrst value ls the number of bytes of nonvolaflle random aecess
memory (II\IRAIVI). Ttle second quarrttty ts the number of bytes
of random access memory [RAII). Some modules llst the mod-
ule memory uttllzatlon ln percent, whlch refers to the Percent-
age of total memory used by each functlon code.

Table B-1 ltsts the conflguraflon memory avallable tn each

module. Table B.2 shows the module memory requlrements
for each functton code.

Table B-7. Auallable Mdille ConfWwafronMemory

NVRAM NVRAM
Module RAM Bytes Module RAM Bytes
Bytes Bytes
NLMMOl 954 1,251 NMFCOz 20,318 94,028
lMLMMO2 7J18 8,894 IMMFCOS 79,040 347,568
NCOM02 1,940 630 IMMFCO4 62.668 163,248
rMcoMoS 1,940 2,O47 IMMFCOs 29,460 97,712
rMcoMo4 1,940 2,U7 cBc0l 15,046 82,214
IMQRCO1 1,940 2,U7 csc01 15,136 92,82
cLcol 1,940 2,O47 sLc01/21 14,848 84,028
cLc02 1,940 2,M7 tNttT022 None None
cLco3 1.940 6,14t1 lNtPT013 90,896 424,960
cLc04 1,940 6,143 IMMFPOl 62,656 163,248
NPPGO1I 20,480 69,632 IMMFPOz 194,752 347,568
NPPGO21 81,920 450,560 IMMFPOS 424,128 1,572,192
INPPRO1l 81,920 450,560 IMMFPO3B 1,851,575 7,863,648
IMMPCOl 20,318 u,o28 INSEMO1 65,536 262,144
NMFCOl 20,318 84,028
NOTES:
1. Usesfunstioncodes127,130and131only.
2. UsesfunctioncpdE202 only (no modulEmenpry utilization).
3. Usesfunctioncpdes200 and201only.

ModuleMemoryUtilization
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 B-1
 AppendixB

rF

s 0 (v lf (o (\l co (\l (\l o o rO I

o sro N N

s o
@ @ C\I @ I C\I I
@ sf 1\ @ N t \t (o N to lO $ ta) rO rl \r ,F
r|- .F
o
a ts
!D

o b N @ s (l' G) N @ b b G) rt b @ q
rF
It N N N
J
rt ,F F' ol F ,F F ol IF F iF F rF rF
rF F rF GI
o

)o
r€ o
a
o
g
(\l o N
Eg $
o t
gs (o ol C\|
e
o
t
!f
s$
C\I C\I
a
a o
ss
o
o
@
tF N
e
o o
o
$
N
iF
N
o
E I g
FN
to

F rF rF rF IF !t-
IL
= Q
G'
@
s
C\I
F
s
C\I
(0
F ol
@ @
rF F
@
rF
lr
!F t
ct
ts
G'
lf
,F
F
a
rF
b
N
=g
.F

o (o (\| o o o o
o $ N N

s
o @
a s srt t
E
to
C)
o
o
5
ol
@
!F
rf
rF F FN rF

(F
N
F
.F

@
rF ol

d
= o

sI
.F 5 €
= > o o ol c9 C\I N $ (\l (\l o o rt N

ssE
lf @ @ @ N C\|
o @ RI I
g
\(0 t F \o
E {s a to g
t
F

C) =o E E r(l to
E $
o 5=
(o s @ b (9 @ @ I rt t N b g{
C\I
o z<
lf tF C\I F F F F F F F
F
rF

E
d
?o b = o
o
a) Ee -
= >
F

;r0 E
@

s
C) $t
N
@
e \ s
RI @ s
sE
I (0
\o
N
to
GI
l4)
@
g
\t
{s
(\l
tc,
N
T()
@
{$ s
@ @
o
@
F
cl
E
o
l() o $
|l':t
(\l N
o
?

3 E
F

13 5= s
(o @ s (o (o @
(\l
(o (o G) (o @ \r rf (0 rf N N N b b
o = z<
RI F F !F rF F F !F F
CD CD !-
F C\I
O E
P
b

'F)
o !F

o (\l (o AI sl €o @ (o (\| o o tf N

F s
o o o
s
(\l @ t lf AI (\l @ sl @ o N
*rl
() g lo s o lc)
E ut o,
t|- tct
ro
I
F
C) or @ N @ N @ llo t $ F !F
t{ lLo d- @ s (0 (o @ (c) @ s @ @ It s s b It N N N b
t
h
= I F ol !F F rt- C\I F !F F F F
CD (I) IF IF
!F
!F
F
C\I
F z
}l
L
q F

o =
=;lJ
o
o
o o (o o o sll) ol
se
llt $ ol (\l GI ol
o = > N Q @ @ o
(o e
{ e \(o g a g a g g a
oF)
*r)
rJ
b
o
o.
=
=
to
5=
z<
N
F
t
(\l F
ol
F
E
@
ol
(0 @
iF
@
!- F
@
F
I
?
s
F FN rF

F
AI
F
@
N

d CE
.N
hl) t > o
o
orJ
o - r F
u) (o co c) ro to
E s E as
r\ (\f
o
=>r
s s$
@ rO ct) @ d:'
.tliJ
(i) 0 co @ rO @ @ F !f @ o N o GI o
hJ o S O lF
E rt-
E E ? F IF
E F ,F

$ Iol (D E E
sa) Q E E E
C) 5 = ol sf r\ N |() @ g) (0 @ tr rf) (0 @ @ (0 @
\t'
ct
s
ct lo K) @

P
F
J
o z<
o
FJ
G
l-
b
q)
E s a? u)
sl o
N a? ol
o
N
o
s{ $ ol
o
ol
o
q
o
\
o
ol
o
q q
o
q
o
a)
c,i
ul
(\l
g) u? ul
t $
ro
t
F
a
o o q
o
(\l q
C)
N
?
a

q) F F F F F F F F

h)

- -l

lJ
o N
E o
= q? (0 ul q ol rC. q q ol o? \ c\l ol ol \ \ al a? g (0 @ q u? (\l sl q q q q
o * N F $ rO lf (\l (\l s It (\l (\l (\l ol ol CD (\l (\l N @ (o d d s CD C9 cy) o s o rO
c.i o
,F F ,F

I z
a
ht
a) ({ = o
d
o
s =
- 4 ,
= > (o (o (o ct (o lO lO
@ @
F
s
= o ol
s
F rF

=
IF F !F
rF IF

Fg J 5 = (0 @
F
tF
F F F cv) b
IF
o
.F @ @ J--
?
C\I
=
F F F

2 <
E
F

o
= s
=
J
z

!,
c
.J

4t
= 3
f
o t
6 C) o- o
o o. o Ct
tr -!9 !t o
L c E lr(5 6 o E l-

I o CO o o b

o o qt E ct 6 g
.F
(u o
E
o E E -= g 6(U o _9 qt o o o
-CL = =
L L

o
g o
g
b

o
.=
L

o ct o E E
= .o I
.F

E \,
u, o .E .H

=
ar
L
(t g
.9 E o
= 5
= = - t GL
€o CL .e
a, o e

=U' E €o Ix
lJ

o o o o CL CL
CO E o g g
=
s =
o L

o c a-
o E .a-

o
o of o o .= G C) C) (It
:' =
.e
u t-
.-
-9 .9 .9
CL
g
CL
o
CL
o
c
-9
C"
of o
o. 6 3
o o g .E .qt
o -9
U' o
3
=o
CL
s s ->
CL e EE qt cr 6
.e .a-
: o
o
CD CD
= t.g
(6 cl) CD
L-

o o b

6 o -9
o o o o
E'
CL a g L.
v, 1t o
.a- lF .a-
e
o, -( goE
. | A
.9 o ?,r ,-|
; o o -9
o
c
=
g
ct ct L
5
q,
= .9
=
c, 6
(E
c .9 3 -9
ct)
o
L

5
o
o
= o 6= -o +=i >( u3 (r D, s o
1C E O
6
g
6
tr
EEI E 6
C
o o E O C
lr J o. A I o cE t J I c l! = 6 o-
F = 6 3 lLg|t = = = g<(, <(c

c
€€ co (o (0 ct) o
gE F (\I (v) s |r) (o N @ o) o F ol \t
IF
to
r'-
N
F
@
IF
o
ol
F
(\l
RI
C\I
c9
C\I
t
cl
to
ol C\I
N
(\l
@
ol C\I GD
lr

ModuleMemoryUtilization
B-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Appendix B

F = o
o €
q 5 r F
= > GI (C' CO (o o @ o @ o @ @ (\l (o @ o @ o It
rF
sto tc, c) cr) q rr) G) tl $ e t @ s (o e) rt (v)
.a-

o rt
o
o > = (0
l.
N N s
rF F IF
q
F
ts
(\l
N b
IF F
N b
F
N N
F F
N
F
N
F
N N
F
z t
@
iF

J
o z< IF

E,
o
)o > o lf

rg 5 -
(o o o o o (\l (D

ss F o if o lf

F s ss
= > $l @ @ @ @ @ @ @ o
e ss g
.a-

s E e q g o
IL
=9
=g
ciI
5=
z<
(0
F
cl)
C\I
IF
ct
F
$
F
E
@
CU
.{ @
rF F lf
b
(0
z
b
F
g
F

(o (\| o o
FF s
rF
lf
GO o o
s .{ s F
o
GO @

$ ss
GI c0 @ @ @
o
o a
@
r() G' s { q g
o G)
F
$
F
s
F
b
(\l
N
rF
@
.F
AI
!F
lf
!F

C)

t
(o (o o (o o
co o o
s
tf
ot
rr) @ {o
F

o @ @
ss
@ @
{(0
@
g
s$
@ C\I
a g e
o s
F
lf) c)
C'
o
o
(o
F
N
,F
s b- RI
c{ IF F
$ (o N
IF
C\I
F $ z
@
lf
F

t'q) F

3
s ; (o (o (o o
t
o €
*J

E8 (\l @ @ o
s {
co o @ @ sl CO @ @
ct g
S ss
(o a-

{(0
a e
FF
aJ
o
F FF
|J)

{r
o
=E @ AI s @
C\I
RI @ S N
F
z
@
$
,F

tt)
q)
= !F

13 \ €
o o ol (0 (o (o @ @ o @ o @ @ 6l o @ o @ o $
O s rO (o s (? t
lr) c)
F
C)or cr) lil g rt @ t t(, a) o
Iro (o sl N I lf CO GI (9 N @ N N N N ol z t
= €
fJ
!F
l- F ol F F F F

hJ
o z ,F

*'J
q)
tJ
b
6
rF

o > o
(o
d (o (o o o
s
rf
-, f
o o GO
C)
B
= >
STD
RI

I
(r)
N
c)
N
g
@
t4)
@
(0
(o sss sF
@ @
g
(o
C\I
r(l
@
a s\r
L = 5 =
I sl
(\l
GI GI

g v- IF F
?
=
F F F F

z<
E
- f-

s rt
o > o
=
q tg
g,
ct

s
+rf c0 g
(0 o o (0 o o @
o to
t
c, C') (\l @ C\I @ @
d
EE
a-
Q
s $ E o F
o F F t- F F .F rF F F
c4)
C' 5= (0 (v) b (c) (0 \f (o q @ l() (o s *q g
*q z rJl)
t - ,
rrJ
J
z< b
r|r) C) E o o
b -9 -9

HEE
= =
P q q u? \ ol q? q q q ol ol g q
E
o a q q g
E
o
C\I
o \o
I
F
s o o o o o
q)
F o o o o o o o o
o
?
b
o o o o =l-
tE

z
o FIFi

b
o o to lo
.q) tt,
.E
o vro
E 6
= =
6
x x
(v) o
q) N ED ED
tr.'

3
o
= u? q q q q ul ul ol ot q q (\l
o
al (o GD q e6 F

o sl + +
'(J o * (\l c)
F

s
o)
ol
g)
ol ol RI o o c!)
6
c o g .J

o N
o @
g) t\
(,
IF
C\I IF F !l-

.o z
E z F

o o
cD \t

= =
6 = =
e.i ol
o > o
(0 z
=
-i
= E>
€
ol sl (\l z |(, o
6
C!
s (o @ C\I (\l @ @ t\ RI @ o
= 5 =
rf) u) b o) F N t- b t-
(0 o
(!
o l(} € G)
o
or
a,) J
=
iF
C\I
s
s
hl
z <
E s
.>
c c
€ o
o o
-9
-g q
= * q q q q q sl s. q q (0
a u? a ol .cl q
o
q
o
q
o
,tl
.g
lt)
ci o
:E o o o o o F o o o o o o o o -g
J (E 6
z a &
F
F

o o
= o
= =
3 o
E g
CL
= = ct,

o =
o
E o .9 5
tr CL t-
.a-
E J o o e,
- o o, E
= o= () o C) (g z o
L
o z
= cl.= .oc
o L
o () P
l-

I
.ts .9 o ct .e

x
.a-
= o () () o () = Ec
o CD
E J J
_cL o = = 3 o CL
.e

e o
5
rF tl
-3 a3 a 6 c)
J
rF
b

(,
L o = 3ct J
g o CL t) -9 L
-E o o @ o o
€o E E o E -
(l o L ra-

o so s str\ E Jcl = ar := C'ox

E CL e
o
,A
E o
o :
.r-
la- CL ;-g
cl
.P g
o =o = L.

E -s C" .9 o
CL 6
s s
CL
CL
E = o
o g r tt6 o o g o !t C"
6 (g

= :=
= = == e E€
o b
cl E o t-
o o .r-
= a o
a-ra-

3
o
3 o € (6 a
o = = )
c6=
- = 6 =
() () C!o,
?= Itt lo
q ra
:= -- E8 c9
6
(t o E' o o = 6
o CE (r = .= a U' --
E 6 6 6 6 C' v v
o ct o
- c
U' ct
o
F

o E 5 z z -9 .9? o C) .9 .9
o
o .9
g
6
c,
6 o
x
o
x
c6()
E o
x o E e tt
CD x x
F z = t- o o o o o F F o o i E CE o = = llJ lrJ I ul E, F o
= E
t G V
g IoN
9,8,
g€
g
rii++
RI c) I u) (o F @ ot o 6l a) tf |o (o F @ ot o IF (\l
u)
ct
ro
I lct
tlo
(o
lo
}\
ro
@
|r, Ot
rl:t (o ltl
o co ut
F
CD g) ca \t s s q I s s q t u, l() lo
ht-
E6 a)
CD c", CD 6A ct) I

lt
E ;.,i

ModuleMemoryUtilization
t-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 B-3
AppendixB

rF

E (0 o (O o (D o @

H
@ @ q, @ g) o
@
(\l rf @ t (0 @
F
$ o)
s!
@ (o rt q? E \
o
N s
F F F

o N b
c\l @ @
@
C\I
N N N
rF
t N q
J (\l CU F (\l o GI @
o

)o
r€ @ (o
CD
G'
@
so
o
C', @
(C)
(o
o)
(>
o
@
(\l $
@
C\I
@
@
o
s
o
(0
s
@
@
st s
o lf
rt- o
\$ dsF N
CO lf
to

F
(D rF

$
N
F
Q F F

a
F
lL ci)
=e @
ol (\l
@
$l
@
(\l N C\I N
(\l lr
s N
co ol
I
@ @ s) b F
(\l
$
=8
F

(o o o $ (D

s
o t
IF

s\
o o
s
!f
o @ o,
o
@
s! !F
E
G'
E
F
F
\\t eg
o
u,
o
@
N
€
C\I
@
C\I
@
(\l v
(0 c:) b
F
GI N

o € (0 C) @ G| o o lf
rt
sb
@ rf

s
F

o @ o o o, o o c:) @
\
q)

S
@
\T S
F
rF
C) {!
{!
N
!F
F
Q
t0
()
@
C\I
@
(\l
b C\I
N N
(\l
tf
@
s
@
G' !F N GI
GI tt-

B
{- -9
=
s*, F = o
0
(0 (0 o @ o @
E
o @ @ o o o !t rf $
s= t o
5 l J
:=rio > o E s @ @ to
sa
@
c O) o !F
\s
s $
c0 ot C\I @ @
H E s E (o C\I
$ S $N
rF
o E F
(D F

N E ?

b
{a = a
-EO 5= RI
t-
@ @
(\l @
@
N N o s \t
(o c) cl ol
u) = z< c\l CV
C\I F RI
= lf o GI F t
E
a)
IJ
o rF

C'
(0 o (o o @
s @ N o @ o t @ t (o t
ro
O
s
@ @ @ (\l c) t o)
g) o) o o
s @
\ s! (o CD \s to
F
@
Oat
N €
F
tr F
Q
€ N
F

b N N
F

c lr.o
= @ b @ (\l C\I N s
rr N (0 (D b C\I c\l
U
o z
C\l (\l (\l C\I ol @ (\l F lf

ilJ

(.)
c
{ .F

--
= o
o
(0
e L
o
c)
g
=
= >
to
5=
co
s5
@
(o
@
E
€9 b
o
g, o
E
@
@
o
tt-

N t =
o
E
G
o o
. - -s
--
0
t
N
CD
rF
lf s
o

a)
t
rF
rF

b
(O
\s
(\|
!t

E Nto
(0 It
lO
rF

N
g (o (F
of OJ - b b
N t
(\l sl
= z<
E
AI C\I

e
a
.- t
o
+J (\l ol o o (o (o o)
s ct
o
(D
(o
ct
b-
(o
ts e
q
o
ct)
b
q
(D
@
s a)
t- a
ro $
H
N o
J
rF C\I C\I rf)
N
rF s rF

r-
C)
\+J
hJ

.q)
E
hJ)
P
o
(-
F
b

a)
HEE N
0
s q u? ol
lil C\I
u?
F
q
s
q)
(o d?
sl
q
o
e !t

-
t
= q u? q a? ol q \to q
13 o s F

t4) $
(F o, s \r Itct N
F

(\l t
o o
z

c,i N
o (o N @ C\I
a
I
= o
'.
CD o
CD
@
SJ cr) @ CD o OI o
{
=
F !F

tr
F

\t b cr) N (c) b b ro @
q) J N (\l (\l (\l C\I C\I GD

s
H
=
,{J
r !F

o -g c E Ec
= s u? ol (o .ct o o oo
=
J
o o F g
(It
1g 5 6
c
66
Es
z
o 6
o
E o = :t € 6
8
o 6
F
E o o
(t c J c €3 6 .E
o ()
CL
()
o
E
o
o
E c
E'
o = o o
C' o
.E
E
c
6
L
(D
CL
g,

o s IL x -s e
tr : i
.9
o CO
6
E
E
E
= EE g E 6
a,
c E ll C"
3 = =o CL

5 -9 CL
tr CD r- o E o q, e o e l-
IF
o v,
= Eg (D
=3 po E o E .> CD ICD o e a)

Eg
.a- .a-
CL
E g o'= c 6 .(t
6 -9 o e 6
E C)
E
() € CL c = Eo -9 . o = o
o =
6
€) 6o at
.J

g f-
.aJ
b
o rl-
o E L
suJ () o .E c c = = o
.H

o c 3 = = Eq
v U )
c c o
EC c (D 3 g(g
.E
o e o E ll lf
e

o
o o
o
CL
.E .Eo d a -
cL&l o L. E E E - E o
o.
x
o
o
v,
c
o .9 6
C) (, oct Eo -s o 9 g 3c oa ' (a
o
o
=
o s
cr
c !t o
o
CD
.9
o o) ct) a
o oE s6 CD CD 6 6 trD o CD E E = E o o - o- 3 o
€ -9qt o -9a6 o c .c- $ft a= = =
ctf CD
0 .9 g € g': o o o 6L Og o .9 -9
E

.cr E !, t r t t IL o
= a cl E 6 6 (! g,

(u ' 6 9
.a- .a-
J g
-E E
L

E 6 at,
rJ-
o al 6 .!
-9 .9 .E F CD
o
!0 tr
g
ClIz Eg c g o
E d8 P
c c g 6
C)
6
()
g E
l-
E
F
o o o -
C) o u i = o =
b
= o o :) UJ o o
CL

tr
o o (o
=!t N a) sf ]c) (0 N @ o) o F N GA t lO (o F @ o) o (\l G' rf ro F @
Q O (0 @ (0 (0 (o (9 (o (0 (0 t\ N F t\ F F F N F N o €o @ ao @ @ @ @ @
so
-
IL

ModuleMemoryUtilization
B - 4 ls FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Appendix B

rF

E (\l GO @ 6 o o o
!F
o t() o o to s o
IF
o
IF

$
!F iF
o s N
I N N N
c\l GI
F
lf
C\I
t
GI
J tO
U'

)o (\t o
@
t o o
@ o o
TE bo (o rf ol o rf rt
s o
F s Nu) EE
o o o o o
lr
=e
ct
to
s E
ol
F !F

N N
iF
e
lr
Q
G)
.J

o !F

b
F

!r
!F

t
=s C\I
,F
C\I F
C\I N tf q GI c|
F

.o
rF
ol co g t

s
o @ rf C'

s o t
0
C)
u'i)
F
rF
to
s
a o !F

o N N @ b
() u) C\l
F ol
s
?
s

o @
!F

c)
-€
= o
= > o
(\l @
o
(o o
c) g rf o t
t o o
o
o
o
e
F
.P
lf)
o
F
rF
C) = @ rF IF trt
IF

o
F

N N N g @ z b t s
() 5=
z< rO (\l (\l ol
T t C\I $l
t'a) E,
(F

{-
F,
c'
o
E
b

o It o o
ol bro @
-
o o
s
ol s
s o o
$ lf
o
s
@

s
Pro @ o o ro
lo

F t
P
o
H9
9E
L ,F F
F
o
N N N \l z b tf q
{a G Y
GC' l(t
(\l
6l (\l (\l
rfI C\I cl

u, =
a)
IJ \ F
o o o (\l
bco @ ct @ (D
o $ (D $ o o
o
o
o
s o
\f rf
O u) o rO @ .a-

rF|l
fJ
b
o
C) or
lLc
=
z
F

N
l(, 99
t
N
(\l
@
N
!F F F

N
(\l
N
N
IF

s b(\l
z
€
IF
o
b
t
$ €(\|
? F

I
N

tttt'

.
o
tJ
L O
t
F
o -..,
> o co ssf o (t
rf
s
o
AI
F
tlr C)
c
= >
; E
o
{ |J) o
IF
@
q € ?
o
?
o
!F

a0
l- = 5= RI 6l N t
ol o
$
lr t
C\I
,o = |r) C\I GI
z<
\ FJ
E
b
o 3
*)
.J
o st C\I
B c) a ?

s
h)
o
o
J
CO
IF
t
'Fl
*r, o
b

E
H
P
o
a_
F
b
q)

q)
EEE N
o
I
N
!F
(t?
o FtFr

o|(\I
g

g'
ro

_ H
x x

+ +
CD

3 = q @(o
TJ o I o Fg)
o C)
z Na;

N N
o
aq)
I
= o
tr
=
J

s
H
=
s
F< rF
o
= s
=
J
z

cp
.E

= x ()
A
(v) 5 .H GD ro
o-
e O
=
a-

=o
b
CL
.E gct
-9 () v)
F8 CL v,
6 r,

a=
tr g
tr
.9 ao .sg x=
-g>
=
o
E
o
E .9
(r
CD
=, 6
2s,
tcD
gro
E
6
E
o
o
=
cr
A

a
+
() 6 $ t .> E
.F
= E g E

.> o a
.> ->
CL o
-> o c .> o .> o
= c, -9
x -> 6 P .> E = o = Eo = =
g a- v
L o 6 v!l c g q) g 6 1t CL
C) I
g
g E
c, g
o +
gt o 6o o
o ic,
o o 6ts o
o o o G' a-
c c
C)
o
CL
o xx ^o ' c)
E3 (o t 6 (v)
9or
(r) o (Y) la-
o 6 C' 8= o o (Y)
o ct CL
F I A

*GA
5 a oTL E v o= Eo so
o o (\l o rn Gl (\l
o sl o .o N o E E
q)
;:a
o o o o -9
o : o o () o a:

< o- o- E'
o o g P = O E Ol!
o O o lr = c c
o
v t -
VU
{r ll- lr-
E8 lr ]L 5 3
+8 = - a r O () I I ()
x $
= = Eo
lr IL q, t! -!i

= TL
= In lL

s 6 = O E UJx o.= o-=

tt E'
6= = = > = = = <= = z = =
q) o ct E - ? - N

- 5 = = 'i =. z s 2 z z = co G E o il'O
6 F
r f
a a U

cr o +X
C
0 0 o
=tt o, o AI 6D t
g)
to
O)
(0
o
F
CD
@
ot
ct)
C't
() F

o
(\l
o o F to6i
ECDT
9 0 @ o, O) CD ot IF F !F

5o
IL
=rtct

ModuleMemoryUtilization
15 FEB 1995 B-5
l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixB

E o
CD s rt
o
$
@
o o
F
0 \s !F rF
F
F
F
rF

b
C, (0
(v GI
@
(D
@
(o N
F C?
J
o

)o
rg o
(rt o
o
,F
\
\t It
o
I
@
s F Ft
of C\| N @ o
rF
N

fi
(0

ssI
o N o @
!F
!F
N
(o
(F
N
0
IF
N

$
(\l
\lr
o
(o
IF
o
rt
\r'c)
lL c:t
a ts
F

=e (E'
C\f
s
ol
q
(\l @
c,
b
(0 ol C{ C\I lr a) q) GI C\I c)
b
@
o-
t sf b
@ to
=g
rF
I $ C\I
o o N N o

ssb
t ol o|
ss
o o (o of @
o @ o @ o N to
C) \s F

5 N rF ,F rF
$ rF

o
o (\l a
(r)
b
(o N cl C\l \f GD CD b b
CD @
b
t
o-
@

F o s I o (! ol N co o o N N o

ss
o (o t o (o N @
o o @ o N to
\t 5 Na
?
E
C)
$
IF it- rF F F
rF

o b (\l @ @ N GI @ b a) b b C) b
(J $l a) (o t\ $J C\I F C\l tt GD co o tr (o
aq)
:J gt
arJ
b
= o
*,
U Gl'
Rur 5 -
= > o o \t \t cl o o @ N N o o
ss ssE s
cr) o !f
o (o ol (\l C\l @
o @ N o N N (o I
\t \o @
\s
Fa ,F

g
L
H E
=rt
=to rt-

(ct
tF

s
F

b-
E
@
TF

b 6l I !t-

b b
!F

o
F

b
,t
o a
rr
.B (f 5= (\l @ ol ol (\l
s co CD ol (\l t (E) CL
to
u) = z< C\I GI e, @ GD @ g
a
q) G .a-

E
TJ 0 o
= o CL
o F
- ' ? o o tf \r sl (o o o N (\l o g o|
(o af (\l (\l (\l

sN
o = > o t @ (9 o N
K)
O ()ol = r o CD \s o N u) (C' o @ o) o
rF IF rF o) \s rF
0 rF

lLo
F F F

N N N N ED Q
tJ
= 5= b s(\l @ b @ b s) c) o b b
s \t b
(o .E rt
s
b (\l CU (\l lF
C\I tF
c) @ rt c) @ lJ)
z = < C\I
E
E
g
*J o
O
tJ
CL
(D
b !F p

=f;.
t o o o $ s N o N N o of
o
E o CO o $
\s o @
ol

s N N|.) E
cl N @
o
ss
G) o (o o N N
\sf tO o
N F

E
$
IF !F !F ,F IF IF !F

b Q
L = l= @ s o @
@ @ b b b b !f

g = z<
G
RI C\| c\l c!, (o ol (\f F ol \t CD c) g:, @ $
o
lr (o
e
A
ora-

o
tJ)

f{
b t
IF

.9
b
rt @ F
v
b
Y

*l
o g, o o
-!g .9
.N
d G'
o
CJ !t
= -g
=
E
:'
E| J
o
o o B
H
*J E E E
5 GI
o
GI
o
o|
o

HEE
= = =
P
o
()
o
()
o
C)
(t
P
F
b
s z z z
E E Eg
.q) c E
!U
E 6
F

o
6
F

o
iF

o
q)
hl
3\|
o =
() = =
- I
= o C)
IJ o s o
z-
o
z
o
z
o C)
= ,F ? F

o o o
F F F
o- o. o-
e.i N
o o-
€
o-
z
o.
I
= @ (\l 6l \t GI t\ N co (! @ (\l ct) c) = o =
aq) =
CD
(o
@
@
@
CD
s
ro
(\l
o)
t
sr
@
t b
ol o)
@
ol
b
to
cr)
(\l
tr
(?
L- o
.c
rF

b
(0
@
o
rO E
o
s
J F (\l u) F ct, (o (\l tir C\I C\| .P (D .F .P

s = g s s
s
F iF
.>
o
g
.>
c
o
.>
E
o
o g o -9
= I
ll .o .ct
=
J
G'
6
-g
G
.g
cl
= t & &
(\l l-

o o b
o .P

x o
= .g
o .9 b x 1t
o c
b
o E
.e =
J o
b
o F l- o tr CL
b
o
tr
-9 o =
J
E
I
c
-9
o c
o
ct
(, E o
-cr
(s E
CL
x
-g
trl
z
.g
lll
z l-
=CL

= = C'
= C
l-
1C
o
6 6 o
- N .E
:' (E
=
CD
E o
g
.P o E .g
= tr -L o
o C) 3
o
3
o -s!
-CL (! J o c
= trDC)
E) o ()
o o tr 5 z lr.
z c l-

o
E o
o !t 1a- .H

g
L
(, o E E .-,, o o E tr
b
E -e C5 c
6
E b o = 6
== o 6 6
=
6 6 = =t = =
E
E o
.a-
o E E GD tt CD CD
a :'
.cI O
3s CD
: =
-9 3 c
.H
d b .a-
q, @ o, (g ct
o oAl o. tr E 6 CL o 6 o CL CL
o. = = s
o
o cl. o rr, O E O t- CL E ct
() o c .s ct
E' I E E o
-o
o o Oc- -g
.s o=
ct o, 6 q-= q 6
d

g= s g E o
.=
(D = - =
F = CL a CL F
g
E -9 g g E -- == , o
3 = EO J= ott so .g c@
CL (g 6 ED o o
o o CL -g .E
o
-9 =6 l:
o
3 ll
o €c c L
J
(D I
F C '
o
:' E o F L -
6
6'= e = E = = -= Eot
q, ;*J
E o 6 o 6 6 cr 6
-g E ; 0 '

co =
x q, o o -) o o o o E .9 o o o o 6 6 + x
i l >
+ o E
o. UJ v ) = u J 9 G tr J c0 o tr c0 tr, o o U) o E, d E a, o-o &tt
tr
o o (o ct) o o|
=tt sf ro N @ CD o F (\l cD s r() (0 N GO o, o
ol
F N CD $ to @ N CO
ol (a
IF

CO GA
o o o
!F
c) o o o o F
F
F
|F
F
.F
,F

lr-
F
F
F
!F
F F
F IF
N
F
(\l $t
F
€\l
(F
AI
IF
C\l
IF
C! C\I
F
IF F
lF F

5c)
F F

IL

ModuleMemoryUtilization
B-6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Appendix B

{
rF

o
o
J
o
o N
)o = o
s-
@ rF
o
o (o (o t o F= o o o @

Eg
N
= B Itt @
o o $ t t o o (\l t
{
o o iF
@
=o @
(\l ol
@
e E ,F ct
ts €tr
.H

o .rA

99
F F

a
F

AI o b z N N
=Q > = b(y) (o
ct)
N N
K)
C\I
F
q
t o € lf
F
@
(\l G) @
b CD a)
=g z< @
z
IF

3e
tE
GO
@ @ o o (\l tt F

o (o o (o b s o cl
fJ
o
C,
s
(C)
o)
sN
@ K)
o
a-
o
z
F

b
@
IF

rt
F
ct)
x
G|
H

o FI

= o @
(\l
F

o
-.ts
= > @
(o @
o
@ @ E \t
t
o
t-

v)
(, =o a0 $ CD
(o E
v

E
E N Io b t x
5= g)
6l I
N
a q)
C) z<
E
o tf) t
z
@ $
ol
o
- I
o (D
rF
U

c = o @ +
U
*) c)
5 . F $ @ @ @ o rf
(o ctt AI lf CD F= o o o
@
€oo
@ GO tf
c 9lo = > o
s s o o ol g @
iF

H E =o lif @ @
e t CD
{ cqt @
o E
E9
rF

E F F
F
o
F
K'
{a = a
- o 5= (o (o AI N GI \t
o
o s @ b @
(D
I
rl z N sl
tD
= z< (f) q) @ to $
z
@ N ol cq) F
b @ crj
v) E, ct ,F

a)
13 \
E (o
(F

o @ @ @ o $
(o o (0 s

.d
tJ
b
o
Oor
lro
=
z
ssN
CD @
IF

lc)
@
N
F
(o
N
?
!F

$
rt

rlif
(J
tJ
b rF
6
ra = o
o - f ,
@ @ @
--F)

C' = > @ o (0
*l
o, ; @ ol E
L = 5= (c) ol 6t
g = z<
E
o) @ K)

s
h

a
rli) o =
B b (\l
o F

.N o
J
o
hl
x
op
*l o GI
b U
FI

P
HEE
F

=6
o
l- * a -
v X
F
b Xq,
.q) !f,
N O
(\l

E 9E
u +
q) N
tsa
-{
- o
=
*j9
(Et $l

IJ o * oGo
o (J
z
Joi
E
.F 'F

e.i (\|
o
o
S O rF

=
=a
I = >
aq) = *o
J 5= tr
= z<
s
hJ

E o
s
r{ (F
e
6

o
= s b
=
J
o
z E
o
E
tr (!) -e
.9
=tr
L.

o
.e >8
o
C' E (D
6.
(D
E
o
.= o 5o
a8
qt l!
= -g
I6 =o
g C) o E
c o c
SE
t
o = E x
o
o
-e
3=s
L
E o CL
o g o .> d
-9
.- L

o E CD
() E S
o .> .> s .>
c -o
t-
()
o a- e rF
b .g
g oe
cf,
s
I

fss gcE
6 g E o CL x E (D E
o, o
o
Ix .> SL .> o
g o o c o a 5 .aJ
.tt
.> g o
C)
8
l-
CS o .> o 6 (!
t 5
s
g g 6+H
A o
L
E st t E E o E
C' c
€, E g
o E
e o E 6 o c o CL
9
v c=
o o o d
o
o g =
cr o E o b o c4f
6
a b Itr CD _ e A G)
Ic o o : i o o (t
@ct
ts
o
le

t
o -g
u
o E C) sl o N c) o E o o () c,O
o o
o g o o o o o o
o o g J ( )
CD t o v
E
CI'
a
o
:' o oE()e.a=
= o|r. o lr O
II lt
= o
= =
lr o
= o
JIL
6()
olL lr
= == =
o
J
er E
at-

o
.J

o
E
-s l!
(r<
lr
= -9 6 l-
ET
H8=z ==
IL E
ct
E 5
q
o
E
o ? E E=z = o-
.D
6
cr ET
= oo U)o
o
E = o= = o o
b o
cE G E= =
G'
g
T r-O
s&
o o tr @ cr6 ll.
9=
tr rr t- *

o o
=tt
cro
a)
ct,
\t
(D
lo
cr)
@
ct,
N
a)
@
(r)
o)
(o o
\r
IF

$
N
\t
c'
rt
lf
$
lO
$
(o
$
t\
t
@
\l
O)
$
o
u) E*s
F IF F F F F F IF IF
hG-.
5() F

Z;?
F F

.J

IL

ModuleMemoryUtilization
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 B-7
 Appendix B

rF

{
rF
ol
rO
(o
o)
lr
GI
o
CD
(\l
t
3\l

s
F

o
o a F

N
!F

b
c!
ts E
J
@
(\l rt
@
a:, ro (D ]\
I

Fo tf to
!F F
o c\|
Eg C\I C\I CO $ N
u) u) CD (\l
(\l .J
o o) .a-
o \r
(q'
|F

CD o o G|
ts
F

= Q @
s
@ N (E)
(D
z a
ro
z It

=g
C\I t @
@
b
@
GO N

tF
o|
c rF
o E
o t
C) l\

o s
rF
> o F

c =E o
@
@
N N
F

o =t0 .E

o IF
E
o
() > = z b
to
*CD \r
t\
a ql
=<
E
@
@

-
rl

ro
.5
?t
tsro = o
!'
CO
lf
(E'
= E (\l
F F
*l
:( C\l $ N 6|
o) o o rf
= r o lo ult N

s
@ !F

t= tet
F,

E
a- .P

o F F
E o F
o Q
{r -=o 5 = (0
z< s
N
s
(c)
G4'
z @ z (c'
o
rf

u) = E,
C\I
@
(o
to
€o
(o
F
q)
\J $ |.)
o F

o
F !F
ol (\l
O ()or o o
lro o o $ F

E
t a
= z z b \r
s*,
b
a)
z @
(o
@
@
N

a
P
b

o
,J o
C\f
IF
ll
o. E
L = lr
q = N

FJ
b

rd
o rt
o b
*i)
(o
t- F @ to o o) lO
d G' F a) tf o
o E F
E E IF

N
El)
o
J
@ o
ct)
s
C\|
GI
t
o
E a
GI
N
lo
oJ
+J o o aa

tr.J g E cl
6l

HEE
o
P q
E E +
o
t- s sl
u?
rO
\
@
C\!
s
: b
o?
t\
sl
to
rF

N
F

q)
hl
F
b 8
-o
g,
V
x
E € b -
@
q) N ;o E= +
ri)
o o
3 =
't3
E E
(\l
o * (\l

.o C) rrt
E z B € rF.

e,i (\|
0
>
0
o.ts
= E
a
I
=
-i
= >
3 E = E lc)
E
= 9 @ o
a) J 5 =
z<
=|(t F
ts

s
l
= E .=
? F

cD

s
F
nb €8
o O e
= * t r o
=
J
g €
6 C
z
->
c
.> N .> .> ? -> .>
N
o o
g
o o o
E L.
o
c l-
- o
E
o
c
o
gE
I()-. =o
\f t o \f
o g $
-g
E c
lF
c r= $ It
E
o
=
J o
= = 6
o
= g
o
Gt
o
E
g,A

g6 = o
bE =
o
I.- o
() o
o
o o
() ()
o g) .U
g, .9= o ET o
()
-e C) -9 3 L - -o PN
b
o
o
L

o
=
->
= =
.>
=
.>
6 G'
E
6
tt
6 ltts =
o!t
.>
g q ^ =
.>
() E E o c E GD E E'

E sE E s =
o g c c c .9 E g 6 g
o -9 6 o qt
E
o 6
E
o o 6 0
tt
o.N
6
E
o 8 6 t E6 co N

Fsg
o ol sf (\l $ ol \t cD cl st E o (\l $ (\l sf o
v, o o o o o (> E o o o c .EO o o o o
o o Io o o P-g o o x
x
.o J
O
J
o
J
q)
C)
J
C)
Io CD
o
cc
J
O
J
o (t
c
o :

E O
tu tt
F

o E9
o. C , ) o O C)
J J
C)
J
o o
I o
$
H

g +
o o .'ii co
=( t, to ol c!) sl rO @ N o O) ct F ;z (')
lo ro rO rc) to ul) u) rO ro @ (0 -co
EO
J
IF F F F !F IF F

o+
lt 1 -

ModuleMemoryUtilization
B-g 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Appendix B

!F
@
IF
t N
E
!F
@
N
rt
CD .-
o N
o) C)
@
o) F
IF
o
a
F
o b b
C' G)
iF ,F z o| b
ro o)
\t
\r
J (0
o F

o o
)o > o
r€ (o
IF
G|
=3 € \l o GI
lf
o o F
lr (', Fro \(0 CD
(o o E
b
!F

a
IF

=e 5=
z<
iF rF z
(0
@
C\I u) g,
\f
t
=g E
,F

rF ol
o \l o| F
o
() \ CD Q
o
iF

s
o G) G)
(, !F N t

@
rF
iF
rt (o N
0 @ s @ N
ot o Ot F
o
o
o
E CD
(D
z
o b
C\I
!F

o
ro
F

€
CD
t
rt
Fl

N
o
aa G)
F
x
-
I
C- o (o GD
U
\ o
*J
L.
G'
Pro
--
= > @ \t
,F

o ol
\t
o
(D
o
n|
F
+
o
P

H E =o \ ct)
o a ,F rF l|-
N
CD
{J =!r
G O 5= @ @ z @
C\I
b
lo
CD \r
{'
b CD c;
v) = z< F

q) G
(o
\J
o \
rF >
5 -
o iF
st !o 6l
(\l
O o
(J or = > @ ttf
o)
o o) o g, F
?
lLo ;o F
(o (0 o
b ts rr
\.
d
= 5= z @
AI rO g, $
o
F

z z< (0
H
rlJ tr !F

a
c rF
cl
e
r.
o
() o
N
t
ct)
F
,F

o. (0 s
L = @

q =
F $

d
b
.-o a
o
o
tF

rt @ rF

s
+rl
|F
o C) c:t lo
CD ct) F
E rF
d o E o
!F

()
F

z o
.N
!F
,F
(0 G' @ rO o) cl
EJ)

*,
oFl
()
J
F
ts
F

5
P
HEE
F FI

o ol a? a
F
ol ol \.0 a (\l
a-a
F
s c) rF rO
o
.a-

o
(\f (\l F o
b
q) z x
(\l
E o
U

q) N
+
hl)
o q
3 = F

\J o be
o o F.
z

e.i N
o
a
I
= @
E
=
hJ
a) J
=
s
srr
o
= s
=
J
z
.> -> .> N -> -> .>
g c ? g N c o g ?
o
E
o
t
o
tr
o
=o o o o o
o 0 o
Ei= sf
9 Io rt = t e= t
tr E E \t
o
= E 6
bP
=
st
o
E E =o\t
o go
ao =
o
O.^
st
o
=
Fg
o
= E8 =
FO
v()
o
=
o
-9 .39 o o O g o o o E=o g,= ()
() Fg
! - =

o c) c)
EE o o gr-

8E 6e
.F
C) =
c
L
col
o o = = = BE = .> og = .>
= =
.> EE .>
Pgg tBs
C' FC) 6 6 !t u d !t tt
o E t,
tr
!t
g c
e t
t,
c g
=€
E
E E
Eg c E .9s g c c c
E
EEI
o c E E
o o o 60 6 o 6 o
o o o o o
(g o o o
qN t trE o st
t -
N rt 6g oN o| sf N q =
s98 egs
sl sl (\l .t cl rt N N o!t
o o o o G|
o o o
o o (') o c, c,
()
Io =eo9 ()
o o o o
() o
() -E
FFo o o o C) o
Ed 9 E3
o o C) o :td 6c) J J
xH V - o = J
o
J
C)
J
o
J
C)
J
o o
J
()
J = $
= o
J
C)
J
O t8 J
C)
J
o o o C) o x
@

r r *
B
o o sf to (0 N @ o) !l?;
=lt N CO (o (o (o (c) (o F C')
9 0 @ (o @ ?

9e
.F iF tF
!F F
!F
F

5c)
IL

ModuleMemoryUtilization
l-E96-2008 15FEB199s B-9
AppendixB

s (\ @ \t @ o
o
rF
o
(J
F
F

s
s
q
g
(\I
s
3
K'
\t
F
rF
o
J
o
€ F F F (o

g)
=o
r€ o IF

N rt o o ctt t
@ (v:t o
t\
F st s g r(t cr:t F
L

o
-

lL
=g
c)
lf
$
!F
(\l
IF
q
IF
s
IF t
iF
o
N
z
=S N
rO

rF
o
(\|
F
o
(o t(a
C' F

a
F

o s T
o $ N o

€ o
(F
(t
()
N
N
F ss
s
s
@
ss
o
lO t
(l)
N
3l)
s
E
u?
F
F

o N t o N o o
(, !f
\l
F F t- F
€ t !t (p

B
- qt

*,
t-
b
e (\ o s
€
o) €
?,
E8 t\
s$ s
@
slr
C)
u:) (Y) d)

g *. E
F

rt
rt
rF
C\I
F t-
s
F
g
o
F
F

o
(\l

v,
a,)
13
o tF

o (\ co $ o
O O crt N s s
@
ss |ct
lLO
s s N s
F,
b
o = I
!F !F t. (F

z
*)
U

U Ff

{ b t-
o
(, (\
( L
1\
F
@
s$
L - sril
g .
!F

F,
b

.9
*.,
rt
C' IF

t\ ro cr,
B (rlt lO F
(F

(,
F F
C) F

.N
h) J
o
N
@ (0 F F

\*.)
.Ff
C'
hJ

E
P
o
F,
F
b

q)

q)
HEE N
s q
t\
e
o
\o oq
o
ol
o

{
H
o
.
T3
d

o
()
s
o z
E
e.i N
o
aq)
I
.
.
J cO
Et)

s = ll
o
.s
tr{
!t
E
!-
o co os
-d(o
- :s l l N l l
. J
z E:ts
.> .> .>
gs c
o
$
o
-E
s
o
.>
o
g

sf
o -O
q
o
=
0
$
o
E s
o
sl
o
o
$
o
C sl
o
C)
J t
o
c
o
o
o
() C)
U'
o
ED
o
E
CD
.9
o
c
o
tr
o =
o $8 =o sg o= o
J
=
o
o
a\t
=
o
o
e
=
6 -> 6
g
-> -= c)
@ E
rla
() 5 = C) P! , = o o.^ C) arO o ()
J
-9 c c c c E' O (D CL
ra-
Cl.
€: = o= o -o o
-
o o =
Eg
It
.5eoE = \o/ E = = stu =
(, E e p- s
x 6
L. X A
rt t E
= -o =
c f

o FF E >c E 5 o tt
g
3 E 5 tt
6 oe o
CL
o c 9t c c 5 9
68 c c c
IE Ic 3e,o o g F o E .ge oo -s
3 a

EB
o c5 o E O rg o tro o o
E
o
E
o E= o o
(v) (v)

C\I $ 9N (\l st 9 N (\l $ N $ = E N qf

o o c) 6< o ctt
o
o
o gE () o o = o o
xr Jo oJ oJ
o 5= o
o
c)
o gFo o
() =
o 5
6
lt
ct ET -a0 = o E lr
E A =
() 6o
c
o
P

C)
?
3 € 6't t.' oo-

g
E3 J
o
C)
J
o Fd
J
C)
O
J
o uJO o o
l o
_f, c
q . o
J
C)
J
o J O
os J
C)
J o
o o o o
c, o = tE
o . = = UJ co to
g
r-
(! g

x
.o
LEbab
; o F s
i. ll ll ll
.X- QNNN
0€'
i3 !t o ? (\ (a
F
s
F
ul,
t\
(o
F
t\
F
€
F
ot
F
o
€ @
(\l
o
, r r i1 E " c D o o
f u
9 0 F N F -
?
a r b b b
- - - -
!F F TF F F
(F
F tF t- F F F

5o
F

IL 9P

ModuleMemoryUtilization
B - 10 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 Appendix B

o
F > o
e
F
- t
= >
o =3D
C)
J >=
z<
o E
o c, rO (o
)o 6l o
(\l
F

ol (\l (\lC\I o €
TE t N ol
rO g)
@
o o o o €o I ro c)
s
C\I
IL
=e
c'
GA
F

R
ol
N @
s N
b z
o
.e

o
z
la-

o
z
o o rF

b
IF

@
tr) C') s s o c) c,
=g t o
g)
@
lo F
@
rt
@
t

rF
o
C)
o
C)

F @
o (o
o F

rt
@ N
(D ct,
C)
B
- q
tr o N .f
U
x
to
b
b (\l C\I N
+
I
o t (o
E Pro
LJ 't €o o
.e -oo ro
IF
CD
? rO
o r;E o o C{
{l =E z z z @
a)
@
c!) tct
o (0 o
3t,
q)
= CA t(, N C\I

13 o
o F

c
-= ->
= o
O Oor ;to
lLo
Fa
b
= 5=
.rJ
o z z<
.frf E
C.)
tJ o
{
b F
> o
e L
C)
o
B
=
=E
= @
5=
,o = z <G
\ P
b
o o
o rt \ o CL
*,
.!)
o 5.ts
= >
a
B c)
o so e
c
.N o
J 5= o
CL
hJ)
rj
+r o =< tr
E o
b ED

HEE
C
P
o
E'
C
FIF

??=
E s o
CL
o
ol ol to
@ u-r\/t 3 l
-,,
q) T'
(\l x x x
E N
o
_NUNUC )
+ + +
a)
hJ
N
o -o sf(D(O
3 = o o ou)to
lJ o s t\ s o
(ou)$l

o o
a a a

@
(c\)t $
Ct\ o
F
o tG|
z
E F

o
F

o ol

e.i N
Eh E
I
o
= = = z
a = o o
,E
;E
.-
a) J
=
ia-

s
le

g -s
s
hl)

.> .>
sr rF
c
o o o
g g

o -g -9 o
= s -cr .ct .ct
-g g
= -g
6 6 6
J
z R a&
E
€,
$B o
z tr
-i
.F
l-
q) L c o c e

€s
c l-
o o o CL
o o
L.

o
q) -ct
.g o
cO CL CL o o o

E= € s
-l
tl 5 x
() oo .cr .cl() .E
o tr cO
L.
E c
tr o
(E r C)
o otr o o o o o
.=
E

.9
- c o
f .> s o -> .> 6 a6 l- l-
o .> .>
o Or-
tro
g,
tr .Cr
=
= o = U' = = o ) co E c 6
.e

6 =
1a-
E QE) , q E E
()
J E

Eg
CL ct, 3 o
o o !, !t - o
= =tt o
=
IF -lJ-
q' o
s 0 se
L. lE
\t s if, ()$ st I
= t l-
l-
It E E
C'
() s, (E = CL o B S e :i= q e o o o
e x
6==
o. go. = = E' s 9 cq) . > c) c4) o
d CL
o o cqt c c E' cq, g
o >\-o o o
x o o o o ()

cs
o >rO -g
ctt
CD
o o
e o 6(l)
.Xv C)
@ e
E C L
() o
E'
o
t,
o
e .egts
b b t \
o
lr-
6 o
= e
o10@
v F F

x Cv vD U )
()
?
6 R =.U o .9(o := oo b . E l!= hi a X8 lt=
6 ll. o lt
= o$ 66
'!. F 6
.9 o g E = r i o
= t-
o o
t-
a, E 9= = S -*
H 9 -9 = o o
E E == = (, o
g q
E
6
to lJ. ct o o G = f D E oGl$l
t- uu

?+ +
tr N
o) '7i ?oq
o o (o (I) \t @ ctt o IF
N ;i\t$lN
= E a) st lo N @ o) o F N
o o o !f. N to sl
9 0 @ @ @ @ @ @ @ o) o) o, o) o) I ct) ot
(F (\l (\l (\l r
t- !F !F IF !F IF F
to F

5o
F F F

C', I d;<ri
ZNG|$I
IL F

ModuleMemoryUtilization
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 B - 11
 AppendixB

{ o
'. U'
lr
a
F

o
o
J
o
lf
o
l.l)
o

)o t\ @
(\l
o co C\I ol
s
Eg o @ $ @
N F o N o g @ (D
a
F

e)
=e Io N
(o o-
|F

S
c)
F

N
F

$ z
o
z
o E
@ $
o
=g F
C\I I (\l
G)
rf
b
t
a
rF
> c,
-r.F
o = >
C) =E
o 5=
C) =<
E

o
o
o
o
t'a)
{
J

o
fJ
b
HI c, (\l (\|
*r
F Rro N
rO o
o
h,
H E
=rt o o
{f -ct o z
(0
u)
q)
= s
IJ 0
o rF =
> t
o
t) o
Oor
= >
;ro
lro
tJ
hr
= 5=
.h)
o z z<
+r, G
U
F, o
{
b F.

o
\ o
- .aJ

d o
o.
= >
=rD
L = 5=
q = z<
E
tJ
0
h

o rt > o
*)
t-
o - f ,
= >
B ct
c =E
.N o 5=
hr)
.d
rti,
()
J
z<
E
5

.a)
E
P
o
t-
F
h'

a)
HEE N
s

o
.|-
FI

o
x
(\|
U

+
hJl
\| o
=
o
a a
sl
to
N
ct) (D
@
\3
F)

o s t
N
C'
C\I
@
C\|
N
t\
(9
.o C)
z cd
E
rF F
(\l o o o o ol
o
l- = = = =
e,i (\| TI
lrJ UJ
o o
UJ ]U
a o
o
q
I
= = = = = =
q)
=
J E
o
.-
o
s-
o
G
o
E
o
,E,
lU
=
.t- .a-

sp
H
-s s s g s
.>
E
->
c
.>
E
.>
E E
r F o o o o o
o -9 o -9 -g -9
= s .o .cr .Cr lr cr
=
J
6 g -g .g E
6 6 6 6 6
z
& i & i &
(D g = F

tr
q€Es o
o o
o
ctt
.= .=
G
o
o
=
o
.E
E
s
o, c
o
o
= CL
()
o
o
o
3
L.

-g
E e
-9
L ul
v,
o
=
ul
U' ()
0'
o
C)
6
.9
- ze3= o
b
E3
*9 (o )
CD
E'
g
.9
E E
=t
1t,
(D
o
o
-9
.-
-9
s
o
-=
=
o
(J
E
x
o
= al-
o
=
t-
.E

c
o
.f-

g
()
o
C)
!5
E
a-
g
o
z
E
6
E
o
g
g
CL
l-
:IL .> o .9
.=
J
G Cg
g
e rF
o
3
cr
c
CU .> raD
C)
o, CL
o
.l-

.E
o J
o
o
@ .9
C'
d
S

o 6> o
c,
:E .9
L

o
E
6 6 ()
6
'!9
o
t-
o
o O.- 0
c t-

t-
o o
o
o
o g =ED
6
E
-g
ct)
q'
g
g
iE
F

air)
o 3
o E 8 = s
o cr B
( ) x*
E' B = E sh E 9 C
E 15 ;at
{ o
c)
o
E
E E 6
E E .:
o Sg , -=
c
6 E
(l,
o
a
o
Q a
6 C t
+8 =
C)
l!
C)
6 6<
o
e
o
o o
.u 'E 6 F
!Zo
o
e
0,
o
E
E ()-
5,()
.c tt
o
lr.
o
a
0'
o,
o .96
Olp
E
e=
* llj 6
arE (t
= O E
E= -5 C'
b
q)
t'l
CI'
x
o
o x x .>

o
(g
E6.
6:i o
o :- E6
F . =
€ E v,
q' o 6 =
c, e 6't
F O 6e o -- cr E) GI
CE r X O
v t Y = o os E
E(D
uJ tt ulE ^EO
ut c, E o ql= = tro CD la-
: = e
v)o A O
Y a - os x E(D
UJ < ( o tr F
L- C\I
ol
U

E o) s ct) +
g€ (v)
o
of o rF
RI
IF

(\l lo @ N o ot o
6l
C\I o rF (\f GD $ rO @ ; i N
rii rt
g6
F

o I F F I F F tr- IF ol I cr) CD t $ $ t s(\l s(\l -- s

GI rt (\l (\l RI (a ol C\I ol N ol (\l F AI (\l st C\I 6l cl
o C\I 9ij
IL (\l (\l C\I -Gl

ModuleMemoryUtilization
B-12 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixC - FunctionGodeExecutionTimes

CODEEXECUTIONTIMESIN MICROSECONDS
FIiiNCTION

Appendlx C ltsts the functlon code executlon tlmes (ln mtcro-

seconds) for each module. Executlon ttmes for some functlon
codes are program dependent (PD). Tltese codes are ldenttfled :
wtth the acronJrm PD.

NOTES: "
1. Executiontimes for the NCOMO2,|MCOMOSor |MCOM04
modulesare microprocessordependent.lf the COM modulehas i
an expanderboard (or piggybackboard), double the execution
timegiveninthisappendix.|fthecoMmodu|eisasing|eboard
module,usethe executiontimegivenin this appendix.
.
2. Executiontimesfor analogmasterrnodulesare configuration
dependent.Totalmoduleexecutiontime for an IMAMM0SAnalog
MasterModuleis displayedin outputblock98.

3. Executiontimesfor lNPPT0l, NGCMO1and NGCMO2mod'

ulesare systemdependent.

FunctionCodeExecutionTimes
l-Eg6-2008 ls FEB1995 c-1
AppendixC

GI
o
g o
IL N o N o) (0 o o) o IF
@ gt @ @ ot GD c, ct G| G' lf

= !F N (o C\I \r rF
F s (p ol ol F C{ a:, C\I G' C\I F
(\t F rF rF
F

C\|
O r
iE
19 rF (!) lc) o GD (c, \r rf @ G| (\|
B O @ N
o) o sl ct) @ o o) CD @ (\l C\I @ rt ct tO rO @ GO o
g O c) (o RI lf tf (o (\l N o @ (9 t- GI ct t
F ol IF
C\I F N

=d
lo
e
ll
o o o o (? o o o to o o Ot o o (t
o) CD cr) (0 G) o o to o
o
IL
s ol @
ol st C\I lO
t
ol
CD
F
CD
RI
@
@ €
@ N
F I o, ct
F
o
IF
to
(F 0 rF
F
@
a:t
rf
(\l
(\l
rF
GA
rF

= F

a)
o (\|
a() H @
ur
N
(\l
ct)
o o
@
(F o
F
N
@
o
N c0
@ @
u)
@ o
F
o
U)
o
(\l
t\
(D
@
F
GI
o
t
(\l
o
lf
!F

(o t\
= of
C\I s) (\l @ 6l ol N 3D IF F ot F

q) =
a
*
I

f-
h'
\,
r'Fa

u) 3 --E
q)
P
F
h
5e9C)
x990.
ii'!0g/-=
o
N
@
ol
o
tr)
cqt
o
IF

@
o
(o
ro
(\l
N
o
c)
(v)
o
l4)
C\I
F

@
cq)
o o o
g,
o
@
s ct
o
F
o
U)
IF
0
IF

N
rO
@
(D
F
o
ol
u,
u)
$ Ic) o
Ir)
!F
g
hl) = OO=
F.r z -
d
b
.g
+J
3
a ]\ o o o o o o o o o o o o
X
o
o (\l
u) ct
CD
(\l
@
o
o o o
ro o
(o o
o
o o o
o o
ro
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o o
|r,
o o o
ct
o o
cq) (I)
o
o
o
o ()
o
o
o
ol
ol s
!|D

o F o o ol s o) @ F F @ o o N O) ot o F

ro to (\l K' ? (\l o rF

hI F N @
F IF tF IF F
IF
N rF rF ?

q)
\J
o
O
F. N
b o
.9 = o
o o o o o o) o o o lO ra)
*l = F

t sl |r) lo t()
ul) (o lo
t
o
CD
o
$ t\ N
o J CT' CD ol
tJ
b =
,s
LI{

.i I F

o
O =
a)
rJi
=
J
s z
€
L

o
tr- E
r-
o o o o
O IF o 0 ,F

U' o !|-

o b
F

o o J
o
o
()
o
O
o
b

o
C)
a
O
o
v) F

o
o
o o
C)
u) o
o
ES
.=o
U'
C)
o o c) o o
() o CI
o
1t C)
EH
F

o o
() 5l o 4l
U) U) U' q) 4l
!t
o l.a tl o
.F
Eq) ct, C) o C) () t .Cl r
!t !t
c
t-
U) O E' !t o c L - o o
o
o
o,
q o E o .o tt .o -cl E
o ct E E
EO-
t F
o o E
o E'
o
E
aa

c -ct
0
o.
tt
rE
L-

o
o.
E
o
E
c)
E E o
ct
=
CI
u, 9=
c,o
EV)
o
CL E
o
D
(,
t-
-oo 1t
o
CL
5
q, E
o ct tr
o o
c
o o ct
J
.e

o H= Fq
CL
:' o o-
3
o
o
€oo
.E

o
g
E o
-o o Ct ct o, o o
€o
g
o o- E
o I-
.P

tr o
ct
.F

o
g
CL
CL
CL
3
ct
= a.
= =
c\
o- b J o *5 g
E' @
o L.

o 6 o o o O r
E8 G'
E o
L

o- 5 g,
ou, c o EG| Y t:o C'
A

-9
€o \. E E
t- ra-
E at, 3 r- o a-
o 6 g, 6
c
E
tr o o
tg.
b
o o L.

E 6 o
o
()
o .aJ
g
=o g
C o c
c E
o CL o
rF
= E
=
e ?
= o o tr
6
IJ E
!P..^ o
o
E a ,
o c
-=^ F
o r-
o
g 3 cE C' (, () o
o
g o q E9 80^ -6o ? C c c = = 3CL
.F

CL
lP

CL
.E

6 o G' .e
Otlr
I 'FO ta-
L. (t,
"9 -9 -9 s .s .s
sf;p
a -9 q) J
o bR
.e
c o cn o 6 t o 3
L.
.a- J
o - .P .e .E

-eo (6 6 O Gt E
6() o .s c) CD (D
o
(l) o o .E
L.
CL
g
CL .> o
b c 6 6 6
-ct CD CD o
FX .e .e .H

J >o- o o so- 6 o g -9 o CL
p bR c, a o -9 -9 o
"E( o=- = o (r, 5 - .tr 3 E CD
=
L
o -t #= s s Eg

g
6 =
E = = - 3 = o-= o-= -e€ a,
6
f G
(t 6€
E =
6
g -9
I
o -9
J I
o
c tr. .3
F = o
EH
o-o
{
RF= E= = = =
6
E
6
E
6
g

o o
=rt o a) u) o (D to @
9 0 F (\l cv) s u) (o N @ o) F
6l
F F
t
F |F
@
.F
N
rF
O)
F (\l
IF

GI
N
ol C\I
lf
ol C\I n|
N
(u
5o
lr

FunctionCodeExecution
Times
c-2 1s FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixC

ct
o (r)
g (o (o
IL @ @ o t\ $ F F a) N CO N F F ro O)
(\l @ @ ol c\r @ @ RI a)
=
IF
a) F F
C\I
=

ES
g o
g()
ol
o
F
o
cl cqt
q
1\
,F
o) CD
sl
$ o o N
u) CO C\I (v
o
(\l
N
(\l
@
c,
6D
CO
o
@
@
F
F
F
N
rF
N
u)
lr)
3D
F

t
IF
ol
C\I

=d
to
e
It
o o (g (o o \f (0 o (D rt o rO cf C) cu @ €o
(J tC, N
o CO
(a (? @ o o N N (o \l CD tD @ s
@ $ CD ljl) $ tr) $
lt N IF F F F

=
=

R
- e
G'
c
b
C' o (o (o o o) o) (o @ t (o t CO
H
rhf
o o N o) CD N CD (\l
n| I @
IL N (o (\l ol CD @ @ 6D $ (D s U) rO C\I (\f c7,
Fa

= ol GI

e
(F
b,

=
c)
()
q)
a
-*
tJ
h
\,
U
FaEp
8 a)
o
ot
RI
8 rO
I
to
s
o
(o
o
(\l
o
CO u)
!F $
rct
(o o
rf,
o
N
u)
u) 1()
N
o
(0
,t-
o
I
o
lo
o
\t
o
ro
ol
o
(o

E E -8 =
F

u) z
a)
t-
F
-r
U

E,
c o () o
s*r o
o
tc)
(\l
o
CD
o
o
o o
(0 o
CO F
(!)
s
(v)
$
(v,
(o
o
o
o
F
o
o o
AD t()
(0
@
o
1.)
G)
(o
o
o
ct)
o
o
q)
o o
r&, u:,
o
o
CD
o
GI
@
(\l
€
C\I
o (C)
o
o,
cr)
$
lo
J F

()
x
r {
Rl

q) N IF

TJ o o o
o = o o o o rO o
|r) (D o (v) o r(, F (I, o
to = r\ F
o
o = GO
O =
J
u)
!t
o F
@
o o
IF
(\l
F RI @ o
F
@
IF
,F u) (o @ $ = @ @ ro = @

P
b
= z z
'Ff
o o
E
o
{rl .7 .a-
(J
P
E
g .s
,J rF c E
o
LI. o o o
= @ @ ol
(o @
ct
ol GI
rO
c)
rO
CO F
(0
o o o
o
o
t\
?
.9
CD
RI
c)
o -9 @

i = F
(!
N
.F
N
C\I lr)
F
(\l
F

C\I rF @
N
lO tr (F
F
IF
&r
s
F F

J -g
I
z 6 6
O
q)
H)

a E
sr o
E
o E
F

o
o
CL U)
o. F

o
=
q
o
J lt
o CD E'
c o
o .cl E
o tt o
(u E
tr E
o E g o ct
ct
E
.9
.P
g o
ct - J
I .F o IF
3
o
c o oc o. o
- = = = o
a-

o o CL o
(,
b
b
t 3 (D
c
o- a. c
= = E

o z o z =
o a,
-o. =
o 3t,
o
o o ct
o
.s o
o
CL
o
L.
-g o J
.H

ct
o E E

=
o
t- o t G' () o c =
L

€ ()
o
G
3r,
g
o .9 U'
5
= CL g .E
= () U'c, Eo ) () & o = g
-9
6
= ^ .-
o = o cr = o .t2
o. = = -cl -9 s
5
x
o
J CL
t'
&t
E .- a C'
J
C) c l-

o
= cr
o E, s s e CL o = -
o CL a- b
= o - g tro Eo oa Eo o
.H
fJ
b 6 ^
v,F t-
qo o.
= () .= o o g '; ct = =6 6 (tx :tCL .s E'
o CL le

CL
CL
o o
.E
o
.H b s-O
6'()
tt
c
5(J
oo- o
x
o
= C5
e E
3
=
o o s s CD
b

Gtt o E o
o) e
CL
o
o o o o o
e o Eo
?; = = ?= z
EO-
G'
l-
a-

oE CD o) o
=(6 o o 3 o .=
tr
= = 6
= =
6
() E =
= c(u c6 g6 o o Eg o o
o
a
E E 3 J
cr-
6 =
^9
(u
o q
ct E o
L
6 6
-- 6 6
U' a = = .9 6
o
v,
6 (J C' g, 9 = =6
6
g
a-
3T' a-
o o E 3 z z G E -9 -9 o o "9 -9 g o .9 x x x o F -
-9
o = = = lu IJJ I
g
E >
<(.o F z F a o o cl o F l- o o E Llj tr, F O o
tr
o o (o
=!t ro g) o CA t to
3to @
(\l
ctt
ol
o
cr) (v)
GI
ct)
(r)
C')
$
a)
K)
(Y)
(0
(D
F
GD
@
CD
CD
c?
o
\r
F

t
AI
$
a)
t
rt
s t
@
s
F
s
@
s s to
IF

rO
N
u) lr) |() lO to
N
rO
@
rf)
CD
rO
5CJ
IL

FunctionCodeExecutionTimes
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 c-3
 AppendixC

G)
o o
q rf (a
lt o o o o) c, rt- (o c) (o F
ro @ t @
\r s \r (D ol (a F o o o ctt ct)
= \t F
G' rO !F (t- F
N

= F

N
O r
iE
5' (F
RI F CD g) (!
GI
o t o rl' to
G O o F
(D (o lO ,F o lO o) c, c| rr) o o N o) ?
tto F ,F @ t-
N t\ c\| @
F
GO ol GI CO
iF ol

=d J
u,
t
.cI
r) o
e
rt
ro
iF
lo
o o o c0 KI AD o o o o IF
C) @
C) o (\l o 6l o o o o !t o o) (o o o to a) @
s \t (0 ro o)
lr
=
F a) F
()
o @
F
$ $ TD 3D

= tr
-9
C'
E
aq)
5
iF

rt
J
G) I
t- o E o
b
C) o @ a) N @ C) ol o o ot @ cD o (o
IL (o rf o ol
(o o
rh,
rf, o) N F o (\l
s E o) o (r) 0 ro 3D
F,

E F 7. F F
,F !F F o ro G' (D o)
o t
F
.F

{J = E
o
-v) C)
q) E
q) o
3t
Ut !
I
ts Q --E
599()
C'
-9 u) @
o o o K) N u) to o
\,
h
.i)
d
PHB*
o
u) lf) Ilr) F

s
$ F
(\l
CD c)
(F f-
lf) .ct
o
$
€
IF @
ut @
o o E
s
(\l
rf
I
F F F
N lO F

v, =oo= @
IF

q) z a E

F
(u
F 8
g
r-)
.9

EEEg
F.. C)
P g
b

o o
o
o
o
o
o o o o
o lo
e c't o
o
*)
rF)

{
.F

F
o
\t
N
(D
o
lo
o
@ cr)
(\l
rr) -Ee
5 G
GD
F
-t
o E
s) =
t r =
.r\ -
(v)
H o E
q) (\| = F
lJ o
o = o
€ o o o z =qE o o
Q = (v,
N
sl
(?
@
s) @
(f)
(\l
o
rt
GI
u)
o
N
tJ
h-
J
= F E
o o Z
€
*.)
()
P
Fg
E.E
b
t 6
F
L\ o F C
= @ o @
tif
=
o
o
o
t ;
=
J
C) F

ol
t\
@
c)
c) E E
I
z F E
O = 6

a)
E)
= &
a !t
A

(\| E
F
A

,u -o F
.F

C
r 6 o o
L-
F

g
i|-

E o o
ea
r CL
o CD !D
o.
o o 3 -l J
F
()
.P

c o o CT' q,
o TU
() u) E8 E o
s oo .P

o tr

e=
CN g T'
gc,
o tlJ
g
CD
o E E
o

-o
tr f
cl -cl 3 s
o
.E E .o
E
o
o-
E
8.
E
o
= s c'o tl
u, E' c o = cr CL
.P

CL
L
(t
!l
-9
=
s
5
o
E
o
o
CL o
G
o
E & () c
3I'
3
o
-
-6 --
5
o
3
6 Es.E J

4t
o)
N
o
lt
E
o
CL
o.
= =
!t
C
6
J
at
.E

o
CL
3
o
.P
o o
= =8oa E o
Eg
3t' .a- L.
o
CL ct) o
€oo P
E
o
o
E
E
o
E
o -s =
a o
o o
E
.o
= !,
E
6
.t-
o
o
CL o F C'
= o
C
o
E E 6
CD = :Hu( )) E
o .g
E
6
c E tl
e oV) o
E
c g -_o = =
Et
CL
.E
E .2 e =3 E
o
g = go o '= o o o
g
@ -
o "9 JV) I e e g
b

€ E
.F

E o gt
E' E qt o o .9 C) Cl C 6O g
o
= = 5 o ()
o L
= c =
c
-9 Or- c = CD
e6 =o
.F
5
E g
o 5=
o FB c C'
o
CL
c, c
g8- o (U E o o o. = o () a-

o .s o. E
rF
tr
g CL

.s o= EolOO It(D Eu
o g
E
(o
o
ct o
x o
o
c
.9 o C) () o
Ct o () o 6 gF C)
la-

E 5
o g
ct g
o o) e trtt ol CD 6 6 ED o CD E
E 5 €= .9
E
E
E
o =
.= = E o=-
o o o
.F

o .=
\Jt

=
CL o (5 E ?trI
c5 E =6 o
rF
!
E
G
3
q) -9 -9 -9 .ct € -9 o E
.=
6
CD -9 a
E 8 lrE
.E
E C L c
u, E (l' 6o
L

('
a-
o (g g
5 o
6
c -9 .9 E -
o
6 -9 b+ v, 6
g
6
g
6
g 6 6 g
o g
E
E o
CD
(D CL
o dl CE o o <= lr U) (E tr-o r o o F
b

F OO O ffB v, o o :)
c
g€ o (D (o (o (o
gE CO (o
F AI
(o @
sf
(o
lf,}
(o (o N
(o @
(o
q,
(o o
N
F

F
(!
F
a)
t\
s
N
rf}
t\ 1\
N
F
@
F
ct)
t\
o
@
6l
c0 @
lr
@
tl)
@

IL

FunctionCodeExecutionTimes
c-4 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixC

G'
o
c r\ o co e
IL rO (o rO () o U) o
o- t rt R| $
t
a)
ol
@
(\l
F
o) N o
N
@ N o (o o
(\l
= (Y) c7) of rF F (\l

g-
ES
g o @ C)
(D
@ o o o rO to (o u)
o @ @
u,
*(o u)
@
o (\l
F
o)
lr
GI
(o
o)
F
rO
$
(o N o. IF rO GO N (o s q)

t9 F F ? F

=o

ro
e
e u) o tlo lt)
o to o @ @
$ @
t (\l o C\I ol o)
c) @
(\l lr) e o o t o) o o) s IF ro @
N C\l (\l
IL co d:, ? F ,F F
rt-

=
=
aa
- G'
s*) o
C)
lr
tl
o CO @
c) o o F

ol
o
o- cl
?
(\l
F
rf
(t
N @
N
a)
O)
@
ro
lf
lf GD
c)
o)
$l
rO
o
F
(0
GO
t
N
c)
K'
o)
(0
E sl lO C\t
o = F a) (! ? 1\

{r =
a()
q)
ctl
:t
g
td
b FaEp ro
o)
to
CO
t
t
s
o o o
q
o
o.
o
s
o
I
o
F
CO
o
C"
c,
o
(\l
o
F
(o
G1) (r)
F
o
N
a)
lo
lo
o
o
to
o
ol
I
?
to
(o
o
o
o
|f,
F

,F

5 8 8- =
IF F F

u)
q) =
tJ

.-) ts
b

E-r
,J
L
o
.F)
o o
o o
c)
s
\r
*t lr) co
3
(J
$
_{
trl
a) 6l
]J o o
o = o c) c) o
o
o o
lO
]\
O =
J
o
|l)
F
F
(o
F t
I
(r)
d
b =
oiJ
o
.t'.1
Q
F,
b
I
( ?
o
=
.i =
J
I
z
O
q)
hl)

a -' cr
s .cI J o 5
o E'
o
tF

Fr E
o
o
o
cD
8=
O O
o3
ob 95
5^
4r F
.o o
o
()
o
U8Bb AT 5l
S

o o >o E E' CL
o .cl
ct 3.8 -o o- tl- o F
o = CL E' o
ct
at,
o
E
;=
o= €= ;=
gE
uE >= o
CL
o
C)
J
E
o
CL
€c,o tt
E'
!t
t
o
o
E
o N
E
o
o o
e3 @ s
CL u) q,
C o T'
ct
e
o
= o o g.-.
E
g g--.. o
ct
La $a
CL- a1 E O
Q -
(t,
.F .cl
J
o !
t
o = CL
o
GI
= = = 50
RI
6 F
.9 E { o
.E

o
C) o
.- Q
ct
= = = 6()
J
A R ;() E (D .a-
6 0 =o CL o GI
aa

t8
c, o g
= o

ep
o o
CL 6 - o ;tr PE
C'tL € E C) o g
E
= J J
(, = () = =
E O o3
c7eg
b IL o
o eq o = _e_= 5 = l-

$^
5
cr CL 9o
T
C)
.a-

o E J
o .= gD Cu=
o ; z 61 =oc b ! -
g CL
3 gP 6 G C' ,9
.E
J
= Eo Eo o gO rO.
o E s qs!
== .E9 JE ll-= E
r
3(')_ 6R 3T'
E=
.Cr
E E'
E
o g
6
=
o
E Ec
- ! F
:F
.9o 9 - = N o:1 6 qt o
E = .t-

o () E e, () 5
E a EgU c'OJ)
g
() 6
e E E E -= E = -9€ B=
-cL> E C'

o s, c)
b

E .9, a cs U)
o
x
o
gE 6 9 -sd
rrO o
(tr
6 = E
6
C
t-
o o = L.

cL.^
G _cr
o =
a-
o
a-
q)
o
5- -9 oc
tt ()
o o
!,
= C D CD
o 3o
x :' t-

go_ 5'o
J
(t It
o
6
() d d* E8.F-9
C,)- q,
Er-
6 0
c
(! -g
o
O - ! -
E E 6 { .=
o
.E
CL
5
CL ct g .F
g g E
o HS
= .4s

CL

EA ia € € E-
o !, .E-
t, o o
5 p
= E(D ct !t ( D o g
€ 5EE ()
EE =
HE=
o c, 4tr
gP
F
o O
!r c = o o - o o ar C) C
o
o E 6()
:t
a() () U' 6(J 6() o ED I o J
lao o
o.
.g
UJ
:68
O O
68
O O J
u,
qt x
llJ
<v)
o(')
<U'
E 8coO o
=
6U)
c E o cc
!t
o -g
q)
0'J F3 x =
o ct) o o UJ r
=U,
o.()
3a x o x 3 J
o. c) UI o o UJ o- q) lr
.E

E
g€ (o o (\l cr) sl lr' (o N @ g) o
o
?
o
sl
c
a)
€) rf
o
lo
o
(O
o
N
o
@
(t
ct)
o
()
g6 N @ CD F

@ @ @ @ o) CD ot o) cr, O) ct) g) g, o) F F t!- t-

lt

FunctionCodeExecutionTimes
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB 1995 c-5
 AppendixC

G)
o
B ct o (o
t|' o o lr) $ $ F F N ct rO F lo lf o $ t GA
c!) rf F @ AI ol (\l ol CD t\ rt s (tt
=
(F tF !F !F
F

C\|

ES
co
u.O
(o
(o
@
o c
o
o
a)
o
@
.D
N
!F
|()
u)
(o
to
@
s
o)
lif
o
@
o
@
o
!F
F
ro
g
o)
ro
ct
(\l
ol
rF
u)
IF
N
ct)
F
ro
@
o
IF
o
(o @
s

=d

ro
e
rt
o cl s o o g ol s lo ro t (\l 1.| o) o o
C) (? 6l c0 o o CD o !f g o ut
@
o, t o o o
IL F ol !f
@
\t GD .F F
@ t-
lf
F !-
@ U) CV t N
ro
!F
F
F tF

=
=
Ba)
- I
Fa
c,
o
*, h
c, lo (!) o c) o rf,t a) ol o @ (o
(0 @ t IF
rO @
!|D

st t !F
lt o N @ @
tr)
F

N C\I C\I
o GD lf cr) o .D o)
F
= s @ o) N @

e
F $ IF F IF
t GI IF

=
-v)
()
U
a
t
Eb
g--E
= o o o ro o o o o o o o (D 30 (\l
fJ

od
h xood,
ir E o=
(l, @
(\l
o I(o I(o N
I
Cr) s
F
|F

s) @
rF
8 or
(C)
N
3A
CO
u) F
(\l
N
@
!F
N
F

u) -= ( r ( ) =
a,)
tr N
o
ol
o
.d
h

= =

EEEE
t-r o o
d o o
b
z z
.9
tt l)
E
E
!t
E
!! .U
J
(J iF !F

a) o o
X = =
r{ o o
o o
S) (\| z z
13 o F

o = o o
ro o o o o lr) o P o o
F
O = @
s tr, o
o)
o
o)
c)
@ o
F
o
r\ F o
(\l o- rf o
t o-
J
F
o- o-

)Fl
d
b
o = zo =
o
*J
U -
G
-
fr
b .E -s
t
( F
0
c
o
c
o
= o .9
; =
J
-ct Il
-g .g
I
z 6 6
Q
hJl
a)
a IF j
,5
!F

(\l E E 4l
c- .ct tr F

o
!F t-
,t-
E' E .cl o E
e F
,F

E
E
E
o
o
o
O
J
o -o
1t
.o
E
.o
E
C)
J
o
F

o E'
€o 4t
!,
.o
!t
o
O
J
a,
o
E
o
ll
E
E l s
o o E F

o
o v) o
CL o E
o o - J
L-

o 0, E CL
E
o
CL !t C\
=
IF
o. U' CL E o 4l
Eg o .CI c
o o o
() J =
CL
E
o 4r g,
o
CL CL o
CL 1C GL
3
o
o.
CL
-9
.= E u, CL
U) a, o E CL o .ct :'
CL o CL
=
frF
J o- CL o o, .F

tr o o e
CL
o
E o =
v,
J
o
E
o E a-
o
CL 3 a o o
g t
o
o
C o
-9 &t c o E .U
€oo CL o 6 O - .F

o o CL .E

a-

ct E3 tr
E'
E
o
CT'
o
ct
=
CL
L
(l,
x
o
c
o
c E
CL
5
l-

I
C
L
E
o E E
9Ct'
C
E
(, -
J
tt
c
CL
= E
o
o
c
(,
L

:= q' E -g o
CL o EI b o d

gs o x b
E o o @ CL
ct .a-
o c() o x o .e
E
o
o o CL
b

o =
CL
(l)
x
o
o o o
g
J
a, .9 E
gb o CL o
c o I
= =
CL
o cl E CL -g
tr
g
-c) E -9 a-
o
CL
E' E
E
o
g p o o 6 E p 6 G'
L a t A
o = = o=
l-
C" CL
=o g E o b
E
c 6
= E S5 -lrO
< ! -
tr g, o E =CL
cr (J o
= o
o
tr
o
o o .cl U' :' c l- E
o
o
(u
(D
.H : r\ a-
.a-
I
CD
= ct=
c
L.

c o ()
E -g 6 6
g E
=
U)
o
S o
E =o E CD :E o3 q)
E
qt
gt
6
CD
*(n
5C)
E g

= = 6g o=l
9=^ .H
o 9^ E - l
9.^ 9^
(l)^
E = 3 a
o E = CL
9=
rE
l- ta- CL CL
= .s EZ= CL l- t- CL Ul- CLT o
E o €('t o o
EL r-
-Eo
b 1

ct A;6 CL= sS C)
o
r (\l
F;-
AE .= sl
o)
.EE E
o
C'
C
o
as!
E=
o 6J EE 3
gD? EE
_g o
E 5 6o())c ) F p
--o e !

tro
F
o
=
J
€ J

E,q E5
g,F
-r- o
Fg= oc)
-g g
L
Glc) C) ll o O .g c) .aJ

o o
a-

o G ei5 g >() g c gH PO
P
c
.3
F <o=
() O E q O J
Co o
-

ao
J

6 0
(D
tr
6()
O J
6q C
o cr) E O
)J
) Eg C
<o
J
)
E9
oa)
o
o
o
cr
v, o
0' 6=
E, C"
-g
o.
-E CO
(')o = d
€ Q
-g
o-
-g
o. <o
EJ
V' CT'
=q
=d
tr
€€ (\l (a \f to t\ o) o cl co I rO (o t\ € (\|
CD o (\l a) t
gE
F !- F
!F !r ? ol ol C\I ol $t (\I ol N (\l a) CD a) a) a)
F IF F F rt- F rF. lF
F F IF iF ? !F F F

IL

FunctionCodeExecution
Times
c-6 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixC

c)
o |J)
to
o. IF

o o rF t(0 c> (o
IL
(o
(o
\f rf t N t a)
CD ]\ o- ro N
(o
rF

o
F
(\l o- sf C! rF
GO
F
@
s)
@
(\l
= K) CD
u'i) (\l to
F
IF

G|
O -
1\
E
L O
S (\l
CD
(o
(Y) rO rO o
(0
o
K)
(o o
(! lo o
o-
N
(\|
(\l
N
o)
(D
st o
o.
o,
r\
F
t t\
I
o
to
\t
@
@
ol
ut
o
tt- o F F
rF F rt- o F
IF
F
(\l N @ $ C\I F
rF

G) F

=d
ro
e
It o o o
o o lO o o o o o o lt)
C'
() o
st
(\l
t(o o
s)
o
cr)
@
o
(\l
N
o
$
F
@
(\l o)
(\l IGO ]\
CD o. o
ol
.F

ul
to
g) F
.F
o
u)
o
C\I
(0
F
IL C\I F

tr) N
=
=
Bq)
{ d
c,
0 N
l- I
o o o rf o o
*,
s
b
C' rt o s(! s o F @
g) s| o @ F o o N
@ sl
(D @
F
g) o) (0
IL @ ol sl G' CD c\l o- C\I
@ o) GD o. t\ N @

o
r.a
= (! C\I C\I c\l
(7,
F
rF
c) CD
F
CD F F

{l =
-C"
()
q)
UI
t

h
.F)
E
P
FuEP
I (o
o
c4)
c)
(o
ct)
@
ao
t4)
€
(v,
o
o
o
(0
t
o
6l
c)
6D
o
ol
$t
\r.,

u,
q)
5
z
E8
-
= C!:,

tJ
tr
.-)
t-l
tJ
b o o o
rFJ
o o
o
o
o
o
o
*t F @ rf
-l
-
o
S)
_{
El
q)
'(J G|
o
o =
O =
J
d
h, =
tF)
o
*J
a
P
b
t
E !F

C'
=
a;
=
J
I
z
O
a)
s
hll
L !F
o 4t
sr E o o
F
lF
tt
E (\l rF (F
-cr E9 tt
o
1t
0)
.P
Bb 5
N
.0
s o
() It
ec)
o
l-

o I b

o
F F

o
F

{ €a oa 9 A J
o
(\o o J gc')
F
E
J
a
!,
o ct J o E o tl C) v) € P B aq go 6l

Ep o
-ct o .cl
o
!,
9b
C
-r
-tD
LrF .
O
e J
U)
F

s! oo
F t
o E !t
J
CD &l E'
o
o
() &q 6= F

o
o
-o (l L) o 60 6E r5- oJ
F
.cI ct o
o do
lF
!t J
!t E d$) F

o E E q,
J
=
CL il o U'
Fg
tr
E
o

&
o
ct
CL
a=
6z
g=
>z
?= lr
=
E
t
o
o
.ct
E
t
o
o
J
o
U)
tr
o
a-
o
o
CL
CL
o
CL
CL
E
o
E
t
e
CL
=
CL .cl
5 b
8.oc
Yo
0,F
= o
a)
.o
.9 z 3

9F
o E
- CL C" gJ ('= ct o E tr o lt, o CL
E
CL 3
U' o
eE^ eu^ .ct
a 5 *i6o=0
CL.r. tl
E E
o
o
.d

o
lts
o
E
CL
CL
=
5
o
lF

o
E
t
o
o
E 3 5eqd E
o
L
E q) o g o CL EO o
C'
o
o
g E r ? 5 E 8 E€ = (l) =O E CL.e o g
o CL =c) 66i CL^

o
o
b

o
E
g
g:R E J A 90-
{7= 9= ( ! - o
.-L
o
CL
o.
= Eo
U'
C)
6
o C

=c
o
1-

o
tr o a6
5
o 6,2 k o
q= 9 5
6()
E = eo=- CL
= -o tr
CL 6 6
:B
.a)

()
o oP= Eo E o
g e EO Eg
.e
CD
cg
58
o.
o = (, o o o E =o
F H = 'E o
q^ 9.-. 8Eo oQbr Eeo oQtb EE
c
8 so.^. ItO ^
g
(g
L

o
3t,
o
c
o :' o l-
E= H = :=
E €o-b c c CL 3ll a: 0 g--
9^. €ocl ha E E 6 E crl() :'o o N .Bb
Ea$9s
J a CL
(t
o ti =
O-U) 6$l
;E OER 3EH (Jr
€{ .9
o
c
95ts E 6 sg 09 s( Do( )
C)- O
o () E S 9 o 9 o .cQg r OtLo .a- F trtt o cLo
=E 6 ::( o o ill -

? 9 = fiEE4 =
o 9o. o =e) o Eat U' a -

= 9o =tt ztL !
= tc? E ( ) E C ) 9 = 6 € O ;o PO BO
o
EEB< z
1E

E() x
CT
o
CI'
O J
E,A @ a= fld= E=
qr- 6= 6=
U'Z o z
6
C
o
l - -

tLg)
O J
E, A' E,O
O J
s= c >J
-o .o
-
O()
=z
€O o-(/)
GO

c
o o o) (\l GD s t(,
= E ro (o t\ @
(,
CD o F GI GO tf to
s
@ N
s
@
r(r C)
u)
F

l&t u:) rO |f)

Q O c) cr) (t) c4,
IF
s
lF
s s
F
!f
t-
I
F F
I
F F
I
F F F
l(}
rt- F F F
F !F F

5o
IL

FunctionCodeExecutionTimes
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 c-7
AppendixC

G'
o
C O) @ ol GD $ @ N
(o t(u o F

lt o @ s N
cu ol
@
ot @
!F
F

@
@
@
s @
= CT' t lF GD N IF (9 rF
F

(\|
O e
i{ o o o @ rO CO o o o ro
E r F @ rt (o to
@ o u,
o.o o a) c) @
t\ rO t() \t (0 ct) @
lr
c4) c0
,F

ro ro
g() o) F ul) (! rF
@ IF
GI F

=d
tt)
e
tf
c o C\I G) CO (\l c') o o |I) ct u) o F t\
a ro (0 o o o
o (\l N
C\I
@
sl OD @
o) IF to
a:)
N
ol o F
c, t(, ci, o F t\
IL rF IF
IF
rF
c)
=
=
tJ
AJ
- (?
-
Fa o
o @ @ o r\ lo (0 o o GI !t
Is o o
t lr ct) @
@ N
o r.) I o @ F rJ) ot
F
(o lo tr'
= C) cl N @ (\l (r) c)

e
C-
F F ct) @ GI
F

=
?'
()
q)
ut
*
FaEF
a
c) to o o o o
o o o o
r&) o
o o
(\l (o
Ff o N sl t\ (! $ (o (0 u) utt o
(o
F
b N o C\I t o o
\-,
.-J C\I g)
(\l
rF.
v CD t F a:t
5 8 8- =
IF IF !F

cr) z
t)
t-
ts
h
.tr)

F
c CO (0 (C) (o u) rf rt o| G) € @ Co
o
oFa
F

$
rt
@
(v)
F

@
ro
(\l o
F
o O)
(0
ro
ro t4)
ro $ rO c)
to
IF

ctt
IF

o)
*r ro cr) 1\ F I g)
c,
u) |r) F

F
F

@
rt- rI} lO
3 GI (\l F
F
IF !F (\l rF

a
s)
x
hJ
a) c| CO
lJ o o
o = = o o to
O =
J
= lrt
lf,
lO
(t)

c = =
o
rF) o
*f
()
tJ .E
{
b

E .F

o
=
c
o

= -g
'.i J
.cl
-g
I
z (o
O
a,) &
Ft)

s
s
r c,i
o - l -
b N
B8 r O o

g e
!l -. ; o o
oE Ba o o - -6t F
=
go
€p >9? -6-Cq)
-oX
o
EC? E E oz
o b
,qE
o
rE o BE
a)

Hg
a9 o5
E ; bo E J
93 E €E d ;Q O J
oo
C)
z
Edoo
c
9; $=
f;Fs€ :
c
o
.E
B";
E3 eb &a B: tt
E
O.-.
'o ci

E3 = o 8B
e=
8g
*=
o
E .q H bBb
o dg
5s a D ( o F:io
EE
CLr vr? EC) r
= o =o
r-

E 8 ( ' | o ec)
6cl a8 .-O 9 0 E O
g9
€q E g
{r= q
5 = E.d_ 93
(l)
e, :-o R()
8.9
(,
l-

- E = d E 8 c, €
E
5=
E I

€3 *() 9 O
O J

$;
*s 6= g € g;
6 Q l/,.--

E a :=
6 E

o
o 9 c.l
. o
ct
(l)
E
-)
r-
o o € g
C4l

.o> E 8
€ l -
o o
_cF
oct
c Lo
+= =o Ss 5 a
-c,= O r
Yci
E O
.g= 6=
:6 b o - o x E 8 e q e =
b r F

9 o CD - o d= !t C O
8ER o

Ege9
\ro -9 = 60 o EO _Eo
.r9 &= E3B= E o E 8 E9 Lc) ;()
Rgd.EO. E O (6 E cC) 1 J 6
g
o
6 l2 =z €o E= E=
6 CD (,6d
E; CL
9J E 6/i 6--
E=g=Eo -oF- () E Fpso =
E I c.i c,6l EN .-Po
ES E g P.^ 9 0 EcC trc{
g . A ^
- Y t t
tfl r\ V
o
g
o
o
g

E = 9v*8
- o
gEE 8 Eg R> 6=
EO E=
PO
EFs e
o
C)

o
e
o
O 9GD
go- o
E -

€o
=()
- - 3
E O
xE
EO
E3
ge o
E
I
E9 F=3 6=q
5Lrf't N
o g
E t,J-
< o = tO cl, UJ
g o
o- @ = Q rz o z < z @ =
EO
EZ E=X
r e V 5= E9 o
o
q,
g
g€ q) o (\l s(0 ro (o co o) o
g6
@
|r) N
rO
tF
@
r()
!F
lr)
F
(o
IF
!F
(g
.F
(9
F
(f)

(o
F
(o
F
(0 F
(o
F
@
!F
(o
- t\
F
]\
F

IL

FunctionCodeExecution
Times
c-g ls FEB199s l-E96-2008
 Appendix C

c'
o
g CD
@ (\l o @ (\l o o
(9
1(l
IL CD
@
(\l lO
o @ o CD o tJ)
c) CD @ s o
= !. C\I F (D

:s
G|

o) o
B O
o
o
o
ro
o
@
lf
@
€
?
o
@
t
G}
o
lo
N
ol
o|
c|
(o 0
c)
o)
F
F

$
U.() s @ s CD ? GO F C\I r4, ol F
N

=d
lo
o
tt |o
o o O) lo
() CD
(F

ro
F
0 |()
t\
CD
F
F CY'
lr
=
=
B
g G)

s*l
o
o
IL
o
F
o
(o o
g
rF

CD
F
c)
co
(u
tr.
= s @ |r) K)
o
{J =
a()
q)
UI q--5
*
I
o o
Ff
HEER ro(o F
ct)
cl o o
ao
(9
l-

ol
N
GO
t
I
(\l
c)
\.,
hr
orf

E E -8 =
IF

U) =
p
F
b
H

EEEE
E.r
tJ
L N o
o
}F,
(0
@
ro
cl
@
s
o
6l
{-
+i) N
iF-
sl tr)
CJ
S)
x
fll
a) N
IJ o
o =
O =
J
P
b =
o
*)
.Ff

Q
tJ
b

qt rF

o
=
,i =
J
I
z
O
q)
hJ)

a J
-!9
,s o
() .o 5
o
F

J E
trr b o o. 13 E .ct o c
6
tr 0
o .0 o !t
8a =8 E -o o !t o 4r s tl E
-5 E' E' o o : o E E o o
E ;c? ^ -o -o
o t
E9 = ct
o (D
E,g J
o
E
-o
o Eb @
6
o o
E o t

H q =.d , q 6 =(',5
CL
l- lF
t o o. o
T'
cL^ EGI
b3 6 o cr
ct o.O o
GL- o o o. ct CL
o. .ct =o C GL J
? 8 E ! v{o 6()
CL
3 -Y.
= s CL olL
E CD g , c ) o R > SE E CL
= ='
CL
3n 5
o
tr o c,
:s o -E = o - CL =o
gt ;o- 3r, a-
O - o
-a= €= o .H

o
BE o
.F
E E= CL
;= ! -
lE

o c o
8 E
.E
o CL t
o g
.E
a
aO
O() E'J
.$,'-'
8= Fa CL
CL
E
6 := 65
O^,
9=
e=
F=
.=- E S oE c rr
o t-

(,
L

E= Bd Eo fo
EE -o 3 o \ z s
.c) ab 5E o t-
b
o .Cr t o
o :5
" ; 9 b v{
X O 9rl() o E O .ct ()
r- 3
o CL
E o- e o ) 6 9-or
vlL
o$i ll
() () b
6q
E B
1 - J

\,= cF( )*
M N
o
E 5 ()
l-

o
CLSI
(=2o=
+o .g Q
6 > - - t : O oc E- c €
f.-
oO
g lr
o
;Q iT=
6=
=e 5e 9o
h > o
l-

o
o
a
Ir
=
o
TI
o
b

3 Ed
o) =
= F

eE E.o
Ea
92 +8
= F
o.o
€p
tl
60 60 e J
6a
tt s 6
5() Eo = jl,
o o 3
frb =
tF

6() E .F

6 = eg
.g- c @ a e
o
=
EB
b
x ll- = > o CL otL .a)
5 o
- c
o = 6ot o o 9.o E tt E= Eot d=
.Y
= ^ EGL--
CL rF

s=
.E
= o =r^

€ 3
r=
a5 g
az F- E'
rF
o Q
EE() at
8=b+
-J
tt

E a E.$..s=o =
J - CLT
E$t 3T' cg : C L
.gE .= -N ool 6E o
E
(J
co
gO
8 e r-
6 6
o
6 6
.EJ 6o rl) cn)
o o gR e
xo-o : E 6 = E -c !) oo o o

ff=d
E=q
Z Cr8
3 8 3SR /)o
9i)
U = 6 J6
s
J_ll

c n z o(')
€+
o 6
tr
llJ
6

z z
E
o
E
o
-eO
a c ) c, l!
6s) 6 =
CDo az
EgE p E,9
cqo
oq'

ao <o
ll .?
EC)
C J
EO
EJ
<(D
93 tro
os)
o
@
EE
gs g

(\l a) sf ro (o N @ o) o IF ol c) rt |(t
@
(0
@
N @
o
o)
@
o
o)
gE N @ @ @ @ @ @
N N F N N F F
IF F F F F IF ? F F F F tl-
IF F F

IL

FunctionCodeExecutionTirnes
l-Eg6-200B 15 FEB199s c-9
 AppendixC

G'
o
G
o o c0 ct C) @
(o o) o| o o
IL
o- o-
RI
e,
1|)
rO u) |l) c) (\l
C\I ot o- o.
= e) !F
F (\l F

(\|
9 r
iE rO o o o rt o
r , F
g o o o C)
o
(o @ ol q o N c:t o o o
sc) o. o- N
!F
IF !F (?
!F \r N @
F
@
to CD o. o- C\l
!F

= J
=u,

ro
e
a
C' ro
c) o o ro to t\
]L o. o, cr) (D ol
(\l
=
=
aa)
-
I
e
(qt
o
b
C) o o @
lt @
o- o-
{i,

(\l
F

o = GI

{r =
-?r)
(J
a)
3
EI
Q-r-5
td
599C)
h '-99o.
i3 xto('-=
=oo=
U)
q)
re
ts
b
t)
E-r
d

.s b

*,J
{
-t

Q
$)
x
r-l
-l

q) N
lJ o
o = o RI
(\l
o
O =
J
F
(L
o
E
F
o-
td
b
= z z =
o ; 6 o,
*'.)
otJ

() .-
-c
tJ
b .s -g .g
I .> .> .>
( F

o E
o
E
o
C
o
= o -9 o
-i =
J
lt
6
tt
6
.o
I
= -g
6
O 6 6

q)
hJ)
&
€ E !, E
A

sr
!F

o o o lt (\f
-g o
.cl
=
lt ,41 o
E
o o t
o
!F

o
,-r
4l
.tt
tr .cr o. ct CL E
.o o o. CL cr o o
E
o
E
o E !t o E -!g
E
0) tr 3 =
CL
=
GL J F

o t
t
o o
0)
E
o Fl .^
g
L

o =
E
E
o E
U'
.p f
o o
.F o
U) () o
trL
o o E F o o o o J
=
la-
CL
CL
CL
o.
ct CL o, :{ .eE o
E E
o ct
ct E
o
c g o
g
.ct
E'
ct)
(t,
CL
J
o- o E i -
tso 6 3
o CL o. E c o 4r €oo
o o o EU 5() 1P
t-
g €o a o -9 .9 E f

€o = e Eto
b

E o o lH E J .a- I o q 5 o = E
at Y
g

-0CL o c, S
C ,=o Egt o c E
c E C
g aH
l= E CL
o
.E;
l-

o o E b E o ct o o E t o
L E.r
E=
.F
l-

o
E
o CK' Ero
o
o
c
E o
E E' o() o -o
g,
Ct
CL o =
CL au)
=
l-
C' O - o
= -9
@ .F

cr q o = o 6 0 o o o 3 o
a,
o 5 S EC l -E E x = €P ;C) c IIJ
F o
o J
6 0
o O
=6 =6 = -g CL c 5 g
0
E
o
ER EO
o o olr o -9 z
J o =lr. -9 -9 o o -oGU (, o o .E

o E =
s=iEA
.P

P() .-
(! 6 3 .= =
E= .g
.H L.

3 d= E' E
E
-t
GD 6o -t
E

g
g
= (,
= o
C
(E qt
= rL
-= a =€ c =
.H
- t b

€ (r,
l
3 -g S.- E -9 b 1E

ao E' E i-
C)
o = o-R o 9.^. b
6rA E ^ 4lE a = 5
rF.
G)
C
6
rF
tCf r

E3b g
(l, t- C - cf b t-

E tob E ; 1t t -
L l-
E
e=
i F L b r F

g.^ o x tt o o o o 6 o ()-Cv o o o dGt

6$l
.ge
L.

.E Eto
9.^ rF
E g o .a-

c
r-
O r
E A €E rb 6 N
E > p)
.F
o o
.P
IF

EN E F F O E
g E 8E 9 o E E E
s9 L5
v I F

EE > o E lo C L
ER 9 lo 8R
ts € p
o o UJ ur> o o o o
E E ss
L- .t, (E o
P 1r= E = e
o .c6 6 .96 3 o. z + = e E5 6 = Eq e t, tt
F Y
u t \
F Va P Y a q, lL
E (,
- l - - l

o o o o
E EE & o s 6 s_ F6>
- 4 4 R - - a J

6=
5=
F = fb (r)6
- t G
cnJ
b 6
aDJ
) ct)
o
o
cE i a < a (5 G'
o
6
G
.!
]L
= z6
J C )
lro o
o
tc)
O J
CE o o
6 J
o^v, cl tt
v,
o
G
E o Eq O> E u ,
-uft r.cl> ru tt ^tut llr > o
o o
6
o
o
E
.t-
o
3t,

CE
F=
6=
g N o) $ CD
ct) o IF
AI
€€ (\l (!) $ @ ct) o N (r) cl o (\l (\l
to (o t\ co O) o GI o
g6
F
o, o, (t, g) I o) q) o o o o I
(F
a rF ?. t- AI I cr)
(F
rO F (\l (\l (\l (\l \t (\l (\l ol ca (\l GI C\I C\I $t c\l C\I
CD o iF
ol
lt CU (\l c\l

FunctionCodeExecution
Times
c - 10 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixG

c)
o
A
IL
rO
o
o
N
N
|(,
(t,
= $
N t\
=

N
9 r
iE o o o o o
L , r F
g c lo (o o o o
q GD o) GD (o
*9 !t

=u,

ro
e
!t
o
C)
IL
=
=
tq)
{-
a-
ct
c
b

i3 C)
IL
=
e
F
b

=
a()
q)
uI S , F
I = F r O
ts

\,
.H
Fl
h FEER
u)
ql
5
z
8 8- =
.E

EEEE
F.
c
rF,
o
*i)

{
r,
Q
$)
)<
rrl
q) N
lJ o o
o = =
O = ul
J U)
tJ
b
o = z
.tJ o
.g
()
*.f
a-

c s
,3 !F

o
E
lI{ o
= -9
= .ct
"-i I
J
= -g
6
Q
a) &
a
F
trr
B
E E
o c
CL
o. ()
o
o
5
3T' o
E -9
.e

o
g
o e
o
3
E
o- E
o
o =
-g

g c tl- o E Eo
o o
-g = ()
o
.- =
a o
CL g
o
C) -Q E
c
(,
L
g
3I'
L
lrJ
cf,
c
_9
o
!,
ct
E
(D
o
UJ o
I o
=
o (t
q)
v, UJ ()
o
= E
o E o .E UJ U'
o €
c rF 6
o lE
c
o
6 rF c o CD z c E
o
E o -9 co J o
8F'
L
E
o (t o o s .9
cr<
.P

E c
ct
()
o
s o
-9
.0 -9
E
o .= g
E F 6o o
o c .= C6

.g?
G'
o
-e o
o o
o E
g
o
o
ur-
I tt- E o !, E ct
6
.: o
C'
E= UJ IU
o U)
0,
o
UJ
o
(U 6
t, g
3
C)
(U
Eq)
C) o
CD
6= o ('l
o o a o o ct
fia o z
IJJ
U) o z o
x
ltJ E g t-
F
c
g€ !F C\I (Yt sl lO (o
g6
F
(9
(\l
$ \t t
(\l
sf t s(\l
ol C! ol GI
IL

FunctionCodeExecutionTimes
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 c -11
W
o

I
 AppendixD - PointQualityDefinition

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Appendtx D deflnes tJre potnt qualtty fl4g states for analog I/O,
dlgltal I/O, and module bus I/O.

NOTE:The controlmodulecan be configuredto trip or continue

operationuponthe loss of an UOmodule.

ANALOGINPUTS
INDIV//DUAL

Each analog lnput is compared to a low value of -0.75 VDC

and a high value of 5.25 VDC. If the input goes outside eitJrer
llmlt, tlre value is held to the llmit and the polnt quallty flag
indieates E [D.

GNOUPANALOGINPUTS

If an I/O rnodule is not connected, all points in the group will

have their point qudfff flag set to EA.f,).

GROUPANALOGOUTPUTS

All outputs are read back by feedback lnput clrcuitry. If the

feedback voltage signal does not rnatch tJle requested software
output value, the polnt quallty ls set to BAD for that output.

D'GITAL UO

If the UO definitlon block is configured to use anI/O module,

but tlle I/O module ls not instatled, the potnt quality flag for
the associated module l/O group will be set to BAf,, and the
control module generates a problem report.

MODULEBUSUO

If input data carulot be read for a pertod of 1.5 seconds, the

flag will be set to BAD. A new attempt wtll be made to read the
data at least every ten to 15 seconds.

NOTE:Afterthe pointqualityflagis set to indicateBAD quality,the

receivingmoduleretainsand uses the last good value that was
obtained.

The MFC and MFP modules utilize a configurable retry period

for determiningS BAL quallty. Ttre base retry pertod ls conflg-
ured tn the extended executlve (functton code 9O) base rnodule
bus I/O perlod 52. Thls spectffcatlon (SZ1also determlnes the
time resoluuon for all module bus I/O pole periods conflgured

PointQualityDefinition
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB199s D-1
AppendixD

ln the module. Thls lncludes the segment control (functton

code 82) module bus l/O perlod S13. All module bus I/O perl-
ods should be conflgured tre multtples of functTon code gO,
52. To determlne the tlplcal tlme requlred to mark a module
bus I/O potnt BAD, multlplyfanrction code 9O, SZ bg sir.

Example: code90,S2= 0.250sec

function

0.250secx 6.000= 1.500secs

A point urill not contlnue to retry at the .funetion code 9O, Sz

period after being marked B D. The 8,4f,, polnt retry ts only
perforrned once every 15 seconds.

PointQuality Definition
D-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixE - ModuleFunctionBlocks

GENERALDESCFdP7,ON

Appendtx E contalns functlon code block numberlnformatlon

by module t3rye.

Table E-l e4plalns analog mastermodules.

. IMAMMOS.
. NAIVTMO2.

Table E-2 e,:rplalnscontroller modules.

. CrcO1/O2/O3/O4 0ooP command).

. IMCOMASIO .
. IMQRCOf (qutck resPonse).
. NCOMOz.

Tables E-3, E-4 and E-5 ocplain loglc master modules.

. IMLMMO2 frabb E-5).

. NLMMOI Fables E-3 and E-4).

Table E-6 elglalns multl-functlon Processors and controllers.

. IMMFCOSIO4IOS(controllers).
. IMMFFOI/O2/OS (processors).
. IMMPCOI (PC 90 processor).
. NMFCOI/O2 (controllers).

Table E-7 orphfns conrmand controllers.

. CBCO1(batch).
. CSCOI (sequence).

Table E-8 eqplatns strategfc loop controllers.

. src01.

ModuleFunctionBlocks
l-Eg6-2008 1s FEB1995 E-1
Appendix E

ANALOGMASTERMODULES

Table E-1. NAIUIMOZand. IIWAMMOSAnslry Ma,ster Mdule

Block No. Funetlon

Deflnltlon
Code
1-64 Inputs1 through64 (functioncode158is availableonly 70 or 158
in the |MAMMO3)
65-68 Digital indicator station (available only in the |MAMMOS) 20
75 Executive block 71
76 Slave definition block 72
T7 Trenddefinitionblock 78
80 Calibrationcommandblock 74
81 Calibrationstatusblock 75
89 Pointseruicestatusblock 77
90-93 Termination unittemperatureblocks 76
94 Time(hrs)
95 Time (min)
96 Time (secs)
97 Revision level
98 Cycle time (secs) (only available in the IMAMMOS)
1 0 1 164 Calibration data blocks for inputs 1 - &1 73
1 6 5- 1 9 6 Polynornialadjustment (availableonly in the |MAMMOS) 159

CONTROLLER MODULES

Table 8 2. NCOMO2, IMCOMOS/O Controller Modules,

IMQRCOI Quick Response Controtler Modtie andCLC}L/OZ/
OS/ 04 Inop Command Controller Modules
Block No. Deflnltlon Function Code
0 Logic 0
1 Logic1
2 Reserved
3 -100.0
4 1.0
5 0.0
6 1.0
7 100.0
I -9.2E1g
9 9.2El8
10- 199 Configurableblocks Any allowed function
code - refer to
Appendix B
200 Reserved
201 Analoginput1 27
202 Analoginput2
203 Analoginput3
204 Analoginput4

ModuleFunctionBlocks
E-2 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixE

Table E-2. NCOMO2, IMCOMOS / 04 Cpinff:oller Modul,es,

ftIISRCO1 guickResponse &nfroller MduLe and. CLCO1 / 02 /
O3/O4 Loop Command. &nfr:oller Modules (ontirued)
Block No. Deflnltlon Functlon Code
205 - 210 Reserved -
211 Analogouput 1 29
212 Analogouput 2
213 - 220 Reserved
221 Digitalinput1 43
2?2 Digitalinput2
223 Digitalinput3
224 - 230 Reserved
231 Digitaloutput1 44
232 Digitaloutput2
233 Digitaloutput3
2U Digitaloutput4
235 - 239 Reserved
240 Stail-upin progress 53
241 NVRAM in initialize mode (switch 4,
switch position 2)
242 Generalpurposeswitchstate (switch4,
switchposition3). Canbe usedas a
lockinput(referto function
configuration
code53, S10).
243 Lastcontrolcycletime (secs)
24 Validtime receivedfrom bus interface
module
245 Hours(0 to 23)
246 Minutes(0 to 59)
247 Seconds(0 to 59)
248 Calendar,year(0 to 99)
249 month(1 to 12)
Calendar,
250 Calendar,day (1 to 31)
251 Calendar, day of week (1 to 7,
Sunday= 1)
252 Revision level
253 NVRAM utilization (Percent)
zil RAM utilization (percent)
255 Reserved

ModuleFunctionBlocks
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 E-3
AppendixE

LOGICMASTERMODULES

The NLMMOI hgic Master Module c€rn handle a mlx of logic

functions and I/O operatlons. The tlpe of operatlon for each
block within the NLMMOI l,oglc Master Module depends on the
block number, the t5pe of hardware connected to I/O blocks
and how block number three (I/O defrnftion) is configured.

Table E-3. NLMMOI LWicMaster Module

Block No. Deflnltlon Functlon Code
0 Logic 0 -
1 Logic 1
2 Executiveblock il
3 UOdefinition 60
4-127 Configurable logic function blocks Any allowed function ode
- refer to Appendix B
128 - 255 Configurablelogic or l/O function blocks.
Blocks 128 to 255 are divided into
groups of eight. Refer to Table E-4.

Table E-4. NLMMOI l-ogic Master Module

Bloclcs 128 - 255 Groups oJ Eigtrt
Group Blocks Group Blocks
0 128- 135 8 192- 199
1 1 3 6- 1 4 3 I 200 - 207
2 14 - 151 10 208 - 215
3 152 - 159 11 216 - 223
4 1 6 0- 1 6 7 12 224 - 231
5 168 - 175 13 232 - 239
6 176 - 183 14 240 - 247
7 1 8 4- 1 9 1 15 248 - 255
NOTES:
1. An input block does not have a function code number.
2. Block three defines each group of eight blocks as either logic functions
or as UO functions.
3. lf an NDSMO2 Contact Input Slave Module is used, the groups must be
defined as inputs.
4. lt an NDSMOl Digital Slave Module is used, the groups can be used as
inputs or outputs depending on how the module is programmed. Block
three must be specified to match the hardware.
5. The modules group hardware addresses must be programmed (by
dipswitches) to match the sottware group number.
6. Any of the groups that are not used for l/O can be used for logic func-
tions.
7. When a group is defined as an input, output or logic, all eight blocl<s
must be used for the same function.
8. A logic function can be output by two methods. First, by using a normal
output (digital output function code 49) and thus, using more of the module
resources. Second, by using an inferred digital output combined logic Aate
and hardware output point. Figure E-l shows a normal and an inlened out-
put configuration.
lf a block defined as an output is specified to per{orm a logic function, the
result drives the hardware as if it is an output. Caution must be exercised
if the loop is modified and block 128 is used in some other loop. lt will still
act as an output. The output can be used as a direct input.

ModuleFunctionBlocks
E - 4 15FEB199s l-E96-2008
 AppendixE

a) NORMAL OUTPUT

b) TNFERREDOUTPUT

TP4{i14UlB

Figure E- 1. NLMMO 7 Normrrl and. I4fered

OuEd Configurallon

Table E-5. IMLMMOZ WtcMaster Mo&ile

Block No. Deflnltlon FunctionCode

0 Logic0 105
1 Logic 1
2 Reserved
3 -100.0
4 -1.0
5 0.0
6 1.0
7 100.0
I -9.2El8
9 9.2El8
10 Start-upcompleteflag (0 = no, 1 = !es)
11 Reserved
12 Systemfreetime in percent(updatedeverysec)
13 Revision level
14 Reserued
15 Task1 elapsedtime of previouscycle(secs) 106
16 Task1 elapsedtimeof currentcycle(secs)
17 Task1 processorutilizationpercent
18 NVRAM utilization percent 108
19 RAM utilization percent (valid when block 10
output equals 1)
20-23 Reserued
logicor l/O functions
2 4 - 1 0 2 3 Configurable Any allowed
functioncods-
referto AppendixB

ModufeFunctionBlocks
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 E-5
AppendixE

MULTI.FUNCTION AND CONTROLLERS

PROCESSOBS

Table E-6. IMMFPO 1/ 02 / 03 Mulh-FUnction Processors,

O1/ 02 and IMMFCOS / 04 / OS Mnlti-Fltnctlon Contollers,
.NriItfFC
andIMMPCOI PC 9O Processor Modtie
Block No. Deflnltlon Functlon Code
0 Logic0 81
1 Logic 1
2 0 or 0.0
3 -100.0
4 1.0
5 0.0
6 1.0
7 100.0
I -9.2Elg
9 9.2 El8
10 Start-upflag (0 = no, 1 = !es)
11 Memorydisplayvalue
12 Systemfree time in percent
13 Revision level
14 Reserved
15 Task1 elapsedtime sincepreviousrycle 82
16 Task 1 elapsed time current rycle (sec/min)
17 Task 1 processor utilization
18 Task 1 check point overrun count
19 Task 1 cycle time overrun (sec/min)
20 Hours,timeof day 90
21 Minutes,time of day
22 Seconds, tirne of day
23 No time synchronizationflag:
0 = time of day invalid
1 = tirne of day valid
24 Year (0 to 99)
25 Month (1 to 12)
26 Day(1 to 31)
27 Day of week (1 to 7, Sunda! = 1)
28 Reserved
29 Reserued
301 Configurableblocks Any allowed
functioncode -
referto AppendixB
Note 2 Looptype: 89
0.0 = PlantLoop
1.0 = lNFl-NET/Superloop
3.0 = INFI-NET/Superloop
withtime-stamping
NOTES:
1. The highest configurable block number is:
20416for NMFCOI|O?,IMMFC0Sand lMMPC0l
9998 for |MMFCOS/04and |MMFPOI|OUOS
2. Block number is:
2o47 for NMFCOIIO?,IMMFCOSand |MMPCOI
9999 for |MMFCOS/04and IMMFPOUOAO3

ModuleFunctionBlocks
E-6 ls FEBtses l-E96-2008
 AppendixE

COMMANDCONTROLLERS

Table E-7 . CBCO1 Batch Commond, Controller and'

CSCOI *qtetuce Command. Contr:oller
Bloclc No. Deflnltlon FunctlonGode
0 Logic 0 Note 1
1 Logic 1
2 0 or 0.0
3 -100.0
4 1.0
5 0.0
6 1.0
7 100.0
8 -9.2El8
9 9.2 E18
10 Stail-upflag (0 = no, 1 = tes)
11 Reserved
12 Systemfreetime in percent
13 Revision level
14 Reserved
15 Task1 elapsedtimesincepreviouscycle 82
16 Task1 elapsedtimecurrentrycle (sec/min)
17 Task1 processorutilization
18 Thsk1 checkpointoverruncount
19 Task 1 cycletime overun (sec/min)
20 Hours,timeof day 90
21 Minutes,timeof day
22 Seconds, time of day
23 No time synchronizationflag:
0 = time of day invalid
1 = time of day valid
24 Year(0 to 99)
25 Month(1 to 12)
26 Day(1 to 31)
27 Dayof week(1 to 7, Sunda!= 1)
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 - 2046 CSCO1configurable blocks
30 - 2045 CBC01configurable blocks
2046 CBCO1only fixed ASCII string descriptor 113
2047 Looptype(0.0= PlantLooP) 89
NOTE:
1. FortheCBCoI mntroller,the batctrexecutive(functkrncode183)residesin fixedblock0. For
(furctioncode175)resldesin fixedbloot 0-
the CSC01controller,the seguenoeexecr.rtive

ModuleFunctionBlocks
15 FEB 1995 E-7
l-E96-2008
AppendixE

STRATEGIC
LOOP CONTROLLERS

Table E-8. SrcOI Strategic Lwp Controller

Block No. Deflnltlon Functlon Gode
0 Logic 0 81
1 Logic 1
2 0 or 0.0
3 -100.0
4 1.0
5 0.0
6 1.0
7 100.0
I -9.2Elg
9 9.2El8
10 Start-upin progressflag: 0 = oo, 1 = los
11 Memorydisplayvalue
12 Systemfreetime in percent
13 Revision level
14 Reserved
15 Elapsedtimeof previouscyclein unitsset 82
by 51
16 Elapsedtimecurrentcyclein unitsset by
s1
17 Processorutilizationin percent
18 Checkpointoverruncountnumber(no.of
cyclesoverthat specifiedin Sa)
19 Cycletimeoverrunin unitsset by Sl
20 Time of day (hrs) 90
21 Time of day (min)
22 Tirne of day (secs)
23 Time/date/synchronization f lag:
0 = time/date invalid
1 = time/date valid
24 Year (0 to 99)
25 Month (1 to 12)
26 Day(1 to 31)
27 Day of week (1 to 7, Sunda! = 1)
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30-49 Userconfigurable
blocks Any allowedfunction
code- referto Appendix
B
50 and 51 Fixed analog input definitionblock 182
52 and 53 Fixed analog input definitionblock
54 and 55 Fixed analog input definitionblock
56 and 57 Fixed analog input definitionblock
58-99 User configurableblocks Any allowed function
code - refer to Appendix
B

ModuleFunctionBlocks
E-g 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixE

Table E-8. SrcOl Statcgicloop @nfroller (oontuued)

Bloclr No. Deflnltlon Functlon Code
100 Analoginput1 230
101 Analoginput2
102 Analoginput3
103 Analoginput4
104 Analogouput 1
105 Analogouput 2
106 Digitalinput1
107 Digitalinput2
108 Digitalinput3
109 Digitaloutput1
110 Digitraloutput2
111 Digitaloutput3
112 Digitaloutput4
113 Pulseinput
114 S t a t u s : 0 - g o o d1,= b a d
115 Reservedfor futureuse
116 Reservedfor futureuse
117 - 899 Userconfigurable blocks Any allowedfunction
code- referto
AppendixB
900 Alarmstatus 231
901 Alarm acknowledge key indicator
902 Faceplate switch loop 1
903 Faceplate switch loop 2
904 Auxiliaryswitch1
905 Auxiliaryswitch2
906 Auxiliaryswitch3
907 Auxiliaryswitch4
908 of digitaloutput1
The mode(auto/manual)
909 of digitalouput 2
The mode(auto/manual)
910 of digitaloutput3
The mode(auto/manual)
911 The mode of digitaloutput4
(auto/manual)
912 Reservedfor futureuse
913 Reservedfor futureuse
-
9 1 4 1 0 1 9 Userconfigurable blocks Any allowedfunction
code - referto
AppendixB
1020 Fixed ASCII string descriptor block 113
1021 Fixed ASCII string descriptor block
1022 FixedASCIIstringdescriptorblock
1023 Looptype: 0.0 = PlantLooP 89

ModuleFunctionBlocks
15 FEB 1995 E-9
l-Eg6-2008
ffi

I
 AppendixF - ConsoleEngineeringUnit Descriptions

ENGINEER/iNGU NITD ESCRIPT'O'VSTABLES

Table F'-I . Operatpr Interfoce Sfufwn fOIS) Console

Code Descrlptlon Code Descrlptlon
0 a n d 1 Blank 9 cFs
2 o/o 10 CFM
3 DEGF 11 LB/I-IR
4 DEG C 12 GAL
5 PSIA 13 AMPS
6 PSIG 14 IN HG
7 tN H2O 15 KLB/HR
I GMP 16 - 255 Configurable

Tabte F-2. Martageffent Comtnnnd System (MCS) Consote

Code Descriptlon Code Ilescrlptlon
00 Intemalrealmodulepoint 09 CFS
01 Boolean point 10 CFM
02 o/o 11 LB/}IR
03 DEG F 12 BTU
04 DEG C 13 AMPS
05 PSIA 14 IN HG
06 PSIG 15 KLB/I-IR
07 lN HzO -
16 250 Configurable
08 GMP

Tahle F-3. Operator Intedace Unit (OM Console

Code Descrlptlon Code Descrlptlon
00 InternalrealrnodulePoint 09 CFS
01 Booleanpoint 1o CFM
02 a/o 11 LB/HR
03 DEG F 12 BTU
04 DEG C 13 AMPS
05 PSIA 14 IN HG
06 PSIG 15 KLBIFIR
07 tN HzO 1 6 - 6 3 Configurable
08 GMP

Unit DesqlPlolg
ConsoleEngineering
F-1
l-Eg6-2008
ffi

I
 AppendixG - ModuleStatus

GENERALDESCRIPTION

Appendtx G contalns module stahrs lnformaflon by module t54le.

Table G-I explatns andog master module status.

. IMAMMOS.
o NAI\{MO2/O2A.

Table G-2 exphfns bus module status.

. INBIMO2 (bus tnterface).

. INBTMOI fbus transfer).
o NBIMOI (bus teterfaee).

Table G-3 explains network processtng and SuperlooP status.

. INNPMOI (Controlway - network processln$.

o NSBMOf (superloop).

Table G-4 explains Plant Loop to Plarrt LooP communicatlons

status.

. NPPffiI (transfer module).

. NGCMOIIO2 (transfer module).
o NPPGOI (gateway).

Table G-5 explalns mlscellaneous courmuntcatlons status.

. CICOI (computer tnterface command).

. TNPCIOL/O2 (Plant Loop to computer trrterface).
o INPCT01 (Plant loop to computer transfer module).
o INPTMOI (polnt table module).
o Nt -SMOI (loop storage module).

Table G-6 explalns INFI-NET to computer communlcatlons

status.

. INICIOI (IIFI-NET to computer tnterface).

. INICTO L /Og (INFI-NET to computer transfer module).
. INSEMO1 (sequence of events).

Table G-7 explatns controller module status.

o CrcOL/O2/O3/O4 (looP command).

o IMCOMOS/04.
. IMQRCOI (qulck response).
. NCOMO?/O2A/O3A/O4A.
. NrcMOI/O2/Og (large).

ModuleStatus
l-E96-200B 15 FEB1995 G-1
Appendix G

Tables G-8 and G-9 explain logic master module status.

IMLMMO2.
NLMMOl/NLMMOtA.

Table G-f O explalns multt-functlon, multl-proeessor, strate-

gtc loop and command controller status.

o CBCOI fbatch command).

. CSCOf (sequence command).
o IMMFCOS/04 / OS (multi-functlon).
. IMMPCOf (multi-processin$.
o NMFCOI /O2 (multt-functlon).
o SrcOl /2I (strateglc loop).

Table G- f f explains multi-functlon processor module status.

o IMMFPOI /O2/O3IO38.

Table G- f 2 explatns local transfer module status.

. INIITO | /OS (INFI-NET to INFI-NET local transfer module).

o INIPmf INFI-NET to Plant Lnop local transfer module).

Table G-f 3 explains remote transfer module status.

o
.
INIITO2 (INFI-NET to INFI-NET remote transfer module).
INIPTO2 (INFI-NET to Plant l,oop remote transfer module). I
Table G- 14 explains process ileterface module status.

. NPIMOI (process lnterface module).

Table G-15 explains communication processor module status.

o IMCPMO?/OS (configuratlon port module).

Table G-16 explains configuration and tunlrg, and analog

output module status.

. CTTOI /O2 (configuration a.nd tunIrg terminals).

. IIVIAOMOI (analog output module).
. NCTMOI (configuration and tuning module).

ModuleStatus
G-2 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-200B
 AppendixG

ANALOG MASTERMODULES

Table G-I . ItrIIAMMOSand.NAIuIMOz/OzAAnaLryMaster Mdales

Blr
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX BAC Lro NVF NVI
3 REF roP SCF CAL CJR SRV EPF
4 FCG FCL rcG rcL ECS
5 BLK

Field Slze
Byte Fleld Descrlptlon
or Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:0 = $ood,1 = €rrors
MODE 60 Module rnode:00 = configure, 10 = erfor, 11 = €XOCUIB
TYPE 1F Moduletypecode= (9)re
2 FTX 80 Firsttime in execute:0 = oo, | = los
BAC 40 Backupstatus:0 = 9@d, 1 = bad
Lro 10 Summarylocalinputstatus:Q= good,1 = bad (l/O modulenot respondingor
badqualityinput)
NVF o4 SummaryNVRAMfailurestatus:Q= $006,| = fail
NVI 02 SummaryNVRAMinitializedstate:0 = oo, | = los
3 REF 80 Masterreferenceout of range:0 = no, 1 = los
toP 40 Summaryopenthermocouple status:0 = g@d, 1 = bad (configuredthermo'
couplepointis open)
SCF 20 l/O moduleconfiguration problem:0 = oo, | = !€s (problemwith UOmodule
definitionblock- occurswhengoingfromconfigureto executemode)
CAL 08 Summarycalibration status:Q= good,1 = bad
CJR o4 SummarycoldiunctionRTDstatus:0 - good,1 = bad
SRV 02 Summaryof pointsnot in service:0 = no, 1 = les (pointis out of servicefor
calibration)
EPF 01 NVRAMpowerfailureduringwrite:0 = ho, 1 = les
4 FCG 80 Failed configuration NVRAM: 0 = no, 1 = |€s (NAMMOZg!ly)
FCL 40 Failed calibration NVRAM: 0 = oo, 1 = !€s (NAMM02 only)
rcG 20 ConfigurationNVRAM initialized:0 = oo, | = !8s (NAMMO2only)
rcL 10 CalibrationNVRAM initialized:0 = llo, 1 = !€s (NAMMO2only)
ECS OF Errorcodestatus:
0 = g@d, nOt 0 = effor COde
1 - YOmoduletypeand pointtypedisagree(BLK)
2 = inputtypedisagreeswith engineeringunittype (BLlq
$ = pointinputtype invalid(BLK)
4 = trendtypeinvalid(BLR
5 = cotdjunctioninputinvalid(BLR (|MAMM03 only)
$ = pollnomialblockaddressis invalid(BLK)(|MAMMO3 only)
7 = DISblockdatainvalid(BLR (|MAMMO3 only)
5 BLK FF Btock number referring to the enor code status (ECS)

ModuleStatus
l-E96-2008 15 FEB 1995 G-3
AppendixG

PLANTBUSLOOPMODULES

Tahle G-2. INBMO2 and"NBIMOI Bus InterJace Mo&iles (Mdule Bus),

and.INETMOI Bus TlarsJer ModilIe Mdrie Bus)
Bir
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 LIN
3 CSP MOV NSF RLB SBF PSI
4 LIM LR1 LR2 LT1 LT2
5 Reserved

Fleld Size
Byte Field Descrlptlon
or Value
1 ES 80 Error summary: 0 = good, 1 = offors
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure, 10 = Orror,11 = OXOCUIe
TYPE 1F Moduletype code: (8)re= NB|MOI and lNBlMO2,(E)re= INBTMOl
2 LIN 80 LllrrVBTMon-line/otf-line:0 = on-lino, 1 = off-line (|NBTMOI only)
3 CSP 80 statusproblem:0 = no, 1 = los
Communication
MOV 40 Memory overflow: 0 = good, 1 = bad
NSF 20 Node status flag: 0 = g@d, 1 = bad
RLB 10 RedundantLllrrVBlMconfigured:0 = no, | = les (NB|MOI and lNBlMO2only)
SBF 08 SecondaryBIM failureflag: Q = good, 1 = fail (NBIMOI and lNBlM02 only)
PSI 01 indicator:Q= primary,1= secohdaryNB|MOI and
Primary/secondary
lNBlMO2only)
4 LIM 80 LIM problemflag: 0 = oo, | = les
LR1 40 Plant Loop 1 receive error: 0 = no, | = !€s
LR2 20 Plant Loop 2 receive error; 0 = oo, | = los
LT1 10 Plant Loop 1 transmit error: 0 = Do, 1 = lgs
LT2 08 Plant Loop 2 transmit error: 0 = Do, | = !€s
5 00 Reserved

ModuleStatus
G-4 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixG

AND SUPERLOOPBUS MODULES

INFI.NETNETWORKPROCESS,,VG

Tahlc C-3. INNPMO 7 Nefipork Prrcesstrrg Mdtie (Controtusag)

and.NSBMOI Superloop Bus Mdule (Mdule Bus)
Bft
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 I 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 Reserved
3 PCU MOV BKCFG BKSTS PSI
4 NSF RER1 I RER2 TERl TER2 RIDl RID2 RCF
5 Reserved
6 ETYPE
7 CWA CWB Reserved
8 Reserved
9 NDTl NDT2 NCDl NCD2
1 0- 1 3 Reserved
14 Module nomenclature
15 Revisionletter(ASCll)
16 Revisionnumber(ASCll)

Field Slze Descrlptlon

Byte Field
or Value
1 ES 80 Enorsummary:0= good,1 = enors
MODE 60 Modulemode:'|1 = execute
TYPE 1F Moduletypecode:(1S)re= enhancedstatus
2 Reserved
3 PCU 80 Node off-line:0 = no, 1 = y€S
MOV 40 Memoryoverflow:0 = good,1 = bad
BKCFG 10 Redundantmoduleconfigured: 0 = no, 1 = yes
BKSTS 08 Secondarymodulefailure:0 = good,1 = bad
PSI 01 indicator:0 = prim?ry 1 = seqenqery
Primary/secondary
4 NSF 80 Node environment stiatusflag: Q = good, 1 = bad
RERl 40 Receiveerors on channel1: 0 = no, 1 = !€s
RER2 20 Receiveerors on channel?:O = no, | = les
TERl 10 Transmitenorson channel1: 0 = no, 1 = t€s
TER2 08 Transmiterors on channel2: 0 = no, | = !9s
RIDl 04 Receiveridle on channel 1: 0 = no, 1 = !€s
RID2 02 Receiveridle on channel 2: 0 = no, 1 = y€s
RCF 01 Ring communicationfailure for local ring: 0 = no, 1,= yes
5 Reserved
6 ETYPE FF Enhancedmodule type: (25)16= |NNPMOI, (21he = NSBMO1
7 CWA 80 busA failure:0 = good,1 = fail (INNPMO1
Controlway only)
CWB 40 Controlway = =
bus B failure:0 good,1 fail (|NNPMOIonly)
I 00 Reserved

ModuleStatus
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 G-5
Appendix G

Byte
Tablc G-3 . INNPMO 1 Netutork hrcesst4g Mdtie
andNSBMOI Superloop Bus Mdtic

Field
Field Size
(MdttlcBus)
(Controluta7)
(onttated)

Descriptlon
o
or Value
9 NDTl 01 NIS looprelaydrivetransistor1 fiailure
NDTz 01 NfS looprelaydrivetransistor2 failure
NCDl 01 NIS receive channef 1 disable
NCD2 01 NIS receive channel 2 disable
1 0- 1 3 Reserved
14 FF Module nomenclature:(01)re= |NNPMO1and NSBMO1
15 FF Revision letter (in ASCII code), for example, (44lte = D
16 FF Revision number (in ASCII code), for exampte, (31h6 - 1

ModuleStatus
G-6 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixG

PLANT LOOPTO PLANT LOOPCOMMUNICAT'O'VS

Tablc &4. INPP7, T-ransJerModtile, NGCMOI/ 02 Plart Lnp to Plont Loop

Tlan sJer Mo&ia and NPrc'o I Plnrt Lnp to Plant Loop Gateusag
Blr
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX BAC Rro Lro NVI CFG
3 PCU MEM NEF SL1 sl2
4 LIM LR1 LR2 LT1 J:r2
5 Reserved

Field Size
Byte Field Descrlptlon
or Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:0 = good,1 = enors
MODE 60 Modulemode: 00 = configure,10 = enor, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Moduletype code: (11)re= NGCMO1and INPPT0I
2 FTX 80 Firsttime in execute:0 = no, 1 = yos
BAC 40 Backup stiatus:0 = good, 1 = bad
Rro 20 SummaryremotgUOstatus:0 = 9ood,1 = bad
Lro 10 Summarylocall/O status:0 = good,1 = bad
NVI 04 NVRAMchecksumeror: 0 = good,1 = bad
CFG 02 0 = no, 1 = Yes
Defaultconfiguration:
3 PCU 80 Oneor morePCUsoff-line:0 = no, 1 = yes
MEM 40 Memoryoverflow:0 = good,1 = bad
NEF 20 Node environmentfailure: Q = good, 1 = bad
SL1 Serial link 1 status: 0 = 9ood, 1 = bad
SL2 Serial link 2 status: g : good, 1 = bad
4 LIM 80 LIM problemflag: 0 = no, 1 = yBS
LR1 40 Loopreceiveerrorchannel1: 0 = oo, 1 = y€s
LR2 20 Loop receive eror channel 0: 0 = Do, | = !9s
LT1 10 Looptransmiterrorchannel1: 0 = llo, | = !€s
Lr2 08 Loop tr:ansmitenor channel 0: 0 = llo, | = les
5 00 Reserved

ModuleStatus
r-E96-2008 15FEB1995 G-7
Appendix G

. COMPUTERINTERFACECOMMAND
PLANTLOOP TO COMPUTERCOMMUNICAT'OA'S

Table G-5. qCOl Computer InterJace Commond, INPCIIOI/ 02 Plartt Loop

to Computer InterJace, INrcTO 1 Plont Loop to hmprfter TlansJer Mdtle,
INPTMOI PointTablc Mdule, and.NLSMOl Loop Storage Mdule
Bit
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX RIO Lro
3 CSP MOV NSF NODETYPE
4 LIM LR1 LR2 LT1 LT2
5 HOST

Field Size
Byte Field Description
or Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:I = good,1 = erors
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure, 10 = eror, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Module type code:
(OA)re= |NPTM01,lNPCI0l
(1Ohe= NLSMO1,!NPCT01,lNPClO2
(17)re= ClC01
2 FTX 80 Firsttime in execute:0 = no, 1 = yos
Rro 20 Summaryremoteinputstiatus:Q= good,1 = bad
LIO 10 Summarylocalinputstatus:Q= good,1 = bad
3 CSP 80 Communicationstatus problem: 0 = no, 1 = !€s
MOV 40 Memory overflow:0 = good, 1 = bad
NSF 20 Node statusflag: Q = good, 1 = bad
NODE 07 Node type: 0 = computer interface unit, 1 = operator interfacestation or
TYPE managementcommand systern,2 = ogerator interface unit
4 LIM 80 LIM problemflag: 0 = no, | = !€S
LR1 40 Plant Loop 1 receive eror: 0 = no, 1 = y€s
LR2 20 Plant Loop 2 receive eror: 0 = no, 1 = y€S
LT1 10 PlantLoop1 transmitenor:0 = no, 1 = y€s
u 2 08 Plant Loop 2 transmit eror: 0 = no, 1 = yes
5 HOST FF Value set by the computer (when non-zero, ES = 1)

ModuleStatus
G-g 15 FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixG

AND SEQUENCEOF Ey ENTSMON'TOR

INFI.NETTO COMPUTERCOMMUNICAT//ONS

Table Cr6. INICIOI INnf-NE" toComprierhtterJacc,INICIOL/Og INF:I-NETto&mputer

TransJer Mdule (Lm,l), andINSEMOI *qtence oJB.;ents Monltor
Blt
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX RIO Lro CFM ERM
3 CSP MOV LOP SDF NODETYPE
4 NSF LR1 LR2 LT1 LT2 Rt1 RI2 I RCF
5 HOST
6 ETYPE
7-8 Reserved
9 NDTl NDT2 NCDl NCD2
10-13 Reserved
14 Modulenomenclature
15 Revision letter (ASCll)
16 Revision number (ASCll)

Field Slze
Byte Field Descrlptlon
or Value
1 ES 80 Eror summary:0 = good,1 = enorc
MODE 60 Modulemode:00= configure,01 =fail, 10 = error,11= execute
TYPE 1F =
Moduletypecode:(15)re enhancedstatus
2 FTX 80 Firsttimein execute:0 = no, 1 = y€s
Rto 20 Summaryremoteinputstatus:0 = 9ood,1 = bad
Lro 10 Summarylocalinputstiatus:I = good,| = bad
CFM 08 Modulein configuremode(MODE= 00):0 = no, 1 = yes
ERM 01 Modulein enor mode(MODE= 10):0 = no, 1 = yBS
3 CSP 80 Communicationstatus problem: 0 = no, 1 = !€s
MOV 40 Memory overflow: 0 = good, 1 = bad
LOP 10 Off-line bridge for remote loop: 0 = no, 1 = !€s
SDF 01 Securi$ device failure
NODE 07 Node type: 0 = computer interfac€, 1 = operator interface unit or management
TYPE command syst€ffi, 2 = ogerator interface unit
4 NSF 80 Node environmentstatus flag: Q = good, 1 = bad
LR1 40 !NF|-NET 1 receive eror: 0 = no, 1 = yes
LR2 20 INF|-NET2 receiveeror: 0 = no, | = les
LT1 10 |NF|-NET1 transmiteror: 0 = no, 1 = y€S
LT2 08 |NF|-NET2 transmiteron 0 = no, 1 = y€s
Rt1 04 Receiver idle on channel 1 of central loop: 0 = no, | = les
Rt2 02 Receiveridle on channel2 of central loop:0 = no, 1 = y€s
RCF 01 Ringcommunication failure:0 = no, 1 = yes
5 HOST FF Valueset by the computer(whennon-zero,ES = 1)
6 ETYPE 20 Enhanced moduletype(20)re= lNlCT0l/03,(2A)re= |NSEMO1
7-8 00 Reserved

ModuleStatus
l-E96-2008 15FEB1995 G-9
Appendix G

Toble G-6. INICIOI flnt-NE? to CormptfierInterJae,INIeICIl/Og INF:t-NE?to Comptfta

TransJer Mdtile (Leal), and. INSEMO1 *qtrcnre oJ h:ents Monllor (olntttnteut
Field Size
Byte Field Descrlptlon
or Value
9 NDTl 01 NIS looprelaydrivetransistor1 fiailure
NDT2 01 NISlooprelaydrivetransistor2 failure
NCDl 01 NIS receivechannel 1 disable
NCD2 01 NIS receive channel 2 disable
1 0- 1 3 Reserved
14 FF Module nomenclature(01)re= lNlCT0l and |NSEM01,(03he = lNlGTo3
15 FF Revision letter (in ASCII code), for example, (45)1e= E
16 FF Revision number (in ASCII code), for example, (30)rs = 0

ModuleStatus
G-10 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixG

CONTROLLERMODULES

Table C-7. CrcO 1/ 02 / OS/ 04 Loop Conunand.@ntoller Mdalc, MCOMO! | 04

and.NcoMo2 / o2A/ oSAl o4A contoller Module, IMORCOI SttukReslaonse
CorztotlerModule, and.NrcMOI/O2/OS Larye Conb:olJer Mdtie
Bit
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX Rro LIO SEG NVF NVI DSS
3 Enor code
4 Errorcodedescriptor(1)
5 Enor code descriptor (2)

Field Size or Descriptlon

Byte Field
Value
1 ES 80 Enorsummary:0 = good,1 = erors
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure, 10 = enor, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Module type code: (S)re= COM and QRC, (6)ro = CLC, (0F)re = NLCMOI'
(1E)re= NLCM0?,(lF)re = NLCMO3
2 FTX 80 First time in execute: 0 = no, 1 = yBS
Rro 20 Summaryremoteinputstatus:Q= good,1 = bad
LIO 10 Summarylocalinputstatus:0 = good,1 = bad
SEG 08 Summarysegmentalarmstatus:0 = llo, | = los
NVF 04 SummaryNVRAMfailurestatus:Q= $ood,1 = fail
NVI 02 SummaryNVRAMinitializedstate:0 = no, 1 = yes
DSS 01 Digital stiationstiatus:Q = good, 1 = bad
3-5 Enor Code 3 4 5
NVRAMeror:
01 01 Writefailure
02 Checksumfailure
03 Baddata
FF Resetduringwrite
Al reference error:
02 00 04 1-V reference
05 5-V reference
03 00 Missing l/O expansion board
05 ( 1 ) (2) Configuration error- undefinedblock:
(1) = blocknumbermakingreference
(2) = blocknumberbeingreferenced
06 (1) (21 Configuration error- inputdatatype is inmnect:
(1) = blocknumbermakingreference
(21= blocknumberbeingreferenced
08 (1) - Trip block activated:
(1) = block number of triP block
0e (1) (21 Functionnot allowedin segment:
(1) = segrnent
blocknumber
(2\ = blocknumberin enor
OA Toomanysegmentcontrolblocks
OB ( 1 ) (2) Segmentcontrolblockpriori$violation:
(1) = blocknumberof firstsegment
(21= blocknumberof segmentin error

ModuleStatus
t-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 G - 11
Appendix G

LOGIC MASTER MODULES

Table G-8. NLMMOI WicMasterMdule

t
Blt
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX MOV I RIO LIO NVF NVI DSS
3 Enor code
4 Enorcodedescriptor(1)
5 Enorcodedesoiptor(2)

Field Size or
Byte Field Description
Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:0 = good,1 = enors
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure, 10 = enor, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Module type code = (7he
2 FTX 80 First time in execute:0 = Do, 1 = yes
MOV 40 Memoryoverflow:0 = no, 1 = los
Rro 20 Summaryremoteinputstatus:Q= good,1 = bad
LIO 10 Summarylocalinputstiafus:I = good,1 = bad
NVF 04 SummaryNVRAMfailurestatus:0 = good,1 = fail
NVI 02 SummaryNVRAMinitializedstate:0 = no, | = 1/es
DSS 01 Digital station status: Q = good, 1 = bad
3-5 Error Code 3 4 s
NVRAM error:
01 01 Write failure
02 Checksumfailure
03 Bad data
FF Reset during write
03 ( 1 ) Missingl/O moduleblockor modulenumberof l/O moduleor DLS:
(1)= groupnurnber
05 ( 1 ) (2) Configuration eror - undefinedblock:
(1) = blocknurnbermakingreference
(21= blocknurnberbeingreferenced
07 ( 1 ) lnsufficientmemoryin rernotememory:
(1) = bfocknumberof digitalinputtist(functioncode46)
08 ( 1 ) Trip block activated:
(1) = block nurnberof trip block

ModuleStatus
G-12 15FEB1995 l-E96-2008
 AppendixG

Table G9. IMLMMO2 or NLMMO 1A WIc Master Modtrle

Bit
Byte 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX MOV Rro Lro NVF NVI DLS

3 Enor code
4 Enor codedescriptor(1)
5 Enor codedescriptor(2)

Field Size or Descriptlon

Byte Field
Value
1 ES 80 0 = good,1 = enors
Errorsumrnary:
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure,10 = error, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Module type code = (C)re
2 FTX 80 Firsttime in execute:0 = no, | = !9s
MOV 40 Memoryoverflow:0 = no, 1 = !€s
Rto 20 Summaryremoteinputstatus:Q= good, 1 = bad
LIO 10 Summarylocalinputstiatus:Q= good, 1 = bad
NVF 04 SummaryNVRAMfailurestratus: I = good,1 = tq{
NVI 02 SummaryNVMM initializedstrate:0= nor1 =l/e9
DLS 01 Digital logic station stiatus:0 = 9oo4 1 = bad
3-5 Enor Code 3 4 5
NVRAMerror:
01 01 Writefailure
02 Checksum failure
03 Baddata
FF Resetduringwrite
03 ( 1 ) (2) Missingl/O moduleblockor modulenumberof l/O moduleor DLS:
(1),(2) = l/O moduleaddress
05 ( 1 ) (2) Configuration eror - undefinedblock:
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
06 ( 1 ) (2) Configuration error- inputdatatype is incorrect:
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
07 ( 1 ) (z',)Insufficientmemoryin remotememory:
inputlist (functioncode46)
(1),(2) = blocknumberof digitral
08 ( 1 ) (2) Trip block activated:
(1) = block number of triP block
OA Too many segment control blocks
0c eror, sequencingtoo cornqlex
Configuration
NOTE: All numbersin bytes4 and 5 are in binarycodeddecirnal(BCD)format.

ModuleStatus
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB 1995 G-13
Appendix G

MULTh FUNCT'ON, MULThP ROCESSOR,S TRIITEG'C LOOP A ND COMMAND

colrrRotl,ERs

Tahle G-lO. CBCOI Batch Conffi. ControtlenCSCOI Seqtenre Conmond.

Controllen IMMFCO?/ 04 / OEand. NMFE,O
I / 02 Mr:Jtf-F.tnctfonConfrotter Md, tle,
IMMrcOI Multi-ProcesstngContollerMdule, and.SrcOLl2| Statcglclnp &ntroller
Bit
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX BAC I RIO L t o l c F G l r u v r l r u u l D s s
3 Enor code
4 Enor codedescriptor(1)
5 Enor codedescriptor(21

Field Size or
Byte Field Description
Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:0 = good,1 = enors
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure,10 = enor, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Module type code: (B)re= NMFC01I02and |MMFC03/04/05,
( D ) r e= I M M P C O 1 , ( 1 3 ) r=eC B C 0 1 ,( 1 4 h e= C S C 0 1 ,( 1 9 ) r s= S L C g 1 1 2 1
2 FTX 80 Firsttimein execute:0 = no, 1 = yes
BAC 40 Backupstatus:0 - good,1 = bad
Rro 20 Summaryremoteinputstatus:Q= good,J = bad
Lro 10 Summarylocalinputstatus:Q= good,1 = bad
CFG 08 On-line configurationchanges being made
NVF 04 Summary NVRAM failure status: Q = good, 1 = fait
NVI 02 Summary NVRAM initializedstate: 0 = no, 1 = yes
DSS 01 Digital station status: Q = good, J = bad
3-5 Error Code 3 4 5
Byte 3 is
NVRAM eror:
displayed
0 1 0 1 - Write failure
on the
02 Checksum failure
front panel
03 Bad data
LEDs FF Reset during write
when the
module is 02 ( 1 ) (z',)Analog input reference eror:
in ERROR (1), (2) = block number of control interface l/O module block
mode. 03 ( 1 ) (2) Missing l/O module or expanderboard:
Under (1), (2) = block number of l/O module or station
MONITOR/ 05 ( 1 ) (2) Configurationerror - undefinedblock:
SIATUS (1), (2) = block number makingreference
screen for 06 ( 1 ) (2) Configurationerror - input data type is incorrect:
SLC. (1), (2) = block number makingreference
08 ( 1 ) (2) Trip block activated:
(1), (2) = block number of trip block
OF Primary module has failed and the redundant module configurationis not
current
10 Primary module has failed and the dynamic RAM data in the redundant
module is not current
14 Module is set for |NF|-NETbut is in a Plant Loop environment

ModuleStatus
G-14 15FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixG

Table Cr 10. CBCOI Bofr;lr.Conunmd. @trtlrotlen CSCOI Sequcnre Conunond Contotlen

IMMFU7 / 04 / OSand. NMFf;OI/ 02 Muifr-FUtlctfon&nfroller ModilIe, IMMrc,O1 Multf-
Processinghnfrotler Mo&ie, and. SIf,;Ol / 2 1 Statcglc Loop Confrotler (anttntrcd)
Fleld Slze or
Byte Field D,escrlptlon
Value
Enor Code 3 4 5
2 0 - - Programformatenor - in@nsistentformattrable(IMMFC03only)
21 (1) (z',ll Filesystemeror (|MMFC03only)
(1)' (2) = file number
22 ( 1 ) (21 InvokeC enor (|MMFC03only)
(1), (2) = blocknumbermakingreference
24 ( 1 ) (z',t, C programstackoverflow(IMMFCO3 only)
(1), (2) = blocknumbermakingreferencE
28 (1) (21 Userdefinedtunction(UDF)referenceis invalid(|MMFC03/04 only)
(1), (2) = blocknumbermakingreference
29 (1) (2',) UDFblockcannotreadprogramfile (IMMFG03/04 only)
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
2A ( 1 ) (z',)Notenoughmemoryfor UDF(|MMFC03/Monly)
(1), (2) = blocknumbermakingreferencs
28 ( 1 ) (z',, Missing UDFdeclaration(|MMFC03/04 only)
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
2C ( 1 ) (21 WrongUDFtype(IMMFC03/04 onlY)
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
2D (1) (z',) MissingUDFauxiliaryblock(|MMFC03/04 only)
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
2E ( 1 ) (z',)UDF compiler and firmware are incompatible(IMMFCO3/O4only)
(1), (2) = block number making reference
2F ( 1 ) (z',)BASICprogrameror (!MMFCO3 only)
and NMFCO2
(1),(2) = linenumberof error

ModuleStatus
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 G - 15
Appendix G

MULTI.FUNCTION PROCESSOR MODU LES

Table er 1 1. MMFPO 1/ 02 / Og/ O3B Mtilti-Fttttctlon Processor Modules

Bit
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX BAC Rro LIO I CFG NVF NVI DSS
3 Errorcode
4 Enor codedescriptor(1)
5 Enor codedescriptor(2)
6 ETYPE
7 CWA CWB R1F R2F I PF Reserved
8 SIM Reserved
9- 13 Reserved
14 Module nomenclature
15 Revision letter (ASCIl)
16 Revisionnumber (ASCII)

Field Size or
Byte Field Description
Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:0 = good,1 = errors
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure,10 = enor, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Module type code: (15)re= Enhancedstatus
2 FTX 80 First time in execute: 0 = no, 1 = yeS
BAC 40 Backup status: g = good, 1 = bad
Rro 20 Summary remote input status: Q = good, 1 = bad
Lro 10 Summary local input status: g = good, | = bad
CFG 08 On-line configurationchanges being made
NVF 04 SummaryNVRAMfailurestatus:Q= good,1 = fail
NVI 02 SummaryNVRAMinitializedstate:0 = no, | = f€s
DSS 01 Digital station status: Q = good, | = bad
3-5 Error Code 3 4 5
NVRAMeror:
Byte 3 is
01 01 Writefailure
displayed
02 Checksum failure
on the 03 Baddata
front panel
FF Resetduringwrite
LEDs
when the 02 ( 1 ) (2) Analog input reference eror:
moduleis (1), (2) = block number of control interface l/O module block
in ERROR 03 ( 1 ) (2) Missing l/O module or expanderboard:
mode. (1), (2) = block number of l/O moduleor station
05 (1) (2) Configurationetror - undefinedblock:
(1), (2) = block number making reference
06 ( 1 ) (2) Configurationeffor - input data type is inconect:
(1), (2) = block number making reference
08 ( 1 ) (2) Trip block activated:
(1), (2) = block number of trip block
OF Primary module has failed and the redundant module configurationis not
current

ModuleStatus
G - 16 15 FEB 1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixG

Toble Cr 11. IMMFPO1/ 02/ Og/ OSBMuiti-Frnctfon Processor Modtiles (wntuutd')

Field Size or
Byte Field Descrlptlon
Value
3-5 Enor Code 3 4 5
(cont) 10 - - Prirnary module has failed and the dynamic RAM data in the redundant
module is not cunent
11 NVRAM write failure eror
NOTE eron
Filesysteminitialization
18 20 01 01 = rootINODEcouldnot be made
02 02 = file systernparametersout of range
03 03 = couldnot open BCONFIG.SYS file
04 04 = coufdnot write BCONFTG.SYS file
05 05 = couldnot makeDEVdirectory
06 06 = couldnot openHDOfile
07 07 = eror occuredwhilewritingsystemfiles to disk
08 08 = malloceror occured on systembuffer
09 09 = malloceror occured on systembuffer
OA 0A = malloceror occured on systembuffer
OB 0B = eror foundin superblock
0c 0C = file systemcheckfounderors duringstart-up
Superblockerror:
18 22 01 01 = eror occunedwhiletryingto loadbit maps
02 02 = couldnot find a matchingdevicetype
Cache buffer eror:
18 23 01 01, 02 = no cache buffersavailable
02
Bit map error:
18 26 01 01 = unexpectedvalue found in bit map
02 02 = eror occuned while unloadingbit maps during a mount
operation
1 B 28 0 1 l/O enor,unexpectedUOoperationparameter
1 8 3 2 0 1 Timer effor; file system synchronization timer unable to be created
1 B 40 0 1 Badmajordevicenumber;unexpecteddevicetypefoundduringoperation
Formateror:
18 4D 01 01 = failureduringmodeselectcommand
02 02 = failureduringformatcommand
03 03 = failureduringcapacitycommand
u 04 = incompatibleblocksizefound(not 512,
Enor 20 Programformateror - inconsistent formattable
Code 21 ( 1 ) (21 Filesystemeror:
(1),(2) = file number
22 ( 1 ) (21 lnvoke C enor:
(1), (2) = block number making reference
24 ( 1 ) (21 C programstackoverflow:
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
28 ( 1 ) (21 Userdefinedfunction(UDF)referenceis invalid:
(1),(2) = blocknurnbermakingreference
29 ( 1 ) (z',)UDF block cannot read program file:
(1), (2) = block number making reference
2A (1) (21 Notenoughmemoryfor UDF:
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference
28 ( 1 ) (21 Missing UDF declaration:
(1), (2) = block number making reference
2c (1) (21 WrongUDFtype:
(1),(2) = blocknumbermakingreference

ModuleStatus
l-Eg6-2008 15 FEB1995 G-17
Appendix G

Tahle G- 1 1. IMMFPO l / O2 / O3 / O38 Multi-h,nclton Processo r Modul.es (an:arnurut)

Fiefd Size or
Byte Field Description
Value
3-5 Error Code 3 4 5
(cont)
2D ( 1 ) (2) MissingUDFauxiliaryblock:
(1), (2) = blocknumbermakingreference
2 E ( 1 ) (21 UDF compiler and firmware are incompatible:
(1), (2) = block number making reference
2F ( 1 ) (21 BASIC program eron
(1), (2) = line number of enor
6 ETYPE 1F Enhancedmoduletype= (241rc=IMMFPC/.rcUOS
7 CWA 80 Controlway bus A failure: 0 = good, 1 = fail
CWB 40 Controlwaybus B failure:0 = good,1 = fail
R1F 20 Redundancylink channel 1 failure: 0 = good, 1 = fail (fMMFPO3only)
R2F 10 Redundancylink channel 2 failure: 0 = good, 1 = fail (|MMFPO3only)
PF 08 Peripheralfailure: 0 = good, 1 = fail (|MMFP03 only)
I SIM 80 Simulationmode:0 = normaloperation,1 = simulationactive
9 - 13 00 Reserved
14 FF (01)re= |MMFPOI,
Modulenomenclature: (02)re= |MMFP0a,
(03he= 1MMFP'3
15 FF Revision letter (in ASCII code), for example, (40)1e= F
16 FF Revisionnumber (in ASCII code),for example,(30)re= 0
NOTE:Harddrivefile systemenor (byte3 = lB) pertainonlyto an IMMFPO3 configuredto operatewithan lMMplm.

ModuleStatus
G- 1g 15 FEB1995 l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixG

LOCAL TRANSFER MODULES

Tabte C-12. INIITOL/O3 WR[-NE? to INRI-NETT'ransJerMo&ile (Local)

andINIPTOI INnt-NE" to PlontloopTtansJer Modtile (Lqnl)
Blt
Byte 3 2 I 0
7 6 5 4
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 SIO cro NVI
3 PCUs MOV NODS BKCFG BKSTS RINGs PSI
4t NSFC RER1C RER2C TER1C TER2C RID1C RIDzC RCFC
5t NSFS RER1S RER2S TER1S TER2S RID1S RID2S RCFS
6 ETYPE
7-13 Reserved
14 Modulenomenclature
15 Revision letter (ASCll)
16 Revisionnumber(ASCI|
(S
NOTE: 1. The last letterof the codes or C) in bytos4 and 5 hdicato it the statrs appliosto the satallib ring of the cenbalring'

Field Size Description

Byte Field
or Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:0 = good,1 = 9{9rs
MODE 60 Modulemode: 01 = fail, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Moduletypecode:(1S)re=lNllTOl/O3,W01
2 sro 20 l/O status for datrasourced by satellite ring PCUs: 0 = good, 1 = bad
cro 10 l/O statusfor datrasourcedby centralring PCUs:0 = good,1 = bad
NVI 02 Default configuration: 0 = blocks configured, 1 = no blocks configured
(lNlPT01only)
3 PCUs 80 Nodes off-line: 0 = no, | = los
MOV 40 Memoryoverflow:0 = no, 1 = Ye!
NODS 20 Combinednodeenvironment statusfor bothrings:0 = good,1 = bad(lNlPTOl
only)
BKCFG 10 Redundantconfiguration:0 = tlo, 1 =Jgs
BKSTS 08 failed:0 = oo, 1 = Ye9
Secondary
RINGs 04
PSI 01 indicator:0 = primary,1 = sec
Primary/secondary
4-51 NSF 80 Nodeenvironmentstatusflag:Q= $ood,1 = bad
RERl 40 Receiveerrors on channel 1: 0 = no, 1 = !9s
'l
RER2 20 Receiveeffors on channel 2: 0 = no, = !€s
TERl 10 Transmitenorson channel1: 0 = good,1 = enorc
TER2 08 Transmitenorson channel2: Q= $ood,1 = erors
RIDl 04 Receiveridle of channel 1: 0 = no, 1 = !€s
RID2 02 Receiveridle of channel 2: 0 = no, 1 = y€s
RCF 01 Ring communicationfailute (lNllT03 only)
6 ETYPE FF Efiended module type: (t6)re = tNlPTOl' (23)to
7-13 00 Rr*ttd
14 FF Modulenomenclature:(01)re= lNtPT0l and lNllT01, (03)re= lNllT03
15 FF Revisionlefter (in ASCII code), for examPle'(42)re= B
16 FF Revisionnumber (in ASCII code),for example,(31)re= 1
NOTE: 1. The hsr l6tt€rof the codss (s or c) in byt6s4 and 5 indicateif the statusap9li63to the satellitering or the cental fing'

ModuleStatus
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 G-19
AppendixG

REMOTE TRA'VSFER M ODU LES

Toble el-l. INIITO2INnf-NET to INnt-NET T-ransfa Mdule (Remote)otrd. INIFTO2

Inmt-NET to Plant Lnp TransJer Mdule (Renatc)

Byte Btt
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 sro cro NVI
3 PCUs MOV SLSTA BKCFG BKSTS RINGs PSI
4 NSF RERl RER2 TERl TER2 RIDl RID2 RCF
5 SLSTl DO3ST SLST2
6 ModuleETYPE
7-g Reserved
9 NDTl NDTz NCDl NCD2
1 0- 1 3 Reserved
14 Module nomenclature= O2 (decimat)
15 Revision letter (ASCll)
16 Revision number (ASCll)

Field Size
Byte Field Description
or Value
1 ES 80 Errorsummary:0 = good,1 = errors
MODE 60 Module mode: 00 = configure,01 = fail, 11 = execute
ryPE 1F ModuleUpecode:(1S)re= lNllTQ2; (18)re= lNlPTg2
(see byte6 for lNllT02extendedcode)
2 SIO 20 l/O status for data sourced by satellite ring PCUs: g = good, 1 = bad
cro 10 l/O statusfor datasourcedby centralring PCUs:g = good,1 = bad
NVI 02 Defaultnonvolatile memoryconfiguration (lN!pr02only):
0 = blocksconfigured,1 = no blocksconfigured
3 PCUs 80 Nodes off-line:0 = no, | = les
MOV 40 Memory overflow: 0 = no, 1 = 1lBS
SLSTA 20 Serial link status: 0 = good, 1 = failed
BKCFG 10 Backup module colfigured: 0 = no, 1 = yes
BKSTS 08 Status of backup module: 0 = god, 1 = bad
RINGs 04 Rings off-line:0 = on-line, 1 = off-line bridge for remote rings
PSI 01 indicator:q = primary,1= secondary
Primary/secondary
4 NSF 80 Node environmentstatus flag: Q = good, 1 = bad
RERl 40 Receive errors on channel 1: 0 = no, 1 = !€s
RER2 20 Receive erors on channel 2: 0 = no, 1 = y€s
TERl 10 Transmit enors on channel 1: 0 = no, 1 = tes
TER2 08 Transmit enors on channel 2: 0 = no, | = }res
RIDl 04 Receiveridle on channel 1: 0 = no, 1 = yeS
RID2 02 Receiver idle on channel 2: 0 = no, 1 = yos
RCF 01 Ring communicationfailure: 0 = lo, 1 = yes (lNlpr02 only)
5 SLSTl 80 Status of serial link 1: 0 = good, 1 = bad
DO3ST 10 Digital output 3 state: 0 = de-energized, 1 = energized
SLST2 08 Status of serial link 2: 0 = good, 1 = bad
6 ETYPE FF Extendedmogglgtype:12,!)rr=lNllT0z,(18)re= lNlPTg2
7- 8 00 Reserved

ModuleStatus
G-20 15FEB199s l-Eg6-2008
 AppendixG

Table C-Ig. INIITO2INFI-i\IE?to INRI-NETTransJer Mo&* Remote) aITd.INIPTOZ

INF:[-NETto Plant Loop Ttans;fer Mo&ile (Remote)(onarucil
Field Size Description
Byte Field
or Value
9 NDTl 01 NISlooprelaydrivetransistor1 failurq
NDT2 01 NfS foop relay drive transistor 2 failure
NCDl 01 NIS receive channel 1 disable
NCD2 01 NIS receivEchannel 2 disable
1 0- 1 3 Reserved
14 FF (02)re= lNllr02' fNlPToz
Modulenomenclature:
15 FF Revisionletter (in ASCIIcode),for examP!9.(4?)rs= B
16 FF Revisionnumber(inASCIIcode),for example,(30)re= 0

ModuleStatus
l-E96-2008 15 FEB1995 G -21
Appendix G

PROCESS INTERFACEMODULE

Tahle G-74. NPIMOI hocess InterJace Modtile

Blr
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 I 0
1 ES MODE TYPE 1
2 Reserved
3 PCUs MOV NSF
4 LIM RERl RER2 TERl TER2
5 Reserved

Field Size
Byte Field Description
or Value
1 ES 80 Eror summary:0 = good,1 = enors
MODE 60 Modulemode: 01 = fail, 11 = execute
ryPE1 1F Moduletype code = (01)re
2 Reserved
3 PCUs 80 Nodes off-line:0 = no, 1 = y€s
MOV 40 Memory overflow: 0 = no, 1 = ygs
NSF 80 Node environmentstatus flag: Q = good, 1 = bad
4 LIM 80 LIMintemaleror: 0 = no, 1 = yes
RERl 40 Receive errors on channel 1: 0 = no, 1 = y€s
RER2 20 Reeive erors on channel2: 0 = no, 1 = y€s
TERl 10 Transmitenors on channel1: 0 = good,1 = enors
TER2 08 Transmit enors on channel 2: Q = good, 1 = erors
5 Reserved

ModuleStatus
G -22 15 FEB1995 l-E96-200B
 Appendix G

R MODULES
COMMUNICATIONPROCESSO

Table C- 75. IMCPMO2 / 03 Communtcafron Port Modules

Bit
Byte 2 I 0
7 6 5 4 3
1 ES MODE TYPE
2 FTX RIO Lro
3 PCU MOV LOP SDF I ttODETYPE
4 Reserved
5 CIU Status
6 ModuleETYPE
7 CWA CWB
8 Reserved
9 NDTl NDTz NCD1 I NCDz
1 0- 1 3 Reserved
14 Module nomenclature
15 Revision letter (ASCll)
16 Revisionnumber(ASCll)

Field Slze Descrlptlon

Byte Field
or Value
1 ES 80 Enorsummary:0= good,1 = enors
MODE 60 Modulemode:00 = configure,01 = fail, 11= execute
ryPE 15 Modute type: (= 2'l) enhanced module type (see stiatusbyte 6 for enhanced
module type code)
2 FTX 80 Firsttime in execute:0 = no, | = !€s
Rro 20 Summaryremoteinputstatus:I = good,1 = bad
Lro 10 Summarylocalinputstatus:g = good,1 = bad
3 PCU 80 Node off-line:0 = no, 1 = yos
MOV 40 Modulememoryoverflow:0 = no, 1 = Yes
LOP 10 Off-linebridgefor remoteloop:0 : 9999,1 = bad
SDF 01 Security device failure
NODE 07 Node type set by computer via the SET CIU STATUS command
TYPE (IMCPMO3only)
4 00 Reserved
5 clu FF CIUstatusset by computervia the SETCIUSTATUScommand
STATUS (|MCPMO3 only)
6 ETYPE 29 Enhanced module type: (41) = |MCPM02y03
7 CWA 80 ControlwaybusA failure:0 = 9!!{!-1fail
CWB 40 Controlwaybus B failure:0 = gogp!'!-1fail
8 00 Reserved
9 NDTl 01 NISlooprelaydrivetransistor1 failure
NDT2 01 NISlooprelaydrivetransistor2 failure
NCDl 01 NIS receive channel 1 disable
NCD2 01 NIS receive channel 2 disable
1 0- 1 3 Reserved
14 FF (3) = lMcPMOAo3
Modulenomenclature:
15 FF Revision lefter (in ASCII code), for exa@B
FF Revision number (in ASCII code), fot ex@ =0
16

ModuleStatus
t-E96-2008 15FEB1995 G-23
Appendix G

CONFIGURAT'ON
AND TUNING,AND ANALOGOUTPUT

Table Cr16. CTIPI /O2 @nfigwallon and.Tull@ TermfnaL IIuIAOMOIAnalog Oupli

Mdule, and NCTM0 1 cotfiglur:alTon and, Ttrrtiurg Mo&ie
Btt
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 ES MODE TYPE
2-5 Reserved

Field Size
Byte Field Description
or Value
1 ES 80 Eror summary:0 = good,1 = enors
MODE 60 Module mode: 01 = fail, 11 = execute
TYPE 1F Module type code: (2)re= NCTMQ1,(12)rc= CTTQ1102,
(a)re= lMAOMgl
2-5 00 Reserved

ModuleStatus
G -24 15 FEB 1995 l-E96-2008
I

o
 Visit Elsag Bailey on the World Wide Web at http://www.bailey.com
Ourworldwidestaffof professionals
is readyto meetyourneedsfor processautomation.
Forthe locationnearestyou,pleasecontactthe appropriate
regionaloffice.
AMERICAS ASIA/PAGIFIC EUROPE,AFRICA, MIDDLE
EAST GERMANY
29801EuclidAvenue 152BeachRoad ViaPuccini
2 Graefstrasse
97
Wickliffe,
OhioUSA44092 GatewayEast#20-04 16154Genoa,ltaly D-60487 Frankfurt
Main
Telephone1-216-585-8500 re189721
Singapo Telephone
39-10-6582-943 Germany
1-216-585-8756
Telefax Telephone
65-391-0800 Telefax
39-10-6582-941 Telephone49-69-799-0
Telefax
65-292-901
1 TeIefax49-69-799-2406

Fsrm l-EgG200BLitho in U.S.A.295

Copyrighl O 1995 by EFag Bailey Procsss Automation, As An UnpublishedWork ElsaqBailev
6.Rqgnred Trademark of Etsag Bailey ProcesSAutornation ProcesiAutomatio'n
il Tradp ' ,k of Elsag Bailey Process Automatbn